AspenIcarusV10 1 Ref

Aspen Icarus Reference Guide
Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE)

Version Number: V10.1
November 2017
Copyright (c) 2001-2017 by Aspen Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, AspenTech®,
Aspen Icarus and the aspen leaf are trademarks or registered trademarks of Aspen Technology, Inc., Bedford, MA.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
This document is intended as a guide to using AspenTech's software. This documentation contains AspenTech
proprietary and confidential information and may not be disclosed, used, or copied without the prior consent of
AspenTech or as set forth in the applicable license agreement. Users are solely responsible for the proper use of
the software and the application of the results obtained.
Although AspenTech has tested the software and reviewed the documentation, the sole warranty for the software
may be found in the applicable license agreement between AspenTech and the user. ASPENTECH MAKES NO
WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS DOCUMENTATION,
ITS QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Aspen Technology, Inc.

20 Crosby Drive
Bedford, MA 01730
USA
Phone: (1) (781) 221-6400
Toll Free: (888) 996-7100
URL: http://www.aspentech.com
Aspen Icarus Reference
Guide
Aspen Technology’s Icarus Office develops and provides knowledge-based

process evaluation technology, software, and services.
Icarus systems are based on a core design, estimating, scheduling, and
expert systems technology. They automatically develop preliminary design-
based economic results - early from minimal scope, and refined designs and
economics later in the project. Icarus systems are strategically located and
linked into the project knowledge stream of concurrent design 0 after process
simulation and before detailed design, CAD/CAE, detailed scheduling and
project control. This unique technology provides:
• Key answers quickly
• Dramatic reductions in evaluation time and resources
• The best, most economical process and plant design for funding/bidding
decisions and project evaluation.
Aspen economic evaluation systems (including Aspen Capital Cost Estimator,
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, and Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator) are in
daily use. These systems have become industry-standard tools and are used
by discerning project evaluators in owner companies and engineering design
and construction firms in more than 1,000 locations in over 30 countries.
Aspen Icarus Reference Guide iii

The Technology Behind
Icarus Systems
Icarus systems are based on mathematical modeling technology which has
been developed, refined and used since Icarus Corporation was founded in
1969. Aspen Technology purchased Icarus Corporation in 2000.
Stored in Icarus systems are design and cost models for:
• Over 250 kinds of liquid, gas and solids handling and processing
equipment
• More than 60 kinds of plant bulk items
• Approximately 70 kinds of site preparation work
• Nearly a dozen types of buildings.
Installation bulk models, used to develop installation quantities and field
manpower and costs to install equipment and plant bulks, round out the
“bank” of design and cost models. To support these design and cost models,
Icarus systems contain design procedures and costs data for hundreds of
types of materials of construction for general process equipment, vessel shells
and internals, tubing, castings, linings, packings, clad plates, piping, steel and
electrical bulks.
iv Aspen Icarus Reference Guide

Online Technical Support Center
AspenTech customers with a valid license and software maintenance
agreement can register to access the Online Technical Support Center at:
https://support.aspentech.com.
You use the Online Technical Support Center to:
• Access current product documentation.
• Search for technical tips, solutions, and frequently asked questions
(FAQs).
• Search for and download application examples.
• Search for and download service packs and product updates.
• Submit and track technical issues.
• Search for and review known limitations.
• Send suggestions.
Registered users can also subscribe to our Technical Support e-Bulletins.
These e-Bulletins proactively alert you to important technical support
information such as:
• Technical advisories.
• Product updates.
• Service Pack announcements.
• Product release announcements.
Aspen Icarus Reference Guide v

Phone and E-mail
Customer support is also available by phone, fax, and e-mail for customers
who have a current support contract for their product(s). Toll-free charges are
listed where available; otherwise local and international rates apply.
For the most up-to-date phone listings; see the Online Technical Support
Center at:
https://support.aspentech.com/
Support Centers Hours of Operation
North America 8:00 - 20:00 Eastern time
South America 9:00 - 17:00 Local time
Europe 8:30 - 18:00 Central Europe time
Asia and Pacific Region 9:00 - 17:30 Local time
vi Aspen Icarus Reference Guide

Contents
ASPEN ICARUS REFERENCE GUIDE ............................................................................................. III
THE TECHNOLOGY BEHIND ICARUS SYSTEMS .......................................................................................... IV
ONLINE TECHNICAL SUPPORT CENTER .................................................................................................... V
PHONE AND E-MAIL........................................................................................................................... VI
CONTENTS ................................................................................................................................VII
1 INTRODUCTION TO PROCESS EQUIPMENT ............................................................................ 1-1
INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 1-2
PROCESS EQUIPMENT CATEGORIES .................................................................................................... 1-3
LIST OF PROCESS EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................... 1-5
2 AGITATORS ........................................................................................................................... 2-1
AGITATORS (AG) ........................................................................................................................... 2-2
AGITATED TANKS (AT) .................................................................................................................. 2-10
BLENDERS (BL) ............................................................................................................................ 2-26
KNEADERS (K) ............................................................................................................................. 2-29
MIXERS (MX) ............................................................................................................................. 2-30
3 COMPRESSORS ..................................................................................................................... 3-1
AIR COMPRESSORS (AC) ................................................................................................................. 3-2
GAS COMPRESSORS (GC) ................................................................................................................ 3-5
FANS, BLOWERS (FN) ................................................................................................................... 3-11
4 DRIVERS ................................................................................................................................ 4-1
ELECTRICAL MOTORS (MOT) ........................................................................................................... 4-2
TURBINES (TUR) ........................................................................................................................... 4-8
5 HEAT TRANSFER .................................................................................................................... 5-1
HEAT EXCHANGERS (HE) ................................................................................................................. 5-2
REBOILERS (RB)........................................................................................................................... 5-29
FURNACES, PROCESS HEATERS (FU) ................................................................................................ 5-35
ICARUS SUPPORTED TEMA TYPES ................................................................................................... 5-40
6 PACKING, LININGS ................................................................................................................ 6-1
INTRODUCTION TO PACKING............................................................................................................. 6-2
INTRODUCTION TO LINING ............................................................................................................... 6-6
PACKING, LININGS (PAK, LIN) ......................................................................................................... 6-8
SUGGESTED LINING DIFFICULTY ADJUSTMENTS .................................................................................. 6-10
7 PUMPS .................................................................................................................................. 7-1
CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS (CP) .............................................................................................................. 7-2
GEAR PUMPS (GP)....................................................................................................................... 7-18
PISTON, OTHER POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMPS (P) ......................................................................... 7-20
Contents vii
PUMP EFFICIENCIES ...................................................................................................................... 7-26
8 TOWERS, COLUMNS ............................................................................................................. 8-1
INTRODUCTION TO TOWERS AND COLUMNS ........................................................................................ 8-2
DOUBLE DIAMETER TOWERS (DDT) .................................................................................................. 8-7
SINGLE DIAMETER TOWERS (TW) ................................................................................................... 8-13
MULTI-DIAMETER TOWERS (DTW)................................................................................................. 8-24
9 VACUUM SYSTEMS ............................................................................................................... 9-1
CONDENSERS (C) ........................................................................................................................... 9-2
EJECTORS (EJ) ............................................................................................................................... 9-3
VACUUM PUMPS (VP) .................................................................................................................... 9-7
10 VESSELS ............................................................................................................................ 10-1
HORIZONTAL TANKS (HT) .............................................................................................................. 10-2
VERTICAL TANKS (VT) ................................................................................................................. 10-13
11 CRUSHERS, MILLS AND STOCK TREATMENT ...................................................................... 11-1
CRUSHERS (CR) ........................................................................................................................... 11-2
FLAKERS (FL) .............................................................................................................................. 11-9
MILLS (M)................................................................................................................................ 11-10
STOCK TREATMENTS (ST) ............................................................................................................ 11-13
12 DRYING SYSTEMS .............................................................................................................. 12-1
CRYSTALLIZERS (CRY) ................................................................................................................... 12-2
EVAPORATORS (E)........................................................................................................................ 12-5
WIPED FILM EVAPORATORS (WFE) ................................................................................................. 12-9
AIR DRYERS (AD)....................................................................................................................... 12-10
DRYERS (D) .............................................................................................................................. 12-11
DRUM DRYERS (DD) .................................................................................................................. 12-13
ROTARY DRYERS (RD)................................................................................................................. 12-16
TRAY DRYING SYSTEMS (TDS) ...................................................................................................... 12-18
13 SOLIDS CONVEYING .......................................................................................................... 13-1
CONVEYORS (CO) ........................................................................................................................ 13-2
CRANES (CE)............................................................................................................................. 13-12
ELEVATORS, LIFTS (EL) ................................................................................................................ 13-13
FEEDERS (FE) ............................................................................................................................ 13-14
HOISTS (HO) ............................................................................................................................ 13-19
SCALES (S) ................................................................................................................................ 13-23
14 SEPARATION EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................... 14-26
CENTRIFUGES (CT) ..................................................................................................................... 14-27
DUST COLLECTORS (DC).............................................................................................................. 14-32
FILTERS (F) ............................................................................................................................... 14-38
SEPARATION EQUIPMENT (SE)...................................................................................................... 14-53
THICKENERS (T) ......................................................................................................................... 14-56
SCREENS (VS) ........................................................................................................................... 14-58
15 UTILITY SERVICE SYSTEMS............................................................................................... 15-63
COOLING TOWERS (CTW) ........................................................................................................... 15-64
STEAM BOILERS (STB) ................................................................................................................ 15-66
HEATING UNITS (HU) ................................................................................................................. 15-67
viii Contents
REFRIGERATION UNITS (RU) ........................................................................................................ 15-68
ELECTRICAL GENERATORS (EG)..................................................................................................... 15-69
WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS (WTS) ............................................................................................ 15-70
16 FLARE AND STACKS ......................................................................................................... 16-72
FLARES (FLR) ............................................................................................................................ 16-73
STACKS (STK) ........................................................................................................................... 16-81
17 INTRODUCTION TO PLANT BULKS ..................................................................................... 17-1
INTRODUCTION TO PLANT BULKS..................................................................................................... 17-2
LIST OF PLANT BULKS .................................................................................................................... 17-3
18 PIPING .............................................................................................................................. 18-1
PIPING PLANT BULKS .................................................................................................................... 18-3
PIPE DIAMETERS ........................................................................................................................ 18-43
STANDARD EQUATIONS FOR PIPE DIAMETER (OLD) .......................................................................... 18-45
STANDARD EQUATIONS FOR PIPE DIAMETER (NEW) ......................................................................... 18-47
UTILITY PIPING SERVICES ............................................................................................................. 18-52
UTILITY STATION DIAGRAM .......................................................................................................... 18-54
DEFAULT PIPING MATERIALS ........................................................................................................ 18-55
PIPE MATERIALS - FERROUS MATERIALS ......................................................................................... 18-56
PIPE MATERIALS - NON-FERROUS MATERIALS ................................................................................. 18-59
LINED STEEL PIPE ....................................................................................................................... 18-61
ICARUS’ PIPE FABRICATION, ERECTION AND TESTING PROCEDURES ...................................................... 18-68
VALVE AND FITTING OPTIONS FOR INSTALLATION BULK PIPING ........................................................... 18-70
VALVE TRIM SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................ 18-73
19 CIVIL ................................................................................................................................. 19-1
CIVIL PLANT BULKS....................................................................................................................... 19-2
FOUNDATION TYPES ..................................................................................................................... 19-9
TYPICAL STRUCTURE LIVE LOADS ................................................................................................... 19-14
SOIL TYPES................................................................................................................................ 19-15
SPECIFYING SEISMIC DATA ........................................................................................................... 19-16
SPECIFYING WIND LOADS ............................................................................................................ 19-18
HOW ICARUS CALCULATES WIND LOAD AND SEISMIC SHEAR .............................................................. 19-19
EXAMPLE OF EQUIPMENT FOUNDATION DESIGN .............................................................................. 19-20
EXAMPLE OF PILE FOUNDATION FOR AN EQUIPMENT ........................................................................ 19-21
20 STEEL ................................................................................................................................ 20-1
STEEL PLANT BULKS ...................................................................................................................... 20-2
21 INSTRUMENTATION .......................................................................................................... 21-1
INSTRUMENTATION PLANT BULKS.................................................................................................... 21-3
SENSOR LOOP DESCRIPTIONS........................................................................................................ 21-10
PANEL OPTION DESCRIPTIONS ...................................................................................................... 21-23
REMOTE CONTROL TYPE .............................................................................................................. 21-27
TRANSMITTER TYPE .................................................................................................................... 21-28
22 ELECTRICAL ....................................................................................................................... 22-1
ELECTRICAL PLANT BULKS .............................................................................................................. 22-2
GENERAL ELECTRICAL PLANT BULKS ................................................................................................. 22-3
SUBSTATION ELECTRICAL PLANT BULKS .......................................................................................... 22-26
SCHEMATIC OF TRANSMISSION LINE............................................................................................... 22-30
Contents ix
SUBSTATION SCHEMATICS ............................................................................................................ 22-31
ELECTRICAL & CONTROL HOOK-UPS FOR ELECTRIC MOTORS .............................................................. 22-32
POWER DISTRIBUTION NETWORK .................................................................................................. 22-34
WIRE SIZES ............................................................................................................................... 22-35
ELECTRICAL CLASS/DIVISION ........................................................................................................ 22-37
23 INSULATION AND FIREPROOFING ..................................................................................... 23-1
INSULATION PLANT BULKS ............................................................................................................. 23-2
INSULATION MATERIALS ................................................................................................................ 23-4
FIREPROOFING MATERIALS ............................................................................................................ 23-5
INSULATION SCHEDULES - SYSTEM DEFAULT TABLES ........................................................................... 23-6
CUSTOMIZING INSULATION SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................... 23-26
24 PAINT................................................................................................................................ 24-1
INTRODUCTION TO PAINT .............................................................................................................. 24-2
PAINT PLANT BULKS ..................................................................................................................... 24-3
HOW ICARUS SYSTEMS PAINT EQUIPMENT........................................................................................ 24-4
25 SITE DEVELOPMENT .......................................................................................................... 25-1
INTRODUCTION TO SITE DEVELOPMENT ............................................................................................ 25-2
DEMOLITION ............................................................................................................................... 25-4
DRAINAGE .................................................................................................................................. 25-5
EARTHWORK ............................................................................................................................... 25-7
FENCING .................................................................................................................................. 25-11
LANDSCAPING ........................................................................................................................... 25-13
ROADS - SLABS - PAVING ............................................................................................................. 25-14
PILING ..................................................................................................................................... 25-17
RAILROADS ............................................................................................................................... 25-19
26 BUILDINGS ........................................................................................................................ 26-1
INTRODUCTION TO BUILDINGS ........................................................................................................ 26-2
ADDING A BUILDING ..................................................................................................................... 26-3
BUILDING TYPES AND DEFAULTS...................................................................................................... 26-6
DEFAULT FLOOR HEIGHTS/LEVELS ................................................................................................... 26-7
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION RANGE ADJUSTMENT ................................................................................ 26-8
CALCULATING BUILDING COSTS AND LABOR ...................................................................................... 26-9
27 QUOTED EQUIPMENT AND LIBRARIES .............................................................................. 27-1
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 27-2
QUOTED EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................... 27-3
USER LIBRARIES ........................................................................................................................... 27-4
28 MATERIAL SELECTIONS ..................................................................................................... 28-1
ASME DESIGN CODE - PLATE MATERIALS ........................................................................................ 28-4
ASME DESIGN CODE - CLAD PLATE MATERIALS .............................................................................. 28-11
ASME DESIGN CODE - TUBE MATERIALS ....................................................................................... 28-13
BS DESIGN CODE - PLATE MATERIALS ............................................................................................ 28-18
BS DESIGN CODE - CLAD PLATE MATERIALS .................................................................................... 28-25
BS DESIGN CODE - TUBE MATERIALS ............................................................................................. 28-27
JIS DESIGN CODE - PLATE MATERIALS ............................................................................................ 28-31
JIS DESIGN CODE - TUBE MATERIALS ............................................................................................. 28-39
DIN DESIGN CODE - PLATE MATERIALS .......................................................................................... 28-43
DIN DESIGN CODE - CLAD PLATE MATERIALS .................................................................................. 28-50
x Contents
DIN DESIGN CODE - TUBE MATERIALS ........................................................................................... 28-51
EN 13445 DESIGN CODE - PLATE MATERIALS................................................................................. 28-56
EN 13445 DESIGN CODE - TUBE MATERIALS.................................................................................. 28-61
GB 150 DESIGN CODE - PLATE MATERIALS .................................................................................... 28-65
GB150 DESIGN CODE - TUBE MATERIALS ...................................................................................... 28-68
LINING MATERIALS ..................................................................................................................... 28-71
CASTING MATERIALS .................................................................................................................. 28-74
PACKING MATERIALS .................................................................................................................. 28-76
29 UNITS OF MEASURE .......................................................................................................... 29-1
INTRODUCTION TO UNITS OF MEASURE ............................................................................................ 29-2
UNITS OF MEASURE ..................................................................................................................... 29-4
PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS AND THEIR USE OF UNITS OF MEASURE.......................................................... 29-9
30 FIELD MANPOWER TITLES AND WAGE RATES ................................................................... 30-1
US COUNTRY BASE ...................................................................................................................... 30-2
UK COUNTRY BASE ...................................................................................................................... 30-4
JP COUNTRY BASE........................................................................................................................ 30-6
EU COUNTRY BASE ...................................................................................................................... 30-8
ME COUNTRY BASE.................................................................................................................... 30-10
31 ENGINEERING ................................................................................................................. 31-12
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING DISCIPLINES AND WAGE RATES .......................................... 31-13
ENGINEERING EXPENSES AND INDIRECTS ......................................................................................... 31-24
STANDARD ENGINEERING DRAWING TYPES ..................................................................................... 31-30
32 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT .......................................................................................... 32-32
INTRODUCTION TO CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT RENTAL ................................................................... 32-33
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................ 32-34
33 BASE INDICES .................................................................................................................... 33-1
BASE INDICES .............................................................................................................................. 33-2
34 CODE ACCOUNTS .............................................................................................................. 34-6
INTRODUCTION TO CODE ACCOUNTS ............................................................................................... 34-7
INDIRECT CODES AND DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................................................. 34-12
DIRECT CODES AND DESCRIPTIONS ................................................................................................ 34-14
35 DATABASE RELATIONS ...................................................................................................... 35-1
SEQUENCE NUMBERS OF ATTRIBUTES IN RELATIONS ........................................................................... 35-3
RELATIONSHIP OF DATABASE RELATIONS .......................................................................................... 35-9
DETAILS RELATION ................................................................................................................... 35-10
DESIGN RELATION .................................................................................................................... 35-13
REMARKS RELATION................................................................................................................. 35-14
PROJDATA RELATION ............................................................................................................... 35-15
NEWCOA RELATION ................................................................................................................. 35-16
EQRENT RELATION ................................................................................................................... 35-17
CRWSCH RELATION .................................................................................................................. 35-18
CSTCTRL RELATION................................................................................................................... 35-19
REPGRP RELATION ................................................................................................................... 35-20
CNTRCT RELATION.................................................................................................................... 35-21
COMPONENT RELATION........................................................................................................... 35-22
INDIRECTS RELATION ............................................................................................................... 35-23
Contents xi
K (CUSSPC)-TABLE RELATION ................................................................................................... 35-24
R-TABLE RELATION ................................................................................................................... 35-25
QSUM RELATIONS .................................................................................................................... 35-26
STORED REPORTS RELATION .................................................................................................... 35-30
STORED QUERIES RELATION..................................................................................................... 35-32
CERATE RELATION (F-TABLE) ..................................................................................................... 35-34
S-TABLE RELATION ..................................................................................................................... 35-35
T-TABLE RELATION ..................................................................................................................... 35-36
U-TABLE RELATION .................................................................................................................... 35-37
V-TABLE RELATION .................................................................................................................... 35-38
W-TABLE RELATION ................................................................................................................... 35-39
X-TABLE RELATION ..................................................................................................................... 35-40
Y-TABLE RELATION ..................................................................................................................... 35-41
Z-TABLE RELATION ..................................................................................................................... 35-42
UCLEQ RELATION ..................................................................................................................... 35-43
UOM RELATION ........................................................................................................................ 35-44
ENG RELATION ......................................................................................................................... 35-45
DWG RELATION ........................................................................................................................ 35-46
PROCUR RELATION ................................................................................................................... 35-47
MODUL RELATION.................................................................................................................... 35-48
ASPEN CAPITAL COST ESTIMATOR INDIRECT CODES AND DESCRIPTIONS ................................................ 35-49
36 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................................................. 36-51
37 ICARUS TECHNOLOGY ....................................................................................................... 37-1
INTRODUCTION TO AREAS .............................................................................................................. 37-2
PROJECT SCHEDULE .................................................................................................................... 37-10
EQUIPMENT FABRICATE/SHIP ITEMS .............................................................................................. 37-12
BARCHART REPORT FORMAT ........................................................................................................ 37-14
PROCESS CONTROL ..................................................................................................................... 37-16
NOTES FOR DEFINING THE STANDARD CONTROL CENTER ................................................................... 37-26
NOTES FOR DEFINING THE PLC CONTROL CENTER ............................................................................ 37-29
OVERVIEW OF SYSTEM INPUT SPECIFICATIONS FOR POWER DISTRIBUTION ............................................ 37-30
POWER DISTRIBUTION ................................................................................................................ 37-32
REDUNDANCY............................................................................................................................ 37-35
USAGE INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................................................. 37-38
REPORTING OF RESULTS .............................................................................................................. 37-40
PROJECT DEFINITION .................................................................................................................. 37-41
COST REPORTING: CURRENCY AND SYSTEM BASE INDICES .................................................................. 37-45
CONSTRUCTION OVERHEAD - PRIME CONTRACTOR BASIS .................................................................. 37-66
CONTRACTS: DESCRIPTION/SCOPE ................................................................................................ 37-68
38 RELEASE NOTES – WHAT’S NEW V7.0-V10 ........................................................................ 38-1
NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V10 (ALL) ........................................................................... 38-2
NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V9.1 (ALL) ........................................................................ 38-23
APEA NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V9 .......................................................................... 38-37
APEA NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V8.8.2 .................................................................... 38-39
APEA NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V8.8 ....................................................................... 38-41
APEA NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V8.2....................................................................... 38-71
APEA NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V7.3.2.................................................................... 38-91
xii Contents
APEA NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V7.3....................................................................... 38-96
APEA NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V7.2.1.................................................................. 38-105
APEA NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V7.2..................................................................... 38-106
ACCE NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V9 ........................................................................ 38-112
ACCE NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V8.8.2 .................................................................. 38-115
ACCE NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V8.8 ..................................................................... 38-123
ACCE NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V8.2..................................................................... 38-166
ACCE NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V8.0..................................................................... 38-177
ACCE NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS V7.2 ........................................................................ 38-222
AICE NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V9 ......................................................................... 38-238
AICE NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V8.8.2 ................................................................... 38-240
AICE NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V8.8 ...................................................................... 38-249
ICARUS EVALUATION ENGINE NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V9 ......................................... 38-313
ICARUS EVALUATION ENGINE NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V8.8.2 ................................... 38-317
ICARUS EVALUATION ENGINE NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V8.8 ...................................... 38-323
ICARUS EVALUATION NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V9..................................................... 38-344
ICARUS EVALUATION ENGINE NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V7.3.2 ................................... 38-353
ICARUS REPORTER NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V9 ........................................................ 38-377
ICARUS REPORTER NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V8.8.2 .................................................. 38-378
ICARUS REPORTER NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V8.8 ..................................................... 38-379
ICARUS REPORTER NEW FEATURES AND ENHANCEMENTS IN V7.3.2 .................................................. 38-389
INDEX .................................................................................................................................... 38-1
Contents xiii
1 Introduction to Process
Equipment
This chapter contains information on the following topics:

Introduction
Process Equipment Categories
List of Process Equipment
1 Introduction to Process Equipment 1-1

Introduction
Chapters 2 through 16 describe the process equipment available in Icarus systems.
The chapters are organized as the equipment appears in the systems.
• Liquid and gas equipment
• Solids handling equipment
• Off-site and packaged equipment
1-2 1 Introduction to Process Equipment

Process Equipment Categories
Icarus’ process equipment is divided into the following categories. Each category is
assigned an item symbol for identification purposes.
Item Item
Symbol Description Symbol Description
AC Air Compressor HE Heat Exchanger
AD Air Dryer HO Hoist
AG Agitator HT Horizontal Tank
AT Agitated Tanks HU Heating Unit
BL Blender K Kneader
C Condenser LIN Lining
CE Crane M Mill
CO Conveyor MOT Motor/Motor Reducer
CP Centrifugal Pump MX Mixer
CR Crusher P Pump
CRY Crystallizer PAK Packing
CT Centrifuge R Reactor
CTW Cooling Tower RB Reboiler
D Dryer RD Rotary Drum
DC Dust Collector RU Refrigeration Unit
DD Drum Dryer S Scale
DDT Double Diameter Tower SE Separation Equipment
E Evaporator ST Stock Treatment
EG Electric Generator STB Steam Boiler
EJ Ejector STK Stack
EL Elevator T Thickener
F Filter TDS Tray Drying System
FE Feeder TUR Turbine
FL Flaker TW Single Diameter Tower
FLR Flare VP Vacuum Pump
FN Fan VS Screen

Item Item
Symbol Description Symbol Description
FU Furnace VT Vertical Tank
GC Gas Compressor WFE Wiped Film Evaporator
GP Gear Pump WTS Water Treatment System

List of Process Equipment
The following is a list of process equipment by chapter and category. The process
equipment descriptions in chapters 2 through 16 include some of the entry fields for
defining process equipment. The descriptions include the minimum and maximum
values and the defaults. Default values appear between asterisks (*).
Chapter 2: Agitators
Agitators (AG)
Item Type Description
FIXED PROP Fixed propeller gear motor type agitator
PORT PROP Portable propeller agitator
DIRECT Portable direct drive agitator
GEAR DRIVE Portable gear drive agitator
MECH SEAL Agitator, mechanical seal, variable diameter
ANCHOR Fixed mount, gear drive, anchor, stuffing box
PULP STOCK Pulp stock agitator
ANCHOR REV Sanitary reversing anchor agitator
COUNT ROT Sanitary counter-rotating agitator
HIGH SHEAR Sanitary highshear homogenizing agitator
SAN FIXED Sanitary fixed propeller/turbine mixer
SAN PORT Sanitary port. propeller/turbine mixer
Agitated Tanks (AT)

MIXER Agitated tank - enclosed
REACTOR Agitated tank - enclosed, jacketed
OPEN TOP Agitated tank - open top
FLOAT CELL Floatation machine
COND CELL Floatation conditioning cell
MACH PULP On machine pulper
OFF MACH Off machine pulper

Blenders (BL)
BLENDER Rotary drum blender
ROTARY Rotary double-cone blender
KETTLE Sanitary kettle blender without agitator
ROTARYBOWL Sanitary rotary bowl blender
MSHELSTAG Sanitary multi-shell staggered blender
Kneaders (K)
STATIONARY Stationary upright double-arm kneader
TILTING Tilting double-arm kneader
VAC TILTING Vacuum tilting double-arm kneader
Mixers (MX)
EXTRUDER Cylinder type extruder with variable drive
MULLER EXT Muller type extruder mixer
PAN Pan mixer
PORT PROP Portable propeller mixer
FIXED PROP Fixed propeller gear motor type mixer
SIGMA Double-arm sigma blade mixer
SPIRAL RIB Spiral ribbon mixer
STATIC Static mixer
TWO ROLL Two-roll mixer
HIGH SPEED Sanitary high-speed Norman-type mixer
RIBBON Sanitary ribbon blender
PISTON HOM Sanitary piston-type homogenizer
SHEAR HOM Sanitary shear pump homogenizer

Chapter 3: Compressors
Air Compressors (AC)

CENTRIF M Centrifugal air compressor with motor
CENTRIF T Centrifugal air compressor with turbine
RECIP GAS Reciprocating air compressor with gas engine
RECIP MOTR Reciprocating air compressor with motor
SINGLE 1 S Single reciprocating air compressor - 1 stage
SINGLE 2 S Single reciprocating air compressor - 2 stage
Gas Compressors (GC)

CENTRIF Centrifugal compressor - horizontal
CENTRIF IG Centrifugal - integrated gear
RECIP GAS Reciprocating compressor - integral gas engine
RECIP MOTR Reciprocating compressor
Fans, Blowers (FN)

PROPELLER Propeller fan
VANEAXIAL Vaneaxial fan
CENTRIF Centrifugal fan
ROT BLOWER General purpose blower
CENT TURBO Heavy duty, low noise blower

Chapter 4: Drivers
Electrical Motors (MOT)

OPEN Open drip-proof induction motor
SYNCHRON Synchronous motor
ENCLOSED Totally enclosed induction motor
EXP PROOF Explosion-proof (Class I Division I, hazardous)
VARY SPEED TEFC motor with variable speed drive
Turbines (TUR)
GAS Gas turbine with combustion chamber
CONDENSING Steam turbine driver, condensing type
NON COND Steam turbine driver, non-condensing
DTURBOEX Turboexpander

Chapter 5: Heat Transfer
Heat Exchangers (HE)

TEMA EXCH Fixed tube, float. head, or u-tube exchanger
PRE ENGR Pre-engineered (standard) U-tube exchanger
AIR COOLER Air cooling, free standing or rack-mounted
PLAT FRAM Plate and frame heat exchanger
HEATER ELC Electric immersion tank heater
HEATER STM Bare pipe immersion coil-heating/cooling
JACKETED Double pipe heat exchanger
FIN TUBE Finned double pipe heat exchanger
CROSS BORE Cross-bore (all graphite) heat exchanger
ONE SCREW Thermascrew (Reitz) single screw conveyor
TWO SCREW Twin screw agitated/jacketed heat exchanger
SHELL TUBE Graphite tube/CS shell heat exchanger
SPIRAL PLT Spiral plate heat exchanger
SUC HEATER Tank suction
WASTE HEAT Waste heat boiler
CORRUGATED Sanitary corrugated double pipe exchanger
HOT WATER Water heater (shell+tube - hot water set)
MULTI P F Sanitary multi-zone plate+frame exchanger
STM HE MOD Sanitary direct steam heat module
FIXED T S Fixed tube sheet shell and tube exchanger
FLOAT HEAD Floating head shell and tube exchanger
U TUBE U-tube shell and tube exchanger

Reboilers (RB)
KETTLE Kettle type reboiler with floating head
U TUBE U-tube kettle type reboiler
THERMOSIPH Thermosiphon type reboiler
Furnaces, Project Heaters (FU)

HEATER A-frame type process furnace
BOX Box type process furnace
PYROLYSIS Pyrolysis unit
REFORMER Box type reformer, without catalyst
VERTICAL Vertical cylindrical process furnace
Chapter 6: Packing, Linings
Packing, Linings (PAK, LIN)

PACKING Packing, variety of vessel packings
ACID BRICK Acid brick lining
MONOLITHIC Castable, refractory or gunned mix
OTHER Lining - other than acid brick, monolithic

Chapter 7: Pumps
Centrifugal Pumps (CP)

CENTRIF Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump
API 610 API 610 pump (single or multi-stage)
API 610 IL API 610 in line pump
HIGH SPEED High speed vertical in-line API 610
ANSI Standard ANSI single stage pump
MAG DRIVE Standard ANSI magnetic drive pump
ANSI PLAST Plastic ANSI single stage pump
AXIAL FLOW Axial flow vertical pump
CANNED Canned motor pump
GEN SERV General service pump
IN LINE General service in line pump
TURBINE Vertical sump pump - turbine impeller
PULP STOCK Low consistency stock pump
SAN PUMP Sanitary centrifugal pump
FLUME PUMP Sanitary fluming pump with feeder hopper
Gear Pumps (GP)

GEAR Standard external gear rotary pump
CANNED RTR Canned rotary gear pump
MECH SEAL Mechanical seal gear pump

Piston, Other Positive Displacement Pumps (P)
SIMPLEX Reciprocating simplex pump - steam driver
DUPLEX Reciprocating duplex pump - steam driver
TRIPLEX Triplex (plunger) pump - motor driver
DIAPHRAGM Diaphragm pump - TFE type
SLURRY Slurry pump
ROTARY Rotary (sliding vanes) pump
RECIP MOTR Reciprocating positive displacement plunger pump
HD STOCK High density stock pump
ROTARYLOBE Sanitary rotary lobe pump
AIR DIAPH Sanitary air diaphragm pump
Chapter 8: Towers, Columns
Double Diameter Towers (DDT)

PACKED Packed double-diameter tower
TRAYED Trayed double-diameter tower
DTW TOWER Multiple diameter, trayed or packed tower
Single Diameter Towers (TW)

PACKED Packed tower
TRAYED Trayed tower
TRAY STACK Tray stack for tray tower
DC HE TW Direct contact heat exchanger tower
TS ADSORB Dual vessel temperature swing adsorber

Chapter 9: Vacuum Systems
Condensers (C)
BAROMETRIC Barometric condenser
Ejectors (EJ)
SINGLE STG One stage ejector non-condensing
TWO STAGE Two stage ejector with one condenser
2 STAGE Two stage ejector non-condensing
4 STAGE B Four stage ejector with two condensers
4 STAGE Four stage ejector with one condenser
5 STAGE B Five stage ejector with one condenser
Vacuum Pumps (VP)

WATER SEALS Water-sealed vacuum pump
MECHANICA Mechanical oil-sealed vacuum pump
MECH BOOST Mechanical booster vacuum pump
Chapter 10: Vessels
Horizontal Tanks (HT)

HORIZ DRUM Horizontal drum
JACKETED Jacketed horizontal drum
MULTI WALL Multi-wall horizontal drum
DHT DESALTER Crude oil desalter
SAN TANK Sanitary horizontal drum

Vertical Tanks (VT)
CYLINDER Vertical process vessel
JACKETED Jacketed vertical process vessel
MULTI WALL Multi-wall vertical process vessel
SPHERE Sphere - pressure or vacuum storage
SPHEROID Spheroid - pressure or vacuum storage
STORAGE Flat bottom storage tank, optional roof
CRYOGENIC Cryogenic storage tank
PLAST TANK Plastic storage tank (FRP or Haveg)
WOOD TANK Wooden storage tank
GAS HOLDER Low pressure gas storage vessel
CONE BTM Cone bottom storage bin
LIVE BTM Live bottom storage bin
CHEST REC Rectangular concrete tile chest
CHEST CYL Cylindrical concrete tile chest
CHEST MTL Metal tile chest
SAN TANK Sanitary vertical cylindrical vessel
LNG TANK Cryogenic double-walled full containment storage

tank

Chapter 11: Crushers, Mills and Stock Treatment
Crushers (CR)
CONES Cone crusher - secondary crushing
GYRATORY Gyratory - primary and secondary crushing
ECCENTRIC Overhead eccentric jaw crusher
JAW Swing jaw crusher
ROTARY Rotary crusher
S ROLL LT Single roll crusher - light duty
S ROLL MED Single roll crusher - medium duty
S ROLL HVY Single roll crusher - heavy duty
SAWTOOTH Sawtooth roller crusher
REV HAMR Reversible hammermill
HAMMER MED Non-reversible hammermill, medium hard material
SWING HAMR Non-reversible hammermill, hard material
BRADFORD Bradford (rotary) breaker
S IMPACT Single rotor impact breaker
PULVERIZER Pulverizer - crushing soft material
ROLL RING Ring granulator
Flakers (FL)
DRUM Rotary drum flaker

Mills (M)
ATTRITION Attrition mill
AUTOGENOUS Autogenous mill
BALL MILL Ball mill with initial ball charge
ROD MILL Rod mill with initial rod charge
MIKRO PULV Mikro-pulverizer
ROLLER Roller mill
ROD CHARGR Rod charger for rod mill
Stock Treatment (ST)

REFINER Double disk refiner
DEFLAKE DK Plate or tackle type deflaker
DEFLAKE CN Conical type deflaker
Chapter 12: Drying Systems
Crystallizers (CRY)
BATCH VAC Batch vacuum crystallizer
MECHANICAL Mechanical scraped-surface crystallizer
OSLO Oslo growth type crystallizer

Evaporators (E)
FALL FILM Agitated falling film evaporator
FORCED CIR Forced circulation evaporator
LONG TUBE Long tube rising film evaporator
LONG VERT Long tube vertical evaporator
STAND VERT Standard vertical tube evaporator
STAND HOR Standard horizontal tube evaporator
Wiped Film Evaporators (WFE)

THIN FILM Agitated thin film evaporator
WFE SYSTEM Agitated thin film evaporator - package system
Air Dryers (AD)

AIR DRYER Dual tower desiccant air dryer
Dryers (D)
ATMOS TRAY Atmospheric tray batch dryer
VAC TRAY Vacuum tray batch dryer
PAN Agitated pan batch dryer
SPRAY Continuous spray drying system

Drum Dryers (DD)
SINGLE ATM Single atmospheric drum dryer
DOUBLE ATM Double atmospheric drum dryer
SINGLE VAC Single vacuum rotary drum dryer
S COOKCOOL Rotary drum cooker-cooler
Rotary Dryers (RD)

DIRECT Direct rotary dryer
INDIRECT Indirect rotary dryer
JAC VACUUM Jacketed rotary vacuum dryer
VACUUM Conical rotary vacuum dryer
Tray Drying Systems (TDS)

ATM SYSTEM Atmospheric tray dryer
VACUUM Vacuum tray dryer
TURBO Turbo tray drying system
VAC SYSTEM Vacuum tray dryer with condenser

Chapter 13: Solids Conveying
Conveyors (CO)
OPEN BELT Belt conveyor - open
CLOSED BLT Belt conveyor - covered
APRON Apron conveyor - pans on endless chain
PNEUMATIC Pneumatic conveying system
ROLLER Roller conveyor (non-motorized)
SCREW Screw conveyor in a U-shaped trough
VIBRATING Vibrating conveyor with inclined trough
CENT BKT L Elevator-spaced bucket
CONT BKT L Elevator-continuous bucket
S BELT CONV Sanitary horizontal conveyor
S VERTICAL Sanitary vertical conveyor
S VIBRATRY Sanitary vibratory conveyor
S INCLINE Sanitary incline conveyor
Cranes (CE)
BRIDGE CRN Traveling bridge crane
HOIST Hoist with track beam
Elevators, Lifts (EL)

FREIGHT Freight elevator
PASSENGER Passenger elevator

Feeders (FE)
BELT Volumetric belt feeder
BIN ACTVTR Bin activator
ROTARY Rotary feeder
VIBRATING Vibrating feeder
WT LOSS Loss-in-weight feeder
DUMPER Sanitary dumper
SACK DUMP Sanitary bulk bag unloader
SAN SCREW Sanitary screw feeder
SAN BELT Sanitary weigh belt feeder
Hoists (HO)
HOIST 5-speed electric hoist - motorized trolley
1 SPEED 1-speed electric hoist - no trolley
5 SPEED 5-speed electric hoist - no trolley
HAND GT Hand hoist - manual pull chain trolley
HAND PT Hand hoist - manual trolley
HAND NT Hand hoist - no trolley

Scales (S)
BEAM SCALE Beam scale
BELT Conveyor belt scale
BENCH Bench scale - dial and beam
FULL FRAME Full floor scale - dial and beam
SEMI FRAME Semi frame floor scale - dial and beam
TANK SCALE Tank scale - weigh bridge and saddles
TRACK Track scale for rail cars
TRUCK Truck (lorry) scale
SAN FLOOR Sanitary floor scale - flush mounted
Chapter 14: Separation Equipment
Centrifuges (CT)
ATM SUSPEN Atmospheric suspended basket centrifuge
BATCH AUTO Auto batch filtering centrifuge
BATCH BOTM Batch bottom - suspended centrifuge
TOP UNLOAD Batch top unload centrifuge
BOT UNLOAD Batch bottom unload centrifuge
BATCH TOP Batch top-suspended centrifuge
DISK High-speed disk centrifuge
RECIP CONV Reciprocating conveyor centrifuge
SCROLL CON Scroll conveyor centrifuge
SOLID BOWL Solid bowl centrifuge
SCREEN BWL Screen bowl centrifuge
TUBULAR High-speed tubular centrifuge
VIBRATORY Vibrating screen centrifuge
INVERTING Inverting filter centrifuge

Dust Collectors (DC)
CENTRF PRE Centrifugal precipitator
CLOTH BAY Baghouse with motor shakers
CYCLONE Cyclone dust collector
MULT CYCLO Multiple cyclone dust collector
ELC H VOLT High voltage electrical precipitator
ELC L VOLT Low voltage electrical precipitator
VENTURI SC Venturi and cyclone scrubber
WASHERS Washer dust collector
PULSE SHKR Baghouse with injected pulsed air
Filters (F)
CARTRIDGE Cartridge filter (5 micron cotton)
LEAF DRY Pressure leaf-dry filter
LEAF WET Pressure leaf-wet filter
PLATE FRAM Plate and frame filter
ROTY DISK Rotary disk filter
ROTY DRUM Rotary drum filter
SEWAGE Sewage filter
SPARKLER Sparkler filter
TUBULAR Tubular fabric filter (bank of 3)
SCROLL Scroll discharge centrifugal filter
WHITEWATER White water filter - centrifugal screen
COMPRSDGAS Compressed gas filter
METAL TRAP Sanitary in-line metal trap
RECL REE Sanitary fluming reclaim reel
SAN AIR Culinary (sterile) air filter
SAN PIPE Sanitary pipe filter
SAN PRESS Sanitary filter press

SAN STEAM Culinary (sterile) steam filter
SAN STRAIN Sanitary pipe strainer
FILTER Sediment removal filter
Separation Equipment (SE)

WATER CYCL Water-only cyclone - mineral separation
OIL WATER Oil-water separator - API type
PULP STOCK Pulp stock centrifugal cleaner
Thickeners (T)
THICKENER Thickener/clarifier
Screens (VS)
RECTANGLE Multiple deck rectangular vibrating screen
HUMMER Hummer type screen for fine separation
CIRCULAR Multiple deck circular vibrating screen
PRESSURE Pressure screen
LD STOCK Low consistency stock pump
BAR Mechanical bar screen
Chapter 15: Utility Service Systems
Cooling Towers (CTW)

COOLING Cooling tower, less pumps, field assembly
COOLING WP Cooling tower, complete, field assembly
PACKAGED Packaged cooling tower, factory assembly

Steam Boilers (STB)
BOILER Packaged boiler unit
STM BOILER Field erected boiler unit
Heating Units (HU)

CYLINDER Process heater type dowtherm unit
Refrigeration Units (RU)

CENT COMPR Centrifugal compression refrigeration unit
MECHANICAL Mechanical compression refrigeration unit
Electrical Generators (EG)

PORTABLE Portable electrical generator - diesel
TURBO GEN Electrical generator - steam turbine drive
Water Treatment Systems (WTS)

DEMINERAL Two stage ion exchange water treatment
SOFTENING Hot lime, zeolite water treatment system
AERATOR Surface aerator

Chapter 16: Flares and Stacks
Flares (FLR)
DERRICK Derrick-supported flare stack
GUYED Guyed flare stack
SELF SUPP Self-supported flare stack
HORIZONTAL Horizontal ground flare
THRM OX LC Recuperative thermal oxidizer
STORAGE Vapor control flare for storage/loading
Stacks (STK)
STACK Stack without flare tip

2 Agitators

Agitators (AG)
Agitated Tanks (AT)
Description of Agitated Tanks
Impeller Types - General Range of Basic Data**
Impeller Type References
Impeller Materials
Blenders (BL)
Kneaders (K)
Mixers (MX)
2 Agitators - List of Process Equipment 2-1

Agitators (AG)
DIRECT
Portable, clamp-on, direct drive with explosion-proof motor. Typically used for rapid
disperation or fast reactions.
Material:
*CS*, SS304, SS316, MONEL, RUBCV
Driver Power:
0.25 - 3 HP [0.75 - 2.22 KW]
GEAR DRIVE
Portable, clamp-on, gear drive with explosion-proof motor. Typically used to keep solids in
suspension, medium viscosity blending and dissolving.
Material:
Driver Power:
0.25 - 5 HP; [0.75 - 3 KW]
2-2 2 Agitators Agitators (AG)

MECH SEAL
Fixed mount, top-entering, gear drive, mechanical seal, explosion-proof motor. Typically used
for low speed mixing on closed tanks. Shaft enters tank through a mechanical seal.
Material:
Impeller diameter:
Max: 10 FEET [3.00 M]
Driver power:
Min: 2.00 HP [1.5 KW];
Max: 200 HP [140 KW]
Impeller Speed:
Min: 1,200 RPM [1,000 RPM];
Max: 1,800 RPM [1,500 RPM]
Driver type:
*STD*- Standard motor
VFD- Variable frequency drive
Impeller type:
*MP3B5*
ANCHOR
Fixed mount, top-entering, gear drive, anchor, stuffing box, explosion-proof motor. Typically
used for low speed mixing on closed tanks.
Material:
Driver power:
0.75 - 5 HP [0.75 - 3 KW]
2 Agitators - Agitators (AG) 2-3

PORT PROP
Portable propeller mixer with motor to 7.5 HP [5.5 KW].

Material:
*CS*, SS
Driver power:
0.33 - 7.5 HP [0.75 - 5.5 KW]
FIXED PROP
Fixed propeller mixer with motor and gear drive to 100 HP [75 KW].
Includes motor, gear drive, shaft and impeller.
Material:
*CS*, SS
Driver power:
2 - 100 HP [1.5 - 75 KW]
PULP STOCK
Top entry (for Open or Closed tanks) and Side entry type. Includes motor driver, baseplate,
bearings, speed reducer, seals and a variety of shaft and impeller configurations.
Material:
*CS*, SS403, SS316, SS321, SS347, 304L, 316L, NI, INCNL, MONEL, HAST, TI
Driver type:
DRCT - Direct drive, no speed reduction
BELT- Belt driven speed reduction
VFD - Variable frequency drive
GEAR - Gear drive speed reduction
Liquid volume:
Enter Capacity or Impeller Diameter

Impeller diameter:
Enter Capacity or Impeller Diameter
Agitator orientation:
Default: *VTOP*
VTOP - Top entry agitator for open tanks
VTCL - Top entry agitator for closed tanks
SIDE - Side entry agitator
Driver speed:
Max: 3,600 RPM [3,000 RPM, metric units];
Default: *1,800* RPM: [*1,800* RPM, metric units]
Consistency - Air Dried%:
Max: 10.0; Default: *4.0*
Fluid density:
*62.4* PCF [*1000* KG/M3]
Seal type:
Default: *PACK*
PACK - Packing
MECH - Mechanical seal
ANCHOR REV
Sanitary reversing anchor agitator

With large paddle, reversing motor, and proximity sensors. Stainless steel material for
sanitation.
If you require a foundation for this item, it must be added.
Liquid volume:
MIN: 50 GALLONS [0.19 M3],
MAX: 1,000 GALLONS [3.78 M3]
Agitator diameter:
MIN: 32 INCHES [813 MM],
MAX: 72 INCHES [1,825 MM]
Agitator height:

COUNT ROT
Sanitary counter-rotating agitator

Two-piece agitator with center armed shaft and outer frame parallel wall rotating opposite
each other. Stainless steel material for sanitation.
Liquid volume:
MIN: 50 GALLONS [0.19 M3];
MAX: 1,000 GALLONS [3.78 M3].
Required to enter capacity.
Agitator diameter:
MIN: 32 INCHES [813
MM], MAX: 72 INCHES [1,825 MM]
Agitator height:

HIGH SHEAR
Sanitary highshear homogenizing agitator

Agitator’s perforated disk rotates to create shear for homogenizing immiscible liquids. Used in
the sanitary industry.
Liquid volume:
MAX: 1,500 GALLONS [5.67 M3].
Required: Enter either liquid volume or driver power.
Seal for shaft:
*NO*- Shaft seal not required
YES- Shaft seal is required
Driver power:
MIN: 0.33 HP [0.25 KW], 40 HP [30 KW].
Required: Enter either liquid volume or driver power.
Driver type:
*WXXDC*- Washdown, direct drive, CS
WVRDC - Washdown, VFD rated, direct drive, CS
WVCDC- Washdown, VFD controlled, direct drive,
CS
WXXDS - Washdown, direct drive, SS
WVRDS - Washdown, VFD rated, direct drive, SS
WVCDS - Washdown, VFD controlled, direct
drive, SS
TXXDC - TEFC, direct drive, CS
TVRDC - TEFC, VFD rated, direct drive, CS
TVCDC - TEFC, VFD controlled, direct drive, CS
Impeller type:
*INTGH*- Integral head
RSDIH- Rotator stator w/ slotted disintegr. head
RSSQR- Rotator stator w/ high shear screen
RSGEN- Rotator stator w/ GP disintegrating head

SAN FIXED
Sanitary fixed propeller/turbine mixer.

Stainless steel material for total washdown capability and no risk of open container
contamination from paint chips.
Driver power:
MIN: 0.5 HP [0.375 KW], 25 HP [18.5]
Driver type:
*WVRGP*- Washdown, VFD rated, gear drive
WVCGP - Washdown, VFD controlled, gear drive
WXXGP- Washdown, gear drive
Impeller type:
*PROP*- propeller type impeller (not available
above 3 HP [2.22 KW])
TURB- turbine type impeller
No. of impellers:
*1*, MIN: 1, MAX: 2
Angle riser:
*NO*- Angle riser not required
YES- Angle riser is required
Mounting type:
*UNSLF*- Unsealed flange mounting
SLF- Sealed flange mounting
FLWB - Flange with bridge

SAN PORT
Sanitary port. propeller/turbine mixer

Stainless steel material for total washdown capability and no risk of open container
contamination from paint chips. Quick-disconnect prop allows for easy inspection.
Driver type selections allow you to choose between gear or direct drives. Gear drives feature
removable shafts retained by a positive fit internal shaft coupling. Direct drives have fixed,
non-removable shafts with a sealed entry at the mounting flange face for superior sanitation.
Driver power:
MIN: 0.33 HP [0.25 KW],
MAX: 0.75 HP [0.55 KW]
Driver type:
*WVRDN*- Washdown, VFD rated, direct drive, NI plate
WVRGN- Washdown, VFD rated, gear drive, NI plate
WVCDN- Washdown, VFD contr, direct drive, NI plate
WVCGN- Washdown, VFD contr, gear drive, NI plate

Agitated Tanks (AT)
Small to large, pressure/vacuum, jacket, driver, motor-reducer, agitator and
supports.
For MIXER, REACTOR and OPEN TOP:
Liquid Volume: To secure desired vessel size, specify the diameter and height
directly. A value must be specified if diameter and height are not both specified.
Otherwise, calculated from diameter and height. If both vessel dimensions and
capacity are specified, the system-calculated capacity must agree with the specified
capacity to within +/- 10%.
Skirt or Leg Height: If the capacity is 10,000 GAL. [37 M3] or less, the vessel is
designed with 4 FEET [1.25 M] pipe legs. For a capacity greater than 10,000 GAL.
[37 M3], the vessel is designed with a skirt. The skirt height is calculated as 1.5 x
(vessel diameter) with minimum and maximum heights of 4 and 32 FEET [1.25 and
9.5 M] respectively. If the vessel is hung in an Open Steel Structure (BSTLOPN STL
ST) or Truckable (TRMD)/Bargeable (BRGM) module by specifying a valid structure
tag, skirt or leg is not estimated. Enter “0.0” if the vessel is hung in open structure
area (area type OPEN/EXOPEN).
Manhole Diameter: If no value is specified, a value is calculated as a function of
vessel diameter and height with a maximum manhole diameter of 48 INCHES [1200
MM].
Corrosion Allowance: For CS alloys, the default is 0.125 INCHES [3 MM]; 0.0 for
all other materials.
Weld Efficiency%: 5- - 100 (For ASME and JIS codes only).
Product Density: *62.4* PCF [*1,000*KG/M3]
Viscosity: *1.0* CPOISE [*1.0* MPA-S]
MIXER
Pressure/vacuum vessel, optional jacket

Includes top entering impeller and geared motor-reducer, tank designed for 15 PSIG [100
KPA].
Application:
Defines vessel function and related pipe/instrum. model.
CONT - Standard continuous process
BATCH- Batch process
2-10 2 Agitators Agitated Tanks (AT)

Shell Material:
For clad plate, specify the backing plate material. (Cladding is defined below.) Default:
*A285C*.
Liquid Volume:
Enter either Capacity or Diameter and Height.
Vessel Diameter:
Vessel Tangent to Tangent Height:
Design Gauge Pressure:
Default: *15* PSIG [*100* KPA]
If pressure and vacuum entered, design is for worst case. Default: Pressure.
Vacuum Design Gauge Pressure:
If pressure and vacuum entered, design is for worst case. Default: Pressure.
Design Temperature:
*250* DEG F [*120* DEG C]
Operating Temperature:
Default: Design temperature.
Jacket Design Gauge Pressure:
Pressure must be specified to obtain a jacket.
Default: No jacket.
Jacket Type:
Default: *FULL*
FULL - Full jacket
PIPE - Half-pipe jacket
Jacket Thickness:
Jacket pressure or thickness required to obtain jacket. Default: No jacket.
Jacket Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
A 515 - A 515
A 204C - C - .5Mo
A 387B - 1Cr - .5Mo
A 387D - 2.25Cr - 1Mo
SS304 - SS304
SS316 - SS316
SS321 - SS321
SS347 - SS347
SS410 - SS410
SS430 - SS430
304L - 304L
316L - 316L
NI - Nickel
INCNL - Inconel
MONEL - Monel
HAST - Hastelloy
Cladding Material:
Default: None.
2 Agitators - Agitated Tanks (AT) 2-11

Skirt or Leg Height:
Legs provided if capacity < 10,000 GAL [37 M3]. If the vessel is hung in an Open Steel
Structure (BSTLOPN STL ST) or Truckable (TRMD)/Bargeable (BRGM) module by specifying a
valid structure tag, skirt or leg is not estimated. Enter “0.0” if the vessel is hung in open
structure area (area type OPEN/EXOPEN).
Manhole Diameter:
If no value is specified, a value is calculated as a function of vessel diameter and height with a
maximum manhole diameter of 48 INCHES [1200 MM].
Base Material Thickness:
Base material thickness including corrosion allowance.
Corrosion Allowance:
For CS alloys, the default is 0.125 INCHES [3 MM]; 0.0 for all other materials.
Weld Efficiency%:
5 - 100 (For ASME and JIS codes only).
Cladding Thickness:
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] if cladding material is specified; otherwise 0.0.
Fluid Depth:
Maximum fluid depth: vessel height less 12 INCHES [300 MM]
Stress Relief:
CODE - Provide stress relief if code requires
YES - Provide stress relief
NO - No stress relief required
Fluid Density:
*62.4* PCF [*1,000* KG/M3]
Fluid Viscosity:
*1.0* CPOISE [*1.0* MPA-S]
Impeller Type:
See Impeller Types table later in this chapter.
Stiffening Ring Spacing:
Default stiffeners designed for vacuum only, enter 0.0 if not required.
Number of Body Flange Sets:
Number of sets (pairs) of body flanges of same diameter as vessel.
Diameter Option:
Defines desired diameter as ID or OD.
Default: See Area Design Basis.
OD- Outside Diameter
ID- Inside Diameter
OPEN TOP
Open with loose-fitting cover, optional jacket. Includes impeller and geared motor reducer,
supported by structural steel spanning tank top, tank without head.

Shell Material:
*A285C*.
Liquid Volume:
Enter either capacity or diameter and height.
Vessel Diameter:
Design Temperature:
Default: *68* DEG F [*20* DEG C]
Default: Design Temperature.
Jacket pressure or thickness required to obtain jacket. Default: no jacket.
Jacket Type:
Default: *FULL*
FULL - Full jacket
Jacket Thickness:
Jacket pressure or thickness required to obtain jacket. Default: no jacket.
Jacket Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
A 515- A 515
A 204C - C - .5Mo
A 387B - 1Cr - .5Mo
A 387D - 2.25Cr - 1Mo
SS304 - SS304
SS316 - SS316
SS321 - SS321
SS347 - SS347
SS410 - SS410
SS430 - SS430
304L - 304L
316L - 316L
NI - Nickel
INCNL - Inconel
MONEL - Monel
HAST – Hastelloy
SEE CARBON STEEL
- Select from types of Carbon Steel
SEE HEAT-TREATED STEEL
- Select from types of Heat Treated Steel
SEE LOW ALLOY STEEL
- Select from types of Low Alloy Steel
SEE HIGH ALLOY STEEL

- Select from types of High Alloy Steel
SEE NON-FERROUS

- Select from types of Non-Ferrous Steel
Driver Type:
Default: *STD*
STD- Standard Motor
Cladding Material:
Default *none*.
Structure (BSTLOPN STL ST) or Truckable (TRMD)/Bargeable (BRGM) module by
specifying a valid structure tag, skirt or leg is not estimated. Enter “0.0” if the vessel
is hung in open structure area (area type OPEN/EXOPEN).
Manhole Diameter:
Max: 48 INCHES [1200 MM].
Default 0.125 INCHES [3.0 MM] for CS; 0.0 for other material; double if jacketed.
Weld Efficiency:
ASME/JIS codes only, where allowed for thin wall vessels; Default: Area Basis 50 - 100.
Stress Relief:
Default: See Area Basis
YES- Provide stress relief
NO- No stress relief required
Cladding Thickness:
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] if cladding material is specified; otherwise: 0.0.
Fluid Depth:
Maximum fluid depth: vessel height less 12 INCHES [300 MM].
Fluid Density:
Default: *62.40* PCF.
Fluid Viscosity:
Default: *1.00* CPOISE.
Impeller Type:
See Impeller Types table.
Diameter Option:
Defines desired diameters as ID or OD;
OD - Outside diameter
ID - Inside diameter

REACTOR
Pressure/vacuum vessel, jacketed.

Includes jacket motor gear drive and shaft seal, agitator, shaft, thermometer well, blow-pipe,
insulation and safety valves. Rating of full vacuum and design pressure.
Application symbol:
Defines vessel function and related pipe/instrum. model.
<blank>- Standard continuous process
BATCH - Batch process
Shell Material:
*A285C*.
Liquid Volume:
Vessel Diameter:
If pressure and vacuum entered, design is for worst case.
Default: Pressure.
If pressure and vacuum entered,
design is for worst case. Default: Pressure.
Design Temperature:
Ferrous mat’l: 650 DEG F [340 DEG C];
Other mat’l: 250 DEG F [120 DEG C].
*90* PSIG [*620* KPA]
Jacket Type:
Default: *FULL*
FULL- Full jacket
PIPE- Half-pipe jacket
Jacket Material: Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
A 515 - A 515
A 204C - C - .5Mo
A 387B - 1Cr - .5Mo
A 387D - 2.25Cr - 1Mo
SS304 - SS304

SS316 - SS316
SS321 - SS321
SS347 - SS347
SS410 - SS410
SS430 - SS430
304L - 304L
316L - 316L
NI - Nickel
INCNL - Inconel
MONEL - Monel
HAST - Hastelloy
SEE CARBON STEEL
- Select from types of Carbon Steel
SEE HEAT-TREATED STEEL
- Select from types of Heat Treated Steel
SEE LOW ALLOY STEEL
- Select from types of Low Alloy Steel
SEE HIGH ALLOY STEEL
- Select from types of High Alloy Steel
SEE NON-FERROUS
- Select from types of Non-Ferrous Steel
Driver Type:
Default: *STD*
STD - Standard motor
Cladding Material:
Default: None.
valid structure tag, skirt or leg is not estimated. Enter “0.0” if the vessel is hung in open
structure area (area type OPEN/EXOPEN).
Manhole Diameter:
Weld Efficiency:
5 - 100 (For ASME and JIS codes only).
Stress Relief:
Cladding Thickness:
Fluid Depth:
Maximum fluid depth: vessel height less 12 INCHES [300 MM]

Fluid Density:
*62.4* PCF [*1,000* KG/M3]
Fluid Viscosity:
*1.0* CPOISE [*1.0* MPA-S]
Impeller Type:
See Impeller Types table later in this chapter.
Default stiffeners designed for vacuum only, type 0.0 if not required.
Diameter Option:
OD - Outside Diameter
ID - Inside Diameter
MACH PULP
Pulpers are used for pulping the waste generated by mill operation or in a paper recycling
process. Hence the two types: on-machine and off-machine pulpers. Both include a pulping
tank with support legs, nozzles (feed, drain and level control). The pulper itself consists of an
extraction plate, extraction chamber with flanged outlet, rotor blade, hub, shaft with gear or
V-belt drive, drive motor, motor coupling and an adapter plate. Multiple rotors can be
selected.
Application Symbol:
Default: *CONT*
BATCH- Batch pulper
CONT- Continuous pulper
Tank or Vat Material:
CS, SS304, *SS316*, SS321, SS347, 304L, 316L, NI, INCNL, MONEL, HAST, TI
Configuration:
Default: *RECT*
CYLIN- Cylindrical tank
RECT- Rectangular tank
Hydraulic Volume:
Enter pulping rate or hydraulic capacity.
Pulping Rate Air Dried:
Enter pulping rate or hydraulic capacity.
Tank Length or Diameter:
Enter length for rectangular tank or diameter for cylindrical tank.
Vessel Width:
Rectangular tanks only.
Number of Rotors or Drives:
1-2; Default: *1*.
Consistency Air Dried:
Max: 18; Default: *4.00*
Impeller Type:
Default: *STD*
STD - Standard rotor shaft length
EXTD - Extended rotor shaft length

Impeller Material:
CS, SS304, *SS316*, SS321, SS347, 304L,
316L, NI, INCNL, MONEL, HAST, TI
Driver Type:
Default: *GEAR*
BELT - Belt driven speed reduction
Design Temperature:
*68.0* DEG F [*20.0* DEG C]
Seal for Shaft:
Default: *PACK*
PACK - Packing
Driver Speed:
Max: 3,000 RPM [2,600 RPM];
Default: *1,500* RPM [*1,800 RPM]
Vessel Leg Height:
*10.0* FEET [*3.00* M]
Number of Manholes: Default: *1*.
Manhole Diameter:
Default: *18* INCHES [*450* MM]
OFF MACH
Application Symbol: Default: *BATCH*
BATCH - Batch pulper
CONT - Continuous pulper
Tank or Vat Material: CS, SS304, *SS316*, SS321, SS347, 304L, S16L, NI, INCNL, MONEL,
HAST, TI.
Configuration: Default: *CYLIN*
CYLIN - Cylindrical tank
RECT - Rectangular tank
Hydraulic Volume: Enter tank capacity or tank dimensions.
Tank Length or Diameter: Enter tank capacity or dimensions, diameter for cylindrical,
length for rectangular.
Vessel Height: Enter tank capacity or tank dimensions.
Vessel Width:
Enter tank capacity or dimensions, width is for rectangular tanks only.
Number of Rotors or Drives:
1-2, Default: *1*.
Max: 18; Default: *4.0*.
Impeller Type:
Default: *EXTD*.
STD - Standard rotor shaft length
EXTD - Extended rotor shaft length

Impeller Material:
CS, SS304, *SS316*, SS321, SS347, 304L, S16L, NI, INCNL, MONEL, HAST, TI
Driver Type: Default: *GEAR*
BELT - Belt driven speed reduction
Design Temperature:
Default: *68.0* DEG F [*20.0* DEG C].
Seal for Shaft:
Default: *PACK*.
PACK - Packing
For CS alloys, the default is 0.125 INCHES [3.0 MM]; 0.0 for all other materials.
Driver Speed:
Max: 3,000 RPM [2,600 RPM];
Default: *1,500 RPM [*1,800* RPM].
Vessel Leg Height:
Default *10* FEET [*3.0* M].
Number of Manholes:
Default: *1*.
Manhole Diameter:
If no values is specified, a value is calculated as a function of vessel diameter and height with
a maximum diameter of 48 INCHES [1,200 MM].
Default: *18* INCHES [*450* MM].
COND CELL
Conditioning cell for floatation machine.

Material:
Default: *CS*
Cell Volume:
10.0 - 1,500.0 CF [0.3 - 40 M3]
FLOAT CELL
Floatation machine, minerals separation, multi-cell.
Floatation machine for selectively separating minerals by agitation, air dissemination and
chemical adhesion. Includes one row of cells connected in series with one feed box, one
discharge box and one connection box for each group of four cells.
Material:

Default: *CS*
Volume Per Cell:
10 - 1,500 CF [0.3 - 40 M3]
Number of Cells: Refers to number per row connected in series.
Number of Cells Per Motor:
1 - 2; Default: *1*

Description of Agitated Tanks
1 Reynolds Number (RN), dimensionless: RN = (D2N) (FD/FV)
2 Froude Number (FN), dimensionless: FN = g/N2D
3 Power Number (PN), dimensionless: PN = (Pgc/FD) (N3D5)
4 Power Function (PF), dimensionless:
For RN > 300 and for unbaffled tanks,
log PF = log PN - (a-log RN) (log FN) /b
For RN < or = 300 for tanks with or without baffles,
FP = PN
5 Relationships between PF, PN, FN, RN for each impeller listed in the Impeller
Types table are contained in the AT agitated tank model. Power is derived from
PN.
6 General Nomenclature
Variable Description Value
a impeller contant See Impeller Types table
b impeller contant See Impeller Types table
D impeller diameter
FN Froude Number
g local acceleration due to gravity
gc gravitational constant See Chapter 29: Units of

Measure
N rotational speed of impeller
P power to shaft of impeller
PN Power number
RN Reynolds number
FD fluid density
FV fluid viscosity

Impeller Types - General Range of Basic Data**
Impeller Reynolds Number Baffles
Type Low -
No. Symbol Type D/d L/d E/d High No. B/D Ref
1 T6FB Turbine with six 3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3 1-106 4 0.17 1

flat blades.
B=0.25d; Blade
Height = 0.2d
2 T6FB2 Same as No.1 3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3 1-106 4 0.10 1
3 T6FB3 Same as No.1 3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3 1-106 4 0.04 1
4* T6FB4 Same as 3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3 1-106 0 - 1

No.1;a=1, b=40
5 T6CB Turbine with six 3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3 1.8-106 4 0.10 1

curved blades.
Blade sizes same
as No.1
6 T6AB Turbine with six 3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3 3-106 4 0.10 1

arrowhead
blades. Blade size
same as No.1
7 STDR Shrouded turbine 2.4 0.74 0.9 20,000- 0 - 2

with six blades. 90,000
20 blade
deflector ring.
8 STDR2 Similar to No.7, 3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3 2.5-106 0 - 1

but not identical.
9 ST Same as No.8, 3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3 10-106 4 0.10 1

but no deflector
ring.
10 AT8B45 Axial turbine with 3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3 1.8-106 4 0.10 1

eight blades at a
45 degree angle.
See No.11.
11 AT4B60 Axial turbine with 3 3 0.50 15- - - 3

four blades at a 60,000
60 degree angle.
B=0.25d.

Impeller Reynolds Number Baffles
Type Low -
No. Symbol Type D/d L/d E/d High No. B/D Ref
12 AT4B45 Axial turbine 5.2 5.2 0.87 600- 0 - 3

with four 40,000
blades at a 45
degree angle.
See No. 11
13 P4B Paddle with 3 3 0.50 200 - 0 - 3

four blades. 70,000
14 P2B3 Paddle with 3 2.7-3.9 0.70-1.3 2-106 4 0.10 1

two blades.
See No.13.
15 MP3B2 Marine 3.3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3 2.5-106 0 - 1

propeller with
three blades.
Pitch-2d;
a=1.7; b=18.
16 MP3B5 Same as 4.5 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3 2.5-106 0 - 1

No.15, but
pitch=1.05d;
a-2.3; b=18.
17* MP3B6 Same as 4.5 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3 2.5-106 0 - 1

No.15, but
pitch=1.04d;
a=0; b=18.
18 MP3B7 Same as 3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3 2.3-106 4 0.10 1

No.15, but
pitch=d
19* MP3B8 Same as 3 2.7-3.9 0.75-1.3 2.5-106 0 - 1

No.15, but
pitch=d;
a=2.1; b=18.
20 MP3B9 Same as 3.8 3.5 1.0 300- 0 - 4

No.15, but 500,000
pitch=d
21 HRA Helical ribbon. 1.05 1.5 - 0.7-23 0 - 5

Ribbon
width=d/8.5;h
elical
screw=D/30.
* Surface effects are important. Froude number is included for Reynolds Numbers
great than 300.
**System will permit extension beyond these ranges. Please check your results.

Impeller Materials
If Component Impeller Material
CLAD Match cladding
GLSCS SS316 blades/shaft
Other Match steel
Impeller Type References

Ref Reference for Impeller Type
1 Rushton, J. H., E. Costich, and H. J. Everett, Presented at Annual Meeting of

the American Institute of Chemical Engineers, Detroit, 1947.
2 Olney, R. B., and G. J. Carlson, Chemical Engineering Progress, 43, 473,

1947.
3 Hixson, S. Q., and S. J. Baum, Industrial and Engineering Chemistry, 34,

194, 1942.
4 Stoops, C. E., and C. L. Lovell, Industrial and Engineering Chemistry, 35,

845, 1943.
5 Gray, J. B., Chemical Engineering Progress, 59, 55, 1963.

Legend for Impellers
B - Baffle width
D - Tank diameter M otor/Reduc er
d - Impeller diameter
E - Impeller elevation
above tank bottom.
H - Tangent-to-tangent
height of tank.
12
L - Liquid level in tank. INC H
M in.
H L
E
d
B

Blenders (BL)
Rotary, batch, dry or semi-dry solids, motor and speed reducer.
BLENDER
Rotary drum.
For batch blending of dry or semi-dry solids. Includes motor and drive.
Material:
*CS*, SS
Blender Volume:
1 - 450 CF [0.03 - 12 M3]
Product Density:
MAX: 200 PCF [3,200 KG/M3];
Default: *50* PCF [*800* KG/M3]
Driver Speed:
Default: *1,800* RPM
ROTARY
Rotary double-cone.
For batch blending of dry solids. Includes motor and drive.
Material:
*CS*, SS316
Blender Volume:
5 - 350 CF [0.02 - 9 M3]
Driver Speed:
30 x Hz RPM
Material:
GSLCS
Blender Volume:
2 - 165 CF [0.06 - 2.5 M3]
Driver Speed:
30 x Hz RPM
2-26 2 Agitators Blenders (BL)

KETTLE
Sanitary kettle blender without agitator.

Used for “gentle” blending or folding of viscous mixtures. Add agitator separately.
Liquid Volume:
MIN: 50 GALLONS [0.19 M3], MAX: 600 GALLONS [0.19 M3]
*68 DEG F [20 DEG C]
Cover Type:
*LFTHG*- Lift-off or hinged cover
NONE - No cover required
Lift off cover to 80 GAL [0.3 M3], else hinged cover.
Jacket option:
*NO*- Jacket not required
YES- Jacket is required
Mounting type:
*RIM*- Rim mounting
LEGS- Leg type mounting
ROTARY-BOWL
Sanitary rotary bowl blender.
Consists of a stainless steel drum with motor drive mounted on a frame. Used for wet or dry
mixtures.
Material:
SS304, *SS316*
Liquid Volume:
MAX: 160 GALLONS [0.6 M3]
Mounting type:
*FIXD*- Fixed type blender
PORT- Portable type blender on casters
2 Agitators - Blenders (BL) 2-27

MSHELSTAG
Sanitary, multi-shell, staggered blender

Continuous, “zig-zag” type blender combines the action of a rotating, eccentric drum with
multiple recycling. Used for either uniform solids-solids blending (for example, blending
vitamins into cereals) or, if SOL-LIQ is selected in the Application field, solids-liquids
blending (for example, coating food particles with sweeteners). Solids are fed through an inlet
chute. If SOL-LIQ is selected, a dispersion head is included for liquid injection.
Although not included on the inputs, this piece of equipment either operates at 50%
(recommended) or at 100% of its capacity. When the capacity is specified, the system selects
a model that can provide the capacity while operating at 50% of the model's rated capacity.
However, if a diameter is specified, the system provides the rated capacity in the results.
Material: SS304, *SS316*
Flow rate:
MIN: 250.0 LB/H [115.0 KG/H],
MAX: 500,000.0 LB/H [227,000.0 KG/H]. Enter diameter or capacity. Capacity limits are at
default density and residence time.
Blender diameter:
MIN: 8 INCHES [200 MM], 40 INCHES [1,000 MM].
Blender type:
*SOL-SOL*- Solids-solids blending
SOL-LIQ- Solids-liquids blending
Driver type:
*WVRDC*- Washdown, VFD rated, direct drive, CS
WVCDC- Washdown, VFD controlled, direct drive, CS
Product residence time:
MIN: 1.00 MINUTES,
MAX: 3.00 MINUTES, Default: *1.50 MINUTES*
Product density:
MIN: 30.0 PCF [480.0 KG/M3],
MAX: 300.0 PCF [4,800.0 KG/M3}; Default: *40 PCF [640 KG/M3].*
2-28 2 Agitators Blenders (BL)

Kneaders (K)
Jacket, motor, motor reducer, cover, nozzles and agitator.
STATIONARY
Stationary, upright double-arm.

Material:
*CS*, SS304, SS316, MONEL
Liquid Volume:
100 - 750 GALLONS [0.4 to 2.8 M3]
TILTING
Tilting, double-arm.
Material:
Liquid Volume:
10 - 500 GALLONS [0.5 to 1.8 M3]
VAC TILTNG
Vacuum, tilting, double-arm.
Material:
Liquid Volume:
10 - 500 GALLONS [0.5 to 1.8 M3]
2 Agitators - Kneaders (K) 2-29

Mixers (MX)
Typically used for keeping solids in suspension, for dissolving solids and for mixing,
and/or reacting two or more feed streams.
EXTRUDER
Cylinder type extruder with variable drive.
Material:
*CS*
Driver power:
5 - 40 HP [4 - 30 KW]
Driver speed:
Max: 60 x HZ; Default: *30 x HZ*
MULLER EXT
Extruder muller type with open motor.

Material:
*CS*
Driver Power:
3 - 75 HP [2.22 - 55 KW]
Driver Speed:
PAN
Pan includes motor and drive.
Material:
*CS*
Mixer Volume:
4 - 40 CF [0.2 - 1.1 M3]
Driver speed:
2-30 2 Agitators Mixers (MX)

PORT PROP
Portable propeller mixer with motor to 7.5 HP [5.5 KW].

Includes motor driver.
Material:
*CS*, SS
Driver power:
0.33 - 7.5 HP [0.75 - 5.5 KW]
FIXED PROP
Fixed propeller mixer with motor and gear drive to 100 HP [75 KW].
This item is a top entering mixer including a gear drive, TEFC motor, shaft and impeller.
Material:
*CS*, SS
Driver power:
2 - 100 HP [1.5 - 75 KW]
SIGMA
Sigma double-arm non-vacuum mixer with motor and drive.

Material:
*CS*
2 Agitators - Mixers (MX) 2-31

Driver power:
3 - 100 HP [2.22 - 6.0 KW]
Mixer Volume:
1 - 70 CF [0.05 - 1.9 M3]
Driver speed:
SPIRAL RIB
Spiral ribbon includes motor and drive.

Material:
*CS*
Driver power:
5 - 50 HP [4 - 37.5 KW]
Mixer Volume:
10 - 395 CF [0.3 - 11 M3]
Driver speed:
STATIC
Static mixer used for instantaneous mixing of two fluid streams.

The unit includes the main pipe housing, the mixer elements and the flanges at both ends.
Pipe material:
A 53, A 106, *304P*, 304LP, 316P, 316LP, 316PS (SS316 sanitary pipe, MAX: 8 INCHES [200
MM]), 321P, NI, MONEL, INCNL, TI
Flow type:
*TRNS*, TURB, LAMN, PLUG (default for sanitary material)
Pipe diameter:
0.5 - 12.0 IN DIAM [12 - 300 MM DIAM]
Note: For non-sanitary material, use any pipe diameter in the above range; for sanitary
material, use only the following:
INCHES MM
0.50 15
0.75 20

1.00 25
1.50 40
2.00 50
2.50 65
3.00 80
4.00 100
Enter liquid flow rate or diameter and length.
Number of elements:
Default varies with flow type.
Element material:
CS, SS, NI, MONEL, TI, HAST, HASTC, PD; Default: *SS304*
Design temperature Inlet:
*68.0* DEG F [*20.0* DEG C]
Fluid density:
*62.4* PCF [*300* KG/M3]
Fluid viscosity:
*1.0* CPOISE [*1.0* MPA-S]
Design gauge pressure Inlet:
15.0 PSIG [100 KPA]
TWO ROLL
Two roll includes motor and drive.

Material:
*CS*
Driver power:
50 - 300 HP [37.5 - 224 KW]
Driver speed:

HIGH SPEED
Sanitary high-speed Norman-type mixer

For dissolving solids or semi-solids. Pulls product from the top center of the square tank
(shape ensures complete hydration) down to the high-speed impeller, which forces it out to
the side of the tank and back up to the surface.
Material:
SS304, *SS316*
Liquid Volume:
MAX: 300 GALLONS [1.13 M3]
Impeller type:
FRZN- Frozen food mixing
*NFRZ*- Non-frozen food mixing
Driver type:
*WXXBC*- Washdown, belt drive, CS
WVRBC- Washdown, VFD rated, belt drive, CS
WVCBC- Washdown, VFD controlled, belt drive, CS
RIBBON
Sanitary ribbon blender

Provides means for mixing, homogenizing, and drying a wide variety of products. Includes
base unit, direct drive motor, jacket, and stainless steel legs. Cover has four safety interlock
sensors, as well as a manual control ball valve for air supply. For sanitary reasons, material of
construction is stainless steel (carbon steel may be specified for legs).
Material:
SS304, *SS316*
Blender type:
*1SHAFT* - Single shaft blender

2SHAFT - Twin shaft blender (available only for capacities of 500 - 750 GALLONS [1.9 - 2.85
M3])
Liquid volume:
MAX: 3,800 GALLONS [14.3 M3]
Driver power per shaft:
MIN: 1 HP [0.75 KW],
MAX: 150 HP [112 KW]
For twin shaft type, this is the driver power for each shaft.
Driver type:
*WXXDC*- Washdown, direct drive, CS
WVCDC- Washdown, VFD controlled, direct drive, CS
WXXIC- Washdown, indirect drive, CS
WVCIC- Washdown, VFD control, indirect drive, CS
HXXCZ- Hydraulic drive with hydraulic system (available for twin shaft only)
No indirect drivers < 180 GALLONS [0.68 M3] or < 7.5 HP [5.5KW]
Cover type:
NONE - Cover not required
STD- Standard cover is required
LCHTS- Load chute for twin shaft blender only
Default: STD for twin shaft, NONE for single shaft
Jacket option:
NO- Jacket not required
*YES* - Jacket required
Not applicable for twin shaft blender type.
Leg material:
CS- Carbon steel
*SS*- Stainless steel
Not applicable for twin shaft blender type.
Seal for shaft:
*STD*- Standard shaft seal
MECO- Clean-In-Place steam proof seal
Applicable for twin shaft only
Operating temperature:
MIN: 68 DEG F [20 DEG C]
PISTON HOM
Sanitary piston-type homogenizer

Homogenizing valve employs cavitation, shear, and impingement forces to reduce
gobule/particle size as the product passes through it. Material is SS316 for sanitary reasons.

Liquid flow rate per hour:
MIN: 15 GPH [0.057 M3/H],
MAX: 9,900 GPH [37.4 M3/H] @ 2000 PSIG [13800 KPA], 2000 GPH (7.5 M3/H) @ 10, 000
PSIG [68,900 KPA]
Driver power:
MIN: 3 HP [2.22 KW],
MAX: 250 HP [180 KW]
Plunger diameter:
MIN: 0.625 INCHES [16 MM],
MAX: 3.5 INCHES [90 KW]. Maximum is influenced by capacity and gauge pressure (see table
below). Required: enter either plunger diameter or gauge pressure.
Plunger Diameter
@ 2000 PSIG @ 10000 PSIG
[13800 KPA] [68900 KPA]
Gauge Gauge
Capacity Pressure Pressure
GPH M3/H INCHES MM INCHES MM
15 .057 0.625 16 0.625 16
2000 7.5 ---- ---- 1.5 1 40 1
6000 22.7 3.5 2 90 2 ---- ----
9000 37.4 3.125 3 80 3 ---- ----
1 Maximum capacity at highest maximum operating pressure
2 Maximum diameter
3
Maximum capacity at lowest maximum operating pressure
Operating gauge pressure:

MIN: 2,000 PSIG [13,800 KPA], 10,000 PSIG [68,900 KPA]
Required: enter either plunger diameter or gauge pressure.
SHEAR HOM
Sanitary shear pump homogenizer.

For continuous, in-line and controlled batch course processing. Material of construction is
SS316 for sanitary reasons.
Liquid flow rate:
MIN: 10 GPM [0.64 L/S],

MAX: 575 GPM [36.0 L/S]
Cooler option:
*NONE*- No cooler is required
COOL- Cooler is required
Driver power:
MIN: 7.5 HP [4.0 KW],
MAX: 100 HP [75 KW]
Driver type:
TVRZC- TEFC, VFD rated, CS
*TVCZC*- TEFC, VFD controlled, CS
Number of stages:
*1*, MIN: 1, MAX: 3
The shear pump homogenizer is provided with 3 stages; however, if only 1 or 2 stages are
required, then the other stages are blocked.

3 Compressors

Fans, Blowers (FN)
3 Compressors - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 3-1

For plant or instrument air.
For all air compressors, capacity is at inlet temperature and pressure.
CENTRIF M
Packaged unit including motor driver.

Includes inlet air filter, inlet throttle valve, bypass throttle valve, bypass silencer,
compressor*, intercoolers**, aftercooler, automatic condensate removal system with
condensate bypass valve, lube oil system, continuous baseplate, spacer coupling and guard,
induction motor, vibration shutdown system, protection and regulation system, compressor
mechanical test run and check valve.
*The nominal 110 PSIG discharge machines have four stages of compression. The nominal
325 PSIG discharge machines have five stages of compression.
**The four stage machines have three intercoolers. The five stage machines have four
intercoolers.
Material:
*CS*, CI (Cast iron)
Actual gas flow rate:
1,000 - 25,000 CFM [1,700 - 42,400 M3/H]
Design gauge pressure Outlet:
15 - 325 PSIG [104 - 2,258 KPA]
-50 - 200 DEG F [-45 - 90 DEG C];
Default:
*68* DEG F [*20* DEG C]
CENTRIF T
Packaged unit including turbine driver.
3-2 3 Compressors Aspen Icarus Reference Guide

Includes the same items as CENTRIF M except the compressor driver is a steam turbine
instead of AC induction motor.
Material:
*CS*, CI (Cast iron)
1000 - 25000 CFM [1,700 - 42,400 M3/H]
15 - 325 PSIG [105 - 2,240 KPA]
-50 - 200 DEG F [-45 - 90 DEG C];
RECIP GAS
Integral gasoline engine driver, base plate, coupling, reciprocating gas compressor for
compression of large volumes of air to high pressure, less coolers, filters, condensate removal
(not a packaged unit).
Material: *CS*
Max: 6,000 PSIG [41,300 KPA]
Driver power:
100 - 10000 HP [75 - 7100 KW]
RECIP MOTR
Motor driven reciprocating gas compressor, with speed reducer, pulsation dampers for
compression of large volumes of air to high pressure, less coolers, filters, condensate removal
(not a packaged unit).
Material: *CS*
Design gauge Pressure Outlet:
Max: 6,000 PSIG [41,300 KPA]
Min: >0 PSIG
Driver Power:
Max: 15,000 HP [11,000 KW]

SINGLE 1 S
Single stage, non-lubricated, packaged reciprocating compressor for oil-free air; includes
motor and drive, coupling, base plate, cooler.
Material:
*CS*
75 - 1,100 CFM [130 - 1,850 M3/H]
90 - 150 PSIG [620 - 1,000 KPA]
-50 - 200 DEG F [-45 - 90 DEG C];
Default:*0* PSIG [*0* KPA]
SINGLE 2 S
Two stage, non-lubricated, packaged reciprocating air compressor for oil-free air; includes
motor and drive, coupling, base plate, and cooler.
Material:
*CS*
80 - 700 CFM [140 - 1,150 M3/H]
150 - 500 PSIG [1,040 - 3,400 KPA]
-50 - 200 DEC F [-45 - 90 DEG C];
Default: *68* DEG F [*20* KPA]

For process gas streams:
• Centrifugal (motor, turbine, gasoline engine, no driver)
• Reciprocating (motor, turbine, no driver) - with gear reducer, couplings, guards,
base plate, compressor unit, fittings, interconnecting piping, vendor-supplied
instruments, lube/seal system; less intercoolers and interstage knock-out drums.
For all gas compressors, capacity is at inlet temperature and pressure.
CENTRIF
Axial (inline) centrifugal gas compressor with driver (motor, turbine or gasoline driven
engine); excluding intercoolers and knock-out drums.
Casing material:
See “Casting Materials” in Chapter 28 for a complete list of materials. Default: *CS*.
Actual gas flow rate Inlet:
60 – 300,000 CFM [102 - 509,700 M3/H]
-200 - 200 DEG F [-125 - 90 DEG C];
Default - *68* DEG F [*20* DEG C]
Max: 5000 PSIG [34,470 KPA]
Design temperature Outlet:
Temperature at the outlet of the aftercooler.
Range: -200 to 200 DEG F [-125 to 90 DEG C].
Specified value applies only when aftercooler is included.
Default: Same as intercooler outlet temperature.
Molecular weight:
Default: *29*
Specific heat ratio:
Default: *1.4*
Compressibility factor Inlet:
Default: *1*
Compressibility factor Outlet:
Default: *1*
Intercooler required:
Specify whether to include intercooler cost and weight in the compressor cost estimate.
Default: *NO*

Intercooler type:
Intercooler type
Default: *WATER*
WATER: Water cooled intercooler; TEMA shell and tube exchanger with cooling water on shell
side.
AIR: Air cooled intercooler; DHE AIR COOLER type.
Aftercooler required:
Specify whether to include aftercooler cost and weight in the compressor cost estimate.
Default: *NO*
Aftercooler type:
Default: *WATER*
WATER: Water cooled aftercooler; TEMA shell and tube exchanger with cooling water on shell
side.
AIR: Air cooled aftercooler; DHE AIR COOLER type.
Inter/Aftercooler excess area:
Specify overdesign heat transfer area (percent).
Default: 0%
Maximum interstage temperature:
Specify the maximum temperature reached during compression before inter-cooling.
Max: 400 DEG F [200 DEG C]; Default: *350* DEG F [*175* DEG C]
Intercooler outlet Temperature:
Specify the interstage inlet temperature after cooling. -50 - 150 DEG F [-45 - 65 DEG C];
Interstage pressure drop:
Specify the pressure drop between the outlet of one stage and inlet of another due to the
intercooler and associated piping.
Default: 5 PSIG [35 KPAG]. Range: >= 0 PSIG [0 KPAG]
Driver type:
Default: *MOTOR*
NONE - No driver
GAS ENGINE - Gas engine driver
MOTOR - Motor driver
TURBINE - Turbine driver
Turbine gauge pressure:
Max: 1,600 PSIG [11,000 KPA];
Default:
*300* PSIG [*2050 KPA]
Gear reducer type:
Default: gear reducer included if driver type specified;
otherwise none.
YES - Gear reducer required
NO - No gear reducer
Lube oil system:
Default: *YES*
YES - Lube system required
NO - No lube oil system
Max: 1,600 PSIG [11,000 KPA];
Default:
*300* PSIG [*2050 KPA]
Gear reducer type:
Default: gear reducer included if driver type specified; otherwise none.
YES - Gear reducer required

NO - No gear reducer
Lube oil system:
Default: *YES*
YES - Lube system required
NO - No lube oil system
CENTRIF IG
Integral gear centrifugal gas compressor with driver (motor, turbine or gasoline engine),
scrolls (inter-stage piping), bull gear, coupling, guard; may include lube oil system,
intercoolers, aftercooler: excludes filter and silencers.
Casing material:
See “Casting Materials” in Chapter 28 for a complete list of materials. Default: *CS*.
500 - 70,000 CFM [850 - 118,900 M3/H]
-0.4 -100 PSIG [-2.7 - 689 KPA];
Default: *0.0* PSIG [*0.0* KPA]
32 - 200 DEG F [0 - 90 DEG C];
Max: 200 PSIG [1480 KPA]
Design temperature Outlet:
Min: >0 DEG F [-17.8 DEG C]
Max: 200 DEG F [90 DEG C]
Number of impellers:
2-4
Gas type option:
Sets default gas properties and makes adjustments for explosive gases.
Default: *AIR*.
AIR - Air
O2GAS - Oxygen
N2GAS - Nitrogen
ARGAS - Argon
FLGAS - Flammable gas
NONFL - Non-flammable gas
Molecular weight:
Default based on chosen gas type.
Default based on chosen gas type.
Default: *1.0*.
Compressibility factor Outlet:
Default: *1.0*.
Intercooler required:
Default: *YES*
YES - Cooler required
NO - None required

After cooler Required:
Default: *NO*.
YES - Cooler required
NO - None required
Max: 400 DEG F [200 DEG C].
Intercooler outlet temperature:
The interstage inlet temperature after intercooling.
- 5- - 150 DEG F [-45 - 65 DEG C];
Default: *90* DEG F [*30* DEG C].
Driver type:
Default: *MOTOR*
NONE - No driver
MOTOR- Motor driver
TURBINE- Turbine driver
Turbine gauge pressure:
Max: 1,600 PSIG [11,000 KPA];
Default: *300* PSIG [*2,050* KPA].
Lube oil system:
Default: *YES*
YES- Lube system required
NO- No lube oil system
Shop assembly option:
Partial assembly denotes multiple skids field connected wither intercoolers.
Default:
*FULL*.
FULL- Full shop assembly
PART- Part shop assembly
NONE - No shop assembly
RECIP MOTR
Motor or turbine-driven reciprocating process gas compressor. Includes motor, gear reducer
and pulsation dampers. Does not include intercoolers or aftercoolers.
Max: 200,000 CFM [339,000 M3/H]
Inlet Temperature:
-200 - 200 DEG F [-125 - 90 DEG C];
Max: 6,000 PSIG [41,000 KPA]

Molecular weight:
Default: *30*
Default: *1.22*
Max: 400 DEG F [200 DEG C];
Default: *270* DEG F
[135 DEG C].
Intercooler outlet temperature:
The interstage inlet temperature after intercooling. -50 - 150 DEG F [-45 - 65 DEG C];
Default:
*95* DEG F [*35* DEG C].
Driver Type:
Default: *MOTOR*
NONE - No driver
MOTOR- Motor driver
TURBINE- Turbine driver
Turbine Press. - Gauge:
Max: 1,600 PSIG [11,000 KPA];
Default: *300* PSIG [*2,050* KPA]
Gear Reducer Symbol:
Default: gear reducer included if driver type specified, otherwise none.
YES- Gear reducer required
NO- No gear reducer
Lube Oil System:
Default: *YES*
YES- Lube system required
NO- No lube oil system
RECIP GAS
Reciprocating gasoline engine drive includes integral gas engine driver, gear reducer,
baseplate, coupling, interstage pots and coolers.
Material:
*CS*
Max: 6,000 PSIG [4,100 KPA]
Driver power:
Min: 100 HP;

Max: 10,000 HP
Design temperature inlet:
Default: *68* DEC F [*20* DEG C]

Fans, Blowers (FN)
The distinction between the terms fan, blower and compressor is confusing;
however, a distinction may be made based upon the mechanical construction of the
machine and the pressure rise from inlet to outlet produced by the machine.
The Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Incorporated (AMCA) has made 12.25
INCHES of water pressure rise the cut-off between fans and blowers. Assuming an
inlet pressure of 0 PSIG, a 12.25 INCHES of water pressure rise corresponds to a
compression ratio of 1.3. Machinery used for compression ratios greater than 1.03
are called blowers or compressors. A pressure of 12.25 INCHES of water corresponds
to 0.44 PSIG. It is common practice, however, to call any centrifugal gas-moving
machine a fan if its construction is of sheet metal and the rotating element is wheel
rather than an impeller. Single-stage fans are made with pressure rises of 50
INCHES of water, and two-stage fans with pressure rises up to 100 INCHES of water.
Centrifugal blowers (or turbo-blowers) are primarily of cast iron construction and the
rotating element is an impeller. Centrifugal blowers normally produce pressure rises
in the range of 1 to 40 PSI. Centrifugal blowers may be single- (one impeller) or
multi-stage (two or more impellers). A gas-moving machine that produces a
pressure rise of more than 40 PSI is called a compressor.
Another difference between compressors and blowers is that the design pressure of a
blower is never more than 100 PSIG, while compressors are frequently designed for
more than 100 PSIG. It should be noted, however, that in the range of 1 to 40 PSI
pressure rise with a design pressure less than 100 PSIG, the terms are used
interchangeably.
With driver, listed in ascending capacity.
CENT TURBO
Single or multi-stage centrifugal turbo blower. Heavy duty, low noise blower. For moving up to
150,000 CFM of air or other gas through a system with a pressure drop from 1 to 10 PSI.
Typical applications include: supplying air to wastewater treatment plant aeration basins;
supplying air to blast furnaces, cupolas and converters; pneumatic conveying and supplying
combustion air. This item is a centrifugal turbo blower.
Material:
*CS*
100 - 40,000 CFM [170 - 67,950 M3/H]
0.5 - 30.0 PSIG [3.5 - 205 KPA]
Speed:
900 - 3,600 RPM

CENTRIF
Centrifugal fan.
Applications include: pulling a gas stream through a baghouse, supplying combustion air to
boilers and furnaces, boosting the pressure of the combustion gases from a boiler to push the
gasses up the boiler stack, pneumatic conveying, solids drying and classifying and ventilation.
Centrifugal fans are used to move gas through a low pressure drop system. The maximum
pressure rise across a centrifugal fan is about 2 PSI. The most typical materials of construction
are carbon steel sheet or plate casing, aluminum or carbon steel wheel (or impeller) and
carbon steel shaft. Fans may be fabricated from a variety of other materials such as stainless
steel and FRP. Centrifugal fans are classified according to the design of the wheel. The
different wheels are: radial blade type, forward-curved, backward-curved, backward-inclined
and airfoil. Centrifugal fans are manufactured in sizes that range from less than 100 CFM to
1,000,000 CFM.
Material:
*CS*
700 - 900,000 CFM [1,200 - 1,529,000 M3/H]
Note: Max flowrate for Standard duty = 150,000 CFM [254,850 M3/H]
Min flowrate for Heavy duty = 50,000 CFM [84,950 M3/H]
Fan outlet gauge pressure:
0 - 15 IN H2O [0 - 3,700 PA];
Default:
*6* IN H2O [*1,500* PA]
Application:
*STD - Max flowrate 150,000 CFM [254,850 M3/H]
HVY - Min flowrate 50,000 CFM [84,950 M3/H]
Note: If you leave the Application field blank:
• If the input flow rate is < 150,000 CFM, the system estimates a standard duty fan.
• If the input flow rate is => 150,000 CFM, the system estimates a heavy duty fan.
Driver type:
*MOTOR
VFD
TURBINE
NONE

Note: For MOTOR or VFD, electrical bulks for the motor hookup are generated. For TURBINE,
additional lines and loops for the turbine are generated. For NONE, Driver cost = 0 and no
electrical bulks for hookup are generated.
PROPELLER
Propeller fan.
Material:
*CS*
1,000 - 15,000 CFM [1,700 - 25,400 M3/H]
ROT BLOWER
Rotary blower.
This general purpose blower includes inlet and discharge silencers. Applications include:
pneumatic conveying, combustion air, exhausting vapors, instrument air and aeration of fluids.
A rotary blower is a positive displacement machine. That is, a constant volume of inlet air (or
other gas) is compressed regardless of any changes in the discharge pressure required by the
system. The rotary blower moves air in the following manner. Two figure eight shaped
impellers are mounted on parallel shafts inside a casing and rotate in opposite directions. As
each impeller passes the blower inlet a volume of gas is trapped, carried through to the blower
discharge and expelled against the discharge pressure. The casing of the rotary blower is cast
iron and the impellers are ductile iron. Rotary blowers are manufactured in standard sizes.
Material:
*CS*
100 - 4,000 CFM [170 - 6,700 M3/H]
2 - 15 PSIG [15 - 100 KPA];

Speed: 900 - 3,600 RPM
VANEAXIAL
Vaneaxial fan.
Material:
*CS*
2,300 - 45,000 CFM [3.950 - 76,450 M3/H]

4 Drivers

Power Level
Standard Motor Sizes
Synchronous Motor Speeds (RPM)
Turbines (TUR)
4 Drivers - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 4-1

Electrical motors serve as the primary means of driving the rotating equipment, for
example, pumps, compressors and fans.
Motors are built in a wide range of enclosure types, rotating speeds and
horsepowers. Selection of a particular motor warrants careful consideration of the
motor’s application. The considerations at the site (temperature, air-borne particles,
moisture, oil vapor, dust, abrasive or conducting particles, corrosive fumes or
explosive gases), and the specific use of a motor (for example, pump, compressor or
crusher driver) determine the hazards involved and the protective measures required
for safe operation. These considerations led to motor classification by enclosure
types.
OPEN
Standard open drip-proof motors with vent openings for indoor service:
Driver Power:
0.75 - 50,000 HP [0.75 - 37,000 KW]
Enclosure Type:
Default: *STD*
STD- Standard indoor service (open drip- proof with vent openings)
WPI- Normal outdoor service (weather-protected (rain, snow, air-borne particles)
WPII- Severe outdoor service (outside weather-protected service)
Driver Type:
Default: *STD*
STD- Standard motor
Speed:
Range: (15 x HZ) - (60 x HZ) RPM; Default: *
(30 x HZ)* RPM
SYNCHRON
4-2 4 Drivers Aspen Icarus Reference Guide

Synchronous motors with high efficiency at low speed for large HP [KW] requirements,
reciprocating compressors, pump compressors, pumps, crushers and mixers.
Driver Power:
200 - 20,000 HP [150 - 15,000 KW]
Enclosure Type:
Default: Water cooled if greater than 8,000 HP [6,000], else standard.
STD - Standard outdoor service
WPI - Normal outdoor service
WPII- Severe outdoor service
TEWAC- Water cooled
Speed:
Range: (3.7 x HZ) - (30 x HZ) RPM; Default: *(30 x HZ)* RPM
ENCLOSED
Totally-enclosed fan-cooled motors (TEFC)

The TEFC motor is especially suitable for outdoor use involving severe environmental
conditions. It can also withstand severe operating conditions (heat, lint and dirt) when used
indoors.
The TEFC is a totally enclosed machine constructed to prohibit the exchange of air between
the inside and outside of the casing. It is cooled by means of a fan integral with the machine
but external to the electric parts. TEFC motors are available from 1 - 500 HP. For severe
service conditions requiring up to 200 HP, TEFC motors are less costly and provide better
protection than weather-protected motors. Except for some specially designed enclosures, the
TEFC motor provides the best protection against moisture, corrosive vapors, dust and dirt.
Driver Power:
0.75 - 10,000 HP [0.75 - 7,100 KW]
Driver Type:
Default: Water cooled (TEWAC) if greater than 300 HP [224 KW], else fan cooled (TEFC).
STD- Standard motor
Speed:
Range: (20 x HZ) - (60 x HZ) RPM; Default: *(30 x HZ)* RPM.
EXP PROOF
Explosion-proof motors for Class I Division 1 hazardous use.

Explosion-proof motors are required when the location of the motor is classified according to
the NEC (National Electrical Code) as a Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Area. Class I represents

an area containing flammable gases or vapors and Division 1 specifies that hazardous
atmospheres can occur under normal operation conditions. The source of a hazardous
atmosphere is generally leakage from process equipment (e.g., pumps or compressors)
handling combustible volatile liquids or combustible gases.
An explosion-proof motor is basically a TEFC motor with heavier construction and more careful
machining. An explosion-proof motor has an enclosure designed to withstand the explosion of
a gas or vapor occurring within it and to prevent the ignition of the atmosphere surrounding
the machine by sparks, flashes or explosions from within. Explosion proof motors are available
up to 3,000 HP at 3,600 RPM.
Driver Power:
0.75 - 4,000 HP [0.75 - 2,800 KW]
Driver Type:
Default: *STD*
STD - Standard motor
Speed:
Range: (20 x HZ) - (30 x HZ) RPM; Default: *(30 x HZ)* RPM.
VARY SPEED
TEFC motor integral with variable speed drive. Includes handwheel control of sheaves with a
built-in indicator and TEFC motor as an integral part of the unit.
This component is used when there is an optimum speed at which to run a process machine
(e.g., pumps, fans, mixers, dryers and crushers).
A mechanical speed drive permits the adjustment of output speed by mechanical means
(manually adjusted). The motor speed (input speed) is geared down by a system of pulleys to
supply lower shaft speeds (output speed) to process equipment. Available output speeds
range from approximately 5 - 4,000 RPM. Pulley ratios of input to output speeds range from
2:1 through 10:1. Mechanical variable speed drives typically range from 0.5 to 50 HP. Speed
adjustment can be either manual, by turning a handle, or automatic. Although the mechanical
variable speed motor provides high efficiency over the entire speed range, it does not supply a
high degree of accuracy in speed regulation.
(Variable frequency driver available with OPEN, ENCLOSED, EXP PROOF.)
Low Speed:
(.09 x HZ) - (9.6 x HZ) RPM
High Speed:
(1.4 x HZ) - (58 x HZ) RPM
Driver Power:
0.5 - 400 HP [0.75 - 300 KW]

Power Level
Power is supplied to a motor at a voltage level as follows.
Voltage Level (3 Phase Service)
Motor Size US Country Base UK Country

Base
Less than 1 HP [0.75 KW] 110 V 240 V

1 HP to under MDP (*200* HP) Low Voltage Low Voltage
[.75 KW to under MDP (*150* KW)] *230/480* V *415* V
MDP (*200* HP) to 4,000 HP 4,160 V 3,300 V
[MDP (*150* KW) to 3,000 KW] 13,800 V 11,000 V
Greater than 4,000 HP [3,000 KW]
Frequency 60 Hertz 50 Hertz
10000 - 37000 KW: Increments of 1000 KW

Standard Motor Sizes
HP KW
0.125 0.75 118 475 3550

0.25 1.11 125 500 4000
0.333 1.50 132 530 4500
0.5 2.22 140 560 5000
0.75 3.0 150 560 5600
1 4.0 160 600 6300
1.5 5.5 170 630 7100
2 7.5 180 670 8000
3 11.0 190 710 9000
5 15.0 200 750 10000
7.5 18.5 212 800
10 22.0 224 900
15 30.0 236 1000
20 37.5 250 1120
25 45.0 265 1250
30 55.0 280 1400
40 75.0 300 1600
50 80 315 1800
60 80 335 2000
75 85 355 2240
100 95 375 2500
125 100 400 2500
150 106 425 2800
200 112 450 3150
200 - 500 HP: increments of 50
20000 - 40000 HP: increments of 2500
40000 - 50000 HP: increments of 5000

Synchronous Motor Speeds (RPM)
60 Hertz Service 50 Hertz Service
1800 1500
1200 1000
900 750
720 600
600 500
514 428
450 375
400 333
360 300
327 272
300 250
277 231
257 214
240 200
225 187

Turbines (TUR)
CONDENSING
Steam turbine driver includes condenser and accessories.

Material:
Default: *CS*
Power Output:
10 - 30,000 HP [8 - 22,300 KW]
Steam Gauge Pressure:
Max: 1,600 PSIG [11,000 KPA];
Speed:
Max: 3,600 RPM; Default: *3,600* RPM
NON COND
Non-condensing type steam turbine driver includes accessories.

Material:
Default: *CS*
Power Output:
10 - 30,000 HP [8 - 22,300 KW]
Max: 1,600 PSIG [11,000 KPA];
Speed:
Max: 3,600 RPM;

GAS
Gas turbine includes fuel gas combustion chamber and multi-stage turbine expander.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Power Output:
1,000 - 500,000 HP [750 - 375,000 KW]
TURBOEXP
Turbo expander includes only the expander (turbine) part and any spare cartridges. It does
not include compressor (booster) part. So, all input/output variables in the model refer to an
expansion process, and the resulting cost and weight data belong only to the expander part.
Note: The material used by the system is A3003 (aluminum).
Range: 5 - 200,000 CFM [8.5 - 339,800 m3/hr]
Required field
Range: (>0) - 3000 PSIG [(>0) - 20,684 kPag]
Required field
Range: -450 to 600 DEG F [-267 to 315 DEG C]
Range: 0 - 1 ,000 PSIG [0 - 6,894 kPag]
Required field
Power output:
Range: (>0) - 2,000 HP [(>0) - 1,500 kW]
Molecular weight:
Range: 1 - 500
Default: *29*
Default molecular weight is that of air
Range: 1.04 - 2
Default: *1.4*
Default specific heat ratio is that of air

Range: 0.05 - 3
Default: *1*
Default compressibility factor assumes an ideal gas
Isentropic efficiency:
Range: 30 - 100 PERCENT
Default: *85* PERCENT
Number of spare cartridges:
Min: 0
Default: *0*

5 Heat Transfer

Reboilers (RB)
Furnaces, Process Heaters (FU)
TEMA Exchanger Construction Nomenclature
Icarus Supported TEMA Types
5 Heat Transfer - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 5-1

Heat exchangers are used to transfer heat from one fluid to another fluid. In the
terminology of chemical engineering, a fluid may be either a gas or a liquid.
Therefore, when we say we are transferring heat from one fluid to another, we can
mean either a gas-gas exchanger, a liquid-liquid exchanger or a gas-liquid
exchanger.
Heat exchangers may be called by other names depending upon their specific
purpose. If a process fluid is being cooled with water, the term “cooler” is often used.
If a gaseous process fluid is cooled with water until it becomes a liquid, the term
“condenser” is used. If a liquid process fluid is heated (usually with steam) until it
turns into a gas, the term “vaporizer” is used. If a process fluid is heated (usually
with steam) the term “economizer” is used. If two process fluids exchange heat, the
term heat exchanger is used.
The most common type of heat exchanger, and therefore, the kind described here, is
the shell and tube heat exchanger. The shell and tube heat exchanger consists of a
bundle of tubes. Each tube is usually 3/4 or INCH in outside diameter and 20 to 40
FEET long. The tube bundle is held in a cylindrical shape by plates at either end
called “tube sheets.” The tube bundle is placed inside a cylindrical shell. The design
of the shell and tube heat exchanger is such that one fluid flows inside the tubes,
while the other fluid flows over the outside of the tubes. Heat is transferred through
the tube walls. The size of a heat exchanger is defined as the total outside surface
area of the tube bundle.
Wide variety of materials: floating head, fixed tube sheet, U-tube exchangers,
multiple shells/passes, TEMA Class B and other types.
Fixed tube, float. head, u-tube exchanger TEMA EXCH
This model merges the three TEMA heat exchangers,
which are retained for compatibility purposes (in
earlier system versions, changing the type of TEMA
heat exchanger required that one delete the entry
and specify another heat exchanger).
Heat transfer area: Enter either heat transfer area
or no. of shells, tubes/shell and tube data.
Number of shells: Enter either heat transfer area or
no. of shells, tubes/shell and tube data.
Front end head type: Use front head type, shell
type and rear head type to construct TEMA type
symbol. Front head type options:
A- Channel and removable cover
B- Bonnet integral cover
C- Tubesheet channel integral, remov. cover
N- Tubesheet channel integral, remov. cover
Shell TEMA symbol: Use front head type, shell type
and rear head type to construct TEMA type symbol.
Shell type options:
E- One pass shell
F- Two pass shell with longitudinal baffle
G- Split flow
H- Double split flow
5-2 5 Heat Transfer - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide

J- Divided flow
X- Cross flow
Rear end head type:
Use front head type, shell type and rear head type to
construct TEMA type symbol. Rear head type options:
L - Fixed tubesheet, channel removable cover
M - Fixed tubesheet, bonnet integral cover
N - Fixed tubesheet, channel integral, remov.
P - Outside packed floating head
S - Floating head with backing device
T- Pull through floating head
U - U-tube bundle
W - Externally sealed floating tubesheet
Heat exchanger design option:
*<BLANK>* - Standard exchanger design
TBWNB - Tube bundle design only, w/o system bulks
Design/cost option for TBWNB only
Tube material: Default: CS to 900 DEGF [482
DEGC], or else SS; see Proj Basis spec for
welded/smls.
CS - Carbon steel
A 179 - Seamless CS
A 214 - Welded carbon steel
A 209 - C - .5Mo
A213C - 1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si
A213F - 5Cr - .5Mo
304LW - 304L welded
316LW - 316L welded
321S - SS321 seamless
347S - SS347 seamless
C 20 - Carpenter 20
TI50A - Titanium
NI200 - Nickel
INCNL - Inconel
MONEL - Monel
Tube design gauge pressure:
*150 PSIG [1,000 KPA]*
Tube design temperature:
Default: 400 DEGF [200 DEGC] for copper alloys;
other mat’l: 650 DEGF [340 DEGC
Tube operating temperature:
Default: design temperature
Tube outside diameter:
*1.0 INCHES [25 MM]*, MIN: 0.25 INCHES [6 MM],
MAX: 6.0 INCHES [150 MM]
Shell material:
Default: A285C to 900 DEGF [482 DEGC], SS304 for
higher temperatures.
CS- Carbon steel
A 515- A 515

A204C- C - .5Mo
A387B- 1Cr - .5Mo
A387D- 2.25Cr - 1Mo
SS304- SS304
SS316- SS316
SS321- SS321
SS347- SS347
SS410- SS410
SS430- SS430
304L- 304L
316L- 316L
NI- Nickel
INCNL- Inconel
Shell design gauge pressure:
*150 PSIG [1,000 KPA]*
Shell design temperature:
Default: 400 DEGF [200 DEGC] for copper alloys; 650
DEGF [340 DEGC] other mat’l
Shell operating temperature:
Tube side pipe material:
A 53- A 53
A 106- A 106
A333C- 3.5Ni
A335C- A.25Cr - .5Mo - Si
304P- SS304
304LP- 304L
316P- SS316
316LP- 316L
321P- SS321
AL- Aluminum
NI- Nickel
MONEL- Monel
INCNL- Inconel
TI- Titanium
HAST- Hastelloy
Shell side pipe material:
See materials listed above for Tube side pipe material
Number of tubes per shell:
Enter either heat transfer area or no. of shells,
tubes/shell and tube data.
Tube length extended:
For U-tube: MIN: 8 FEET [2.5M], MAX: 120 FEET
[36M], else
MIN: 4 FEET [1.25M], MAX: 60 FEET [18M]
Tube gage:
MIN: 1 BWG,
MAX: 24 BWG
Enter tube gauge or thickness, not both, including
corrosion allowance.

Tube wall thickness:
MIN: 0.02 INCHES [0.6 MM],
MAX 0.34 INCHES [8.6 MM]
Enter tube gauge or thickness, not both, including
corrosion allowance.
Tube corrosion allowance:
Default: 0.0025 INCHES [0.06 MM] for CS, 0.0 for
other materials.
Tube seal type:
EXPND- Expanded tube-to-tubesheet joints
*SEALW*- Seal welded tube joints
STRNW- Strength welded tube joints
Tube pitch:
Default: 1.25 x tube outside diameter.
Tube pitch symbol:
DIAMOND- Diamond tube pitch
SQUARE- Square tube pitch
TRIANGULAR- Triangular tube pitch
Shell diameter:
Shell wall thickness:
Shell thickness including corrosion all.
Shell corrosion allowance:
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] for CS, 0.0 for other
materials.
Expansion joint:
*NO*- No expansion joint in shell
YES- Expansion joint required in shell
Tube sheet material:
CS- Carbon steel
A 515- A 515
A204C- C - .5Mo
A387B- 1Cr - .5Mo
A387D- 2.25Cr - 1Mo
SS304- SS304
SS316- SS316
SS321- SS321
SS347- SS347
SS410- SS410
SS430- SS430
304L- 304L
316L- 316L
NI- Nickel
INCNL- Inconel
Tube sheet corrosion allowance:
Default: lesser of 50 x tube corr. all., or 0.25 INCHES
[6 MM].
Channel material:
Default: tubesheet material

Cladding thickness:
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] if cladding material is
specified; otherwise: 0.0
Cladding material:
SS304 - SS304
SS316 - SS321
SS347 - SS347
SS410 - SS410
SS430 - SS430
304L - 304L
316L - 316L
NI200 - Ni 200
NI201 - Ni 201
MONEL - Monel
INCNL - Inconel
I800 - Ni-Fe-Cr
I825 - Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu
C 20 - Carpenter 20
TI - Titanium
HASTB - Hastelloy B
HASTC - Hastelloy C
Cladding location:
*SHELL* - Cladding on shell side only
TUBE - Cladding on tube side only
BOTH- Cladding on both shell and tube sides
Number of tube passes: * 1*
Number of shell passes: * 1*
Stress relief:
Default: see Area Design Basis.
Weld X-ray:
* 20*, MAX: 100
Vendor grade:
STAND - Standard vendor
*HIGH* - Specialty vendor for high grade or custom
work
Regulation type:
only for Japanese country base, which requires
government regulation and testing.
*NONE* - No special regulations
PV - Pressure vessel regulations (Japan)
HPG - High pressure gas regulations (Japan)

The following three options can be found under "Heat exchanger design option":
• Blank Standard exchanger design
• TBWNB Tube bundle design only, w/o system bulks
• STABN Stabbed-in tube bundle design only, w/o system bulks
The third option (STABN) is available in the 2004 release. The "Standard exchanger
design" option would cost a regular heat exchanger (shell, tubes, baffles, and so on)
and its bulks, while TBWNB would cost a "tube bundle design only without any
system bulks." TBWNB would not generate any shell and heads, but it will include
tubes, internals/baffles, and tube sheet.
The STABN option is a variation of TBWNB with the following major differences from
TBWNB.
In STABN:
• The tube bundle is horizontally installed (stabbed) into the vertical vessel (tower),
in a way that the tube-side flow inlet/outlet headers stay outside the vessel
beyond the tubesheet.
• The front head is also included to act as a cap of the inlet/outlet headers for the
tube-side flow.
STABN also costs a reboiler tub and support arrangement for the tube bundle. The
reboiler tub inside the vessel is designed to bear the liquid held-up in the tub around
the tube bundle to avoid the dry-out. The tub is designed to contain and bear the
hydrostatic load of the liquid held-up. The overall hydrostatic load on the tub bottom
is eventually supported by an I-beam design running in the middle of the vessel
along its diameter.
PRE ENGR
Pre-engineered (standard) U-tube exchanger for use as a sample cooler or other

miscellaneous application.
Heat transfer area:
Enter either heat transfer area or number of tubes and tube data. Range: 3.50 - 120.0 SF
[0.33 - 11.0 M2]
Tube material:
Default: *CA443*
A 179- Seamless CS 304LW- 304L welded
A 192- Seamless CS 316W- 316 welded
A 214- Welded carbon 316LW- 316L welded
steel CA122- Cu seamless
304S - 304 seamless CA706- Cu-Ni seamless
304LS- 304L seamless CA715- Cu-Ni seamless
316S - 316 seamless CA443- Admiralty brass
316LS- 316L seamless CA444- Admiralty brass
304W - 304 welded CA445- Admiralty brass

Range: 0.5 - 1.5 INCHES [12.0 - 38.0 MM]; Default: *0.75* INCHES [*19* MM]
Shell material:
Default: *A285C*
A285C - Carbon steel
A 516- A-516
SS304 - SS304
304L - 304L
SS316 - SS316
316L - 316L
Number of tubes:
Enter either heat transfer area or number of tubes and tube data.
Enter either heat transfer area or number of tubes and tube data. Range: 4.00 - 16.0 FEET
[1.20 - 4.80 M]
Tube gage:
Enter tube gauge or thickness, not both, including corrosion allowance. Range: 16 - 20 BWG
Enter tube gauge or thickness, not both, including corrosion allowance; Range: 0.035 - 0.065
INCHES [0.900 - 1.65 MM]
Default: *0.0025* INCHES [*0.06* MM] for CS, *0.0* for other materials
Tube pitch:
Default: *.25 x tube outside diameter*
Tube pitch symbol:
Default: *TRIANGULAR*
DIAMOND - Diamond tube pitch
SQUARE - Square tube pitch
TRIANGULAR - Triangular tube pitch
Shell diameter:
Range: 4.00 - 10.00 INCHES
[102.0 - 254.0 MM]
Shell thickness including corrosion allowance.
Default: *0.125* INCHES [*3* MM] for CS, *0.0* for other materials

AIR COOLER
Air cooler with variety of plenum chambers, louver arrangements, fin types (or bare tubes),
sizes, materials, freestanding or rack- mounted, multiple bays and multiple services within a
single bay.
Bare tube area 1st service:
Primary or single service. Total bare tube surface area for primary service. If the exchanger is
a single service, then this is the total bare tube surface area. The surface area is for all bays.
Tube material 1st service:
Primary or single service; Default: *A 179*. See Chapter 28 for tube materials.
Design gauge pressure 1st serv.:
Inlet temperature 1st service:
Tube outside diameter 1st serv.:
Default: *1.0* INCHES [*25.0* MM]
Tube wall thickness 1st service:
The wall thickness of tubing used for primary or single services, in inches or BWG rating. For
grooved tubes, specify the thickness under the groove. Thickness may be entered as a
positive signed value in decimal INCHES [MM] or as a negative signed integer value of BWG (-
1 to -24 BWG). If no value is specified, the system calculates a value based on tube material,
temperature and pressure of service, with minimum of 0.1080 INCHES [2.74 MM] per API 661
code.
Corrosion allowance 1st service:
Default: 0.0, except CS: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM]
Tube length:
Range: 4 - 60 FEET [1.25 - 18.0 M]
Bay width:
Max: 30.0 [9.0 M]
Height: This is the leg height for air coolers at grade. Default: *0.0* (rack mounted)
Number of walkways:
Default: *2*. Does not apply to Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator.
Plenum type symbol:
Default: *TRNS*
PANL- Panel shaped plenum
TRNS- Transition shaped
NONE - No plenum
Louver type symbol:

Default: *FACE*
FACE - Face louvers only
SIDE - Side louvers only
BOTH - Face + side louvers

NONE - No louvers
Fin type symbol:
Default: L-footed if temperature below
400 DEG F [205 DEG C], else embedded.
E - Embedded
L - L-foot tension wound
W - Wheel
X - Extracted
NONE - Bare tubes
Fin pitch:
Number of fin tubes per INCH [per 25 MM], ignore if bare tube specified. Range: 6.0 - 20.0;
Default: *10.0*
Fin material symbol:
Ignore this field for bare tubes. Default: *AL*.
AL - Aluminum fins
CS - Carbon steel fins
CU - Copper fins
SS - Stainless steel fins
Tube fin height:
Ignore this field for bare tubes;
Range: 0.250 - 2.50 INCHES [10.0 - 65.0 MM];
Default: *0.625* INCHES [*15* MM]
Number of tube rows:
Max: 13
Tube pitch:
Default: *2.25* INCHES [55.0 MM]
Number of fans per bay:
Range: 1-3
Driver type:
*MOTOR*- Standard motor driver
VFD- Variable frequency motor driver
NONE- No driver
PLATE FIN

Multi-stream, plate fin brazed aluminum heat exchanger. Up to 6 connected streams and up to
6 different layer types.
Material:
A3003 (Aluminum alloy)
Core length:
Typically the dimension along the flow direction. Max. 27 FEET [8.2 M]
Core width:
Typically the dimension orthogonal to the flow direction. Max. 5 FEET [1.5 M]
Core height:
Height of the plate-fin stack. Max. 10 FEET [3 M]
Number of streams:
Number of connected streams. Max. 6 streams.
Parting sheet thickness:
Thickness of the braze sheet between two fin layers. Default: 0.079 INCHES [2 MM]. Max. 0.1
INCHES [2.5 MM]
Cap sheet thickness:
Thickness of the cap sheets at the top and bottom of the stack. Default: 0.25 INCHES [6.35
MM]. Max. 1 INCHES [25 MM]
End bar width:
Width of end bars in each fin layer. Default: 1.5 INCHES [38 MM]. Max. 3 INCHES [75 MM]
Side bar width:
Width of side bars in each fin layer. Default: 1.5 INCHES [38 MM]. Max. 3 INCHES [75 MM]
Core weight:
Total weight of heat exchanger core.
Pipe material:
Material of the connecting piping lines. Default: AL
Layer data:
Click to open a sub-form to specify input for up to 6 different layer types
For each layer type:
Fin height:
Default: 0.382 INCHES [9.7 MM]. Range: 0.15 to 0.5 INCHES [4 to 12.7 MM]
Fin thickness:
Default: 0.007 INCHES [0.17 MM]. Range: 0.007 to 0.024 INCHES [0.17 to 0.6 MM]
Fin frequency:
Default: 22.4 FIN/INCH [882 FIN/M]. Range: 12.7 to 70 FIN/INCH [500 to 2755 FIN/M]
Stream data:
Click to open sub-form to specify input for up to 6 streams.
For each stream:

Layer type:
Layer type number used by this stream. Each stream can use a different layer type or multiple
streams can use the same layer type. Default: Layer type 1 (as defined in the layer data
form).
Number of layers:
Number of plate fin layers used by this stream. Default: system calculated.
Max. design temperature:
Default: 150 DEG F [65 DEG C]
Max. design pressure:
Default: 250 PSIG [2000 KPAG]
Flow direction:
Default: “L” – flow along the lengthwise direction. For cross-flow, some streams will have
lengthwise flow and others will have widthwise flow.
Total mass flow rate:
Vapor and liquid mass flow rate. Used for line sizing.

PLAT FRAM
Plate and frame heat exchanger.

Plate material:
Default: *SS304*
SS304 - SS304
SS316 - SS316
S04L - 304L
S16L - 316L
HAST - Hastelloy
Heat transfer area:
Range: 10 - 2,000 SF [1.0 - 185 M2]
Number of plates:
Max: 500
Design gauge pressure:
Max: 350 PSIG [2,410 KPA];
Design temperature:
HEATER ELC
Electric immersion tank heater.

Material:
Default: *CU*
CU - Copper
SS304 - SS304
Power output:
Range: 6 -200 KW

HEATER STM
Heating/cooling coil with spiral or serpentine coil of bare pipe, use as tank heater or column
tray cooler to keep the contents of a tank from solidifying or becoming too viscous to pump.
This item is a steam coil. A steam coil is a long length of pipe that covers the bottom of a tank
usually in a spiral or serpentine pattern. Steam is passed through the coil to heat the contents
of the tank. If cooling water was passed through the coil instead of steam, this item would be
a cooling coil.
This is normally a field fabricated item.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel 316LP- 316L
SS- Stainless steel 321P- SS321
A333C - 3.5 Ni CU- Copper
A335C- 1.25 Cr - .5 Mo– Si NI- Nickel
A335F- 5 Cr - .5 Mo MONEL- Monel
304LP- 304L INCNL- Inconel
316P- SS316
Heat transfer area:
Range: 1 - 25,000 SF [0.1 - 2,300 M2]
Pipe diameter:
Range: 1 - 6 IN DIAM [25 - 150 MM DIAM]
JACKETED
Bare-tube double-pipe heat exchanger.

Applicable to any heat transfer application where only a small amount of heat transfer surface
area is required.
This item is a hairpin heat exchanger. One or more finned or bare U-shaped tubes are
supported concentrically inside a U-shaped shell.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
SS - Stainless steel
Heat transfer area:
10 - 1,000 SF [1 - 90 M2]
Tube length:
Range: 8 - 25 FEET [2.5 - 7.5 M];
Default: *20* FEET [*6* M]

Default: *1*
1 - 1 tube per shell
7 - 7 tubes per shell
Max: 6,000 PSIG [40,000 KPA]
Design temperature:
Max: 1,200 DEG F [645 DEG C]
FIN TUBE
Longitudinal finned double-pipe heat exchanger. Hairpin sections are connected in series or
parallel.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
Heat transfer area:
Enter total heat transfer area (i.e., total extended surface or finned tubes).
Range:
70 - 10,000 SF [7 - 920 M2]
Tube length:
Range: 8 - 25 FEET [2.5 - 7.5 M];
Number of fins:
Range: 12 - 48; Default: *24*
Max: 6,000 PSIG [40,000 KPA]
Default: *1*
1 - 1 tube per shell
7 - 7 tubes per shell

CROSS BORE
All-graphite heat exchanger.

Material:
Default: *GRAPH*
Heat transfer area:
Range: 8 - 150 SF [1.0 - 13.5 M2]
ONE SCREW
Rietz type thermascrew conveyor with motor and drive.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
SS304 - SS304
Heat transfer area:
10 - 400 SF [1 - 37 M2]
TWO SCREW
Twin screw thermascrew conveyor with motor and drive.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
SS304 - SS304
Heat transfer area:
10 - 400 SF [1 - 37 M2]

SHELL TUBE
Graphite tube with carbon steel shell exchanger.

Heat transfer area:
Range: 80 - 9,730 SF [7.5 - 870 M2]
Tube length:
Range: 6 - 20 FEET [2 - 6 M]
SPIRAL PLT
Spiral plate heat exchanger.

Material:
Default:*SS304*
SS304 - SS304
SS316 - SS316
TI - Titanium
HAST - Hastelloy
Heat transfer area:
Range: 40 - 1,330 SF [4 - 123 M2]
Range: 150 - 300 PSIG [1,000 - 2,000 KPA]; Default: 150 PSIG [1,000 KPA]

SUC HEATER
Tank suction heater without tank.

Material:
Default: *CS*
Heat transfer area:
Range: 135 - 4,000 SF [13 - 370 M2]
WASTE HEAT
Waste heat boiler for generation of steam, hot gas or liquid heating medium.
A waste heat boiler is used to generate steam from heat that would otherwise be wasted. A
waste heat boiler is essentially the convection section only of a normal water-tube gas or
liquid boiler. The heating medium is a hot gas or liquid produced by exothermic chemical
reactions, regeneration of cracking catalyst, etc. The flow rate is used only to calculate piping
diameters for the P&ID.
A steam production rate can be entered in this field. If other flow types are needed, piping
diameters may need to be revised. The equipment cost is determined solely by the heat
transfer area.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Flow Rate:
Steam production rate (lb/hr or kg/hr)
Heat transfer area:
Range: 1,300 - 10,000 SF [125 - 925 M2]
CORRUGATED
(Close-up of piping)
Sanitary corrugated double pipe exchanger

Used to heat, cool, and pasteurize a variety of food products, like concentrates and dairy by-
products.
Tube material:
*SS316* - SS316
AL6XN - High Cr, Mo+Ni. Super-austentic stainless steel.
Double pipe size:
Inch-Pound Metric
Symbol Outer Inner Outer Inner
Tube Tube Tube Tube
3x20 3 Inches 2 Inches 75 MM 50 MM
4x25 4 Inches 2.5 Inches 100 MM 60 MM
4x30 4 Inches 3 Inches 100MM 75 MM
Total tube area:

Required: any two must be entered: total area, tube length/pass, number of passes.
Tube length per pass:
Any two must be entered: total area, tube length/pass, number of passes.
Number of tube passes:
Any two must be entered: total area, tube length/pass, number of passes.
Frame option:
*INCL* - Frame is included
HUNG - Frame is not included
HOT WATER

Water heater (shell+tube - hot water set)
Used mainly with a plate heat exchanger to provide hot water for heating various process
liquids. Steam is supplied to the shell side. Since this is a sanitary item, material of
construction is SS316.
Water flow rate:
MAX: 400 GPM [25 L/S]
Temperature rise:
MAX: 50 DEG F [27 DEG C]
SS skid water pipe required:
*NONE* - Not included
INCL - Included
Expansion tank:
INCL - Included
Condensate return pump:
INCL - Included
MULTI P F
Sanitary multi-zone plate+frame exchanger

Plates are of the vertical flow type. Alternate plates can be inverted to obtain desired flow
arrangement.
Frame consists of a head and end support connected by a top carrying bar and a bottom guide
bar to form a rigid unit supporting the plates.
Plate material:
*SS*- SS304
TI- Titanium
Frame material:
Default: SS for plate areas equal to or less than 1.87 SF [0.174 M2], else SSCLD.
SS - Stainless steel. Only available for plate areas equal to or less than 1.87 SF [0.174 M2]
SSCLD - SS clad carbon steel. Only available for plate areas greater than 1.87 SF [0.1737
M2].
CS - Carbon steel. Available for all plate areas.

Area per plate:
MIN: 0.27 SF [0.025 M2], MAX: 6.0 SF [0.557 M2]. The maximum number of plates will
depend upon the area per plate. There are seven standard plate areas:
Plate Area Max. No. of Plates

SF M2 In All Zones
0.27 0.025 152
0.92 0.085 200
1.81 0.168 150
1.87 0.173 200
3.75 0.348 420
5.6 0.520 600
6.0 0.557 550
Plate area Zone 1:

Required: enter the total area or no. of plates for zone 1, other zones optional.
Number of plates Zone 1:
Required: enter the total area or no. of plates for zone 1, other zones optional.
Plate area Zone 2:
Enter either total area or no. of plates for Zone 2.
Plate area Zone 3:
STM HE MOD
Sanitary direct steam heat module
A custom-built skid that injects steam directly into a product. The skid includes a steam filter
and separator, as well as instrumentation for temperature and flow control. Local temperature
and pressure indication is provided. The module also includes a regulator for the steam
pressure, automatic isolation values, and piping on the skid.
Material of construction is SS316.
Liquid flow rate:
Input required. GPM [L/S].
Temperature rise:
Input required. DEG F [DEG C].
Specific heat:
Default: *0.85* BTU/LB/F [*3.56* KJ/KG/K]

FIXED T S
Fixed tube sheet shell and tube exchangers.

TEMA type BEM fixed tube sheet
The fixed tube sheet shell and tube heat exchanger is applicable to trim cooler and other low
temperature applications, as well as services where the shell side fluid is non-fouling, such as
steam, dowtherm and gasses. A fixed tube sheet heat exchanger has its tube sheets fixed to
both ends of the shell, with or without a shell expansion joint.
Fixed tube sheet heat exchangers are more economical to fabricate than floating head heat
exchangers, but unless an expansion joint is placed in the shell the difference in temperature
between the shell and tubes must be small or the unequal thermal expansion of the shell and
tube bundle will cause unacceptable mechanical stresses. The fixed tube sheet design also
does not allow the tube bundle to be removed. Therefore, fixed tube sheet heat exchangers
are limited to clean services and services where the dirt and scale on the outside surface of
the tubes is easily cleaned by chemical means.
Heat transfer area:
Enter either heat transfer area or number of shells, tubes/shell and tube data.
Number of shells:
Tube material:
Default: A 214 to 900 DEG F [482 DEG C], 304S for higher temperatures. See Chapter 28 for
tube materials.
Default: 400 DEG F [200 DEG C] for copper alloys; other material: 640 DEG F [340 DEG C]
0.25 - 6.0 INCHES [6 - 150 MM];
Shell material:
Default: A285C to 900 DEG F [482 DEG C], SS304 for higher temperatures. See Chapter 28
for materials.
Shell design temperature: Default: 400 DEG F [200 DEG C] for copper alloys; *650* DEG F
[*340* DEG C] for other materials.
See Chapter 18 for pipe materials.

8 - 60 FEET [2.5 - 18 M];
Tube gauge:
Enter tube gauge or thickness, not both, including corrosion allowance; 1 - 24 BWG
Enter tube gauge or thickness, not both, including corrosion allowance; 0.02 - 0.34 INCHES
[0.6 - 8.6 MM]
Default: 0.0025 INCHES [0.06 MM] for CS, 0.0 for other materials
Tube seal type:
Default: *SEALW*
SEALW- Seal welded tube joints
Tube pitch:
1.25 x tube outside diameter
Tube pitch symbol:
Default: *TRIANGLE*
Shell diameter:
Max: 192.0 INCHES [4,875.0 MM]
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] for CS, 0.0 for other materials.
Expansion joint:
Default: *NO*
NO - No expansion joint in shell
YES - Expansion joint required in shell
See Chapter 28 for tube materials.
Default: lesser of 50 x tube corrosion allowance or 0.25 INCHES [6 MM].
Channel material:
Default: tubesheet material. See Chapter 28 for materials.
Cladding thickness:
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] if cladding material specified, otherwise 0.0.
Cladding material:
See Chapter 28 for material selection.
Cladding location:
Default: *SHELL*
SHELL- Cladding on shell side only
BOTH - Cladding on both shell and tube sides

Default: *1*
Number of shell passes:
Default: *1*
Stress relief:
Weld X-ray:
Max: 100; Default: *20*
TEMA type:
Default: BEM for 1 shell pass, BFM for 2 shell passes.
Vendor grade:
Default: *HIGH*
STAND - Standard vender
HIGH - Specialty vender - high grade/custom work
Regulation type:
Japanese country base only. Required government regulation and testing; Default: *NONE*
NONE - No special regulations
PV - Pressure vessel regulations
HPG - High pressure gas regulations
FLOAT HEAD
Floating head shell of 48 INCHES [1200 MM] maximum and exchanger.

Applicable to any heat exchange application, but not normally used for clean and/or low
temperature services where the fixed tube sheet exchanger is usually the more economic
choice.
The floating head heat exchanger accommodates the differential thermal expansion of tube
bundle and shell, and also allows the tube bundle to be completely removed from the shell.
The floating head heat exchanger is consequentially specified for services where the shell size
of the tube bundle is subject to fouling and services which involve large temperature
differentials between shell side and tube side fluids.
Heat transfer area:
Number of shells:
Enter either heat transfer area or number of shells, tube/shell and tube data.
Tube material:
Default: A 214 to 900 DEG F [482 DEG C], 304S for higher temperatures. See chapter 28 for
tube materials.
Default: 400 DEG F [200 DEG C] for copper alloys; 650 DEG F [340 DEG C] other material

0.25 - 6.0 INCHES [6 - 150 MM];
Shell material:
Default: A285C to 900 DEG F [482 DEG C], SS304 for higher temperatures
Default: 150 PSIG [1,000 KPA]
Default: 400 DEG F [200 DEG C] for cooper alloys; 650 DEG F [340 DEG C] for other material
See Pipe Materials in Chapter 18.
See Pipe Materials in Chapter 18.
8 - 60 FEET [2.5 - 18 M];
Tube gauge:
Enter tube gauge or thickness, not both, including corrosion allowance; 1-24 BWG
Enter tube gauge or thickness, not both, including corrosion allowance; 0.02 - 0.34 INCHES
[0.6 - 8.6 MM]
Default: 0.0025 INCHES [0.06 MM] for CS, 0.0 for other materials
Tube seal type:
Default: *SEALW*
SEALW- Seal welded tube joints
Tube pitch:
Default: 1.25 x tube outside diameter
Tube pitch symbol:
TRIANGLE- Triangular tube pitch
Shell diameter:
Max: 192.0 INCHES [4,875.0 MM]
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] for CS,
0.0 for other materials.
Expansion joint:
Default: *NO*

YES - Expansion required in shell
See Tube Materials in Chapter 28.
Default: Lesser of 50 x tube corrosion allowance, or 0.25 INCHES [6 MM].
Channel material:
Default: tubesheet material. See Tube Materials in Chapter 28.
Cladding thickness:
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] if cladding material specified, otherwise 0.0.
Cladding material:
See cladding material in Chapter 28.
Cladding location:
Default: *SHELL*
SHELL - Cladding on shell side only
Default: *2*
Default: *1*
Stress relief:
CODE - Provide stress relief if code required
Weld X-ray:
Max 100; Default: *20*
TEMA type:
Default: BES for 1 shell pass, BFS for 2 shell passes.
Vendor grade:
Default: *HIGH*
HIGH - Specialty vendor - high grade/custom work
Regulation type:
For Japanese country base only. Required government regulation and testing. Default:
*NONE*
U TUBE
U-tube shell and tube exchangers. TEMA type BEU U-Tube.

U-tube shell and tube exchangers are normally used in those services where the tubeside fluid
is non-fouling or where the deposits formed are easily removed with chemical cleaning. Since
the tube bundle is removable, the fluid in the shell side can be fouling. Since the U-tube
design eliminates one tube sheet, these exchangers are often used for high pressure
applications.
As the name indicates, all the tubes are U-shaped. Consequentially, there is only one tube
sheet. The tube side fluid enters one leg of the U-tube and exits from the other leg. The U-
tubes are free to expand inside the exchanger shell; thus, a large temperature differences
between shell side and tube side fluids can be handled. The U-tube bundle is usually
removable for inspection and cleaning. The inside of the U-tubes are hard to clean because of
the U-bend. U-tube heat exchangers are unsuitable for handling erosive fluids because the U-
bends rapidly wear out.
Heat transfer area:
Number of shells:
Tube material:
Default: *A 214* to 900 DEG F [482 DEG C], *304S* for higher temperatures. See Chapter 28
for tube data.
Default: *400* DEG F [*200* DEG C] for copper alloys; other material: *650* DEG F [*340*
DEG C]
Range: 0.25 - 6.0 INCHES [6 - 150 MM];
Shell material:
Default: *A285C* to 900 DEG F [482 DEG C], SS304 for higher temperatures
Default: *400* DEG F [*200* DEG C] for copper alloys; *650* DEG F [*340* DEG C] other
materials
Range: 8 - 12 FEET [2.5 - 36 M];
Default: *40*Feet [*12* M]
Tube gauge:
Enter tube gauge or thickness, not both, including corrosion allowance. Range: 1-24 BWG
Enter tube gauge or thickness, not both, including corrosion allowance. Range: 0.02 - 0.34
INCHES [0.6 - 8.6 MM]
Default: *0.0025* INCHES [*0.06* MM] for CS, *0.0* for other materials.
Tube seal type:
Default: *SEALW*

EXPD - Expanded tube-to tubesheet joints
SEALW - Seal welded tube joints
STRNW - Strength welded tube joints
Tube pitch:
Tube pitch symbol:
Shell diameter:
Max: 192 INCHES [4,875 MM]
Default: *0.125* INCHES [*3* MM] for
CS, *0.0* for other materials
Expansion joint:
Default: *NO*
YES - Expansion joint required in shell
Default: Lesser of 50 x tube corrosion allowance, or *0.25* INCHES [*6* MM]
Channel material:
See Chapter 28 for materials.
Cladding thickness:
Default: *0.125* INCHES [3 MM] if cladding material is specified; otherwise *0.0*
Cladding material:
See Chapter 28 for cladding materials.
Cladding location:
Default: *SHELL*
Default: *2*
Default: *1*
Stress relief:
Default: See Project Design Basis.
Weld X-ray:
TEMA type:
*BEU* for 1 shell pass, *BFU* for 2 shell passes.

Vendor grade:
Default: *HIGH*
HIGH - Specialty vendor - high grade/custom work
Regulation type:
Japanese country base only. Required government regulations and testing.
Default: *NONE*.

Reboilers (RB)
Reboilers are a special kind of shell and tube heat exchanger specifically designed to
add heat to distillation columns.
Liquid from the bottom of the distillation column flows over the reboiler tubes picking
up heat from a hot fluid, such as steam, which is flowing inside the reboiler tubes.
The liquid from the column is vaporized and returned to the column.
These are similar to the shell and tube heat exchanger, except that the shell is
considerably larger than the tube inside. The design provides space for vapor-liquid
disengagement so that only vapor is returned to the distillation column, not a vapor-
liquid mixture.
KETTLE
Kettle reboilers with floating head.

Kettle reboilers are used when the hydrostatic head above the reboiler varies, when the
operating pressure is in the high vacuum range or when there is a low percentage of volatiles
(e.g., less than 5%) in the feed to the reboiler.
A “Kettle” reboiler is a shell and tube heat exchanger used to supply heat to a distillation
column. Liquid from the bottom of the column enters the shell of the reboiler through nozzles
in the underside of the shell. In order for liquid entering the shell side of the reboiler to get out
it must overflow a weir at the end of the tube bundle. The weir is slightly taller than the tube
bundle, thus, the reboiler tubes are always submerged. Part of the tower bottoms entering the
reboiler vaporizes and returns to the tower via a vapor line called the riser. A large vapor
space is provided above the tube bundle to allow for vapor liquid disengagement. The portion
of entering liquid which is not vaporized overflows the weir and is removed from the reboiler.
The “Kettle” reboiler is a floating head type exchanger.
Heat transfer area:
Number of shells:
Tube material:
Default: *A 214* to 800 DEG F [482 DEG C], *304S* for higher temperatures
Design/cost option for TBWNB only
Default: *400* DEG F [*200 DEG C] for copper alloys; other material: *650* DEG F [*340*
DEG C]

Default: 0.25 - 6.0 INCHES [6 - 150 MM];
Shell material:
Default: *A285C* to 900 DEG F [482 DEG C], *SS304* for higher temperatures
Default: *400* DEG F [*200* DEG C] for copper alloys; *650* DEG F [*340* DEG C] other
material
Range: 8 - 60 FEET [2.5 - 18 M];
Tube gage:
Enter tube gauge or thickness, not both, including corrosion allowance. Range: 1 - 24 BWG
Enter tube gauge or thickness, not both, including corrosion allowance. Range: 0.02 - 0.34
INCHES [0.6 - 8.6 MM]
Default: *0.0025* INCHES [0.06 MM] for CS, *0.0* for other materials
Tube pitch:
Tube pitch symbol:
Shell diameter:
Max: 192 INCHES [4,875 MM];
Default: *1.5 x port diameter*
Shell wall thickness including corrosion allowance.
Default: *0.125* INCHES [*3* MM] for CS, *0.0* for other materials.
Default: Lessor of 50 x tube corrosion allowance or 0.25 INCHES [6 MM].
Cladding thickness:
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] if cladding material is specified, otherwise 0.0.
Cladding material: See Chapter 28 for cladding materials.
Cladding location:
Default: *SHELL*

Number of tube passes: Default: *2*
Duty:
Default: 0.004 x surface area (SF); 0.01262 x surface
area (M2).
Vaporization:
Specific gravity tower bottoms:
Default: *0.50*
Molecular weight bottoms:
Default: *100*
Heat of vaporization:
Default: *150* BTU/LB [*350* KJ/KG]
Stress relief:
Default: See Area Design Basis
TEMA type: Default: *BKT*
THERMOSIPH
Horizontal or vertical thermosiphon reboilers.
If a shell diameter is not specified, a value is calculated from the surface area, number of
shells, tubes per shell, tube diameter, tube pitch, etc.
The thermosiphon reboiler is the most common reboiler used. However, the thermosiphon
reboiler cannot be used when the hydrostatic head above the reboiler varies, when the
operating pressure is in the high vacuum range or when there is a low percentage of volatiles
(for example, less than 5%) in the feed to the reboiler.
The vertical thermosiphon reboiler, like the kettle reboiler, is a shell and tube heat exchanger
used to supply heat to a distillation column. The thermosiphon reboiler operates in the
following manner. Liquid from the bottom of the column or from a trapout tray flows into the
bottom of the reboiler through a pipe called the downcomer.
The column bottoms are partially vaporized in the reboiler and a two phase mixture is
returned to the column through a pipe called the riser. The difference in density between the
liquid in the downcomer and the two phase mixture in the reboiler and riser causes the tower
bottoms to flow through the reboiler by natural circulation. Usually about 25% of the tower
bottoms are vaporized in the thermosiphon reboiler. Thermosiphon reboilers are classified as
either vertical or horizontal according to their erected position.
The tower bottom enter the bottom head of the vertical thermosiphon, flow upward through
the tubes and leave the top head. The heating fluid, usually steam, passes through the shell
side. Vertical thermosiphons are available only as fixed tube-sheet exchangers.
The horizontal, fixed tube-sheet, thermosiphon reboiler differs from the vertical thermosiphon
in that it is erected horizontally and the bottoms liquid from the distillation column flows
through the shell side of the reboiler and the heat transfer fluid flows through the tubes.
Thermosiphon type: Default: *V-FXD*
H-FLOT - Horizontal: float head
H-FXD - Horizontal: fixed tubesheet
H-UTUB - Horizontal: u-tube
V-FXD - Vertical: fixed tubesheet

V-COLM a tube bundle that is designed to be installed into a Column (Tower) to hold catalyst
or function as an exchanger within a Column. There are no bulks associated with this item. If
fluid is desired on the shell side of the tubes, then the additional piping lines must be added
via Pipe-Item Details entries.
Heat transfer area: Enter either heat transfer area or number of shells, tubes/shell and tube
data.
Number of shells: Enter either heat transfer area or number of shells, tubes/shell and tube
data.
Tube material: See Chapter 28 for materials.
Default: *A 214* to 900 DEG F [*482* DEG C], *304S* for higher temperatures
STABN – Stabbed-in tube bundle design only, without system bulks
Design/cost option for tube-bundle, stab-in tube-bundle. For V-COLM type thermosiphon
reboiler TBWNB is the only option applicable.
Tube design temperature: Default: *400* DEG F [*200* DEG C] for copper alloys; other
material: *650* DEG F [*350* DEG C].
Tube operating temperature: Default: design temperature
Tube outside diameter: Range: 0.25 - 6.0 INCHES [6 - 150 MM];
Shell material: See Chapter 28 for materials.
Default: *A285C* to 900 DEG F [482 DEG C], *SS304* for higher temperature
Shell design gauge pressure: Default: *150* PSIG [*1,000* KPA]
Shell design temperature: Default: *400* DEG F [*200* DEG C] for copper alloys; *650*
DEG F [*340* DEG C] other material.
Shell operating temperature: Default: design temperature
Tube side pipe material: See Chapter 18 for pipe materials.
Shell side pipe material: See Chapter 18 for pipe materials.
Tube Wall Thickness: Enter tube gauge or thickness, not both, including corrosion
allowance. Range: 0.02 to 0.34 INCHES [0.6 - 8.6 MM].
Tube corrosion allowance: Default: 0.0025 INCHES [0.06 MM] for CS, 0.0 for other
materials.
Tube pitch: Default: *1.25 x tube outside diameter*
Tube pitch symbol: Default: *TRIANGULAR*
Shell diameter: Max: 192.0 INCHES [4,875.0 MM]
Shell wall thickness: Shell thickness including corrosion allowance.
Shell corrosion allowance: Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] for CS,
Tube sheet material: See Chapter 28 for tube materials.
Tube sheet corrosion allowance: Default: Lesser of 50 x tube corrosion allowance, or 0.25
INCHES [6 MM].
Cladding thickness: Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] if cladding material is specified,
otherwise 0.0
Cladding material: See Chapter 28 for materials.
Cladding location: Default: *SHELL*

Number of tube passes: Default: 1 pass per vertical fixed tube sheet type, 2 passes for all
others.
Duty: Default: 0.004 x surface area (SF); 0.01262 x surface area (M2).
Vaporization: Max: 100; Default: *20*
Specific gravity tower bottoms: Default: *0.50*
Molecular weight bottoms: Default: *100*
Heat of vaporization: Default: *150*
Stress relief: Default: See Area Design Basis
TEMA type: Default: Based on the specified thermosiphon design symbol.
U TUBE
The “u-tube” reboiler is identical to the “kettle” type reboiler except that there is a U-tube
bundle in it instead of a floating head type tube bundle. The term kettle reboiler is derived
from the fact that the bottoms from the distillation column accumulate in a pool (the height of
the weir) in the reboiler and boil like liquid in a kettle. Therefore, both the u-tube and kettle
reboilers are kettle type reboilers in the nomenclature of the chemical process industry.
Heat transfer area:
Number of shells:
Tube material:
Default: *A 214* to 900 DEG F [482 DEG C], *304S* for higher temperatures. See Chapter 28
for tube data.
Default: *400* DEG F [*200* DEG C] for copper alloys; other material: *650* DEG F [*340*
DEG C]
Range: 0.25 - 6.0 INCHES [6 - 150 MM];

Shell material:
Default: *A285C* to 900 DEG F [482 DEG C], SS304 for higher temperatures
Shell design gauge pressure: Default: *150* PSIG [*1,000* KPA]
Shell design temperature: Default: *400* DEG F [*200* DEG C] for copper alloys; *650*
DEG F [*340* DEG C] other material.
Shell operating temperature: Default: design temperature
Tube side pipe material: See Chapter 18 for pipe materials.
Shell side pipe material: See Chapter 18 for pipe materials.
Number of tubes per shell: Enter either heat transfer area or number of shells, tubes/shell
and tube data.
Tube length extended: Range: 8 - 120 FEET [2.5 - 36 M]; Default: *40* FEET [*12 M]
Tube gage: Enter tube gauge or thickness, not both,
including corrosion allowance. Range: 1 - 24 BWG
Tube wall thickness: Enter tube gauge or thickness, not both, including corrosion allowance.
Range: 0.02 - 0.34 INCHES [0.6 - 8.6 MM].
Tube corrosion allowance: Default: *0.0025* INCHES [*0.06* MM] for CS, *0.0* for other
materials.
Tube pitch: Default: *1.25 x tube outside diameter*
Tube pitch symbol: Default: *TRIANGULAR*
Shell diameter: Max: 192 INCHES [4,875 MM];
Default: *1.5 x port diameter*
Shell wall thickness: Shell thickness including corrosion allowance.
Shell corrosion allowance: Default: *0.125* INCHES [*3* MM] for CS, *0.0* for other
materials.
Tube sheet corrosion allowance: See Chapter 28 for materials.
Default: Lesser of 50 x tube corrosion allowance, or 0.25 INCHES [6 MM].
Cladding thickness: See Chapter 28 for materials.
Default: *0.125* INCHES [*3* MM] if cladding material is specified; otherwise: *0.0*
Cladding location: Default: *SHELL*
Number of tube passes: *2*
Duty: Default: 0.004 x surface area (SF)
[0.01262 x surface are (M2)]
Vaporization: Max: 100; Default: *90*
Specific gravity tower bottoms: *0.5*
Molecular weight bottoms: *100*
Heat of vaporization: *150* BTU/LB [*350* KJ/KG]
Stress relief: Default: See Area Design Basis
TEMA type: Default: *BKU*

Furnaces, Process Heaters (FU)
Furnaces are commonly used to heat a process fluid to a high temperature (600 -
1200 DEG F). Furnaces are also called fired heaters or direct fired heaters because
the source of heat is oil or gas fueled burners.
Furnaces are usually cylindrical (vertical heater) or rectangular (box heater) in
shape. The burners may be located in the sides or floor of the furnace. The walls of
the furnace are refractory (an insulating heat resistant material) lined. The furnace
will have one or more smoke stacks. The process fluid being heated flows through
horizontal tubes in a box furnace or vertical tubes in a box furnace or vertical tubes
in a vertical furnace. The amount of heat absorbed by the process fluid defines the
size of the furnace. Use absorbed duty for calculations.
BOX
Gas or oil fired for preheating, cracking; bridge walls separate radiant and convection
sections; horizontal burners
Box furnaces are the choice when a large amount of heat must be transferred to a process
stream. Some specific applications are:
• Pre-heating crude before it goes to the atmospheric or vacuum
• topping units
• Heating for catalytic cracking
• Providing heat for hydrocarbon cracking for ethylene
• Providing heat for viscosity breaking.
A box furnace is so named because the combustion chamber is box shaped. The radiant and
convection sections of the box type furnace are separated by one or more walls called bridge
walls. The box furnace is normally fired from end wall mounted burners; that is, the burners
are mounted parallel to the floor and perpendicular to the tubes of the furnace. Box type
furnaces are usually designed for large heat duty, typically above 170 MMBTU/HR. The burners
may be fired with oil or gas. The box furnace can be used to provide heat input to several
different process streams simultaneously.
Material:
See Chapter 28 for materials. Default: *CS*
Duty:
Max: 500 MMBTU/H [145 MEGAW]
Standard gas flow rate:
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen Process Economic Analyzer only. For liquid process
fluid, enter liquid flow in GPM [L/S] in place of gas flow.
Process type:
GAS - Gas process fluid
LIQ - Liquid process fluid
Max: 6,000 PSIG [41,000 KPA];

Design temperature:
Max: 1,500 DEG F [815 DEG C];
HEATER
A-frame process heater with sloping walls, radiant section along sides and roof of cabin,
convection section in duct above roof of radiant section and vertical floor-mounted burners.
For use as hot oil heater, pre-heater or cracking. Includes integral stacks.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Duty:
fluid, enter liquid flow GPM [L/S] in place of gas flow.
Process type:
GAS - Gas process fluid
LIQ - Liquid process fluid
Max: 6,000 PSIG [41,000 KPA];
Design temperature:
Max: 1,500 DEG F [815 DEG C];
PYROLYSIS
Pyrolysis.
Material:
Duty:
Process type:
GAS- Gas process fluid
LIQ- Liquid process fluid
Max: 6,000 PSIG [41,000 KPA];

Design temperature:
Max: 1,500 DEG F [815 DEG C];
REFORMER
Box-type reformer without catalyst.
Material:
Duty:
Process type:
Max: 6,000 PSIG [41,000 KPA];
Design temperature:
Max: 1,500 DEG F [815 DEG C];
VERTICAL
Gas or oil fired vertical cylindrical type for low heat duty range moderate temperature with
long contact time.
Material:

Duty:
For liquid process fluid, enter liquid flow in GPM [L/S] in place of gas flow.
Process type:
Max: 6,000 PSIG [41,000 KPA];
Design temperature:
Max: 1,500 DEG F [815 DEG C];

TEMA Exchanger Construction Nomenclature

Icarus Supported TEMA Types
Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers
U - TUBE FLOAT HEAD FIXED-T-S
Front End
Stationary Head
Types
Shell Types
Rear End Head A, B, C A, B, C A, B, N
Types E, F, G, H, J, X E, F, G, H, J, X E, F, G, H, J, X
U P, S, T, W L, M, N
Reboilers
Front End U-TUBE THERMOSIPH KETTLE

Stationary Head
Types
Front End
Stationary Head
Types
Shell Types A, B, C A, B, C, N A, B, N
K, E**, J* K
Rear End Head
Types U L, M, N, P*, S*, T*, U* T
TEMA CLASS B: Equipment cost includes shell, tube bundle, nozzles and saddles.
* Horizontal only **Vertical only

6 Packing, Linings

Introduction to Packing
Introduction to Lining
Acid Brick
Castable Refractories and Gunning Mixes
Fluorocarbon Linings
Glass Linings
Refractory Brick
Resin Linings
Rubber Linings
Lead Linings
Zinc Linings
Suggested Lining Difficulty Adjustments
6 Packing, Linings - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 6-1

Introduction to Packing
There are two types of packing used in packed tower:
• Packing that is chemically suitable to perform a mass transfer operation (for
example, activated alumina for desulfurization or desiccation).
• Packing constructed of inert material to provide surface area for mass transfer.
Inert packing is most commonly used since it can be utilized repeatedly without
significant deterioration. The majority of inert packings used are of the ring or saddle
type.
Ring packings are commonly made of metal or plastic except for Raschig rings, which
are generally ceramic. Ring packings are used mostly in distillation because of their
excellent turndown properties and availability in press-formed metals of all types.
Usually ring-type packings are used in handling organic materials when there are no
major corrosion problems. Unfortunately rings do not promote most redistribution of
liquids, and the Raschig ring occasionally promote liquid maldistribution.
Saddle type packings are commonly made from ceramic or plastic, seldom from
metal. Saddles are used largely in absorption and regeneration operations because
they provide good liquid redistribution and are available in ceramic and plastic, which
yield good corrosion resistance at very low cost. Saddles are usually used for
aqueous systems when corrosion is a major factor.
Qualities that are desirable in the selection of tower packings are:
• High percentage of void space.
• Irregularity of shape to prevent pattern packing.
• Low resistance to material flow (low pressure drop).
• Large active surface exposed per unit volume (high surface area per cubic
foot/meter).
• Complete utilization of surface for mass transfer.
• Suitably shaped to produce turbulent contact between phases.
• Large number of interstitial transfer points per unit volume.
• Good internal liquid distribution characteristics.
• Wide operating range with little efficiency variation.
• Mechanically strong to withstand normal loads in service and physical handling.
• Minimum weight and low side thrust on the tower shell.
• Available in a wide variety of materials.
• Minimum investment per year of service life.
• Clean design to minimize stagnant area and fouling.
• Capable of easy removal from tower and cleaning.
The packing factor, F, is a standard parameter that provides a capacity rating for
packings, by correlation of pressure drop versus gas flow rate through the packing. It
represents a ratio of a specific packing surface to the bed voidage space in the
packed bed. Low packing factors are desirable.
Size 3:1.0CPR, 0.5PPR, 1.0PPR, 1.5PPR, 2.0PPR
0.5SPR, 1.0SPR, 1.5SPR, 2.0SPR
6-2 6 Packing, Linings Aspen Icarus Reference Guide

The Pall ring is especially useful for distillation operations at any pressure. The Pall
ring is also used in absorption and stripping operations, particularly in high pressure
absorbers with small diameter shells where the ability to handle high liquid and gas
rates allow for major cost savings.
Pall rings are Raschig rings that have their wall opened with the projections bent
inward, permitting complete access to the interior for both gas and liquid flow. This
design makes possible greater capacity, lower pressure drop, high gas and liquid
rates, greater efficiency, better maintenance of distribution, lower liquid hold-up and
less entrainment than the conventional Raschig ring. Pall rings are available in
carbon steel, stainless steel, aluminum alloys, copper, monel, nickel and inconel.
Plastic Pall rings are available in polypropylene, glass reinforced polypropylene and
halar. Diameter sizes range from 0.5 to 2.0 INCHES.
Size 3:1.0CRR, 1.5CRR, 2.0CRR, 3.0CRR
1.0PRR, 1.5PRR, 2.0PRR, 3,0PRR
1.0SRR, 1.5SRR, 2.0SRR, 3.0SRR
1.0KRR, 1.5KRR, 2.0KRR, 2.0KRR
Raschig rings, perhaps the most commonly used packing, are useful in distillation,
absorption and stripping operations. They provide increasing efficiency as loading
increases to the point of incipient flooding, beyond which their operation becomes
unstable. They are not suggested for use when high efficiencies are required or when
liquid loading approaches flooding.
Raschig rings are small hallow cylinders. They are the least efficient inert packing
available because their construction does not promote much liquid distribution,
occasionally may promote liquid maldistribution, lends itself to pattern packing, and
does not provide much turbulent contact between phases. They are available in
carbon steel, stainless steels, stoneware, porcelain, karbate and plastics. Diameter
sizes range from 1.0 to 3.0 INCHES.
Size 3:0.5CIS, 1.0CIS, 1.5CIS, 2.0CIS
.5PIS, 1.0PIS, 1.5PIS, 2.0PIS
They are widely used in the manufacturing of sulfuric acid, CO2 absorption in the
pulp and paper industry, cooling and drying of chlorine and removal of noxious
fumes in many industries.
The Intalox saddle is a packing that offers large total surface area per cubic foot,
minimum resistance to liquid and gas flow, high percentage of void space, a low
packing factor, excellent liquid distribution, maximum randomness and high
efficiency with a large capacity in mass transfer operations. These qualities make
Intalox saddles especially effective in distribution and absorption operations. Saddles
are available in ceramics and plastics. Ceramics are chemical stoneware and
chemical porcelain, of which chemical porcelain is preferred since it is mechanically
stronger, non-porous, iron-free and inert to chemical attack. Plastic saddles are
available in polypropylene, linear polyethylene, rigid PVC, CPVC, glass reinforced
polypropylene, kynar and halar. Diameter sizes range from 0.25 to 3.0 INCHES.
Size 3:0.5CBS,.75CBS, 1.0CBS, 1.5CBS
0.5PBS,.75PBS, 1.0PBS, 1.5PBS
0.5FBS,.75FBS, 1.0FBS, 1.5FBS
0.5SBS,.75SBS, 1.0SBS, 1.5SBS

0.5KBS,.75KBS, 1.0KBS, 1.5KBS
These items are used with slightly less efficiency than Intalox saddles for distillation,
stripping and absorption operations.
A Berl saddle is a negatively warped surface resembling a saddle. Berl saddles have
one shortcoming. Their efficiency changes with changes in loading. As loading
approaches flooding, mass transfer becomes unstable and unpredictable. However,
they do promote good liquid distribution, have a high percentage of void space and
provide a large surface area for mass transfer. They are available in stoneware,
porcelain, ceramics, plastics, stainless steel, carbon steel and in karbate. Diameter
sizes range from 0.5 to 1.5 INCHES.
Size 3:ALMNA
Activated aluminas are used for desiccation of liquids and gasses, desulfurization,
catalytic applications and as scavengers for various contaminants such as fluorides.
Activated aluminas are manufactured in granular and ball forms as crystals and gels.
They are highly porous and inert.
Size 3:ACT-C
Activated carbon is effectively and economically utilized in decolorization, odor
removal, solvent recovery, refining gasses and liquids, catalysts and adsorption. Its
major uses are in solution purification, such as the clean-up of cane, beet and corn
sugar solutions, and for the removal of tastes and odors from water supplies,
vegetable and animal fats and oils, alcoholic beverages, chemicals and
pharmaceuticals. Also commonly used in the recovery of gasoline from natural gas,
recovery of benzol from manufactured gas and the recovery of solvents vaporized in
industrial processes such as the manufacture of rayon, rubber products, film and
plastics. Other common uses are removing impurities from gases such as hydrogen,
nitrogen, helium, ammonia, and CO2 and removing organic sulfur compounds, H2S,
and other impurities (Fe, Cu) from manufactured and synthesis gases.
Activated carbons can be divided into two main classes:
• Those used for adsorption of gases and vapors, for which a granular material,
providing great surface area and pore volume is generally employed.
• Those used in purification of liquid, for which a powdered material is desired.
Many carbonaceous materials treated with oxidizing gases (e.g., coal, lignite,
sawdust) may be used for the manufacture of activated carbon depending on its
desired application. Activation is a physical change where the surface of the carbon is
greatly increased by the removal of hydrocarbons.
Size 3:M107YA, M107YB, M107YC, M76YA, M76YB, M76YC, M76XA,
M76XB, M76XC, M62YA, M62YB, M62YC, M35YA, M35YB, M35YC,
M35XA, M35XB, M35XC
Structured packing consists of layers of corrugated (crimped) steel sheets stacked
parallel to each other in sections that are typically 8 to 12 inches high. The sheets
are typically grooved and perforated and are arranged at a fixed angle with respect
to the vertical axis. For a given packing type, changing this angle of orientation will
alter the packing factor while maintaining the surface area per unit volume and
weight per unit volume. When installed in a column, these sections, or "elements",
are placed at a predetermined angle to each other (horizontal rotation). This angle is
typically 90°.

At low liquid rates, structured packing is typically more efficient than random packing
due to greater surface area per unit volume. Although the actual packing cost is
significantly greater for structured packing, the increased efficiency allows for a
smaller, less expensive column. Structured packing is also more desirable because it
is less prone to distribution problems and it gives a lower pressure drop per
theoretical stage. As the liquid rate increases (beyond 20 gpm/ft2), the advantage of
structured packing diminishes significantly.

Introduction to Lining
A lining is material that lines the inside surface of a tank, tower, furnace, or other
piece of process equipment and protects that piece of equipment from destruction by
high temperature, corrosion or abrasion. Some of the common lining types follow.
Acid Brick
These linings are used in Acid Service (pH less than 4.5) to protect a membrane
coating from deterioration due to abrasion or high temperature (T greater than 150
DEG F). Red Shale Brick (RSB) is the cheapest and can be used in low temperature
service. When a more refractory material is desired, acid resistant fireclay (30%
alumina) is used.
Acid brick can be installed with two different mortars. Silica mortar is more
economical but cannot be used in all applications. Furfural based mortar is more
expensive but is resistant to a wider range of materials.
Castable Refractories and Gunning Mixes

These materials can be installed in varying thicknesses. For thicknesses greater than
4 INCHES, it is necessary to use anchors to hold the refractory to the metal surface.
Gunning mixes have higher material costs and lower labor cost than castables; thus,
installed costs of the two are approximately equal.
Fifty percent alumina gunning mix is useful in services involving severe abrasion,
reducing atmospheres and moderate temperatures. Typical applications are cyclones,
fluid catalytic cracking, naphtha reforming and coking.
Ninety percent alumina castable and 90% alumina gunning mix are useful for
applications with temperatures higher than 50% alumina gunning mixes.
Fluorocarbon Linings
Fluorocarbon linings are resistant to a wide variety of corrosive chemicals at temperatures up
to 180 DEG F. The most common fluorocarbon linings are Teflon and Kynar .
TM TM
Glass Linings
Glass linings are shop installed and are all satisfactory for a wide range of corrosive
services at temperatures up to 450 DEG F.
Refractory Brick
These linings are used in high temperature service. Selection of the type brick to be
used is a function of the process temperature, expected degree of chemical attack
and expected degree of abrasion.

Insulating firebrick has lower thermal conductivity and heat capacity than refractory
firebrick. It is generally used as a backing for refractory firebrick. Since it is relatively
non-resistant to chemical attack and abrasion, it is used as the inner lining only
when no erosion or abrasion is expected. Insulating firebrick is ASTM Group 26
material (good to 2,600 DEG F).
Sixty percent alumina firebrick is a high alumina refractory useful for operating
conditions involving thermal cycling and chemical attack. Sulfuric acid processing and
spent acid regeneration are two applications for this material.
Ninety percent alumina firebrick is a high alumina refractory useful in operating
conditions involving thermal shock, slagging, corrosion and high temperatures.
Typical applications for this material are hydrotreating and sulfur burners.
Resin Linings
Resin linings are used in a variety of corrosive services at operating temperatures up
to 250 DEG F. These linings offer good solvent resistance. Some common resis
linings are asphaltic resin, epoxy resin and phenolic resin. Resin linings may be
applied by spray gun, brush or roller.
Rubber Linings
These linings are satisfactory in a wide range of corrosive services at temperatures
less than 150 DEG F. Rubber linings are almost always applied in the vendors shop.
The most common rubber linings are butyl rubber, natural rubber and neoprene.
Lead Linings
Lead sheet was used extensively in the manufacture of sulfuric acid. Today, new
process technology has nearly eliminated the use of lead as a lining material.
Zinc Linings
Zinc is frequently applied to water tanks for cathodic protection. The zinc can be flame
sprayed (also called metallizing) or painted onto the carbon steel base material. Flame
spraying is the process whereby metallic zinc is vaporized in a flame and sprayed onto the
steel base material. The hot zinc does not merely coat the carbon steel, it forms an alloy with
the steel several mils deep.
Zinc can also be supported in an epoxy base paint and brushed, rolled or sprayed onto the
steel.

See Chapter 28, “Material Selections” for a complete list.
PACKING
Variety of vessel packing materials including rings, saddles and other formed shapes, crushed
materials, adsorbents, resins, etc.
Packing type:
See Chapter 28 for packing materials.
ACID BRICK
Brick and mortar for acid service applied to protect a membrane coating from deterioration
under abrasive or high pressure service.
Lining material:
Default: *25RSB*
25RSB - 2.5 INCHES [62 MM] red shale
45RSB - 4.5 FINCHES [112 MM] red shale
80RSB - 8.0 INCHES [200 MM] red shale
25AFC - 2.5 INCHES [62 MM] Al f-clay
45AFC - 4.5 INCHES [112 MM] Al fclay
90AFC - 9.0 INCHES [225 MM] Al fclay
Mortar type:
Default: *FUR*
FUR - Furfural base motar
SIL - Silicone base motar
Lining adjustment:
See “Suggested Lining Difficulty Adjustment.”
Range:
1 - 10; Default: *4*
MONOLITHIC
Castable refractory or gunned mixes.
Lining material:
Default: *GUNIT*
GUNIT - Gunite on wire mesh
GUNA5 - Gunn. 50% Al anchored
GUNA9 - Gunn. 90% Al anchored
CASA9 - Cast. 90% Al anchored
GUN50 - Gunn. 50% Al no anchor
GUN90 - Gunn. 90% Al no anchor
CAS90 - Cast. 90% Al no anchor
Lining thickness:
Max: 9 INCHES [225 MM];
Default: 4 INCHES [100 MM]

Lining adjustment:
See “Suggested Lining Difficulty Adjustment.” Range: 1 - 10; Default: *4*
OTHER
Brick: 60%, 90% alumina firebrick, insulating firebrick; abrasion resistant, replaceable linings:
ceramic, rubber, steel, alloy; coatings: organic, glass and metallic.
Lining material:
See Chapter 28 for lining materials.
Default:
*EPLCS*
Lining adjustment:
See “Suggested Lining Difficulty Adjustment.” Range: 1 - 10; Default: *4*

Suggested Lining Difficulty Adjustments
Work Item Difficulty Adjustment
Lining a straight tank 1
Typical lining 4
Lining a large horizontal vessel 6

(<5000 GALLON [19 M3] capacity)
Lining a small horizontal vessel 8

(<5000 GALLON [19 M3] capacity)
Small, obstructed area 10

7 Pumps

Gear Pumps (GP)
Pump Efficiencies
7 Pumps - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 7-1

Includes pump, baseplate, driver; general types:
API-610 type: High (60xHZ), low (30xHZ) speed.
ANSI type: ANSI B123.1 or American Voluntary Standard, single stage

centrifugal, process and general service; horizontal, end
suction, centerline discharge; high (60xHZ), medium
(30xHZ), low (20xHZ) speed.
CENTRIF type: Single and multiple stage centrifugal pumps, horizontal, split
casing (not barrel or cartridge type), for process or general
service when flow, head and pressure conditions exceed
general service; electric, turbine, gasoline engine drives.
General Service: Cast iron pumps for general service; high (60xHZ), medium
(30xHZ) speed.
IN LINE type: Mounted for service on the line; high (60xHZ), medium
(30xHZ), low speed (20xHZ).

Description Type
Single and multistage centrifugal pumps available in a CENTRIF

variety of casing materials.
For process or general service when flow/head
conditions exceed general service; horizontally split
casing not a cartridge or barrel pump.
Casing material:
Default: *CS*
Fluid head:
Speed:
Varies with pump head
Fluid specific gravity:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: 1.0
Driver type:
Default: MOTOR
NONE - No driver
*MOTOR* - Standard motor driver
VFD - Variable frequency motor driver
TURBINE, - Turbine driver
Seal type:
PACK - Packing
*SNGL*- Single mechanical seal
TNDM- Tandem mechanical seal
DBLE- Double mechanical seal
7-2 7 Pumps - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide

Description Type
Design temperature:
Fluid viscosity:
Default: *1.0* CPOISE [*1.0* MPA-S]
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100
Steam gauge pressure:
Steam pressure for turbine drivers only. Default:
*400* PSIG [*2,800* KPA].
API 610 type available in a variety of casing API 610

materials.
Casing material:
Fluid head:
MAX: 200 FEET [60 M] at 30 x HZ; 700 FEET [210 M]
at 60 x HZ RPM. Default: *225* FEET [*25* M] RPM
Speed:
Range: 1,800 - 3,600 RPM;
Speed varies with pump head
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Driver power:
MIN: >0
If you specify a driver power greater than 300 HP
with a MOTOR driver type, Icarus generates a Totally
Enclosed Water Cooled (TEWAC) motor. In Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer and Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator, Icarus also generates additional piping
lines for cooling water and an additional temperature
control loop.
Driver type:
Default: MOTOR
NONE - No driver
Seal type:
Default: *SNGL*
PACK - Packing
*SNGL* - Single mechanical seal
TNDM - Tandem mechanical seal
DBLE - Double mechanical seal
Design temperature:
MAX: 850 DEG F [450 DEG C];

Fluid viscosity:
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100
Steam pressure for tubine drivers only. Default:
*400* PSIG [*2,800* KPA].
Primary seal pipe plan:
*11* - API primary seal piping plan number 11
12 - API primary seal piping plan number 12
Secondary seal pipe plan: Default: *NONE*
51 - API secondary seal piping plan number 51
Cooling water pipe plan:
Default: *NONE*
A - API cooling water piping plan A
B - API cooling water piping plan B
C - API cooling water piping plan C
D - API cooling water piping plan D
E - API cooling water piping plan E
F - API cooling water piping plan F
G - API cooling water piping plan G
H - API cooling water piping plan H
J - API cooling water piping plan J
K - API cooling water piping plan K
L - API cooling water piping plan L
Pipe plan pipe type:
Default: *WELD*
TUBE- Tubing
THRD- Threaded pipe/fittings
*WELD*- Welded pipe/fittings
WFLG - Welded/flanged pipe fittings
Pipe plan material Type:
Default: Based on casing material.
A 106- A 106
304P- SS304
316P- SS316

Description Type
API 610 in-line pump API 610 IL

Casing material:
Liquid flow rate:
Min >0
Fluid head:
Maximum head: 375 FT [110 M] at 30xHz; 800 FT
[240 M] at 60xHz. Default: *225* FEET [*25* M]
Speed:
Range: 1,800 - 3,600 RPM; Default: *1,800* RPM.
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Driver type:
*MOTOR* - Standard motor
NONE - No driver
Seal type:
PACK - Packing
Design temperature:
Fluid viscosity:
Default: *1.0* CPOISE [*1.0* MPA-S].
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100
Default: *11*
2 - No primary seal piping plan
Secondary seal pipe plan:
Default: *NONE*
51 - API second seal piping plan number 51

Description Type

Default: *NONE*

High speed vertical in-line API 610 centrifugal pump HIGH SPEED
with a single impeller stage, integral speed-increasing
gearbox, with a vertical motor mount, for use in high
head/low flow applications.
Casing material:
Default: *CS*
See Chapter 28 of the Icarus Reference Guide for
materials.
Fluid head:
MAX: 2,000 FEET [600 M]
MIN: 500 FEET [150 M]
Speed:
Range: 1,800 - 3,600 RPM; Default: *3,600*
Note: Applies to motor speed, not impeller speed.
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Driver power:
MIN: >0
Note: If you specify a driver power greater than 300
HP with a MOTOR driver type, Aspen Economic
Evaluation generates a Totally Enclosed Water Cooled
(TEWAC) motor. In Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
and Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, Aspen Economic
Evaluation also generates additional piping lines for
cooling water and an additional temperature control
loop.
Driver type:
Default: MOTOR
NONE - No driver

Description Type

Seal type:
Default: *SNGL*
PACK - Packing
Design temperature:
MAX: 850 DEG F [450 DEG C]
Fluid viscosity:
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 – 100
*400* PSIG [*2,800* KPA].
Default: *NONE*
Default: *NONE*

Description Type

Default: *WELD*
TUBE - Tubing
THRD - Threaded pipe/fittings
*WELD* - Welded pipe/fittings
Pipe plan material type:
A 106 - A 106
304P - SS304
316P - SS316
Available in a wide variety of alloys and exotic ANSI

materials including carbon steel casings with stainless
steel impellers (SF = stainless fitted) for flows to
2000 GPM [125 L/S], and additionally in FRP for flows
to 500 GPM [31 L/S].
Casing material:
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 2,000 GPM [125 L/S]
Fluid head:
MAX: 75 FEET [25 M] at 20 x HZ; 200 FEET [60 M] at
30 x HZ; 575 FEET [175 M] at 60 x HZ.
Speed:
Range: 1,200 - 3,600 RPM;
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default *1.0*
Driver type:
NONE - No driver
Seal type:
PACK - Packing

Design temperature:
Fluid viscosity:
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100
*400* PSIG [*2,800* KPA].
Default: *NONE*
Default: *NONE*
Default: *WELD*
TUBE - Tubing
THRD - Threaded pipe/fittings
*WELD* - Welded pipe/fittings
Pipe plan material type:

Description Type

A 106 - A 106
304P - SS304
316P - SS316
Standard ANSI magnetic drive pump. MAG DRIVE

Casing material:
*SS* - Stainless steel
SS316 - Stainless steel (SS316)
C 20 - Carpenter 20
HASTC - Hasteloy C
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 300 GPM [18.9 L/S] at 30 x HZ, 600 GPM
[37.8 L/S] at 60 x HZ
Fluid head:
MAX: 200 FEET [60 M] at 30 x HZ, 400 FEET [120 M]
at 60 x HZ; Default: *75* FEET [*25* M]
Speed:
Range: 1,800 - 3,600 RPM; Speed varies with pump
head

Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1*
Driver type:
VFD - Variable frequency driver
NONE - No driver
MAX: 275 PSIG [1,895 KPA]
Design temperature:
Fluid viscosity:
Default: *1* CPOISE [*1* MPA-S]
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100

Description Type
Plastic ANSI single stage pump. ANSI PLAST

Liquid flow rate:
Capacity limit: 250 GPM [15 L/S] at 30 x HZ; 500
GPM [31 L/S] at 60 x HZ.
Fluid head:
at 60 x HZ]; Default: *75* FEET [*25* M]
Speed:
Range: 1,800 - 3,600 RPM; Speed varies with pump
head
Range: 0.2 - 50; Default: 1.0
Driver type:
Default: *MOTOR*
NONE - No driver
MOTOR - Standard motor driver
Seal type:
Default: *SNGL*
PACK - Packing
SNGL - Single mechanical seal
TNDM- Tandem mechanical seal
Design temperature:
Default *120* DEG F [*50* DEG C]
Fluid viscosity:
Pump efficiency:
Range: 1 - 100
*400* PSIG [2,800 KPA].
Vertical axial flow pump for flows greater than 1600 AXIAL FLOW
GPM [100 L/S].
Includes pumping unit and motor driver.
Material:
Liquid flow rate:
Max GPM <1,300,000/head [FT],
Max L/S <25,000/head [M].
Fluid head:
MAX: 75 FEET [25 M]; Default: *75* FEET [*25* M]

Description Type
Temperature:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Horizontal pump with canned motor. CANNED

Casing material:
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 400 GPM [25 L/S]
Fluid head:
MAX: 200 FEET [60 M]; Default: *75* FEET [*25* M]
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Design temperature:
Fluid viscosity:
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100
General service, cast iron for flows to 2000 GPM [125 GEN SERV
L/S].
Casing material:
Default: *CI*
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 2,000 GPM [125 L/S]
Fluid head:
at 60 x HZ; Default: *75* FEET [*25* M]
Speed:
Range: 1,800 - 3,600 RPM
0.2 - 5.0; Default: *5.0*
Driver type:
NONE - No driver
Seal type:
PACK - Packing

Description Type

Design temperature:
Fluid viscosity:
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100
*400* PSIG [*2,800* KPA].
General service in-line pump. IN LINE

Includes pump and motor driver.
Casing material:
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: GPM x head [FEET] < 43,000, L/S x head [M] <
825.
Fluid head:
Speed:
Range: 1,200 - 3,600 RPM; Default: *1,800* RPM.
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Driver type:
*STD*- Standard motor
NONE - No driver
Seal type:
PACK - Packing
Design temperature:
Fluid viscosity:
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100
Vertical motor with turbine impeller for wet pits, tanks TURBINE
and sumps.
Includes pumping unit and motor driver. If you
require a foundation for this item, it must be added.

Description Type
Material:
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: Flow (GPM) x Head (FT) < 990,000 [Flow (L/S)
x Head (M) < 8250]
Fluid head:
Default: *75* FEET [*25* M]; MAX: Flow (GPM) x
Head (FT) < 990,000 [Flow (L/S) x Head (M) < 8250]
Temperature:
Default: *120* DEG F [*50* DEG C]; MAX: 500 DEG
F [260 DEG C]
Fluid Specific Gravity:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Low consistency stock pump. PULP STOCK

Casing material:
*CI*- Cast iron
SS316- SS316
Liquid flow rate:
Range: 100 - 28,000 GPM [6.4 - 1,765 L/S]
Fluid Head:
Range: 15 - 350 FEET [4.6 - 106 M]
Speed:
Fluid specific gravity.:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: 1.0
Driver type:
NONE - No driver
VFD - Variable frequency driver
TURBINE - Turbine driver
Design temperature:
Consistency Air Dried: Percent by weight of air
dried (AD) solids in fluid. Range: 0.0 - 6.0; Default:
*1.0*
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100

*400*PSGI [*2,800 KPA].

Sanitary centrifugal pump SAN PUMP
For use as a product mover in a wide range of sanitary
and industrial applications. Material of construction is
SS316.
Pump size selection:
Symbol Inlet Outlet

Inch- Inch-
Pound Metric Pound Metric
25x20 2.5 INCHES 65 MM 2 INCHES 50 MM
30x20 3 INCHES 75 MM 2 INCHES 50 MM
30X25 3 INCHES 75 MM 2.5 INCHES 65 MM
40X30 4 INCHES 100 MM 3 INCHES 75 MM
40X40 4 INCHES 100 MM 4 INCHES 100 MM
Required: select pump size or enter capacity and head.

Fluid head: MAX: 365 FEET [109 M] (at maximum
speed)
Speed Maximum Head

Inch- P ound Metric
*30xHZ* 92 FEET 28 M
60XHZ 365 FEET 63 M
Required: enter capacity and head or select pump size.

Liquid flow rate: MAX: 1,000 GPM [62.5 GPM] (at
maximum speed)
Speed Maximum Head

Inch- P ound Metric
*30xHZ* 610 GPM 38.4 L/S
60XHZ 1,000 GPM 63 L/S
Required: enter capacity and head or select pump size.

Speed
Inch- P ound Metric

De fault 1,800 RPM 1,500RPM
MIN: 1,800 RPM 1,500RPM
MAX: 3,600 RPM 3,000 RPM

*45 PSIG [310 KPA]*, MAX: 45 PSIG [310 KPA]
Design temperature:
*68 DEG F [20 DEG C]*, MAX: 120 DEG F [50 DEG C]
*1.0*, MIN: 0.25, MAX: 5.0
Pump efficiency:
MIN: 10, MAX: 100

Description Type
Driver type:
*TXXDC*- Standard TEFC motor
WXXDC- Washdown TEFC motor
WVRDC- VFD rated motor only (no controller)
WVCDC- VFD rated motor with controller
Seal type:
*SNGL*- Single mechanical seal
SNGW- Single mechanical seal w/ water cooling
DBLW- Double mechanical seal w/ water cooling
Sanitary fluming pump with feeder hopper FLUME PUMP

For transferring delicate food products, like mushrooms
and cranberries. Uses water as a protective cushion.
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 4,150 GPM [260 L/S]. Includes water and product.
Required: enter either diameter; head and capacity; or
head and product rate.
Maximum head decreases as capacity increases. At the
maximum capacity of 4,150 GPM [260 L/S], the
maximum head is 45 FEET [13.7 M].
Product rate:
MAX: based on maximum capacity (4,150 GPM [260
L/S]), specific gravity, and H20/product ratio. Required:
enter either diameter; head and capacity; or head and
product rate.
Inlet and outlet diameter:
MIN: 4 INCHES [100 MM], MAX: 10 INCHES [250 MM]
Fluid head:
*35* FEET [*10.7* M], MAX: 110 FEET [33.5 M]
Maximum head decreases as capacity increases. The
pump is dead-headed at 110 FEET [35.5 M]. At the
maximum capacity of 4,150 GPM [260 L/S], the
maximum head is 45 FEET [13.7 M].
Water to product weight ratio: *10*
Design pressure gauge:
*45 PSIG [310 KPA]*, MAX: 45 PSIG [310 KPA]
Design temperature:
*68 DEG F [20 DEG C]*, MAX: 120 DEG F [50 DEG C]
*1.0*, MIN: 0.2, MAX: 5.0 (of water-product mixture).
Pump efficiency:
MIN: 10, MAX: 100

Description Type
Hopper length: Minimum hopper length depends on

diameter:
Diameter Minimum Hopper Length

4 INCHES [100 MM] 2.0 FEET [0.610 M]
6 INCHES [150 MM] 3.5 FEET [1.067 MM]
8 INCHES [200 MM] 5.0 FEET [1.524 M]
10 INCHES [250 MM] 6.0 FEET [1.829 M]
Enclosure type:
OPEN- Closed frame unit
*CLOSE*- Open frame unit

Gear Pumps (GP)
For the pumping of viscous fluids, such as polymers and resins. Standard rotary
pumps can pump fluids with viscosities as great as 250,000 CP and special designs
are available to handle viscosities up to 1,000,000 CP.
The principal of operation is that as two rotors rotate, projections on the rotors mesh
and unmesh. They unmesh on the suction side of the pump creating a cavity which is
filled with liquid. As the rotors continue to turn, the liquid is trapped between the
projections of the rotors and the pump casing. The liquid is carried to the discharge
side of the pump in these pockets. At the discharge side, the rotors mesh and the
liquid is squeezed out of the pump.
Includes pump, baseplate, driver (optional).
Gear Pumps (GP)

Description Type
Standard external gear rotary pump GEAR

For pumping of viscous fluids to 300 GPM [18 L/S],
such as polymers and resins; standard type external
gear rotary pump.
Includes motor driver.
Material:
*CS* - Carbon steel
CI - Cast iron
BRONZ - Bronz
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 300 GPM [18 L/S].
Viscosity:
MAX: 30,000 CSTOKE [30,000 MM2/S];
Default: *32* CSTOKE [*32* MM2/S].
Speed:
MAX: 600 RPM; Default: *90* RPM.
Canned rotor gear pump CANNED RTR

Explosion-proof motor, to 570 GPM [35 L/S].
Material:
*SS316*
Liquid flow rate:
40 - 570 GPM [3 - 35 L/S]
Speed:
MAX: 1,800 RPM; Default: *1,800* RPM
Viscosity:
Default: *32* CSTOKE [*32* MM2/S]

Gear Pumps (GP)
Description Type
Mechanical seal gear pump MECH SEAL

With mechanical seal, to 480 GPM [30 L/S]. Includes
motor driver.
Material:
*GSLCS* (Glass-lined CS)
Liquid flow rate:
Range: 35 - 480 GPM [3 - 30 L/S].
Speed:
MAX: 1,800 RPM; Default: *1,800* RPM.

Piston, Other Positive Displacement
Pumps (P)

Description Type
Reciprocating simplex with steam driver. SIMPLEX

Material:
Default: *CS*
Liquid flow rate:
Range: 5.5 - 910 GPM [0.4 - 56 L/S]
Fluid head:
MAX: 1,000 FEET [300 M]
Temperature:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Driver power:
Range: 3 - 10 HP [2.22 - 7.5 KW]
Reciprocating duplex with steam driver. DUPLEX

Material:
Default: *CS*
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 1,000 GPM [62 L/S]
Fluid head:
MAX: 1,000 FEET [300 M]
Temperature:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Driver power:
Range: 2 - 100 HP [1.5 - 7.5 KW]

Description Type
Triplex (plunger) with pump-motor driver. TRIPLEX

Material:
Default: *CS*
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 1,000 GPM [62 L/S]
Fluid head:
MAX: 1,000 FEET [300 M]
Temperature:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default *1.0*
Driver power:
Range: 2 -100 HP [1.5 - 75 KW]
Diaphragm pump - TFE type. DIAPHRAGM

Includes motor driver. For the low capacity pumping
of hazardous, toxic or abrasive liquids. Although
diaphragm pumps are made with capacities of 100
GPM, generally they handle 25 GPM or less.
Diaphragm pumps are also frequently used as
metering pumps.
A diaphragm pump is a type of reciprocating pump. A
reciprocating rod flexes a diaphragm fabricated of
metal, rubber or plastic. The flexing of the diaphragm
produces the pumping action.
The advantage of the diaphragm pump is that
no packing or seals are exposed to the liquid
being pumped.
Material:
*CS* - Carbon steel
SS316 - SS316
Liquid flow rate:
Range: 0.012 - 600 GPM [1.3 - 37.5 L/S]
Temperature:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*

Description Type
Slurry pump. SLURRY

Material:
Default: *SS316*
Liquid flow rate:
Range: 1.5 - 25 GPM [0.1 - 1.5 L/S]
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Temperature:
Rotary (sliding vanes) pump. Includes motor driver. ROTARY

Material:
Defaults*
Liquid flow rate:
Range: 10 - 750 GPM [0.7 - 47 L/S]
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Temperature:
Material:
BRONZ
Liquid flow rate:
Range: 25 - 450 GPM [1.6 - 28 L/S]
Temperature:
Reciprocating plunger pump. RECIP MOTR

Includes motor driver. Plunger pumps are used for
pumping hydraulic fluid, hydraulic de-scaling of steel,
water flooding of oil fields, salt water disposal,
pumping of propane, butane and other volatile
liquids, and for process pumping requiring high
pressures.
This item is an electric motor driven plunger, power
pump. A power pump is a reciprocating pump driven
through a crankshaft. Although the RECIP-MOTR
pump is driven by an electric motor, a power pump
may be driven by a steam or gas turbine, a gas
engine, or a diesel engine as well. A plunger pump is
a reciprocating pump that displaces liquid from a
cylinder by the reciprocating motion of a long,
slender, solid rod called a plunger. On the back-stroke
of the plunger, the cylinder fills with liquid and on the
forward-stroke, the liquid is expelled. The capacity of

Description Type
a plunger pump is determined by the diameter, stroke

and number of plungers. Plunger pumps are made
from two to nine plungers and in two basic
configurations, horizontal and vertical depending on
whether the plungers are arranged horizontally or
vertically in the machine. Typically, discharge
pressures of plunger pumps fall in the range from
1,500 to 6,000 PSIG, although pressure as high as
20,000 PSIG can be handled in some.
Material:
Liquid flow rate:
Min: 0.01 GPM [0.4 L/S]
Temperature:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*
Driver power:
MAX: 1,000 HP [750 KW]
High density stock pump with twin intermeshing HD STOCK

screws.
Casing material:
*SS316*, SS317
Stock flow rate air dried:
Flow rate of air dried (AD) solids in pumped fluid.
MAX: 1,500 TPD [56 TON/H]
MAX: 160 PSIG [1,100 KPA] to 550 TPD [20 TON/H],
else 100 PSIG [688 KPA].
Design temperature:
Consistency air dried:
Percent by weight of air dried (AD) solids in fluid.
Pump efficiency:
Range: 10 - 100
Driver type:
NONE - No driver
Speed:
Default: *1,800* RPM [*1,500* RPM]

Description Type

*400* PSIG [*2,800* KPA].
Sanitary rotary lobe pump ROTARYLOBE

Used for a wide range of fluids (low or high viscosity,
non-lubricating or abrasive), this pump forwards
fluids, yet has a low impact on solids and a relatively
constant discharge pressure.
Pump size selection:
Symbol Nominal Flow Rate / Diameter

GPM/INCHES L/S MM
06- 15 6 / 1.5 0.37 / 40
15 - 15 15 / 1.5 0.9 / 40
18 - 15 18 / 1.5 1.1 / 40
30 - 15 30 / 1.5 1.8 / 40
60 - 25 60 / 2.5 3.7 / 65
130 - 3 130 / 3 8.2 / 80
220 - 4 220 / 4 13.8 / 100
320 - 6 320 / 6 20.2 / 150
420 - 8 420 / 8 26.5 / 200
520 - 8 520 / 8 32.8 / 200
Required: select pump size or enter capacity and exit

pressure.
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 520 GPM [32.8 L/S]
pressure.
MAX: 200 PSIG [1,375 KPA]
pressure.

Description Type
Impeller speed:
MAX: 10 x Hz RPM
*1.0*, MIN: 0.2, MAX: 5.0
Fluid viscosity:
*1.0 CPOISE [1.0 MPA-S]*
Design temperature:
*68 DEG F [20 DEG C]*
Seal type:
*MECH*- Single mechanical seal
ORNG- O-ring seal
DBLE- Double mechanical seal
Relief cover type:
*STD*- Standard cover
MAN- Manual relief cover
Sanitary air diaphragm pump AIR DIAPH

If you require a foundation for this item, it must be
added.
Inlet and outlet diameter:
MIN: 1 INCHES [25 MM DIAM], MAX: 3 INCHES DIAM
[75 MM DIAM]
Enter either inlet/outlet diameter or capacity
and head.
Liquid flow rate:
MAX: 220 GPM [13.7 L/S] at 20 FEET [6 M]
Enter either inlet/outlet diameter or capacity and
head.
Fluid head:
MAX: 210 FEET [64 M] at 60 GPM [3.7 L/S]
MAX: 110 PSIG [750 KPA]
Design temperature:
MIN: 68 DEG F [20 DEG C], MAX: 300 DEG F [148
DEG C]
*1.0*, MIN: 0.2, MAX: 5.0

Pump Efficiencies
Pump Type Default Efficiency
Centrifugal Pumps < 50 gpm = 50 %

50 <= Flowrate < 200 = 65%
200 <= Flowrate <= 500 gpm = 75%
>500 gpm = 82%
All Other Pumps 82%
Hi-Density Stock Pump Calculated using an empirical correlation.

8 Towers, Columns

Introduction to Towers and Columns
Tower/Column Applications
Tower/Column Internals
Description of Towers/Columns
Materials of Construction
Shell and Head Design
Multi-Diameter Towers (DTW)
8 Towers, Columns - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 8-1

Introduction to Towers and Columns
Towers are classified according to the type of “internals” in the tower, and according
to the function performed by the tower.
• Towers may contain trays. If the tower contains trays, the vessel is called a tray
tower, or, synonymously, a tray column.
• Tower may contain packing. If the tower contains a packing, the vessel is called a
packed tower, or packed column.
• If the feed to the tower is a hydrocarbon mixture and the tower separates this
mixture into two factions or streams, one stream containing the more volatile
components of the feed and the other stream the less volatile components of the
feed, the tower is called a fractionation tower. Other names for a fractionation
tower are: fractionation column, fractionator, distillation tower and distillation
column.
• If the feed to the tower is liquid, and the tower removes an undesirable gas
which is dissolved in the feed, the tower is called a stripping tower. Other names
for a stripping tower are stripping column and stripper.
• If the feed to the tower is a gas mixture containing one or more undesirable
components which are removed within the tower by absorbing them with a
suitable solvent, the tower is called an absorption tower. Other names for an
absorption tower are: absorption column and absorber.
• If the feed to the tower is a gas or liquid mixture containing one or more
undesirable components, which are removed within the tower by adsorbing them
onto solid catalyst pellets, the tower is called an adsorption tower. Other names
for an adsorption tower are: adsorption column and adsorber.
• If the feed to the tower is a liquid mixture containing one or more undesirable
components which are removed by absorbing them with another liquid, the tower
is called an extraction tower or extraction column.
Towers are similar to vertical process vessels in that they are erected vertically and
they are cylindrical in shape with heads at each end of the cylinder. Towers are,
however, normally much taller than vertical process vessels. Typically the length to
diameter ratio of a tower ranges from 3:1 to 20:1. Towers typically range in
diameter from 3 to 20 FEET and in height from 20 to 150 FEET.
Tower/Column Applications
Towers are commonly used for the following purposes:
• Distillation
• Stripping
• Absorption
• Adsorption
• Extraction.
A description of these items follows.

Distillation — a process which separates a mixture of materials into two or more
desired parts. The device which performs this operation may be called a distillation
tower, distillation column or fractionator. The operation of a distillation column
8-2 8 Towers, Columns - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide

depends on the fact that different materials boil at different temperatures. For
example, water boils at 212 DEG F and ethyl alcohol (the active ingredient in liquor)
boils at 173 DEG F. Distillation is not a new concept. The material which boils at the
lower temperature is called the light or more volatile component. The material with
the higher boiling point is called the heavy or less volatile component. In the case of
ethyl alcohol and water, we are dealing with a two component or binary mixture.
This is not the usual case. More commonly, the feed to a distillation column is a
multi-component mixture. For example, crude oil contains hundreds of different
components. The purpose of distilling crude oil is to separate it into what are called
fractions or cuts. Each fraction or cut is not a pure component, but a mixture of
components which may be used as is or refined further. Crude distillation normally is
used to produce these fractions: raw gasoline, raw kerosene, gas oil and reduced
crude.
Stripping — The process of extracting a material dissolved in a liquid phase and
transferring it into a gas phase is called stripping or desorption. The stripping
process is carried out in a device called a stripping tower or stripping column. The
removal of ammonia from water is an example of the stripping process. Water with
ammonia dissolved in it passes down the stripping tower. Air passing upward
through the tower strips the ammonia from the water and the ammonia - air mixture
exits from the top of the tower.
Absorption — The process of transferring a material from the gas phase to the
liquid phase is called absorption. The liquid into which the gaseous component
dissolves is called the absorbent. The device in which the absorption process takes
place is called an absorption tower, absorption column or absorber. The removal of
carbon dioxide and hydrogen sulfide from the natural gas with deithanolamine (DEA)
is an example of the absorption process. Natural gas, CO2 and H2S pass upward
through the tower. DEA passing downwards absorbs the CO2 and H2S.
Adsorption — The process of transferring a material from either the gas or liquid
phase to the solid phase is called adsorption. The solid to which the liquid or gaseous
component attached itself is called the adsorbent. The device in which the adsorption
process takes place is usually called an adsorption tower, adsorption column or
adsorber. If the purpose of the adsorber is to remove water, the term drying tower
or dryer is often used.
Extraction — The process of transferring material from one liquid phase to another
immiscible liquid phase is called liquid - liquid extraction, solvent extraction or simply
extraction. Immiscible liquids are liquids which do not dissolve in each other, for
example, oil and water. If the two immiscible liquids are contacted counter currently,
the contacting device is called an extraction column, extraction tower or extractor.
Tower/Column Internals
Trays — May be divided into two major categories; crossflow trays and counter flow
trays. Crossflow trays get their name because liquid flows across the tray to a
downcomer while vapor rises through perforations in the tray deck. There are three
types of crossflow trays in common use today. They are the bubble cap, sieve tray,
and valve tray. The bubble cap trays were used almost exclusively until about 1950.
Since then, the use of bubble cap trays has almost disappeared because their
complicated construction makes them heavy (resulting in heavier and more
expensive tray supports) and expensive to fabricate.

Bubble cap trays get their name because vapor rises through holes in the tray and is
collected underneath bubble caps. Each cap has slots in it through which the vapor
from the tray below bubbles into the liquid on the tray.
Sieve trays are the cheapest trays to fabricate because of their simple design. They
consist of a perforated plate through which vapor rises from the tray below, a weir to
hold a liquid level on the tray, and a downcomer which acts as a downspout to direct
the liquid to the tray below. The operation of the sieve tray depends on the vapor
velocity through the perforations being high enough to keep the liquid flowing across
the tray and not down through the same perforations the vapor is rising through.
The drawback to the sieve tray is that it has a narrow operating range compared to
the bubble cap tray and the valve tray. Too low a vapor velocity and the liquid falls
through the holes to the plate below - a condition called dumping. Too high a
velocity and vapor doesn’t bubble through the liquid on the tray. Instead, the vapor
pushes the liquid away from the hole so that there is no liquid-vapor contact. This
condition is called coning.
Valve trays have liftable caps which operate like check valves. These caps make
valve trays more expensive than sieve trays but they also increase the operating
range of the tray. At low vapor velocities, the caps close and prevent dumping.
The other major category of trays is the counterflow type. These trays have no
downcomers. The liquid falls through the same openings in the tray that the vapor
from the tray below rises through. This type of tray is not widely used. The most
popular of the counterflow type tray is the Turbogrid tray.
Packings — The second major category of tower internals is packings. Packings
serve the same purpose as trays; they bring a gas or vapor stream into intimate
contact with a liquid stream. Trays accomplish this by providing a very large wetted
surface area for the gas or vapor to flow by. Packed towers would normally be
selected instead of tray towers in the following instances:
1 For columns less than 2 FEET in diameter, packing is generally cheaper.
2 If highly corrosive fluids are being handled, packings are often advantageous
because they can be made of ceramic, carbon, plastic or other highly resistant
metallic or non-metallic material.
3 Packed towers are low pressure drop devices, therefore, they are often used for vacuum
distillations.
The major disadvantages of packed towers are:
1 They have a narrower operating range than tray towers.
2 A packed tower must have a larger diameter than a tray tower to handle the
same feed rate.
The most common types of packings are: Raschig rings, Berl saddles, Intalox saddles
and Pall rings.
Adsorption towers are packed towers; however, their function is to transfer a
material from the liquid or gas phase onto the surface of the solid adsorbent.
Adsorbents are not packing types. Adsorbents are generally either a granular
material or else spherical or cylindrical shaped pellets. Some common adsorbents
are: Fuller’s earthes (natural clays), activated clay, alumina, activated carbon and
silica gel.

Description of Towers/Columns
“Towers” and “columns” are interchangeable name for the same device. These
devices have one of two functions. One is to separate a mixture into two or more
desired parts. The other function is to transfer a material from one phase to another
phase.
Towers are classified according to the function performed. Examples are distillation,
stripping or extraction. Towers are also classified by the type of device installed
inside (internals) so the tower can perform its desired function. Tower internals
consist of either trays or packings.
Towers are always erected vertically. They are usually tall and cylindrical in shape.
Sometimes they are designed with the top of the tower one diameter and the bottom
a different (usually larger) diameter. This gives the tower a “Coke bottle” shape and
is called a double diameter tower.
The cylindrically shaped body of the tower is called the shell. The shell is closed at
both ends with dome-shaped covers called heads. There are three head designs in
common use:
• Torispherical, the most common of which is the ASME flanged and dished head
• Ellipsoidal, also called elliptical, elliptical dished or 2:1 ellipsoidal (because the
ratio of the length of the major to the minor axis of this head is 2:1)
• Hemispherical.
Which kind of head to use is an economic decision. The torispherical head is the
cheapest to fabricate, but is the thickest for a given pressure. The ellipsoidal head is
more expensive to fabricate than the torispherical, but is thinner at the same
pressure. The hemispherical head is the most costly to fabricate, but is the thinnest
for a given pressure. Thus, the material cost decreases from the torispherical to
hemispherical because the head gets thinner, but the fabricating costs increase. At
pressures below 150 PSIG the torispherical head is generally the cheapest. From 150
PSIG to 500 PSIG, the ellipsoidal is usually selected. Above 150 PSIG, the
hemispherical head becomes an economically viable alternative.
Openings are provided in the shell and heads of a tower so that process fluids can
enter and leave. Other openings in the tower are provided for drains, purge
connections and sample connections. These openings into the tower are called
nozzles.
Nozzles range in diameter from 1 INCH for small drains, vents and sample
connections to 24 INCHES [609.6 MM] or more for large process connections. The
small (1 INCH) connections are usually made with pipe couplings, not with welding
necks and flanges.
Workers must be able to enter the tower after it is erected to install and maintain the
internals. Openings in the tower provided for this purpose are called manholes or
manways. Manholes are just nozzles large enough for a man to pass through.
Manholes range in diameter from 18 - 48 INCHES [1219 MM].
A tower is normally supported by a steel cylinder the same diameter as the tower
called a skirt. The skirt is welded to the tower at one end and bolted to the
foundation at the other.
In addition to nozzles, manholes and skirts, other appurtenances may be attached to
the tower. These other externals may include insulation clips for the support of
insulation, lifting lugs which are eyelets to which rigging is attached so that the

tower can be lifted and placed on its foundation, and various structural steel
members for the support of platforms and ladders.
Materials of Construction
The tower shell and heads are usually fabricated out of carbon or low alloy steel
plate.
As the name implies, the primary alloying element in carbon steel is carbon. All the
other alloying elements in carbon steel are limited to concentrations less than 0.5%.
The most common materials of construction for towers are the carbon steels A515
and A516.
Low alloy steel contain one or more alloying elements besides carbon in
concentrations from 0.5% to 10%. Alloying elements in concentrations greater than
10% make the steel a high alloy steel.
When extremely corrosive materials are to be handled, the tower may be fabricated
out of a high alloy steel such as one of the stainless steels, a non-ferrous metal such
as titanium or monel, or a non-metal such as FRP (fiberglass reinforced polyester).
However, because these materials are either very expensive or else have design
limitations such as low strength, claddings and linings are commonly used for
corrosion resistance. Clad plate consists of a thin layer of corrosion resistant metal
permanently bonded to an inexpensive carbon or low alloy steel backing. Linings
differ from claddings in that there is not a permanent continuous bond between the
corrosion resistant material and the backing material, and the corrosion resistant
material is usually not a metal. Common lining materials are brick, cement, rubber
and glass.
Shell and Head Design

Typically, many companies normally require that tower shells and heads be designed
according to the latest edition of Section VIII Division 1 of the ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code. Towers manufactured in the United States will carry the ASME
code stamp certifying that the vessel has been designed and fabricated to code
standards. Towers manufactured outside the United States are to be designed and
fabricated according to code standards as well, but need not carry the code stamp.
Towers which are unusually large, or towers which are required to operate at a very
high pressure may be designed according to Section VIII Division 2 of the ASME
Code. Division 2 requires complete stress analysis of the process vessel. This
complete analysis allows the vessel to be designed with much smaller safety factors.
This results in a vessel which has a thinner shell and head and is therefore cheaper
to fabricate than the same vessel designed according to the rules of Division 1. Since
a Division 2 design results in a cheaper vessel, why aren’t all process vessels
designed according to the rules of Division 2? Again it is a question of economics. A
Division 2 design is so complex that the money spent in extra engineering time for
the vessel can easily exceed the savings realized in the fabrication of the vessel.
Only in very large or thick walled vessels is the economic advantage of a Division 2
clear-cut.

Pressure/vacuum, includes vessel shell, heads, transition section, single base
material, lined or clad, nozzles, manholes (one manhole below and above tray stack
or packed section and one manhole every tenth tray or 25 FEET [7.6 M] of packed
height), stiffening rings if desired, base ring, lugs, skirt or legs; tray clips, tray
supports (if designated), distributor piping, plates, packing (if packing designated);
variety of applications for plate and packed towers: absorption, desorption,
distillation or stripping (via kettle or thermosiphon reboiler defined separately),
extraction; applications for packed towers: gas and liquid adsorption; sections can be
trayed, packed, empty.
Systems with automatic installation bulks (Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer ) generate platforms for towers. A tower begins with one
360 DEGREE platform for the first 25 FEET [7.6 M], or fraction thereof, of exposed
height, plus one 90 DEGREE platform for every additional 25 FEET [7.6 M], or
fraction thereof, of exposed height. If the tower is in a structure, the system
subtracts the height of the structure from the total tower height (Bottom T-T
height + Skirt height) to calculate the total exposed height. To place a tower in a
structure, make the area type OPEN or EX-OPEN (see Chapter 36 for area type
descriptions), or else use the Structure tag number to assign the tower to the
open steel structure (OPN-STL-ST) available under steel plant bulks.
(See “Single Diameter Towers (TW)” on page 8-13 for tray stacks.)

PACKED
Packed double diameter tower.

Application:
Defines vessel function and related
pipe/instrumentation model.
Default: *ABSORB*
ABSORB - Absorption
DESORB - Desorption
DISTIL - Distillation with thermosiphon reboiler (not included)
DIS-RB - Distillation with kettler reboiler (not included)
EXTRAC - Extraction
GAS-AD - Gas adsorption
LIQ-AD - Liquid adsorption
STRIPP - Stripping with thermosiphone reboiler (not included)
STR-RB - Stripping with kettle reboiler (not included)
Base material Bottom:
For clad plate, specify the backing plate material (cladding is defined below). See Chapter 28
for materials.
Design gauge pressure Bottom.:
Default: Specified top section pressure, or 50 PSIG [350 KPA]: negative for vacuum.
Design temperature Bottom:
Default: Specified top section temp or 250 DEG F [120 DEG C].
Packing material Bottom:
Default: *NONE*
Packing height Bottom:
Default: *0.0* FEET [*0.0* M]
Cladding material Bottom:
Default: *NONE*
Skirt height:
Default: 1.5 x bottom diameter. If the tower is hung in an Open Steel Structure (BSTLOPN STL
ST) or Truckable (TRMD)/Bargeable (BRGM) module by specifying a valid structure tag, skirt is
not estimated. Enter “0.0” if the tower is hung in open structure area (area type
OPEN/EXOPEN).
Manhole diameter Bottom:
Thickness Bottom section:

Corrosion allowance Bottom:
Cladding thickness Bottom:
Stiffening ring spacing Bottom:
Base material Top:
for materials. Default: *A 515*
Design gauge pressure Top:
Default: Specified bottom section pressure or 50 PSIG [350 KPA]; negative for vacuum.
Design temperature Top:
Default: Specified bottom section temperature or 250 DEG F [120 DEG C].
Packing material Top:
Default: *NONE*
Packing height Top:
Default: *0.0* FEET [*0.0* M]
Cladding material Top:
Default: *NONE*
Pipe material Top:
Manhole diameter Top:
Thickness Top section:
Corrosion allowance Top:
Default 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] for CS, 0.0 for other materials.
Cladding thickness Top:
Stiffening ring spacing Top:
Wind or seismic design:
Default: Vessel designed for wind and seismic loads defined in project basis.
W+S - Wind and seismic design required
WIND- Wind design only
SEIS - Wind/seismic design
NONE - Delete wind and seismic design
Fluid volume:
Max: 100; Default: *20*; For seismic design, fluid volume as a% of vessel volume (water
assumed).
Vacuum design gauge pressure:
If pressure and vacuum entered, design is for worst case. Default: pressure.
Weld efficiency:
50 - 100; ASME/JIS codes only, where allowed for thin wall vessels; Default: Area Design
Basis.
Stress relief:

Molecular weight Overhead prod:
Default: 50 for distillation and stripping applications; otherwise 30.
Number body flange sets Bottom:
Number body flange sets Top:
Diameter option:
Defines desired diameter as ID or OD;
ASME design basis:
Default: *D1NF*, applicable only for ASME code design.
D1NF - ASME Division 1 - no fatigue analysis
D1F - ASME Division 1 - with fatigue analysis
TRAYED
Trayed double diameter tower.

Available tray types include: bubble cap, sieve, turbo grid, valve and clips and supports
without trays.
Tray type:
Default: *VALVE*
VALVE - Valve trays
BUBBL - Bubble cap trays
TURBO - Turbo grid trays
SIEVE - Sieve trays
NONE. - No trays
Application:
Defines vessel function and related pipe/instrumentation model; Default: *DISTIL*
ABSORB - Absorption
DESORB - Desorption
DISTIL - Distillation with thermosiphon reboiler (not included)

DIS-RB - Distillation with kettle reboiler
(not included)
EXTRAC - Extraction
STRIPP - Stripping with thermosiphon reboiler (not included)
STR-RB. - Stripping with kettle reboiler (not included)
for materials. Default: *A 515*.
Design gauge pressure Bottom:
Default: Specified top section pressure, or 50 PSIG [350 KPA]; negative for vacuum.
Default: Specified top section temperature or 250 DEG F [120 DEG C].
Bottom tray material or packing:
Specify tray material for trays or packing material for packed sections. See Chapter 28 for
materials.
Default: *A 515*.
No. trays/Packed height Bottom:
Enter number of trays for trayed sections or packing height for packed sections. Default:
*0.0*
Corrosion allowance Top:
Cladding thickness Top:
Stiffening ring spacing Top:
Default: vessel design for wind and seismic loads defined in Project Basis.
SEIS - Seismic design only
Fluid volume:
For seismic design; fluid volume as a% of vessel volume (water assumed); Max: 100; Default:
*20*.
Weld efficiency:
Range: 50 - 100; ASME/JIS codes only, where allowed for thin wall vessels; Default: Area
Basis.
Stress relief:
Molecular weight Overhead prod:
Default: 50 for distillation and stripping applications; otherwise - 30.

Number body flange sets Bottom:
Number body flange sets Top:
Diameter option:
ASME design basis:
Applicable only for ASME code design.
See following entries for fatigue data.
D2F - ASME Division 2 with fatigue analysis
Start Stop cycles x 1000:
ASME fatige only. Thousands of start-up cycles during the full equipment life; Min: 0.02;
Default: *1.0*.
Pressure cycles x 1000:
ASME fatigue only. Thousands of deviations from design pressure during equipment life.
Default: *0*.
Pressure amplitude:
ASME fatigue only. Amplitude of pressure deviation as percent of design pressure. Default:
*0*.
Number of hydrostatic tests:
ASME fatigue only. Number of hydrostatic tests during the full equipment life. Default: *20*.
Temperature cycles x 1000:
ASME fatigue only. Thousands of deviations from design temperature in equipment life.
Default: *0*.
Temperature amplitude:
ASME fatigue only. Amplitude of temperature deviation as a percent of design temperature.
Tray thickness:
Default: 0.1875 INCH [4.5 MM].

Pressure/vacuum includes vessel shell, heads, single base material (lined or clad),
nozzles, manholes, jacket and nozzles for heating or cooling medium, base ring,
lugs, skirt or legs; tray clips, tray supports (if designated), distributor piping, plates,
packing (if packing designated); variety of applications for plate and packed towers:
absorption, desorption, distillation or stripping (via kettle or thermosiphon reboiler
defined separately), extraction; applications for packed towers: gas and liquid
adsorption; trayed, packed, empty.
Systems with automatic installation bulks (Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer ) generate platforms for towers. A tower begins with one
360 DEGREE platform for the first 25 FEET [7.6 M], or fraction thereof, of exposed
height, plus one 90 DEGREE platform for every additional 25 FEET [7.6 M], or
fraction thereof, of exposed height. If the tower is in a structure, the system
subtracts the height of the structure from the total tower height (Bottom T-T
height + Skirt height) to calculate the total exposed height. To place a tower in a
structure, make the area type OPEN or EX-OPEN (see Chapter 36 for area type
descriptions), or else use the Structure tag number to assign the tower to the
open steel structure (OPN-STL-ST) available under steel plant bulks.
If the number of platforms is greater than or equal to six, then the number of
manholes is equal to one plus the number of platforms. If the number of platforms is
less than six, the number of manholes is equal to one plus approximately one for
every 18 trays (for small towers, tray spacing is about 12 INCHES, so there would be
one manhole for about every 18 FEET).

Description Type
Packed single diameter tower. PACKED

If a packing type is not specified, a packed column is
designed and costed with distributor and support
plates for average density packing.
Application:
pipe/instrumentation model; Default: *ABSORB*
ABSORB - Absorption
DESORB - Desorption
DISTIL - Distillation with thermosiphon reboiler (not
included)
DIS-RB - Distillation with kettle reboiler (not included)
EXTRAC - Extraction
STRIPP - Stripping with thermosiphon reboiler (not
included)
Shell Material:
For clad plate, specify the backing plate material
(cladding is defined below). See Chapter 28 for
materials.
Default: *A 515*.
If pressure and vacuum entered, design is for worst
case. Default: pressure *15* PSIG [*100* KPA].
case. Default: pressure.
Design Temperature:
Default: 400 DEG F [200 DEG C] for copper alloys;
otherwise material: 650 DEG F [340 DEG C].
Packing Type:
If packing type is not specified, no packing will be
provided. See Chapter 28 for packing materials.
Total Packing Height:
Max: tangent to tangent height less 1.0 FEET [0.3 M].
Demister Thickness:
Max: 12.0 INCHES [300 MM].
SS304 mist pad 12 PCF [192 KG/M3] with top and
bottom support grids.
Cladding Material:
Default: *NONE*.
Skirt Height: Default: 1.5 x diameter. If the tower is
hung in an Open Steel Structure (BSTLOPN STL ST) or
Truckable (TRMD)/Bargeable (BRGM) module by
specifying a valid structure tag, skirt is not estimated.

Enter “0.0” if the tower is hung in open structure area
(area type OPEN/EXOPEN).
Wind or Seismic Design: Default: Vessel designed
for wind and seismic loads defined in Project Basis.
Fluid Volume:
For seismic design; fluid volume as a% of vessel
volume (water assumed). Max: 100; Default: *20*.
Manhole Diameter:
Max: 48 INCHES [1,200 MM].
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] for CS; 0.0 for other
material. Double if jacketed.
Number of sets (pairs) of body flanges of same
diameter as vessel.
Weld Efficiency:
ASME/JIS Codes only, where allowed for thin wall
vessels; Default: Area Basis; Range: 50 - 100.
Stress Relief:
Cladding Thickness:
specified, otherwise - 0.0.
Default stiffeners designed for vacuum only, enter 0.0
if not required.
Jacket pressure or thickness required to obtain jacket.
Default: No jacket.
Jacket Type:
Default: *FULL*.
FULL - Full jacket
PIPE. - Half-pipe jacket
Jacket Thickness:
Default: No jacket.
Jacket Material:
See Chapter 28 for materials. Default: *CS*.
Head Type:
ELLIP - 2:1 ellipsoidal
HEMI - Hemispherical

Description Type
TORI - Torispherical (ASME)

Molecular Weight Overhead Prod:
Default: 50 for distillation and stripping applications,
otherwise 30.
Diameter Option:
Defines desired diameter as ID or OD; Default: See
Area Design Basis.
ASME Design Basis:
Start Stop Cycles x 1000:
ASME fatige only. Thousands of start-up cycles during
the full equipment life; Min: 0.02; Default: *1.0*.
Pressure Cycles x 1000:
ASME fatigue only. Thousands of deviations from
design pressure during equipment life. Default: *0*.
Pressure Amplitude:
ASME fatigue only. Amplitude of pressure deviation as
percent of design pressure. Default: *0*.
Number of Hydrostatic Tests:
ASME fatigue only. Number of hydrostatic tests during
the full equipment life. Default: *20*.
Temperature Cycles x 1000:
design temperature in equipment life. Default: *0*.
Temperature Amplitude:
ASME fatigue only. Amplitude of temperature
deviation as a percent of design temperature.
Trayed single diameter tower. TRAYED

Available tray types include: bubble cap, sieve, turbo
grid, valve and clips and supports without trays.
Tray Type:
Default: *VALVE*
VALVE - Valve tray
SIEVE - Sieve trays
NONE - No trays

Application:
pipe/instrumentation model; Default: *DISTIL*.
ABSORB - Absorption
DESORB - Desorption
DISTIL - Distillation with thermosiphon reboiler (not
included)
DIS-RB - Distillation with kettle reboiler (not included)
EXTRAC - Extraction
STRIPP - Stripping with thermosiphon reboiler (not
included)
Shell Material:
(cladding is defined below). Default: *A 515*.
Default: 15 FEET [4.5 M] plus tray stack height.
case. Default: pressure *15* PSIG [*100* KPA].
Design Temperature:
otherwise material: 650 DEG F [340 DEG C].
Tray Material:
See Chapter 28 for materials. Default: *A285C*.
Number of Trays:
Min: 2
Tray Spacing:
Range: 12 - 30 INCHES [305 -760 MM]; Default:
*24* INCHES [*600* MM].
Demister Thickness:
Max: 12 INCHES [300 MM]
Cladding Material:
Default: *NONE*.
Skirt Height:
Default: 1.5 x bottom diameter. If the tower is hung
in an Open Steel Structure (BSTLOPN STL ST) or
Wind or Seismic Design:
Default: Vessel designed for wind and seismic loads
defined in Project Basis.

Description Type

Fluid Volume:
For seismic design; fluid volume as a% of vessel
Manhole Diameter:
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] for CS; 0.0 for other
material. Double if jacketed.
diameter as vessel.
Weld Efficiency:
ASME/JIS Codes only, where allowed for thin wall
vessels; Range: 50 - 100; Default: Area Basis.
Stress Relief:
CODE, YES, NO; Default: See Area Design Basis.
Cladding Thickness:
specified, otherwise - 0.0.
if not required.
Jacket Design Gauge Pressure: Jacket pressure or
thickness required to obtain jacket. Default: No
jacket.
Jacket Type:
Default: *FULL*
FULL - Full jacket
Jacket Thickness:
Default: No jacket.
Jacket Material:
Head Type:
TORI - Torishpherical (ASME)
Molecular Weight Overhead Prod:
Default: 50 for distillation and stripping applications,
otherwise 30.
Diameter Option:
Area Design Basis.

Description Type
OD- Outside diameter

ID- Inside diameter
Tray Thickness:
Default: *0.187* INCHES [*4.50* MM];
Max: 0.375 INCHES [9.00 MM]
ASME Design Basis:
Start Stop Cycles x 1000:
ASME fatige only. Thousands of start-up cycles during
the full equipment life; Min: 0.02; Default: *1.0*.
design pressure during equipment life. Default: *0*.
Pressure Amplitude:
ASME fatigue only. Amplitude of pressure deviation as
percent of design pressure. Default: *0*.
ASME fatigue only. Number of hydrostatic tests during
the full equipment life. Default: *20*.
Temperature Cycles x 1000:
design temperature in equipment life. Default: *0*.
Temperature Amplitude:
ASME fatigue only. Amplitude of temperature
deviation as a percent of design temperature.
Direct contact heat exchanger tower includes DC HE TW

distributors, packing supports, nozzles; may include
packing.
Shell Material:
materials.
Default: *A 515*.
Gas Flow Rate Inlet:
Range: 30,000 - 300,000 LB/H [13,610 - 136,000
KG/H]; Enter either flowrate or diameter and height.
Vessel Diameter:
Enter either flowrate or diameter and height.

case. Default: pressure 15 PSIG [100 KPA].
Design Temperature:
other material: 650 DEG F [340 DEG C].
Enter maximum gas temperature.
Packing Type Section 1:
Default: *68PVC*. See Chapter 28 for packing
materials.
Packing Height Section 1:
Max: Tangent to tangent height less 1.0 FEET [0.3 M].
Default: None for OPEN top, else 68PVC.
See Chapter 28 for packing materials.
Max: Tangent to tangent height less height of packing
No. 1.
Cladding Material:
Default: *NONE*.
Skirt Height:
WIND- Wind display only
Fluid Volume:
For seismic design, fluid volume as a% of vessel
Manhole Diameter:
material, double if jacketed.

Description Type

diameter as vessel.
Weld Efficiency:
ASME/JIS codes only, where allowed for thin wall
vessels; Default: See Area Basis; Range: 50 - 100%.
Stress Relief:
Cladding Thickness:
specified, otherwise 0.0.
if not required.
Default: No jacket.
Jacket Type:
Default: *FULL*
FULL - Full jacket
Jacket Thickness:
Jacket pressure or thickness required to obtain
jacket. Default: No jacket.
Jacket Material:
Head Type:
OPEN - Open top/TORI bottom
Diameter Option:
Area Design Basis.
Temperature swing adsorption unit includes vessel TS ADSORB

pair(s), distributors, packing supports, and valve skid;
may include heater (steam or electric), packing.
Shell Material:
materials.
Default: *A 515*.

Gas Flow Rate Inlet:
Enter either flowrate or diameter and height; Range:
30,000 - 300,000 LB/H [13,610 - 136,000 KG/H].
Vessel Diameter:
Number of Vessel Pairs:
Number of vessel pairs in configuration, one vessel
per pair absorbing at a time.
case. Default: pressure 15 PSIG [100 KPA].
Design Temperature:
other material: 650 DEG F [340 DEG C].
See Chapter 28 for packing materials; Default:
*13XMS*.
Max: Tangent to tangent height less 1.0 FEET [0.3 M].
Default: *ALMNA* (Alumina).
Max: Tangent to tangent height less height of packing
No. 1.
Cladding Material:
Default: *NONE*.
Skirt Height:
WIND- Wind design only`
Fluid Volume:
For seismic design, fluid volume as a% of vessel
Manhole Diameter:

diameter as vessel.
Weld Efficiency:
vessels; Range: 50 - 100%; Default: See Area Basis.
Stress Relief:
Cladding Thickness:
specified, otherwise 0.0.
if not required.
Default: No jacket.
Jacket Type: Default: *FULL*
FULL - Full jacket
Jacket Thickness:
Default: No jacket.
Jacket Material:
Head Type:
OPEN - Open top/TORI bottom
Heater Type:
*ELEC* - Electric heater
STEAM - Steam heater
NONE - No heater
Applies to steam gas heater only
Diameter Option:

Multi-Diameter Towers (DTW)
Multiple Diameter Trayed or Packed
Double-diameter tower with multiple sections. Each section can be trayed
or packed.
Trayed double diameter tower.
Available tray types include: bubble cap, sieve, turbo grid, valve and clips
and supports without trays.
For Trayed Sections:
Available tray types include: bubble cap, sieve, turbo grid, valve and clips
and supports without trays.
Tray type:
Default: *VALVE*
VALVE - Valve trays
SIEVE - Sieve trays
NONE. - No trays
Application:
pipe/instrumentation model; Default: *DISTIL*
ABSORB - Absorption
DESORB - Desorption
DISTIL - Distillation with thermosiphon reboiler
(not included)
DIS-RB - Distillation with kettle reboiler
not included)
EXTRAC - Extraction
STRIPP - Stripping with thermosiphon reboiler
(not included)
STR-RB. - Stripping with kettle reboiler
(not included)
For Bottom section:
for materials.
Default: *A 515*.
Diameter Bottom section:
Diameter of Bottom section
Bottom tangent to tangent height:
Enter either Capacity or Diameter and Height
Base material thickness including corrosion allowance
Design gauge pressure Bottom:

For Middle section:
Base material Middle:
for materials.
Default: *A 515*.
Design gauge pressure Middle:
Default: Specified middle section pressure, or 50 PSIG [350 KPA]; negative for vacuum.
Design temperature Middle:
Default: Specified middle section temperature or 250 DEG F [120 DEG C].
For Top section:
Base material Top:
for materials.
Default: *A 515*.
Design gauge pressure Top:
Design temperature Top:
Diameter option:

9 Vacuum Systems
Condensers (C)
Ejectors (EJ)
Vacuum Pumps (VP)
9 Vacuum Systems - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 9-1

Condensers (C)
Barometric condenser
Condensers (C)
Description Type
Barometric for condensing of motive steam between BAROMETRIC

ejector stages.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Water flow rate:
Range: 200 - 5,000 GPM [15 - 315 L/S]
Material:
CI
Water flow rate:
Range: 40 - 5,000 GPM [3 - 315 L/S]
Material:
RBLCS (rubber lined carbon steel)
Water flow rate:
Range: 200 - 3,000 GPM [12 - 180 L/S]
9-2 9 Vacuum Systems

Ejectors (EJ)
100 PSIG [690 KPA] steam
Ejectors (EJ)
Description Type
One stage of non-condensing ejection. SINGLE STG

Single stage ejectors may be used to produce
pressures as low as 2 INCHES Hg ABS, but are
normally used in the pressure range from
atmospheric to 3 INCHES Hg ABS. Ejectors are used
to generate low pressure for vacuum distillation,
vacuum crystallization and evaporation and to
produce chilled water.
Ejectors use a high pressure motivating fluid, usually
steam, to produce a vacuum. The single stage ejector
consists of three basic parts: nozzle, mixing chamber
or suction head, and diffuser. Although ejectors can
be fabricated from a variety of material, usually the
nozzle is stainless steel and the mixing chamber and
diffuser are cast iron or steel. Ejectors are easily
recognized by the long thin hour-glass shape of the
diffuser.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
HAST - Hastelloy
Air ejection rate:
Range: 10 - 10,000 LB/H [4.6 - 4,530 KG/H]
Suction absolute pressure:
Range: 20 - 400 MM HG [2,670 - 53,300 PA]
Two ejection stages with barometric intercondenser TWO STAGE

Two stage ejectors are used to produce suction
pressures from 4 to 0.5 INCHES Hg ABS. Two stage
ejectors have the same process applications as single
stage ejectors.
This item is a two stage ejector with a barometric
type intercondenser. A two stage ejector is simply
two single stage ejectors arranged in series. Two
stages can produce a higher vacuum than a single
stage ejector. The first stage evacuates the
equipment item to which it is attached and
compresses these gases and vapors to an
intermediate pressure.
The motive steam and condensable vapors ejected by

the first stage are condensed in the barometric

Ejectors (EJ)
Description Type
condenser to reduce the load on the second stage.

The second stage ejector takes the non-condensable
gasses from the first stage and compresses them to
atmospheric pressure so that they may be released to
the atmosphere.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
HAST - Hastelloy
Air ejection rate:
Range: 10 - 150 LB/H [4.6 -68 KG/H]
Range: 10 - 200 MM HG [1,340 - 26,600 PA]
Non-condensing two single stage ejectors without 2 STAGE

intercondenser. A two stage non-condensing ejector
is less expensive than a two stage condensing ejector
on an installed basis. The non-condensing ejector
may be used for an application where the condensing
ejector is used. Therefore, the non-condensing ejector
is preferred where the lower initial capital investment
out-weighs the higher operating cost due to the
higher steam consumption.
This item is a two stage non-condensing ejector. Two
single stage ejectors are arranged in series without
an intercondenser. Hence, the second stage
condenser must handle the motive steam from the
first stage ejector and the gases evacuated from the
process vessel. This results in a larger second stage
ejector and increased steam consumption over a two
stage condensing unit.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
HAST - Hastelloy
Air ejection rate:
Range: 10 - 120 LB/H [4.6 - 50 KG/H]
Range: 5 - 100 MM HG [670 - 13,3000 PA]

Ejectors (EJ)
Description Type
Four stages of ejection with barometric condenser 4 STAGE B

between third and fourth ejector.
Four stage ejectors are used to produce suction
pressures from 4 to 0.2 MM Hg ABS. Four stage
ejectors are used to produce suction for vacuum
distillation, vacuum crystallizers and vacuum
evaporators.
This item is a four stage ejector with one barometric
condenser between the third and fourth ejectors. The
condenser is used only between those stages where
the condensing temperature of the steam is greater
than the temperature of the cooling water available.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
HAST - Hastelloy
Air ejection rate:
Range: 10 - 110 LB/H [4.6 - 48 KG/H]
Range: 0.5 - 10 MM HG [67 - 1,330 PA]
Four stages of ejection with barometric condensers, 4 STAGE

between second and third and between third and
fourth ejector. Four stage ejectors are used to
produce suction pressure from 4 to 0.2 MM Hg ABS.
Four stage ejectors are used to produce suction for
vacuum distillation, vacuum crystallizers, and vacuum
evaporators.
This item is a four stage ejector with two barometric
condensers. Four ejectors are arranged in series with
one condenser between the second and third ejectors
and the other between the third and four ejectors.
Condensers are used only between those ejectors
where the condensing temperature of the steam is
greater than the temperature of the cooling water
available.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
HAST - Hastelloy
Air ejection rate:
Range: 10 - 110 LB/H [4.6 - 48 KG/H]
Range: 0.25 - 5.0 MM HG [33 - 660 PA]

Ejectors (EJ)
Description Type
Five stages of ejection with barometric condenser 5 STAGE B

between fourth and fifth ejector.
Five stage ejectors are used to produce suction
pressures from 0.4 to 0.02 MM Hg ABS. Five stage
ejectors are used to produce suction for vacuum
distillation, vacuum crystallizers and vacuum
evaporators.
This item is a five stage ejector with one barometric
condenser between the fourth and fifth ejectors.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
HAST - Hastelloy
Air ejection rate:
Range: 10 - 110 LB/H [4.6 - 48 KG/H]
Range: 0.5 - 1.0 MM HG [7 - 130 PA]

Vacuum Pumps (VP)
Includes pump, motor and drive unit.
Vacuum Pumps (VP)

Description Type
Water-sealed vacuum pump. WATER SEAL

Ultimate pressure: 500 MM HG [66,660 PA].
Water-sealed 500 MM HG [PA] vacuum, explosion
proof motor.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
SS316 - SS316
Range: 30 - 4,000 CFM [55 - 6,750 M3/H]
Mechanical oil-sealed vacuum pump. MECHANICAL

First stage: 0.01 MM HG [1.35 PA]
Second stage: 0.0003 MM HG [0.04 PA].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
Range: 30 - 700 CFM [55 - 1,150 M3/H]
Number of stages:
Mechanical booster includes motor and drive. MECH BOOST

Ultimate pressure 0.0001 MM HG [0.0135 PA].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
Range: 120 - 2,000 CFW [205 - 3,375 M3/H]

10 Vessels

Vertical Tanks (VT)
10 Vessels - Vacuum Pumps (VP) 10-1

Horizontal vessels are commonly used as settling drums, surge tanks, reactors and
distillate drums. A settling drum is used for phase separation between two
immiscible liquids. The L/D ratio of a settling drum is normally four. A surge tank or
surge drum is used to maintain a constant flowrate of liquid to a downstream piece
of equipment when the flowrate of liquid from the upstream piece of equipment is
fluctuating. The fluctuations in flow rate are absorbed by the surge drum by allowing
the liquid level in this drum to rise and fall. Horizontal drums are frequently filled
with catalyst and used as reactors. Placing catalyst in horizontal vessels allows
shallow bed depths and large cross-sectional areas. A typical example of horizontal
vessels being used as reactors is the Claus reactor. A distillate or reflux drum
provides space for overhead condensables from a distillation column to separate
from vapors. Surge drums and distillate drums are normally vertical. If there is
settleable water in the feed to these vessels, however, the vessel is erected with a
water pot.
The horizontal vessel is a pressure vessel fabricated according to the rules of the
specified code (i.e., Section VIII Division 1 of the ASME Code) and erected in the
horizontal position. Although the horizontal vessel may be supported by lugs in an
open steel structure, the more usual arrangement is for the vessel to be erected at
grade and supported by a pair of saddles.
Cylindrical, pressure/vacuum, code design and construction, includes heads, single
wall (base material, clad/lined), saddles/lugs, nozzles and manholes.

Description Type
Horizontal pressure/vacuum drum. HORIZ DRUM

Use minus pressure for vacuum design.
The capacity excludes the volume of the heads. If
both the vessel dimensions and capacity are
specified, the system-calculated capacity must agree
with the specified capacity to within plus or minus
10% to avoid an error condition.
To secure desired vessel size, specify the diameter
and height directly. A value must be specified if
vessel diameter and/or vessel height (or length) are
not specified. If vessel diameter and height (or
length) are specified, the vessel volume is calculated
from these dimensions. If only vessel capacity is
specified, a straight side length-to-diameter ratio is
chosen by the system, considering cost and
practicability.
(Default ratio is 2:1.)
Application:
piping/instrumentation model.
Default: *blank*
blank- Standard continuous process vessel
BATCH- Batch process vessel
STORAGE - Storage vessel
10-2 10 Vessels
Description Type
RECVR - Receiver
KO - Knock-out drum
Shell material:
For clad plate, specify the backing plate material.
(Cladding is defined below.) See Chapter 28 for
materials.
Default: *A 515*.
Liquid volume:
Enter either capacity or diameter and length. The
capacity excludes the volume of the heads.
If both the vessel dimensions and capacity are
and height directly.
A value must be specified if vessel diameter and/or
vessel height (or length) are not specified. If vessel
diameter and height (or length) are specified, the
vessel volume is calculated from these dimensions.
If only vessel capacity is specified, a straight side
length-to-diameter ratio is chosen by the system,
considering cost and practicability.
Vessel diameter:
Enter either capacity or diameter and length. A value
must be specified if vessel capacity is not specified. If
both capacity and height (or length) are specified, the
diameter is calculated from these values.
Vessel tangent to tangent length:
both vessel capacity and diameter are specified, the
height (or length) is calculated from these values.
case; Default: *15* PSIG [*100* KPA] pressure.

Design temperature:
Default: 650 DEG F [340 DEG C] ferrous material;
250 DEG F [120 DEG C] other material.
Default: design temperature. The operating
temperature is used in the calculation of piping and
insulation thickness.
Cladding material:
10 Vessels - Horizontal Tanks (HT) 10-3

Manhole diameter:
Max: 48 INCHES [1,200 MM]; Default: *18* INCHES
[*450* MM].
Number of manholes:
Default: *1*.
Allowance for internals:
Specify an allowance for internals as a percent of
basic vessel weight. Default: *0.0*. This value
adjusts vessel weight and cost accordingly.
Diameter of drip leg:
Drip leg (boot) diameter and height must be specified
if required.
Height of drip leg:
Drip leg (boot) diameter and height must be specified
if required.
Base material thickness:
Base material thickness including corrosion
allowance.
Corrosion allowance:
materials.
Weld efficiency:
vessel; Default: Area Basis. Range: 50 - 100.
Stress relief:
Cladding thickness:
specified, otherwise: 0.0.
Stiffening ring spacing:
if not required.
Head type:
If no value is specified, the system selects the tori
spherical type and calculates its thickness. If the
head is thicker than the vessel shell, the system
selects the 2:1 ellipsoidal type head thickness. If the
head is still thicker than the shell, the system selects
the hemispherical type head.
Number of body flange sets:
diameter as vessel.
Diameter option:
Defines desired diameter as ID or OD; Default - see
Area Design Basis.
10-4 10 Vessels
Description Type
Jacketed horizontal pressure/vacuum drum. JACKETED

Application:
Default: *blank*
Blank - Standard continuous process vessel
BATCH - Batch process vessel
RECVR - Receiver
KO - Knock-out drum
Shell material:
For clad plate, specify the backing plate material. See
Chapter 28 for materials. Default: *A 515*.
Liquid volume:
Enter either capacity or diameter and length.
Vessel diameter:
case; Default: *15* PSIG [*100* KPA].
case; Default: pressure.
Design temperature:
250 DEG F [120 DEG C] other materials.
Default: design temperature.
Cladding material:
Jacket design gauge pressure:
Default: *90* PSIG [*620* KPA].
Jacket type:
Default: *FULL*
FULL - Full jacket
Jacket material:
Manhole diameter:
Default: *18* INCHES [450 MM]; Max: 48 INCHES
[1,200];
Number of manholes: Default: *1*.
basic vessel weight. Default: *0.0*.
Drip leg (boot) diameter and length must be specified
if required.
10-6 10 Vessels
Description Type
Height of drip leg:

if required.
allowance.
Weld efficiency:
vessels; Default: Area Basis. Range: 50 - 100.
Stress relief: Default: See Area Design Basis.
Cladding thickness:
specified; otherwise: 0.0.
if not required.
Head type:
diameter as vessel.
Diameter option:
Area Design Basis.
Multi-wall design for high pressure service with total MULTI WALL
wall thickness of individual, thin, heat-shrunk
cylinders (maximum 2 INCHES [50 MM] thick) heat
shrunk, pressure vacuum design and construction
according to user-designated design code standard.
This item is a horizontal process vessel, the total wall
thickness of which is made up of individual cylinders.
Each individual cylinder is no more than two inches
thick. The composite is made as follows. A cylinder is
fabricated with a diameter slightly larger than the
innermost cylinder.
This cylinder is expanded thermally, slipped over the
inner cylinder and as it cools, a tight shrink fit is

Description Type
obtained. This procedure is repeated until the total

wall thickness is built up.
Application:
Default: *blank*
blank- Standard continuous process vessel
RECVR - Receiver
KO - Knock-out drum
Shell material:
materials. Default: *A 515*.
Liquid volume:
Vessel diameter:
case. Default: *15* PSIG [*100* KPA].
Design temperature:
Cladding material:
See Chapter 28; for cladding materials.
Manhole diameter:
Default: *18* INCHES [450 MM];
Max: 48 INCHES [1,200];
basic vessel weight. Default: *0.0*.
if required.
Height of drip leg:
if required.
10-8 10 Vessels
Description Type

allowance.
material.
Weld efficiency:
vessels; Default: Area Basis. Range: 50 - 100.
Stress relief: Default: See Area Design Basis.
Cladding thickness:
specified; otherwise: 0.0.
if not required.
Head type:
diameter as vessel.
Diameter option:
Area Design Basis.

Crude Oil Desalter DHT DESALTER
Horizontal pressure/vacuum drum.
The capacity excludes the volume of the heads. If
both the vessel dimensions and capacity are
and height directly. A value must be specified if
vessel diameter and/or vessel height (or length) are
not specified. If vessel diameter and height (or
length) are specified, the vessel volume is calculated
from these dimensions. If only vessel capacity is
specified, a straight side length-to-diameter ratio is
chosen by the system, considering cost and
practicability.
Default ratio is 2:1.
Shell material:
materials.
Default: *A 515*.
Vessel diameter:
A value must be specified if vessel capacity is not
specified. If both capacity and height (or length)are
specified, the diameter is calculated from these
values.
both vessel capacity and diameter are specified, the
height (or length) is calculated from these values.
case;
Default: *15* PSIG [*100*KPA] pressure.
case.
Default: pressure.
Design temperature:
Default: design temperature. The operating
temperature is used in the calculation of piping and
insulation thickness.
allowance.
10-10 10 Vessels
materials.
Cladding material:
CLAD MATLS See Chapter 28 for cladding materials.
SS304
SS316
SS321
SS347
SS410
SS430
304L
316L
NI200
NI201
MONEL
INCNL
Cladding thickness:
specified; otherwise: 0.0
Vessel Internals
basic vessel weight.
Default:*0.0*. This value adjusts vessel weight and
cost accordingly.
Number of electrostatic plates:
Min > 0
Transition Sectn (Middle-Top)
Head type:
If no value is specified, the system selects the
torispherical type and calculates its thickness. If the
head is thicker than the vessel shell, the system
selects the 2:1 ellipsoidal type head thickness. If the
head is still thicker than the shell, the system selects
the hemispherical type head.
Weld efficiency:
vessel; Default: Area Basis. Range: 50 - 100.
Stress relief:
Diameter option:
Defines desired diameter as ID or OD; Default – see
Area Design Basis.

Description Type
Manhole diameter:
Max: 48 INCHES [1,200 MM]; Default: *18*
INCHES [*450* MM].
Number of manholes:
Default: *1*.
Sanitary horizontal drum SAN TANK

Stainless steel material for sanitary storage. As a
sanitary tank, it is built to sanitary standards,
including polished stainless steel. The tank is not a
pressure vessel.
Shell material: SS304,*SS316*
Liquid volume:
MAX: 9,000 GALLONS [34 M3]
Vessel diameter:
MAX: 10 FEET [3 M]
Vessel length:
MAX: 15 FEET [4.5 M]
*68 DEG F [20 DEG C]*
Head type:
*TORI*- Torispherical (ASME)
CON15- 15 degree cone head
Jacket type:
*NONE*- No jacket
DMPLE- 90 PSIG [620 KPA] dimple jacket
10-12 10 Vessels
Vertical Tanks (VT)
Vertical process vessels are typically used as either surge drums or knock out drums.
When used as surge drums, they act like shock absorbers, maintaining a constant
flowrate of liquid out of the vessel regardless of the flowrate into it. If liquid flows in
faster than the constant rate it flows out, the vessel fills with liquid. If liquid flows in
slower than the constant rate it is removed, then the liquid level drops. The liquid
level is constantly fluctuating in order to absorb these variations in flow and maintain
a constant flowrate out. When a vertical process vessel is used as a knock out drum,
a mixture of gas and liquid flows into the vessel and this mixture is separated into its
gas and liquid components within the vessel. The gas then flows out the top of the
vessel and the liquid flows out the bottom.
Vertical process vessels, as their name indicates, are erected in the vertical position.
They are cylindrical in shape with each end capped by a domed cover called a head.
The length to diameter ratio of a vertical vessel is typically 3:1.
Typically, vertical process vessels hold less than 5000 GALLONS.
Vertical tanks include: process, storage applications liquid, gas, solid processing and
storage; pressure/vacuum code design for process and certain storage vessel types;
includes heads, single wall, saddles, lugs, nozzles, manholes, legs or skirt, base ring,
davits where applicable.
CYLINDER
Pressure/Vacuum Service
Cylindrical vertical pressure/vacuum vessel.
Application:
Defines vessel function and related piping/instrumentation model. Default: *blank*
Blank - Standard continuous process vessel
RECVR - Receiver
KO - Knock-out drum
Shell material:
Default: *A 515*.
Liquid volume: Enter either capacity or diameter and height. The capacity excludes the
volume of the heads. If both the vessel dimensions and capacity are specified, the system
calculated capacity must agree with the specified capacity to within plus or minus 10% to
avoid an error condition. To secure desired vessel size, specify the diameter and height
directly. A value must be specified if vessel diameter and/or vessel height (or length) are not
specified. If vessel diameter and height (or length) are specified, the vessel volume is
10 Vessels - Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-13

calculated from these dimensions. (Default is 2:1.) If only vessel capacity is specified, a
straight side length-to-diameter ratio is chosen by the system, considering cost and
practicability.
Vessel diameter:
Enter either capacity or diameter and height. A value must be specified if vessel capacity is
not specified. If both vessel capacity and height (or length) are specified, the diameter is
calculated from these values. If both vessel capacity and diameter are specified, the height (or
length) is calculated from these values.
Vessel tangent to tangent height:
See Diameter.
If pressure and vacuum entered, design is for worst case; Default: *15* PSIG [*100* KPA].
If pressure and vacuum entered, design is for worst case; Default: pressure.
Design temperature:
Default: 650 DEG F [340 DEG C] ferrous material, 250 DEG F [120 DEG C] other material.
Skirt height:
Skip if legs are required. Default: 1.5 x diameter. If the vessel is hung in an Open Steel
valid structure tag, skirt is not estimated. Enter “0.0” if the vessel is hung in open structure
If the capacity is 10,000 GALLONS [37 M3] or less, the vessel is designed with 4-feet [1.25 M]
pipe legs. For a capacity greater than 10,000 GALLONS [37 M3], the vessel is designed with a
skirt. The skirt height is calculated as 1.5 x vessel diameter, with minimum and maximum
calculated heights of 4 - 32 FEET [1.25 - 9.5 M].
Vessel leg height:
Skip if skirt required. Default: *4* FEET [1.25 M].If the vessel is hung in an Open Steel
valid structure tag, leg is not estimated. Enter “0.0” if the vessel is hung in open structure
Default: Vessel designed for wind and seismic loads defined in Project Basis.
Fluid volume:
For seismic design, fluid volume as a% of vessel volume (water assumed). Max: 100; Default:
*20*.
Manhole diameter: Max: 48 INCHES [1,200 MM];
Default: 18 INCHES [450 MM].
Number of manholes:
Default: *1*.
Default: *0.0*; Specify an allowance for internals as a percent of basic vessel weight.
Demister thickness:
10-14 10 Vessels
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM for CS, 0.0 for other materials.
Weld efficiency:
ASME/JIS codes only, where allowed for thin wall vessels; Defaults: Area Basis. Range: 50 -
100.
Stress relief:
Cladding material:
If no cladding material is specified, the system assumes that the vessel is not clad regardless
of any input for cladding thickness.
Cladding thickness:
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] if cladding material is specified, otherwise 0.0. See Cladding
Material.
Head type:
If no value is specified, the system selects the torispherical type head and calculates the
thickness. If the head is thicker than the vessel shell, the system selects the 2:1 ellipsoidal
type head and recalculates the head thickness. If the head is still thicker than the shell, the
system selects the hemispherical type head.
Head thickness Top:
Head thickness Bottom:
Diameter option:
Defines desired diameter as ID or OD; Default: See Area Design Basis.
ASME design basis:
Applicable only for ASME code design. See following entries for fatigue data. Default: *D1NF*.
D1NF- ASME Division 1 - no fatigue analysis
D1F- ASME Division 1 - with fatigue analysis
D2NF- ASME Division 2 - no fatigue analysis
D2F- ASME Division 2 - with fatigue analysis
Start stop cycles x 1000:
ASME fatigue only. Thousands of start-up cycles during the full equipment life. Range: 5.00 -
0.02.
Default: *0*.
Pressure amplitude:
ASME fatigue only. Amplitude of process deviation as percent of design pressure. Default: *0*.

Default: *0*.
ASME fatigue only. Amplitude of temperature as a percent of design temperature. Default:
*0*.
JACKETED
Jacketed, cylindrical, vertical pressure/vacuum vessel.

Application:
blank - Standard continuous process vessel
RECVR - Receiver
KO - Knock-out drum
Shell material:
(Cladding is specified below.) Default: *A 515*.
Liquid volume:
Vessel diameter:
If pressure and vacuum entered, design is for worst case. Default: *15* PSIG [*100* KPA].
Design temperature:
Default: 650 DEG F [340 DEG C] ferrous material, 250 DEG F [120 DEG C] other material.
Jacket type:
Default: *FULL*
FULL - Full jacket
10-16 10 Vessels
Jacket material:
Skirt height:
Skip if legs required. Default: *1.5 x diameter*. If the vessel is hung in an Open Steel
Vessel leg height:
Skip if skirt required. Default: *4* FEET [*1.25* M]. If the vessel is hung in an Open Steel
Fluid volume:
Max: 100; Default: *20*; For seismic design; fluid volume as a% of vessel volume (water
assumed).
Manhole diameter:
Specify an allowance for internals as a percent of basic vessel weight. Default: *0.0*.
Demister thickness:
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] for CS, 0.0 for other material, double if jacketed.
Weld efficiency:
ASME/JIS codes only, where allowed for thin wall vessels; Range: 50 - 100; Default: Area
Basis.
Stress relief:
Cladding material:
Cladding thickness:
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] if cladding material is specified, otherwise - 0.0.
Head type:

Head thickness Top:
Diameter option:
Defines desired diameter as ID or OD; Default: see Area Design Basis.
ASME design basis:
Default: *D1NF*.
ASME fatigue only. Thousands of start-up cycles during the full equipment life.
Range: 5.00 - 0.02.
Default: *0*.
Pressure amplitude:
Number of hydrostatic Tests:
Default: *0*.
*0*.
MULTI WALL
Multi-wall design for high pressure service. Total wall thickness of individual thin heat shrunk
cylinders (maximum 2 INCH [50 MM] thick each).
Application:
blank - Standard continuous process vessel
10-18 10 Vessels
RECVR - Receiver
KO - Knock-out drum
Shell material:
See Chapter 28 for materials. Default: *A 515*.
Liquid volume:
Vessel diameter:
If pressure and vacuum entered, design is for worst case. Default: *15* PSIG [*100* KPA].
Skirt height:
Skip if legs required. Default: 1.5 x diameter. If the vessel is hung in an Open Steel Structure
(BSTLOPN STL ST) or Truckable (TRMD)/Bargeable (BRGM) module by specifying a valid
structure tag, skirt is not estimated. Enter “0.0” if the vessel is hung in open structure area
Vessel leg height:
Fluid volume:
Max: 100; Default: *20*; For seismic design; fluid volume as a% of volume (water assumed).
Manhole diameter:
Number of manholes:
Default: *1*.
Demister thickness:

Weld efficiency:
ASME/JIS codes only, where allowed for thin wall vessels; Range: 50 - 100; Default: Area
Basis.
Stress relief:
Default: see Area Design Basis.
Cladding material:
Cladding thickness:
Head type:
Head thickness Top:
Diameter option:
ASME design basis:
Default: *D1NF*.
Range: 5.00 - 0.02.
Default: *0*.
Pressure amplitude:
Default: *0*.
10-20 10 Vessels
*0*.
SPHERE
High Pressure Gas/Liquid Storage

Sphere pressure/vacuum design to 3000 PSIG [20500 KPA].
This item is used by chemical, rubber, petroleum and paper industries for storing large
volumes of anhydrous ammonia, betana, butane and other gases at high temperature.
A spherical tank is elevated and supported by legs fabricated from structural steel columns or
pipe. Sphere sizes range as high as 90 FEET in diameter and are typically constructed of high
strength steel. These tanks are commonly used for high pressure storage of gases and volatile
liquids, typically in the range of 5 - 250 PSIG. Storing volatile liquids at high pressures raises
the boiling point of the liquid and therefore minimizes or eliminates that need for costly
refrigeration equipment to liquefy the material being stored.
Uses Type 16 foundation (Individual Column Footing).
Shell material:
For clad plate, specify the backing plate material. See Chapter 28 for materials. Default: *A
515*.
Liquid volume:
Enter either capacity or diameter.
Vessel diameter:
Enter either capacity or diameter.
-15 - 3,000 PSIG [-100 - 20,5000];
Default: 15 PSIG [100 KPA].
Design temperature:
Max: 1,500 DEG F [815 DEG C];
Manhole diameter:
Number of manholes:
Default: *1*.

Cladding material:
Cladding thickness:
Diameter option:
ASME design basis:
Default: *D1NF*.
Range: 5.00 - 0.02.
Default: *0*.
Pressure amplitude:
Default: *0*.
*0*.
SPHEROID
Spheroid to 750000 GALLONS [2840 M3]. Field erected.

This item is commonly used for storage of gasolines and other volatile liquids.
Spheroids vary in shape and size, but generally fall into one of the following categories:
• Hemispheriod: Spherical segments comprising the roof and bottom of the tank are joined to
a cylindrical middle section. Hemispheriods are used for pressures up to 5 PSI and
capacities to 25,000 barrels. For capacities to 50,000 barrels the roof and bottom are
noded.
10-22 10 Vessels
• Hortonspheriod: Spherical segments are joined together in a somewhat elliptical shape.
Hortonspheroids are capable of handling storage at pressure from 5 to 30 PSIG.
Hortonspheroids and hemispheroids are designed to rest on a prepared grade conforming to
the shape of the bottom (usually sand).
Spheroidal shaped tanks are often more economical than cylindrical pressure vessels for
storage at pressures greater than 0.5 PSI.
Uses Type 16 foundation (Individual Column Footing).
Shell material:
See Chapter 28 for materials. Default: *A 515*.
Liquid volume:
Range: 60,000 - 750,000 GALLONS [230 - 2,840 M3];
Vessel diameter:
Vessel height:
Range: 0.0 - 15 PSIG [0.0 - 100 KPA];
Design temperature:
Manhole diameter:
Number of manholes:
Default: *1*.
Default: Specify an allowance for internals as a percent of basic vessel weight. Default: *0.0*.
Cladding material:
Cladding thickness:
Diameter option:
Default - see Area Design Basis.
STORAGE
Flat roof tank

Floating Roof Tank
Cone roof tank
Lifter roof tank
Open top tank
Near-Atmospheric Liquid Storage

Field erected storage tank.
Note on Painting: The system assumes that once the tank is assembled in the field it will be
sandblasted and primed inside and out, and a finish coat applied on the outside only. Use Bulk
Adjustments to override these values.
The available roof types are FLAT, FLOAT, CONE, LIFT, OPEN, INFLT, and INCN.
Use minus pressure for vacuum design. Field erected.
Floating roof tanks are frequently used in the storage of kerosene and jet fuels. Floating roofs
may be installed inside a tank with a fixed roof or used as a tank’s only cover. Typically
constructed from polyurethane foam blocks or nylon cloth impregnated with rubber or plastic,
floating roofs are designed to completely contact the surface of the storage products and
thereby eliminate the vapor space between the product level and the fixed roof.
This feature makes floating roofs desirable for the following reasons:
1. Reduction of evaporation and breathing losses.
2. Reduction of tank corrosion.
3. Increased safety from fire or explosion.
Floating root tanks are suitable for storage of products having vapor pressures from 2 to 15
PSIA. Products that boil at temperatures under the normal range of atmospheric conditions
should not be stored in floating roof tanks.
10-24 10 Vessels
Cone roof tanks are used for storage of low pressure products (e.g., oil, diesel and asphalt.)
Cone roof tanks are usually field fabricated out of carbon steel. Roofs are sloped upward to the
center at a slight angle. Typically, ranging from 50,000 - 1,000,000 GALLONS capacities, they
are used for storage of low vapor pressure products (less than 2 PSIA) when evaporation
losses and breathing losses are not considered important.
Lifter roof tanks are generally field fabricated. They have a minimum capacity of 40,000
GALLONS [152 M3]. Lifter roof tanks can be specified with pressure from 0 - 0.05 PSIG [0 -
0.3 KPA] and a maximum temperature of 250 DEG F [120 DEC C]. The default temperature is
*68* DEG F [*20* DEG C].
Open top tanks are designed and constructed according to user-generated design code
standards. Open top tanks have a maximum temperature of 250 DEG F [120 DEC C]. The
default temperature is *68* DEG F [*20* DEG C].
Shell material: For clad plate, specify the backing plate material (cladding is defined below).
See Chapter 28 for materials. Default: *A285C*.
Liquid volume : Enter either liquid volume or diameter and height.
Vessel diameter: Enter either capacity or diameter and height.
Vessel height: Enter either capacity or diameter and height.
Roof type:
Default: *FLAT*
FLAT - Flat roof tank
CONE - Cone roof tank
FLOAT- Floating roof tank
LIFT - Lifter
OPEN - Open roof tank
INFLT - Internal floater with flat roof
INCN - Internal floater with cone roof
Bottom type:
Default: *FLAT*
FLAT - Single flat bottom
DBL - Double bottom
0.0 - 2.5 PSIG [0.0 - 17 KPA];
Default: *0.05* PSIG [*0.35* KPA].
Design temperature:
Manhole diameter:
Cladding material:
Cladding thickness:
Default: *0.125* INCHES [*3* MM] if cladding material is specified; otherwise: *0.0*.

Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*.
Diameter option:
Defines desired diameter as ID or OD; Default: See Area Design Basis.
Flame arrestor diameter:
Range: 1.0 - 8.0 IN DIAM [25.0 - 200.0 MM DIAM].
Conservation vent diameter:
Range: 1.0- 8.0 IN DIAM [25.0 - 200.0 MM DIAM].
STORAGE
CRYOGENIC
Cryogenic storage tank - double wall, superinsulated.
Shell material:
See Chapter 28 for materials. Default: *SS304*.
Liquid volume:
Range: 300.0 - 60,000.0 GALLONS [1.20 - 227.00 M3].
Vessel diameter:
If both pressure and vacuum are entered, design is for worst case. Default: 250.0 PSIG [1,720
KPA].
If both pressure and vacuum are entered, design is for worst case. Default: pressure.
Design temperature:
Default: -320.0 DEG F [-195 DEG C].
Min: -14.70 PSIG [-100.0 KPA];
Default: -14.70 PSIG [-100.0 KPA]
Jacket material:
Skirt height:
Skip if legs are required. Default: 1.5 x diameter. If the vessel is hung in an Open Steel
Vessel leg height:
10-26 10 Vessels
W+S- Wind and seismic design required
SEIS- Seismic design only
NONE- Delete wind and seismic design
Fluid volume:
For seismic design, fluid volume as a% of vessel volume (water assumed).
Manhole diameter:
Max: 48.0 INCHES [1,200.0 MM];
Default: 18.0 INCHES [450.0 MM]
Specify an allowance for internals as a percent of basic vessel height.
Weld efficiency:
ASME/JIS codes only, where allowed for thin wall vessels. Range: 50 - 100; Default: Area
Basis.
Stress relief:
CODE- Provide stress relief if code requires
NO- No stress relief
Default stiffeners designed for vacuum only, enter ‘0.0’ if not required. Head type:
ELLIP- 2:1 ellipsoidal
HEMI- Hemispherical
TORI- Torispherical (ASME)
Diameter option:
OD- Outside diameter
ID- Inside diameter
PLAST TANK
Flat bottom dome top. FRP to 30000 GALLONS [113 M3], HAVEG to 7000 GALLONS [26 M3].
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Storage Tank: Filament-wound with a biosphere - a polyester
resin (e.g., Atlac 282). Flat bottom and dome top under 2.5 PSIG [16.7 KPA], otherwise
dished heads.
Haveg Storage Tank.
Material:
Default: *FRP*
FRP- FRP
HAVEG- Haveg
Liquid volume:
Volume or diameter + height required input Range: 1,000 - 30,000 GALLONS [3.8 - 113 M3]

Vessel diameter:
Volume or diameter + height input.
Max: 12.0 FEET [93.6 M].
Vessel height:
Volume or diameter + height required input.
Range: 0.00 - 15.00 PSIG [0 - 100 KPA];
Temperature:
WOOD TANK
Wooden storage tanks to 50000 GALLONS [1890 M3].

Material: Default: *CYPRS*
CYPRS - Cypress
REDWD - Redwood
PINE - Pine
FIR - Fir
Liquid volume:
Range: 800 - 50,000 GALLONS [3.1 - 189 M3].
Vessel diameter:
Range: 0.0 - 0.05 PSIG [0.0 - 0.3 KPA].
Temperature:
10-28 10 Vessels
GAS HOLDER
Near-Atmospheric Gas Storage

Telescoping gas holder.
Low pressure gas vessel.
Shell material:
For clad plate, specify the backing plate material. See Chapter 28 for materials. Default:
*A285C*.
Gas volume:
Vessel diameter:
Vessel height:
Range: 0.0 - 2.5 PSIG [0.0 - 17 KPA];
Design temperature:
Manhole diameter:
Number of manholes:
Default: *1*.
Cladding material: See Chapter 28 for materials.
Cladding thickness:
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] if cladding material is specified, otherwise 0.0.
Diameter option:
Default: - See Area Design Basis.

CONE BTM
Atmospheric Solid/Liquid Storage

Cone bottom, flat top storage bin.
Shell material:
*A285C*.
Liquid volume:
Vessel diameter:
Vessel height:
Min: 0.0 PSIG [0.0 KPA];
Default: 0.05 PSIG [0.35 KPA].
Design temperature:
Default: 68 DEG F [20 DEG C] to 0.05 PSI [0.35 KPA]; else 650 DEG F [340 DEG C] ferrous,
250 DEG F [120 DEG C] other.
Vessel leg height:
Default: *4* FEET [*1.25* M]. If the bin is hung in an Open Steel Structure (BSTLOPN STL
ST) or Truckable (TRMD)/Bargeable (BRGM) module by specifying a valid structure tag, leg is
not estimated. Enter “0.0” if the bin is hung in open structure area (area type OPEN/EXOPEN).
Manhole diameter:
Stress relief:
Default: See Area Design Basis
10-30 10 Vessels
NO - No stress relief
Cladding material:
Cladding thickness:
Default *0.125* INCHES [*3* MM] if cladding material is specified; otherwise: *0.0*.
Head thickness Top:
Diameter option:
ASME design basis:
Default: *D1NF*.
Start Stop cycles x 1000:
Range: 5.00 - 0.02.
Default: *0*.
Pressure amplitude:
Default: *0*.
*0*.

LIVE BTM
Live bottom storage bin.

Shell material:
*A285C*.
Solid volume:
Vessel diameter:
MAX: 15 FEET [4.69 M]
Vessel height:
Design temperature:
Vessel leg height:
Default: *4* FEET [*1.25* M]. If the bin is hung in an Open Steel Structure (BSTLOPN STL
ST) or Truckable (TRMD)/Bargeable (BRGM) module by specifying a valid structure tag, leg is
not estimated. Enter “0.0” if the bin is hung in open structure area (area type OPEN/EXOPEN).
Manhole diameter:
Stress relief:
NO - No stress relief
10-32 10 Vessels
Cladding material:
CHEST REC
Tile Chests
Cladding thickness:
Default *0.125* INCHES [*3* MM] if cladding material is specified; otherwise: *0.0*.
Diameter option:
Tile chests provide tile lined tanks for storage of liquids, suspensions or slurries. Although tile
chests are used in the chemical industry, they are predominantly used in pulp and paper mills
for storing fiber suspensions at various stages of processing. Chests can be rectangular or
cylindrical and may be concrete or metallic. Various designs are available depending on the
nature of the fluid — high density, low density.
Tile Chests, rectangular concrete include the following options:
• Single tile chest
• Group of tile chests
• One chest in a group of chests.
Grouping option: PARTGRP is used for one chest in assemblage, WHLGRP to define an entire
assemblage.
Default: *PARTGRP*.
SINGLE - Tile chest is a single stand-alone item
PARTGRP - One chest of a multi-group assemblage
WHLGRP - Entire multi-group assemblage

Inside length:
Enter either chest dimensions or capacity.
Vessel height:
Inside width:
Chest volume:
Enter either chest dimensions (length height, width) or capacity; Min: 30000 GALLONS
(114M3);
Max: 1300000 GALLONS (4921 M3). If Grouping Option is WHLGRP, enter capacity of entire
group; otherwise enter capacity of this chest.
Tile or lining type:
Default: *25RSB*
25RSB - 2.5 INCHES [62 MM] red shale brick
Tile or lining:
Percent of chest surface to be lined,
100% = one side; 200% = inside + outside. Max: 200; Default: 100.
Configuration:
Default: *OPEN*
OPEN - Open top chest
CLOSED - Chest has a roof
Installation option:
Default: *GRADE*
GRADE- Tile chest is constructed on grade
STRUCT- Tile chest is within a structure
Capacity of group:
For PARTGRP chest only, capacity of entire group; Default: 4x chest capacity.
Number of chests in group:
For WHLGRP chest only, enter number of chests in entire assemblage. Default: *4*.
Number of partitions lengthwise:
Number of full length partitions parallel to length dimension (may be fraction).
Number of partitions widthwise:
Number of width wide partitions parallel to width dimension (may be fraction).
Soil type:
SOFT CLAY - Bearing: 2000 PSF [100 KN/M2]
FIRM CLAY - Bearing: 4000 PSF [200 KN/M2]
WET SAND - Bearing: 4000 PSF [200 KN/M2]
SAND+CLAY - Bearing: 4000 PSF [200 KN/M2]
DRY SAND - Bearing: 600 PSF [300 KN/M2]
SAND - Bearing: 8000 PSF [400 KN/M2]
GRAVEL - Bearing: 12000 PSF [600 KN/M2]
SOFT ROCK - Bearing: 16000 PSF [800 KN/M2]
HARDPAN - Bearing: 20000 PSF [1000 KN/M2]
MED-ROCK - Bearing: 30000 PSF [1400 KN/M2]
HARD ROCK - Bearing: 80000 PSF [3800 KN/M2]
Product density:
Default: *62.4* PCF.
10-34 10 Vessels
Exclude excavation:
Exclude portion of calculated quantity if not required or common with other items. Max: 100;
Default: *0.0*.
Footings exclusion:
Default: *0.0*.
Floor exclusion:
Default: *0.0*.
Wall length exclusion:
Default: *0.0*.
Wall width exclusion:
Default: *0.0*.
CHEST CYL
Tile Chests, Cylindrical

Low density tile chest with a capacity range of 3000 to 300000 GALLONS [12 to 1135 M3].
Chest is available in concrete or metallic materials of construction. If the user enters no
dimensions (diameter, height, width, length), the capacity range is 3000 to 300000 GALLONS
[12 to 1135 M3].
High density tile chest with a capacity range of 30000 to 1300000 GALLONS [114 to 4921
M3]. Chest is available in concrete or metallic materials of construction.
Shape symbol:
Default: *CYLLD*
CYLLD - Cylindrical chest, low density stock
CYLHD - Cylindrical chest, high density stock
Inside diameter:
Chest dimensions or capacity required.

Vessel height:
Chest dimensions or capacity required.
Chest volume:
Enter either dimensions (diameter, height) or capacity; Min: 3000 GALLONS [12 M3]; Max:
300000 GALLONS [1135 M3]
Default: *25RSB*
25RBS - 2.5 INCH [62 MM] red shale brick
45RSB - 4.5 INCH [112 MM] red shale brick
Tile or lining:
Percent of chest to be lined. 100% = one side; 200% = inside + outside. Max: 200; Default:
*100*.
Configuration:
Default: *OPEN*
OPEN - Open top chest
CLOSED - Chest has a roof
Default: *GRADE*
GRADE - Tile chest is constructed on grade
STRUCT - Tile chest is within a structure
Soil type:
SOFT CLAY - Bearing: 2000 PSF [100 KN/M2]
FIRM CLAY - Bearing: 4000 PSF [200 KN/M2]
WET SAND - Bearing: 4000 PSF [200 KN/M2]
SAND+CLAY - Bearing: 4000 PSF [200 KN/M2]
DRY SAND - Bearing: 600 PSF [300 KN/M2]
SAND - Bearing: 8000 PSF [400 KN/M2]
GRAVEL - Bearing: 12000 PSF [600 KN/M2]
SOFT ROCK - Bearing: 16000 PSF [800 KN/M2]
HARDPAN - Bearing: 20000 PSF [1000 KN/M2]
MED-ROCK - Bearing: 30000 PSF [1400 KN/M2]
HARD ROCK - Bearing: 80000 PSF [3800 KN/M2]
Product density:
Default: *62.4* PCF [1,000 KG/M3].
Exclude excavation:
Default: *0.0*.
Footings exclusion:
Default: *0.0*.
Floor exclusion:
Default: *0.0*.
10-36 10 Vessels
CHEST MTL
Shell material:
For clad plate, specify the backing plate material. (Cladding is defined below.) ©©Default:
*A285C*.
Liquid volume:
Vessel diameter:
Vessel height:
Default: *25RSB*
Tile or lining:
Percent of chest surface to be lined. 100% = one side; 200% = inside + outside. Max: 200;
Default: *100*.
Roof type:
Default: *FLAT*
FLAT - Flat roof tank
CONE - Cone roof tank
FLOAT - Floating roof tank
LIFT - Lifter
OPEN - Open top tank
INFLT - Internal floater with flat roof
INCN - Internal floater with cone roof
Range: 0 - 2.5 PSIG [0 - 17.0 KPA];
Ignore this field for open top tanks.
Design temperature:
Manhole diameter:
Default: *18* INCHES [450.0 MM].
Number of manholes:
Default: *1*.
Cladding material:

Cladding thickness:
Default: *0.125* INCHES [*3* MM] for cladding material, otherwise *0.0*.
Specific gravity:
Range: 0.2 - 5.0; Default: *1.0*.
Diameter option:
Bottom type:
Default: *FLAT*
FLAT - Single flat bottom
DBL - Double bottom
SAN TANK
Sanitary vertical cylindrical vessel

Since this is a sanitary item, the tank is built to sanitary standards, including polished
stainless steel. This is not a pressure vessel.
Shell Material:
SS304,*SS316*
Application:
The application symbol defines vessel function and related pipe/instrum. model.
*SURGE* - Surge tank
MIX - Mixing tank
Liquid Volume:
MAX: 5,000 GALLONS [18.9 M3]
Vessel Diameter:
MAX: 9.25 FEET [2.8 M]
Vessel Height:
MAX: 10 FEET [3 M]
MIN: 68 DEG F [20 DEG C]
Cover type:
*OPEN*- Open top
FLAT - Loose flat top
FIXED- Fixed flat top with bridge
DISH - Dished top with manway and agitator nozzle
Bottom type:
WELL - Well bottom
SLOPE - Sloped bottom
TORI - Torispherical bottom
10-38 10 Vessels
*CON15* - 15 degree cone bottom
CON30 - 30 degree cone bottom
Jacket type:
*NONE* - No jacket
DMPLE - 90 PSIG [620 KPA] dimple jacket
LNG Tank
A Full Containment Double Walled Tank implies that both the inner steel tank and the outer
prestressed concrete shell with reinforced concrete spherical dome are independently capable
of resisting the Design Load Conditions and allow for their special characteristics, since failure
of either can lead to leakage of LNG gaseous fumes which are both toxic and highly
flammable.
DESIGN LOADS
Wind force adjustment:
Additional adjustment for wind force specified in project civil design specs.
Min: 0
Max: 2
Default: 1
Seismic force adjustment:
Min: 0
Max: 2
Default: 1
Min: >0
Default: 4.21 PSIG
Design blast pressure:
Min: 0
Default: 2.18 PSIG
Roof live load:
Min: 0
Default: 50 PSF
INNER STEEL TANK

LNG tank volume:
Minimum Volume = 1,320,500 Gallons [5,000 M^3]
Maximum Volume = 52,835,000 Gallons [200,000 M^3]
Min: >0 Gallons
Tank diameter:
Enter either volume or diameter and height
Min: >0 FEET
Tank height:
Min: >0 FEET
Shell Material:
9% Ni steel is typically used in cryogenic storage applications
Default: A 553
Min: >0 INCHES
Max: 2 INCHES
Min: 0.2
Max: 5
Default: .0476
Design temperature:
Default: -274 F
Default: Design operating temperature
OUTER CONCRETE TANK
Tank diameter (ID):
Min: >0 FEET
Tank height):
Min: >0 FEET
Wall thickness:
Prestressed concrete wall thickness, inches [mm]
Min: 6 INCHES
Concrete type:
B - Standard concrete
C - Higher grade concrete
D - Chemical resistant concrete
Default - as specified in unit area civil specs or project civil specs.
SUBMERGED PUMPS
Number of pumps:
Min: >0
Default: 1.
Casing material:
I-1: Case: CI; impeller/wear parts: CI
I-2: Case: CI; impeller/wear parts: Bronze
S-1: Case: CS; impeller/wear parts: CI
S-3: Case: CS; impeller/wear parts: A436
S-4: Case: CS; impeller: CS; wear parts: CI
S-5: Case: CS; impeller.: CS; wear parts: 12%Cr
S-6: Case: CS; impeller/wear parts: 12% Cr
S-8: Case: CS; impeller/wear parts: SS316
10-40 10 Vessels
S-9: Case: Monel-lined CS; impeller/wear: Monel
C-6: All parts: 12% Cr
A-7: All parts: SS304
A-8: All parts: SS316
D-1: All parts: Duplex
CAST MATLS...: See a list of casting materials.
Default: A-7
Liquid flow rate:
Min: >0 GPM
Default: 1,300 GPM
Fluid head:
Min: >0 FEET
Maximum head: 1000 FT [ 300 M] at 30xHZ;
3800 FT [1150 M] at 60xHZ.
Default: 800 FEET
Speed:
Min: 1800 RPM
Max: 3600 RPM
Additional Notes:
1. The civil and steel volumetric bulks are included in the equipment cost.
2. A pile foundation will automatically be designed if required. The soil type, pile type, and
pile parameters are specified in the unit area civil specs or project civil specs.
3. The inner steel tank freeboard is calculated based on the inner tank height, diameter, and
seismic horizontal acceleration. The seismic horizontal acceleration is specified in the project
civil specs.
4. The inner steel tank is checked for overturning stability.
5. The foundation concrete type is based on the unit area civil specs or project civil specs.
6. The following steel plates are assumed as ¼” thick: Primary bottom, secondary bottom,
secondary corner protection, and vapor barrier.
7. The bottom foam insulation is assumed as 3’-6” thick.
8. The tank lid foam insulation is assumed as 2’-0” thick.
9. If an external civil data file is specified, adjustments may be made to the labor hours as
follows:
• Concrete dome roof = Foundation type 4 (Mass pour)
• Prestressed concrete roof ring beam = Foundation type 12 (Columns and beams)
• Prestressed concrete walls = Foundation type 13 (Walls)
• Inner tank concrete ring foundation = Foundation type 9 (Circular ring foundation for large
tanks)
• Outer tank foundation = Foundation type 4 (Mass pour)
About Piles
If piles are required (based on soil strength) and the cost engine is called from either
Aspen process Economic Analyzer or Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator, the system
determines the piling parameters.
The following assumptions are made:
• Pile type = AUGR, Auger cast pile
• Pile depth = 60.0 FT
• Pile compressive capacity = Calculated by the system (Min = 50.0 TONS, Max
= 750.0 TONS)

• Pile spacing = 6.0 FT (If the required compressive capacity exceeds 750.0
TONS, the spacing is decreased in 0.5 FT increments to a minimum of 3.0 FT)
The system also reports the calculated pile compressive capacity and pile spacing if
piles are required for Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or Aspen In-Plant Cost
Estimator.
10-42 10 Vessels
11 Crushers, Mills and Stock
Treatment

Crushers (CR)
Flakers (FL)
Mills (M)
Stock Treatments (ST)
11 Crushers, Mills and Stock Treatment - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 11-1
Crushers (CR)
Includes motor and drive unit.
CONE
Cone crusher for secondary and fine crushing for hard and medium hard materials such as
limestone, stone and rock.
The cone crusher is a type of gyratory crusher. A conical head is gyrated by means of an
eccentric driven through gears and a countershaft. The gyratory motion causes the conical
head to approach and recede from the walls of the crushing chamber. The material receives a
series of rapid blows as it passes through the crushing cavity.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Mantle diameter:
Range: 20 - 84 INCHES [510 - 2,130 MM].
Crusher type:
Default: *STAND*
STAND - Standard head
SHORT - Short head
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 50 - 1300 TPH [46 TONNE/HR - 1179 TONNE/HR
GYRATORY
Primary and secondary crushing of hard and medium hard materials such as limestone, stone
and rock.
A conical head is gyrated by means of an eccentric driven through gears and a countershaft.
The gyratory motion causes the conical head to approach and recede from the walls of the
crushing chamber. The material receives a series of rapid blows as it passes through the
crushing cavity.
Material:
11-2 11 Crushers, Mills and Stock Treatment

Default: *CS*.
Mantle diameter:
Range: 20 - 120 INCHES [510 - 3,045 MM].
Crusher type:
Default: *PRIME*
PRIME - Primary crushing
SECOND - Secondary crushing
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 200 - 10000 TPH [182 TONNE/HR - 9071 TONNE/HR
ECCENTRIC
Overhead eccentric jaw crusher for primary and secondary crushing of hard, tough and
abrasive materials, such as quartz, rock, glass and ferroalloys. Includes hydraulic toggle,
motor and motor drive sheave and V belts.
A moving jaw opens and closes against a vertical or slightly inclined fixed jaw by means of a
toggle to crush the feed material. In single-toggle machines the moving jaw has an almost
circular motion at the upper-end of the jaw plate and an elliptical movement at the lower-end.
This motion causes the jaw plates to wear faster than double-toggle machines but also assists
the flow of material through the crushing chamber. The trend is towards single-toggle
machines because the increased wear is usually outweighed by the lower initial cost of the
single-toggle machine.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 25 - 1,620 TPH [23 - 1,460 TON/H].
Product size:
Range: 1 - 16 INCHES [25 - 400].
JAW
Swing jaw crusher for primary and secondary crushing of hard and/or abrasive materials such
as quartz rock, glass and ferroalloys.
A moving jaw is opened and closed by means of a pair of toggles against a vertical or slightly
inclined fixed jaw crushing the feed material. (See ECCENTRIC crusher for additional
information.)
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 70 - 610 TPH [65 - 550 TON/H].
Product size:
Range: 2 - 8 INCHES [50 - 200 MM].
ROTARY
Rotary crusher for coarse, soft materials, such as gypsum, phosphate rock, pitch, mica,
cocoanut shells.
A toothed cone rotates inside a toothed shell. The clearance between the teeth on the cone
and the teeth on the shell determines the product size.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Driver power:
Range: 2 - 25 HP [1.5 - 18.5 KW].
S ROLL LT
Single roll crushers are manufactured in light, medium and heavy duty constructions for the
primary crushing of friable materials such as coal; medium hard materials such as coal,
phosphate rock and shale; and hard materials such as cement rock, iron ore and limestone.
Single roll crusher for light duty primary and secondary crushing for coal and other friable
materials.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 140 - 1,470 TPH [128 - 1,330 TON/H].
Product size:
Range: 2 - 6 INCHES [50 - 150 MM].

S ROLL MED
Single roll crusher for medium duty primary and/or secondary crushing for coal and other
friable materials.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 105 - 840 TPH [95 - 760 TON/H].
Product size:
Range: 2 - 8 INCHES [50 - 200 MM].
S ROLL HVY
Single roll crusher for heavy duty primary and/or secondary crushing for coal and other
friable materials.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 175 - 1,000 TPH [160 - 900 TON/H].
Product size:
Range: 2 - 8 INCHES [50 - 200 MM].
SAWTOOTH
Sawtooth crusher. Size reduction in tearing via toothed rollers for lumpy and friable materials,
such as plastics, shale, charcoal, shells and bark.
The particles are crushed between two rollers with sawtooth-like projections.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Driver power:
Range: 5 - 40 HP [4 - 30 KW].
REV-HAMR
Reversible hammermill for secondary reduction of hard and medium hard minerals, stone,
rock, limestone, low-silica ores/chemicals.
Tertiary reduction of friables materials in closed circuit crushing.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 20 - 450 TPH [18 - 408 TON/H].
HAMMER MED
Non-reversible hammermill for secondary crushing of bituminous and sub-bituminous coals,
lignite, gypsum and some medium-hard minerals.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 15 - 40 TPH [13 - 36 TON/H].
SWING HAMR
Non-reversible hammermill for hard materials (cement rock, limestone).

Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 30 - 180 TPH [27 - 160 TON/H].

BRADFORD
Rotary breaker for simultaneous sizing and cleaning of run-of-mine coal.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 450 - 1,500 TPH [400 - 1360 TON/H].
S IMPACT
Single rotor impact breaker for primary and secondary breaking of non-abrasive quarry rock
and similar materials.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 250 - 1,000 TPH [225 - 900 TON/H].
PULVERIZER
Fine and medium crushing of soft non-abrasive materials.

Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 300 - 9,000 LB/H [140 - 4,080 KG/H].
Driver power:
>0 HP
ROLL RING
Ring granulator for primary and secondary crushing of bituminous and sub-bituminous coals,
lignite, gypsum and some medium hard minerals.
Heavy cast steel rings, toothed and/or plain, at the end of rotating arms crush solid material
by a combination of impact breaking and rolling compression.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Crusher flow rate:
Range: 50 - 2,000 TPH [45 - 1,800 TON/H].

Flakers (FL)
Includes motor and drive.
DRUM
Drum flaker to 200 SF [18 M2] of surface.

Material:
Default: *CS*.
Surface area:
Range: 10 - 250 SF [1 - 23 M2].
Mills (M)
Includes mill, motor, bearings, gears, lube system and vendor-supplied instruments.
ATTRITION
Attrition mill to 300 HP [224 KW].

Material:
Default: *CS*.
Driver power:
Range: 5 - 300 HP [4 - 224 KW].
Driver speed:
Max: 3,600 RPM
AUTOGENOUS
Wet or dry autogenous mills.

Material:
Default: *CS*.
Application:
Default: *WET*
WET- Wet grinding
DRY- Dry grinding
BALL MILL
Ball mill includes initial ball charge.

Material:
Default: *CS*.

Application:
Default: *WET*
WET- Wet grinding
DRY- Dry grinding
ROD MILL
Rod mill includes initial rod charge.
Material:
Default: *CS*.
Application:
Default: *WET*
WET- Wet grinding
DRY- Dry grinding
MIKRO PULV
Micro-pulverizer to 30 HP [22 KW].

Material:
Default: *CS*.
Driver power:
Range: 7.5 - 30 HP [5.5 - 22 KW].
Driver speed:
Max: 3,600 RPM
ROLLER
Roller mill to 400 HP [300 KW].

Material:
Default: *CS*.
Application:
Default: *WET*
WET - Wet grinding
DRY - Dry grinding
ROD CHARGR
Rod charger for rod mill.

Stock Treatments (ST)
REFINER
Refiners are used for the refining of fibers either from Kraft pulping or secondary fiber
operations.
The refiner is a double-disk type with rotor and stator in a quick opening hinged housing. The
shaft is supported on anti-friction grease-lubricated bearings, packing box, electro-mechanical
plate positioning. Also included is the drive consisting of the gear box, electric motor, coupling
and guard.
Material:
Default: *SS316*
SS316 - SS316
SS304 - SS304
Stock flow rate:
Enter stock flow rate (bone dry) or plate diameter.
Range: 5 - 2000 TPD [.20 - 75 TON/H].
Plate diameter:
Enter stock flow rate (bone dry) or plate diameter.
Range: 12 - 60 INCHES [305 - 1,520 MM].
CSF - ml of water:
CSF = Canadian Standard Freeness.
Default: *120*.
DEFLAKE DK
DEFLAKE CN
Deflakers reduce and disperse flakes into finer size, and are mainly used in pulp mill
operations.
The unit can be designed for a wide range of capacities and solids concentration. Due to the
intermeshing stator and rotor design, the unit can also be used in high shear mixing
operations. Two designs are available:
• Plate type — includes stator and rotor plate tackles housed in a body with quick hinged door
opening for easy maintenance, electric motor driver, coupling, packing seal, external
rotor/stator adjustment mechanism, built in junk trap.
Material:
Default: *SS316*
SS316 - SS316
SS304 - SS304
Hydraulic capacity:
Enter hydraulic capacity or rotor diameter.
Range: 5.0 - 2000 GPM [0.3 - 125.0 LS].
Rotor diameter:
Enter hydraulic capacity or rotor diameter.
Range: 4 - 30 INCHES [100 - 750 MM].
Deflaker speed:
Default: *1,800* RPM.
Range: 1 - 10; Default: *4*.
• Concentric conical type — includes shell and plug tackles housed in body, electric motor
driver, external rotor/stator adjustment mechanism, built in junk trap and lube oil system.
Material:
Default: *SS316*
SS316 - SS316
SS304 - SS304
Hydraulic capacity:
Range: 5 - 2,000 GPM [0.3 - 125.0 L/S].
Deflaker speed:
Default: *1,800* RPM.
Range: 1 - 10; Default: *4*.

12 Drying Systems

Crystallizers (CRY)
Evaporators (E)
Air Dryers (AD)
Dryers (D)
Drum Dryers (DD)
Rotary Dryers (RD)
12 Drying Systems - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 12-1

Crystallizers (CRY)
BATCH VAC
Batch vacuum crystallizer unit for small scale production of crystals. Includes cone bottom
agitated tank, steam jet ejectors and direct contact condenser to 8200 GALLONS [25.8 M3].
Energy requirements are lower for a batch vacuum unit than for a continuous vacuum unit,
however, for the same capacity, batch units must be larger than continuous units and are
therefore more expensive.
A warm saturated solution is fed to a cone bottom tank. The pressure in the tank is then
reduced using stream-jets. The solution flashes and the flashed solvent is condensed in a
direct contact condenser. The non-condensables which pass through the direct contact
condenser are vented to the atmosphere by the steam-jet equipment. While the solution is
flashing, agitators in the crystallizer keep the forming crystals in the suspension and keep the
contents of the tank at a uniform concentration. When the supersaturation of the flashed
solution has been removed (by the formation of the crystals), the tank is emptied.
Material:
*CS*.
CS - Carbon steel
RBLCS - Rubber-lined CS
SS304 - SS304
Liquid volume:
Range:
850 - 8,200 GALLONS [2.7 - 25.8 M3].
MECHANICAL
12-2 12 Drying Systems

Mechanical scraped-surface crystallizer, jacketed, spiral ribbon scraper, trough, stacked in
lengths of 40 FEET [12 M]. Includes motor and drive.
For the relatively small-scale production of crystals from a supersaturated solution. The
scraped-surface is used where a slight change in the temperature of a solution means a large
change in its solubility. When the required rate of heat removal is greater than 200,000
BTU/HR, the scraped surface crystallizer is usually not economical.
The scraped-surface crystallizer consists of a 24-inch wide trough with a semi-circular bottom,
a cooling jacket on the outside and a spiral ribbon scraper/mixer the length of the trough.
Crystals growing on the walls off the trough are scraped off and suspended in the mother
liquor. These units are manufactured in lengths of 10 to 40 FEET. If lengths greater than 40
are required, the units are stacked one on top of another and the solution cascades from one
level to the next.
Material:
*CS*, CI
CS - Carbon steel
CI - Cast iron
Length:
Range: 20 - 1,000 FEET [6.1 - 300 M]
Material:
SS (Stainless steel)
Length:
Range: 20 - 550 FEET [6.1 - 165 M]
OSLO
Oslo growth type crystallizer to 6,900 TPD [260 TONH]. Large scale crystal production.
Includes interconnecting piping, recirculating pump and accessories.
This piece of equipment, also called a growth crystallizer or classified-suspension crystallizer,
operates in the following manner. The feed stream plus a recycle stream of saturated solution
are pumped through a heat exchanger and heated. The solution enters a vaporization
chamber and a portion of the solvent is flashed, thus cooling the solution and raising the
concentration of the solute. This supersaturates the solution. The supersaturated solution is
then fed to the bottom of a suspension or crystallizing chamber where it contacts already
formed crystals. Through the formation of new crystals and the growth of existing crystals, the
supersaturation of the solution is removed. Additionally, as the solution moves upward
through the suspension chamber, the small crystals are carried upward while the large crystals
settle to the bottom, thus classifying the crystals by size. The large crystals are removed from

the bottom of the suspension chamber while the solution, no longer saturated, is mixed with
fresh feed, fed to the heat exchanger, and the events described above are repeated.
Material:
Default: *CS* (Carbon steel)
Crystallizer rate:
Max: 6,900 TPD [260 TON/H]

Evaporators (E)
FALL FILM
Agitated falling film evaporator to 150 SF [13 M2] includes motor and drive.
Material:
Default: *SS304*
SS304 - SS304
SS316 - SS316
Heat transfer area:
Range: 4 - 150 SF [0.4 - 13 M2]
FORCED CIR
Forced circulation evaporator to 10000 SF [925 M2] includes interconnecting piping,

circulating pumps and drivers.
Material:
Heat transfer area:
Range: 100 - 10,000 SF [10 -925 M2]
Tube material:
CS tubes with CS shell, Cu. or Ni tubes with CI shell.
CS - Carbon steel
CU - Copper
NI - Nickel
Material:
CI (Cast iron)
Heat transfer area:
Range: 155 - 8,000 SF [14 - 740 M2]

Tube material:
CS tubes with CS shell, Cu or Ni tubes with CI shell.
CS - Carbon steel
CU - Copper
NI - Nickel
LONG TUBE
Long tube rising film evaporator to 35 SF [3.2 M2] includes interconnecting piping.
Material:
SS steel tubes with SS shell.
Heat transfer Area:
Range: 18 - 35 SF [1.7 - 3.2 M2]
LONG VERT
Long tube vertical evaporator to 50000 SF [4640 M2] variety of tube and shell materials.
Karbate tubes with rubber-lined CS shell, CU tubes with other shell materials.
Material:
Surface area:
Range: 400 - 50,000 SF [38 - 4,640 M2]
Material:
CI (Cast iron)
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 25,000 SF [10 - 2,320 M2]
Material:
CU

Surface area:
Range: 200 - 3,000 [19 - 275 M2]
Material:
RBLCS
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 2,700 SF [10 - 250 M2]
STAND VERT
Standard vertical tube evaporator to 7000 SF

[650 M2]
CS tubes with CS shell, Cu tubes with CI shell, Pb shell with Pb-lined CS shell.
Material:
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 6,000 SF [10 - 555 M2]
Material: CI (Cast iron)
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 6,000 SF [10 - 555 M2]
Material: PBLCS (Lead-lined CS)
Surface area:
Range: 200 - 7,000 SF [19 - 650 M2]

STAND HOR
Standard horizontal tube evaporator to 10000 SF [920 M2].

CS tubes with CS shell, Cu tubes with CI shell.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 10,000 SF [10 - 920 M2]
Material:
CI (Cast iron)
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 6000 SF [10 - 555 M2]

THIN FILM
Agitated thin film evaporator with explosion-proof motor and drive.

Material:
Default: *SS316*
Heat transfer area:
Range: 0.95 - 27 SF [0.1 - 2.5 M2]
WFE SYSTEM
Packaged system including condenser and stand.

Material:
Default: *SS316*
Heat transfer area:
Range: 0.2 - 12 SF [0.02 - 1.1 M2]

Air Dryers (AD)
AIR DRYER
Dual tower, desiccant type, for drying of air to -40 DEG F [-40 DEG C] dew point; includes
desiccant.
Material:
Gas flow rate:
Max: 50,000 CFM [84,900 M3/H]

Dryers (D)
Includes solid materials.
ATMOS TRAY
Atmospheric tray batch dryer.

Material:
Default: *CS*
Tray area:
Range: 30 - 200 SF [2.8 - 18.5 M2]
Material:
SS
Tray area:
Range: 30 - 250 SF [2.8 - 23 M2]
VAC TRAY
Vacuum tray batch dryer.

Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
Tray area:
Range: 40 - 200 SF [3.8 - 18.5 M2]

PAN
Agitated pan batch dryer for sensitive materials.

Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
304CD - CS clad with 304 SS
316CD - CS clad with 316 SS
Surface area:
Range: 12 - 180 SF [1.1 - 16.7 M2]
Diameter:
Range: 3 - 10 FEET [0.9 - 3.0 M]
Pan depth:
Range: 18 - 36 INCHES [450 - 900 MM]
Driver power:
Range: 3 - 40 HP [2.22 - 30 KW]
SPRAY
Continuous spray drying system. Includes supports, heater, filter, atomizer, fan, driver,
instrumentation, interconnecting piping, cyclone and accessories to 9000 LB/H [4080 KG/H]
evaporative capacity (water).
Material:
Default: *CS*
Evaporation rate:
Range: 700 - 9,000 LB/H [320 - 4,080 KG/H]

Drum Dryers (DD)
SINGLE ATM
Single atmospheric drum dryer for drying of solids on web material.

on steam-heated rotating drum.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Tray area:
Range: 10 - 200 SF [1 - 18 M2]
DOUBLE ATM
Double atmospheric drum dryer for drying of solids on web material on pair of steam heated
drums.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Tray area:
Range: 25 - 400 SF [2.4 - 35 M2]

SINGLE VAC
Single vacuum rotary drum dryer for drying of sensitive solids under vacuum.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Tray area:
Range: 10 - 200 SF [1 - 18 M2]
S COOKCOOL
Rotary drum cooker-cooler.

Use to blanch foods like pasta or corn, cook foods like meats or poultry, or cool foods like
bagged soup.
Material:
SS304, *SS316*
Dryer drum diameter:
Only 60 INCH (1525 MM) and 72 INCH (1825 MM) diameters are available.
Food flow rate: MAX: 303,000 LB/HR (137,437 KG/HR) at default product density 50 LB/CF
(800 KG/M3). The maximum capacity any model can handle depends upon the product
density, and is thus volumetric in nature; densities higher than the default can realize
capacities above 303,000 lb/hr (137,437 KG/HR), while densities lower than the default realize
maximum capacities below 303,000 lb/hr (137,437 KG/HR).
Cooler length: MIN: 4 FEET [1.2M] for 60 INCH [1,525 MM] and 8 FEET [2.4 M] for 72 INCH
[1,825 MM] drum dia., MAX: 16 FEET [4.8 M]
Product density: MIN: 50 PCF, MAX: 303,000 LB/HR [137,437 KG/HR] at product density 50
LB/CF (800 KG/M3).
Cook time: If drum diameter is specified, default cooking time is 1 MINUTE, which is the
minimum allowable cooking time, and therefore the cooking time that results in the maximum
allowable capacity. If capacity is specified, the default cooking time is computed based on the
capacity, cooker length, and drum diameter. MIN: 1 MINUTE, MAX: 12 MINUTES.
Driver power:
Default: based on drum diameter, food capacity and cooker length.

Driver type:
*WVRDC* - Washdown, VFD rated, direct drive, CS
WVCDC - Washdown, VFD controlled, direct drive, CS

Rotary Dryers (RD)
DIRECT
Direct contact of hot gas with moist solids with maximum surface area of 2000 SF [185 M2].
Material:
Default: *CS*
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 2,000 SF [10 - 185 M2]
INDIRECT
Indirect contact of hot gases with moist solids with maximum surface area of 2000 SF[185
M2].
Material:
Default: *CS*
Surface area:
100 - 2,000 SF [10 - 185 M2]
JAC VACUUM
Jacketed rotary vacuum dryer with explosion-proof motor.
Maximum capacity of 500 CF [14.1 M3].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
SS316 - SS316
Flow rate:
8 - 500 CF [0.25 - 14.1 M3]
VACUUM
Conical rotary vacuum dryer with maximum capacity of 400 CF.

[11.3 M3].

Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
Flow rate:
3 - 400 CF [0.1 - 11.3 M3]

ATM SYSTEM
Atmospheric tray dryer with painted steel chamber.
Material:
Default: *SS316*
Tray surface area:
Range: 80 - 300 SF [7.5 - 27.5 M2]
VACUUM
Batch tray dryer with vacuum and no trays.
Material:
Default: *CI*
Tray surface area:
Range: 20 - 75 SF [1.9 - 6.9 M2]
Material:
SS304
Tray surface area:
Range: 20 - 80 SF [1.9 - 7.0 M2]
TURBO
Turbo tray drying system with auxiliaries except heating system.

Material:
Default: *CS*
Tray surface area:
Range: 60 - 20,000 SF [6 - 1,850 M2]
Heating medium:
Default: *blank*
H-AIR - Hot air
STEAM - Steam

Blank - Other heating medium
VAC SYSTEM
Batch tray dryer with vacuum pump and condenser.
Material:
Default: *CI*
Tray Surface Area:
Range: 13 - 70 SF [1.3 - 6.5 M2]

13 Solids Conveying

Conveyors (CO)
Definitions and Samples of Conveyor Section Types
Cranes (CE)
Feeders (FE)
Hoists (HO)
Scales (S)

Conveyors (CO)
Conveyors (CO)
Description Type
Open belt conveyor for transporting solid materials OPEN BELT

over long distances. Because the belt material is
reinforced rubber, materials at temperatures above
150 DEG F are normally not handled.
Includes grade-level support steel, belt tensioning
device, motors and drives.
An endless moving belt is used to transport solids
either horizontally or on an incline. The belt may be
flat, but is typically troughed in order to increase
the carrying capacity of the belt.
Belt Width:
Range: 18 - 120 INCHES [450 - 3,000 MM]
Product Density:
MAX: 20
0 PCF [3,200 KG/M3];
Driver Power per Section:
Driver power per section if conveyor has multiple
sections.
Conveyer Speed:
MIN: 20 FPM [370 M/H]
Vertical lift (+) or drop (-): Difference in elevation
between feed and discharge: lift (positive), drop
(negative). Default: *0.0* FEET [*0.0* M]
Height Grade Section:
Grade section has this uniform, nominal height for
entire length. Default: *6* FEET [*2* M].
Length Grade Section:
Default length = conveyor length, if length of other
two section type = 0.0.
Height Slope Section:
Slope section varies from grade section height to
this designated height.
Length Slope Section:
two section types = 0.0.
Height Above Grade Section:
Above grade section varies from slope section
height to this designated height.
Length Above Grade Section:
13-2 Aspen Icarus Reference Guide

Cantilever Length:
Cantilever length may be specified only for the end
of an elevated section. Default: *0.0* FEET [*0.0*
M]
Tower Bent Spacing:
Tower (bent) spacing applies to elevated sections
only. Default: *80* FEET [*25* M]
Gallery Enclosure:
Default: *NO GALLERY*
GALLERY - Gallery enclosure for conveyor and walks
NO GALLERY - No gallery enclosure
Number of Motors:
Default: 1 per MILE [1 per 1.6 KM]
Number of Walkways:
Default: 1 if no gallery, 2 if conveyor has gallery
enclosure.
Walkway Width:
Default: 36 INCHES [910 MM] if no gallery, 54
INCHES [1370 MM] if gallery enclosure.
Same as open belt conveyor but enclosed with CLOSED BLT

corrugated sheet metal canopy enclosing the belt to
protect the belt and the materials from the
elements. Canopy is also used to control dust when
transporting material with fines.
Belt Width:
Range: 18 - 120 INCHES [450 - 3,000 MM]
Product Density:
MAX: 200 PCF [3,200 KG/M3];
Driver Power per Section:
Driver power per section if conveyor has multiple
sections.
Speed:
MIN: 20 FPM [370 M/H]
Vert Lift (+) or drop (-): Difference in elevation
between feed and discharge: lift (positive), drop
(negative). Default: 0.0 FEET [0.0 M].
Height Grade Section:
Grade section has this uniform, nominal height for
entire length. Default: *6* FEET [*2* M]
Length Grade Section:
Height Slope Section:
Slope section varies from grade section height to
this designated height.
Length Slope Section:

Height Above Grade Section:
Above grade section varies from slope section
height to this designated height.
Length Above Grade Section:
Cantilever Length:
Cantilever length may be specified only for the end
of an elevated section. Default: *0.0* FEET [*0.0*
M]
Tower Bent Spacing:
Tower (bent) spacing applies to elevated sections
only. Default: *80* FEET [*25* M]
Gallery Enclosure:
Default: *NO GALLERY*
GALLERY - Gallery enclosure for conveyor and walks
NO GALLERY- No gallery enclosure
Number of Motors:
Default: 1 per MILE [1 per 1.6 KM]
Number of Walkways:
Default: 1 if no gallery, 2 if conveyor has gallery
enclosure.
Walkway Width:
Default: 36 INCHES [910 MM] if no gallery, 54
INCHES [1370 MM] if gallery enclosure.

Definitions and Samples of Conveyor Section
Types
Section 1: A conveyor section at uniform nominal height (H1) above grade. The
section on “post-type” legs and has a total length L1.
Section 2: A conveyor section where height varies from the nominal grade height
(H1) to some elevation above grade (H2). The section is supported on “bents” or
“tower-type” supports and has a total length L2.
Section 3: A conveyor section where height varies from one elevated height (H2) to
a second elevated height (H3). The section is supported on “bents” or “tower-type”
supports and has a total length L3.
Samples of Combined Sections

Sections 1, 2 and 3 Section 1 and 3

APRON
Apron to 50 FEET [15 M] includes motor and drive, open pans mounted between
endless chains, not enclosed (open), and floor-mounted support steel.
The apron conveyor is suitable for conveying coarse solids. The open apron conveyor
is limited to material temperatures less than 600 DEG F.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Conveyer Length:
Range: 7 - 50 FEET [2.2 - 15 M]
Conveyer Width:
Range: 18 - 54 INCHES [450 - 1,350 MM]
Conveyer Flow Rate:
Range: 20 - 200 TPH [18.5 - 142 TON/H]
Driver Power:
Range: 2 - 20 HP [1.5 - 15 KW]
Product Density:
MAX: 200 PCF [3,200 KG/M3];
PNEUMATIC
Pneumatic conveying system for moving granular materials horizontally and vertically
to areas that are either far away or otherwise hard to reach economically with
mechanical conveyors. Includes TEFC motor, blower, base, coupling, check valve,
instrumentation and filter piping.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
AL - Aluminum
Conveyer Length:
Range: 100 - 1,200 FEET [30 - 360 M]
Tube Diameter:
Range: 3 - 4 INCHES [75 - 100 MM]
Conveyer Flow Rate:
Range: 2 - 15 TPH [2 - 13 TON/H]
Product Density:
Range: 20 - 60 PCF [325 - 960 KG/M3];

ROLLER
Roller conveyor for moving firm flat-bottomed unit loads, (e.g., drums, pallets and
boxes). Inclines or declines should not be more than 5o. Especially suitable for
conveying unit loads in a curved path.
Rollers supported in frame.
Material:
Conveyer Length:
Range: 4 - 25 FEET [1.3 - 7.5 M]
Conveyer Width:
Range: 12 - 20 INCHES [300 - 500 MM]
Roller Spacing:
Range: 3 - 4 INCHES [75 - 100 MM]
SCREW
Screw conveyor for conveying granular or fine solids horizontally or up an incline.

Screw conveyor capacity, however, decreases rapidly as the angle of incline increases.
Includes motor, drive and helical screw in U-shaped trough.
The crew conveyor consists of a helical screw inside an enclosed U-shaped trough. As
the screw rotates, the material is moved forward. Screw conveyors are inexpensive,
easy to maintain and can easily be made dust-tight.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
SS305 - SS305
SS316 - SS316
Conveyer Length:
Range: 10 - 1,000 FEET [3.1 - 300 M]
Screw Diameter:
Range: 6 - 24 INCHES [155 - 600 MM]
Product Density:
MAX: 100 PCF [1,600 KG/M2]

VIBRATING
Vibrating conveyor for moving granular materials horizontally or on slight incline.

Includes motor and drive, carrying trough, support base and drive springs.
The material being transported should have a high friction factor on steel as well as a
high internal friction factor. Material must be dense so that air resistance will not
retard the flight of the solid particle as it is thrown forward, and the material should
not aerate.
Friable materials can be handled because the movement of the material is gentle. The
conveyor can be made dust-tight and materials of construction may be used to allow
the handling of materials at temperatures up to 2000 DEG F.
A vibrating conveyor consists of a carrying trough, supporting base, drive springs and
a drive system. The drive system and springs impart an oscillating motion to the
trough which causes the material to move forward in a hopping motion.
Material:
Pan Width:
Range: 12- 36 INCHES [300 - 900 MM]
CENT BKT L
Spaced bucket centrifugal discharge elevator includes motor, drive and bucket
contents discharged by centrifugal motion.
For the vertical lifting of free-flowing fine or small lump materials such as coal, sand
and dry chemicals. This elevator should not be used for materials that are degraded by
breakage or for fluffy materials.
This equipment item consists of evenly spaced buckets attached to an endless belt or
chain enclosed in a supporting casing. This is called a centrifugal discharge elevator
because the contents of the buckets are thrown into the discharge chute by centrifugal
force as the bucket rounds the head shaft.
Material:

Conveyer Length:
Range: 12 - 120 FEET [4 - 36 M]
Bucket Width:
Range: 6 - 16 INCHES [150 - 400 MM]
Conveyer Flow Rate:
Range: 16 - 156 TPH [14.5 - 141 TON/H]
Product Density:
MAX: 100 PCF [1,600 KG/M3];
CONT BKT L
Continuous bucket elevator, buckets closely spaced with back of preceding bucket
serving as gravity discharge chute for dumping bucket. Includes motor and drive.
The slower speed and gentler discharge make this type of elevator more suitable for
materials which are degraded through breakage, and for fluffy materials.
This equipment item is the same as the spaced bucket centrifugal discharge elevator
except buckets are closely spaced with the back of the preceding bucket serving as a
discharge chute for the bucket with is dumping as it rounds the head shaft. Close
bucket spacing allows the same capacity to be achieved as slower elevator speeds.
Thus, bucket discharge is by gravity rather than centrifugal force.
Material:
Conveyer Length:
Range: 12 - 100 FEET [4 - 36 M]
Bucket Depth:
Range: 8 - 24 INCHES [200 - 600 MM]
Conveyer Flow Rate:
Range: 40 - 216 TPH [36 - 195 TON/H]
Product Density:
MAX: 100 PCF [1,600 KG/M3];

S BELTCONV
Sanitary horizontal conveyor
Material:
*SS304*, SS316
Conveyer length:
Range: 6 - 20 FEET [1.8 - 6 M]
Belt width: Available sizes:
18 INCH [450 MM]
24 INCH [600 MM]
30 INCH [750 MM]
36 INCH [900 MM]
Conveyer type:
*INSPC* - Inspection type conveyor
BIDIR - bi-directional type (reversing belt conveyor)
Driver power: Default *1* HP
Driver type:
S VERTICAL
Sanitary vertical conveyor
Material:
*SS304*, SS316
Vertical lift (+) or drop (+): MIN: - 40 FEET [-12.2 M]; MAX: 40 FEET [12.2 M]
Difference in elevation between feed and discharge: lift (positive), drop (negative)
18 INCH [450 MM]
24 INCH [600 MM]
30 INCH [750 MM]
36 INCH [900 MM]
Length of lead-in section:
Default and MIN: *2* FEET [.6 M]
Length of the conveyor at feed end before lift or drop Length of lead-out section:
Default and MIN: *2* FEET [.6 M]
Length of the conveyor at discharge end before lift or drop
Driver power:
Default *1* HP
Driver type:
S VIBRATRY
Sanitary vibratory conveyor
Material:
*SS304*, SS316

Conveyer length:
Range: 6 - 40 FEET [1.8 - 12.2M]
18 INCH [450 MM]
24 INCH [600 MM]
30 INCH [750 MM]
36 INCH [900 MM]
Belt support:
*NONE* - No belt support will be provided
BSUP - Belt support will be provided
Driver type:
Number of lane dividers: Default *0*; MAX: 2
Dewatering screen:
*NONE* - De-watering screen pair not included
DWAT - De-watering screen pair included
Pneumatic gate:
*NONE* - Full-width pneumatic screen not included
PNUM - Full-width pneumatic screen included
Discharge type:
*NONE* - No discharge exists
DROP - Drop-out type discharge
BIAS - Bias type discharge
S INCLINE
Sanitary incline conveyor
Material: *SS304*, SS316
Length of incline section: MIN: 2 FEET [.600 M];
MAX: 40 FEET [12.2 M]
Belt width:
Available sizes:
18 INCH [450 MM]
24 INCH [600 MM]
30 INCH [750 MM]
36 INCH [900 MM]
Length of lead-in section: Default and MIN: *2* FEET [.6 M]
Length of the conveyor at feed end before lift or drop
Length of lead-out section: Default and MIN: *2* FEET [.6 M]
Length of the conveyor at discharge end before lift or drop
Driver type:

Cranes (CE)
BRIDGE CRN
Travelling bridge crane includes trolley, hoists, bridge, bridge rail, end trucks and
drivers; not included are building crane supports or travelling rails (see Plant Bulk —
Steel - Mill Building) to 200 TONS [175 TON].
Material:
Crane Capacity:
Range: 5 - 200 TONS [5 - 175 TON]
HOIST
Includes hoist trolley and track beam to 30 TONS [25 TON].

Material:
Crane Capacity:
Range: 0.5 - 30 TONS [0.5 - 25 TON]

FREIGHT
Freight elevator for lifting personnel, equipment and supplies in process buildings and
open steel structures. Capacity to 10 TONS [10 TON] and 200 FEET [60 M] lift.
Includes geared motor drive at 150 FPM [2750 M/H].
Elevator Capacity:
Range: 2 - 10 TONS [2 - 10 TON]
Height:
Range: 20 - 200 FEET [7 - 60 M]
PASSENGER
Elevator for lifting personnel and small tools in process buildings and open steel
structures. Capacity to 5 TONS [5 TON] and 200 FEET [60 M] lift. Includes geared
variable stage drive at 2 00 FPM [3650 M/H].
Elevator Capacity:
Range: 1 - 5 TONS [1 - 5 TON]
Height:
Range: 20 - 200 FEET [7 - 60 M]

Feeders (FE)
BELT
Volumetric belt feeder to 4800 CFH [135 M3/H]. Includes motor and drive.
Material:
Feeder Rate:
Range: 120 - 4,800 CFH [3.5 - 135 M3/H]
BIN ACTVTR
Bin activator.
Material:
Diameter:
Range: 3 - 15 FEET [1.0 - 4.5 M]
ROTARY
Rotary vane feeder with diameter to 36 INCHES [900 MM]. Includes motor and drive.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
Rotary Feeder Diameter:
Range: 3 - 36 INCHES [80 - 900 MM]
The model assumes 40 LBS/CF for capacity related calculations.
The model also assumes that each diameter unit has a maximum volumetric capacity.
For example, a 4 INCH diameter has 0.013 CF/rev and a 20 INCH diameter has 2.7
CF/rev.
The model calculations handle the following two cases:
If Rate (LBS/H) and RPM are not specified then:
For Dia <= 20, RPM=45

For Dia > 20, RPM=30
Assume 50% fill, so Rate is:
CF/Rev*RPM*0.5*(40 LBS/CF)*(60 Min/Hr)
If Rate is specified then:
RPM = Rate/(40 LBS/CF)/(CF/rev)/(60 Min/Hr)
Horsepower is estimated from diameter. For example, a 3 INCH diameter has 0.333
HP and a 30 INCH diameter has 5.0 HP.
VIBRATING
Vibrating feeder.
(includes hopper)
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
Length:
Range: 5 - 14 FEET [1.6 - 4.2 M]
Feeder Width:
Range: 12 - 72 INCHES [3.5 - 1,800 MM]
WT LOSS
Loss-in-weight. Gravimetric weigh belt for free-flowing feeding/proportioning of solids.
Includes motor and variable speed drive.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Flow Rate:
Range: 5 - 2,400 LB/H [2.3 - 1,085 KG/H]

DUMPER
Sanitary dumper.
Lifts vats, combos, and tubs. Heavy duty stainless steel construction is non-corrosive
to withstand rigors of daily washdown. Material of construction is SS316.
Dump height:
MIN: 3 FEET [0.914 M]; MAX: 17 FEET [5.18 M] for INLIN lift, 14 FEET [4.26 M] for
OFF lift.
Container type:
*55GD* - 55 GALLON [0.2 M3] drum
140GD - 140 GALLON [0.5 M3] drum
CTOTE - Corrugated tote
WOODC - Wood crate
3642B - SS bin 36 x 42 INCHES [914 x 1066 MM]
4242B- SS bin 42 x 42 INCHES [1066 x 1066 MM]
FBOX - Fiber box 18 x 18 x 36 INCHES [457 x 457 x 914 MM]
Lift type:
*INLIN* - Inline hydraulic lift
OFF - Offset electric lift
Retainer hold down:
*MAN* - Manual mechanism
AUTO - Automatic mechanism
AUTOB - Automatic mechanism and hydraulic box retainer
Hydraulic power pack:
*NONE* - External hydraulic power pack
INCL - Self-contained hydraulic power pack

SACK DUMP
Sanitary bulk bag unloader

Sack size:
*1,500 LBS [681 KG], MAX: 4,000 LBS [1,814 KG]
Discharge type:
*GRAV* - Gravity discharge
SCREW - Flexible screw conveyor
Control type:
*MAN* - Manual control
LIW - Loss-in-weight control
Frame loading type:
*FORK* - Fork lift loading
HOIST - Electric hoist and trolley
SAN SCREW
Sanitary screw feeder
Includes a hopper with a screw feeder to convey dry, fine, or wet solids. The screw
feeder is controlled as specified by the user. Material of construction is SS316.
Flow rate:
Enter mass rate/vol. rate
MAX: 5600LB/H [2540KG/H] at 35PCF[560KG/M3] - DRY-VOL
Volumetric rate:
Enter mass rate or vol. rate; MAX varies with density, product and control type.
MAX: 160 CFH [4.5 M3/H]
Product density:
*35 |PCF [560 |KG/M3]
Product type:
*FINE* - Fine powders only
DRY - Dry particulates; fine, coarse powders
WET - Wet, dry particulates; fine, coarse powder
Control type:
*VOL* - Volumetric control
LIW - Loss-in-weight control

Extended auger length:
*12 |INCHES [304 MM]*, MIN: 12 |INCHES [304 MM]
Enclosure type:
*WASH* - Washdown enclosure
EXPR - Explosion-proof enclosure
SAN BELT
Sanitary weigh belt feeder

Provides flow control for food and other solid materials not requiring total material
containment. Material of construction is SS316.
Flow Rate:
MAX: 90,000 LB/H [40,800 KG/H]
Required: enter rate or width.
Feeder Width:
Two available widths: 12 INCHES [300 MM], 24 INCHES [600 MM]. Required: enter
rate or width.
Enclosure type:
*CLOSE* - Closed frame unit
OPEN - Open frame unit

Hoists (HO)
HOIST
5-speed electric hoist with motor driven trolley. The trolley suspends the hoist from an
I-beam. The hoist is propelled along the I-beam by the motor driven trolley. An
electric hoist used for repetitive or
high-speed lifting.
Material:
Hoist Capacity:
Range: 1 - 12 TONS [1 - 10 TON]
1 SPEED
Single speed electric hoist, no trolley. Used for repetitive or high-speed lifting.
Material:
Hoist Capacity:
Range: 1 - 14 TONS [1 - 12 TON]
5 SPEED
5-speed electric hoist, no trolley. Used for repetitive or high-speed lifting.
Material:
Hoist Capacity:
Range: 1 - 13 TONS [1 - 11 TON]
HAND GT
Hand hoist, geared manual pull-chain driven trolley. For intermittent service,
especially maintenance work.
Material:
Hoist Capacity:
Range: 1 - 12 TONS [1 -10 TON]
HAND PT
Hand hoist, manually-pulled trolley. The hoist is moved to a new position on the I-
beam by manually pulling the trolley. For intermittent service, especially for
maintenance work.
Material:
Hoist Capacity:
Range: 1 - 12 TONS [1 - 10 TON]

HAND NT
Hand hoist, no trolley. The hand hoist without trolley is a portable lifting device which
is suspended from a hook and operated by a hand chain. For intermittent service,
especially for erection and maintenance work.
Material:
Capacity:
Range: 1 - 18 TONS [1 - 16 TON]
BEAM SCALE
Beam scale to 2000 LBS [900 KG].
Material:
Scale Capacity:
Range: 300 - 2,000 LBS [135 - 900 KG]
BELT
Conveyor belt scale.
Material:
Belt Width:
Range: 18 - 72 INCHES [450 - 1,800 MM]
BENCH
Bench, dial, and beam to 3000 LBS [1350 KG].
Material:
Scale Capacity:
MAX: 3,000 LBS [1,350 KG]
FULL FRAME
Floor, dial, and beam full frame to 8000 LBS [3600 KG].
Material:
Scale Capacity:
MAX: 8,000 LBS [3,600 KG]
SEMI FRAME
Floor, dial, and beam semi-frame to 8000 LBS [3600 KG].
Material:

Scale Capacity:
MAX: 8,000 LBS [3,600 KG]
TANK SCALE
Tank scale, weigh bridge and saddles 150000 LBS [68000 KG].
Material:
Scale Capacity:
Range: 10,000 - 150,000 LBS [4,500 - 68,000 KG]
TRACK
Track scale, for weighing rail cars to 300 TONS [265 TON].
Material:
Weight Capacity in Tons:
Range: 150 - 300 TONS [130 - 265 TON]
TRUCK
Truck scale, for weighing trucks/lorries to 60 TONS [54 TON].
Material:
Range: 30 - 60 TONS [25 - 54 TON]
SAN FLOOR
Sanitary floor scale - flush mounted
The sanitary floor scale is a deck provided in a frame, located inside a small pit so that
the top of the scale is flush with the floor. Weigh cells and instrumentation in the
frame measure the weight and display it on a nearby local panel.
Material of construction is stainless steel.
Scale Capacity:
MAX: 10,000 LBS [4,500 KG]
Platform Size:
3X3 - 3x3 FEET [0.9x0.9 M] platform
4X4 - 4X4 FEET [1.2x1.2 M] platform
Local digital indicator:
*INCL* - Includes logical digital indicator
NONE - Remote indicator only
Deck surface:
*PLAIN* - Glass bead sandbase

TREAD - Tread plate
Deck lift:
*AUTO* - Automatic deck lift
NONE - No deck lift
Floor installation:
*NEW* - No floor alteration necessary
EXIST - Alter the existing floor

Scales (S)
BEAM SCALE
Beam scale to 2000 LBS [900 KG].
Material:
Scale Capacity:
Range: 300 - 2,000 LBS [135 - 900 KG]
BELT
Conveyor belt scale.
Material:
Belt Width:
Range: 18 - 72 INCHES [450 - 1,800 MM]
BENCH
Bench, dial, and beam to 3000 LBS [1350 KG].
Material:
Scale Capacity:
MAX: 3,000 LBS [1,350 KG]
FULL FRAME
Floor, dial, and beam full frame to 8000 LBS [3600 KG].
Material:
Scale Capacity:
MAX: 8,000 LBS [3,600 KG]
SEMI FRAME
Floor, dial, and beam semi-frame to 8000 LBS [3600 KG].
Material:
Scale Capacity:
MAX: 8,000 LBS [3,600 KG]

TANK SCALE
Tank scale, weigh bridge and saddles 150000 LBS [68000 KG].
Material:
Scale Capacity:
Range: 10,000 - 150,000 LBS [4,500 - 68,000 KG]
TRACK
Track scale, for weighing rail cars to 300 TONS [265 TON].
Material:
Range: 150 - 300 TONS [130 - 265 TON]
TRUCK
Truck scale, for weighing trucks/lorries to 60 TONS [54 TON].
Material:
Range: 30 - 60 TONS [25 - 54 TON]
SAN FLOOR
Sanitary floor scale - flush mounted
The sanitary floor scale is a deck provided in a frame, located inside a small pit so that
the top of the scale is flush with the floor. Weigh cells and instrumentation in the
frame measure the weight and display it on a nearby local panel.
Scale Capacity: MAX: 10,000 LBS [4,500 KG]
Platform Size:
4X4 - 4X4 FEET [1.2x1.2 M] platform
Local digital indicator:
*INCL* - Includes logical digital indicator
NONE - Remote indicator only
Deck surface:
*PLAIN* - Glass bead sandblasted
TREAD - Tread plate
Deck lift:
*AUTO* - Automatic deck lift
NONE - No deck lift
Floor installation:

*NEW* - No floor alteration necessary
EXIST - Alter the existing floor

14 Separation Equipment

Centrifuges (CT)
Filters (F)
Thickeners (T)
Screens (VS)

Centrifuges (CT)
ATM SUSPEN
Atmospheric suspended basket.

Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
Driver Power:
Range: 2 - 30 HP [1.5 - 22 KW]
BATCH AUTO
Automatic batch filtering centrifuge to 60 INCHES [1520 MM].

Material: Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
SS316 - SS316
HASTC - Hastelloy C
Centrifuge diameter:
Range: 24 - 60 INCHES [610 - 1,520 MM]
Centrifuge capacity:
Range: 3 - 30 CF [0.085 - 0.84 M3]

BATCH BOTM
Batch bottom-suspended filtering centrifuge with diameter to 48 INCHES [1210 MM].

Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
Range: 20 - 48 INCHES [510 - 1,210 MM]
TOP UNLOAD
Batch bottom-driven centrifuge, top unloading, explosion-proof motor with diameter to
56 INCHES [1420 MM].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
RBLCS - Rubber-lined carbon steel
SS316 - SS316
HASTC - Hastelloy C
Centrifuge capacity:
Range: 2 - 20 CF [0.06 - 0.56 M3]
Range: 18 - 56 INCHES [460 - 1,420 MM]
BOT UNLOAD
Batch bottom-driven centrifuge, bottom unloading, fixed speed hydraulic driver with
diameter to 56 INCHES [1420 MM].
Material:
Default: *SS316*
Range: 12 - 56 INCHES [305 - 1,420 MM]
BATCH TOP
Batch top-suspended filtering centrifuge with diameter to 50 INCHES [1260

MM].

Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
RBLCS - Rubber-lined carbon steel
Range: 20 - 50 INCHES [510 - 1,260 MM]
DISK
High speed disk clarifier centrifuge, stack of rotating conical disks to shorten
sedimentation path, batch removal of solids and diameter to 20 INCHES [500 MM].
Material:
Default: *CS*
Range: 10 - 20 INCHES [250 - 500 MM]
RECIP CONV
Reciprocating conveyor, with continuous filtering centrifuge for free-draining granular

solids, horizontal bowl, removal by reciprocating piston and diameter to 50 INCHES
[1250 MM].
Material:
Range: 15 - 50 INCHES [375 - 1,250 MM]
Material:
Range: 20 - 50 INCHES [500 - 1,250 MM]

SCROLL CON
Scroll conveyor with continuous filtering centrifuge, solids removal by scroll conveyor
and diameter to 75 INCHES [1875 MM].
Material:
Range: 15 - 75 INCHES [375 - 1,875 MM
Material:
Range: 15 - 50 INCHES [375 - 1,250 MM]
SOLID BOWL
Solid bowl with diameter to 54 INCHES [1370 MM].

Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
SS316 - SS316
Bowl diameter:
Range: 18 - 54 INCHES [460 - 1,370 MM]
Dowl length:
Range: 28 - 132 INCHES [720 - 3,350 MM]
SCREEN BWL
Screen bowl with diameter to 54 INCHES [1370 MM].

Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
SS316 - SS316
Bowl diameter:
Range: 18 - 54 INCHES [460 - 1,370 MM]
Bowl length:
Range: 28 - 132 INCHES [720 - 3,350 MM]
TUBULAR
High speed tubular sedimentation centrifuge, bottom entry, batch solids removal and
diameter to 6 INCHES [150 MM].
The following rates are shown to assist in selecting the proper equipment item,
however, rates outside this range may be input.
TPH = 110-325, TON/H = 91-263.
Material:
Bowl diameter:
Range: 4 - 6 INCHES [105 - 150 MM]
VIBRATORY
Continuous filtration vibratory centrifuge with solids removal by vibratory screen for
dewatering of coarse solids with screen diameter to 56 INCHES [1420 MM].
Material:
Screen diameter:
Range: 48 - 56 INCHES [1,220 - 1,420 MM]
INVERTING
Inverting filter centrifuge.

Material: Default: *SS316*
Centrifuge diameter: Range: 12 - 52 INCHES [305 - 1,320 MM]
Centrifuge capacity: Range: 0.2 - 12 CF [0.0056 - 0.34 M3]

CENTRF PRE
Centrifugal precipitator includes driver and interconnecting piping with flow rate to
10,000 CFM [16,990 M3].
Material:
Default: *CS*
Gas flow rate:
Range: 500 - 10,000 CFM [850 - 16,990 M3/H]
CLOTH BAY
Cloth bay baghouse includes hopper bottom, airlocks and electrical motor shakers.
Cloth area to 12,000 SF [1,110 M2].
Fabric filters are used for high efficiency 99+%, cleaning of small particles (less than
one micron). Fabric filters are an excellent choice where feed conditions may vary
because efficiency is unaffected by varying flowrates, particulate loading, or particle
size distribution. Baghouses are not a good choice if the gas contains free moisture or
if condensation will occur in the baghouse. Baghouses are limited to a maximum
temperature of 550 DEG F.
Shaker type filters are generally used for:
• Low CFM
• Low particulate loading
• Intermittent operation.
Pulse type units are used for:
• Large CFM
• High particulate loading
• Continuous operation.

The “cloth bay” dust collector is commonly called a baghouse or fabric filter. Dust
laden gas is ducted into a rectangular (small units may be cylindrical) enclosure. The
dirty gas must pass through cloth tubes or bags to get out of the baghouse.
Baghouses are characterized by the method used to clean the filter bags. Two options
are available - shaker and pulse type cleaning, which are a function of the air-to-
media ratio.
The air-to-media ratio, also called the air-to-cloth ratio, is the CFM of gas passing
through one square foot of filter fabric. Shaker type baghouses are limited to air-to-
media ratios of less than 4:1. Dirty gas flows from the inside to the outside of the filter
bags in a shaker type unit. In order to remove the collected dust, the flow of dirty gas
is stopped and an electric motor shakes the bags.
Pulse type units have their filter bags supported over a cylindrical wire cage and dirty
gas flows from the outside of the bags to the inside. Pulse type units operate with air-
to-cloth ratios from 4:1 to 15:1. Filter bags are cleaned by injecting a pulse of
compressed air into the bags being cleaned. The pulse of air expands the bags
violently and throws off the dust collected on the bag’s outside surface. The pulse type
baghouse does not have to be taken off-line for cleaning.
With both types of baghouse, the dust is collected in hopper bottoms and removed
through an airlock.
Today, most filter bags are manufactured from synthetic fibers. The materials in most
common use are acrylics, nylon 6, nylon 66, “nomex” nylon, “Teflon,” polypropylene
and polyesters (e.g., “dacron”). The baghouses in the system have polyester bags.
Polyester has moderate all-around chemical resistance and good strength and abrasion
resistance. Polyester may be used at a minimum continuous service temperature of
300 DEG F.
Material:
Surface Area:
Range: 100 - 12,000 SF [10 - 1,110 M2]
Flow rate:
Enter surface area, flow rate, or boiler capacity (coal-fired boiler aplx. only)
Air/media ratio:
Range: 1 - 4 CFM/SF [19 - 70 M2/H/M2]
Air temperature:
Boiler capacity:
Max: 3,400 MMBTU/H [1,000 MEGAW]
PULSE SHKR
Baghouse with injected pulsed air Compressor for air pulse injection not included.
Material:
Surface Area:
Range: 100 - 6,000 SF [10 - 557 M2]
Flow Rate:
Max: 250,000 CFM [420,000 M3/H]
Air/media ratio:
Range: 5 - 15 CFM/SF [91 - 270 M3/H/M2]
Air temperature:

Boiler capacity:
CYCLONE
Cyclone for gas/solid separation. Diameter to 60 INCHES [1,500 MM].

Collection efficiency varies with particle size.
From the table above, we see that cyclones are a good choice for medium size
particles. Cyclones can be fabricated from a wide variety of internals and can also be
refractory lined. Therefore cyclones can be used for the removal of particles from
corrosive and/or high temperature (1,800 DEG F) gas streams.
The cyclone has a cylindrically shaped upper section and long tapering conical lower
section. Dirty gas enters the top section through a tangential nozzle. This imparts a
swirling motion to the gas. The entrained particles are thrown to the wall of the
cyclone by centrifugal force. The particles descend by gravity along the wall to the
bottom of the cone where they are discharged.
The gas spirals downward to the bottom of the cone then reverses direction and
moves upward to the gas exit at the top center of the cyclone. Increasing the diameter
of a cyclone increases its capacity but capacity of a single cyclone is limited to about
50,000 CFM. When larger flowrates must be handled several cyclones are arranged in
parallel.
Material Selection:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
Diameter:
Range: 3 - 60 INCHES [75 - 1,500 MM]
Flow Rate:
Range: 70 - 40,000 CFM [120 - 67,900 M2/H]
Pressure drop:
Default: *2.5* IN-H20 [*625* PA] to *27,000*
CFM [*45,870* M3/H]; or *6* IN-H20 [*1,500* PA]

Air Temperature:
MULT CYCLO
Multiple cyclone with flow rate to 20,000 CFM [33,980 M3/H].

Material:
Gas flow rate:
Range: 900 - 20,000 CFM [1,530 - 33,980 M2/H]
ELC H VOLT
High voltage electrical precipitator

Gas flow rate:
Min: 600 CFM [1,020 M3/H]
Required: gas flow rate or boiler capacity (for coal-boiler application only)
Boiler capacity:
Max: 3,400 MMBTU/H [1,000 MEGAW]
Required: gas flow rate or boiler capacity (for coal-boiler application only)
Removal efficiency:
Min: 80.0%; Max: 99.99%
Required: removal efficiency or particle load (for coal-boiler application only)
Particle size (microns):
Default: *0.600* microns
Particle resistance x10E10:
Default: *2* OHM-IN [*5* OHM-CM]

SO3 Concentration (ppm): Default: *4.50* ppm
ELC L VOLT
Low voltage electrical precipitator
Material:
Gas flow rate:
Range: 600 - 20,000 CFM [1,020 - 33,980 M3/H]
VENTURI SC
Venturi and cyclone scrubber

Material:
Gas flow rate:
Actual gas flow rate at scrubber inlet. Range: 225 – 180,810 CFM [385 – 307,195
M3/H]
Wall thickness:
Default: 0.1046 INCHES [2.7 MM]; Range: 0.1046 – 0.25 INCHES [2.7 – 6.35 MM]
Pressure drop:
Total pressure drop across the scrubber. Default: 25 IN H20 [6227 PA]; Range: 10 –
100 IN H20 [2491 – 24908 PA]

WASHERS
Washer dust collector

Material:
Default: *CS*
Gas flow rate:
Range: 600 - 20,000 CFM [1,020 -33,980 M3/H]
Air temperature:

Filters (F)
CARTRIDGE
Cartridge filter to 1,200 GPM [75 L/S] with 5 micron cotton filter.
Cartridge filters are generally used as a final filtering element for the removal of small
particles, such as pipe scale, down to 10 microns in size from a liquid stream
containing a low concentration of these solids.
A cartridge filter consists of a tank containing one or more filter elements or cartridges
which are tubes of wound natural or synthetic fibers. Liquid flows through the
cartridges and the suspended solids are trapped by the fibers. As the filter gets dirtier,
pressure drop builds to a point where the cartridges must be replaced. The cartridges
are disposable. They are not cleaned and reused.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
Liquid flow rate:
Range: 30 - 1,200 GPM [1.9 - 75 L/S]
LEAF DRY
Pressure leaf-dry filter with leaf area to 600 SF [55 M2].

Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
SS316 - SS316
Surface area:
Range: 50 -600 SF [4.7 - 55 M2]

LEAF WET
Pressure leaf-wet filter with leaf area to 600 SF [55 M2].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
SS316 - SS316
Surface area:
Range: 50 - 600 SF [4.7 - 55 M2]
PLATE FRAM
Automatic plate and frame filter with capacity to 50 CF [1.4 M3].

Material:
Default: *RBLCS*
RBLCS - Rubber-line CS
PPLCS - Polyprop. lined CS
SS316 - SS316
Frame capacity:
Range: 10 - 50 CF [0.3 - 1.4 M3]
Plate size:
Range: 36 - 48 INCHES [900 - 1,200 MM];
Default: 48 INCHES [1,2000 MM]
ROTY DISK
Disk Filter. General Features: The filter is a vacuum type (from drop leg), consisting of
segmented disks with polypropylene filter bags, suction valve, vat (optional) with
stiffeners, discharge trough, drive motor, base plate, rotor and bearing support. The
following variations are available.

Standard Disk Filter (for general chemical industry) — This filter additionally includes a
paddle agitator for the vat, worm and gear reducer for filter drum, air blow discharge
mechanism and cleaning showers.
Thickener (as in pulp and paper mills) — includes the general features and in addition,
has repulper, flushing pipe, hood with mounting flange, inspection and service doors,
knock off and cleaning showers (including nozzles, header, hoses, valves). The filtrate
valve (double solution type) and the drive reducer is a helical gear.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
SS316 - SS316
RBLCS - Rubber lined CS
EPLCS - Epoxy lined CS
Application:
Default: *MD RATE*
LO RATE - Low filtration rate
MD RATE - Medium filtration rate
HI RATE - High filtration rate
THCKNR - Used as a thickening device
Solid flow rate:
Enter solid flow rate or surface area.
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 900 SF [10 - 80 M2]
Solids handling rate:
Default: 0.30 TPD/SF [0.12 TPH/lM2]
Number of disks:
Min: 1; Default: *3*.
Liquid flow rate:
Flowrate of feed stream
Percent of solids in the feed stream.
Range: 0.50 - 5.00; Default: *15*.
Tank or vat material:
Default: *NONE*
NONE - No vat will be provided
CS - Carbon steel vat
SS316 - Stainless steel vat
ROTY DRUM

Drum Filter. General Features: The filter is a vacuum type (from drop leg), multi
compartment cylinder shell with internal filtrate piping with polypropylene filter cloth,
feed box with inlet and drain nozzles, suction valve, rake-agitated vat (optional) with
stiffeners, discharge trough, driver consisting of rotor, drive motor base plate, worm,
gear reducer and two pillow block bearing with supports. In addition to the standard
filter, the following variations are available.
Thickener (as in pulp and paper mills) — includes the above general features and, in
addition, has repulper, flushing pipe, hood with mounting flange, inspection and
service doors, knock off and cleaning showers (including nozzles, header, hoses,
valves). The distinguishing features are air-assisted scraper discharge, filtrate valve
(double solution type), steel filter cloth and the drive reducer is a helical gear.
Brown Stock and Bleach Washers — in addition to the thickener features, the washers
have multiple showers for washing.
Lime Mud Filter and Dregs Washer — essentially includes the same general features as
the general washer, but with pre-coat for easier filtration.
Material: Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
SS316 - SS316
EPLCS - Epoxy lined CS
Application: Default: *MD RATE*
LO RATE - Low filtration rate
MD RATE - Medium filtration rate
HI RATE - High filtration rate
THCKNR - Used as a thickening device
Solid flow rate:
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 2,000 SF [10 - 185 M2]
Solids handling rate:
Default: 0.50 TPD/SF [0.20 TPH/lM2]
Number of disks:
Min: 1; Default: *3*.
Liquid flow rate:
Flowrate of feed stream
Range: 0.50 - 5.00; Default: *20*.
Tank or vat material: Default: *NONE*
NONE - No vat will be provided
CS - Carbon steel vat
SS316 - Stainless steel vat
SCROLL
Scroll discharge centrifugal filter for dewatering fine solids (0 to 28 mesh) or medium
coarse solids (.375 INCH [10 MM] to 28 mesh).
Material:

Feed size selection:
FINE - Fine solids
MEDIUM - Medium solids
SEWAGE
Sewage filter with area to 600 SF [55 M2].

Material:
Default: *CS*
Surface area:
Range: 100 - 600 SF [10 - 55 M2]
SPARKLER
Sparkler with area to 110 SF [10 M2].

Material:
Default: *SS316*
SS316 - SS316
Surface area:
Range: 8 - 110 SF [0.75 - 10.2 M2]
Sparkler volume:
Range: 0.5 - 15 CF [0.02 - 0.4 M3]
Sparkler diameter:
Range: 18 - 33 INCHES [450 - 825 MM]

TUBULAR
Tubular fabric filters (bank of three) with automatic or manual cleaning/backwashing.

Flow rate to 3400 GPM
[210 L/S].
For filtering liquid streams such as cooling tower water and tank car loading lines. The
wide selection of filter media available allows particles from 1 micron to 2,000 microns
in size to be removed. Because tubular filters can be backwashed, liquid streams with
high solids concentrations can be handled.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS- Carbon steel
SS- Stainless steel
Liquid flow rate:
Range: 100 – 3,400 GPM [6.5 – 210 L/S]
Mesh size:
Range: 60 – 700 MESH
Mode of operation:
Automatic cleaning and backwashing option available.
Default: None
NONE- No auto operation
AUTO- Auto clean/backwash
WHITEWATER
White water filter, including centrifugal screening basket, internal showers and
distributors.
Liquid flow rate:
Maximum flow vares: 4750 GPM [300 L/S] at 0.001 consistency, 2500 GPM [157 L/S]
at 0.1.
Range: 0.001 to 0.1; Default: 0.1.
COMPRGAS
Compressed gas filter
Removes particulates from compressed gas. Supplied with standard 10 micron filter.
Min: 0.25 PSIG [1.75 KPA]; Max: 720 PSIG [4,965 KPA]
Specified inlet pressure dictates maximum gas flow rate and pressure drop.

Gas flow rate and Pressure Drop:
Maximum gas flow rate, which varies with inlet pressure (see chart), is at standard
conditions.
Design gauge pressure Gas flow rate MAX*
Inlet
150 PSIG [1,033 KP A] 60,000 CFM [103,000 M3/H]
275 PSIG [1,895 KP A 86,500 CFM [146,900 M3/H]
720 PSIG [4,956 KP A] 155,000 CFM [263,000 M3/H]
*at MAX Pressure Drop

Temperature: Default: *60* DEG F [*15.5* DEG C]; Max: 100 DEG F [37.5
DEG C]. Maximum gas flow rate is achieved at 60 DEG F.
Pressure drop: Range varies with temperature and inlet pressure. The following
defaults and MIN/MAX values are applicable only to air at default temperature of 60
DEG F [15.5 DEG C]. For other gases and/or other temperatures, appropriate
molecular weight and temperature corrections will be applied to the pressure drop.
Default MIN MAX

De sign gauge pressure Inle t a
r nge of 0.25 PSIG [1.75 KPA] - 150 PSIG [1,033 KP A]
0.0175 psi 0.0175 psi 2.0 psi
[0.00012 N/mm2] [0.00012 N/mm2] [0.01379 N/mm2]
r nge of 150 PSIG [1,033 KPA] - 275 PSIG [1,895 KP A]
0.25 psi 0.25 psi 3.0 psi
[0.00172 N/mm2] [0.00172 N/mm2] [0.02068 N/mm2]
r nge of 275 PSIG [1,895 KPA] - 720 PSIG [4,956 KP A]
0.50 psi 0.50 psi 5.0 psi
[0.00345 N/mm2] [0.00345 N/mm2] [0.03447 N/mm2]
Molecular weight:
Default gas is air with a molecular weight of 28.96.
METAL TRAP
Sanitary in-line metal trap

Protects against iron contamination and reduces abrasive wear to equipment by
trapping particles via gravity and magnetic separating action. Material of construction
is SS316.
Pipe diameter:
MIN: 2 INCH [50 MM], MAX: 4 INCH [100 MM].
Standard sizes:
INCH MM
2 50
3 80
4 100

RECL REEL
Sanitary fluming reclaim reel

Sometimes used with a fluming pump and dewatering shaker. Water from the shaker
will be forwarded to the fluming reclaim reel so that the reclaim reel can remove solids
that weren’t removed by the shaker.
Fluming rate:
MAX: 1,200 GPM [75 L/S]
Distribution header:
NONE - Not included
*INCL* - Included
Cover option:
INCL - Included
SAN AIR
Culinary (sterile) air filter

Keeps rust and other such matter out of the product. Material of construction is
SS316.
Air flow rate:
Enter actual flow rate or pipe size; MAX: 4340 CFM [7373M3/H] at 100 PSIG
[689.4KPA].
Pipe diameter:
MIN: 0.5 INCH [15 MM], MAX: 8 INCH [200 MM]
Standard sizes:
INCH MM

0.5 15
1 25
2 50
3 80
4 100
6 150
8 200
MIN: 100 PSIG [680 KPA]
Number of stages:
*1*, MIN: 1, MAX: 3
SAN PIPE
Sanitary pipe filter

Removes fine particles from a given liquid or gas. Material of construction is SS316.
Pipe diameter:
MIN: 1 INCHES [25 MM], MAX: 4 INCHES [100 MM].
- For size LONG and type INLIN, range is 1.5 IN [40MM] - 3 INCHES [75 MM].
-For type BASKT, MIN is 2 INCHES.
Standard sizes:
INCHES MM
1.0 25
1.5 40
2.0 50
2.5 65 (not available for BASKT)
3.0 80
4.0 100 (not available for INLIN)
Style:
*INLIN* - In-line filter
BASKT - Basket filter - for dia. >= 2 INCHES [50 MM]
If pipe diameter is 4 INCHES [100 MM], BASKT is the only available type. Otherwise,
default is INLIN.
Body size:
*SHORT* - Short body
LONG - Long body

SAN PRESS
Sanitary filter press

Takes in liquid through internal ports located in every frame and the two heads, then
passes the liquid through the filter media and into the plates, and finally releases the
liquid through the head.
Any two must be entered: total area, plate size, number of plates. The third is
computed accordingly.
Plate material:
SS304, *SS316*
Total plate area:
The maximum total area, entered in square feet (SF) or square meters (M2), depends
on the plate type and plate size, and is internally calculated and checked.
Plate size:
Available sizes of round plates:
INCH ES MM
12 300
18 450
24 600
Available sizes of square plates:
INCH ES MM
12 7/8 300
18 7/8 450
24 600
Note: 24 INCH (600 MM) plate size available for HYDRL (hydraulic) closure type only.
Number of plates:
The maximum number of plates depends upon the plate size:
Plate Size MAX No.

Square Round of Plates
12 INCH [300 MM] 7
12 /8 INCH [300 MM] 15
18 INCH [450 MM] 187 /8 INCH [450 MM] 25
24 INCH [600 MM] 24 INCH [600 MM] 40

Plate thickness:
*1 INCH [25 MM]*; MIN: 1 INCH [25 MM]; MAX: 2 INCHES [50 MM]. These (that is,
the MIN and the MAX values) are the only standard plate thicknesses available.
Head and stand material:
CS- Carbon steel
*SS* - Stainless steel
Plate type:
*ROUND* - Round plates
SQUAR - Square plates
Feed pump type:
*PD * - Positive displacement pump
CNTRF - Centrifugal pump
NONE - No feed pump included
Hydraulic closure:
*HYDRL* - Hydraulic closure
MANUL - Manual closure (not available for 24 INCH [600 MM] plate size)
SAN STEAM
Culinary (sterile) steam filter

Used primarily for cleaning factory or plant steam to reduce the levels of boiler feed
chemicals, rust, pipe scale, and other contaminates. Material of construction is SS316.
Flow rate:
MIN: 215.0 LB/H [97.5 KG/H]; MAX: 36,100 LB/H [16,375 KG/H]. The
Minimum/maximum flow rates are computed and depend upon the steam pressure.
Those given above are at the default steam pressure of 100 PSIG [680 KPA].
Enter either flow rate or pipe diameter.
Pipe diameter:
MIN: 0.75 INCHES [20 MM]; MAX: 8 INCHES [200 MM]. Standard sizes are shown
under Filter diameter.
Enter either flow rate or pipe diameter.

Body Diameter: Determined by Pipe Diameter.
Pipe diameter Filter body diameter

Inch-Pound Metric Inch-Pound Metric
0.75 INCHES 20 MM 1.5 INCHES 38.1 MM
1 INCHES 25 MM 2.5 INCHES 63.5 MM
2 INCHES 50 MM 4 INCHES 101.6 MM
8 INCHES 200 MM 16 INCHES 406.4 MM
Body length:
If pipe diameter is entered, system selects a filter body length from the above table. If
user enters a length, it is printed, but the underlying design value is still provided by
the table.
Steam pressure-gauge:
*100 PSIG [680 KPA]*
SAN STRAIN
Sanitary pipe strainer

Removes large particles as a process stream passes through the strainer’s perforated
plate or screen mesh. Material of construction is SS316.
Pipe diameter:
MIN: 1 INCH [25 MM], MAX: 4 INCHES [100 MM], with the following exceptions:
- For BASKT style, MIN is 2 INCHES [50 MM].
- For size LONG and INLIN style, MAX is 3 INCHES [80MM].
Standard sizes:
INCH MM
1 25
1.5 40
2 50
2.5* 65*
3 80
4 100
*BASKT style is not available in this size
Style:
*INLIN* - In-line filter
BASKT - Basket filter - for dia. >= 2 INCHES [50 MM]. Not available for 2.5 IN [65
MM] pipe diameter.

Note: for pipe diameter of 4 INCHES [100 MM], BASKT is the only available style;
otherwise, the default style is INLIN.
Body size:
*SHORT* - Short body
LONG - Long body
Configuration:
*SINGL* - Single filter
TWIN - Twin filters
FILTER SEDIMENT REMOVAL
Sediment Removal Filter

Cartridge filter to 1,200 GPM [75 L/S] with 5 micron cotton filter.
Cartridge filters are generally used as a final filtering element for the removal of small
particles, such as pipe scale, down to 10 microns in size from a liquid stream
containing a low concentration of these solids.
A cartridge filter consists of a tank containing one or more filter elements or cartridges
which are tubes of wound natural or synthetic fibers. Liquid flows through the
cartridges and the suspended solids are trapped by the fibers. As the filter gets dirtier,
pressure drop builds to a point where the cartridges must be replaced. The cartridges
are disposable. They are not cleaned and reused.
Shell Material:
Def.: mat'l selection from design temp.(Ref. proj. equipment design basis). Specify
backing plate mat'l if clad plate
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
A516
A515
A204C - C-.5Mo
A387B - 1Cr - .5Mo
SS304 - SS304
SS316 - SS316
SS321 - SS321
SS347 - SS347
304L - 304L
316L - 316L
NI - Nickel
INCNL - Inconel
MONEL - Monel
HAST - Hastelloy
TFELS - Teflon lined CS

GSLCS - Glass lined CS
CS... - See list of carbon steel materials
H-T STL... - See list of heat treated steel materials
LOW ALLOY STL... - See list of low alloy steel materials
HI ALLOY STL... - See list of hi alloy steel materials
NON FERROUS... - See list of non-ferrous materials
LINED CS MATLS... - See list of lined steel materials
Vessel Diameter:
Default gauge pressure:
Default: pressure design.
Default: pressure design.
Design temperature:
Default: 650 DEGF[340 DEGC] ferrous mat'l;250 DEGF[120 DEGC] mat'l;
Default: Design temperature
Skirt height:
Skip if legs required. Default: 1.5 x diameter. If the vessel is hung in an Open Steel
Structure (BSTLOPN STL ST) or Truckable (TRMD)/Bargeable (BRGM) module by
specifying a valid structure tag, skirt is not estimated. Enter “0.0” if the vessel is hung
in open structure area (area type OPEN/EXOPEN).
Skirt thickness:
Min > 0
Default: system calculated;
Vessel leg height:
Skip if skirt required. Default: *4* FEET [1.25 M]. If the vessel is hung in an Open
Steel Structure (BSTLOPN STL ST) or Truckable (TRMD)/Bargeable (BRGM) module by
specifying a valid structure tag, leg is not estimated. Enter “0.0” if the vessel is hung
in open structure area (area type OPEN/EXOPEN).
Fluid volume:
Min: 0
Max: 100
Default: 20
For seismic design; fluid volume as a % of vessel volume (water assumed).
Min: 0
Default: 0
Specify an allowance for internals as a percent of basic vessel weight.
Weld efficiency:
Min: 50
Max: 100
ASME/JIS/DIN only, where allowed for thin wall vessels; default: Area Basis.

Stress relief:
Min: 0
Default: 1
Head type:
ELLIP - 2:1 Ellipsoidal
Head thickness Top:
Min: >0
Min: >0
Diameter option:
Defines desired diameter as ID or OD, default – see Area Design Basis.

PULP STOCK
Centrifugal cleaners/wet cyclones used for removal of contaminants in fluids using

centrifugal force. Includes the body, supporting legs, two reject valves per cyclone,
reject chamber/grit pot, automatic or manual control of rejected materials and a
header for multiple cyclones. Separate material specifications are allowed for the top
and conical section. Sizing and scaling features allow contaminants to be separated by
size and density/type. Linear or radial configurations are available.
Main section material:
Default: *SS316*
SS316 - SS316
316L - 316 L
CS - Carbon steel
CERML - Light ceramic liner on CS
CERMM - Medium ceramic liner on CS
CERMH - Heavy ceramic liner on CS
CERMV - Very heavy ceramic liner on CS
ABRPL - Abrasion resistant plate
REPRB - Replaceable rubber liner on CS
LS304 - Replaceable SS304 on CS
Cyclone diameter:
Enter diameter or liquid flow rate.
Range: 4 - 30 INCHES [100 - 750 MM]
Liquid flow rate:
Enter diameter or liquid flow rate.
Application:
Default: *AUTO*
AUTO - Automatic cleaner discharge

MANL - Manual cleaner discharge
Configuration:
Default: *LIN*
LIN - Linear manifold
RAD - Radial manifold
Number of cyclones per manifold:
Default: *1*
Cone section material:
Default: *SS316*
SS316 - SS316
316L - 316 L
CS - Carbon steel
CERML - Light ceramic liner on CS
CERMM - Medium ceramic liner on CS
CERMH - Heavy ceramic liner on CS
CERMV - Very heavy ceramic liner on CS
CERMC - Ceramic
ABRPL - Abrasion resistant plate
REPRB - Replaceable rubber liner on CS
Containment size:
Default: *MEDIUM*
SMALL - Small debris, less than 40 microns
MEDIUM - Medium debris, 40 - 400 microns
LARGE - Large debris, 400 - 4000 microns
Containment density:
Default: *MEDIUM*
LIGHT - Lightweight debris: asphalt, sand, ink
MEDIUM - Medium weight debris: clay, heavy sand
HEAVY - Heavy weight debris: metal clips, foil
VHEAVY - Very heavy debris: nuts, bolts, rock
WATER CYCL
Water-only cyclones for separation of light and heavy minerals or particle size
separation. Cyclones may be linear or radial manifold and may be lined with
replaceable liners. Cyclone diameter to 30 INCHES [760 MM].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
CERML - Light ceramic liner
CERMM - Medium ceramic liner
CERMH - Heavy ceramic liner
CERMV - Very heavy ceramic liner
ABRPL - Abrasive resistant plate
REPRB - Replaceable rubber lining
LS304 - Replaceable SS304 lining
LS316 - Replaceable SS316 lining

Cyclone diameter:
Diameter is for individual cyclone, group manifolding - linear or radial. Range: 4 - 30
INCHES [105 - 760 MM]
Configuration:
Default: *LIN*
LIN - Linear manifold
RAD - Radial manifold
OIL WATER
Oil-water separator - API type.
Material:
Liquid flow rate:
Maximum flow (see Configuration) less Specific Gravity increase. For example, for BOX
135 GPM [8.5 L/S] at 0.965. Min: 25 GPM [16 L/S]
Diameter or width:
Range: 4 - 8 FEET [1.22 - 2.40 M]
Length:
Range: 20 - 40 FEET [6.1 - 12.0 M]
Configuration:
Default: *BOX*
RND- Round- max flow 545 GPM [34 L/S] at 0.85 SG
BOX- Box - max flow 700 GPM [44 L/S] at 0.85 SG
Oil specific gravity: Range” 0.85 - 0.97; Default: *0.92*

Thickeners (T)
THICKENER
Thickeners are used in many solid/liquid separation processes and consist of a slow-
moving rake mechanism rotating in a tank. The unit includes feed well, bridge, drive
head (with optional overload alarm system), and a drive consisting of worm, gear and
motor. An optional flocculator mechanism with flocculation chamber, paddles and
flocculator drive with reduction gear and motor can be included. Additional storage
capacity for the tank can be specified for special applications such as green liquor
clarification, white liquor clarification or lime mud washing; as used in paper mill
operations. If only a thickener mechanism is needed, the tank can be excluded.
Application:
Default: *STANDARD*
STANDARD - Standard thickener/clarifier
PRM-ETP - Primary clarifier usually for effluent
SEC-ETP - Secondary clarifier usually for effluent
GRN-LQ - Green liquor clarifier for pulp/paper
WHITE-LQ - White liquor clarifier for pulp/paper
LIMMUD - Lime mud washer for pulp and paper mills
Rake and mechanism material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
SS304 - SS304
SS316 - SS316
MONEL - Monel
RUBCV - Rubber covered CS
Tank or vat material:
Tank material required to obtain tank cost, leave blank for thickener mechanism only.
CS - Carbon steel
SS304 - SS304
SS316 - SS316
MONEL - Monel
RUBCV - Rubber covered CS
Vessel diameter:
Enter tank capacity or tank dimensions.
Range: 9.5 - 400 FEET [3.0 - 12.0 M]
Vessel height:
Liquid volume:

Additional capacity:
Extra storage in addition to basic tank capability. Default: *0.0* GALLONS [*0.0 M3].
Flocculator required: Default: *NO*
NO - No flocculation required
YES - Flocculator mechanism required
Bridge type:
Default: *FULL*
FULL- Full length bridge 100 FEET [30 M] maximum
SEMI - Semi-bridge for 100 FEET [30 M] diameter
TRCTN - Traction type clarifier on semi-bridge
Drive heat type:
Default: *DH-STD*
DH-STD - Standard drive head to 30 FEET [9 M] diameter
DH-HD - Heavy duty drive - large diameter, thick sludge
DH-HAD - Heavy duty, overload alarm, lifting device
Design temperature:
Default: 190 DEG F [88 DEG C] for green liquor; else 68 DEG F [20 DEG C].
Specify an allowance for internals as a percent of basic mechanism weight. Default:
*0.0*
Default: 0.125 INCHES [3 MM] for CS,
Number of manholes:
Default: *1*
Manhole diameter:

Screens (VS)
Rectangular, circular.
RECTANGLE
Rectangular multiple deck open or enclosed.

Material:
Length:
Range: 6 - 24 FEET [2.0 - 7.25 M]
Width:
Range: 3 - 8 FEET [1.0 - 2.25 M]
Configuration:
Default: *OPEN*
OPEN - No duct enclosure
CIRCULAR
Multiple deck Circular

Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
SS304 - SS304
SS316 - SS316
Screen diameter:
Range: 18 - 60 INCHES [450 - 1,5000 MM]
Surface area:
Range: 1.5 - 18 SF [0.2 - 1.7 M2]

HUMMER
Rectangular hummer-type for fine separation; 1, 2 or 3 decks.

Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
Surface area:
Range: 10 - 80 SF [1.0 - 7.4 M2]
Number of decks:
Range: 1 - 3
LD STOCK
Low consistency bow screen is used for fiber collection in a paper mill.
The unit consists of a screen surface mounted on a frame curvilinear in shape, with
inlet nozzle, discharge nozzle(s) and a collection chamber. The automatic feature
includes solenoids, timers and an air cylinder for back-flushing and cleaning.
Screen material:
Default: *SS*
CS - Carbon steel
Liquid flow rate:
Enter capacity or screen surface area.

Surface area:
Frame material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
0.60 - 2.00; Default: *0.80*
BAR
Mechanical bar screens are the first stage of screening used in an effluent treatment
system. These are wide mesh screens made from metal rods/flats welded onto a
frame.
Screen material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
Liquid flow rate:
Surface area:
PRESSURE
Pressure screen used for fine screening of contaminants in a paper mill.

Includes shell for screen basket housing, rotor, foil blades, water lubricated packing
box with packing seals, V-belt drive with belts, metal guard and motor.
Basket material:
Default: *SS316*
CS - Carbon steel
SS304 - SS304
SS316 - SS316

Shell material:
Default: *SS316*
CS - Carbon steel
SS304 - SS304
SS316 - SS316
Hydraulic capacity:
Enter capacity or diameter and length.
Basket diameter:
Min: 60 INCHES [150 MM]
Basket height:
Min: 60 INCHES [150 MM]
Driver power:
Design gauge power:
Default: *15* PSIG [*150* MM]
Seal type:
Default: *MECH*
PACK - Packing
SHAKER
Sanitary fluming dewatering shaker

Vibratory conveyor with screen for dewatering fruits and vegetables that have been
carried by water-transport up to this point in the food pumping system.
The spreader (which is included by default, but can be excluded by selecting NONE in
the “Spreader option” field) reduces the velocity of the water by spreading the water
and product onto the dewatering shaker.
Screen size:
24X60 - 2x24 INCHES [609 MM] x 30 INCHES [762 MM] screens
36X60 - 2x36 INCHES [914 MM] x 30 INCHES [762 MM] screens
Required to enter at least one of the following: size, fluming rate or solids capacity.
Fluming rate:
MAX: 500 GPM [31 L/S]

Solids capacity:
MAX: 30,000 LB/H [13,500 KG/H]
Spreader option:
NONE - Not included
*INCL* - included

15 Utility Service Systems

Steam Boilers (STB)
Heating Units (HU)

COOLING
Cooling tower includes fans, drivers, concrete basin and field erection; does not
include pumps and piping.
Water flow rate:
Min: 1,000 GPM [65 L/S]
Temperature range:
10 - 50 DEG F [6 - 27 DEG C];
Approach gradient:
Range: 5 - 22 DEG F [3 - 12 DEG C];
Wet bulb temperature:
Range: 60 - 82 DEG F [16 - 28 DEG C];
Length each header:
COOLING WP
Cooling tower includes fans, drivers, concrete basin, two cooling water pumps, motor
drivers, instrumentation for tower and inhibition system (less tanks and inhibition
pumps), and field erection of cooling tower.
Water flow rate:
Min: 1,000 GPM [65 L/S]
Temperature range:
Range: 10 - 50 DEG F [6 - 27 DEG C];
Approach gradient:
Range: 5 - 22 DEG F [3 - 12 DEG C];
Range: 60 - 82 DEG F [16 - 28 DEG C];
Length each header:
PACKAGED
Factory assembled cooling tower including fans, drivers and basins.
Water flow rate:
Range: 150 - 6,000 GPM [9.5 - 375 L/S]
Temperature range:
Range: 5 - 50 DEG F [3 - 27 DEG C];
Default: *15* DEC F [*8* DEG C]

Approach gradient:
Range: 5 - 22 DEG F [3 - 12 DEC C];
Range: 60 - 82 DEG F [16 - 28 DEG C];
Number of cells:
Default: *1*

Steam Boilers (STB)
BOILER
Packaged boiler unit includes forced draft fans, instruments, controls, burners, soot-
blowers, feedwater deaerator, chemical injection system, steam drum, mud drum and
stack. Steam capacity to 800,000 LB/H [362,000 KG/H]. Shop assembled.
Material:
Boiler flow rate:
Range: 10,000 - 800,000 LB/H
[4,540 - 362,000 KG/H]
Range: 250 - 600 PSIG [1,725 - 4130 KPA]; Default: *250* PSIG [*1,725* KPA]
Superheat:
For saturated steam enter 0.0 degrees, else, minimum superheat 100 DEG F [55 DEG
C]. Max: 300 DEG F [165 DEG C]; Default: *100* DEG F [*55* DEG C]
Heating medium:
GAS - Gas fuel
OIL - Oil fuel
STM BOILER
Field erected boiler unit includes forced draft fans, instruments, controls, burners,
soot-blowers, feedwater deaerator, chemical injection system, structural steel
platforms, steam drum, mud drum and stack with steam capacity to 2,220,000 LB/H
[997,000 KG/H]. Oil fired. Economizer for large capacities.
Material:
Boiler flow rate:
Range: 40,000 - 2,200,000 LB/H
[18,2000 - 997,000 KG/H]
Max: 1,000 PSIG [6,890 KPA];
Superheat:

Heating Units (HU)
CYLINDER
Process heater type dowtherm unit to 40 MMBTU/H [11.5 MEGAW].

Material:
Default: *CS*
Duty:
Max: 40 MMBTU/H [11.5 MEGAW]
Max: 6,000 PSIG [40,000 KPA];
Design temperature:
Max: 1,500 DEG F [815 DEG C];

CENT COMPR
Centrifugal compression refrigeration unit produces chilled water cooling medium for
circulation. Includes centrifugal compressor, driver, condenser, controls,
interconnecting piping, refrigeration capacity to 3,000 TONS [10,500 KW] and field
erection.
Material:
Refrigeration capacity:
Range: 50 - 3,000 TONS-REF
[180 - 10,500 KW]
Evaporator temperature:
Range: -40 - 40 DEG F [-40 - 5 DEG C]
MECHANICAL
Mechanical compression refrigeration unit produces liquified refrigerant for circulation.

Includes reciprocating compressor, driver, water cooled condenser, controls,
interconnecting piping, refrigeration capacity to 500 TONS [1,750 KW] and field
erection.
Material:
Refrigeration capacity:
Range: 4 - 500 TONS-REF [15 - 1,750 KW]
Evaporator temperature:
Range: -80 - 40 DEG F [-60 - 5 DEG C]

PORTABLE
Portable stand-by diesel generator, skid-mounted to 800 KW.

Used primarily as a stand-by unit to supply electrical power in the event of an
interruption of the main power supply. Diesel generator sets can also be operated
continuously.
Includes a voltage regulator—3 phase sensing with volts-per-hertz; auto start-stop
module; electric hourmeter; and voltmeter.
Also used as a standby for continual electrical service during the interruption of normal
power.
Fuel stop power in accordance with ISO 3046/1, DIN 6271, BS 5514, and ISO 8528.
Ratings are based on SAE J1349 standard conditions. These ratings also apply at ISO
3046/1, DIN 6271 and BS 5514 standard conditions. No generator set duration
required below 55 DEG C (131 DEG F).
Material:
Output KW:
Range: 10 - 800 KW
TURBO GEN
Turbo-generator includes condensing steam turbine and cooled electric generator.

Steam at 850 PSIG [5,860 KPA] and 900 DEG F [482 DEG C], exhaust at 2.5 in HG
[8.4 KPA] and capacity to 100,000 KVA.
Used for the continuous generation of electrical power.
Material:
Output KVA:
Range: for steam, 800 - 100,000 KVA; for gas,
800 - 260,000 KVA.
Driver type:
*Steam*, Gas, None.

DEMINERAL
Demineralizing system. Two-stage ion exchange unit. First stage converts metal salts
to acid and second stage anion exchange removes acids. Optional automatic
degasification of oxygen and carbon dioxide.
Material:
Water flow rate:
Range: 150 - 15,000 GPH [0.6 - 56.5 M3/H]
Mode of operation:
Default: *NONE*
NONE - No auto operation
AUTO - Auto degas CO2 + O2
SOFTENING
Softening treatment system for boiler feedwater consists of hot lime process softener,
filters, Zeolite softeners, associated piping and instruments.
Material:
Water flow rate:
10,000 - 50,000 GPH [38 - 189 M3/H]
AERATOR
Aerators are used in aeration of effluent. The unit consists of a drive motor, coupling,
guard, rotor shaft and impeller. Other features vary depending upon the type as given
below:
High Speed Floating — general aerator with pontoons.
Low Speed Floating — in addition to the gear box for speed reduction, pontoons are
included for floating.
Low Speed Fixed — speed reduction by means of gear box.

Material:
*CS* - Carbon steel 316L - 316L
SS304- SS304 NI- Nickel
SS316- SS316 INCNL- Inconel
SS321- SS321 MONEL- Monel
SS347- SS347 HAST- Hastelloy
304L - 304L TI- Titanium
Aerator type:
Default: *LSFIELD*
LSFIXED - Low speed fixed aerator
LSFLOT - Low speed floating type aerator
HSFLOT - High speed floating type aerator
Aeration capacity:
Capacity is mass of O2 per hour. Enter capacity or impeller diameter and power.
Impeller diameter:
Enter capacity or impeller diameter and driver power.
Driver power:
Enter capacity or impeller and driver power;
Range: 1.0 - 150.0 HP [0.75 - 112 KW]
Driver speed:
Number of pontoons:
Default: 3 for LSFLOT, 1 for HSFLOT, and none for LSFIXED.

16 Flare and Stacks

Flares (FLR)
Stacks (STK)

Flares (FLR)
A flare system is composed of several parts: a flare tip, a seal, an ignition
system, a knock-out drum and a riser stack.
The flare tip may be either smokeless or non-smokeless. Smokeless flare tips
have nozzles for injecting steam at the exit of the tip. The high velocity steam
inspirates air into the flame resulting in more complete combustion and
therefore no smoke. Non-smokeless flare tips do not have these steam
injection nozzles.
Flares are also classified as continuous and emergency. Continuous flares
handle a continuous and steady flow of flare gas. Emergency flares are
designed to safely burn a sudden large release of combustible gases that are
not normally vented. Continuous flares are normally smokeless and
emergency flares non-smokeless.
The flare seal is a device for preventing air from diffusing down the stack and
creating a combustible mixture with the flare gas inside the stack. Flare gas is
ignited at the exit of the flare tip by one or more pilots. Should any of these
pilots go out, the ignition system would reignite them.
The flare vendor would supply all of the above components for a new
installation. The vendor may also be requested to supply a knock-out drum.
This device disengages entrained liquid from the flare gas. If this liquid is not
removed, it travels up the stack, is ignited and falls flaming to the ground
creating a fire hazard. If the flare is elevated, the final component of the flare
system is the riser stack. The stack is characterized by its method. A ground
flare requires no stack.
The diameter of the flare tip and the height of the stack that supports it (if it
is an elevated flare) is calculated using formulas that take into account
process conditions and safety considerations. The diameter of the flare tip is
calculated using the following formula:
D = sqrt(w/adfv)
where sqrt indicates the square root and:
D = tip diameter of the flare: INCHES [MM]
w = mass flowrate of the flare gas: LB/H [KG/H]
f = exit velocity / sonic velocity of the flare gas
d = density of the flare gas: PFC [KG/M3]
v = sonic velocity of the flare gas, calculated using sqrt(cT/M): FPS [M/S]
M = molecular weight of the flare gas
T = absolute temperature of the flare gas: DEG R [DEG K]
P = absolute pressure of the flare gas: (14.7 + PSIG) [101.3 + KPA]
a = 19.6 in I-P units = 0.0027123 in METRIC units.
R = 10.73 in I-P units = 8.3145 in METRIC units
c = 59682 in I-P units = 107427 in METRIC units
The total height of the stack is calculated using the following formula:
H = Y - 40D
where:

H = stack height, including flare tip: FEET [M]
D = flare tip diameter: FEET [M]
and:
Y = sqrt [(EQwk/4 q)-x ]
2
where:
E = emissivity of the flame (see formula on page 16-4)
Q = heat content of the flare gas: BTU/LB [KG/KG]
w = mass flowrate of the flare gas: LB/H [KG/H]
k = 1.0 in I-P units, 0.8306 in METRIC units
q = allowable radiation intensity: BTU/SF/ H [W/M2]
x = radius of allowable radiation intensity (see formula below): FEET [M]
For flare types GUYED and DERRICK, and for self-supported stacks (SELF-
SUPP) 40 FEET [12 M] or less in height, the length of the bottom section (L) is
the total stack height. For self-supported stacks greater than 40 FEET [12 M]
in height, the length of the bottom section is determined from a consideration
of the load requirements.
Emissivity of the flame:
E = (0.048)sqrt (M)
where:
sqrt = square root
E = emmissivity of the flame
M = molecular weight of the flare gas
Radius of allowable radiation intensity:
X = (c)sqrt(QW/10 )5
where:
X = radius of allowable radiation intensity: FEET [M]
Q = heat content of flare gas: BTU/LB [KJ/KG]
W = mass flowrate of flare gas: LB/H [KG/H]
c = 0.58 in I-P units, 0.5647 in METRIC units
The diameter and thickness of the flare stack is determined by structural
considerations such as loadings and method of support.
DERRICK
Derrick-supported flare stack includes stack, support structure, flare tip, molecular
seal and ignition system. Design based upon process conditions or given sizes.

Derricks are used to support tall stacks. Generally, derrick supported flare stacks are
cheaper than self-supporting stacks at heights above 200 FEET [60 M]. Derricks are
used instead of guyed stacks when land is limited.
Shell material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
Gas mass flow rate:
Enter either mass flow rate or diameter and length (height) of flare.
For single diameter stacks, enter dimensions in bottom section data.
Height Bottom section:
Diameter Middle section:
Height Middle section:
Diameter Top section:
Height Top section:
Gas temperature:
Molecular weight:
Default: *40*
Thickness Middle section:
Percent sonic velocity at exit:
Enter the gas exit velocity as a percent of sonic velocity. Default: *20*
Flare type:
Default: *SMOKELESS*
SMOKELESS - Standard smokeless flare
AIR ASSIST - Air assisted smokeless flare
NONSMOKE - Non-smokeless flare
Radius radiation intensity:
Minimum radius at which a person would be exposed to the allowable radiation.
Allowable radiation intensity:
Allowable radiation intensity at the specified minimum radius. Default: *1,500*
BTU/H/SF [4,500 W/M2]
Gas heat content:
Default: *20,000* BTU/LB [*46,500* KJ/KG]

GUYED
Guyed flare stack includes stack, supports, flare tip, molecular seal and ignition
system. Design based upon process conditions or given sizes.
This is generally the least expensive support system for flare stacks over 50 FEET tall.
However, a large unobstructed area around the stack must be provided so that there
will be no interference with the guy wire.
Shell material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
Gas mass flow rate:
For single diameter stacks, enter dimensions in bottom section data. Max: 96 INCHES
[2,400 MM]
[2,400 MM]
[2,400 MM]
Height Top section:
Gas temperature:
Molecular weight:
Default: *40*
Thickness Bottom section: For single diameter stacks, enter dimensions in bottom
section data.
Thickness Middle section: For single diameter stacks, enter dimensions in bottom
section data.
Thickness Top section: For single diameter stacks, enter dimensions in bottom
section data.
Percent sonic velocity at exit: Enter gas exit velocity as a percent of sonic velocity.
Default: *20*.
Flare type:
SMOKELESS- Standard smokeless flare
AIR ASSIST- Air assisted smokeless flare
NONSMOKE- Non-smokeless flare

Allowable radiation intensity: Allowable radiation intensity at the specified
minimum radius. Default: *1,500* BTU/H/SF [*4,500* W/M2]
Gas heat content:
SELF SUPP
Self-supported flare stack includes stack, flare tip, molecular seal and ignition system;
one, two or three segments of different length and diameter.
This flare is generally used for stack heights up to 50 FEET and when the availability of
land does not permit guyed stacks, self-supporting stacks are cheaper than derrick
supported stacks for stack heights up to 200 FEET [60 M].
Shell material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
Gas mass flow rate:
[2,400 MM]
[2,400 MM]
[2,400 MM]
Height Top section:
Gas temperature:
Molecular weight:
Default: *40*
Thickness Bottom section: For single diameter stacks, enter dimensions in bottom
section data.
Thickness Middle section: For single diameter stacks, enter dimensions in bottom
section data.

Thickness Top section: For single diameter stacks, enter dimensions in bottom section
data.
Enter gas exit velocity as a percent of sonic velocity. Default: *20*.
Flare type:
BTU/H/SF [*4,500* W/M2]
Gas heat content:
HORIZONTAL
This is an inexpensive flaring arrangement if land is plentiful and cheap.

Shell material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
Gas mass flow rate:
[2,400 MM]
Length Bottom section:
[2,400 MM]
Length Middle section:
[2,400 MM]
Length Top section:

Gas temperature:
Molecular weight: Default: *40*
Thickness Middle section:
Enter gas exit velocity as a percent of sonic velocity. Default: *20*.
Flare type: Default: *SMOKELESS*
BTU/H/SF [*4,500* W/M2]
Gas heat content:
THRM OX LC
Recuperative thermal oxidizer for low concentration non-chlorinated waste gas.

Material:
Standard gas load rate:
Low concentration non-chlorinated waste gas; burner, box, stack, exchanger blower.
Max: 20,000 CFM
Gas heat content:
Default: *13.00* BTU/CF [*484* KJ/M3]
Gas oxygen content:
Min: 0.0; Default: *14.00*

STORAGE
Vapor control flare for storage and loading. Includes stack, burners, seal drum, flare,
sensors, etc.
Material:
Default: *CS*
Standard gas load rate:
Max: 12,000 GPM [775 L/S]
Gas heat content:
Min: 50 BTU/CF [1,860 KJ/M3];
Default: *50* BTU/CF [1860 KJ/M3]

Stacks (STK)
STACK
Stack height to 200 FEET [60 M] and diameter to 60 INCHES [1500 MM].
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
Height:
Range: 30 - 200 FEET [10 - 60 M]
Diameter:
Range: 24 - 96 INCHES [600 - 2,400 MM]

17 Introduction to Plant
Bulks

Introduction to Plant Bulks
List of Plant Bulks
17 Introduction to Plant Bulks - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 17-1

Introduction to Plant Bulks
Plant bulk items are those materials or non-process equipment items that provide
support or services to process equipment within a unit area, such as yard pipe and
duct, concrete tanks, pipe rack, instrument panels, electrical cable trays, insulation
and paint.
17-2 17 Introduction to Plant Bulks

List of Plant Bulks
The following is a list of plant bulks by chapter. The plant bulk descriptions in
Chapters 18 through 24 include some of the entry fields for defining plant bulks. The
descriptions include the minimum and maximum values and the defaults. Default
values appear between asterisks (*).
Chapter 18: Piping

- YARD PIPE Above grade or buried yard piping
- PIPE Above grade or buried piping
- UTIL PIPE Utility pipe and utility stations
- RCON PIPE Buried concrete pipe
- DUCT RD Round duct with hangers
- DUCT SQ Square duct with hangers
- DUCTILE IRON PIPE Cement lined ductile iron pipe, with mechanical joint ends.
- EQPT TRACE Fluid heat tracing for equipment
- PIPE TRACE Fluid heat tracing for pipe
- LAUNDER SQ Square or rectangular launders
- LAUNDER RD Half round launders
- COAT WRAP Coating and wrapping of buried pipe
- HOT TAP Hot tap of production pipe for branch
- SCRAPER LR Permanent scraper launcher and receiver
- WELL HEAD Pipe, valve and fittings at a well head
- HDPE High density polyethylene pipe, fusion bonded
- SPRNK Sprinkler system (water / water+foam)
- FOAM Foam fire systems
- SPHOS Standpipe and hose fire systems
- WSHWR Emergency eyewash and shower units
- FLO PANEL Sanitary flow diversion panel

Chapter 19: Civil
- ABVGR TANK Above grade concrete tank
- BELGR TANK Below grade concrete tank
- CONCRETE Foundations, slabs, other concrete items
- SCAFFOLD Scaffold erection and dismantling
- TRENCH Drainage trench for paved areas
- CONTAINMNT Tank containment - concrete paving, wall
- DIKE MEMBR Tank containment - dike and geomembrane
- YARD PIPE Above grade or buried yard piping
- PIPE Above grade or buried piping
- HDPE High density polyethylene pipe, fusion bonded
- RCON PIPE Buried concrete pipe
- BUILDING Building
- LINING Organic, metallic, abrasion resist. lining
- PIPE RACK Pipe rack
- BSTLPIPE SUPPT Tee or bent type pipe sleepers
Chapter 20: Steel

- OPN STL ST Open steel structure
- PIPE RACK Pipe rack
- BSTLPIPE SUPPT Tee or bent type pipe sleepers
- MILL BLDG Multiple-bay mill building
- PLATFORM Elevated access platform - complete
- GALLERY Gallery for pipe, conveyor, personnel
- TRNS TOWER Conveyor transfer tower
- GRATE Steel grate - less support structure
- LADDER Steel ladders
- STAIR Stairs with grate, treads and handrail
- MISC STEEL Miscellaneous steel items
- FABR PLATE Fabricated steel plate items
- SIDING Siding and roofing for steel structures
- SAN PLATFM Sanitary platform
- TUBE STEEL Tubular steel items
- JACKET Offshore jacket

Chapter 21: Instrumentation
- INST PANEL Instrument panel - analog
- INST TRAY Instrument cable tray
- INST WIRE Instrument electronic transmission wire
- PNU TUBING Instrument pneumatic tubing runs
- THCPL WIRE Thermocouple wire runs
- JUNC BOX Instrument junction box
- MULTI CONT Multifunction controllers
- HL PIU High energy level process interface unit
- LL PIU Low energy level process interface unit
- DATA HIWAY Data highway cable
- OPER CENT Operator center
Chapter 22: Electrical

General
- ELEC CABLE Electrical power cable run (3 or 4 wire)
- CONDUIT Electrical conduit
- ELEC TRAY Electrical cable tray
- EQPT TRACE Electrical tracing for equipment
- PIPE TRACE Electrical tracing for pipe
- GRND GRID Ground grid
- AREA LIGHT Area lighting on poles
- CTRL CABLE Electrical control cable runs (600 v)
- DEEP ANODE Group of anodes in deep well
- GALV ANODE Individual galvanic anode
- SURF ANODE Group of anodes in shallow surface bed
- POT TEST Potential measurement test station
- RECTIFIER Transformer/rectifier
- SOLAR PANL Solar panel with storage batteries
- EMER LIGHT Emergency light with battery
- CABLE DUCT Underground cable duct
- PANEL BRD Lighting panelboard and distribution board
- TRACE PANL Tracing panelboard for electrical heat tracing
- TRACE CNTR Electrical heat tracing controller - single and multi-point
- COMALM SYS Public Address and General Alarm
- HIGH MAST High Mast Lighting Systems
Substation Bus duct
- BUS DUCT Electrical transformer: 1 or 2 tap
- TRANSFORM Oil circuit breakers
- OIL C BRKR Disconnect switch
- DISCNCT SW Power pole lines
- POLE LINE Steel for substation structure
- SUBSTN STL Current breaker: main, feeder, tie
- BREAKER Motor control center
- MCC Switch board
- SWITCH BRD AC/DC Transformer

- AC DC TRAN Package transformer with panel
- PKG TRANSF Emergency diesel generator
- EM PWR SET Uninterrupted power supply
- UPS Power factor connection capacitor
- PF CORRECT
Chapter 23: Insulation and Fireproofing

- INSUL AREA General area insulation
- INSUL PIPE Pipe insulation
- FIREP AREA General area fireproofing
- FIREP SSTL Structural steel fireproofing
Chapter 24: Paint

- PAINT AREA General area painting
- PAINT PIPE Pipe painting
- PAINT SSTL Structural steel painting

18 Piping
Piping Plant Bulks

How Icarus Calculates Insulation Length on Piping
Trapping Distance (Steam)
Pipe Temperature Procedure
Pipe Insulation Material Procedure
Pipe Insulation Thickness Procedure
Pipe Paint Procedure
No. of Paint Coats Procedure
Pipe Diameters
Pipe Schedule
Standard Equations for Pipe Diameter (Old)
Standard Equations for Pipe Diameter (New)
Utility Piping Services
Utility Station Diagram
Default Piping Materials
Pipe Materials - Ferrous Materials
Carbon Steel
API Pipe
Low and Intermediate Alloy Steel
High Alloy Steel
Pipe Materials - Non-Ferrous Materials
Non-Ferrous Materials
Plastic and Resin Materials
Lined Steel Pipe
Spool Types
Remote & Field Shop Piping Procedures for Various Materials
Remote Shop Piping Procedures
18 Piping - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 18-1

Small Bore Piping Procedures
Icarus’ Pipe Fabrication, Erection and Testing Procedures
Valve and Fitting Options for Installation Bulk Piping
Valve Trim Specifications
18-2 18 Piping
Piping Plant Bulks
Piping plant bulks include transfer lines, utility piping, duct and tubed tracing.
PIPE
Above grade or buried piping
Pipe line tag:
Max: 36 characters. Used for line list report. It can also be used for specifying sensor, CV
locations in instrument loops.
Pipe material:
Enter either Custom Pipe Spec (see Design Basis) or Material, not both. Default: from custom
spec, connected equipment or CS.
Pipe length:
Min: 1.0 FEET [0.35 M]
Pipe diameter:
Range: 0.5 - 72 INCHES DIAM [15 - 1,800 MM DIAM]
Fluid phase:
*G* - Gas
L - Liquid
S - Steam
(enter desired flow rate below)
Liquid flow rate:
Enter diameter or liquid flow rate or gas flow rate.
Gas flow rate:
Enter diameter or liquid flow rate or gas flow rate.
Fluid density:
Default based on fluid phase:
Gas Phase: 0.0674 PCF [1.08 KCM]
Liquid Phase: 62.4 PCF [1000 KCM)
Steam Phase: Calculated as the inverse of specific volume, which is calculated from design
pressure and temperature as described under “Steam Lines” in the Standard Equations for
Pipe Diameter section.
Fluid viscosity:
Default based on fluid phase:
Gas phase: 0.025 CPOISE (0.025 millipascal-second)
Liquid Phase: 1.0 CPOISE (1.0 millipascal-second)
Steam Phase: Calculated using an internal function of design pressure and design temperature
in which, for a design pressure of 150 PSIG (~1000 KPA) and a design temperature of 250
DEG F (120 DEG C), default value is calculated to be 0.013 CPOISE.
Default: determined from Custom Pipe Spec or 150 PSIG [1,000 KPA].
Design temperature:
Default: determined from Custom Pipe Spec or 68 DEG F [20 DEG C].

Default: same as design temperature.
Pipe schedule or gauge:
Enter thickness or schedule/gauge, not both. Default: calculated from material temperature,
pressure.
STD- Standard wall pipe 100- Pipe schedule
XS- Extra-strong pipe 120- Pipe schedule
XXS- Double extra-strong 140 - Pipe schedule
5- Pipe schedule 160- Pipe schedule
10- Pipe schedule 7G- SS gauge pipe only
80- Pipe schedule
Valves and fittings:
Enter type and quantity of each valve and fitting required for this line.
Pipe type:
CS and SS only. Default: custom/material spec if entered, or else welded.
W - Welded pipe
S - Seamless pipe
Flange type:
Default: see project design basis
W - Weld-neck
S - Slip-on
B - Lap flanges and stub to 24 INCHES (600 MM), or else weld-neck
Note: When Flange Type "Lap Flange + Stub" is used, there is a line item called "FLG BU" in
the item description in the report, which includes the cost for both the backup flange and the
stub.
Flange class:
Default: determined from custom spec or pipe material, temperature and pressure.
150- Class 150
300- Class 300
600- Class 600
900- Class 900
1500- Class 1500
2500- Class 2500
125- Class 125 WOG
250- Class 250 WOG
Bend for elbow:
Substitute pipe bends for any specified elbow (up to 12 INCH [300 MM] pipe only).
*E* - Elbow
B - Bend instead of elbow
Branch for tee:
Substitute fabricated branch nozzles for any specified tees.
*T* - Tee
B - Branch
18-4 18 Piping
Pipe connector type:
SW - Socket weld connections; max: 2 INCHES (50 MM)
SB - Screw and backweld; max: 2 INCHES (50 MM)
SC - Screw (no backweld); max: 2 INCHES (50 MM)
WF - Weld pipe / flange valves
WW - Weld pipe / weld valves; min: 2 INCHES (50 MM)
VC - DI Victaulic couplings
VS - SS Victaulic couplings
PF - Press fit swage couplings; max: 2 INCHES (50 MM)
TC - Tri-clover sanitary; max: 4 INCHES (100 MM)
CB - Cherry-Burrel sanitary; max: 4 INCHES (100 MM)
Number of welds:
Default: determined from pipe length and combination of valves and fittings
Control valve reduced size:
Fluid control valve only; default: reduced 0-4 sizes except BVO and sanitary valves
L - Line size control valves
R - Standard size control valves
Control valve minimum class:
For fluid control valves only. Default: *3*.
3 - Minimum 300 class fluid control valve
Weld X-ray:
Stress relief:
C - Piping stress relief if code requires
Y - Stress relieve all piping
N - No piping stress relief required
Special pipe description:
Default: *NONE*
STAND - Standard heat or cold insulation
PPROT - Personnel protection insulation. The system will generate 1.00 INCH of personnel
protection for 100 percent of the pipe. This option can be used in conjunction with the
Personnel protection field, which allows the user to tell the system how much pipe to
insulate. For instance, if the user only needs 25 FEET of a 100 FEET run of pipe to be
personnel protected, the user can input the percentage in the Personnel protection field.
The system would generate 25 FEET plus waste. The thickness of the personnel protection
insulation generated will always be 1.00 INCH.
AC-T - Anti-condensation insulation/tube tracer
AC-E - Anti-condensation insulation/elec tracer
FP-T - Freeze protection insulation/tube tracer
FP-E - Freeze protection insulation/elec tracer
FULL - Fully jacketed pipe (see illustration)
EXPD - Exposed-weld jacketed pipe (see illustration)
T-SP - Spiral traced/tube conn./no cement
T-SPC - Spiral traced/tube conn./heat cement
P-SP - Spiral traced/pipe conn./no cement
P-SPC - Spiral traced/pipe conn./heat cement
T-LO - Longit. traced/tube conn./no cement

T-LOC - Longit. traced/tube conn./heat cement
P-LO - Longit. traced/pipe conn./no cement
P-LOC - Longit. traced/pipe conn./heat cement
E-AMB - Electrical traced/ambient temp control
E-PRO - Electrical traced/process temp control
E-Trace maintenance temperature:
For electrical tracing - process maintenance
temperature. Default: 392 DEG F [200 DEG C] for M series cable and 220 DEG F [105 DEG C]
for self-regulating cable. Max: 250 DEG F [120 DEG C] for self-regulating cable and 1049 DEG
F [565 DEG C] for MI cable over low ambient temperature.
E-trace cable type:
Use A series to 120 DEG F[48 DEG C], P series to 250 DEG F[120 DEG C] and M series to 1049
DEG F [565 DEG C] over low ambient temperature.
3A 3 W/FT (10 W/M) Chemelex BTV2-CT cable
10A 10 W/FT(33 W/M) Chemelex BTV2-CT cable
5P 5 W/FT (16 W/M) Chemelex XTV2-CT cable
M2 - 600V, dual conductor MI cable, 9 OHM/FT [29.5 OHM/M]
M4 - 600V, dual conductor MI cable, 4.14 OHM/FT [13.6 OHM/M]
E-trace cable category:
Default: *S*, self-regulating cable
Select M for MI tracing cable or S for self-regulating tracing cable.
Heat trace fluid:
STM - Steam trapped
OTHR - Other fluid / no traps
Valve packing or seal:
*S* - Standard valve packing
E - Environmental (double stem)
B - Bellows seal SV/GL/GA else environmental packing
Pipe sandblast percent of area:
Default: 100%; see design basis
Pipe insulation thickness:
Default from insulation schedule and unit area specs (see minimum insulation temperature)
Pipe insulation jacket type:
Default: see project design basis; AL, SS, CS.
18-6 18 Piping
Pipe insulation type:
CA - Calcium silicate
MW - Mineral wool
FG - Foam-glass
Personnel protection:
Personnel protection percent coverage.
For example, if out of 50 FEET run of pipe, 12.5 FEET needs personnel protection, enter “25”
in this field. The system will then generate 12.5 FEET of personnel protection plus waste. The
thickness of the personnel protection insulation generated will always be 1.00 INCH. Default:
see unit area pipe specs.
Note: You must select PPROT in the Special Pipe Descr. field before the system will use the
personnel protection.
Pipe installation option:
Default: above ground pipe or supports on rack (specified elsewhere)
*A* - Above ground piping
B - Buried piping
Depth buried pipe:
Min: 24.0 INCHES [600.0 MM]; Max: 120 INCHES [3000.0 MM]. Below grade depth to top of
pipe for buried pipe only. Default: system calculated.
Steam gauge press:
Max: Default value. Steam supply pressure for traced or jacketed pipe.
Pipe routing type:
Specify pipe routing type to be used from the external fitting specs file specified at the design
basis level (see your software user’s guide for instructions on where to specify the file name).
AGU - Above ground unit piping
AGR - Above ground rack piping
UGU - Underground unit piping
MRP - Machine room piping
OTP - Miscellaneous piping
Once a pipe routing type is specified, the system uses the data in the external fitting specs file
for the valve rules, fitting rules, horizontal allowance, vertical allowance and the diameter size
definition. Pipe routing type is meant to refer to the location of the piping. However, the above
descriptions are for reference only; using the fitting specs file, the user controls the context of
the rules and can assign meaning at his discretion.
The available fitting specs files are listed in the PIPEDATA.SET file that the user places in the
main PIDS folder: [Icarus software folder]\PIDS. The user sets up this file by copying the
PIPEDATA.SET provided in the [Icarus software folder]\New Files\dat\pids folder to the main
PIDS folder. The user can edit the PIPEDATA.SET file in a true text editor, such as Notepad,
adding fitting specs files simply by typing in the file names.
If the user has not set up this file, then the system will look for a file called FITSPC.DAT. If
available, this file will be used as the fitting specs file. If not, a set of default rules will be
used. A default FITSPC.DAT file is available at [Icarus software folder]/New Files/dat/pids. This
file can be copied, edited, and used as a basis for alternate fitting specs files. Fitting specs files
must be listed in the PIPEDATA.SET file and placed in the main PIDS folder.
See Figure FITSPC.DAT for an illustration explaining the data in the FITSPC.DAT file.
Fitting rules application:
Select whether to use the fitting rules.
Y - Use fitting rules for the type of piping
N - Do not use fitting rules

Fitting and valve rules are specified in the external fitting specs file (see illustration on
following page), selected at the project design basis level. Fitting and valve codes are
available in Valve and Fitting Options for Installation Bulk Piping in this chapter. You put in the
number of each valve and fitting type per 100 feet (30 meters). The length used in these
calculations is after the horizontal and vertical adjustments have been accounted for.
Valve rules application:
Select whether to use the fitting and/or valve rules.
Y - Use valve rules for the type of piping
N - Do not use valve rules
Fitting and valve rules are specified in the external fitting specs file (see illustration on
following page), selected at the project design basis level. Fitting and valve codes are
available in Valve and Fitting Options for Installation Bulk Piping in this chapter. Users put in
the number of each valve and fitting type per 100 feet (30 meters). The length used in these
calculations is after the horizontal and vertical adjustments have been accounted for.
18-8 18 Piping
Figure FITSPC.DAT
Note: The user specifies four sets of diameter sizes, and four sets of fitting/valve
rules for each routing type. The user specifies only one set of allowance rules per
routing type.

Note: The user is not limited to the first eight columns for fittings or to the last eight
columns for valves; this is just the suggested use of the columns.
The total percentage distribution should equal 100, but does not need to be - the
system will not crash if the distribution is not 100%.
Always edit the FITSPC.DAT file using a true text editor such as Notepad or
EDITPLUS (shareware).
To use a specific fitting specs file, add it to PIPEDATA.SET and move it to the /PIDS
directory. Then, select it at the base level (see software’s user guide). To use this file
with piping, add the above/below grade pipe item (PIPE) and select one of the piping
routing types in the form. Once the routing type is selected, the system will use the
file for this piping item.
The user may select alternative fitting specification files by changing the fitting
specification file name at the design basis level.
Horizontal allowance:
Select whether to use horizontal allowance.
Y - Use horizontal allowance for the type of piping
N - Do not use horizontal allowance
Horizontal allowance is specified for each piping routing type in the external fitting
specification file. An entry of “100” means the system will not adjust the input length, whereas
an entry of “150” will increase the input length by 50 percent.
Vertical allowance:
Select whether to use vertical allowance.
Y - Use vertical allowance for the type of piping
N - Do not use vertical allowance
Vertical allowance is specified for each piping routing type in the external fitting specification
file. An entry of “100” means the system will not adjust the input length, whereas an entry of
“150” will increase the input length by 50 percent.
Primary equipment user tag:
User tag of the primary (i.e., upstream) equipment to which this pipe is connected. Default:
NONE.
Primary equipment connection:
Connection location of the pipe on the primary (i.e., upstream) equipment; Default: not
connected <Blank>.
<Blank> - not connected to any equipment
S - connected to shell of equipment
U - connected to tube side of equipment
J - connected to jacket of equipment
B - connected to bottom of double diameter tower
T - connected to top of double diameter tower
Secondary equipment user tag:
User tag of the secondary (i.e., downstream) equipment to which this pipe is connected.
Default: NONE.
Secondary equipment connection:
Connection location of the pipe on the secondary (i.e., downstream) equipment; Default: not
connected <Blank>.
<Blank> - not connected to any equipment
18-10 18 Piping
S - connected to shell of equipment
U - connected to tube side of equipment
J - connected to jacket of equipment
B - connected to bottom of double diameter tower
T - connected to top of double diameter tower
Jacket Pipe Illustrations

You can select jacketing for PIPE and YARD PIPE under Special Pipe
Description.
UTIL PIPE
Utility service lines, stations: standard configuration
Utility headers: runs of pipe providing up to 15 different services. Utility station: short runs of
small-bore pipe providing local air, water, steam and condensate drain services.

Pipe material:
See piping materials listed later in this chapter.
Default: *CS* (Carbon steel).
Number utility stations:
A utility station consists of three 100 FEET [30 M] lines of 1 INCHES [25 MM] diameter pipe for
air, water and steam service, and one 50 FEET [15 M] condensate line of 0.75 INCHES [20
MM] diameter.
Default: *1*. Enter “0.0” to exclude all utility stations.
Length parameter:
Pipe lengths = 1 x length parameter, except firewater
loop/lat. = 2 x, hp steam = 0.5 x. Default: 100 FEET [30 M].
Utility station drop length:
Applies to all utility stations described above.
Default: 100 FEET [30 M] for air, water, and steam service and 50 FEET [15 M] for condensate
return.
Header diameter symbol:
Diameter symbol defines size of any line not specified.
See Utility Piping Services later in this chapter.
L - Low/small diameter
M - Medium diameter
H - High/large diameter
V - Very large diameter
Firewater loop diameter:
Default: determined by diameter symbol, enter 0.0 to delete if diameter symbol set.
Firewater lateral diameter:
Potable water header diameter:
Default: determined by diameter symbol, enter 0.0 to delete if diameter symbol set. Line will
be insulated based on location:
US - uninsulated,
UK - insulated.
Cooling water supply diameter:
be insulated based on location: US - uninsulated, UK - insulated.
Cool water return diameter:
be insulated base on location: US - uninsulated, UK - insulated.
Low Pressure (LP) steam header diameter:
Medium Pressure (MP) steam header diameter: Default: determined by diameter symbol,
enter 0.0 to delete if diameter symbol set.
High Pressure (HP) steam header diameter: Default: determined by diameter symbol,
enter 0.0 to delete if diameter symbol set.
Condensate return diameter:
Plant air header diameter: Default: determined by diameter symbol, enter 0.0 to delete if
diameter symbol set.
Instrument air header diameter:
Fuel gas header diameter: Default: determined by diameter symbol, enter 0.0 to delete if
diameter symbol set.
18-12 18 Piping
Inert gas header diameter:
Chemical sewer diameter:
Flare header diameter:
RCON PIPE
Buried concrete pipe, manholes, elbows, tees: trench, backfill Includes trenching and
backfilling.
Diameter:
Range: 12 - 98 INCHES [300 - 2,450 MM]
Number of manholes: Default: *0*
Number of elbows: Default: *0*
Number of tees: Default: *0*
DUCT RD
Process ductwork, round

Stiffeners and support hangers are designed, but support steel, racks, etc. must be specified
elsewhere.
Duct material:
Default: *GALV*
GALV - Galvanized CS
CS - Carbon steel
AL - Aluminum
Duct diameter:
If the duct capacity is specified, the duct dimension is determined from the capacity and the
gas velocity. The velocity may be specified, or the system uses a variable velocity between
2000 and 4000 FPM [36600 - 72100 M/H] depending on the specified pressure. The calculated
duct dimension is rounded to a standard size.
Duct design pressure:
Should be specified (indicate + or -) for design of duct thickness and stiffeners; -60 - 60
INCHES H2O [114,930 - 14,930 PA].
Default: *-20* INCHES H2O [*-4,980* PA].
Duct gauge:
Leave blank if thickness is entered; enter thickness if thicker than 8 gauge. Range: 8 - 30.
Duct wall thickness:
Default: determined by size and pressure, leave blank if duct gauge number entered.
Duct class:
The duct class indicates the quantity and abrasiveness of particulate material. Default: *1*.
1 - Non-abrasive applied.
2 - Mod-abras./lo concern.
3 - Hi-abras.lo concern.
4 - Hi-abras./hi concern.
Configuration:

Seam configuration; applies to class 1 duct only.
Default: *LONG*
LONG - Longitudinal seam
SPIR - Spiral seam
Duct insulation thickness:
Default: 0.0 INCHES [0.0 MM].
Particle density:
Density of concentrated particulates for duct classes 2, 3 and 4. Default: *25* PCF [*400*
KG/M3].
Stiffener size:
Default: size and spacing determined from duct pressure, dimensions and thickness.
Stiffener spacing:
Support weight:
Hanger weight (each); support steel, racks, etc. must be specified elsewhere. The system
determines the support weight based on standard spacing of 12 FEET [3.5 M] and the duct
loads. The calculated weight and spacing may be replaced with an input weight and spacing.
Support spacing: Default: *12* FEET [*3.5* M].
Number of reducers: Default: *0*
Number of dampers: Default: *0*
Number of access doors: Default: *0*
Number Flexible connection: Default: *0*
DUCT SQ
Process ductwork, square

Stiffeners and support hangers are designed, but support steel, racks, etc. must be specified
elsewhere.
Duct material:
Default: *GALV*
GALV - Galvanized CS
CS - Carbon steel
AL - Aluminum
Duct width:
If the duct capacity is specified, the duct dimension is determined from the capacity and the
gas velocity. The velocity may be specified, the system uses a variable velocity between 2000
and 4000 FPM [36600 - 73100 M/H] depending on the specified pressure. The calculated duct
dimension is rounded to a standard size.
Duct design pressure:
Should be specified (indicate + or -) for design of duct thickness and stiffeners. -60 - 60
INCHES H2O [-14,930 - 14,930 PA].
Default: *-20* INCHES H2O [*-4,980* PA].
Duct gauge:
Leave blank if thickness is entered; enter thickness if thicker than 8 gauge. Range: 8 - 30.
Duct wall thickness:
Default: determined by size and pressure, leave blank if duct gauge number entered.
Duct class:
18-14 18 Piping
The duct class indicates the quantity and abrasiveness of particulate material. Default: *1*.
1 - Non-abrasive applied.
2 - Mod-abras./lo concern.
3 - Hi-abras.lo concern.
4 - Hi-abras./hi concern.
Duct insulation thickness: Default: 0.0 INCHES [0.0 MM].
Partical density: Density of concentrated particulates for duct classes 2, 3 and 4. Default:
*25* PCF [*400* KG/M3].
Stiffener size:
Stiffener spacing:
Support weight:
Hanger weight (each); support steel, racks, etc. must be specified elsewhere. The system
determines the support weight based on standard spacing of 12 FEET [3.5 M] and the duct
loads. The calculated weight and spacing may be replaced with an input weight and spacing.
Support spacing: Default: *12* FEET [*3.5* M].
Number of dampers: Default: *0*
Number of access doors: Default: *0*
Number Flexible connection: Default: *0*
EQPT TRACE
Fluid heat tracing existing equipment
The item of equipment and its insulation are not included; these are assumed to be specified
elsewhere in the project.
Material:
Default: *CU*
CU - Copper
Tracer tube length:
This is the total length of 0.5 INCHES O.D. tubing required to heat trace an item specified
elsewhere in the estimate. This length does not include the run to and from supply and return
headers, as these lengths are specified in the Dist./Supply Header and the Dist./Return
Header fields.
Tracing symbol:
T-SP - Traced: tube conn. - spiral tracer - no cement
T-SPC - Traced: tube conn. - spiral tracer - with cement
P-SP - Traced: pipe conn. - spiral tracer - no cement
P-SPC - Traced: pipe conn. - spiral tracer - with cement
Distance to supply header:
Distance specified is from traced equipment item to supply and return headers. The headers
are not included in this item, but are specified by the user elsewhere in the estimate for Area
Pipe Specifications or as a separate bulk item description. Min: 5.0 FEET [1.6 M]; Default:
*25* FEET [*7.5* M].
Distance to return header:
Distance specified is from traced equipment item to supply and return headers. The headers
are not included in this item, but are specified by the user elsewhere in the estimate for Area

Pipe Specifications or as a separate bulk item description. Min: 5.0 FEET [1.6 M]; Default:
*25* FEET [*7.5* M].
Heating medium:
Default: *STM*
STM - Steam heating medium
OTHR - Other heating medium
Default: *25* PSIG [*175* KPAG]
PIPE TRACE
Fluid heat tracing for existing pipe runs
0.5 INCHES O.D. tubing applied to existing pipe. The traced pipe and its insulation are not
included; these are assumed to be specified elsewhere in the project. An insulation adjustment
is included to account for tracers and tracer connections to headers.
Material:
Default: *CU*
CU - Copper
Traced pipe length:
The pipe being traced is not included, but must be specified elsewhere.
Traced pipe diameter:
The pipe being traced is not included, but must be specified elsewhere.
Tracing symbol:
T-SP - Traced: tube conn. - spiral tracer - no cement
T-SPC - Traced: tube conn. - spiral tracer - with cement
P-SP - Traced: pipe conn. - spiral tracer - no cement
P-SPC - Traced: pipe conn. - spiral tracer - with cement
T-LO - Traced: tube conn. - longit. tracer - no cement
T-LOC - Traced: tube conn. - longit tracer - with cement
P-LO - Traced: pipe conn. - longit tracer - no cement
P-LOC - Traced pipe conn. - longit tracer - with cement
Distance to supply header:
Distance specified is from traced pipe to supply or return header. Min: 5 FEET [1.6 MM];
Default: *25* FEET [*7.5* M].
Distance to return header:
Distance specified is from traced pipe to supply or return header. Min: 5 FEET [1.6 MM];
Heating medium:
Default: *STM*
STM - Steam heating medium
OTHR - Other heating medium
Default *25* PSIG [*175* KPAG]. (See “Trapping
Distances” tables.)
18-16 18 Piping
Trapping Distance (Steam)
Traced Process Line 25 PSIG 150 PSIG 200 PSIG No. of 0.5 INCH
Size [12.7 MM] O.D.
[175 KPA] [1050 KPA] [1400
Tracers per Line
KPA]
0.50 INCHES 150 FEET 250 FEET 300 FEET 1 OR 2

[12.7 - 25.4 MM] [45.72 M] [76.20 M] [91.44]
1.25 -1.50 INCHES 130 FEET 200 FEET 230 FEET 1 OR 2

[31.75-38.10 MM] [39.62 M] [60.96 M] [70.10 M]
2.00 INCHES 120 FEET 180 FEET 200 FEET 1

50.80 MM] [36.57 M] [54.86 M] [60.96 M]
2.50 - 3.00 INCHES 100 FEET 150 FEET 190 FEET 1

[63.50 - 76.20 MM] [30.48] [45.72 M] [57.91 M]
3.50 - 4.00 INCHES 150 FEET 240 FEET 270 FEET 1

[88.90 - 101.60 MM] [45.72 M] [73.15 M] [82.29 M] -
- - - 2
240 FEET 350 FEET 400 FEET
[73.15 M] [106.68 M] [121.92 M]
over 4.00 INCHES 120 FEET 200 FEET 210 FEET 1

[over 101.60 MM] [36.57 M] [60.96 M] [64.00 M] -
- - - 2
200 FEET 300 FEET 340 FEET -
[60.96 M] [91.44 M] [103.63 M] 3
- - -
250 FEET 360 FEET 420 FEET
[76.20 M] [109.72 M] [128.01 M]
STEAM Tracing - Number of Tracers Per Line
Traced Process Line No. of 0.5 INCH [12.7 MM]

Size (INCHES) O.D. Tracers per Line
<3 1
> to < 8 2
>8 3
How Icarus Calculates Insulation Length on Piping

All pipe insulation is calculated and reported as straight run equivalent length. The
final length is calculated by adding the specified length of straight run pipe, plus
straight run equivalent lengths for fittings (4 FEET [1.22 M]/fitting) and valves (7
FEET [2.13 M]/valve), plus an overall 5% allowance for wastage.
The final equation in l-P is:
[pipe length + (fitting count * 4) + (valve count *7)] * 105%

Example calculations:
Specified Reported Length

100 FEET [30.5 M] 4 INCH pipe + FEET M
0 fittings, 0 valves 105 32
1 FL, 0 valves 109 33
0 fittings, 1 GA (this creates 2 matching FL) 121 37
1 FL, 1 GA 125 38
1 FL, 3 EL, 1 GA 138 42
18-18 18 Piping
Pipe Temperature Procedure

18-20 18 Piping
Pipe Insulation Material Procedure

Pipe Insulation Thickness Procedure
18-22 18 Piping
Pipe Paint Procedure
18-24 18 Piping
No. of Paint Coats Procedure

LAUNDER RD
Launders, half-round, rubber lined

Steel launder lined with 0.25 INCHES [6.0 MM] natural rubber.
Material is RBLCS (Rubber-lined carbon steel)
Cover Type:
Default: *NONE*
COVRD - Plate cover
NONE - No cover
LAUNDER SQ
Launders, square/rectangular, rubber lined

Steel launder lined with 0.25 INCHES [6.0 MM] natural rubber.
Material is RBLCS (Rubber-lined carbon steel)
Cover Type:
Default: *NONE*
COVRD - Plate cover
NONE - No cover
COAT WRAP
Coat and wrap pipe for burial: manual or machine
Application may be by hand or machine.
Application Symbol:
HAND - Manual
MACH - Machine
HOT TAP
Hot tap: production line to branch line
Split tee or nipple, flange and valve provided; branch must be specified elsewhere.
Available only in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Icarus Process Evaluator.
Material:
Default: *GRBW*
GRBW - API5L and 5LS Gr. B304LP- 304L
18-26 18 Piping
X42W- API5LX Grade X42316P- SS316
X52W- API5LX Grade X52316LP- 316L
X60W- API5LX Grade X60321P- SS321
X65W- API5LX Grade X65AL- Aluminum
A 53- A 53CU- Copper
A 106- A 106NI- Nickel
A333C- 3.5 NiMONEL- Monel
A335C- 1.25Cr -.5Mo - SiINCNL- Inconel
304P- SS304
Flange Class:
Default: *600*
150- Class 150
300- Class 300
600- Class 600
900- Class 900
1500- Class 1500
2500- Class 2500
125- Class 125 WOG
250- Class 250 WOG
SCRAPER LR
Permanent scraper launcher and receiver
A pair (launcher and receiver) is provided for each item.
Available only in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Icarus Process Evaluator.
Material:
Default: *X52W*
X52W- API5LLX-X52 welded
X42W- API5LX-X42 welded
X60W - API5LX-X60 welded
X65W - API5LX-X65 welded
GRBW - API5L - gr B/5LS welded
X52S- API5LX-X52 seamless
X42S- APIFLX-X42 seamless
GRBS- API5L - gr B seamless
Flange Class:
Default: *600*
150- Class 150
300- Class 300
600- Class 600
900- Class 900
1500- Class 1500
2500- Class 2500
125- Class 125 WOG
250- Class 250 WOG

WELL HEAD
Pipe, valve, and fittings at well head
Standard valve and fitting configuration plus 70 FEET [20 M] of pipe.
Available only in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen Process Economic Evaluator.
Material:
Default: *X52W*
X52W- API5LLX-X52 welded
GRBW- API5L - gr B/5LS welded
X42S- APIFLX-X42 seamless
GRBS- API5L - gr B seamless
Pipe diameter:
Default: *8* INCHES DIAM [*200* MM DIAM]
Type of well:
Default: *PROD*
PROD- Production well
INJEC- Injection well
PIV
Post indicator valve (PIV)
Ground or wall mounted post indicator and ductile iron gate valve with post indicator plate.
PIV’s are used to open or close the water supply to hydrants and fire protection systems.
Pipe diameter:
Default: 6 IN DIAM [150 MM DIAM]
Range: 4 – 24 IN DIAM [100 – 600 MM DIAM]
Includes the following standard ductile iron pipe diameters:
4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 24 INCHES
100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 MM
Note: The maximum pipe diameter for a wall mounted post indicator is 12 IN [300
MM].
Include gate valve?:
The gate valve with post indicator plate is included by default. The gate valve is operated by
the ground or wall mounted post indicator. Specify ‘NO’ to remove the gate valve.
Wall post valve?:
A ground mounted post indicator is provided by default. Specify 'YES' for a wall mounted
post indicator.
Include concrete valve box?:
Default: Included with ground mounted post indicators.
(Not included with wall mounted post indicators.)
Specify ‘YES’ or ‘NO’ to override the default specification.
Note: The following piping subtypes are used with this component
• 214 = Gate valve with post indicator plate
18-28 18 Piping
• 215 = Ground mounted post indicator
• 216 = Wall mounted post indicator
SPRNK
Sprinkler fire system (water / water+foam)
Pipe material:
*A 53*, 304P, 316P
Outlet arrangement:
*PLANE* - Outlet devices arranged over planar area
ARRAY - Outlet devices arranged over equipment area
Diameter or length: If outlet arrangement is PLANE, with devices arranged over planar area,
enter the plane area; if outlet arrangement is ARRAY, with devices arranged over equipment
area, enter the component length or diameter.
Width: If outlet arrangement is PLANE, with devices arranged over planar area, enter the
width of the plane area; if outlet arrangement is ARRAY, with devices arranged over
equipment area, enter the component width. Default: same as Diameter or length.
Height:
For ARRAY outlet arrangement only, enter height of outlet configuration. Default: *20* FEET
[*6* M].
Number of levels:
for PLANE outlet arrangement only, enter number of levels or floors having the indicated
dimensions. Default: *1*.
Number of sprinklers:
Default based on hazard type and area dimensions.
Sprinkler location:
*OUT* - outdoor installation
IN - indoor installation
Hazard type:
*EFLH*- Extinguished fire - light hazard occupancy
EFOH1- Extinguished fire - ordinary hazard grp 1
EFOH2- Extinguished fire - ordinary hazard grp 2
EFXH1- Extinguished fire - extra hazard grp 1 occup
EFXH2- Extinguished fire - extra hazard grp 2 occup
EPXH2- Exposure prot. - extra hazard grp 2 occup
CBXH2- Control burning - extra hazard grp 2 occup
PFXH2- Fire prevention - extra hazard grp 2 occup
System type:
*WSPNK*- Water sprinkler
WSPRY- Water spray
FSPNK- Foam sprinkler
FSPRY- Foam spray
Pipe system type:
*DRSYS*- Dry pipe system
WTSYS- Wet pipe system
DPPNU- Deluge sys/pilot head/pneumatic actuator
DPHYD- Deluge sys/pilot head/hydraulic actuator
DELEC- Deluge sys/electric actuator
Detector type:
*SPRKR*- Automatic sprinkler detector

FXTMP- Fixed temperature detector
R-O-R- Rate of rise temperature detector
SMKAL- Smoke alarm detector
NONE - No detectors installed
Application density:
Max: 1.00 GPM/SF [0.650 L/S/M2]
Volume of water/foam required per unit area. Default based on hazard/class.
Coverage area per sprinkler:
Max: 400 SF [37.0 M2]
Number of hose stations: Default: 0
Number of hydrants: Default: 0
No. of combo hydrants + monitors: Default: 0
Each combo unit includes a hydrant, monitor, nozzle, and hydrant mount.
Number of monitors-only: Default: 0
Each portable monitor includes a nozzle
Total number of bollards:
Default: 2 bollards per hydrant
Bollards are concrete filled steel posts and provide hydrant protection.
Foam concentration: Default: 3%; Max: 100%; for foam System type only
Foam tank option:
*NONE*- No foam storage tank required
BALPR- Tank with balanced pressure proportioning
PRTNK- Tank with pressure proportioning
ARPMP- Tank with around the pump proportioning
Tank design gauge pressure:
Default: *15* PSIG [*100* KPA]; for foam systems only
Tank temperature:
Default: *68* DEG F [*20* DEG C]; for foam systems only
Pipe sizing method:
*HYDLC*- Hydraulic pressure drop calculations
PSCHD- Schedule of pipe sizes vs. number of sprinklers
FOAM
Foam fire systems
Pipe material:
*A 53*, 304P, 316P.
Outlet arrangement:
*PLANE*- Outlet devices arranged over planar area
ARRAY- Outlet devices arranged over equipment area
Diameter or length:
If outlet arrangement is PLANE, with devices arranged over planar area, enter the plane area;
if outlet arrangement is ARRAY, with devices arranged over equipment area, enter the
component length or diameter.
Width:
If outlet arrangement is PLANE, with devices arranged over planar area, enter the width of the
plane area; if outlet arrangement is ARRAY, with devices arranged over equipment area, enter
the component width. Default: same as Diameter or length.
18-30 18 Piping
Height:
For ARRAY outlet arrangement only, enter height of outlet configuration. Default: *20* FEET
[*6* M].
Number of levels:
Default: 1.00; for PLANE outlet arrangement only, number of levels or floors having the
indicated dimensions.
Number of foam outlets:
Default based on area size.
System type:
*LOEXP*- Low expansion foam system
MDEXP- Medium expansion foam system
HIEXP- High expansion foam system
Pipe system type:
*DRFXP*- Dry pipe system
WTFXP- Wet pipe system
DLFXP- Deluge system
PORT- Portable system with nozzle
Foam delivery option:
FCHMB- Foam chambers
MONTR- Monitors
*NOZLE*Nozzles
HNDLN- Hand lines
SPRKR- Sprinklers
Application density:
Volume of water/foam required per unit of area. Default based on hazard/class.
Number of hose stations:
Default: 0
Number of hydrants:
Default: 0
Foam concentration:
Default: 3.00%; Max: 100%
Foam tank option:
*NONE*- No foam storage tank required
BALPR- Tank with balanced pressure proportioning
PRTNK- Tank with pressure proportioning
ARPMP- Tank with around the pump proportioning
Tank design gauge pressure:
Tank temperature:
SPHOS
Standpipe and hose fire systems
Pipe material:
*A 53*, 304P, 316P

Length:
Area length for determining number of hoses
Width:
Area width for determining number of hoses; default: same as length
Number of levels:
Default: 1.00; number of levels or floors having the indicated dimensions.
System type:
*C-I*- Class I stand pipe and hose system
C-II- Class II stand pipe and hose system
C-III- Class III stand pipe and hose system
Number of hoses:
Default based on class and area dimensions
Pipe system type:
*DRAUT*- Automatic dry system; Class I only
DRSMA- Semi-automatic dry system; Class I only
DRMNL- Manual dry system; Class I only
WTAUT- Automatic wet system
WTMNL- Manual wet system
Minimum flow per hose:
Max: 1,250.0 GPM [78.0 L/S];
Default: for C-I, C-III, 500 GPM [31 L/S]; for C-II, 100 GPM [6.3 L/S]
Number of hydrants:
Default: 0
WSHWR
Emergency eyewash and shower units
Pipe material:
*A 53*, 304P, 316P
Number of wash units:
Default: 0
Enter the number of wash units (type specified below in Wash unit type field) to be included
at the eyewash station.
Number of shower units:
Default: 0
Enter the number of full-body showers.
Number of combined units:
Default: 0
When a quantity is specified, this combination unit provides a combination full-body shower
and wash unit (type specified below in Wash unit type field).
Number of nozzles per shower:
Default: 1; Max: 12
Enter the number of nozzles per shower unit.
Length supply pipe:
Default: *50.0* FEET [*50.0* M]
Wash unit type:
EYE1- single outlet eyewash unit
*EYE2*- double outlet eyewash unit
FACE- face wash unit
COMB- combination eye and face wash unit
18-32 18 Piping
Drain requirement:
*YES*, NO
HDPE PIPE
High density polyethylene pipe, fusion bonded
Pipe length:
Min: 1.0 FEET [0.35 M]
Pipe diameter:
2-54 INCHES DIAM [50-1350 MM DIAM]
Default: based on SDR and temperature
Temperature: Default: 73 DEG F [23 DEG C]
Configuration: *BURIED*, ABOVE
Depth of buried pipe:
24-120 INCHES [600-3000 MM]
Number of Elbows: Default: *0*
Number of Reducers: Default: *0*
Number of Wyes: Default: *0*
Number of Yes: Default: *0*
Number of Blinds: Default: *0*
DI PIPE
DUCTILE IRON PIPE

Cement lined ductile iron pipe, with mechanical joint ends.
Pipe length:
Minimum: > 0
Pipe diameter:
Range: 3 – 64 IN DIAM [80 – 1600 MM DIAM]
Standard ductile iron pipe diameters
ASME Pipe Standard DIN EN Pipe Standard

Diameters Diameters
INCHES MM INCHES MM
3 80 3 80
4 100 4 100
6 150 6 150
8 200 8 200
10 250 10 250
12 300 12 300
14 400 14 350
16 400 16 400
18 450 18 450
20 500 20 500
24 600 24 600

ASME Pipe Standard DIN EN Pipe Standard
Diameters Diameters
30 750 28 700
36 900 32 800
42 1050 36 900
48 1200 40 1000
54 1350 48 1200
60 1500 56 1400
64 1600 60 1500
64 1600

Surge pressure:
Design temperature:
Default: 68 DEG F [20 DEG C]
This input field is for information purposes only
Pressure or thickness class:
Specify ANSI/AWWA pressure or thickness class for ASME pipe wall thickness standard and EN
pressure or thickness class for DIN EN pipe wall thickness standard
150 - ANSI/AWWA Pressure Class 150
50 - ANSI/AWWA Thickness Class 50
20 - EN Pressure Class 20
7 - EN Thickness Class 7
Buried configuration:
Default: Type 1 for pipe diameter < 14 INCHES [350 MM]. Type 2 for pipe diameter >= 14
INCHES [350 MM]
TYPE 1: Loose backfill
18-34 18 Piping
TYPE 2: Backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe
TYPE 3: 4” min. loose solid bedding. Backfill to top of pipe.
TYPE 4: 1/8xD or 4” min. sand bedding. Backfill to top of pipe.
TYPE 5: Sand bedding to centerline. Granular matl to top of pipe.
Depth buried pipe:
Minimum: 2.5 FT [0.75 M]
Default: 3 FT [1 M]
Maximum depth of buried pipe depends on the pipe diameter and the buried configuration
type.
Lining type:
1 - Standard thickness cement lining
2 - Double thickness cement lining
Default: 1
Number of elbows:
Default: *0*
Number of reducers:
Default: *0*
Number of tees:
Default: *0*
Number of wyes:
Default: *0*
Number of blinds:
Default: *0*
Number of crosses:
Default: *0*
Number of gate valves:
Default: *0*
Number of check valves:
Default: *0*
Number of butterfly valves:
Default: *0*
FLO PANEL
Sanitary flow diversion panel
Panel consists of pipe with swiveling elbow (must be positioned manually) used to divert flow
to one of four pipes. If included, proximity sensor identifies position of elbow. Quick
disconnects are used to connect elbow with downstream pipe. Used in the sanitary industry.
Panel enclosures are stainless steel for sanitation.
Custom Pipe Spec: enter either Custom Pipe Spec (see Design Basis) or material, not both.
Default: 304 PS
Material:
*304PS* - SS304, sanitary grade pipe material
316PS - SS316, sanitary grade pipe material
Material selection is for piping (wetted part) only; enclosure material is SS316.
Pipe diameter:
Standard pipe diameters between1.50 INCHES [40.0 MM] and 4.00 INCHES [100 MM]
Panel type:
*DWALL* - Double wall type panel
SWALL - Single wall type panel

No. stations/panel:
MIN: *2*; MAX: 8
Proximity sensors:
NO - No proximity sensors will be provided
*YES* - Proximity sensors will be provided
Clamp connections:
select clamp connection type for front (U-bend) side
*CB* - Cherry-Burrel couplings
TC - Tri-Clover couplings
No. of extra U-bends:
Default: *0*
Ferrules on outlet:
*NO* - No ferrule will be provided
YES - Ferrules will be provided
Clamp type for back side is the same as front side when ferrules are provided.
TUBING
Small diameter, stainless steel tubing.
Tube material
Default: 304L
Tube length
Min: 1 FEET [0.35 M]
Tube diameter
Min: 0.0625 IN [2 MM]
Max: 2 IN [50 MM]
Number of elbows
Default: 0
Number of tees
Default: 0
Number of unions
Default: 0
Number of reducers
Default: 0
Number of ball valves
Default: 0
YARD PIPE
Transfer lines, yard pipe runs, above/below grade Insulated and traced pipe runs.
For above-grade piping, hangers are supplied, but support steel, pipe racks, etc. must be
specified elsewhere.
If buried pipe is specified, trenching, coating, wrapping, sand bed and backfilling is provided.
Custom pipe spec:
Enter either Custom Pipe Spec (see Design Basis) or Material, not both.
18-36 18 Piping
Pipe material:
Enter either Custom Pipe Spec (see Design Basis) or Material, not both. See piping materials
listed later in this chapter. Default: *CS*.
Length:
Min: 1.0 FEET [0.35 M]
Pipe diameter:
Range: 0.5 - 72 INCHES DIAM [15 - 1,800 MM DIAM]
Default: determined from Custom Pipe Spec or 150 PSIG [1,000 KPA].
Design temperature:
Default: determined from Custom Pipe Spec or 68 DEG F [20 DEG C].
Pipe thickness:
Leave blank if schedule is specified.
Pipe schedule or gauge:
Leave blank if thickness is specified.
STD - Standard wall pipe 100 - Pipe schedule
XS - Extra-strong pipe 120 - Pipe schedule
XXS - Double extra-strong 140 - Pipe schedule
5 - Pipe schedule 160 - Pipe schedule
10 - Pipe schedule 7G - SS gauge pipe only
20 - Pipe schedule 10G- SS gauge pipe only
30- Pipe schedule 11G - SS gauge pipe only
80- Pipe schedule
Flange class:
Default: determined from custom spec or pipe material, temperature and pressure.
150- Class 150
300- Class 300
600- Class 600
900- Class 900
1500- Class 1500
2500- Class 2500
125- Class 125 WOG
250- Class 250 WOG
Configuration:
Default: *ABOVE*
ABOVE- Above-grade
BURIED- Buried
Depth buried pipe:
Below grade depth to top of pipe for buried pipe only. This is the distance from grade level to
the top of the buried pipe. The trench depth is determined by the below grade depth, the pipe
diameter and sand bed (6 INCHES [150 MM] in depth). Range: 24 - 120 INCHES [600 - 3,000
MM]. The default value will be taken as 36 INCHES [1,000 MM] minimally, or the depth of
footings specified for general civil data.

Buried Depth:
Default: 36 INCHES [1,000 MM]
Special pipe description:
Insulation, tracing, jacketing options. Default: *NONE*
PPROT - Personnel protection insulation. The system will generate 1.00 INCH of personnel
protection for 100 percent of the pipe. This option can be used in conjunction with the
Personnel protect field, which allows the user to tell the system how much pipe to insulate.
For instance, if the user only needs 25 FEET of a 100 FEET run of pipe to be personnel
protected, the user can input the percentage in the Personnel protect field. The system
would generate 25 FEET plus waste.
The thickness of the personnel protection insulation generated will always be 1.00 INCH.
AC-T - Anti-condensation insulation/tube tracer
AC-E - Anti-condensation insulation/elec tracer
FP-T - Freeze protection insulation/tube tracer
FP-E - Freeze protection insulation/elec tracer
FULL - Fully jacketed pipe (see illustration)
EXPD - Exposed-weld jacketed pipe (see illustration)
T-SP - Spiral traced/tube conn./no cement
T-SPC - Spiral traced/tube conn./heat cement
P-SP - Spiral traced/pipe conn./no cement
P-SPC - Spiral traced/pipe conn./heat cement
T-LO - Longit. traced/tube conn./no cement
T-LOC - Longit. traced/tube conn./heat cement
P-LO - Longit. traced/pipe conn./no cement
P-LOC - Longit. traced/pipe conn./heat cement
E-AMB - Electrical traced/ambient temp control
E-PRO - Electrical traced/process temp control
STAND - Standard heat or cold insulation
Steam supply pressure for traced or jacketed pipe only. Default: *25* PSIG [*175* KPAG]
E-Trace maintenance temperature:
For electrical tracing - process maintenance temperature; Max: 250 DEG F [120 DEG C] over
ambient. Default: 220 DEG F [105 DEG C]
Weld X-ray%:
Min: 100; Default: See Area Design Basis.
Number of flanges:
Enter number of flanges in addition to those for valves.
Default: *0*
Number of blinds: Default: *0*
Number of spectacle blinds: Default: *0*
Number of threadless: Default: *0*
Number of gate valves: Default: *0*
Number of globe valves: Default: *0*
Number of ball valves: Default: *0*
Number of butterfly valves: Default: *0*
18-38 18 Piping
Number of check valves: Default: *0*
Number of control valves:
Size: same as pipe size to 4 INCHES [100 MM], smaller than pipe otherwise. Default: *0*. See
“Control Valve Options” in Chapter 21 for default size reductions.
Number of safety valves: Default: *0*
Number of regulating valves: Default: *0*
Number of angle valves: Default: *0*
Number of plug valves: Default: *0*
Number of orifice plates: Default: *0*
No. Knife Gate Valve: Default: *0*
Personnel protect:
Personnel protection percent coverage.
For example, if out of 50 FEET run of pipe, 12.5 FEET needs personnel protection, enter “25”
in this field. The system will then generate 12.5 FEET of personnel protection plus waste. The
thickness of the personnel protection insulation generated will always be 1.00 INCH. Default:
*100*.
Note: You must select PPROT in the Special Pipe Descr. field before the system will use the
personnel protection.
Control valve minimum class:
For fluid control valves only. Default: *3*.
Control valve reduced size:
Fluid positioning CV only. Default: reduced 0 to 4 line sizes based on size.
L - Line size control valves
R - Standard size control valves
PCCP
Pipeline segment
Above grade or buried, pipeline segment for long distance pipelines.
NOTE: Pipeline segments can be added only to Pipeline areas in ACCE projects in which
pipeline areas are allowed. See the “Adding and Defining Pipeline Areas” topic in ACCE user
guide.
Pipe material
Default: X52W if pipe diameter > 18 IN [450 MM], otherwise default: X52S.
Length of pipeline segment
Sum of all pipeline segment lengths in a pipeline area must equal total pipeline length in the
area properties.
Pipeline segment type
Options: Buried, Restrained (Pile-supported, above-ground), Unrestrained (Above-ground)
Pipe diameter
Min: 4 IN [100 MM]
Max: 72 IN [1800 MM]
Pipe thickness
Required field, default: > 0
Radiographic inspection
Percent of total welds to be tested.

Default: 10%
Stress relief
Post-weld stress relief
Default: Based on project design basis
External coating type
Default: FBE (Fusion-bonded epoxy coating) for buried pipeline; NONE for above-ground
pipeline
Terrain description
Percent of pipeline segment length crossing each of the following terrain types. Sum of all the
percent values must be 100%
Level terrain
Slightly rolling terrain
Rolling hills terrain
Rough hills terrain
Rough mountains terrain
Soil description
Percent of pipeline segment length crossing each of the following soil types. Sum of all the
percent values must be 100%
Soft sand or clay soil
Marsh
Rocky soil
Weathered shale soil
Weathered rock soil
Hard rock
Number main roads/RR crossings
Number of main road and railroad crossings of the pipeline right-of-way.
Default: 0
Number of minor road crossings
Default: 1 minor road crossing per 25,000 FEET [7600 M] of pipeline segment length.
Number of access roads
Default: 1 access road (3000 FEET [900 M] long) per mainline block valve.
Hauling distance
Average round trip distance for hauling materials from storage yards to jobsite.
Default: 70 MILES [110 KM]
Number concrete thrust anchors
Concrete anchors required at pipe ends, scraper launcher/receiver, etc.
Default: 0
Right of way blasting volume
Volume of rock to be blasted for right-of-way clearing.
Default: 0
Number of mainline valves
Default: If pipeline diameter > 30 INCH [750 MM], 1 per 10 MILES [16 KM]; else, 1 per 20
MILES [32 KM]
Flange class
Default: 600 class (DIN: 40)
18-40 18 Piping
Number of vents
Default: 1 vent per 2 MILES [3.2 KM] of pipeline segment length.
Number of drains
Default: 1 (+ 1 at each mainline block valve)
Number of bypasses
Default: 1 per mainline block valve
Bypass diameter
Default: Mainline diameter for gas lines, 1/4 mainline diameter for oil, water lines.
Length per bypass
Default: Calculated by system based on pipeline diameter.
Number of ball valves per bypass
Default: 1 per bypass for gas lines, 2 for oil and water lines.
Number of check valves per bypass
Default: 1 per bypass for gas lines, 0 for oil and water lines.
Burial type
Applies only when pipeline segment type is buried
Default: Fully buried
Buried depth
Depth of cover
Applies only to fully buried pipeline
Default: 36 IN [914 MM]
Length of ditch blasting
Length of ditch blasting for excavation.
Default: Length of segment in hard rock.
Volume of hand ditching
Quantity to be hand excavated by jackhammer with no blasting.
Default: 0
Pile type
Default: HP (H-section piles)
Pile size
Default:73 LB/FT [108 KG/M] for HP piles; 18 INCH [450 MM] diameter for pipe piles.
Pile spacing
Average support spacing along the length of the pipeline segment.
Default: System calculated
Max: 100 FEET [30 M]
Number piles/support location
Default: 1
Max: 2
Pile length
Average length of piles
Default: 40 FEET [12 M]
Max: 80 FEET [24 M]
Pile driven depth
Average driven depth per pile
Default: 22 FEET [6.6 M]

Max: 60 FEET [18 M]
Number of pile thrust anchors
Pile anchors required at pipe ends, scraper l/r, etc.
Default: 0
Number swage/deflection anchors
Swage anchors at diameter/thickness changes, deflection anchors at grade/alignment
changes.
Default: 0
18-42 18 Piping
Pipe Diameters
(Inch - Pound diameters are for ANSI B36.19)
INCHES MM
0.51 151
.75 20
1 25
1.251 32
1.51 401
2 50
2.51 651
3 80
3.51 901
4 100
51 1251
6 150
8 200
10 250
12 300
14 350
16 400
18 450
20 500
24 600
30 750
36 900
42 1050
48 1200
542 13502
602 15002

INCHES MM
722 18002
842 21002
962 24002
1082 27002
1202 30002
1 Non-standard pipe sizes are not created by models unless specified.

2 Elbows and tees are fabricated from like-diameter pipe. Estimate includes more
welds to fabricate fittings.
Note: Pipe diameters greater than 722 (1800 mm) are only available for
Plant Bulk Pipe Items. These larger diameters cannot be specified in pipe
item details or yard pipe forms.
Pipe Schedule
Use ANSI B36.10 for all materials, all country locations.
Exceptions:
Japan - does have schedule 20SS 0.5 - 12 INCHES diameter.
Japan - schedule 40, 60, 80, and 100SS > 20 INCHES diameter is
much thinner.
18-44 18 Piping
Standard Equations for Pipe Diameter
(Old)
Liquid Lines Slurry Lines
GPM Range Velocity GPM Range Velocity
0 - 90 7 0 - 3000 3
91 - 250 8 3001 - 5000 5
251 - 500 9 5001 - 7000 7
501 - 1000 10 > 7000 8
1001 - 2000 11
2001 - 3000 12
3001 - 4000 13
> 4000 14
Diameter = 0.6384*(GPM/Velocity)**0.5
IF (Diameter > 4.0) THEN
Diameter = Diameter - 1.00
ELSE
Diameter = Diameter - 0.25
Gas Lines
Minimum Flowrate = 100000.0 for velocity calculations

Maximum Flowrate =1.0E07 for velocity calculations
Flowrate Velocity
LBS/HR FPS
Velocity =Log-Log X1 = 1.0E05 Y1 = 30.0
X2 = 1.0E07 Y2 = 100.0
Specific Volume = 10.73*(Fahrenheit+460.0)/(Molewt*(Pressure+15.0))

Diameter = 0.226*((Flowrate*Specific Volume)/Velocity)**0.50
IF (Diameter > 18.0) Use one pipe size smaller

Steam Lines
Minimum Flowrate =10000.0 for velocity equations

Maximum Flowrate = 1.0E06 for velocity equations
Flowrate Velocity
LBS/HR FPS
Velocity = Log-Log X1 = 1.0E04 Y1=20.0
X2 = 1.0E06 Y2=100.0
TempSteam = 100.0*(Pressure+30.0)**0.25
SpecificVolume = 0.596*(TempSteam+460.0)/(Pressure+15.0)
Diameter = 0.226*(Flowrate*SpecificVolume/Velocity)**0.50
IF (Diameter > 18.0) Use one pipe size smaller
Relief Lines
SQ INCHES DIAM INCHES
0.196 1.0
1.287 2.0
2.853 3.0
6.38 4.0
16.0 6.0
26.0 8.0
18-46 18 Piping
Standard Equations for Pipe Diameter
(New)
The “new” line sizing models are characterized by a maximum pipe velocity criterion
and a maximum pressure drop criterion, as listed below:
Parameter Equation Remarks
Pipe Velocity V = flow Velocity;
Pressure Drop (psi

per 100 ft.)
Application Maximum Velocity Maximum

Pressure Drop
Per 100 ft.
Liquid Lines
Where:
A = Maximum velocity multiplier – liquid

(FT/S); Default = 100
B = Maximum velocity exponent - liquid
Default = 0.5
Gas Lines

Application Maximum Velocity Maximum
Pressure Drop
Per 100 ft.
Vapor
Where:
A = Maximum velocity multiplier – vapor

(FT/S)
Default = 100
B = Maximum velocity exponent - vapor
Default = 0.5
Steam Lines
Centrifugal Pump
Suction
PD & Gear Pump

Suction
All Pump Discharge Table as a function of Pipe Diameter
Tower Reboiler
18-48 18 Piping
Name Equation
Flare Stack inlet header
Pipe Diameter Liquid
Friction Factor
Vapor/Liquid
Where:
C1={2.457*ln[1/((7NRE)0.9+(0.27*(  /(d/12))))]}16 (liquid)
C2=(37530/NRE)16
 d  12  v 
N RE = --------------------------

ε (abs. roughness) = 0.00015ft (Commercial steel/wrought iron)
v (liquid velocity) = 0.4085*qL/d2
v (vapor velocity) = 3.056*qv/d2
ρ (liquid or vapor density) = lb/ft3
 (liquid or vapor viscosity) = cP*6.7197*10-4
d = pipe ID, inches
Frictional pressure drop

(psi per 100 ft)
Vapor/Liquid
Vapor Density
Where:
MW=Molecular Weight

Name Equation
Vapor Viscosity
Where:
Pressure Drop
Steam
Where:
m = mass flowrate (lb/hr)
Friction Factor, Steam
Where:
v = inlet steam velocity = 3.056 ACFM/d2

ρ = inlet steam density, lb/ft3
 = inlet steam viscosity, cP*6.7197*10-4
d = pipe ID, inches
ε = Abs roughness =0.0015 ft
18-50 18 Piping
Maximum Flow Velocity as a function of Pipe Diameter
for Pump Discharge (Fluid Specific Gravity = 1)
Pipe Diameter (inches) Maximum Velocity (fps)
1 10.5
1.5 11.0
2 11.1
3 11.3
4 11.6
6 12.0
8 12.2
10 12.4
12 12.5
14 12.6
16 12.7
18 13.0
20 13.1

Utility Piping Services
Utility headers are sized based upon the following:
• The Utility Header Diameter Symbol (L,M,H,V) as specified for Plant Bulk Utility
Piping will give diameters for each service as tabulated in the following table.
• By specifying the desired diameter for that service. If the Utility Header Symbol is
designated, then a run of each service line is provided by the system in default of
a non-specified diameter. The default diameter corresponding to the service type
is listed in the table below.
A user-specified diameter for a service header overrides the diameter associated with
the Utility Header Diameter Symbol. Service headers may be omitted by:
• Specifying “0.0” diameter for the undesired service.
• Omitting the Utility Diameter Symbol, whereby only diameter-specified headers
are provided.
• These items are cost accounted to the same COA’s as process piping.
Service Nominal Pipe Diameter: INCHES [MM]

Diameter Symbol
Symbol Type L M H V -
Water
F (b) Firewater - loop 6[150] 8[200] 12[300] 16[400] excluded

F (b) Firewater - lateral 4[100] 6[150] 6[150] 6[150] excluded
P Potable water 2[50] 2 [50] 4[100] 6[150] excluded
C Cooling water and return 6[150] 8[200] 12[300] 14[350] excluded
line
Steam*
L (i) Low pressure steam 3 [80] 4[100] 8[200] 12[300] excluded

M (i) Medium pressure steam 3 [80] 4[100] 8[200] 12[300] excluded
H (i) High pressure steam 3 [80] 4[100] 6[150] 8[200] excluded
Air
P Plant air 2 [50] 3 [80] 4[100] 6[150] excluded

I Instrument air 2 [50] 2 [50] 3 [80] [100] excluded
Gas
F Fuel gas 2 [50] 2 [50] 4[100] 6[150] excluded

I Inert gas 2 [50] 2 [50] 4[100] 6[150] excluded
18-52 18 Piping
Other
CS (b) Chemical sewer 8[200] 10[250] 12[300] 14[350] excluded

FL Flare line 10[250] 14[350] 16[400] 24[600] excluded
US Utility station (see diagram) 1 [25] 1 [25] 1 [25] 1 [25]
*One condensate return line is provided upon selection of any combination of steam
services.
(b) Buried
(i) Insulated

Utility Station Diagram
Note: The drop lines are 1 INCH [25 MM] in diameter for air/water/steam and 0.75
INCH [20 MM] for condensate line. The lengths are 100 FEET [30 M] for air, water,
and steam service and 50 FEET [15 M] for condensate line by default. Length can be
changed by specifying utility station drop length.
18-54 18 Piping
Default Piping Materials
Equipment Fabrication Temperature Range* Piping Material Symbol

Materials F C
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator
All Materials all all A 106 (up to 2 INCHES [50 MM]

A 53 (2 INCHES [50mm] and larger)
Aspen Project Economic Evaluator
All carbon and Low Alloy -425 to 051 -253 to -46 304P
Steel -50 to -21 -45 to -29 A333A
-20 to 650 -28 to 343 A 106 (up to 2 INCHES [50 MM]
-20 to 650 -28 to 343 A 53 (2 INCHES [50 MM] and larger)
651 to 1000 344 to 537 A335C
1000 to 1200 538 to 648 A335F
1201 to 1500 649 to 815 304P
Clad Vessels Material corresponding to process-side

cladding material.
Lined Vessels: Brick or all all Carbon steel - see above

monolithic lined
Lined Vessels: rubber lined all all RBLCS
Lined Vessels: organic all all TFELS

(except rubber), glass, lead
zinc lines
High Alloy Steel (Stainless) -425 to 650 -252 to 343 304P

651 to 1500 344 to 815 316P
Aluminum -425 to 650 -253 to 148 AL

651 to 1500 -28 to 204
Copper and Copper Alloys; -20 to 400 -28 to 204

Except for HE and RB HE CU
and RB only Carbon Steel - see above
HASTELLOY all all HAST
INCONEL all all INCNL
KARBATE (graphite) all all TFELS
MONEL all all MONEL
Nickel all all N
Titanium all all TI
Epoxy/Polypropylene (PPL) all all TFELS
Wood all all 316P
The maximum temperature for any pipe material will not exceed the maximum temperature for the
corresponding plate material listed in Chapter 28.

Pipe Materials - Ferrous Materials
Carbon Steel
(COA 310 - 319)
System ASTM BS JIS DIN Composition Recommended Length
Material Maximum Type**
Symbol Temperature
Degrees*
F C
A 53 or CS A-53 3601 G3454 17172 1100 593 1

(B) ERW410 STPG StE240.7
G3452
SGP
GALV (B) ERW410 STPG StE240.7 Galvanized CS 1100 593 1

G3452
SGP
A 106 or CS A - 106 3602 G3456 17175 1100 593 1

(B) HFS410 STPT St45.8
A333A A-333 3603 G3460 SEQW-680 1100 593 1

(6) 410LT50 STPL380 TTSt35N
* The maximum temperature for any pipe material will not exceed the maximum temperature
for the corresponding plate material listed in Chapter 28.
** See Length Types.
API Pipe
(COA 310-319)
Symbol Temperature
Degrees*
F C
GRBW*** 5L/5LS 3601 G3454 17172 1100 593 1

ERW410 STPG StE240.7
X42W 1100 593 1
X52W 1100 593 1
X60W 1100 593 1
X65W 1100 593 1
X70W 1100 593 1
18-56 18 Piping
* The maximum temperature for any pipe material will not exceed the maximum temperature
for the corresponding plate material listed in Chapter 28.
*** For GRBS (GR.B seamless), select GRBW (GR.B welded) as the system material symbol and
then select “Seamless” in the Pipe Type Field.
Low and Intermediate Alloy Steel

(All COA 320-329, except A333C COA 310-319)
Symbol Temperature
Degrees*
F C
A-335 3604 G3458 17175
A335B (12) 620-440 STPA22 13CrMo44 1Cr - .5Mo 1200 648 1
A335C (11) 621 STPA23 13CrMo44 I.25CR-.5Mo-Si 1200 648 1
A335D (22) 622 STPA24 10CrMo910 2.25Cr-1Mo 1200 648 1
A335F (5) 625 STPA25 12CrMo195G 1200 648 1
A335G (9) STPA26 12CrMo91G 9Cr-1Mo
Low Temperature Service Min. Temp
A-333 3603 G3460 SEW680 F C
A333C (3) 503LT100 STPL450 10Ni14 3.5Ni -150 -101 1
* The maximum temperature for any pipe material will not exceed the maximum temperature for the
corresponding plate material listed in Chapter 28.
High Alloy Steel

(COA 320-329)
Symbol Temperature
Degrees*
F C
304P A-312 3605 G3459 2462 18Cr-8Ni 1500 815 1

TP 304 304S18 SUS304TP X5CrNi1810
304LP A312 3605 G3459 2462 18Cr-8Ni 1500 815 1

TP 304L 304S14 SUS304LTP X2CrNi1911
316P A-312 3606 G3459 2462 16Cr-12Ni-2Mo 1500 815 1

TP 316 316S18 SUS316TP X5CrNiMo17122

316LP A-312 3605 G3459 2462 16Cr-12Ni-2Mo 1500 c 1
TP 316L 316S14 SUS316LTP X2CrNiMo17132
317LP A-312 SUS317LTP 18Cr-13Ni-3Mo 1500 1500 1

TP 317L
321P A-312 3605 G3459 2462 18Cr-10Ni-Ti 1500 815 1

TP 321 321S18 SUS321TP X6CrNiTi1810
6MOP A-312 3605 G3459 2463 20Cr-18Ni-6Mo 1382 750 1

TP 317L 316S22 SUS317LTP-A X2CrNiMo18143
Gauge Pipe (Very Light Wall)
304PG A-312 3605 G3459 2462 18Cr-8Ni 1500 815 2

TP 304 304S18 SUS304TP X5CrNi1810
316PG A-312 3605 G3459 2462 16Cr-12Ni-2Mo 1500 815 2

Sanitary Pipe (Polished, Quick Disconnects)
304PS*** A-312 3605 G3459 2462 18Cr-8Ni 1500 815 3

TP 304 304S18 SUS304TP X5CrNi1810
316PS*** A-312 3605 G3459 2462 16Cr-12Ni-Mo 1500 815 3

* The maximum temperature for any pipe material will not exceed the maximum temperature for
the corresponding plate material listed in Chapter 28.
***Maximum 200 PSIG (1,379 KPAG)
18-58 18 Piping
Pipe Materials - Non-Ferrous Materials
Non-Ferrous Materials
(COA 330-339)
Symbol Temperature
Degrees*
F C
AL B-241 1474 H4080 1746 Aluminum 350 176 1

U.S to 10 INCHES [250 MM]
A96961 6061 A6061T
U.S above 10 INCHES [250 MM] and all others
CU B-42 2871 H3300 1754 Copper 400 204 3

C10200 C103 C1020T OF-Cu
Ni B-161 3074 H4552 17740 Nickel 600 315 3

N02200 NA11 NNCT Ni99.2 99Ni
MONEL B-165 3074 H4552 17751 Monel 800 426 3

N04400 NA13 NCuT NiCu30Fe 67Ni-30Cu
INCNL B-167 Inconel 1200 648 3

N06600 72Ni-15Cr-8Fe
TI B-337 H4630 17850 Titanium 600 315 3

R50400 TTP35
HAST B-619 H4552 17751 Hastelloy 1250 676 3

N10276 NMCr NiMo16Cr15 54Ni-16Mo-15Cr
A 20 B-464 Alloy 20 800 426 3

N08020 35Ni-35Fe-20Cr-Cb
ZR B-658 Zirconium 700 371 3

R60702 99.2Zr
* The maximum temperature for any pipe material will not exceed the maximum temperature for
the corresponding plate material listed in Chapter 28.
Plastic and Resin Materials

(COA 350-359)

Recommended
Maximum
Temperature
System
DEG F DEG C
Material Length
Material Class Pipe Material Symbol F C Type*
Plastics and Resins Fiberglass Reinforced ** FRP 260 125

Epoxy Resin PVC 140 60 4
Polyvinyl Chloride, CPVC 200 93 4
Maximum 8 INCHES [200
MM}diameter
Chlorinated Polyvinyl
Chloride, Maximum 8
INCHES [200 MM] diameter
* See below for Length Types

** Thickness/schedule not adjustable
Type Length
10 FEET 15 FEET 20 FEET 30 FEET

[3 M] [4.6 M] [6.1 M] [9.1 M]
1 < = 1.5 INCHES > 1.5 INCHES
2 All D
3 All D
4 All D
5 All D
18-60 18 Piping
Lined Steel Pipe
(COA 340-349)
Lined piping of the materials in the following table are developed irrespective of the
equipment or pipe temperature. The user must give consideration to temperature-
material selections for these materials, as the system does not produce a warning or
error condition if the recommended maximum temperature is exceeded.
Recommended
Maximum
Temperature
System Spool
Degrees Degrees
Material Type
Lined Steel Symbol F C *
Remote shop fabricated carbon steel pipe and

fittings, lined with:
Epoxy EPLCS 260 125 4
Glass GSLCS 450 230 2
Natural rubber, (1/4 INCHES [6 MM] thick RBLCS 175 80 4
Nitrile rubber (1/4 INCHES [6 MM] thick NITRL 175 80 1
Hypalon rubber (1/4 INCHES [6 MM] thick HYPLN 175 80 1
Butyl rubber (1/4 INCHES [6 MM] thick) BUTYL 175 80 3
Neoprene rubber (1/4 INCHES [6 MM] thick NEPNE 175 80 4
Ebonite (1/4 INCHES [6 MM] thick EBONT 175 80 1
Cement CMLCS 225 110
Polypropylene PPLCS* 275 135
Polyvinylidene Fluoride (KYNAR) PVDF* 175 80
Polyvinylidene Chloride (SARAN) PVDC 400 200
Fluorinated Ethylene Propylene (FEP TEFLON) FEP 450 230
Polytetrafluoroethylene (TFE TEFLON) TFELS*
SS304 ¼ INCH [6 MM] SS6LC
Carbide 1/8 INCH [3 MM] CB3LC
Carbide 1/4 INCH [6 MM] CB6LC
Carbide 1/8 INCH [3 MM] IN3LC
Remote shop fabricated stainless steel pipe and TFESS* 450 230 1
fittings, lined with:
Polytetrafluoroethylene (TFE TEFLON)
* Can use bends up to 4 INCHES instead of elbows.

Spool Types
Spool Spool Diameter Default Spool Maximum Spool
Type Length Length
1 All 20 FEET [6.1 M] 40 FEET [12 M]
2 < = 1 INCH 2 FEET [0.6 M] 2 FEET [0.6 M]

> 1 and < 2 INCH 6 FEET [1.9M] 6 FEET [1.9M]
> 2 INCH 10 FEET [3.1M] 10 FEET [3.1M]
3 All 10 FEET [3.1M] 10 FEET [3.1M]
4 All 20 FEET [6.1 M] 20 FEET [6.1 M]
Icarus systems automatically include two flanges per spool.

For yard pipe (Plant bulks - YARD PIPE), specifying the number of flanges overrides
the default. An error message appears if the number of flanges you specified causes
the spool piece to exceed the maximum length for that particular spool piece type
and diameter.
For installation bulk piping (Component - Pipe Item Details), specifying the number
of flanges overrides the default. If the number of flanges specified causes the spool
piece to exceed the maximum length for that particular spool piece type and
diameter, the default spool length is used. However, the system will not generate a
message that there are too few flanges.
The spool pieces are shipped pre-flanged and ready for bolt-up to valves and flanged
fittings in the field.
The following is a yard pipe example:
Yard Pipe Example:
20 FEET [61 M] Yard Pipe 10 INCHES diameter TFELS (material)

System generates: 10 sections 20 flanges
Spool length = 20 FEET [6.1 M]
200 FEET [61 M] Yard Pipe 10 INCHES diameter TFELS (Material)

User enters: 10 flanges
System generates: 5 Sections 10 flanges
Spool lengths = 40 FEET [12 M}
18-62 18 Piping
Yard Pipe Example:
200 FEET Yard Pipe 10 INCHES diameter TFELS (Material)

User enters: 8 flanges
System generates:
“ERROR: Too few flanges on this run of pipe”
System cannot generate this run of year pipe. When the user enters ‘8 flanges,’ the
system tries to break the yard pipe into 4 sections (Spools):
The Spool Type Chart indicates that TFELS is a Type 1 spool and cannot exceed a
maximum length of 40 FEET [12 M] on a single spool piece; therefore, the system
generates an error message.
To determine the minimum number of flanges on a spool piece of yard pipe:
1) Determine the length of the pipe.

2) Determine the Spool Type.
3) Look at the maximum length of spool for the spool type.
Calculate:
Minimum Number of flanges = (Length of Pipe / Maximum Length) x2
Example:
Material = TFELS Spool Type = 1
Length = 200 FEET [61 M] Maximum spool length = 40 FEET [12.2 M]
The minimum number of flanges a user could enter for this run of pipe is:
(200 FEET / 40 FEET) x 2 = (5 ) x 2 = 10 flanges
[61.96 M/ 12.2 M] x 2 = [5.000] x 2 = 10 flanges
Entering fewer than 10 flanges will generate an error in your estimate.
Note: Odd sizes will round up to the next integer.
Material = TFELS Spool Type = 1
Length = 208 FEET [63.4 M] Maximum spool length = 40 FEET [12.2 M]
(208 FEET / 40 FEET) x 2 = (5.2 ) x 2 = 11 flanges
(rounds up to the next integer)
[63.4 M / 12.2 M] x 2 = (6 ) x 2 = 12 flanges
Entering fewer than 12 flanges will generate an error in the estimate.

GB 150 Pipe Materials
Icarus GB Material GB Material Internal Pressure Internal
Pressure
Material Standard Designation Max Temp (Deg F)
Max Temp
Symbol
(Deg C)
A 53 GB/T 13793 20 662 350
A 106 GB/T 8163-2008 20 842 450
A333A GB 6479 16Mn 887 475
A335B GB 5310-2008 15CrMo 1022 550
A335C GB 5310-2008 12Cr1MoVG 1067 575
A335D GB 5310-2008 12Cr2Mo 1067 575
A335F GB 6479 1Cr5Mo 1112 600
304P GB/T 12771-2008 06Cr19Ni10 1292 700
304PS GB/T 12771-2008 06Cr19Ni10 1292 700
304LP GB/T 12771-2008 022Cr19Ni10 797 425
304PG GB/T 12771-2008 06Cr19Ni10 1292 700
316P GB/T 12771-2008 06Cr17Ni12Mo2 1292 700
316PS GB/T 12771-2008 06Cr17Ni12Mo2 1292 700
316LP GB/T 12771-2008 022Cr17Ni12Mo2 842 450
316PG GB/T 12771-2008 06Cr17Ni12Mo2 1292 700
317LP GB/T 14976-2008 06Cr19Ni13Mo3 842 450
321P GB/T 12771-2008 O6Cr18Ni11Ti 1292 700
18-64 18 Piping
Remote & Field Shop Piping Procedures for Various
Materials
* A portion of prefabricated pipe supports can be procured and installed in the remote shop using the
following fields in the Piping Design Basis:
1. Pipe supports in remote shop (PERCENT)
2. Remote shop supports % field MH (PERCENT)

Remote Shop Piping Procedures
*Length of pipe per fitting procured in the remote shop can be changed by specifying a different
value in the Length/fitting to remote shop field in the Piping Design Basis.
**Non-flanged welded valves can be procured and installed in the remote shop by selecting Y in the
Welded valves in remote shop field in the Piping Design Basis.
18-66 18 Piping
Small Bore Piping Procedures

Icarus’ Pipe Fabrication, Erection and
Testing Procedures

Code of Account Icarus Operation What is Included
3X2 FIELD SHOP FAB HANDLE AND WELD

(312-CS, 322-SS, etc.) PREP OPER. Unload from train/truck into shop
Shop handling for storage’ procure material for
fabrication fabrication; place completed spools
Weld prep in temporary storage.
Pre-heating Prepare for welding (clean, pickle,
etc.); smooth weld (deburr/grind),
and clean-up
For temperatures up to 400F
[204C]
CUTTING PIPE
Flame cutting Flame cut pipe- plain end
Machine cutting Machine cut pipe - plain end
BEVELING PIPE
Flame beveling Flame bevel pipe for welding
Machine beveling Machine bevel pipe for welding
WELDING (shop)
Butt weld Manual butt weld
Repair bad x-ray welds Dig out & re-weld bad X-ray welds
FIELD SHOP X-RAY Radiographic inspection
FIELD SHOP STRESS Local stress, relieving

RELIEF
TESTING, MISC.
CLEANING User specified
Clean & polish User specified
Other testing
3X4 REMOTE SHOP FAB [Operations same as [Cost accounted as material cost]
(3140CS, 324-SS, etc.) Field Shop]
18-68 18 Piping
Code of Account Icarus Operation What is Included
3X7 PIPE ERECTION ERECT SHOP FAB PIPE Handle and erect fabricated spool
(317-CS, 327-SS, etc.) pieces; includes handle and haul
from storage yard, unload and rig
in place and align.
ERECT VALVE Field handle valves, orifice unions,

etc.
BOLT UP Field attach flanges and do bolt-

CONNECTIONS ups
ERECT STRAIGHT RUN Same item as Erect Shop Fab Pipe

PIPE
WELDING (field)
Flame cutting Same items as Field Shop Fab
Machine cutting Same items as Field Shop Fab
Flame beveling Same items as Field Shop Fab
Machine beveling Same items as Field Shop Fab
Butt weld Same items as Field Shop Fab
Repair bad X-ray welds Same items as Field Shop Fab
FIELD X-RAY Same items as Field Shop Fab
FIELD STRESS RELIEF Same items as Field Shop Fab
307 PREFAB PIPE REWORK REPAIR & ADJ PREFAB 10% of all shop man-hours
PIPE (12.5% in UK)
306 PIPING SYSTEM PIPE TESTING (field

TESTING only) Prepare for test (place blinds &
Hydrostatic testing blanks, open valves, support
items, air purge, etc.); test (fill,
pressurize and monitor lines, soap
test joints); clean up after test
(drain lines, remove temporary
items, close valves, etc.)

Valve and Fitting Options for Installation
Bulk Piping
Selections of available valves and fittings on installation bulk piping are listed
alphabetically below, with those available for standard piping materials listed
separately from those available only for sanitary piping materials. These choices are
available only on installation bulk piping (Piping - Line Item Detail) or when adding
installation bulk piping through the use of the P&ID editor on Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator systems.
Description Symbol
For Standard Piping Materials (all available piping materials

except 304PS and 316PS)
Angle valve AN
Ball valve BA
Blind BL
Butterfly valve BU
Cap CP
Check valve CH
DI or SS Victaulic coupling (Vict. Pipe only) VC
Elbow EL
Expansion joint EX
Extra drains* DR
Flange (exclude valve flanges, set by FL

system)**
Flange (total including valves) FT
Gate valve GA
Globe valve GL
Knife gate valve KN
None
Orifice plate and union OP
Plug valve PL
Reducer RE
Regulating valve RV
Rupture disk RD
18-70 18 Piping
Description Symbol
Safety/relief valve SV
Screwed Plug SP
Sockolets SO
Spectacle blind SB
Strainer ST
Steam trap TP
Tee TE
Temperature valve TV
Threadolet TL
Transition joint at material change TR
Weldolets WO
**Drain is defined as a fitting assembly composed of three elbows,

one gate valve, and 10 FEET (3 M) of 0.75 INCH (20 mm) pipe.
However, the user can select the diameter, length, number of fittings,
and type of fittings (a maximum of four different types) at the project
level.
*Flange costs include cost of gaskets and bolts.
Note: Pipe Fittings for sizes greater than 48” OD:
1. The fabricated fitting is assumed to require a length of pipe
equivalent to 2 times the nominal diameter of the pipe. For example,
for a 54 inch diameter pipe, to fabricate 1 elbow (or 1 tee) would
require 2*54 inch = 108 inch or 9 ft of pipe.
2. The material cost of the fabricated elbow would equal that of 9 feet
of straight length pipe.
3. The material cost reported in the line item is multiplied by the
number of elbows (or tees) specified by you. For example, for 2
elbows (54 inch diameter), the material cost = 2*9 ft = 18 feet of
straight length pipe.
4. The weight of each fabricated elbow (or tee) is similarly the weight
of straight pipe of (2 times nominal diameter) length.

Description Symbol
For Sanitary Piping Materials (304PS and 316PS) Only
Butterfly valve - sanitary, max 8 IN[200 MM] BU
Check valve - sanitary, max 4 IN[100 MM] CH
Cross - sanitary, max 8 IN[200 MM] CR
Elbow (45 degree)-sanitary, max 8 IN[200 MM] 45
Elbow (90 degree)-sanitary, max 8 IN[200 MM] EL
Flange - sanitary (exclude valve flanges) FL
Hose adapter -sanitary, max 4 IN[100 MM] HA
Pipe adapter-sanitary, max 4 IN[100 MM] PA
Quick-joint conn. -sanitary, max 4 IN[100 MM] QJ
Reducer (concen.)-sanitary, max 8 IN[200 MM] RE
Reducer (eccen.)-sanitary, max 8 IN[200 MM] ER
Safety valve - sanitary, max 4 IN[100 MM] SV
Swivel-joint conn. -sanitary, max 4 IN[100 MM] SJ
Tee - sanitary, max 8 IN[200 MM] TE
Threadolet - sanitary TL
**Drain is defined as a fitting assembly composed of three elbows, one

gate valve, and 10 FEET (3 M) of 0.75 INCH (20 mm) pipe. However, the
user can select the diameter, length, number of fittings, and type of fittings
(a maximum of four different types) at the project level.
*Flange costs include cost of gaskets and bolts.
18-72 18 Piping
Valve Trim Specifications
The valve trim specifications in Aspen Icarus custom pipe specifications are based on
the API-600 specification. The API-600 specifications pertain to steel gate valves
only, but Aspen Icarus extends these valve trim specifications to apply to gate, globe
and check valves. Aspen Icarus has implemented a subset of the specification based
on the data available. The table below provides a summary of the differences
between the trim choices. Please refer to the specification for further information.
Definition of Aspen Icarus Valve Trim Specifications
API-600 Trim Number Trim Definition Comments
TRIM 01 F6 Nominal Trim Default trim for all Carbon Steel

Gate, Globe and Check valves
TRIM 02 SS 304 Trim Default Trim for all SS Gate,

Globe and Check Valves
TRIM 05 Hard Faced Trim Cobalt-chromium alloy seats
TRIM 08 F6 and Hard Faced
TRIM 09 Monel Trim Default for Monel valves
TRIM 10 SS 316 Trim Default for SS 316 Valves
TRIM 12 SS316 Trim + Hard faced
Note that selecting a trim that has a lower number than the default trim for that
valve body material will be ignored (e.g., selecting TRIM 01 for a Monel valve is not
valid, you must select TRIM 09,10,12). Also, these specs do not apply to control
valves.
Contact Aspen Icarus if you are interested in working with us to extend the list of
choices to address your requirements.

19 Civil

Civil Plant Bulks
Foundation Types
Typical Structure Live Loads
Soil Types
Specifying Seismic Data
Specifying Wind Loads
How Icarus Calculates Wind Load and Seismic Shear
Example of Equipment Foundation Design
Example of Pile Foundation for an Equipment
19 Civil - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 19-1

Civil Plant Bulks
Civil plant bulk items include concrete tanks, foundations and structures.
ABVGR TANK
Concrete tanks: above grade, circular/rectangular
Shape symbol:
Inside length or diameter:
Enter length for rectangular tanks or diameter for cylindrical tanks.
Inside width: Enter length for rectangular tanks, leave blank for cylindrical tanks.
Fluid density: Default: *62.4* PCF [*1,000* KG/M3]
Foundation thickness: Min: 4.0 INCHES [100 MM]
Wall thickness top: Min: 4.0 INCHES [100 MM]
Wall thickness bottom: Min: 4.0 INCHES [100 MM]
Soil type: See “Soil Types” later in this chapter.
BELGR TANK
Concrete tanks: below grade, circular/rectangular
Shape symbol:
Inside length or diameter:
Enter length for rectangular tanks or diameter for cylindrical tanks.
Inside width:
Enter length for rectangular tanks, leave blank for cylindrical tanks.
Fluid density:
Default: *62.4* PCF [*1,000* KG/M3]
Foundation thickness: Min: 4.0 INCHES [100 MM]
Wall thickness top: Min: 4.0 INCHES [100 MM]
Wall thickness bottom: Min: 4.0 INCHES [100 MM]
Height above ground: Enter height that wall projects above grade. Default: Top flush with
grade *0.0*.
Soil type:
See “Soil Types” later in this chapter. Include allowance (material and labor) for shoring if soil
type is SAND or poorer; full exposed surface and depth is shored. No equipment rental
included.
CONCRETE
Concrete foundations, structures: 18 types (see Foundation Types later in this chapter)
Various types of concrete items. Material quantities are per item.
If using Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, see Aspen Capital Cost Estimator User’s Guide, Chapter
4, “Defining Report Groups, Areas, and Project Components,” for information on customizing
19-2 19 Civil
foundation data by using an external file to define foundation quantities, man-hours, and
costs.
Installation option
[Blank} - Standard Item and Installation
SPAR - Spare - reduced installation bulks
WHSP - Warehouse spare - no engin./procur/installation
SUPP - Supplied by owner - no equipment cost required
EXIS - Existing - no equipment cost or civil required
DEML - Demolition of component and installation bulks
(Note: for foundations using piers, the piers are not counted in the demolition.)
Concrete quantity:
Enter design quantity, overpour will be added based on item type.
Foundation type:
See “Foundation Types” later in this chapter.
Excavation quantity: Default: Excavation, formwork and rebar based on concrete quantity
and type.
Rebar quantity:
Default: Excavation, formwork and rebar based on concrete quantity and type.
Formwork quantity:
Default: Excavation, formwork and rebar based on concrete quantity and type.
Grout quantity:
Default: *0.0* CY [*0.0* M3]. Non-shrink grout.
Anchors and embedments:
Default: = 0 if grout = 0; determined from concrete quantity if external civil file exists, or else
determined from grout quantity.
Sealcoat or liner type:
SC - Sealcoat
GM - Standard geosynthetic membrane
C1 - Bentonite clay liner - 1 membrane
C2 - Bentonite clay liner - 2 membranes
*NO* - No sealcoat or membrane liner
Sealcoat or liner area:
Default 0.0 SY
Membrane thickness:
Default 0.060 INCHES [1.50 MM]; Min: 0.020 INCHES [0.500 MM]; Max: 0.120 [3.0 MM]
How Icarus Calculates the foundation footprint surface area.

Convert to a square of equivalent size.
• Excavated footprint = equivalent square + allowance [Width] for formwork.
• Depth of footing [to the frostline] in your Project Civil Design Basis + 1 FOOT
• Blinding slab covers the footprint of the equivalent-sized square.
Note: You can specify the excavation slope in the project and area level civil specs.
By default, Icarus calculates excavation slope based on soil type.
SCAFFOLD
Scaffold labor: erect, dismantle

Temporary tubular steel scaffold, rental excluded. Default plank area = L x W.
TRENCH
Installation option
[Blank} - Standard Item and InstallationSPAR - Spare - reduced installation bulks
Concrete drainage trench, grate cover
Average invert depth:
Trench width:
Grating type:
FG Fibergrate
S2 1/8 IN [3 MM] SS slipnot plate
CS 1 IN x 3/16 IN [25 MM x 5 MM] CS welded bar
CM 1 1/4 IN x 3/16 IN [32 MM x 5 MM] CS Welded Bar
CH 1 1/2 IN x 3/16 IN [38 MM x 5 MM] CS welded bar
CV 2.0 IN x 3/16 IN [50 MM x 5 MM] CS welded bar
C2 1/8 IN [3 MM] CS checker plate
AS 1 IN x 3/16 IN [25 MM x 5 MM] AL welded bar
AH 1.5 IN X 3/16 IN [38 MM X 5 MM] AL welded bar
AV 2.0 IN x 3/16 IN [50 MM x 5 MM] AL welded bar
19-4 19 Civil
CONTAINMNT
Tank containment with concrete paving and surrounding wall with coating
Depth of paving:
Wall height:
Default: *3* FEET [*0.900* M]
Wall thickness:
Number of stairways:
Access stairway over wall. Default: *2*.
Sealcoat option:
Default: *YES*
YES - Concrete sealer coating required
NO - No sealer coating
DIKE MEMBR
Tank containment with diked area and geomembrane

Contained length:
Length, width and depth of diked area.
Contained width:
Length, width and depth of diked area.
Contained depth:
Length, width and depth of diked area. Default: *6* FEET [*1.80* M]
Imported fill depth:
Imported fill for membrane bedding and/or protective cover. Default: *12* INCHES [*300*
MM]
Unit cost of fill:
Imported fill for membrane bedding and/or protective cover. Default: *0.0* currency/CY
[*0.0* currency/M3]
Membrane thickness:
Range: 0.020 - 0.120 INCHES [0.500 - 300 MM]; Default: *0.060* INCHES [*1.50* MM]
Membrane liner type:
*GM* - Standard geosynthetic membrane liner
C1 - Bentonite clay liner - 1 membrane
C2 - Bentonite clay liner - 2 membrane sandwich
NO - No geosynthetic membrane liner
Width at top of dike:
Default: 6 FT [1.8 M]
Width at bottom of dike:
Default: 18 FT [5.5 M]
YARD PIPE
Above grade or buried yard piping

See Chapter 18, “Piping”
PIPE
Above grade or buried piping

HDPE
High density polyethylene pipe, fusion bonded

RCON PIPE
Buried concrete pipe

BUILDING
Building
See Chapter 26, “Buildings”
LINING
Organic, metallic, abrasion resist. lining

Material:
*EPLCS* - Epoxt resin lining
ASRSN - Asphalt resin lining
PHRSN - Phenolic resin lining
PVDF - Kynar sheet lining
TFELS - Teflon sheet lining
BUTYL - Butyle rubber sheet 1/4 INCH [6 MM]
NATRB - Natural rubber sheet 1/4 INCH [6 MM]
NITRL - Nitrile rubber sheet 1/4 INCH [6 MM]
HYPLN - Hypalon rubber sheet 1/4 INCH [6 MM]
NEPNE - Neoprene sheet 1/4 INCH [6 MM]
CLEAD - Chemical lead 16 PSF [80 KG/M2]
I-ZN - Inorganic zinc coat 3 MIL [0.08 MM]
ZNMZL - Flame sprayed zinc 8 MIL [0.20 MM]
CERML - Ceramic liner, light abrasion and impact
CERMM - Ceramic liner, med. abrasion, light impact
CERMH - Ceramic liner, hvy. abrasion, light impact
19-6 19 Civil
CERMV - Ceramic liner, hvy. abrasion, heavy impact
ABRPL - Abrasion resistant plate 1 INCH [25 MM]
REPRB - Replaceable rubber lining 1 INCH [25 MM]
LS304 - Replaceable SS304 plate 1 INCH [25 MM]
LS316 - Replaceable SS316 plate 1 INCH [25 MM]
Lining adjustment: *4.00*; MIN: 1.00; MAX: 10.0; Adjustment: 1=large flat area, 4=typical;
10=small obstructed area, congested space
PIPE RACK
Pipe rack
See Chapter 20, “Steel.”
BCIVPIPE SUPPT
Tee or bent type pipe sleepers

See Chapter 20, “Steel.”
OPN CON ST
Open Concrete Structure

Precast or Cast-in-place concrete open structure. The default structure type is Precast.
Structure can have combination of grating and concrete floor slab. In Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator, you can load equipment into an open structure by assigning the structure and the
equipment the same Structure Tag Number. See chapter 20, "Open Steel Structure".
Concrete structure to support with the option of cast-in-place or precast structure.
Includes columns, beams, floor slab, grating, siding, handrail and toeplates, stairways,
lighting, electrical panelboard and supply wiring/conduit.
The number of levels, if not specified is determined from the total height and a level-to-level
spacing of 15 FEET [4.5 M].
The bay span and bay width represent the typical column spacing and is used to determine the
number of columns and column load.
You can load equipment into an open structure by assigning the structure and the equipment,
the same User Tage Number (Refer Open steel structure)
Number of Floors:
Default: based on structure height and approximate floor height of 15 FEET [4.5M]
Distributed Load per Level:
Default: 300 PSF [14 KN/M2]
Structure Type:
* PREC * - Precast concrete structure
CONC - Cast-in-place concrete structure
Concrete Type:
Default: as specified in unit area civil specs.
Bay span: Default: 20-25 FEET [6-7.6 M]
Bay width: Default: 20-25 FEET [6-7.6 M]

Default: 1 + 1 per 5000 SF [500 M2] of area per floor
Floor slab percent of area: Default: 75
Floor slab thickness: Concrete slab thickness.
Default: If not specified, system calculates based on span and loading.
Floor grate - percent of area: Default: 0
Grating type:
Default: grating type from area steel specs
Siding per wall area: Default: 0
Siding type:
* CORR * - Corrugated siding
NSUL - insulated siding
Wind Force Adjustment:
Additional adjustment for wind force specified in project civil design specs. Default: 1
Seismic Force Adjustment:
Additional adjustment for seismic force specified in project civil design specs. Default: 1
Number of general receptacles:
Number of weld receptacles:
Note: There is an extra 25 ft of cable added for each additional welding receptacle.
19-8 19 Civil
Foundation Types
Foundation Types
Type Symbol Type Description
1 OCT+PROJ Octagon Slabs and Piers with Projection.
Foundation Typical Application
2 OCTAGONL Octagon Slabs and Piers without Projection.
3 PAVING Area Paving.
4 MASSPOUR Mass Pours - Large Mats, Pile Caps, and Other

Shapes - 25 CY [19 M3] minimum.

Foundation Types
5 SM BLOCK Small Blocks - Pumps, Compressors, 3 CY [2.3 M3]

or less.
6 LG BLOCK Large Blocks - Large Compressors, Turbines 3-25

CY [2.3-1.9 M3].
7 PILE CAPS Pile Caps - 5 CY [3.8 M3] or less.
8 CONDUIT Conduit Envelope.
19-10 19 Civil
Foundation Types
9 RING Circular Ring Foundation - For Large Tanks.
10 BASIN Basins.
11 EL SLAB Elevated Slab.
12 COLM/BM Columns and Beams.

Foundation Types
13 WALL Wall and Wall Footings.
14 GRIND BM Grade Beam.
15 PIER Piers.
16 FOOTING Column Footings, Sleepers.
19-12 19 Civil
Foundation Types
17 BOX Valve Boxes, Manholes etc.
18 SLAB GRB Slab on grade.

Typical Structure Live Loads
Typical Distributed Remarks

Structure Loads
PSF [KB/M2]
50.0 2.5 Minimum possible design loading.
150.0 7.0 Mostly access and platform areas, minor equipment

support and stairways
300.0 14.0 Designed for average elevated equipment supports,

platform areas, and stairways; open construction used
for most of the structure.
450.0 21.0 Designed for heavy equipment supports, crane or

catalyst loading structures, some covered construction
(metal siding for potential wind loads), and outside
freight.
600.0 28.0 Elevators (lifts); equipment, cranes, elevators (lifts) not

included.
19-14 19 Civil
Soil Types
Soil Type
Soil Type Symbol Soil Loading Soil Density
PSF KN/M2 PCF KG/M

3
Soft dry clay in thick beds SOFT CLAY 2000 100 60 960
Firm dry clay FIRM CLAY 4000 200 70 1120
Wet Sand WET SAND 4000 200 120 1920
Sand mixed with dry clay SAND+CLAY 4000 200 85 1360
Dry compact sand DRY SAND 6000 300 100 1600
Coarse compact sand SAND 8000 400 90 1440
Compact gravel GRAVEL 12000 600 95 1520
Soft friable rock or shale formation SOFT ROCK 16000 800 105 1680
Hardpan or compact sandstone HARDPAN 20000 1000 106 1700

beds
Medium rock or granite formation MED-ROCK 30000 1400 108 1730
Hard rock formation HARD ROCK 80000 3800 110 1760

Specifying Seismic Data
There are four different ways to specify seismic data. Because the system actually
uses horizontal acceleration (measured in g: 0.17 means 17% of "g") to get the
seismic load, the most accurate way of specifying your seismic design requirements
is to specify the acceleration value to be designed for in the Horizontal
acceleration field. Entering Mercalli Number or UBC Zone is less accurate because it
forces the system to estimate acceleration using the following table.
UBC Zone Mercalli number Acceleration (g)
0 1,2,3,4 0.017
1 5,6 0.075
2A (A) 0.15
2B (2) 7 0.20
3 8 0.30
4 9,10,11,12 0.40
Using the Ss and S1 parameters provides very accurate seismic data as well, which
you can then tweak if you want using the Horizontal acceleration field.
Important: Because Icarus provides four methods of specifying seismic data, it is

important to note the hierarchy of the methods.
1 Horizontal acceleration (g)
2 UBC zone
3 Mercalli number
4 Ss
5 S1
Thus, for example, the SS and SS1 parameters is used only if the Horizontal
acceleration (g), UBC number and Mercalli zone fields are blank.
Using the Ss and S1 parameters to specify seismic

data
Ss parameter:
• definition: the Mapped Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCE) ground motion of
0.2 sec Spectral Response Acceleration (5% of Critical Damping)
• the Ss parameter is location specific and is determined from a seismic ground
motion map including in the ASCE 7 Standards
• see http://earthquake.usgs.gov/hazards/designmaps for online resources that
will provide the value for the Ss parameter based on the version of ASCE 7 and
the location’s latitude/longitude.
The Ss parameter’s default is based on the project’s country base as shown below:
• US Country Base, S_s = 0.09
19-16 19 Civil
• UK Country Base, S_s = 0.29
• JP Country Base, S_s = 1.87
• EU Country Base, S_s = 0.14
• ME Country Base, S_s = 0.11
S1 parameter:
• definition: the Mapped Maximum Considered Earthquake (MCE) ground motion of
1.0 sec Spectral Response Acceleration (5% of Critical Damping)
• the S1 parameter is location specific and is determined from a seismic ground
motion map including in the ASCE 7 Standards
• see http://earthquake.usgs.gov/hazards/designmaps for online resources that
will provide the value for the S1 parameter based on the version of ASCE 7 and
the location’s latitude/longitude.
The S1 parameter’s default is based on the project’s country base as shown below:
• US Country Base, S_1 = 0.04
• UK Country Base, S_1 = 0.11
• JP Country Base, S_1 = 0.75
• EU Country Base, S_1 = 0.06
• ME Country Base, S_1 = 0.04
In order to determine the seismic ground acceleration for a given location, the ASCE
7 standards require the following parameters:
• Occupancy/Risk Category
• Soil Type
• Ss
• S1
Icarus provides country-based defaults for the Soil Type, Ss and S1 parameters. The
Occupancy/Risk Category default is III. But these seismic parameters can vary
significantly with in a given country. Therefore, once the site location is known, it is
very important to update the seismic parameters for accurate estimation purposes.
To obtain accurate location-specific parameters:

1 Browse to the internet site: http://earthquake.usgs.gov/hazards/designmaps/.
2 Use one of the following three tools provided at the site:
o Java Ground Motion Parameter Calculator
Use this application to look up Ss and S1 in accordance with ASCE 7-05. This
application is applicable only to U.S. states and territories.
o U.S. Seismic DesignMaps Web Application
Use this application to look up Ss and S1 in accordance with ASCE 7-10. This
application is applicable only to U.S. states and territories.
o Worldwide Seismic DesignMaps Web Application
Use this application to look up Ss and S1 in areas outside the U.S. states and
territories. This data is obtained from the Global Seismic Hazard Assessment
Program (GSHAP). You can use this data with ASCE 7-05 or ASCE 7-10.

Specifying Wind Loads
The current wind load design complies with ASCE 7-05. It assumes an importance
factor of 1.15, which corresponds with Occupancy Category III, the default value.
You can choose the Occupancy category at the project and area levels by using the
ASCE 7 Occupancy/Risk Category drop-down list. The Icarus wind design
calculations determine the importance factor based on the selected category.
Once you have selected the appropriate version of ASCE 7 and the Occupancy/Risk
Category that is suitable for the project, you should specify the wind data input fields
as well, unless you deem the default values are appropriate for your project.
The Japan location index, the Wind force adjustment, and the Wind exposure
category are not dependent on the version of ASCE 7 selected. However, it is very
important to specify either the Wind velocity or the Wind load according to either
ASCE 7-05 or ASCE 7-10. Both versions of ASCE 7 include wind speed maps, but the
wind velocity and selection criteria vary.
ASCE 7-05 uses wind speed maps that are based on nominal 3-second guest speeds
in miles per hour at 33 feet above ground for Exposure C category. If you specify an
alternative exposure category, Icarus adjusts the wind load calculations as
necessary.
ASCE 7-10 uses wind speed maps that are also based on nominal 3-second gust
wind speeds in miles per hour at 33 feet above ground for Exposure C category.
However, the appropriate map must be chosen based on the Occupancy Category.
Also, the wind velocities are higher than those found in the ASCE 7-05 standard.
Icarus does NOT adjust the wind velocity based on the drop-down selection of the
ASCE 7 Occupancy/Risk Category. If you specify an alternative exposure category,
Icarus adjusts the wind load calculations as necessary.
The Applied Technology Council provides a Wind Speed Web Site that provides
site-specific wind speeds based on the site’s latitude and longitude at
http://atcouncil.org/windspeed/. However, wind speeds are available only for
U.S. states and territories.
19-18 19 Civil
How Icarus Calculates Wind Load and
Seismic Shear
1) Wind Velocity
The Wind Velocity to be entered is the Basic Wind Speed which is the 3-second gust
speed at 33 ft (10m) above ground. Icarus calculates the Wind Load profile along the
height based on the ASCE Standard: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other
Structures. Icarus uses a default Wind Exposure C and a Wind Velocity of 100 MPH
[160 KMPH] at 33', which corresponds to a Wind load (velocity pressure qz) of 30
PSF.
Note: You can enter the Wind load directly in the Wind load field.
qz = 0.00256 Kz Kzt V * V * I (lb/sq ft)
You can select Wind exposure [B, C, D] and Default Wind Exposure is C. Default
Kzt=1.0 and Importance factor I=1.15.
For Exposure "C", Kz=1.0 at 33'
For V = 100 MPH and Exposure "C"
qz=0.00256*1.0*1.0*100*100*1.15 = 29.5 PSF at 33': this is the default pressure
(30 PSF)
Icarus develops the Wind profile along the height as in the code and then calculate
the wind load along the height.
2) Use of Wind Force Adjustment (default=1.0)
If you want to make adjustments to the wind load or Kzt*I, it could be entered in
Wind Force adjustment as a factor.
Icarus also uses:
Gust effect factor (Gf) = 1.0 for exposure C (not 0.85)
Cf = 0.7 for Vertical Vessels and 1.4 for structures
Additional Icarus factor: 1.10
Adjusted Pressure at 33' = qz* Cf* windadj*1.10
3) Seismic acceleration (g) and Seismic Force Adjustment (default=1.0)
Icarus use the input value of the Horizontal acceleration field (measured in g:
0.17 means 17% of "g") directly to get the Seismic Shear. In the case of equipment,
Icarus uses an additional factor of 1.1, Icarus does not make any other adjustments.
Seismic Shear = Operating weight of Equipment * 1.10 * Seismic acceleration *
SeismicForceAdjustment.
Note: When the Japan location index field is specified with a Japanese country
base, a Japanese wind design is performed that is independent of the ASCE 7 wind
design.

Example of Equipment Foundation Design
Vessel Dia. = 8' Height = 20' Allowable soil pressure = 4000 psf, Wind speed =100
MPH
System Calculations:
Wt of Vessel = 9300 lbs
Moment due to wind = 124031 lb-ft
Top Area reqd. = 0.828*(Dia + 2.0)**2 = 0.828*10*10 = 82.8 sf
frost ht = 4.0 ft
self wt of footing = top area * (frost+1) * 150.0 = 82.8*5.0*150.0 = 62100 lbs
Total Weight = 9300 + 62100 = 71400 lbs
eccentricity = 124031/71400 = 1.737'
For the example above, and soil pressure, we have Type 2 footing, c.s. area = 82.8
is sufficient.
This can be verified if we use the formula for square footing:
71400/(B**2) + 124031/(B**3 /6) = 4000 Area = B*B
Concrete = 82.8* (frost+1)/27 = 15.33 CY
For Type 2 Foundation:
Contact Surface formwork = 15.0 sf/cy * 15.33 cy = 230 sf
Back-up-lumber = 30.0 BF/cy * 15.33 cy = 460 BF
Rebar quantity = 70 #/cy * 15.33 cy /2000 = 0.56 Tons
Manhours:
(need some adjustment based on the quantity unless external file is used)
Formwork Fabrication = 0.08 mh /sf * 230 sf = 18*adj. = 22
Formwork Installation = (0.30*0.83)*230 = 57*adj. = 35
Formwork Strip & Clean = (0.30*0.17)*230 = 12*adj. = 12
Rebar Installation = 16.0/Ton * 0.56 = 9*adj.= 14
Pour & Finish Concrete = 2.0/CY * 15.33 = 30.66*adj = 30
19-20 19 Civil
Example of Pile Foundation for an
Equipment
This is a sample calculation:
Process equipment: VT CYLINDER
Vessel Diameter = 12 feet Height = 20 feet
Wind Speed = 100 MPH
From Area Civil Specs for pile design:
Footing depth (frost height) = 4 feet
Pile Design Requirement = PILE; Pile Type = HP; Compressive Capacity=90 tons;
Tensile capacity = 45 tons;
Driven Depth = 60 feet; Pile Spacing = 4 feet; shear capacity = 2 tons
Equipment Loading from System:
Wt of Vessel = 20800 lbs
Wind Force = 12695 lbs
Moment due to wind = 260237 lb-ft
base Area = 0.828*(Dia + 2.0)**2 = 0.828*14*14 = 162.288 sf
Weight of Concrete = 133888 lbs
D.L. with vessel empty = Weight of Vessel+Weight of Concrete +Weight of Soil (if
there is projection) = 20800+133888+0 = 154688 lbs
Weight of water (we assume 50% full for pile design) = 70573 lbs
Maximum Weight = Empty weight + weight of Water = 154688+70573 = 225261 lbs
Radius of Pile Group = (diameter - 1)/2.0 = 5.5 ft
Minimum number of Piles = 4 (For individual foundations like piperack, open steel
the minimum is 2 per column)
Number of piles based on shear = (12695/2000) tons / 2tons= 4
Max. Number of piles possible based on spacing = 8
Start with 4 piles and then calculate the maximum load per pile based on the Vertical
Load and Moment (for compression we use the Maximum weight, and for Tension we
use the weight without water, the base moment here is the moment due to wind).
Checks whether load per pile is less than allowable load. If it requires more than 8
piles, we try to provide an inner circle of piles.
Number of piles required in this case = 4

20 Steel

Steel Plant Bulks
How ICARUS Generates the Number of Column Struts
20 Steel - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 20-1

Steel Plant Bulks
Steel plant bulks include structures, assemblies and components.
OPN STL ST
Open steel structure: columns/girders/beams/X-brace, grate, stairs
Includes columns, girders, beams, cross-bracing, grating and column footings, handrail and
toeplates, and stairways. Stairways are “through-going,” meaning each one extends from the
top-most floor level down to the grate.
The default design is bolted frame, for which bolted connections are provided. The design is
changed to rigid frame if the user chooses FEM or F as the Analysis Type, in which case a rigid
connection is provided.
The number of levels, if not specified, is determined from the total height and a level-to-level
spacing of 15 FEET [4.5 M], rounded to the nearest whole number; minimum of one level.
The bay span and width represent the typical column spacing and is used to determine the
number of columns and column load. The bay span is used to size the support beams, and bay
width is used to size the main girders connecting to the columns.
The maximum number of open steel structures in an area is 10.
In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, you can load equipment into an open steel structure by
assigning the structure and the equipment the same Structure Tag Number. The structure
must be added to the area before the equipment, or else the system will generate an error.
However, when the structures are evaluated, they appear at the end of the area's detailed
design datasheet, equipment list, and detailed bulks. The system evaluates them last because
the equipment that goes in the structures must be evaluated first before their calculated
weights are added to the structure's loading.
The flow chart shows the logic for hanging equipment in steel structures.
Number of floors:
Default: based on structure height and approximate floor height of 15 FEET [4.5 M].
Distributed load per level:
Default: *300* PSF [*14.0* KN/M2]
Bay span:
Bay dimensions determine column spacing.
Default: 20-25 FEET [6-7.6 M] each way.
Bay width:
Bay dimensions determine column spacing.
Default: 20-25 FEET [6-7.6 M] each way.
Default: 1 + 1 per 5,000 SF [500 M2] of area per floor.
Structural steel analysis:
S - Simplified stress analysis
F - 2D finite element rigid frame analysis (required if a rigid frame analysis with deflection
check is desired)
Column base option:
FIXED - Rigid connection at column base.
PINNED* - Pinned connection at column base.
Floor grates per area:
Default: *75*
Grating type:
20-2 20 Steel
See “Grating Types” later in this chapter.
Siding per wall area:
Default: 0%; Min.: 0%; Max:100%
Siding type:
*CORR* - corrugated siding
INSUL - insulated siding
Slab thickness: Default: *4* INCHES [*100 MM]; Min: 2 INCHES [50 MM]; Max: 8 INCHES.
Concrete slab thickness over formed shell deck, applicable if slab% area > 0.
Floor slab percent of area: Default: 0%; Min:0%; Max: 100%. Total of floor slab% area
and floor grate% area must not be more than 100%.

PIPE RACK
Steel pipe rack: columns, beams, X-brace, catwalk, stairs, ladders
Includes columns, lateral and longitudinal members, cross-bracing, column footings,
catwalks, handrail and toeplates, stairs, and ladders (caged if over 10 FEET [3 M]).
Main bents have rigid connections between beams and columns at odd numbered
levels. Otherwise all joints are pinned connections. Column base may be rigid or
pinned connection. Piping loads are defined as distributed load per level. An air
cooler load can be defined above top level if required. Wide racks may require a third
column at the midpoint of the beams in each bent. The height to the first level is
defined separately since it is usually bigger than the height between levels which is
assumed to be uniform. (A sketch of a typical pipe rack is located on the following
page.)
Width: *20* FEET [*6.0* M] Max 120 FEET[36M]
Height: *20* FEET [*6.0* M] Max 60 FEET[18M]
Number of levels: *1*
Height to 1st level:
*12.0* FEET; MIN: 4.00 FEET; MAX: 40 FEET[12M]
Pipe rack type:
*STEEL* - Steel piperack with steel columns below the first level of the piperack.
STEEL-C: Steel piperack with cast-in-place concrete columns below the first level of the
piperack.
STEEL-P: Steel piperack with pre-cast concrete columns below the first level of the piperack.
CONC-S - Concrete frame and steel sheets.
CONC-P - Concrete frame and precast conc. struts
PRECAST - All precast concrete piperack
Structural steel analysis:
S - Simplified stress analysis
F - 2D finite element rigid frame analysis
Main bent spacing:
Default: *20.0* FEET
Longitudinal column spacing along rack.
Third column option:
Option is for small racks. Racks wider than 40 FEET [12 M] get three column rows.
YES - Third column now required (2 bay rack)
NO - No third column (1 bay rack)
Column base option:
FIXED - Rigid connection at column base.
*PINNED* - Pinned connection at column base.
Distributed load per level:
*50* PSF [*2.5* KN/M2]
Air cooler loading: *0.0*
Air cool distributed load above top rack level, if any.
Catwalk width: *4.0* FEET [*1.2* M]
Number of catwalks: *1* per level
Number of ladders:
*1* per 80 FEET [25 M] of length; MIN: 2
Number of stairways: Default: *0*
No. of braced bays:
Number of braced bays along rack length. *2* per 120 FEET [36M]; MIN: 0.
20-4 20 Steel
Number of horiz. bracing levels:
Number of horizontal bracing levels in braced bay.
Default is one bracing level per 20 FT [6 M] of piperack height.
Beam struts per column line:
Number of longitudinal struts per column.
*1* per each two beam levels. See figure on page 30-7 for explanation.
Beam struts per pipe level:
Number of longitudinal struts/beam per level/bay.
Default: *0* or, if beam length is greater than 24 FEET [7 M], *1*
Exclude end bent:
Exclude end bents if this is a segment of a rack that is part of a longer rack.
*NO* - Do not exclude end bents.
ONE - Exclude one end bent.
TWO - Exclude two end bents.
Minimum beam or column width:
*12.0* INCHES [*304* MM]
For concrete pipe rack only, default is calculated by the system. If not, default is 12.0 INCHES.
Concrete type:
For concrete pipe rack only, default is area civil data for concrete strength and cost.
2 - Standard concrete (Type B)
3 - Higher grade concrete (Type C)
4 - Chemical resistant concrete (Type D)
Wind Force Adjustment
Min 0.5 Max 2 Default 1
Seismic Force Adjustment
Description Additional adjustment for seismic force specified in project civil design specs.
Min 0.5 Max 2 Default 1
Beam, strut length for air cooler, feet [m]
Applicable only for piperack with aircooler. Default: system calculated
Top level grate area - aircooler, feet [m]
Applicable only for piperack with aircooler. Default: 0
Length Handrail and Toeplate:
Applicable only for piperack with aircooler. Default: 0 FEET [M]
Notes:
• The "Air cooler loading" field must be specified on the pipe rack form.
• When both fields are specified, a 'HANDRAIL' line item is added to the estimate with a
quantity matching the specified value.
Grating type:
See “Grating Types” later in this chapter.
Foundation type (Selection field):
Option 1: TYP – Typical spread footing foundation (Default option)
Option 2: PIER – Round tube formed pier foundation (For 'STEEL' pipe rack types only)
Concrete pier diameter, inches [mm]:
(For 'STEEL' pipe rack types only)
Minimum: 12 inches [300 mm]
Maximum: 60 inches [1500 mm]
Pier drilled depth, feet [m]:

Minimum: Footing depth specified at the project/area level (i.e. frost depth)
Maximum: 20 feet [6 m]
Pier height above grade, feet [m]:
Minimum: 0 feet [0 m]
Maximum: 3 feet [1 m]
Default: 1 foot [0.33 m]
Structure location X-coordinate, feet [m]
Location of the X-coordinate within the structure
Structure location Y-coordinate, feet [m]
Location of the Y-coordinate within the structure
Structure location Z-coordinate, feet [m]
Location of the Z-coordinate within the structure
Structure symbol shape
Symbol for the structure
Sketch of a Typical Pipe Rack
20-6 20 Steel
How ICARUS Generates the Number of Column Struts
System Generated Sets:
User-Entered Sets:

Default Number of Column Struts
If a pipe rack has the default number of levels (1), the default number of column
struts is also 1. For each additional two levels, the default number of column struts
grows by 2; therefore, the default number of column struts may best be understood
as “1 per each 2 beam level”.
* User-entered values override system-generated values.
PIPE TRUSS
Pipe Truss Bridge
A truss structure with multiple levels which can span longer areas. Wide Flange shapes are
used for main members.
Includes columns, lateral members, longitudinal chord members, bracings and column footing.
(A sketch of a typical pipe bridge is located on the following page)
Truss Width:
Truss Height:
Levels between top and bottom chord:
Default: 0
Height to bottom chord:
Number of bents:
Default: 2 (single span truss) Specify 3 bents for 2 equal spans, 4 bents for three equal spans.
2 columns are provided for each bent.
Distrib. Load/Level:
Default: 50 PSF [2.4 KN/M2]
Bay Length:
Truss length determine bay length
Default: Around 8 FEET [2.4 M]
Wind Force Adjustment:
Default: 1
Seismic Force Adjustment:
Default: 1
20-8 20 Steel
Truss height
Bent 1
Bent ‘N-1’
Bent ‘N’
Number of bents, N Min:2 Max:4.
Three bents Shown (N=3)
PIPE SUPPT
Pipe supports/sleepers: bent or tee, just above grade
Series of individual steel pipe supports for long runs of pipe just above grade. The TEE type
has one post with a concrete footing; the BENT type has two posts with concrete footings.
CONS uses round concrete columns with a steel wide flange on top connecting the columns.
Round form tubes are used as formwork for the concrete columns. Supports using pier type
foundations with Tees or Bents (PBNT, PTEE and PB+T) allow height and width dimension
inputs specific to those support types.
Installation option
[Blank] - Standard Item and Installation
SPAR - Spare - reduced installation bulks
Height
Pipe sleeper height above grade. For support types PBNT and PB+T, specify steel bent height
from top of concrete pier. For support type PTEE, specify steel tee height from top of concrete
pier.
Width
Pipe sleeper width. For support types PBNT and PB+T, specify steel bent width. For support
type PTEE, specify steel tee width.
Support types:
TEE - 1 steel post with beam
BENT - 2 steel posts with beam
CONT - Concrete tee

CONS - 2 concrete columns with steel beam
PIER - Concrete pier foundation only
PBNT - Concrete pier foundation with steel bent
PTEE - Concrete pier foundation with steel tee
PB+T - Concrete pier foundation with steel bent and tee
The concrete sleepers consist of a concrete pier foundation (see foundation type 15, PIER in
the Icarus Reference Guide) with an embedded steel plate on the top surface of the stem wall.
A multi-level sleeper system is constructed by adding a structural steel bent (two posts and
one beam), tee (one post and one beam), or a combination bent and tee (two posts and two
beams) to the concrete sleeper
Concrete column diameter
For support type CONS only. Default: system calculated.
Concrete pier height above grade
For support types PBNT, PTEE, and PB+T only. Use the req'd height field to specify PIER height
above grade.
Concrete pier width
For support types PBNT, PTEE, and PB+T only. Use the req'd width field to specify PIER width.
Tee height (PB+T support type)
For support type PB+T only. Specify steel tee height from top of concrete pier.
Tee width (PB+T support type)
For support type PB+T only. Specify steel tee width.
20-10 20 Steel
Pier Foundation Support Types
The PIER support type is a concrete pier foundation without additional steel pipe supports
(i.e. bent or tee). The height and width fields are required inputs and in this case represent
the pier height above grade and pier width. The pier height and pier width fields are not
required for the PIER support type and can be used for documentation purposes.

The PBNT support type is a concrete pier foundation with a steel bent attached to the top of
the stem wall. The height and width fields specify the height and width of the steel bent. The
concrete pier height and pier width fields are required.
20-12 20 Steel
The PTEE support type is a concrete pier foundation with a steel tee attached to the top of the
stem wall. The height and width fields specify the height and width of the steel tee. The
concrete pier height and pier width fields are required.

The PB+T support type is a concrete pier foundation with a a steel bent and tee combination
attached to the top of the stem wall. The height and width fields specify the height and width
of the steel bent. The tee height and width fields specify the height and width of the steel tee.
The tee height and width fields are only applicable to the PB+T support type. The concrete pier
height and pier width fields are required.
20-14 20 Steel
MILL BLDG
Multiple-bay steel mill building: structural steel, siding
Structural steel, crane beams and rails, elevated grate floors, corrugated or insulated exterior
if applicable, foundations, lighting and electrical panelboard and supply wiring/conduit.
The mill building model designs a frame that is specifically suited for a particular purpose —
multiple bays where overhead cranes carry materials along the length of the building. The
term “Bay” in this case refers to a portion of the building width.
The system assumes a cleared, level site; excavation is provided only for grade slab and
column footings. Other site work must be specified using Site Development.
Main column spacing:
Column spacing along the length of the building.
Siding per wall area:
Default: 100% roofing and specified% siding provided, except “0.0” input deletes both.
Siding type:
Default: *CORR*
CORR - Corrugated siding
INSUL - Insulated corrugated siding
Slab-on-grade thickness: Default: *12* INCHES [*300* MM]
Distributed load level: Default: *200* PSF [*10* KN/M2]
1st Section bay width: First bay type, describes one or more identical, adjacent bays.
1st Section bay height: First bay type, describes one or more identical, adjacent bays.
Number of bays 1st Section: First bay type, describes one or more identical, adjacent bays
Default: *1*
Number of elevated floors 1st Section:
First bay type, describes one or more identical, adjacent bays. Default: *0*
Crane capacity per bay 1st Section: Bay type 1: Load for struct., crane rail, etc.; crane
must be specified elsewhere. Default: *0.0* TONS [*0.0* TON]
Floor grate per area 1st Section: First bay type, describes one or more identical, adjacent
bays. Default: *100*
2nd Section bay width: Second bay type, describes one or more identical, adjacent bays.
2nd Section bay height: Second bay type, describes one or more identical, adjacent bays.
Number of bays 2nd Section: Second bay type, describes one or more identical, adjacent
bays. Default: *1*

Number elevated floors 2nd Section: Second bay type, describes one or more identical,
adjacent bays. Default: *0*
Crane capacity per bay 2nd Section: Bay type 2: Load for struct., crane rail, etc.; crane
Floor per area 2nd Section: Second bay type, describes one or more identical, adjacent
3rd Section bay width: Third bay type, describes one or more identical, adjacent bays.
3rd Section bay height: Third bay type, describes one or more identical, adjacent bays.
Number of bays 3rd Section: Third bay type, describes one or more identical, adjacent
bays. Default: *1*
Number of elevated floors 3rd Section: Third bay type, describes one or more identical,
adjacent bays. Default: *0*
Crane capacity per bay 3rd Section: Bay type 3: Load for struct., crane rail, etc.; crane
Floor grate per area 3rd Section: Third bay type, describes one or more identical, adjacent
PLATFORM
Elevated access platforms: columns/beams, rail, grate, ladder
Elevated access platform, with handrail, toeplate, grating, columns, civil foundations, lighting
and electrical.
Platform width: *6* FEET [*2* M]
Number of ladders: Default: *1*
Handrail percent: Default: *100*
Floor grate per area: Default: *100*
Grating: See “Grating Types” later in this chapter.
20-16 20 Steel
GALLERY
Steel gallery structure for pipe, conveyors, walkways
Gallery for piping, conveyors, elevated walkways, etc., footings, lighting and electrical
included. May be specified in combinations of three section types or as a single section type.
Gallery height:
Max: 15 FEET [4.5 M]; Default: *9.0* FEET [*2.75* M]
Distributed load:
Default: *100* PSF [*5.0* KN/M2]
Height grade section:
Grade section has this uniform, nominal height for entire length.
Default: *6.0* FEET [*2.0* M].
Length grade section:
Total length is sum of grade, slope and above-grade lengths. At least one is required.
Height slope section:
Slope section varies from grade section height to this designated height.
Length slope section:
Above grade height:
Above ground section varies from slope section height to this designated height.
Above grade length:
Gallery enclosure:
Default: *OPEN*

OPEN - No enclosure
ENCLOSED - Enclosed
Tower bent spacing:
Tower (bent) spacing applies to elevated sections only. Default: *80* FEET [*25* M].
Cantilever length:
Cantilever length may be specified only for the end of an elevated section. Default: *0* FEET
[*0* M].
Number of walkways: Default: *2*
Walkway width: Default: *54* INCHES [*2,370* MM]
TRNS TOWER
Conveyor transfer tower, square cross-section
Steel tower only; conveyors, hoppers and chutes must be specified elsewhere.
GRATE
Steel grate, less support steel
Grating: Default: *CS*. See “Grating Types” later in this chapter.
Length Handrail and Toeplate:
Feet - (only applicable for piperack with aircooler.)
Include toeplate:
If No, only handrail is estimated with item description, 'HANDRAIL W/O TOE PLATE'
LADDER
Steel ladders
Ladders greater than 10 FEET [3 M] are automatically caged.
Ladder Type:
Default: *CAGED*
CAGED - Caged ladder
NONE - Ladder without cage
STAIR
Steel stairs, with grate treads, handrail
MISC STEEL
Columns, beams, bracing, brackets
20-18 20 Steel
The steel member size is designated by its weight per foot of length. Steel item types are
columns, beams, bracing and brackets. Connections are included; the system increases the
cost by about 15% to account for connections.
Steel type:
COLUM - Column
BEAM - Beam
BRACE - Bracing
BRAKT - Bracket
FABR PLATE
Fabricated, lined, stiffened plate items for chutes, boxes, etc.
Fabricated stiffened steel plate items (e.g., boxes, chutes, hoods, skirts, etc.). One or more
replaceable abrasion resistant lining types may be specified over portions of the plate area.
Material:
Default: *CS*
CS - Carbon steel
SS304 - SS304
SS316 - SS316
Plate per area item:
Total area of plate excluding stiffeners.
Lining thickness Type 1:
Lining type 1: thickness may not be specified for ceramic linings; Default: *1.0* INCHES
[*25* MM].
Lining per plate area Type 1:
Lining type 1; Default: *100*
Lining material Type 1:
Lining type 1. See “Abrasion Resistant Linings; Replaceable” in Chapter 28.
[*25* MM].
Lining per plate area Type 2:
Lining type 2; Default: *0.0*
[*25* MM].
Lining per plate area Type 3: Lining type 3; Default: *0.0*
SIDING
Siding and roofing for steel structures
Siding girts and roof purlins are designated based on column spacing. Corrugated steel siding
(18 gauge) is provided with the option of 1 INCH [25 MM] insulation in sandwich panel.
Siding area:
Siding and/or roofing area is required. Default: *0.0* SF [*0.0* M2]
Roofing area:

Siding and/or roofing area is required. Default: *0.0 SF [*0.0* M2]
Main column spacing: Default: *20* FEET [*6* M]
Siding type:
Default: *CORR*
CORR - Corrugated siding
INSUL - Insulated corrugated siding
SAN PLATFM
Sanitary platform for equipment access
A polished, stainless steel platform built to sanitary standards, for example, without weld
crevices or surfaces that collect standing water.
Platform height:
MAX: 12.0 FEET [3.60 M]
Platform area:
Required to enter total platform or length and width for long platforms. If area is given, the
program calculates length and width as being the square root of area, and bases its design on
this information.
Platform length:
this information.
Platform width:
this information.
Platform design loading:
Default: *100* PSF [*5.00* KN/M2]
General platform design load for access/walkway areas.
Equipment percent area:
Percent of platform area that supports equipment load.
Equipment weight:
Must be entered for the program to calculate equipment access-sides.
Number of equipment access sides: *2*, MAX: 4.
Number of sides from which equipment accessed on platform.
Grating percent of area: *80.0*.
Grating type:
FIBER - Fibergrate 1.5 X 1.5 IN [40 X 40 MM]
SLIP 2 - 1/8 INCH [3 MM] SS304 slipnot plate
SLIP 3 - 3/16 INCH [5 MM] SS304 slipnot plate
*SLIP4* - 1/4 INCH [6 MM] SS304 slipnot plate
Number of stairways: *1.00*
Number of ladders: *0*
Number of columns
Length of handrail and toeplate: FEET [M]
20-20 20 Steel
TUBE STEEL
Tubular Steel Items
Application:
Onshore - Onshore application
*Offshore* - Offshore application
Note:
Onshore tubular steel items are allocated to COA 524 Tubular steel.
Offshore tubular steel items are allocated to COA 582 Offshore tubular steel.
The large diameter tube steel item is typically used in the construction of offshore jacket
structures. An application type field is available to choose between onshore or offshore
application.
Tube Material:
*A 36* - ASTM A36 Steel
2H-50 - API 2H Grade 50 Steel
GRBW - API 5L Grade B Steel
Tube Material Cost:
By default, the cost is system calculated.
Tube Type:
DIAG Member sloped in either the vertical or the horizontal plane
HORIZ Horizontally oriented member
VERT Vertically oriented member
JOINT Joint can (Typically API 2H-50 Steel)
LEG Jacket leg
PILE Jacket pile
Min: 3 IN [77 MM], Max: 72 IN [1800 MM]
Min: .0125 IN [4 MM], Max: 3 IN [77 MM]
Tube Length:
Min: > 0
Number of welds:
Min: 0 (Typically two fitup welds join a member to the joint cans.)
Include labor?:
By default, the labor man-hours and labor cost is included.
Notes:
a. Steel COAMODs 1 to 5 are applied depending on the member weight in lb/ft.
b. The following Steel SUBTYPEs are applied:
• 692 = DIAG
• 693 = HORIZ
• 694 = VERT
• 695 = JOINT
• 696 = LEG
• 697 = PILE
JACKET
Offshore Jacket
The offshore jacket structure supports shallow water E & P platforms. These jacket structures
are fabricated with large diameter tubular steel tube members.

Jacket designation:
*MAIN* Main jacket
AUX Auxiliary jacket
Number of legs:
3 Three-leg jacket
*4* Four-leg jacket
8 Eight-leg jacket
Jacket top length:
Min: >0
Max values:
Max length three-leg jacket = 31 FT [9.4 M]
Max length four-leg jacket = 40 FT [12.2 M]
Max length eight-leg jacket = 121 FT [36.8 M]
Jacket top width:
Min: >0
Max values:
Max width three-leg jacket = 31 FT [9.4 M]
Max width four- or eight-leg jacket = 46 FT [14 M]
Water depth:
Min: >30 FT [9.1 M]
Max values:
Max depth three- or four-leg jacket = 140 FT [42.6 M]
Max depth eight-leg jacket = 292 FT [89 M]
Pile driven depth:
Default: 315 FT [96 M]; Min = 0
Note: Use 0 to remove piling and grout costs.
Number of anodes:
Min = 0
Note: Use 0 to remove anodes.
Cost per anode:
Min: > 0
Jacket tube material:
*A 36* - ASTM A36 Steel
2H-50 - API 2H Grade 50 Steel
Jacket material cost:
Min: > 0, Default: System calculated
Joint tube material:
A 36 - ASTM A36 Steel
*2H-50* - API 2H Grade 50 Steel
Joint material cost:
Pile tube material:
A 36 - ASTM A36 Steel
*2H-50* - API 2H Grade 50 Steel
Pile material cost:
20-22 20 Steel
Grating Types
FG Fibergrate
CS 1 IN x 3/16 IN [25 MM x 5 MM] CS welded bar
CM 1 1/4 IN x 3/16 IN [32 MM x 5 MM] CS Welded Bar
CH 1 1/2 IN x 3/16 IN [38 MM x 5 MM] CS welded bar
CV 2.0 IN x 3/16 IN [50 MM x 5 MM] CS welded bar
AS 1 IN x 3/16 IN [25 MM x 5 MM] AL welded bar
AH 1.5 IN X 3/16 IN [38 MM X 5 MM] AL welded bar
AV 2.0 IN x 3/16 IN [50 MM x 5 MM] AL welded bar

21 Instrumentation

Instrumentation Plant Bulks
Sensor Loop Descriptions
Pressure (p)
Differential Pressure (DP)
Temperature (T)
Flow (F)
Level (L)
Analyzers (A)
Speed (S)
Motion (X): Axial, Radial, Vibration
Position (PN)
Weight (W)
Electrical Conductivity (C)
Hand (Manual Activation) (H)
Field Mounted Solenoid (SL)
Typical Pressure Instrument Process Hookup
Panel Action Descriptions
Panel Option Descriptions
Fisher Control Valve Information
Control Valve Options
Control Valve Configurations
Air Supply Piping
Remote Control Type
Transmitter Type
Overview of Instrumentation Report Details
Report Details for Analog/Electrical Instrumentation
Report Details for Analog/Electrical Pneumatic Instrumentation
Report Details for Digital/Electrical Instrumentation
21 Instrumentation - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 21-1

Report Details for Digital/Electrical Pneumatic Instrumentation
21-2 21 Instrumentation
Instrumentation Plant Bulks
CONDUIT
Conduit material: Default: *GALV*
GALV - Galvanized rigid steel conduit
EMT - Electrical mechanical tubing
AL - Aluminum
PVC - PVC plastic conduit
PBON - PVC coated rigid steel (plasti-bond)
PVCA - PVC coated aluminum
FRE - Fiberglass
Cable Size:
*14*, 12, 10 AWG; *1.5*, 2.5, 4.0 MM2.
Rigid conduit, galvanized steel, couplings, fittings and seals
Material:
Default: *GALV*
AL - Aluminum
FRE - Fiberglass
Conduit diameter:
Range: 0.5 - 6.0 INCHES [15 - 150 MM]
Number of fittings: Default: *0*
Number of conduit seals: Default: *0*
INST PANEL
Instrument panel, electronic/pneumatic

Panel type:
ELC - Electronic panel
PNU - Pneumatic panel
E/P- Combined electronic/pneumatic
INST TRAY
Instrument cable tray
Material:
*Galv*- Galvanized steel cable tray
FBRGL- Fiberglass cable tray
SS- Stainless steel cable tray
AL- Alumimum cable tray
Tray width:
Range: 6 - 36 INCHES [150 - 910 MM];
Default:
*18* INCHES [*450* MM]
Cable tray rung spacing:
Only for ladder type trays. Default: 9 INCHES [225 MM]; allowable rung spacing: 6, 9, 12
INCHES [150, 225, 300 MM].
Number of 90 degree bends:
Default: 0
Tray type:
L- Ladder tray
T- Trough tray
C- Trough tray with top cover
B- Trough tray with cover top and bottom
INST WIRE
Electronic signal wire: wire, armored wire, wire in conduit
Material:
Default: *IM*
IM - Insul., standard wire
ARMOR - IM with interlock armor
RIGID - IM in rigid conduit (See Chapter 22, Electrical Plant Bulks,
CONDUIT, for a schematic of the conduit)
PPM- Pluggable Pre-Molded wire (fieldbus only)
Number of conductor sets per cable:
Optional twisted pair or triad in each wire set.
Range: 1 - 50.
Conductor set type:
Default: *PAIR*
PAIR - Pair
TRIAD - Triad
PNU TUBING
Instrument pneumatic multi-tube bundle runs
Number of tubes per bundle: Range: 7, 12, or 19
THCPL WIRE
Thermocouple wire: wire, armored wire, wire in conduit
Material:
Default: *TM*
TM - Insul., solid wire
ARMOR - TM with interlock armor
RIGID - TM in rigid conduit
Number of conductor sets per cable:
Optional number of twisted pairs per cable.
Range: 1 - 36.
Conductor type:
Default: *JX*
JX - Iron constantan
KX - Chromel alumel
TX - Copper constantan
JUNC BOX
Instrument junction boxes: electronic, pneumatic, thermocouple

Junction box type:
EL50 - Electronic - 50 conductor
PL4 - 4 Drop pluggable brick (Fieldbus only)
PL4S - 4 Drop pluggable brick with short circuit protection (Fieldbus only)
PN19 - Pneumatic - 19 tubes
TC50 - Thermocouple - 50 conductor

SRSC - 3 Drop brick with spring clamp (fieldbus only)
SRST - 3 Drop brick with screw terminal (fieldbus only)
MB4 - 4 Drop brick (fieldbus only)
MB4S - Hawke International 4 Drop brick with short-circuit protection (fieldbus only)
MB8 - 8 Drop brick (fieldbus only)
MB8S - Hawke International 8 Drop brick with short-circuit protection (fieldbus only)
Enclosure type:
Default: *GP*
GP - General purpose
EXPR- Explosion proof
OPER CENT
Operator center: Honeywell TDC3000
Operator center type:
Universal operator center or local center for one data hiway.
Default: *UNIV*
UNIV - Universal center
LOCAL - Local center
Number of operator display units:
Number of operator CRT (Cathode-Ray Tube Terminals), includes keyboards
Number of Hiway Gateways:
Number of gateways for data hiways.
Number of Indicating CRT:
Number of indicating CRT, no keyboard included.
Number of disk drives:
Number of dual floppy disk drivers.
Number of engineering keyboards:
Engineer’s keyboard for display.
Number of LCN cables:
Number of local control network cables.
History module:
History module for trend analysis.
Default: *NONE*
HIST - Add history module
NONE - No history module
MULTI CONT
Multifunction controllers: analog/digital I, IC, S, A circuits
Multifunction controllers for indicating and control loops, and switch and alarm circuits.
The Instrumentation Plant Bulk items referred to as Multifunction controllers, High energy level
process interface units, and Low energy level process interface units are based on elements of
a Honeywell TDC 2000/3000 process control system.
A Multifunction controller consists of a metal cabinet (6 FEET tall [1.83 M] and 19 INCHES
[0.48 M] wide, containing 1 or more electronic controllers with a power supply, analog and
digital I/O signal processing cards mounted in electronic racks as depicted in the following
drawing.
The multifunction controller is programmed from the engineer’s station in the Operator Center
over a redundant, coaxial cable (Data-highway cable). The controller polls the analog and
digital input cards which report to it to collect the signals transmitted by the field sensors
connected to those cards. The controller either passes the signal up to the Operator Center for
permanent storage in a History Module (computer storage) and/or compares the measured
signal with the programmed set point and generates a corrective command. This corrective
command is sent to output cards which, in turn, generate either an analog (4-20mA for
positioning control valves) or digital (for solenoids, on/off valves) control signal which is sent
to the appropriate final control element in the field.
The signals from and to the field interface to the Multifunction controller through a junction
box on the back plane of the unit. Signals are distributed within the unit over a data bus.
Electric power is required to support all the electronics and a cooling fan on top of the unit.
Battery backup may be specified if it is important that the controller not lose its ability to
control the processing in the event of a power outage. Redundant multifunction controllers
may be specified to insure continued control even in the event of a failure in the primary
controller.
High and low energy level PIUs look similar but have no controllers. The High level PIUs are
for analog inputs only (4-20mA) and provide simple control; the Low level PIUs collect signals
from thermocouple and RTD loops.
There are 3 types of temperature transmitters available:

• RTD: resistance temperature detector.
• TC: thermocouple; the only time that you can specify a TC transmitter type is when you
specify Temperature (T) as the Process Variable.
• Filled system: liquid-filled.
TDC2000/3000 controller handles 16 analog output per controller. The I/O cards handle the
following number of signals:

Signal Type No. Input No. Output
Signals per Card Signals per Card
Analog 8 4
Digita l 16 8
Number of controllers:
One cabinet and power supply provided per two controllers.
Redundancy:
Redundancy provides 1 backup controller for up to eight primary controllers.
Default:
*NONE*
RED - Redundancy required
NONE - No redundancy
Number of analog input cards:
Number of I/O cards for analog input (indicating).
Number of analog output cards:
Number of I/O cards for analog output (control).
Number of digital input cards:
Number of I/O cards for digital input (alarm).
Number of digital output cards:
Number of I/O cards for digital output (switch).
Number of battery backups:
Number of backup battery power supplies for multifunction controllers. Default: *0*
HL PIU
High energy level process interface units: Indicator, switch, alarm circuits
Number of digital input cards:
Enter number of input cards required.
Number of digital output cards:
Enter number of output cards required.
LL PIU
Low energy level process interface units: Thermocouple and RTD circuits
DATA HIWAY
Data-highway cable, redundant (fiber optic) Coaxial or fiber optic cables connecting digital
controllers to operator centers.
Material selection:
Default: *COAX*
COAX - Coax cable
FIBER - Fiber optic cable
Number of terminations:
Min: 1; Default: *2*
Enclosure type:
Default: *NONE*
NONE - None
COND - Conduit

Sensor Loop Descriptions
Pressure (p)
Sensor Loop Description Process Panel Instrument Signal
Type Variable Action Location Type
Symbol (1) (2) (3)
1 Pressure Gauge, field mounted: P I LC none

Sensor element types
(default = ST):
pipe fittings to process (ST),
gauge valves to process (FT)
draft gauge (DG)
3 Pressure Controller: field mounted, P IC LC P

pipe and tubing.
2 Pressure Transmitter: P I LP e
field mounted, via pipe and tubing. IC or
Sensor element types: RC CC
transmitter without seal (TN) R1
transmitter with seal (TS) R2R3
standard or microprocessor
4 Pressure Switch: P A LP e
field mounted, via pipe and tubing. or
*NS* - No chemical seal CC
CS - With chemical seal
6 Additional Control Valve: P IC LP P

secondary control valve for adding or or
to another control loop. CC e
1 For panel action, panel option and control valve option, refer to the applicable
section later in this chapter.
2 Instrument Location:
LC = local, on equipment or piping
LP = local panel
CC = control center (analog or digital).
3 Signal Type: e = electronic, p = pneumatic.
Differential Pressure (DP)
Symbol (1) (2) (3)
1 Differential Pressure Gauge: DP l LC none

connected to process via pipe and
tubing.
2 Differential Pressure Transmitter: DP A LP p

connected to process via pipe and or or
tubing. CC e
Sensor element types:
transmitter without seal (TN)
transmitter with seal (TS)
standard or mircoprocessor
4 Differential Pressure Switch: DP A LP e

connected to process via pipe and or
tubing. CC
*NS* - No chemical seal
CS - With chemical seal
6 Additional Control Valve: DP lC LP p

to another control loop CC e
LP = local panel

Temperature (T)
Symbol (1) (2) (3)
1 Temperature indicator T l LC none

Sensor element types:
TM - Dial thermometer with
thermowell
TC - Thermocouple thermowell
3 Temperature Controller: T lC LC p
filled system, with thermowell
0 Testwell: T none LC none

thermowell and cap only
2 Temperature transmitter, with T l LP p

thermowell lIC or or
Sensor element types (default = RC CC e
FS): R1
FS - Filled system R2
TC - Thermocouple R3
RT - Resistance temperature
WB - Wet bulb temperature
SM - Surface mounted
4 Temperature Switch: with T A LP e

thermowell, field-mounted or
CC
6 Additional Control Valve T lC LP p

secondary control valve or or
for adding to another control loop CC e
LP = local panel
Flow (F)
Symbol (1) (2) (3)
1 Flow Indicator F l LC none
2 Flow Transmitter: F l lP e
Sensor element types (default = lC or or
OP): RC CC p
OP - Orifice plate and DP R1
transmitter R2
OS - Orifice plate, DP transmitter R3
and chemical seals
VX - Vortex meter
MG - Magnetic meter (standard or
microprocessor)
MS - Mass flow meter
NS - No sensing element,
transmitter loop only (NS)
UM - Ultrasonic meter
TM - Turbine meter
MR - Meter run with orifice plate
RS - Meter run with orifice plate
and chemical seals
3 Flow Controller: orifice plate, field- F lC LC p

mounted, connected to process via
pipe, valves, tubing
4 Flow Switch with orifice plate: F A LP e

Sensor element types (default FS): or
FS - Flow switch (FS), CC
TS - Flow sensing and totalizing
switch
6 Additional Control Valve: F C LP p

to another control loop CC e
LP = local panel

Level (L)
Symbol (1) (2) (3)
1 Level Indicators: L l LC none

Sensor element types (default LG):
LG - Level glass - reflex type
external standpipe
SP - Level gauge - reflex type with
external standpipe
BB - Level indicator - bubble type
3 Level Controller: L lC LC p
displacement type
2 Level Transmitter: L l LP e
Sensor element types (default = lC or or
DS): RC CC p
DS - Displacement type R1
DP - Differential pressure R2
(standard or micro-processor) R3
RS - DP with chemical seals
TF - Tape/float
UL - Single point Ultrasonic level
NL - Nuclear level
RD - Radar type
4 Level Switch:
Sensor element types (default (DS):
DS - Displacement level switch-fluids
PD - Paddle type level switch-solids
VS - Vibrating (tuning fork) switch
CD - Conductivity (max/min)
detection switch
CS - Capacitive type switch
6 Additional Control Valve:

secondary control valve for adding to
another control loop
LP= local panel
Analyzers (A)
Symbol (1) (2) (3)
2 Analyzers: A l LP e
Sensor element types (default PH): lC or
PH - pH indicating transmitter OR- ORP RC CC
(Oxidation Reduction Potential) (Redox) R2
transmitter R3
O2- Oxygen analyzer (up to 4 samples)
BT - BTU transmitter
CS - Consistency analyzer
PL - Gas detection% LEL (incl. electronics, rack)
HD - Gas detection H2S (incl. electronics, rack
C2 - C02 (without sample conditioning system)
VS - Viscosity (w/o sample conditioning system)
CL - Color (without sample conditioning system)
FP - Flame point (w/o sample conditioning
system)
CP - Cloud point
SD - Smoke density
FL - Flash point
SG - Specific gravity (liquid)
HV - Heating value (incl. sample
conditioning)
GC - Gas chromatograph (1 sample point, 6
comp.)
HC - H2 and hydrocarbons (w/o sample probe)
HS - H2S analyzer
H2 - Hydrocarbon in water
HR - H2S/S02 ratio
SO - Sulphur in oil
6 Additional Control Valve: secondary control A lC LP or p or

valve for adding to another control loop. CC e
section later in this chapter. Instrument Location:
LP = local panel

Speed (S)
Symbol (1) (2) (3)
2 Speed Indicating Transmitter: S l LP e

electronic, lC or
non-contact type RC CC
R1
R2
R3
4 Speed Switch: S A LP e
or
CC
LP = local panel
Motion (X): Axial, Radial, Vibration
Symbol (1) (2) (3)
2 Motion Transmitter - non contact X l LP e

type, (default AX): lC or
Radial (RD) RC CC
R1
R2
R3
4 Vibration Switch; X A LP e
vibrating read type or
CC
LP = local panel

Position (PN)
Symbol (1) (2) (3)
2 Position Transmitter, PN l LP e
(default VP): lC or or
Variable position (VP): RC CC p
On/Off positions (NF) R1
R2
R3
4 Position Switch PN A LP e
or
CC
LP = local panel
Weight (W)
Symbol (1) (2) (3)
2 Load Cells; W l LP e
Sensing element options lC or
(Default = 4C): RC CC
3 cell configuration (3C) R1
LP = local panel
Electrical Conductivity (C)

Symbol (1) (2) (3)
2 Conductivity Transmitter: C l LP e
lC or
RC CC
R1
R2
R3
LP = local panel

Hand (Manual Activation) (H)
Symbol (1) (2) (3)
3 Hand Regulator: H lC LC p
field-mounted (pneumatic)
6 Manual Controller: H lC LP e
panel-mounted, no input signal, or or
output signal only CC p
4 Manual switch: panel-mounted H S LP e

(front of panel) or
CC
LP = local panel
Field Mounted Solenoid (SL)

Symbol (1) (2) (3)
6 Solenoid: Field-mounted SL none LP e

or
CC
LP = local panel
Typical Pressure Instrument Process Hookup

Panel Action Descriptions
Panel Action Definition
Symbol
l Indicator:
field-mounted indicator if local to equipment (LC), or,
panel-mounted indicator (receiver type) if on local panel (LP) or in
control center (CC)
lC Indicating Controller:
field-mounted indicating controller if local to equipment (LC), or,
panel-mounted indicating controller (receiver type) if on local panel
(LP) or in control center (CC)
RC Recording Controller (LP or CC):

panel-mounted, one pen
R1 Recorder (LP or CC):

R2 panel-mounted, one pen
R3 panel-mounted, two pens
panel-mounted, three pens
A Annunciator Point (LP or CC):

activated by a field-mounted switch
S Switch: indicating, front-of-panel mounted (LP or CC)
Cl Thermocouple-based Temperature Indicator, panel mounted (LP or

Jl CC):
JR complete with back-of-panel mounted EMF converter
multi-point
Thermocouple-based Temperature Recorder, multi-point, panel
mounted (LP or CC)
In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, the system automatically generates panel

instrumentation (combined control/operator center) required for analog systems. The
system includes the control center by default for digital systems, but not the
operator center.
Panel Option Descriptions
Panel Action Definition

Symbol
A1 Panel alarm: one back-of-panel switch
A2 Panel alarm: two back-of-panel switches
CR Computation relay: +, -, X, /
SQ Square root function
FX Defined function of X
LR Limit regulation: high/low
ES Emergency shutdown (ESD)
BS Bias relay
Fisher Control Valve Information

Control Valve Size Range Body Type Actuator Positioner
Type
Globe < = 4 INCHES CE 585 3611JP

6 - 8 INCHES ED 657 3582
Ball all sizes V100 1052 3610J
Butterfly all sizes 8532 1052 3610J

Control Valve Options
Fluid positioning control valves may be specified as line size or reduced size. The
default size reductions are as follows:
Type Definition
STD Standard positioning - type varies w ith size:
Type Size
Globe 0.5 - 4 INCH [12 - 100 MM]
Ball 6 - 12 INCH [150 - 300 MM]
Butterfly > 12 INCH [>300 MM]
GLP Globe type positioning, usually sizes up to 8 INCH [200 MM]
BAP Ball type positioning, usually medium sizes up to 12 INCH [300 MM]
BUP Butterfly type position, usually large sizes from 3 INCH [75 MM]
GLO On/off globe valve, usually small sizes
BVO On/off ball valve, usually medium sizes
BVU On/off butterfly valve, usually larger sizes
SGO On/off Slide gate for bin discharge
SGP Positioning slide gate for bin discharge
DIV Diverter valve for solids handling
ANO On/off angle valve, sanitary, max 4 INCH [100 MM]
ANP Angle positioning, sanitary, max 4 INCH [100 MM]
DVS Diverter, sanitary only, max 4 INCH [100 MM]
TKS Tank outlet, sanitary only, max 4 INCH [100 MM]
BUP Butterfly position, sanitary, max 8 INCH [200 MM]
Fluid positioning control valves may be specified as line size or reduced size. The default size
reductions are as follows:
Line size Control valve
0.5 – 4 INCH [12 – 100 MM] Same as line.
6 INCH [150 MM] One size smaller than line.
8 – 12 INCH [200 – 300 MM] Two sizes smaller than line.
14 – 24 INCH [350 – 600 MM] Three sizes smaller than line.
> 24 INCH [>600 MM] Four sizes smaller than line.
Control Valve Configurations
Air Supply Piping
Feed

Drop
Remote Control Type
Symbol Description
(blank) No remote on/off control valves
H Hydraulic operated remote on/off control valves
M Motor operated remote on/off control valves
P Pneumatic operated remote on/off control valves

Transmitter Type
Type Definition
S Standard
M Microprocessor (Smart)
Overview of Instrumentation Report Details

Report Details for Analog/Electrical Instrumentation
Report Details for Analog/Electrical Pneumatic
Instrumentation

Report Details for Digital/Electrical Instrumentation
Report Details for Digital/Electrical Pneumatic
Instrumentation

22 Electrical

Electrical Plant Bulks
General Electrical Plant Bulks
Substation Electrical Plant Bulks
Schematic of Transmission Line
Substation Schematics
Electrical & Control Hook-Ups for Electric Motors
Power Distribution Network
Wire Sizes
US and ME Country Bases
UK, EU, and JP Country Bases
Electrical Class/Division
National Electrical Code (NEC)
International Electrical Code (IEC)
22 Electrical - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 22-1

Electrical Plant Bulks
Electrical plant bulks are divided into two categories, general and substation plant
bulks. A description of each follows.
22-2 22 Electrical
General Electrical Plant Bulks
General electrical plant bulks include cables, trays, grounding, lighting and tracing.
ELEC CABLE
Electrical power cable runs
Material:
ARMOR - Armored multi-core cable
W-C - Single wires in conduit, includes conduit
W-NC - Single wires in conduit (less conduit)
W-TR - Single wires in tray (less tray)
M-C - Multi-core in conduit, includes conduit
M-NC - Multi-core in conduit (less conduit)
M-TR - Multi-core cable in tray (less tray)
LARM - Lead covered armored cable
Rated voltage:
600 - 600 V at 60 HZ
5000 - 5000 V at 60 HZ
15000 - 15000 V at 60 HZ
35000 - 35000 V at 60 HZ
600 - 600 V at 50 HZ
3300 - 3300 V at 50 HZ
1000 - 11000 at 50 HZ
33000 - 33000 V at 50 HZ
Cable size:
Default: US: single wires in conduit, else multi-core cable in tray
without tray. See “Wire Sizes” later in this chapter.
Cable placement:
Default: Project/Area Design Basis
ABOVE - Above ground cable/wire
BELOW - Buried cable/wire with trenching
NOTRN - Buried cable/wire without trenching
Conduit material:
Default: *GALV*
AL - Aluminum
1PVC - PVC plastic conduit
FRE – Fiberglass
CTRL CABLE
Electrical control cable runs (LV)
Material:

LARM - Lead covered armored cable
Length of cable run:
Default: US: multi-core cable in conduit, else multi-core cable in tray w/o tray
Cable placement:
Number of conductors:
Range: 1 - 37
CONDUIT
Electrical Conduit With Optional Power, Instrument Cable
Material:
Default: *GALV*
GALV- Galvanized rigid steel conduit
AL - Aluminum
FRE - Fiberglass
Cable Size:
*14*, 12, 10 AWG; *1.5*, 2.5, 4.0 MM2.
Rigid conduit, galvanized steel, couplings, fittings and seals
22-4 22 Electrical
Length:
In UOM (e.g.Feet, Meters) Conduit diameter:
Range: 0.5 - 6.0 INCHES [15 - 150 MM]
Conduit diameter:
In UOM (e.g. MM) Range: 0.5 - 6.0 INCHES [16 - 150 MM]
Note: Optional; Conduit diameter must be specified if cable is not being added in conduit.
Number of elbows:
Default: *0*
Number of fittings:
Default: *0*
Number of conduit seals:
Default: *0*
Conduit Support type:
Specify conduit support type to estimate conduit supports. By default, none included.
{Blank} | NONE
CLAMP | Conduit clamps
HANGER | Conduit hangers
STRAP-1 | One-hole conduit straps
STRAP-2 | Two-hole conduit straps
Add cable in conduit?
For option "X" (below), system sizes conduit based on cable specifications but excludes cable
material cost and installation estimate.
Default: - (do not add cable in conduit)
I- Add cable in conduit, include cable cost and installation
X- Add cable in conduit, exclude cable cost and installation
FIRST CABLE
No. of identical items cable 1
Description: Three different cable types in conduit may be defined. Default of 1 cable run if
cable 1 type or cable 1 size/no. of conductor sets per cable 1 is specified
Cable type cable 1
W-C| Single core wires pulled in conduit
M-C| Multi-core cable pulled in conduit
P | Instrument twisted pair cable
T | Instrument twisted triad cable
Description: First cable type or first cable size/no. of conductor sets per cable required to
estimate cable runs. Default cable type ‘W-C’ if cable size is specified or cable type ‘P’ if no. of
conductor sets per cable is specified.
Cable size cable 1
Wire Sizes…| See list of wire sizes
Description: Applies only to power cable types W-C and M-C.
Rated voltage cable 1
600 | 600 V at 60 HZ
5000 | 5000 V at 60 HZ
15000 | 15000 V at 60 HZ
600 | 600 V at 50 HZ
3300 | 3300 V at 50 HZ
11000 | 11000 V at 50 HZ
Description: Default value of 600 V if cable type or cable size is specified. Applies to power
cable types only.

No. of conductor sets per cable 1
1 | 1 conductor pair/triad
4 | 4 conductor pairs/triads
Description: Applies only to instrumentation cable types P and T. Default of 1 conductor set
per cable if instrument cable is specified for cable 1 type.
SECOND CABLE
No. of identical cables cable 2
Description: Three different cable types in conduit may be defined. Default of 1 cable run
if cable 2 type or cable 2 size/no. of conductor sets per cable 2 is specified
Cable type cable 2
Cable size cable 2
600 | 600 V at 60 HZ
5000 | 5000 V at 60 HZ
15000 | 15000 V at 60 HZ
600 | 600 V at 50 HZ
3300 | 3300 V at 50 HZ
11000 | 11000 V at 50 HZ
cable types only.
THIRD CABLE
No. of identical cables cable 3
22-6 22 Electrical
Description: Three different cable types in conduit may be defined. Default of 1 cable run if
cable 3 type or cable 3 size/no. of conductor sets per cable 3 is specified
Cable type cable 3
Cable size cable 3
600 | 600 V at 60 HZ
5000 | 5000 V at 60 HZ
15000 | 15000 V at 60 HZ
35000 | 35000 V at 60 HZ
600 | 600 V at 50 HZ
3300 | 3300 V at 50 HZ
11000 | 11000 V at 50 HZ
33000 | 33000 V at 50 HZ
cable types only.
Add Cable in Conduit Options

Add Cable - ‘-’ option (default ):
The conduit diameter and length must be specified and the items estimated will be remain the
same as in the current version.
Add Cable - ‘I’ option :
The system calculates the total cross sectional area of the cables being placed in the conduit
as follows:
where D is the outer diameter of the cable.

The system determines the maximum fill allowance based on the number of cables and then
determines the minimum conduit size based on the total cross sectional area.

See Table below:
Notes:
• The system determines the number of elbows in the conduit. If more than two
elbows are specified or calculated, the acceptable conduit fill is reduced by 15%
for each one above two. It is recommended that no more than four 90° bends be
placed in a single section of conduit.
• If you specified the conduit diameter field, the system validates the field using
the system calculated minimum conduit size.
• If you do not specify the conduit diameter, the system-calculated conduit size is
used for the estimate. (Maximum conduit size is 6 inches.)
• If you specify a power cable type and a No. of conductor sets per cable field, a
warning appears: No of conductor sets per cable field will be ignored. The power
cable will be sized by the system based on default values.
• If you specify an instrument cable type and the cable size and/or rated voltage
field, a warning message appears: cable size field will be ignored. The instrument
cable is sized by the system based on default values.
• Instrument cable types can only be estimated above ground, therefore if you
specify an instrument cable in the conduit and the power cable placement is
‘Buried cable’ in the electrical specification form, a warning message appears that
the entire conduit will be estimated above ground.
• The number of conduit supports required will be determined based on NFPA 70
Tables as shown below:
22-8 22 Electrical
‘’Horizontal runs of RMC & RNC supported by openings through framing members at intervals
not exceeding those in Table 344.30 (B) and 352.30(B) respectively and securely fastened
within 900 mm (3 ft.) of termination points shall be permitted.’’
‘’Horizontal runs of Flexible Metallic Conduit (FMC) supported by openings through framing
members at intervals not greater than 1.4 m (4½ ft.) and securely fastened within 300 mm
(12 in.) of termination points shall be permitted. ‘’
The system estimates the material cost and labor hours for the conduit, conduit fittings, cables
and conduit supports based on the specifications.
NB: Material cost and labor hour data for conduit supports was obtained from Richardson 2016
data & NECA Manual of Labor Units 2013-2014 Edition.
Add Cable – X option
The system sizes the conduit as described in the workflow above and/or validates the conduit
diameter field. However, the material cost and labor cost & hours for the cable and cable
accessories will not be estimated.
ELEC TRAY
Electrical cable tray
Material:
*GALV*, FBRGL, SS, AL
Tray Width:
Range: 6 - 36 INCHES [150 - 910 MM];
Default:
*18* INCHES [*450* MM]
Number of 90 degree bends:
*0*
Tray type:
*L*, T, C, B
EQPT TRACE
Electrical tracing of existing equipment
Electrical tracing of equipment; item of equipment and its insulation are assumed specified
elsewhere in the project.
Heating cable type:
Use P, M series cable for process temperature maintenance, and A, P, or M series cable for
ambient temperature maintenance.
3A - 3 W/FT [10 W/M] Chemelex BTV2-CT cable

5P - 5 W/FT [16 W/M] Chemelex XTV2-CT cable
40M - 40 W/FT [131 W/M] 300 Volt MI cable
M18 - 600V, dual conductor MI cable, 0.013 OHM/FT
[0.042 OHM/M]
Distance to panel:
If the distance to the panel board is not specified, the system defaults to the value defined for
Area Electrical Specifications.
Thermostat control:
Default: *E-AMB*
E-AMB Electric tracing/ambient temperature control
Single thermostat, control of electrical tracer based upon low ambient temperature specified
for General Area Specifications.
E-PRO - Electric tracing/process temperature control
Multiple thermostated circuits, control of electrical tracer based upon low ambient temperature
specified for General Area Specifications.
PIPE TRACE
Electrical tracing of existing piping run
Electrical tracing of piping; piping is assumed specified elsewhere. This item also provides
insulation of the same size, or one size larger than pipe diameter for pipe diameters of 8
INCHES [200 MM] or smaller.
E-trace cable category: Default: *S*, self-regulating cable. Select M for MI tracing cable or S
for self-regulating tracing cable.
Traced pipe length: The pipe being traced is not included, but must be specified elsewhere.
Traced pipe diameter: The pipe being traced is not included, but must be specified elsewhere.
Length of tracer cable: Total length of tracer segments, default based on pipe length and
diameter.
Heating cable type:

Use A series to 120 DEGF[48DEGC], P series to 250 DEGF[120DEGC] and M series to
1049DEGF [565DEGC] over low ambient temperature.
10A - 10 W/FT [33 W/M] Chemelex BTV2-CT cable 5P - 5 W/FT [16 W/M] Chemelex XTV2-CT
cable
22-10 22 Electrical
40P - 40M W/FT [131 W/M] 300 volt MI cable
Maintenance temperature:
Process temperature to be maintained.
Default: 392 DEG F [200 DEG C] for M series cable and 220 DEG F [105 DEG C] for self-
regulating and 40M cable.
Max: 250 DEG F [120 DEG C] for self-regulating cable and 1049 DEG F [565 DEG C] for MI
cable over low ambient temperature.
Thermostat control:
Default: *E-AMB*
E-AMB Electric tracing/ambient temperature control Single thermostat, control of electrical
tracer based upon low ambient temperature specified for General Area Specifications.
E-PRO - Electric tracing/process temperature control Multiple thermostated circuits, control of
electrical tracer based upon low ambient temperature specified for General Area
Specifications.
Distance to panel:
Distance -pipe to local panel, feeder run to individual tracers determined by system.
Number of thermostats:
Default: 1 for ambient control, based on number of watts for process maintenance.
GRND GRID
Ground grid
A system of buried cable and rods provide a grid work for grounding equipment, buildings and
structures.
Ground cable length:
AWG (US only): 6, 2, 1/0, 2/0, 4/0; MM2: 16, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120.
Default:
*2* AWG [*35* MM2]
Ground rod types:
*STD*, EL-L, EL-S.
Includes direct-buried grid cable brazed to each ground rod. The default rod type, STD,
includes manually-driven ¾ INCH x 10 FEET [3.05 METER] copper-clad ground rods with
studs, clamps, etc. The electrolytic rod types, EL-L (3 FEET vertical x 10 FEET horizontal [0.91
x 3.05 METER]) and EL-S (straight 10 FEET length [3.05 M]), include pipe with weep holes,
electrolytic filling material, special conductive backfill material, and protective cover.
If the number of ground rods is not specified, 4 rods are generated for the first 1-
199 FEET [0.3-60.6 METER] of grid cable, then 1 rod for each 200 FEET [61 METER]

thereafter. For example, a 10 FEET [3.05 METER] length generates 4 rods, a 200
FEET [61 METER] length generates 5, and 1,000 FEET [305 METER] generates 9.
Does not include trenching and backfill.
Ground Grid Diagram and Rod Types:
AREA LIGHT
Area lighting: includes poles, lights and cable
Flood:
400 - 1000 W; Default: *400*
LED:
20 – 400 W; Default *46*
Other:
100 - 400 W; Default: *175*
Fixture type:
Default: Mercury vapor/explosion proof
FL1 - Fluorescent - 1 bulb
FL2 - Fluorescent - 2 bulbs
FL1E - Fluorescent - 1 bulb, explosion proof
FL2E - Fluorescent - 1 bulbs, explosion proof
MVPE - Mercury vapor/explosion proof
MVPV - Mercury vapor/vaportite
MVCE - Mercury vapor/ceiling/explosion proof
MVCV - Mercury vapor/ceiling vaportite
MVF - Mercury vapor/flood
SVPE - Sodium vapor/explosion proof
SVPV - Sodium vapor/vaportite
SVCE - Sodium vapor/ceiling/explosion proof
SVCV - Sodium vapor/ceiling/vaportite
SVF - Sodium vapor/flood
INPE - Incandescent/explosion proof
INPV - Incandescent/vaportite
INCE - Incandescent/ceiling/explosion proof
INCV - Incandescent/ceiling/vaportite
MHV - Mercury halide flood
LED - LED vapor proof, less mounting module
LEDP - LED vapor proof, pendant mount
LEDC - LED vapor proof, ceiling mount
LEDW - LED vapor proof, wall mount
LEDS - LED vapor proof, 25 deg. stanchion mount
Electrical cable length:
22-12 22 Electrical
Cable run length from lighting panel.
Number of lights:
Default: *0*
Power per light:
Min (flood):
400 W; Max (fluorescent): 120 W;
Default: 175 W
Support type:
See illustrations on following page.
*PENDT* - Pendant support
BRAKT - Bracket support
STAND - Stand and support arm
POLE - Pole support (see height entry below)
Number of poles:
Default: *0*.
Pole height:
Low voltage (30-50 A). Default: *0*.
300 A. Default: *0*.
A LV cable of length (Distance to MCC) is now estimated from the welding receptacles.
Wiring system:
Default: *3 wire system*
2 - 2 conductor system
Cable size:
Default: US: *12 AWG*, else: 2.5 MM2.
14 - 14 AWG - US only
1.5 - 1.5 MM2 - other bases
2.5 - 2.5 MM2 - other bases
4 - 4 MM2 - other bases
Cable placement:
Electrical cable type:

STAND Support Type STAND Support Type with Mast
POLE Support Type BRAKT and PENDT Support Types
22-14 22 Electrical
DEEP ANODE
Group of anodes in deep well
A group of anodes in a deep well with connecting leads to an adjacent junction box.
Anode capacity:
Based on five amps per anode.
Anode depth:
Depth should be based on the local soil conditions. The depth is 100 FEET [30 M] plus 7 FEET
[2 M] per anode (5 amps per anode).
Well casing symbol:
Default: *NONE*
NONE - No well casing
CASED - Cased well
GALV ANODE
Individual galvanic anode
An individual galvanic anode for road crossings, etc.
Length per cable run: Default: *40* FEET [*12* M]
SURF ANODE
Group of anodes in shallow surface bed
A shallow surface anode bed consisting of anodes with underground leads to an adjacent
junction box.
Type of anode:
A - Drilled hole, native backfill
B - Drilled hole, coke breeze backfill
C - Trench, coke breeze backfill
D - Trench, native backfill
Number of anodes per bed: *10*
Spacing:
Anode spacing is the center-to-center distance.
Default: *8* FEET [*2.5* M]
POT TEST
Potential measurement test station
Number of test stations:
Enter number of test stations per location.
RECTIFIER
Transformer/rectifier

480 V/60 HZ [415 V/50 HZ] 3 phase input
D.C. Output: 50 V/50 A or 100 V/100 A
Power pole line must be specified separately.
Anode capacity:
50: 50A / 50V
150: 150A / 100V
Length per cable run:
SOLAR PANL
Solar panel with storage batteries
Solar panels, adjacent storage batteries, control center, supporting structure, fencing and
cable to a junction box.
Length per cable run: Default: *500* FEET [*150* M]
EMER LIGHT
Emergency light with battery
Provides short-term, local lighting for personnel in case of an electric power failure. Indoor,
general-purpose type includes selection of light types, 6V battery, battery-recharger, power
cable with plug for local outlet, and mounting bracket.
Light type:
HEPS, HEPR, LEPS, LEPR, STDS, STDR
Number of light bulbs:
*1*, 2
CABLE DUCT
Underground cable duct
Duct length:
Minimum: >0 FEET [M]
Maximum: 10,000 FEET [3000 M]
Default: None (Required Field)
Buried depth:
Below grade depth to bottom of trench
Minimum: 12 INCHES [305 MM]
Maximum: 120 INCHES [3000 MM]
Cable duct width:
Minimum: >0 INCHES [MM]
Maximum: 144 INCHES [3600 MM]
Cable duct height:
Cable duct height specification is applicable when the ENVEL cable duct type is selected.
Minimum: 12 INCHES [300 MM]
Maximum: Buried depth
Default: Calculated based on size and number of conduits specified.
22-16 22 Electrical
Cable duct type:
*TILE* - Sand bed and tile cover
ENVEL - Concrete envelope
CONC - Concrete box with sand fill
PRCST - Concrete box w/precast duct blocks
Number of conduits wide:
Default: *0* (*1* if number of conduits high specified > 0)
Number of conduits high:
Default: *0* (*1* if number of conduits wide specified > 0)
Circuit voltage:
*L* - Low voltage up to 600 V
M - Medium voltage up to 22,000 V
H - High voltage up to 40,000 V
H+ - High voltage over 40,000 V
Conduit type:
*P40* – Schedule 40 rigid PVC conduit
P80 - Schedule 80 rigid PVC conduit
PEB - Type EB PVC utility duct
PDB - Type DB PVC utility duct
GRS - Galvanized rigid steel conduit
Conduit diameter:
Default: 3 IN [78 MM]
Range: 0.5 - 6 IN [ 16 MM - 155 MM]
Minimum for ENVEL option is 1 IN [27 MM]
Number of elbows:
Default: *0*
Maximum: 3 per conduit
Reinforce ENVEL duct type:
Y – Include rebar reinforcing
N – Do not include rebar reinforcing
Default: Y for GRS conduit and N for other conduit types
Notes:
• Electrical conduit will be estimated only if the user specifies > 0 in either the
‘Number of conduits wide’ field or the ‘Number of conduits high’ field.
• Conduit will not be estimated for the PRCST duct type.
• PVC EB plastic conduit will only be estimated for the ENVEL duct type. PVC
DB plastic conduit will only be estimated for the TILE and CONC duct types.
• If a hazardous area (Div. I/Zone 1) is specified by the user, two duct seals
will be estimated for each conduit.
• Conduits are supported by pre-fabricated PVC duct bank conduit spacers. The
spacers are installed every 5 FEET [1.5 M].

ENVEL cable duct example
Number of conduits wide: 3
Number of conduits high: 2
Note: Reinforcing steel will be included by default if GRS conduit is specified.
PANEL BRD
Lighting panelboard and distribution board
Local lighting panelboard or distribution board in substation.
Lighting panel/distr. board size: 8-36 for panelboard and 6-12 for distribution board.
Transformer size:
transformer for panelboard, 15-75 KVA.
Default: *0*
Lighting panel/distr. board opt.:
P - Local lighting panelboard
D - Distribution board in substation
Default: D (distribution board) for UK and EU country bases and P (panelboard) for all other
country bases.
Panel/distr. board exp. proof opt.:
blank - Based on area/project electrical class and division or zone
EXPR - Explosion proof enclosure
NEXPR - Non-explosion proof enclosure
Default: based on area/project specification for electrical class and division or zone.
22-18 22 Electrical
TRACE PANL
Tracing panelboard for electrical heat tracing
Panelboard for electrical heat tracing circuits.
Panelboard size: 12-36
TRACE CNTR
Electrical heat tracing controller - single and multi-point
Provides control and monitoring of electrical heating cable circuits. Single-circuit, dual-circuit
and multi-circuit controllers provide temperature control and monitors temperature, ground
fault level and controller failure.
Packaged unit is modular-rack design and contains 10 controllers in one panel
Single/Multi-point Controller
Tracing control points:
Default: *0*, Maximum 20
Relay type:
EMR - Electromechanical relay
SSR - Solid state relay
Default: *EMR*
Communication option:
communication module with 2-wire RS-485 communication.
blank -No RS-485 communication interface required (default)
X -RS-485 communication interface required.
Default: no RS-485 communication interface required.
Enclosure material:
blank - Fiberglass enclosure
SS - Stainless steel enclosure
Default: Fiberglass enclosure with window
Packaged Controller and Panelboard
Tracing control points:
Only 10 control points allowed
Panelboard size: *24*, 30 and 42
Relay type:
EMR - Electromechanical relay
SSR - Solid state relay
Default: *EMR*
COMALM SYS
Public Address and General Alarm
Equipment cabinets:
Default: 1 cabinet per 150 devices.
Raceway length
Default: 30% of the cable length (3 cables per tray).
Raceway width:
Default:
• IP - 4 inches
• Metric- 100 mm
Raceway type:

• *L - Ladder tray
• T - Trough tray
• C - Trough tray with top cover
• B - Trough tray with top and bottom cover
• Default: Ladder tray
Cable length per device:
Distance from the cabinet to the field device.
Default: Area level Electrical specifications.
Cable placement:
T - Cable in tray
C- Cable in conduit
B - Buried cable
Default: *T*
Junction boxes:
Default: 1 each per 10 speakers/strobes combined.
Outdoor speakers:
Default: None
Indoor speakers:
Default: None
Outdoor strobes:
Default: None
Indoor strobes:
Default: None
Outdoor handsets:
Default: None
Indoor handsets:
Default: None
Acoustic hoods:
Default: Equal to the number of outside handsets.
Poles:
Default: 1 pole per 2 outdoor speakers and 1 strobes.
Closed Circuit Television
Equipment cabinets:
Default: 1 cabinet per system.
Raceway length
• IP - 4 inches
• Metric- 100 mm
Raceway type:
• T - Trough tray
Cable placement:
T - Cable in tray
C- Cable in conduit
22-20 22 Electrical
B - Buried cable
Default: *T*
Junction boxes:
Default: 1 junction box per camera
Cameras:
Default: 0
Monitors:
Default: 1 monitor per 4 cameras.
Poles:
Default: 1 pole per camera
Telephone System
Equipment cabinets:
Raceway length
Raceway width:
Default:
• IP - 4 inches
• Metric- 100 mm
Raceway type:
• T - Trough tray
Cable placement:
T - Cable in tray
C- Cable in conduit
B - Buried cable
Default: *T*
Junction boxes:
Default: 0
Outdoor phones:
Default: 0
Indoor phones:
Default: 0.
Video conference:
Default: 0
Area Network System
Equipment cabinets:
Raceway length
Default: 90% of the cable length (1 cable per tray).
Raceway width:
Default:
• IP - 4 inches
• Metric- 100 mm

Raceway type:
• T - Trough tray
Cable placement:
T - Cable in tray
C- Cable in conduit
B - Buried cable
Default: *T*
Plant radios:
Default: 0
Marine radios:
Default: 0
Aviation radios:
Default: 0
Antenna/towers:
Default: 1 if any of the radios is specified.
Access Control System
Equipment cabinets:
Raceway length
Default: 90% of the cable length ( 1 cable per tray).
Raceway width:
Default:
• IP - 4 inches
• Metric- 100 mm
Raceway type:
• T - Trough tray
Cable placement:
T - Cable in tray
C- Cable in conduit
B - Buried cable
Default: *T*
Junction boxes:
Default: 1 per card reader/door operator/controller.
Workstations:
22-22 22 Electrical
Default: 0
Card readers:
Default: 0
Controllers:
Default: 0
Door/Turnstile Operators:
Default: 0
Intrusion Detection System
Equipment cabinets:
Default: 1 cabinet per project.
Raceway length
Default: 0.
Raceway width:
Default:
• IP - 4 inches
• Metric- 100 mm
Raceway type:
• T - Trough tray
Cable placement:
T - Cable in tray
C- Cable in conduit
B - Buried cable
Default: *B*
Junction boxes:
Default: 1 per pole
Workstations:
Default: 1 per 45 cameras
Detectors:
Default: 0
Cameras:
Default: 0
Monitors:
Default: 4 per work station
Poles:
Default: 1 per camera
Meteorological Monitoring System
Equipment cabinets:
Default: 1 cabinet per project.
Raceway length
Default: 90% of the cable length (1 cable per tray).
Raceway width:

Default:
• IP - 4 inches
• Metric- 100 mm
Raceway type:
• T - Trough tray
Cable placement:
T - Cable in tray
C- Cable in conduit
B - Buried cable
Default: *T*
Weather Station:
Default: 1 weather station per system.
Structured Cabling for Buildings
Fiber optic cable length:
Default: 0
Fiber optic cable terminations:
Default: 0
CAT5 cable length:
Default: 0
CAT5 cable terminations:
Default: 0
HIGH MAST
High Mast Lighting Systems
Number of identical items Default=1
Installation option
• - Standard item and installation
• SPAR - Spare - reduced installation bulks
• WHSP - Warehouse spare-no engin./procur./install.
• SUPP - Supplied by owner - no equip. cost req'd.
• EXIS - Existing - no equipment cost or civil required.
• DEML - Demolition of component and installation bulks.
Number of high mast poles
• The number of high mast poles
• 98 feet[30M] tapered pole with flange base and raising/lowering unit.
Number of fixtures per pole
• The number of fixtures per pole
• Min=6 Max=12
Watts per fixture Min=400 Max=1,000
• High Pressure Sodium SON/T with stirrup mounting bracket.
22-24 22 Electrical
Power tools with leads Default=1
• Portable Power Tool to operate high mast lowering winch, includes 98 Feet (30 M)
trailing leads.
Number of power distr. boards Default=1
• No. of 18 circuit distribution boards with 30kVA transformer . Default: system
calculated.
Distance pole to distr. board
• Distance from high mast pole to distribution board. Default:for AICE:50FEET[15.24M];
else area design basis specs
Electrical cable length
• Total cable length from lighting panel or distribution board for all circuits. Def.: system
calculated.
Wiring system
• 2 – 2 conductor system
Cable size
• 14 – 14 AWG Watts Only
Electrical cable type
• ARMOR – Armored Multi-core cables in tray
• W-C – Single Wires in Conduit, (Includes Conduit)
• W-NC – Single Wires in Conduit, (Less Conduit)
• W-TR – Single Wires in tray
• M-C – Multi-cores in Conduit, (Includes Conduit)
• M-NC – Multi-cores in Conduit, (Less Conduit)
• M-TR - Multi-core cable in tray
Cable placement
• ABOVE – Above ground cable/wire
• BELOW – Buried cable/wire with trenching
• NOTRN - Buried cable/wire without trenching

Substation Electrical Plant Bulks
Substation electrical plant bulks include transformers, breakers, transmission lines
and bus.
BUS DUCT
Bus duct
Continuous Current:
Max: 4,000 A
Length default elbows:
1 per 20 FEET [6 M]
Rated voltage:
*600* - 600 V at 60 HZ.
5000 - 5000 V at 60 HZ.
15000 - 15000 V at 60 HZ.
35000 - 35000 V at 60 HZ.
600 - 600 V at 50 HZ.
3300 - 3300 V at 50 HZ.
11000 - 11000 V at 50 HZ.
33000 - 33000 V at 50 HZ.
Number of elbows:
Default: 1 per 20 FEET [6 M]
Termination type:
*NONE*
NONE - No terminations
TRANS - Transformer termination only
SWGR - Switchgear termination only
BOTH - Switchgear and transformer termination
TRANSFORM
Electrical transformer: 1 or 2 tap
Rated load:
Range: 10 - 100,000 KVA
Transformer type:
LV/MV: *DRY*, OIL
HV: Oil filled only
OIL C BRKR
Oil circuit breakers
Rated voltage:
Range: 11 - 400 KV
Continuous Current:
Max: 5 KA [5000 A]
22-26 22 Electrical
DISCNCT SW
Disconnect switches
Rated voltage:
Range: 4 - 230 KV
POLE LINE
Overhead transmission line: cables, structures, guys, grounds
See “Schematic of Project Site Transmission Line Hook-Up.”
Wire size: See “Wire Sizes” later in this chapter.
SUBSTN STL
Steel for substation structure
BREAKER
Circuit breakers: main, feeder, tie-breakers
Continuous current: Max: 3,000 A for MV, HV; 4,000A for LV
Rated voltage: through the maximum HV.
Interrupt capacity:
LV: 25 - 70 MVA; MV: 250 - 350 MVA; HV: 500 - 1000 MVA; Transmission voltage: 939-1742
MVA
Circuit breaker type:
*AIR*, SF6, VAC
Breaker location:
Default: *FEED*
FEED - Feeder breaker
MAIN - Main breaker
TIE - Tie breaker
MCC
Motor control center
Floor-mounted assemblies of one or more enclosed vertical sections principally containing
combination motor control/overload protection units (starters).
Voltage range:
LV: 0.5 - 400 HP [0.33 - 300 KW]
MV: 200 - 1000 HP [150 - 3000 KW]
MCC type: *S*, I
The MCCs described are intended for inside use (i.e., are not for outside use local to the
motors). They are unaffected by the electrical class/zone specifications covered later in this
chapter. The “intelligent” MCCs provide more sophisticated electronic control and
communication to a control center. The cost for upstream items are not included (e.g., supply
bus duct/cable; switchgear [feeder breakers, metering, substation disconnect switch, main
breaker]; and substation transformer).

SWITCH BRD
Switch board
Continuous current:
600-4000 A
Rated voltage:
3-13.8 KV
Switchboard type:
VCB - Vacuum circuit breaker
VCS1 - Vacuum circuit breaker 1 unit stack
Short circuit current:
*25*-40 KA
AC DC TRAN
AC/DC Transformer
Rating:
30-300 ampere-hours
PKG TRANSF
Package transformer with panel
Rated load:
50-800 KVA
Transformer primary voltage:
3000-13800 V
Number of phases:
1 or *3*
EM PWR SET
Emergency diesel generator
Power output:
5 - 1500 KVA
UPS
Uninterrupted power supply
Rated load:
2-300 KVA.
UPS type:
*STD*, MULT.
22-28 22 Electrical
PF CORRECT
Power factor connection capacitor
Capacity:
24-2500 KVAR.
Voltage:
LV (low voltage), MV (medium voltage).

Schematic of Transmission Line
22-30 22 Electrical
Substation Schematics

Electrical & Control Hook-Ups for Electric
Motors
Motor Control Center

The MCCs described are intended for inside use (i.e., are not for outside use local to
the motors). They are unaffected by the electrical class/zone specifications covered
later in this chapter. The “intelligent” MCCs provide more sophisticated electronic
control and communication to a control center. The cost for upstream items are not
included (e.g., supply bus duct/cable; switchgear [feeder breakers, metering,
substation disconnect switch, main breaker]; and substation transformer).
There are two types of MCC available in the system (see diagram below) — those
with electric motors driven at low voltage (MCC-LV: COA 733) and those with electric
motors driven at mid-voltage (MCC-MV: COA 744). Both types of MCCs include
starters.
The MCC-LV is a 12-NEMA space cabinet; the MCC-MV is a 3-NEMA space cabinet.
This item is specified by the HP [KW] rating of the motor being supplied- this permits
the system to select an appropriately sized starter (see table below). The resulting
cost includes both the cost of the starter as well as the cost for the fraction of the
cabinet occupied by the starter.
22-32 22 Electrical
For example, assume that you specify a 20 HP [15 KW] rating- the reported cost for
the MCC-LV is the cost of the 3-space starter plus three-twelfths of the whole cost of
the cabinet. Specifying four such items would, in effect, completely account for the
cost of one 12-space MCC-LV containing four 3-space starters.
Motor Size Voltage Starter Size

HP KW (spaces)
< = 10 HP < = 7.5 KW LV 2
20 - 50 HP 15 - 37.4 KW LV 3
60 - 100 HP 44.7 - 75 KW LV 5
125 - 200 HP 95 - 150 KW LV 6
250 - 400 HP 180 - 300 KW LV 9
200 - 400 HP 150 - 300 KW MV 3
450 - 4,000 HP 335 - 3,1150 KW MV 3
Medium Voltage (MV) and Low Voltage (LV) Motor Control

Centers (MCC)
Note: When you select the high voltage as 34.5kV (US, ME) / 33kV (UK, EU, JP) in
the general electrical specifications, then all the high voltage motors in the project
should be powered at the corresponding medium voltage, because all the motors in
the system are at the most rated for 15kV (US, ME) / 11kV (UK, EU, JP) only.

Power Distribution Network
22-34 22 Electrical
Wire Sizes
Wires sizes must be chosen from one of the following tables.
US and ME Country Bases

US and ME Country Bases or AWG Wire
Units
Wire Size Symbols (gauge sizes)
-------------- LV -------------------------------------
------------ MV -------------------------------
--------- HV --------------------------
14 8 2 250 1000
12 6 1 350 1250
10 4 1/0 500 1500
2/0 750 1750
4/0 2000
-------- (AWG) --- ----- (KCMIL) -----

UK, EU, and JP Country Bases
UK, EU, and JP Country Base or MM2 Wire
Units
Wire Size Symbols (MM2 sizes)
-------------- LV -------------------------------------
----------- MV -------------------------------
--------- HV --------------------------
1.5 10 35 185 500
2.5 16 50 240 630
4 25 70 300 800
6 95 400 1000
120
150
---------------------- (MM2) ------------------------

-
22-36 22 Electrical
Electrical Class/Division
National Electrical Code (NEC)

Electrical Class and Division Symbol Single Core Single Core Armor-
or Multi- or Multi- ed
Core Wire Core Wire Cable
In Tray In Conduit
Flammable Gasses or Vapors
11 Highly inflammable gasses and/or - + -

vapors. Hazardous atmospheres exist
continuously or can occur during course
of normal operation for this area.
Explosion-proof.
*12* Flammable liquids are handled and - + -

processed in this area, but they are
normally confined (Default).
Combustible Dust
21 Dust is suspended in air continuously - + -

or during course of normal operation
for this area.
22 Suspension of dust is not likely in this - + -

area, but deposits of dust can occur
and be ignited by sparks.
Combustible Fibers or Particles
31 Locations exist in this area in which - + -

ignitable fibers are handled or used.
32 Locations exist in this area in which - + -

easily ignitable fibers are stored.
General Purpose
GP Non-hazardous conditions. - + -
+ Indicates cable type consistent with electrical class and division.

- Indicates cable type inconsistent with electrical class and division.

International Electrical Code (IEC)
Electrical Zone Single Core Single Core Armore
or Multi- or Multi- d Cable
Core Wire Core Wire
In Tray In Conduit
Flammable Gasses or Vapors
0 Explosive gas/air mixture is constantly _ + +

present or is present for long periods.
1 Explosive gas/air mixture is likely to _ + +

occur under normal operating
conditions.
2 Explosive gas/air mixture is unlikely to + + +

occur under normal operating
conditions. If it does occur, it will be of
short duration.
GP Non-hazardous conditions + + +
+ Indicates cable type consistent with electrical class and division.

- Indicates cable type inconsistent with electrical class and division.
22-38 22 Electrical
23 Insulation and
Fireproofing

Insulation Plant Bulks
Insulation Materials
Fireproofing Materials
Insulation Schedules - System Default Tables
Hot Insulation - Light Schedule (L): I-P Units
Hot Insulation - Medium Schedule (M): I-P Units
Hot Insulation - Heavy Schedule (H): I-P Units
Cold Insulation - 1 to 5.5 INCH Thicknesses
Cold Insulation - 6 to 10 INCH Thicknesses
Hot Insulation - Light Schedule (L): Metric Units
Hot Insulation - Medium Schedule (M): Metric Units
Hot Insulation - Heavy Schedule (H): Metric Units
Cold Insulation - 25 to 165 MM Thicknesses
Customizing Insulation Specifications
23 Insulation and Fireproofing - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 23-1

Insulation Plant Bulks
FIREP AREA
Fireproofing for existing surface area
General fireproofing specified as a surface area to be covered.
Material:
*MAGN* - Magnesium oxychloride
CONC – Concrete
PYRO – Pyrocrete 240 HY
INTU – Intumescent coating
Fire resistance rating:
Range: 2 - 4
The thickness changes according to the Firepr. Rating-Hours:
For magnesium oxychlor fireproofing:
2 hours - 9/16 INCHES [14 MM]
4 hours - 1 3/16 INCHES [30 MM]
For concrete fireproofing:
< 3 hours - 2 1/2 INCHES [64 MM]
3 hours - 3 INCHES [76 MM]
FIREP SSTL
Fireproofing for existing structural steel
Material:
*MAGN* - Magnesium oxychloride
CONC – Concrete
PYRO – Pyrocrete 240 HY
INTU - Intumescent coating
Range: 2 - 4
The thickness changes according to the Firepr. Rating-Hours:
For magnesium oxychlor fireproofing:
For concrete fireproofing:
< 3 hours - 2 1/2 INCHES [64 MM]
3 hours - 3 INCHES [76 MM]
INSUL AREA
General area insulation.
Insulation for existing surface area: hot, cold insulation.
23-2 23 Insulation and Fireproofing

General insulation specified as surface area to be covered.
Material:
*CASIL* - Calcium silicate
MWOOL - Mineral wool
FOAM - Foam glass
Temperature:
Temperature for FOAM only, provides cold (default) or hot insulation.
Jacket type:
AL - Aluminum jacket
SS - Stainless steel jacket
CS - Painted carbon steel jacket
INSUL PIPE
Insulation for existing piping: hot, cold
Material:
*CASIL* - Calcium silicate
MWOOL - Mineral wool
FOAM - Foam glass
Temperature:
Temperature for FOAM only, provides cold (default) or hot insulation.
Jacket type:
AL - Aluminum jacket
SS - Stainless steel jacket
CS - Painted carbon steel jacket
INSUL BULK
Packed bulk insulation
Material:
*PERL* - Perlite bulk insulation
VERM - Vermiculite bulk insulation
RWOOL - Rockwool bulk insulation
FIREP TRAY
Cable Tray fireproofing
Range: 2 - 4

Insulation Materials
Note that insulation is applied to equipment and piping as specified by the user. The
default, if no choice is specified, is foam glass insulation for temperatures 50 DEG F
[10 DEG C] or lower; calcium silicate insulation is applied for higher temperatures.
Description Maximum Thickness Temperature Range Insulation

Symbol
INCHES MM DEG F DEG C
Calcium silicate 12.0 300.0 51 to 1500 11 to 815 CASIL
Mineral wool 12.0 300.0 51 to 1200 11 to 645 MWOOL
Foam glass 12.0 300.0 -450 to 665 -265 to 350 FOAM
Ceramic wool 12.0 300.0 51 to 1500 11 to 815 CWOOL
Polyisocyanurate/ 12.0 300.0 -450 to 250 -265 to 120 PURF

Plyurethane

Fireproofing Materials
Note that fireproofing is not applied to equipment (skirts/legs, support steel, ladders)
and various steel structures by default. The user must specify at least the rating
(thickness to use) in project level specifications and separately specify the thickness
of fireproofing on each component. The default material is magnesium oxychloride.
Description Rating Thickness Fireproofing

(hours) Symbol
INCHES MM
Magnesium 0 0 0 MAGN
oxychloride
2 9
------ 14
16
3 4
1 ------ 22
16
4 3
1 ------ 30
16
Concrete 0 0 0 CONC
2 1
1 --- 64
2
3 3 76
4 1
1 --- 89
2
Pyrocrete 1 3
--- 19 PYRO
4
2 1 25
3 1
1 --- 32
4
4 1
1 --- 38
2

Insulation Schedules - System Default
Tables
Hot Insulation - Light Schedule (L): I-P Units

Nominal Insulation Thickness - INCHES
Pipe
Diameter 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6
Inches Temperatures - Degrees F
0.75 268 460 790 1170 1774 2000
1 150 454 780 1161 1586 1989 2000
1.5 150 411 581 1049 1410 1801 2000
2 150 305 558 869 1181 1640 1836 2000
2.5 150 253 500 848 1148 1613 1778 2000
3 150 236 441 679 949 1232 1558 1887 2000
4 150 216 389 598 848 1142 1406 1737 2000
6 150 164 306 493 709 950 1237 1520 1810 2000
8 150 162 295 475 693 914 1133 1385 1700 2000
10 150 162 90 445 628 823 1008 1268 1556 1922 2000
12 150 162 275 414 585 776 960 1236 1492 1846 2000
14 150 256 392 557 748 952 1177 1419 1775 2000
16 150 250 383 542 725 928 1147 1384 1708 2000
18 150 244 373 529 706 911 1126 1364 1646 2000
20 150 238 365 517 696 894 1109 1361 1588 2000
22 150 238 365 517 696 894 1109 1346 1534 2000
24 150 226 349 501 676 874 1090 1329 1483 2000
26 150 226 349 501 676 874 1090 1329 1436 2000
28 150 225 340 501 622 850 1032 1250 1392 1546
30 150 225 340 501 622 850 1032 1250 1392 1546
36 150 225 340 501 622 850 1032 1250 1392 2000

Note: Light insulation schedule is typical for average low ambient temperatures
above 40 degrees F. Insulation for hot service would be applied to designated
surfaces of 51 degrees F or hotter.
To use the table:

1 Locate pipe diameter in left column.
2 Read across line to locate the operating temperature (degrees F).
3 Read required insulation thickness at top of column. For intermediate
temperatures, use next larger insulation thickness.
4 For large diameter pipe, equipment, or other large flat surfaces, use thicknesses
in the last line in the table.

Hot Insulation - Medium Schedule (M): I-P Units
Pipe
Diameter 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6
6.5
0.75 209 305 520 758 1185 1457 1659 1911 2000
1 150 302 498 732 1051 1399 1588 1825 2000
1.5 150 231 389 665 944 1279 1557 1786 2000
2 150 228 369 565 811 1173 1444 1747 2000
2.5 150 202 332 544 777 1137 1433 1710 1941 2000
3 150 193 296 450 660 925 1240 1617 1882 2000
4 150 183 270 392 579 838 1112 1475 1801 2000
6 150 157 228 322 479 705 977 1304 1630 1953 2000
8 150 156 223 313 444 648 881 1177 1505 1869 2000
10 150 156 220 298 389 571 774 1067 1366 1788 2000
12 150 156 213 282 368 517 710 1001 1277 1716 1922 2000
14 150 203 271 354 474 670 926 1184 1653 1846 2000
16 150 200 267 346 438 625 860 1115 1587 1775 2000
18 150 197 262 340 428 585 819 1056 1530 1708 2000
20 150 194 258 334 423 548 778 1013 1476 1646 2000
22 150 194 258 334 423 522 739 963 1427 1588 2000
24 150 188 250 326 413 512 701 916 1380 1534 1797
26 150 188 250 326 413 512 676 881 1337 1483 1707
28 150 188 245 326 386 500 613 809 1297 1436 1622
30 150 188 245 326 386 500 591 778 1251 1392 1546
36 150 188 245 326 386 500 591 778 1251 1392 1546
Notes: Medium insulation schedule is typical for average low ambient temperatures
from 20 degrees F to 40 degrees F. Insulation for hot service would be applied to
designated surfaces of 51 degrees F or hotter.
To use the table:



Hot Insulation - Heavy Schedule (H): I-P Units
Pipe
Diameter 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 7 8
0.75 150 250 345 596 915 1317 1821 2000
1 150 215 302 516 808 1175 1650 2000
1.5 150 197 280 478 756 1113 1571 2000
2 150 179 260 440 705 1052 1493 2000
2.5 150 164 240 405 661 987 1420 1882 2000
3 150 220 370 617 922 1347 1764 2000
4 150 185 309 533 818 1212 1601 2000
6 150 248 459 717 1088 1450 1905 2000
8 150 195 382 629 969 1310 1738 2000
10 150 318 539 865 1176 1576 2000
12 150 258 460 766 1062 1432 1844 2000
14 150 199 388 675 949 1305 1692 2000
16 150 321 572 845 1174 1550 2000
18 150 259 512 750 1059 1416 2000
20 150 202 446 661 952 1292 2000
22 150 368 579 853 1176 1794 2000
24 150 302 503 760 1068 1594 2000
26 150 261 432 674 966 1413 2000
28 150 194 367 594 872 1243 1796
30 150 306 502 784 1092 1585
36 150 306 502 784 1092 1585
Note: Heavy insulation schedule is typical for average low ambient temperatures
less than 20 degrees F. Insulation for hot service would be applied to designated
surfaces of 51 degrees F or hotter.
To use the table:



Cold Insulation - 1 to 5.5 INCH Thicknesses
Pipe
Diameter 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5
5.5
0.75 50 25 -10 -25 -70 -135 -225 -225 -300 -459
1 50 25 -10 -25 -70 -130 -180 -225 -300 -459
1.5 50 30 15 -15 -45 -100 -120 -185 -230 -290
2 50 30 15 -15 -45 -90 -120 -185 -225 -290
2.5 50 30 15 -10 -35 -60 -105 -135 -175 -235
3 50 30 15 -10 -35 -60 -105 -135 -175 -235
4 50 30 20 0 -30 -55 -85 -135 -160 -235
6 50 45 25 0 -25 -45 -70 -105 -125 -160
8 50 45 25 0 -15 -35 -60 -85 -115 -145
10 50 45 30 10 -10 -25 -50 -70 -105 -125
12 50 45 30 15 -5 -25 -45 -65 -105 -125
14 50 45 30 15 0 -25 -40 -55 -80 -105
16 50 45 30 20 0 -25 -35 -55 -75 -105
18 50 45 30 20 0 -25 -35 -50 -70 -105
20 50 30 20 0 -25 -35 -45 -65 -95
22 50 30 20 0 -25 -35 -45 -65 -95
24 50 30 20 0 -25 -35 -45 -65 -95
26 50 30 20 5 -10 -25 -40 -60 -75
28 50 30 20 5 -10 -25 -40 -60 -75
30 50 30 20 5 -10 -25 -40 -60 -75
36 50 30 20 10 -5 -25 -40 -55 -75
Note: The hot insulation schedule adjustment (L,M, or H) does not apply to cold
insulation. Insulation for cold service would be applied to designated surfaces of 50
degrees F or colder.
For cold insulation, joints are caulked and a vapor barrier is applied.

To use the table:

Cold Insulation - 6 to 10 INCH Thicknesses
Pipe
Diameter 6 6.5 7 7.5 8 8.5 9 9.5 10
0.75
1.5 -345 -459
2 -340 -459
2.5 -290 -340 -459
3 -290 -340 -459
4 -265 -300 -459
6 -205 -240 -290 -325 -459
8 -175 -215 -225 -295 -325 -459
10 -150 -185 -225 -235 -300 -459
12 -140 -170 -205 -230 -285 -325 -459
14 -130 -160 -190 -225 -265 -305 -352 -459
16 -125 -150 -180 -210 -250 -285 -310 -459
18 -115 -145 -175 -200 -235 -275 -295 -325 -459
20 -110 -135 -165 -190 -225 -260 -290 -315 -459
22 -105 -130 -155 -180 -205 -240 -270 -300 -459
24 -105 -130 -155 -180 -205 -240 -270 -300 -459
26 -105 -120 -140 -170 -190 -225 -250 -285 -305
28 -105 -120 -140 -170 -190 -225 -250 -285 -305
30 -105 -120 -140 -170 -190 -225 -250 -285 -305
36 -105 -115 -135 -160 -175 -215 -240 -280 -300
Note: The hot insulation schedule adjustment (L,M, or H) does not apply to cold
degrees F or colder.

To use the table:

Hot Insulation - Light Schedule (L): Metric Units
Nominal Insulation Thickness - MM
Pipe
Diameter 25 38 50 63 75 88 100 113 125 138 150
MM Temperatures - Degrees C
20 131 237 421 632 967 1093
25 65 234 415 627 863 1087 1093
40 65 210 305 565 765 982 1093
50 65 151 292 465 638 893 1002 1093
65 65 122 260 453 620 878 970 1093
80 65 113 227 359 509 666 847 1030 1093
100 65 102 198 314 453 616 763 947 1093
150 65 73 152 256 376 510 669 826 987 1093
200 65 72 146 246 367 490 611 751 926 1093
250 65 72 143 229 331 439 542 686 846 1050 1093
300 65 72 135 212 307 413 515 668 811 1007 1093
350 65 124 200 291 397 511 636 770 968 1093
400 65 121 195 283 385 497 619 751 931 1093
450 65 117 189 276 374 488 607 740 896 1093
500 65 114 185 269 368 478 598 738 864 1093
550 65 114 185 269 368 478 598 730 834 980
600 65 107 176 260 357 467 587 720 806 930
650 65 107 176 260 357 467 587 720 780 883
700 65 107 171 260 327 454 555 676 755 841
750 65 107 171 260 327 454 555 676 755 841
900 65 107 171 260 327 454 555 676 755 841
Note: Light insulation schedule is typical for average low ambient temperatures from
above 4 degrees C. Insulation for hot service would be applied to designated
surfaces of 11 degrees C or hotter.
To use the table:

2 Read across line to locate the operating temperature (degrees C).


Hot Insulation - Medium Schedule (M): Metric Units
Pipe
Diameter 25 38 50 63 75 88 100 113 125 138 150 163
20 98 151 271 403 640 791 903 1043 1093
25 65 150 258 388 566 759 864 996 1093
40 65 110 198 351 506 692 847 974 1093
50 65 108 187 296 432 633 784 952 1093
65 65 94 166 284 413 613 778 932 1060 1093
80 65 89 146 232 348 496 671 880 1027 1093
100 65 83 132 200 303 447 600 801 982 1093
150 65 69 108 161 248 373 525 706 887 1067 1093
200 65 68 106 156 228 342 471 636 818 1020 1093
250 65 68 104 147 198 299 412 575 741 975 1093
300 65 68 100 138 186 269 376 538 691 935 1050 1093
350 65 95 132 178 245 354 496 640 900 1007 1093
400 65 93 130 174 225 329 460 601 863 968 1093
450 65 91 127 171 220 307 437 568 832 931 1093
500 65 90 125 167 217 286 414 545 802 896 1093
550 65 90 125 167 217 272 392 517 775 864 1093
600 65 86 121 163 211 266 371 491 748 834 980
650 65 86 121 163 211 266 357 471 725 806 930
700 65 86 118 163 196 260 322 431 702 780 883
750 65 86 118 163 196 260 310 414 677 755 841
900 65 86 118 163 196 260 310 414 677 755 841
Note: Medium insulation schedule is typical for average low ambient temperatures
from -6 degrees C to 4 degrees C. Insulation for hot service would be applied to
designated surfaces of 11 degrees C or hotter.
To use the table:



Hot Insulation - Heavy Schedule (H): Metric Units
Pipe
Diameter 38 50 63 75 88 100 113 125 138 150 175 200
20 65 121 173 313 490 713 993 1093
25 65 101 150 268 431 635 898 1093
40 65 91 137 247 402 600 855 1093
50 65 81 126 226 373 566 811 1093
65 65 73 115 207 349 530 771 1027 1093
80 65 104 187 325 494 730 962 1093
100 65 85 153 278 436 655 871 1093
150 65 120 237 380 586 787 1040 1093
200 65 90 194 331 520 710 947 1093
250 65 158 281 462 635 857 1093
300 65 125 237 407 572 777 1006 1093
350 65 92 197 357 509 707 922 1093
400 65 160 300 451 634 843 1093
450 65 126 266 398 570 768 1093
500 65 94 230 349 511 700 1093
550 65 186 303 456 635 978 1093
600 65 150 261 404 575 867 1093
650 65 27 222 356 518 767 1093
700 65 90 186 312 466 672 980
750 65 152 261 417 588 862
900 65 152 261 417 588 862
Note: Heavy insulation schedule is typical for average low ambient temperatures
less than -6 degrees C. Insulation for hot service would be applied to designated
surfaces of 11 degrees C or hotter.
To use the table:



Pipe
Diameter 25 38 50 63 75 88 100 113 125 138 150 163
20 10 -3 -23 -31 -56 -92 -142 -159 -184 -273
25 10 -3 -23 -31 -56 -90 -117 -159 -184 -273
40 10 -1 -9 -26 -42 -73 -84 -120 -145 -178 -209 -273
50 10 -1 -9 -26 -42 -67 -84 -120 -142 -178 -206 -273
65 10 -1 -9 -23 -37 -51 -76 -92 -114 -148 -178 -206
80 10 -1 -9 -23 -37 -51 -76 -92 -114 -148 -178 -206
100 10 -1 -6 -17 -34 -48 -64 -92 -106 -131 -164 -184
150 10 7 -3 -17 -31 -42 -56 -76 -87 -106 -131 -151
200 10 7 -3 -17 -26 -37 -51 -64 -81 -98 -114 -137
250 10 7 -1 -12 -23 -31 -45 -56 -76 -87 -101 -120
300 10 7 -1 -9 -20 -31 -42 -53 -76 -87 -95 -112
350 10 7 -1 -9 -17 -31 -39 -48 -62 -76 -89 -106
400 10 7 -1 -6 -17 -31 -37 -48 -59 -76 -87 -101
450 10 7 -1 -6 -17 -31 -37 -45 -56 -76 -81 -98
500 10 -1 -6 -17 -31 -37 -42 -53 -70 -78 -92
550 10 -1 -6 -17 -31 -37 -42 -53 -70 -76 -89
600 10 -1 -6 -17 -31 -37 -42 -53 -70 -76 -89
650 10 -1 -6 -14 -23 -31 -39 -51 -59 -76 -84
700 10 -1 -6 -14 -23 -31 -39 -51 -59 -76 -84
750 10 -1 -6 -14 -23 -31 -39 -51 -59 -76 -84
900 10 -1 -6 -12 -20 -31 -39 -48 -59 -76 -81
Note: The hot insulation schedule adjustment (L, M, or H) does not apply to cold
degrees C or colder.

To use the table:

Pipe
Diameter 175 188 200 213 225 238 250
20
25
40
50
65 -273
80 -273
100 -273
150 -178 -198 -273
200 -159 -181 -198 -273
250 -142 -148 -184 -273
300 -131 -145 -176 -198 -273
350 -123 -142 -164 -187 -198 -273
400 -117 -134 -156 -176 -189 -273
450 -114 -128 -148 -170 -181 -198 -273
500 -109 -123 -142 -162 -178 -192 -273
550 -103 -117 -131 -151 -167 -184 -273
600 -103 -117 -131 -151 -167 -184 -273
650 -95 -112 -123 -142 -156 -176 -187
700 -95 -112 -123 -142 -156 -176 -187
750 -95 -112 -123 -142 -156 -176 -187
900 -92 -106 -114 -137 -151 -173 -184
Note: The hot insulation schedule adjustment (L, M, or H) does not apply to cold
degrees C or colder.

To use the table:

Customizing Insulation Specifications
In order to assign an appropriate insulation thickness to a piece of equipment or
section of pipe (if thickness is not specified by the user), the system refers to tables
that relate thickness to temperature and pipe diameter. External versions of these
tables are available for customization in an ASCII format file. This file also includes a
table that lets you define how much insulation is allocated for valves and fillings.
Template Insulation Specification Files
There are three template files (IP units, Metric units, and blank) available in one of
the following locations:
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator or Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator: C:\Documents
and Settings\All Users\Documents\AspenTech\Shared Economic Evaluation
Vn.n\Insulation
The files are named INSSPC_IP.DAT, INSSPC_METRIC.DAT, and
INSSPC_BLANK.DAT. The files contain identical tables, but the default temperature
and equivalent length parameters (alterable fields) are either in IP units, Metric
units, or are absent. These files are inactive; the system refers to internal
representations of the insulation tables during a project estimate if there are no
customized copies of the insulation specs file in the Administrator or project
directories.
You can copy whichever file is the most convenient as a starting point for your
customized insulation specs file(s). In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen In-
Plant Cost Estimator (while no projects are open), view the Libraries view tab on
the Palette. In the Customer External Files folder, open the Insulation
Thickness and Rules subfolder. Right-click on the template of your choice and click
Duplicate. Rename the file. It will be the starting point for your custom insulation
specs file. In other products, you must manually copy and rename the file.
Customizing the Insulation Specs File
You can edit the newly created file by using any ASCII text editor. The editor must
not introduce non-printing characters other than a space or CR/LF, that is, no tabs
are allowed. The file format is shown on the following page.

The picture above shows the top of the file and the first insulation thickness table.
Lines which contain comments start with a “#”. Lines which are read in by the
system during a project run begin with a “l”. You must be sure to avoid shifting any
of the vertical pipe sysboles “l” while altering the fields.
The following are the only fields that may be altered:
• Unit of Measurement option fields at the top of the file
• Temperature values within Tables 1 thru 4

• Maximum diameter and A, B, C parameter values in Table 5
Unit of Measurement Basis Options
The first choice you must make when customizing an insulation specs table is the
overall unit of measurement basis. The available options are “IP” or “METRIC”. If you
choice IP units by entering “IP” into the space provided, the temperature values in
Tables 1 thru 4 will be read by the system as degrees Fahrenheit. With and IP basis
the parameters in Table 5 will be used to calculate equivalent insulation in feet of
pipe. Conversely, if you enter “METRIC” in the units field provided, the temperatures
will be read as degrees Centigrade, and the values in Table 5 will be used to
calculate equivalent meters of pipe insulation.
You must also select a unit of measurement basis for pipe diameter. The available
options are “INCH” or “MM”. This choice does not affect Tables 1 through 4. It
determines whether the maximum pipe diameters in Table 5 are in Inches or
Millimeters. The option also determines the equivalent length equations (formed
from the A, B, C parameters you provide) are calculated using pipe diameters in
Inches or Millimeters.
Customizing the Insulation Thickness Tables
There are four thickness tables in the file - three for hot insulation and one for cold.
Tables 1, 2, and 3 correspond to the Light, Medium, and Heavy schedules from which
you may choose in the Project Design Basis menu. (For example, if you select Heavy
schedule insulation when defining your project, the system will refer to Table 3 when
generating a cost estimate). Table 4 is for cold insulation.
The tables are arranged with pipe diameter along the left hand side and insulation
thickness along the top. For a given pipe diameter (table row), each temperature
value represents the maximum temperature for which the corresponding thickness
will be used. The last row of each table (36 inch/900 MM. row) is used for both 36
inch diameter pipe and equipment insulation.
Note: You may only adjust the temperature cells in the insulation thickness tables,
not the pipe diameters or insulation thickness.
You do not have to fill Tables 1 through 4 out completely. If you leave a temperature
cell blank, but there are values given somewhere to the left and right, or above and
below, the system will interpolate linearly between the given values to fill the blanks.
(These values will be maintained internally; the system will not fill the blank values
in the external data file). Interpolation is not possible for outer blanks that have no
surrounding given values; these spaces are filled by copying the last given value
over to fill the remainder of the table.
To avoid confusion, it is recommended that you fill out all four insulation thickness
tables according to your insulating practices even if you do not intend on using all
three schedules. If a table is left completely blank the system will refer to the
internal default tables for an estimate requiring that schedule.

Customizing the Valve and Fitting Insulation Table
Table 5 (the valve and fitting insulation table) is shown below.
The table lets you determine how much additional insulation is allotted for valves and
fittings. Any parameters you provide for valves will apply to all valves in the project
(all valves are considered equal when calculated insulation requirements). Likewise,
the fittings correlations will be applied to all fittings in the project (all valves are
considered equal when calculated insulation requirements). Likewise, the fittings
correlations will be applied to all fittings in the project. You can account for insulation
differently for varying pipe diameters by defining three size categories (Small,
Medium, and Large). Each range is defined by the maximum diameters you place in
the fields provided. For example, in the above picture the Medium correlations would
be used to calculate the insulation required for any valve or fitting on a section of
pipe with diameter larger than 4 inches but smaller than (and including) 12 inches.
Table 5 is designed so you can make your insulation correlation simple or complex.
The parameters A, B and C are used in the following equation to calculate the length
of pipe which would have to be insulated to account for one valve or one fitting.
Equivalent Pipe Length = A + B * (Pipe Diameter)c
Any of the three parameters may be set to zero to simplify the correlation. For
example, according to the picture of Table 5 above, each fitting on a section of 2-
inch diameter pipe would increase the total insulation length by 4 feet. (B and C are
zero - correlation has no dependence on pipe diameter).

Enabling the Insulation Specification File
There are two options for enabling customized insulation specs files: You can place a
copy in the system administrator directory (as the default for all projects), or you
can copy a customized file into the directory of a specific project. When generating a
cost estimate, the system will use the specifications in the current project directory if
an insulation specs file resides there. Otherwise, the copy in the administrator
directory will be used. (The administrator copy is therefore the system default - it
will be referred to for any project that does not have its own insulation specs file).
To activate your customized file for use in a specific project in Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator or Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator, right-click the Insulation Thickness
option in the Basis for Capital Cost/Customer External Files directory on the
Project Basis Tab. Click the desired file on the menu of choices; then click OK. The
file is copied into the directory for the currently open project.
In all other cases, the file must be copied and renamed manually to the appropriate
folder. These directory locations are described below:
Administrator Directory (for use as system default):
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator: C:/Aspen
Tech/Aspen Icarus xxx/Data/PIDS
Project Directory (activation for a specific project only):
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator: Right-click/Click
desired file as described above
In order to enable a customized file in either of the above locations, you must
name the file INSSPC.DAT.

24 Paint

Introduction to Paint
Paint Plant Bulks
How Icarus Systems Paint Equipment
24 Paint - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 24-1

Introduction to Paint
Icarus systems can calculate default paint areas for piping, equipment and
steelwork. The default paint is provided for all piping, but is only provided on
equipment and steelwork if specifically requested.
Paint is provided typically for carbon steel materials only, but can be obtained for
any material if specifically requested.
Paint areas and number of coats can be modified or added for any item.
Icarus systems do not provide different grades of paint; however, costs can be
adjusted appropriately by code of account material indexing.
24-2 24 Paint
Paint Plant Bulks
Description Type
Paint for existing surface: printer, final coats PAINT AREA
Paint for existing piping: primer; final coats PAINT PIPE
Paint for existing structural steel: primer, final coats PAINT SSTL

How Icarus Systems Paint Equipment
Legend:
1. HE: HEATER ELC, HEATER STM, ONE SCREW, SUC HEATER, TWO SCREW
2. HO: HAND NT, 1 SP;EED, 5 SPEED
3. Also: AT: COND CELL. FLOAT CELL & SE: WATER CYCL.
Not affected by paint specification for shop fabricated equipment
4. Method determined by specification for paint “Application Method”:
S (spray) or B (brush)
5. Method determined by specification for paint “Application Method”:
24-4 24 Paint
S (sandblasting) or B (wire brush)
6. Surface area is calculated by mode; you must enter the number of primer and/or
final coats.

25 Site Development

Introduction to Site Development
Demolition
Drainage
Earthwork
General
Excavation
Fencing
Landscaping
Roads - Slabs - Paving
Piling
Railroads
25 Site Development - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 25-1

Introduction to Site Development
Site development may be used to specify items within eight major categories:
• Earthwork
• Drainage
• Fencing
• Demolition of existing structures
• Landscaping
• Roads/slabs/paving
• Piling
• Railways
It is important to recognize the two distinctly different applications for which the site
development may be used to introduce site development information into a project.
The desired application is determined by appropriate selection of the site
development item type.
The first application is based on the use of site development work item models,
which are contained within the system. You describe the type and extent of work to
be performed, item-by-item, consistent with the scope of each work item model. The
system in turn develops material quantities and manpower resources and their
associated costs, and additionally, equipment rental and engineering requirements.
The second application allows the introduction of quoted estimates for material and
manpower costs into a project as supplemental site development cost items. Item
models are not used. Entries of this nature are charged to codes of account in the
amounts of material and manpower you specify.
Site development items, either developed by the system through work item models
or as user-entered costs, may be specified as either project-related items or area-
related items.
Site Development Work Items

Within the eight categories of site development, numerous individual work item
models are available for selection depending on the desired type and extent of work
to be performed.
Economy of scale is very important for many site development items (e.g., you can
select from bulk excavation, structural excavation or hand structural excavation). In
addition, the system addresses a large extent of work, defined by you in a single
work item request, differently from the way it addresses several work item requests,
each of small extent. That is, work item models re-select an appropriately configured
crew, by developing man-hour requirements and by providing the crew members
with construction equipment properly sized for the work to be performed.
Terrain, soil conditions and other project environment factors significantly affect the
quantity and type of site work required. To reflect this, site development work items
are presented to accommodate particular, well-defined tasks. For example, instead
of a single site preparation item, you are offered individual items, such as clearing
and grubbing, excavation, grading and landscaping. This provides the ability to “fine
tune” the project to actual conditions.
25-2 25 Site Development

Excavation items are assumed to be requirements in excess of the normal excavation
required for equipment and building foundations and structural footings, since
excavation for these items (when defined as part of a unit area) are ordinarily
system-determined.

Demolition
DEMOLITION
Demolish building w/disposal, no salvage
Demolition of individual structure without salvage but including disposal. Specify frame type
(steel, concrete, masonry, wood). Disposal includes loading and hauling waste from site.
Dump charge not included.
DISPOSAL
Demolish building w/disposal and salvage
Demolition of individual structures with separation of reusable materials for specified frame
type. Loading and hauling waste material is included. Dump charge not included.
EXPL DEMOL
Explosive bldg. demol, no salvage/disposal
Demolition of structures by explosives. Does not include salvage or disposal.
REMOVAL
Gutting & disposal of building interior
Gutting building interiors and loading and hauling the refuse for either commercial or
residential structures. Dump charge not included.
DEMOL
Lump sum quotation - demolition
Enter Total Cost or Mat’l and MH.
See code of accounts (Civil only).

Drainage
BASINS
Catch basin, manhole
Catch basins or manholes of either brick, block, poured concrete, or precast concrete. Includes
footing and excavation with an option of slab tops or lightweight frames and covers. All types
have 4 FEET [1.25 M] internal diameter.
DEWATERING
Pump and hose for open excavations
Pumping water from open excavations. Unattended pumps except for daily servicing. Suction
line to 20 FEET [6 M] and discharge line to 100 FEET [30 M] in length.
DRAINS
Drainage piping
Installation of selected diameter pipe of asbestos cement, corrugated steel, concrete, or
vitrified clay with an adjustment for the percentage of curved or radius pipe. Includes
trenching, gravel bed and compacted backfill.
SEPTIC TNK
Septic tank and drain field
No. of distrib'n = no. per tank;
Length of drain line = length per tank.
Septic tank installation. Precast concrete tanks of specified capacity with the option of 5 outlet
concrete distribution boxes. The drainfield, including pipe, trenching, gravel and backfill, is
input as total length of drain required.
SUBDRAIN
Foundation subdrain with perforated pipe
Installation of foundation subdrainage of selected diameter pipe of asbestos cement,
corrugated steel, porous wall concrete, or vitrified clay with an adjustment for quantity of
curved or radius pipe. All types except concrete are perforated.
Includes trenching, gravel bed and compacted backfill.
SUMP PIT
Sump pit
Construction of sump pits including excavation and gravel bottom. Option of wood lining to a
depth of 4 FEET [1.25 M].

WATER WELL
Cased water supply well with pump
Domestic water wells drilled and cased. Includes down-hole pump, surface grouting, and utility
runs, if specified. Does not include plumbing fixtures and connections.
WELLPOINTS
Wellpoints with header and pump
Single stage wellpoint system for deterring to an average 15 FEET [5 M] depth.
Includes installation, operation, equipment rental and system removal. Two INCH [50 MM]
wellpoints on 5 FEET [1.5 M] centers.
Diameter of header is proportional to length:
6 INCHES [150 MM] for 100 FEET [30 M]
8 INCHES [200 MM] for 200-500 FEET [60-150 M]
10 INCHES [250 MM] for 1000 FEET [300 M].
WELLS
9 Dewatering wells with pump
Dewatering wells; 2 INCH [50 MM] diameter bore with steel casing.
Includes 2 INCH [50 MM] centrifugal pump per well for a specified period.
DRAINAGE
10 Lump sum quotation - drainage

Earthwork
General
BORINGS
Test borings with engineer’s report
Includes field stake-out and elevations, 2.5 INCH [65 MM] auger holes with samples of earth,
drawings and professional engineer’s (P.E.) report.
BRUSH
Clear brush - manual or dozer
Brush clearing by hand with saw and rake (HAND) or by dozer with ball and chain (MACH).
CLEAR GRUB
Clearing and grubbing
Mechanized clearing and grubbing.
Option: Includes removal of trees to:
LIGHT 6 INCH [150 MM] diameter
MEDIUM 10 INCH [250 MM] diameter
HEAVY 16 INCH [400 MM] diameter
Includes on-site cutting, chipping and stump removal.
DIKE
Dike construction including stabilizing
Construction of dikes on level grade. Includes placing of fill, soil poisoning with polybor
chlorate on grade, slopes, and top; 2 INCHES [50 MM] of sand asphalt on top and slopes.
GUNITE
Gunite slope protection
Slope protection using 3 INCH [75 MM] thickness of gunite (air-blown mortar) to finished
slopes. Includes bond beam on top, key footing at toe and all reinforcing.
POND
Pond with bedding, lining, fencing-no pipe
Specify piping with bulk yard pipe item.
Evaporation or holding pond. Includes excavation, gravel and sand bedding, fencing and
optional lining. Piping not included.

RETAIN
Cantilevered concrete retaining wall
No embankment cut and fill included.
See excavation items.
Reinforced concrete cantilevered retaining wall. Includes excavation and backfill for wall
footings only.
STABILIZE
Sprayed asphalt soil stabilization
Erosion protection and soil stabilization by spraying with asphalt.
EARTHWORK
Lump sum quotation – earthwork
Excavation
BACKFILL
Backfill and compact excavation
Backfilling of trenches or footings. Fill material is assumed to be stockpiled locally, with no
hauling. For numerous small items, man-hours can be adjusted by specifying the number of
items in addition to the unit cubic yards. Filling equipment may be wheeled loader/backhoe
(WH-LD), crawler loader or dozer. Compaction, if required, may be hand rammer, manual or
self-propelled vibrating drum roller.
BLASTING
Drill and blast rock - no disposal
Drill and shoot rock in trenches, pits, or open areas; includes crawler trackdrill, compressor,
and blasting materials but no disposal of shot rock. Rock types include gypsum, slate,
limestone, sandstone and granite.
COMPACT
Fill compaction with towed roller
Compaction of fill in layers by towed sheepsfoot roller. Options available for watering during
compaction and for rough spreading of fill by dozer, scraper or grader. For fine grading and
surface compaction, see PAVING, BASE PREP.
CUT FILL
Cut & fill with spreading no compaction

Dozer:
maximum haul 500 FEET [150 M]
Scraper:
minimum haul 100 FEET [31M]
Bulk site excavation using dozers or scrapers on a cut and fill cycle, including spreading and
rough grading but no compaction. Scraper selection varies with volume, material and haul
distance. Soil type ROCK refers to already ripped or shot rock.
HAND EXCV
Hand excavation, no backfill/shoring, and so on.
Excavation by hand of trenches or pits, in sand, earth, or clay. Man-hours will be adjusted for
depth of excavation and for volume per item (pits). If shoring is required, see SHORING.
Dewatering for wet conditions, allowance for wet conditions, disposal and/or backfill are not
included.
HAULING
Truck haul-disposal or purchased fill
Material cost may be input for purchased fill or dump charge.
Hauling by dumptrucks (lorries) with option of loading from stockpiles. Does not include
excavation, spreading, or backfill. Soil type will determine bulking factor. For purchased fill or
dump charge, the user may specify the cost (in user-defined currency at User Base Index) per
loose CY [M3].
J HAMMER
Manual jackhammer work - no disposal
Breaking or trimming of rock or concrete by hand-held jackhammer, including compressor and
operating crew. Concrete may be plain or reinforced. Rock types include gypsum, slate,
limestone, sandstone and granite. Does not include disposal.
RIP ROCK
Rock excavation with tractor and ripper for hauling, Both the haul distance and the loading
equipment type must be input Rock excavation by D9 crawler tractor with ripper attachment.
In addition, the user may specify truck loading (by crawler backhoe or wheeled front-end
leader) and hauling. Rock types are gypsum, slate, limestone, sandstone and granite. Ripping
costs may be increased (greater fragmentation) to facilitate truck loading.
SHORING
Shoring of excavations
Max shored depth:
40 FEET [12M] - sheet, HPILE;
20 FEET [6M] - close; 10 FEET [3M] - open bracing.
Installation, adjustment, accessories, removal, cleaning, rental or owning cost and waste are
included. Dewatering not included. Types available:
• Steel interlocking sheet piling, 30 PSF [145 KG/M2], including bracing (SHEET).

• Steel H piles driven on 8 FEET [2.4 M] centers, timber planks and spacers horizontally
between flanges, including bracing (HPILE).
• Solid timber sheeting supported by timber waling and braces (CLOSE).
Single vertical planks spaced on 3 FEET [0.9 M] centers with bracing (OPEN).
SITE EXCVN
Excavation with stockpile or disposal
The haul distance should be input if the disposal option is chosen.
Bulk site excavation using crawler loader, dragline, or crawler backhoes. If the disposal and
distance fields are not used, it will be assumed that the excavated material is to be stockpiled
within 100 FEET [30 M] of the excavation. The disposal options are:
• HAUL - generates a truck-loading cycle, dumptruck, sizing, off-road hauling the user
specified distance and dumping.
• SPREAD - generates (in addition to truck hauling) spreading in the fill area by
• D8 dozer and rough grading, with no compaction.
Soil type ROCK refers to already ripped or shot rock.
STRIP SOIL
Strip and stockpile soil - no hauling
Strip and stockpile site topsoil to a specified average depth. Equipment options include crawler
loader, elevating scraper, or dozer. Truck hauling or spreading not included. Man-hours are
adjusted for area, depth and equipment used.
STRUC EXC
Machine excavation, no backfill/shoring, etc.
Machine excavation (with hand trimming) of basements, footings, etc. Equipment options
include: 0.75 CY [0.6 M3] wheeled loader/backhoe (WH-LD), crawler backhoe, or crawler
crane with clamshell bucket suitable for excavations deeper than 30 FEET [10 M]. If shoring is
required, see SHORING. Soil type ROCK refers to already ripped or shot rock. Dewatering,
disposal and/or backfilling are not included.
TRENCH EXC
Ditching no backfill/shoring, etc.
Machine excavation (with hand trimming) using wheeled loader/backhoe (WH-LD), crawler
backhoe, or trenching machine. If shoring is required, see SHORING.
Soil type ROCK refers to already ripped or shot rock. Dewatering, disposal, and/or backfill are
not included

Fencing
BARBED
Barbed wire topping for fence
No. of sides = wire on one or both sides of fence;
No. of strands = no. each side
Installation of barbed wire on chain link, mesh, or security fence. Two or three-strand
galvanized or aluminum wire on either 1 or 2 sides.
BOUNDARY
Boundary or Perimeter fencing in which the user can specify both fence and gates has been
added.
CHAIN LINK
Chain link fence with concrete footing
Installation of chain link fence, including excavation and concrete for posts on 10 FEET [3 M]
centers and braced and trussed line posts at 100 FEET [30 M] centers. Galvanized or
aluminum wire or vinyl-coated steel.
FENCE WOOD
Wood fencing
Permanent wood fencing of cedar picket, redwood basket-weave, or oak rustic rail with
appropriate gates.
FENCING
Lump sum quotation - fencing
FS WALL
Free standing wall
Default one course thickness - all types;
Double may be input for brick and block.
Materials are: 4 INCH [100 MM] common brick
8 INCH [200 MM] concrete block
18 INCH [450 MM] decorative random stone
8 INCH [200 MM] concrete.

GATES
Industrial gate for fence
Industrial gates of galvanized steel, aluminum, or vinyl-coated steel with posts excavated and
set in concrete. Barbed wire and motor operation are optional.
Gates are assumed to be double widths if 8 FEET [2.5 M] or more.
MESH
Wire mesh fencing
Galvanized steel mesh fencing and gates with posts on 5 FEET [1.5 M] centers.
No bracing or concrete.
SECURITY
Heavy duty security fencing
Heavy duty security fence, security grade, set in concrete and trussed and braced.

Landscaping
EROSION
Mesh or netting erosion control
Erosion control by placing and securing either jute mesh, plastic netting, polypropylene mesh,
or tobacco netting.
MULCH
Placing peat or wood chip mulch
Placing a 2 INCH [50 MM] deep layer of either wood chips or peat moss as mulch.
PLANTING
Planting trees or shrubs
Planting either 8-10 FEET [2.5-3 M] trees or 4-5 FEET [1.2-1.5 M] shrubs. Siting, placing,
fertilizing, and watering plantings are included.
SEEDING
Fine grade, seed, lime, fertilize
Fine grading, seeding, liming, fertilization, and final watering.
SODDING
Furnish, place sod on prepared area
Furnish, place, and water sod (1 INCH [25 MM) deep) on pregraded area.
STERILIZE
Polybor chlorate soil sterilization
Sterilization of cleared areas using polybor chlorate.
TOPSOIL
Furnish, place and fine grade topsoil
Furnish, place and fine-grade topsoil.
LANDSCAPE
Lump sum quotation - landscaping

Roads - Slabs - Paving
ASPHALT
Paving - asphalt base and wearing courses
either base or wearing course depth must be input; Material option - sand topping.
Assumes paver for roadways or spreader for parking and other small areas (PARK). A base
course and/or a fine aggregate wearing course thickness must be selected. A 0.75 INCH [20
MM] sand finish may be added. Includes hauling to site, grading, and compaction.
BASE PREP
Grade and compact base for paving
Grade and compact areas to correct elevation to plus or minus 0.1 FEET [0.03 M].
CONC PAVNG
Concrete paving - no base preparation
Paving with 4500 PSI [31,000 KN/M2] concrete. Preparation of compacted subgrade and/or
paving not included. Includes finishing and curing, with optional steel reinforcing mats. Placing
by slipform machine may be specified for concrete roadways.
CROSS GUTT
Slipformed or manual cross gutter
Six INCH [150 MM] thick concrete cross-guttering of selected width and length.
Optional forming, pouring, finishing, and expansion joints, or slipforming by machine for
widths up to 10 FEET [3 M], if specified.
CURB
Slipformed or manual placed curb
Concrete curb (kerb) only, 14 INCHES [350 MM] deep by 9 INCHES [225 MM] wide overall.
Optional either forming, pouring and finishing by hand with expansion joints on 30 FEET [9 M]
centers or slipforming by machine, if specified.
CURB GUTT
Slipformed or manual curb and gutter
Monolithic concrete curbing (kerbing) and gutter. Optional forming, pouring, and expansion
joints on 30 FEET [9 M] centers or slipform by machine, if specified.

CANALGUTTR
Concrete canal or gutter

Concrete canal or gutter with concrete cover. Inside length, Inside width and Inside depth
must be input. If not specified, system calculates Cover (default: 8 IN [200 MM] prefab
concrete slab); Hand Excavation; Machine Excavation; Blinding slab; Concrete; Formwork;
Rebar; Anchors and embedments. Excavation Material (Default: EARTH); End Wall
Requirement (Default: *B*, O, N); Sealcoat or Liner area (Default: 0); and Liner Type
(Default: GM, C1, C2, * NO*) can be also specified.
The material and manhour per volume of concrete will be calculated based on the factors used
for BASIN (Type 10). If civil external file is used, the factors from the external file will be used.
SEALCOAT
Coal tar pitch emulsion (2 coats)
Application of sealcoating. Includes cleaning and preparing the existing surface and applying
two coats of coal tar pitch emulsion.
SIDEWALKS
Sidewalk base and paving
Installation of concrete or asphalt sidewalks or pavements with an option of a bank run gravel
base.
SUBPAVING
Gravel base course - no base prep
Soil cement treatment option available for subgrade.
Subpaving base course. Options include crushed stone, bank run gravel, and macadam
penetration. Soil cement treatment may also be selected. Subgrade preparation is not
included.
TAR CHIP
Resurfacing with sealant and gravel
Tar and chip. Placing sealant and binder on an existing surface and covering with screened
gravel. Includes surface cleaning and rolling following treatment.

PARKING
Parking Area
Paving, Sub Paving and Excavation. Optional Shoulder, Sidewalk, Median, Concrete Curb,
Guard Rail, Lining and compaction. Paving material can be Asphalt, Concrete, Concrete Block,
Prefabricated concrete tile, or Stone pavers.
PAVING
Lump sum quotation - paving/roads
Enter Total Cost or Mat’l and MH. See code of accounts (Civil only).
ROAD
Main, secondary and minor Roads
Paving, Sub Paving, Shoulder and Excavation. Optional Sidewalk, Median, Concrete Curb,
Guard Rail, Lining and compaction. Default is Main Road with Asphalt paving, Gravel Base
course, and One side Shoulder. The width and depth are based on the road type.
Excavation Material Options:

CLAY - Clay
EARTH - Earth
GRAVL - Gravel
ROCK - Rock
SAND - Sand
Subpaving Base Course Material:
GRAVL - Gravel
STONE - Crushed Stone
Paving Material options:
ASPHL - Asphalt concrete
CONC - Reinforced Concrete
BLOCK - Concrete Blocks
RCTIL - Prefabricated reinforced concrete tile
STONE - Stone pavers
GRAVL - Gravel
Shoulder Material options:
GRAVL - Gravel
STONE - Crushed stone
ASPHL - Asphalt
Sidewalk Material options:
ASPHL - Asphalt
CONC - Concrete
TILE - Tiles (12x12x2 INCH, 300x300x50MM)
STONE - Stone pavers
SITEPREP
Site Preparation for paving has been added. This includes Grubbing and cleaning, Hand and
Machine Excavation, Fill of Subgrade and Compaction.

Piling
CAISSON
Drilled bell-type caisson
Open-style machine-drilled bell-caissons, including mobilization, concrete, reinforcement,
drilling equipment rental, and load testing, in the following ground conditions:
Option Description
EARTH Dry, stable soils
CLAY Wet, unstable soils
ROCK Soft, weathered rock.
PIPE
Driven pipe piles
Driving set pipe piles of selected diameter with an option of concrete filling.
Equipment rental includes rental of drilling equipment.
POURED
Drilled and cast-in-place concrete piles
Cast-in-place concrete piles with 4000 PSI[27.5 N/MM2] concrete. Includes equipment setup
and breakdown and load testing.
Pile Types:
POUR - Poured 12"[300MM] to 42"[1050MM], capacity: 144 Tons [130 Tonne] Cast-in-place
constant diameter concrete piles.
FRNK - Franki 16"[400MM] to 42"[1050MM], capacity: 660 Tons[598 Tonne] Bored large size
piles, enlarged base, reinforced with steel cages.
AUGR - Auger-Cast 12"[300MM] to 42"[1050MM], capacity 750 Tons[680 Tonne] Auger drilled
and then grouted under pressure as the auger is withdrawn. Rebar installed when grout is
fluid.
PRECAST
Driven precast concrete piles
Driving precast concrete piles, either solid square shaped or, optionally, hollow cylindrical
shaped. Includes equipment rigging and derigging, splicing, if required, and cutoff.
Capacity: 90 Tons
RAYMOND
Driven Raymond step-taper piles
Driving Raymond step-taper piles. Piles furnished and installed on a subcontract basis by
Raymond International, Inc. Testing not included.

STEEL H
Driven steel H-PILES
Driving steel H-section piles of selected cross-section including equipment rigging and
derigging, points, splicing, if required, and cutoff. Heavy duty option available.
Pile Sizes:
10 INCH [250 MM] Standard Pile = 42 LB/FT [62 KG/M]
10 INCH [250 MM] Heavy Duty Pile = 57 LB/FT [85 KG/M]
WOOD
Driven wood piles
Driving wood piling either friction or point bearing. Includes rigging and derigging equipment,
boots, points, and splices, if required. Creosote treated or concrete and mesh encased piles
may be selected. Cutoff included. Load testing is not included.
PILING
Lump sum quotation – piling
Enter Total Cost or Mat’l MH.

Railroads
BUMPER
Bumper at siding end
Installation of bumpers on a siding end. Heavy duty bumpers available as an option.
CROSSING
Single line siding crossing
Single line siding crossing including special track mat, timber, and crossing signal installed on
level grade.
SIDING
Single track yard siding
Installation of a single track yard siding on level ground, including rails, hardware, timber ties
and ballast. New or relay rail and rail weight option available. Rail Weight Min 80 Max 115
lb/yd.
SIDING HVY
Heavy duty siding for mining application
Heavy duty single track for mining applications. Six INCH steel WF ties set in 10 INCH
concrete bed, 9 FEET wide. Includes fasteners, plates, rebar and 115 LB/YD new rail.
SIGNAL
Crossing signal with barrier, and so on.
Track crossing signal with road barrier and flashing light.
STOPS
Wheel stops on siding
Installation of wheel stops on a yard siding.
TURNOUT
#8 turnout, switch-hitting, etc.
Installation of #8 turnouts, including rails, plates, bars, frogs, switch-points, timbers and
ballast.
RAILROADS
Lump sum quotation - railroads
Enter Total Cost or Mat’l MH.


26 Buildings

Introduction to Buildings
Adding a Building
Building Types and Defaults
Default Floor Heights/Levels
Building Construction Range Adjustment
Calculating Building Costs and Labor
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
26 Buildings - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 26-1

Introduction to Buildings
Building data is used to incorporate a number of independent buildings and/or their
associated services into the project. Enclosed buildings are distinguished from steel
structures (areas, plant bulks) in that they are not designed to support equipment loads. An
enclosed building may house equipment, but this does not affect the resulting building
design or cost.
The cost of a building is based upon its size, type, structural style and the requested
services. The default costs and electrical load for each building type are indicated in the
“Building Types and Defaults” table on the following page. You may revise the level of each
service (none, L, M, H or V) and/or the cost of that service. All costs are assumed to be
direct field costs assigned to the prime contractor, except in the case of contract jobs, in
which they are assigned to the contractor specified.
26-2 26 Buildings
Adding a Building
A building can be added under Plant Bulks, Civil, or under Buildings. Defaults are identical
and material costs, man-hours and labor costs are calculated the same way.
If you are using Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, the underlying data for these costs can be
defined in an external file under Administrator control. See Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
User’s Guide, Chapter 10, “Administrative Operations,” for details.
Buildings are not designed items, but are developed as costs per surface area (Unit Cost)
items.
You can specify your building using one of three general approaches:
1 Select any Total cost adjust. value that uses some default value, then accept the
resulting unit costs.
2 Select the ‘—’ in Total cost adjust., then enter your unit costs for each of the five
general categories.
3 Start with method (1), above, then override selected categories (e.g., Total super-
structure cost) or elements of a category (e.g., Frame, etc.) with your unit cost.
If you specify the unit cost for any element in a category, this suppresses all other elements
in that same category, but does not affect other categories. For example, if you specify the
unit cost for the Floor element in the Total super-structure category, all other elements in
that category are set to zero cost -- if you want to generate a cost for the Stair element,
then you must specify a unit cost for that element.
If you specify a value for both a category and one or more elements in that category, the
costs are not additive- only the unit cost specified for the category is used and the elements
are ignored.
Costs are split between material and labor according to percentages in the internal (system
defaults) or in the external (Administrator specified) file. The split for the internal table
varies from a high of 62% to a low of 38% for material. Building overhead and profit are
separately specifiable for each building type.
The fields Explosion Pressure, Foundation Type, and Roof Type have no effect on the design
and cost of the building; they are included for informational purposes only.
Field Descriptions:
Gross floor area: Default: calculated from length, width, height, number of levels, and
building type.
Building type: see Building Types earlier in this chapter.
Building height: Default: determined from number of levels and
building type.
Number of levels: Default: calculated from length, width, height, area, and building type.
Explosion gauge pressure: For control buildings only, design pressure for explosion
resistance. Default: *0.0* PSIG; MAX: 30.0 PSIG.
Electrical load: W/SF

Total cost adjustment symbol: Invokes either the built-in system values for a Medium
item (blank or M), a down-adjustment (L), an up-adjustment (H or V), or suppresses the
default costs (—).
(blank) System Defaults
— No System Defaults, user data only
L - Low adjustment for system defaults (range varies from 45-98% of M)
M - Medium adjustment for system defaults (the default value= 100%)
H - High adjustment for system defaults (range varies from 106-216% of M)
V - Very high adjustment for system defaults (range varies from 159-324% of M)
Foundation type:
*NORMAL*- Spread footings.
PIERS- 10 FEET [3M] deep piers to footings.
PILES- Floors on piles
Roof type:
*FLAT*- Flat roof.
TRUSS- Truss roof.
SAW- Sawtooth roof.
Labor adjustment required: When calculating the labor hours and costs to report, the
system can take a variety of parameters into account: wage rate in external file or in
project; time and currency difference between external file and project; user man-hour
indexing and productivity adjustments. Specify in this field which of these to take into
account. If you are using an external file, it is best to select YES.
*YES*- Adjust labor cost by system rate, productivity; use external file wage rates.
NO- No adjustment of labor cost.
Total substructure cost: foundation cost per unit area.
Total superstructure cost: enter either total super-structure or individual structure
component cost for the following:
• Exterior door and window
• Exterior wall
• Floor
• Frame
• Int door and window
• Roof
Stair internal table varies from a high of 62% to a low of 38% for material. Building
overhead and profit are separately specifiable for each building type.
Total interior finish cost: enter either total internal finish cost or individual finish
component cost.
Total fitting and furniture cost: enter either total fittings, furniture cost.
Total services cost: enter either total services cost or individual service component cost.
26-4 26 Buildings
Overhead and Profit: enter total overhead and profit cost.

Building Types and Defaults
26-6 26 Buildings
Default Floor Heights/Levels
Building Type Type Symbol Height per Floor or Level

FEET M
Cafeteria CAFE 12.0 3.5
Enclosed Building CLOSED 20.0 6.0
Compressor Building COMPR 20.0 6.0
Control Room CONTRL 10.0 3.0
Existing Building EXIST 20.0 6.0
Garage GARAGE 15.0 4.5
Laboratory LAB 10.0 3.0
Office Building OFFICE 10.0 3.0
Sanitary Enclosed SANTRY 20.0 6.0
Building Shell* SHELL 20.0 6.0
Shop SHOP 20.0 6.0
Warehouse WARE 20.0 6.0

Building Construction Range Adjustment
Adjustment Construction Frame Roof Walls Floors Finishes

Symbol Type
L Pre-Fabricated Light Steel Light Transite Concrete Minimum

Steel or metal
sheet
M Pre-fabricated Medium Concrete Concrete Concrete Average

steel frame walls or
and trusses good
brick
H Custom Heavy Concrete Face Concrete Expensive

designed steel, brick on
heavy concrete
sidings block
26-8 26 Buildings
Calculating Building Costs and Labor
When calculating the cost of a building, the system uses either the internal file conditions or
those specified in the external file. If the external file is used, the system first reads in that
file, then:
• Converts all of the costs in the external file to the currency of the project base country
location using the Currency Conversion in the external file.
• Escalates these to the same time point as the cost base of the system using the yearly
cost indices by country location, by major account. A summary of these is reported in
the “Release Notes” for each version.
• Converts these into the reporting currency units for the current project using the
Conversion Rate specified in the project.
This allows you to use an external file built using any currency and at any date known to the
system (see Chapter 33, “Base Indices”) in a project with any reporting currency. For
analytical purposes, you may want to Year in the external file to be the same as the base
year of your system to allow you to trace your numbers through a complete computation.
In order to calculate the various hours and costs, the system must first adjust all items to
be at the same basis: same currency and same time point. The costs for each element
and/or category are calculated according to the methodologies indicated in Figure 1 (“How
Building Costs are Calculated Using the External File”- general procedures that focus on
adjusting for currency and time differences); Figure 2 (“How Building Material Costs are
Calculated Using the External File”); and Figure 3 (“How Building Labor Hours & Costs are
Calculated Using the External File”). The following generalizations are important:
• The critical item to understand is that it is necessary for the system to move all costs to
the same currency (one of the three known to the system: USD, PS or KY) and to the
same time point (SBI is the time at which all the system-generated costs are valid).
Because of this, you must thoroughly understand the escalation concepts used by the
system (SBI, UBI and EI) and be very consistent in your use of dates and parity rates
valid at those dates.
• It follows from this that it is very important for you to enter at least the UBI for your
project.
• When used with systems where these escalation concepts do not apply, or if you do not
use them in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, it is important to appreciate potential time-
based discrepancies between user-entered numbers that are valid “now” and those
computed by the system that are valid at the base year of the system being used.
• It is usually best to let the system pick the unit costs based on your inputs and set Labor
adjust=YES.
• Since the numbers in the external file are always adjusted to the year of the current
version, the final numbers reported are rarely, if ever, the same as those entered in the
external file.

Figure 1
26-10 26 Buildings
Figure 2

Figure 3
26-12 26 Buildings
27 Quoted Equipment and
Libraries

Introduction
Quoted Equipment
User Libraries
27 Quoted Equipment and Libraries - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 27-1

Introduction
There are two methods for specifying specialty items or items not included in
system:
• Quoted equipment
• User libraries
27-2 27 Quoted Equipment and Libraries

Quoted Equipment
Quoted equipment items can be used for unique, special, non-standard and
proprietary types of process equipment. Since quoted equipment items are unknown
to the system, an account code must be provided when entering
the quote.
If you enter a COA that is known to the system as one containing “rotating
equipment” (COAs 150-179 and 220-229), then the system calculates an allowance
for spares and adds it to COA 107. This does not happen if you are using your own
complete COA set in a project.
27 Quoted Equipment and Libraries - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 27-3

User Libraries
User libraries are meant to hold your important personalized cost data. There are
two kinds of libraries:
• Unit Cost Library - Holds information related to material and labor costs (per
unit quantity) for equipment, bulks or indirects.
• Equipment Model Library (EML) - Holds information related to the process
equipment. You can store cost vs. capacity data for special kinds of process
equipment.
You can add Piping and Instrumentation drawings to the EML in Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator. For instructions, see “Tutorial: Assigning Default P&IDs to User
Entered Equipment” on page 10-20 of the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator User’s
Guide.
If your library requirements are extensive, you should consider building several
libraries, placing like items in the same library. All items in a library share the same
currency basis and are converted as appropriate when added to a project.
27-4 27 Quoted Equipment and Libraries

28 Material Selections

ASME Design Code - Plate Materials
ASME Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel
ASME Ferrous Plate Materials - Heat Treated Steel
ASME Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steel
ASME Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steel
ASME Non-Ferrous Plate Materials
ASME Design Code - Clad Plate Materials
ASME Design Code - Tube Materials
ASME Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel
ASME Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel
ASME Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy Steel
ASME Non-Ferrous Tube Materials
BS Design Code - Plate Materials
BS Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel
BS Ferrous Plate Materials - Heat Treated Steel
BS Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steel
BS Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steel
BS Non-Ferrous Plate Materials
BS Design Code - Clad Plate Materials
BS Design Code - Tube Materials
BS Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel
BS Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel
BS Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy Steel
BS Non-Ferrous Tube Materials
JIS Design Code - Plate Materials
JIS Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel
JIS Ferrous Plate Materials - Heat Treated Steel
JIS Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steel
JIS Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steel
28 Material Selections - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 28-1

JIS Non-Ferrous Plate Materials
JIS Design Code - Clad Plate Materials
JIS Design Code - Tube Materials
JIS Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel
JIS Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel
JIS Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy Steel
JIS Non-Ferrous Tube Materials
DIN Design Code - Plate Materials
DIN Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel
DIN Ferrous Plate Materials - Heat Treated Steel
DIN Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steel
DIN Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steel
DIN Non-Ferrous Plate Materials
DIN Design Code - Clad Plate Materials
DIN Design Code - Tube Materials
DIN Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel
DIN Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel
DIN Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy Steel
EN 13445 Design Code - Plate Materials
EN Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel
EN Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steel
EN Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steel
EN 13445 Design Code - Tube Materials
EN Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel
EN Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel
EN Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy Steel
GB 150 Design Code - Plate Materials
GB 150 Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel
GB 150 Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steel
GB150 Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steel
GB150 Design Code - Tube Materials
GB150 Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel
GB150 Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel
GB150 Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy Steel
Lining Materials
Brick: Acid-Resistant Applied Over Membrane-Lined Carbon Steel
Brick: Firebrick
Monolithic Lining
Abrasion Resistant Linings; Replaceable
Linings: Organic, Glass, Metallic
28-2 29 Units of Measure

Casting Materials
Packing Materials

ASME Design Code - Plate Materials
ASME Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel

ASTM Description and System Internal External Pressure
Spec Nominal Composition Material Pressure Maximum Temp.
Maximum Temp.
(Grade) F C
F C
A-36 (Structural Steel) A 36 650 343 900 482
A-283 Low and intermediate A 283C 650 343 900 482

(c) strength carbon steel
plates of structural
quality
A-285 Low and intermediate A 285 or 900 482 900 482

(C) strength carbon steel A 285 C
plates for pressure or CS
vessels
A-299 Carbon-manganese- A 299 1000 537 900 482

silicon steel plates for
plates for pressure
vessels
A-455 Pressure vessel plates, A 455 650 343 650 343

(A) carbon steel, high
strength manganese
A-515 Carbon steel plates for A 515 1000 537 900 482
(70) pressure vessels for
intermediate and higher
temperature service:
C-Si
(70) pressure vessels for
moderate and lower
temperature service -
C-Si
pressure vessels for low
temperature service
C-Mn-Si
na = Material not selectable for vacuum design

ASME Ferrous Plate Materials - Heat Treated Steel
ASTM Description and System Internal External
Spec Nominal Composition Material Pressure Pressure
Maximum Temp. Maximum Temp.
(Grade)
F C F C
A-353 Nine percent nickel alloy A353 250 121 900 484
steel plates, double
normalized and
tempered for pressure
vessels:
9Ni
A-553 Eight and nine percent A553 250 121 900 484
(Type 1) nickel alloy steel plates,
quenched and
tempered, for pressure
vessels:
9Ni
A-517 High strength alloy steel

plates, quenched and
(A) tempered, for pressure 650 343 650 343
(B) vessels: A517A 650 343 650 343
(E) Cr-Mn-Si A517B 650 343 650 343
(F) Cr-Mn-Si A517E 650 343 650 343
Cr-Mn-Si A517F
Cr-Mn-Si

ASME Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steel
ASTM Spec Description and System Internal External Pressure
Nominal Material Pressure Maximum Temp.
(Grade)
Composition Maximum Temp.
F C
F C
A-202 Chromium-
(A) manganese-silicon A202A 1000 537 900 482
(B) alloy steel plates for A 202 1000 537 900 482
pressure vessels
or
A202B
A-203 Nickel alloy steel

plates for pressure
(A) vessels: A203A 1000 537 900 482
(B) 2.5Ni A203B 1000 537 900 482
(D) 2.5Ni A203D 1000 537 900 482
(E) 3.5Ni A203E 1000 537 900 482
3.5Ni
A-204 Molybdenum alloy

steel plates for
(A) pressure vessels: A204A 1000 537 900 482
(B) C-.5Mo A204B 1000 537 900 482
(C) C-.5Mo A 204 1000 537 900 482
C-.5Mo or
A204C
A-302 Manganese-
molybdenum and
(A) A302A 1000 537 900 482
manganese-
(B) molybdenum-nickel A 302 1000 537 900 482
(C) alloy steel plates for or 1000 537 900 482
(D) pressure vessels: A302B 1000 537 900 482
Mn-.5Mo A302C
Mn-.5Mo A302D
Mn-.5Mo-Ni
Mn-.5Mo-Ni

ASTM Spec Description and System Internal External Pressure
Nominal Material Pressure Maximum Temp.
(Grade)
F C
F C
A-387 Pressure vessel

(2 CL 1) plates, alloy steel, A387A 1000 537 900 482
(2 CL 2) chromium- A387G 1000 537 900 482
molybdenum:
(12 CL 1) A387B 1200 648 900 482
.5Cr-.5Mo
(12 CL 2) A387H 1200 648 900 482
.5Cr-.5Mo
(11 CL 1) A387C 1200 648 900 482
1Cr-.5Mo
(11 CL 2) A387J 1200 648 900 482
1Cr-.5Mo
(22 CL 1) A387D 1200 648 900 482
1.25Cr-.5Mo-Si
(22 CL 2) A387K 1200 648 900 482
1.25Cr-.5Mo-Si
(21 CL 1) A387E 1200 648 900 482
2.25Cr-1Mo
(21 CL 2) A387L 1200 648 900 482
2.25Cr-1Mo
A387F 1200 648 900 482
3Cr-1Mo
A387M 1200 648 900 482
3Cr-1Mo
5Cr-.5Mo
5Cr-.5Mo
A-533 Manganese-
(A CL 1) molybdenum and A533A 1000 537 650 343
(B CL 1) manganese- A533B 800 426 650 343
molybdenum-nickel
(C CL 1) A533C 800 426 650 343
alloy steel plates,
quenched and
tempered, for
pressure vessels:
C-Mn-Mo
C-Mn-Mo-Ni
C-Mn-Mo-Ni

ASME Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steel
(Grade)
F C F C
A-240 Chromium and

chromium-nickel
stainless steel plate,
sheet, and strip for
fusion-welded unfired
pressure vessels:
(304L) 18Cr - 8Ni 304L 1200 648 1200 648f
(304) 18Cr - 8Ni SS304 1500 815 1200 648

(or SS)
(316L) 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316L 850 454 800 426
(316) 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo SS316 1500 815 1200 648
(316Ti) 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo-Ti 316TI 1500 815 1200 648
(317) 18Cr - 10Ni - 3Mo SS317 1500 815 1200 648
(321) 18Cr - 10Ni - Ti SS321 1500 815 1200 648
(347) 18Cr - 10Ni - Cb SS347 1500 815 1200 648
(348) 18Cr - 10Ni - Cb SS348 1500 815 1200 648
(648) 20 Cr - 18 Ni - 6 Mo SS6MO 1382 750 1200 648
(2205) Duplex
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo S2205 600 315 650 343
(410) 13Cr SS410 1200 648 900 482
(430) 17Cr SS430 1200 648 1200 648

ASME Non-Ferrous Plate Materials
(Grade)
F C F C
B-209 Aluminum-alloy sheet

(1100) and plate: A1100 400 204 400 204
(3003) Al A3003 400 204 400 204
(5052) Al A5052 400 204 400 204
(5083) Al A5083 150 66 150 66
(5086) Al A5086 150 66 150 66
(6061) Al A6061 204 204 400 204
Al
B-171 Copper and copper

(464) alloys - Naval brass CA464 400 204 350 177
B-11 Copper plates for

(110) locomotive fireboxes CU or 400 204 150 66
Cu CA110
B-96
Copper-silicon alloy
(655) plate and sheet for CA655 350 176 350 176
pressure vessels:
Cu - Zn
B-152 Copper sheet, strip,

(122) plate, and rolled bar: CA122 400 204 150 66
Cu
B-171 Copper-nickel alloy

pressure vessels:
Cu - Ni 70/30
B-333 Hastelloy:
(B) Ni - Mo HAST or 800 426 800 426
HASTB
B-575 Hastelloy:
(C-276) Ni - Mo - Cr HASTC 1000 537 1000 537

(Grade)
F C F C
B-409 Specification for nickel-

(800) iron-chromium alloy I800 1500 815 800 426
plate, sheet, and strip:
Ni - Fe - Cr
B-424 Nickel-iron-chromium-
molybdenum-copper
alloy plate, sheet, and
(825) strip: I825 1000 537 700 371
Ni - Fe - Cr - Mo - Cu
B-463 Carpenter 20 alloy

(20Cb) plate, sheet and strip: C 20 800 426 800 426
Cr-Ni-Fe-Mo-Cu-Cb
B-168 Nickel-chromium-iron
(600) alloy plate, sheet, and INCNL 1200 648 800 426
strip, or
Inconel: I600
Ni - Cr - Fe
B-162 Nickel plate, sheet, and

(200) strip: NI or 600 315 600 315
(201) Ni NI200 600 315 600 315
Ni-Low C NI201 1200 648 1000 537
B-127 Nickel-copper alloy

(400) plate, sheet, and strip: MONEL 900 482 800 426
Ni - Cu or
M400
B-265 Titanium and titanium

(1) alloy strip, sheet, and TI35A 600 315 600 315
(2) plate: Tl 600 315 600 315
Ti or 600 315 600 315
Ti TI50A
na = material not selectable for vacuum design

ASME Design Code - Clad Plate Materials
Material Classification Grade System

Description* Material
Symbol
Vessel Base (Backing

Material)** C A285C
ASTM A-285 B A204B
ASTM A-285 C A204C
A-204 70 A 515
A-515 70 A 516
A-516 12 CL 1 A387B
A-387 12 CL 2 A387H
A-387 11 CL 1 A387C
A-387 11 CL 2 A387J
A-387 22 CL 1 A387D
A-387 22 CL 2 A387K
A-387
Cladding Material (Process

Side) 304 SS304
Stainless steel type 304L 304L
316 SS316
316L 316L
321 SS321
347 SS347
410 SS410
430 SS430
Nickel alloy 200 NI200

201 NI201
Monel 400 MONEL
Inconel 600 INCNL
Ni-Fe-Cr 800 I800
Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu 825 I825
Carpenter 20 20Cb C 20
Titanium 2 Ti
Hastelloy B B HASTB
Hastelloy C C-276 HASTC
* See Plate Materials (ASME Code) for further material descriptions.

** Only these base materials may be used with the above list of cladding materials.
No other combination may be selected.

ASME Design Code - Tube Materials
ASME Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel

ASTM Description and System Internal External System
Spec Nominal Composition Material Pressure Pressure Default
Symbol Maximum Maximum Tubesheet
(Grade)
Temp. Temp. Material
(Plate)
F C F C
A-179 Seamless cold-drawn

low-carbon steel heat CS (seamless) 900 482 900 482 A285C
exchanger and A 179 900 482 900 482 A285C
condenser tubes.
A-192 Seamless carbon steel

boiler tubes for high- A 192 1000 537 900 482 A 515
pressure service
A-210 Seamless medium

(A-1) carbon steel boiler and A210A 1000 537 900 482 A515
(C) superheater tubes A210C 1000 537 900 482 A515
A-214 Electric-resistance-
welded carbon steel CS (welded) 1000 537 900 482 A515
heat exchanger and A 214 1000 537 900 482 A515
condenser tubes
A-334 Seamless carbon steel

(1) tubes for low A334A 700 371 700 371 A 442
(6) temperature service A334B 700 371 700 371 A 442

ASME Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel
Spec Nominal Material Pressure Pressure Default
Composition Symbol Maximum Maximum Tubesheet
(Grade)
(Plate)
F C F C

(T11) intermediate alloy A199C 1200 648 900 482 A387C
(T22) steel heat exchanger A199D 1200 648 900 482 A387D
and condenser tubes:
(T21) A199E 1200 648 900 482 A387E
(T5) 1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si A199F 1200 648 900 482 A387F
2.5Cr - 1Mo
3Cr - .9Mo
5Cr - .5Mo
A-209 Seamless carbon-

(T1) molybdenum alloy A 209 1000 537 900 482 A 204
(T1A) steel boiler and A209A 1000 537 900 482 A 204
superheater tubes:
(T1B) A209B 1000 537 900 482 A 204
C - .5Mo
C - .5Mo
C - .5Mo
A-213 Seamless ferritic and

austenitic alloy steel
(T2) A213A 1000 537 900 482 A387A
boiler, superheater,
(T12) and heat exchanger A213B 1200 648 900 482 A387B
(T11) tubes: A213C 1200 648 900 482 A387C
(T22) .5Cr - .5Mo A213D 1200 648 900 482 A387D
(T21) 1Cr - .5Mo A213E 1200 648 900 482 A387E
(T5) 1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si A213F 1200 648 900 482 A387F
2.25Cr - 1Mo
3Cr - .9Mo
5Cr - .5Mo

ASME Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy Steel
Spec Nominal Material Pressure Pressure Default
Composition Maximum Maximum Tubesheet
(Grade) Symbol
(Plate)
F C F C
A-213 Seamless Ferritic

and austenitic alloy
TP304 304S 1500 815 1000 537 SS304
steel boiler,
TP304L superheater, and (or SS) 1200 648 1200 648 304L
TP316 heat exchanger 304LS 1500 815 1000 537 SS316
TP316L tubes: 316S 850 454 850 454 316L
TP321 18Cr - 8Ni 316LS 1500 815 1000 537 SS321
TP347 18Cr - 8Ni 321S 1500 815 1000 537 SS347
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 347S
16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo
18Cr - 10Ni - Ti
18Cr - 10Ni - Cb
A-249 Welded austenitic

steel boiler
superheater, heat 304W 1500 815 1000 537 SS304
exchanger, and 304LW 1200 648 1200 648 SS304
TP304 condenser tubes: 316W 1500 815 1000 537 SS316
TP304L 18Cr - 8Ni 316LW 850 454 815 426 316L
TP316 18Cr - 8Ni 321W 1500 815 1000 537 SS321
TP316L 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 347W 1500 815 1000 537 SS347
TP321 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo
TP347 18Cr - 10Ni - Ti
18Cr - 10Ni - Ti
A-268
TP410 Seamless tubes 410S 1200 648 900 482 SS410
TP410 13C 410W 1200 648 900 482 SS410
Welded tubes
13C
A-789
(S31803) Welded duplex
austenitic steel 2205W 600 315 650 343 S2205
tubes:
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo
Seamless duplex
austenitic steel 2205S 600 315 650 343 S2205
tubes:

22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo
ASME Non-Ferrous Tube Materials

ASTM Description and Nominal System Internal External System
Spec Composition Material Pressure Pressure Default
Maximum Maximum Tubesheet
(Grade) Symbol
(Plate)
F C F C
B-111 Seamless copper and

(122) copper alloy tubes for use in CA122 400 204 150 66 A285C
(687) surface condensers, CA687 450 232 150 66 A285C
evaporators and heat
(706) CA706 600 315 150 66 A285C
exchangers:
(715) CA715 700 371 100 37 A285C
(443) Cu CA443 450 232 350 176 A285C
(444) Cu - Al CA444 450 232 350 176 A285C
(445) Cu - Ni 90/10 CA445 450 232 350 176 A285C
Cu - Ni 70/30
Admiralty Brass
B-163 Seamless cold-drawn nickel

(200) tubes for general corrosive NI200 600 315 600 315 NI200
(201) service: NI201 1200 648 1000 537 NI201
Ni
Ni-Low C
B-163 Monel
(400) Ni - Cu MONEL 800 426 800 426 MONEL
B-163 Inconel
(600) Ni - Cr - Fe INCNL or 1200 648 1000 537 INCNL
I600
B-163 Incoloy
(800) Ni - Fe - Cr I800 1500 815 1000 537 I800
(825) Ni - Fe - Cr - Mo - Cu I825 1000 537 700 371 I825

ASTM Description and Nominal System Internal External System
Spec Composition Material Pressure Pressure Default
Maximum Maximum Tubesheet
(Grade) Symbol
(Plate)
F C F C
B-619 Hastelloy
(B) Ni - Mo HAST or 800 426 800 426 HASTB
(C-276) Ni - Mo - Cr HASTB 1000 537 800 426 HASTC
HASTC
B-468 Carpenter 20
(20Cb) Cr - Ni - Fe - Mo - Cu - Cb C 20 800 426 800 426 C 20
B-338 Titanium
(2) Ti TI50A 600 315 600 315 TI50A

BS Design Code - Plate Materials
BS Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel

BS* or Description and System Internal External
ASTM Spec Nominal Composition Material Pressure Pressure
and Symbol Maximum Temp. Maximum Temp.
(Grade) F C F C
A-36 (Structural steel) A 36 650 343 - -
A-283 Low and intermediate

154-430* strength carbon steel A 283C 622 327 na na
plates of structural
quality
A-285 Low and intermediate

151-400* strength carbon steel
plates for pressure A 285 or 752 400 752 400
161-400*
vessels A 285C
or CS
A-299 Carbon-manganese-
silicon steel plates for
164-400* pressure vessels: A 299 752 400 752 400
C - Mn - Si
A-455 Pressure vessel plates,

225-460* carbon steel, high A 455 752 400 752 400
strength manganese
A-515 Carbon steel plates for

224-460* pressure vessels for A 515 752 400 725 400
temperature service: C
- Si
A-516 Carbon steel plates for

pressure vessels for
224-490* moderate and lower A 516 725 400 725 400
C - Si

BS Ferrous Plate Materials - Heat Treated Steel
ASTM Nominal Composition Material Pressure Pressure
Spec Symbol Maximum Temp. Maximum Temp.
and
F C F C
(Grade)
A-353 Nine percent nickel alloy

510N* steel plates, double A 353 250 121 na na
normalized and
tempered for
pressure
vessels:
9Ni
A-553 Eight and nine percent

nickel alloy steel plate,
510* A 553 250 121 na na
quenched and
tempered, for pressure
vessels:
9Ni
A-517 High strength alloy steel

(A) plates, quenched and A517A 650 343 650 343
(B) tempered, for pressure A517B 650 343 650 343
vessels:
(E) A517E 650 343 650 343
(F) Cr - Mn - Si A517F 650 343 650 343
Cr - Mn - Si
Cr - Mn - Si
Cr - Mn - Si

and
F C F C
(Grade)
A-202 Chromium-manganese-
(A) silicon alloy steel plates A202A 1000 537 900 482
(B) for pressure vessels A 202 1000 537 900 482
or
A202B
A-203 Nickel alloy steel plates

(A) for pressure vessels: A203A 1000 537 900 482
(B) 2.5Ni A203B 1000 537 900 482
(E) 2.5Ni A203E 1000 537 900 482
503* 3.5Ni A203D 122 50 122 50
3.5Ni
A-204 Molybdenum alloy steel

(C) plates for pressure A 204 1000 537 900 482
240* vessels: A204C 752 400 752 400
261* C - .5Mo A204A 752 400 752 400
C - .5Mo A204B
C - .5Mo
A-302 Manganese-
molybdenum and
(A) A302A 1000 537 900 482
manganese-
(B) molybdenum-nickel A 302 1000 537 900 482
(C) alloy steel plates for or 1000 537 900 482
(D) pressure vessels: A302B 1000 537 900 482
Mn - .5Mo A302C
Mn - .5Mo A302D
Mn - .5Mo - Ni
Mn - .5Mo - Ni

(continued)
BS* or Description and System Internal External Pressure
ASTM Nominal Material Pressure Maximum Temp.
Spec Composition Symbol Maximum Temp.
F C
and
F C
(Grade)
A-387 Pressure vessel

plates, alloy steel,
(2 CL 1) chromium- A387A 842 450 842 450
(2 CL 2) molybdenum: A387G 842 450 842 450
620* .5Cr - .5Mo A387B 842 450 842 450
(12 CL 2) .5Cr - .5Mo A387H 896 480 896 480
621* 1Cr - .5Mo A387C 842 450 842 450
(11 CL 2) 1Cr - .5Mo A387J 896 480 896 480
622- 1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si A387D 842 450 842 450
515* 1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si A387K 896 480 896 480
(22 CL 2) 2.25Cr - 1Mo A387E 896 896 480
(21 CL 1) 2.25Cr - 1Mo A387L 896 480 896 480
(21 CL 2) 3Cr - 1Mo A387F 896 480 896 480
(5 CL 1) 3Cr - 1Mo A387M 896 480 896 480
(5 CL 2) 5Cr - .5Mo 480
5Cr - .5Mo
A-533 Manganese-
(A CL 1) molybdenum and A533A 1000 537 650 343
(B CL 1) manganese- A533B 800 426 650 343
(C CL 1) molybdenum-nickel A533C 800 426 650 343
alloy steel plates,
quenched and
tempered, for
pressure vessels:
C - Mn - Mo
C - Mn - Mo - Ni
C - Mn - Mo - Ni

BS Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steel
BS* or Description and System Internal External Pressure
ASTM Nominal Material Pressure Maximum Temp.
Spec and Composition Symbol Maximum Temp.
F C
(Grade) F C
A-240 Chromium and

chromium-nickel
(317) SS317 1292 700 1200 648
stainless steel plate,
(348) sheet, and strip for SS348 1292 700 1200 648
318-S13* fusion-welded unfired S2205 600 315 650 343
pressure vessels:
18Cr - 10Ni - 3Mo
18Cr - 10Ni - Cb
Duplex
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo
(410) 13Cr SS410 1200 648 900 482

(430) 17Cr SS430 1200 648 1200 648
304-S31* 18Cr - 8Ni SS304 1292 700 1200 648
304-S11* 18Cr - 8Ni 304L 752 400 752 400
316-S31* 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo SS316 1292 700 1200 648
316-S11* 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316L 752 400 752 400
320-517* 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo - 316TI 1292 700 1200 648
321-S31* Ti SS321 1292 700 1200 648
347-S31* 18Cr - 10Ni - Ti SS321 1292 700 1200 648
18Cr - 10Ni - Cb
BS Non-Ferrous Plate Materials

and
F C F C
(Grade)
1470* Aluminum-alloy sheet

(1100)* and plate: A1100 400 204 na na
(3003)* Al A3003 400 204 na na
(5052)* Al A5052 400 204 na na
(5083)* Al A5083 150 66 na na
(5086)* Al A5086 150 66 na na
(6061)* Al A6061 400 204 na na
Al

B-171 Copper and copper
(464) alloys - Naval brass CA464 400 204 200 93
B-11 Copper plates for

(110) locomotive fireboxes: CU or 400 204 150 66
Cu CA110
B-96 Copper-silicon alloy

pressure vessels:
Cu - Zn
B-152 Copper sheet, strip,

(122) plate, and rolled bar: CA122 400 204 150 66
Cu
B-171 Copper-nickel alloy

pressure vessels:
Cu - Ni 70/30
BS Non-Ferrous Plate Materials (continued)

Spec Symbol Maximum Maximum Temp.
and Temp.
F C
(Grade) F C
B-333 Hastelloy:
(B) Ni - Mo HAST or 800 426 800 426
HASTB
B-575 Hastelloy:
(C-276) Ni - Mo - Cr HASTC 1000 537 800 426
B-409 Specification for nickel-

(800) iron-chromium alloy plate, I800 1292 700 800 426
sheet, and strip:
Ni - Fe - Cr
NA15* molybdenum-copper alloy I825 500 260 400 204
Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu

Spec Symbol Maximum Maximum Temp.
and Temp.
F C
(Grade) F C
B-463 Carpenter 20 alloy plate,

(20Cb) sheet and strip: C 20 800 426 800 426
Cr - Ni - Fe - Mo - Cu - Cb
B-168 Nickel-chromium-iron
(600) alloy plate, sheet, and INCNL or 1200 648 800 426
strip: I600
Ni-Cr-Fe
B-162 Nickel plate, sheet, and

(200) strip: NI or 600 315 600 315
(201) Ni NI200 600 315 600 315
Ni-Low C NI201 1200 648 800 426
B-127 Nickel-copper alloy plate,

(400) sheet, and strip: MONEL or 900 482 800 426
Ni - Cu M400
B-265 Titanium and titanium

(1) alloy strip, sheet, TI35A 600 315 na na
(2) Ti TI or 600 315 600 315
Ti TI50A 600 315 600 315

BS Design Code - Clad Plate Materials

Description Material
Symbol
Vessel Base (Backing Material)**
161-400 ASTM
A-285 C A285C
261 A-204 B A204B
A-204 C A204C
224-460 A-515 70 A 515
224-490 A-516 70 A 516
620 A-387 12 CL 1 A387B
620 A-387 12 CL 2 A387H
621 A-387 11 CL 1 A387C
621 A-387 11 CL 2 A387J
622-515 A-387 22 CL 1 A387D
622-515 A-387 22 CL 2 A387K
Cladding Material (Process Side)
304-S31 304 SS304
304-S11 304L 304L
316-S31 316 SS316
316-S11 316L 316L
321-S31 321 SS321
347-S31 347 SS347
410 SS410
430 SS430
201 NI201
Monel 400 MONEL
Inconel 600 INCNL

Description Material
Symbol
Ni-Fe-Cr 800 I800
Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu 825 I825
Carpenter 20 20Cb C 20
Titanium 2 TI
Hastelloy B B HASTB
Hastelloy C C-276 HASTC
* See Plate Materials (BS Code) for further material descriptions.


BS Design Code - Tube Materials
BS Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel

BS* Description and System Internal External System
Nominal Material Pressure Pressure Default
or ASTM
Spec and Symbol
(Grade) (Plate)
F C F C

320* low-carbon steel heat A 179 752 400 752 400 A285C
exchanger and
condenser tubes
A-192 Seamless carbon

410* steel boiler tubes for A 192 752 400 752 400 A 515
high-pressure service
A-210 Seamless medium

(A-1) carbon steel boiler A210A 1000 537 900 482 A 515
(C) and superheater A210C 1000 537 900 482 A 515
tubes
A-214 Electric-resistance-
360* welded carbon steel A 214 842 450 842 450 A 515
heat exchanger and
condenser tubes
A-334 Seamless carbon

410-LT50* steel tubes for low A334A 700 371 700 371 A 442
(6) temperature service A334B 700 371 700 371 A 442

BS Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel
BS* Description and System Internal External System
or ASTM
Spec and
(Grade) (Plate)
F C F C

intermediate alloy
steel heat exchanger
(T11) and condenser tubes: A199C 1022 550 900 482 A387C
(T22) 1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si A199D 1022 550 900 482 A387D
(T21) 2.5Cr - 1Mo A199E 1022 550 900 482 A387E
(T5) 3Cr - .9Mo A199F 1022 550 900 482 A387F
5Cr - .5Mo
A-209 Seamless carbon-

(T1) molybdenum alloy A 209 1000 537 900 482 A 204
245-450* steel boiler and A209A 752 400 752 400 A 204
superheater tubes:
(T1B) A209B 1000 537 900 482 A 204
C - .5Mo
C - .5Mo
C - .5Mo
A-213 Seamless ferritic and

(T2) austenitic alloy steel A213A 1000 537 900 482 A387A
(T21) boiler, superheater, A213E 1022 550 900 482 A387E
and heat exchanger
620-460* A213B 1022 550 900 482 A387B
tubes:
620-460* A213C 1022 550 900 482 A387C
622-490* .5Cr - .5Mo A213D 1022 550 900 482 A387D
625-450* 3Cr - .9Mo A213F 1022 550 900 482 A387F
1Cr - .5Mo
1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si
2.25Cr - 1Mo
5Cr - .5Mo

BS Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy Steel
BS* or Description and System Internal External System
ASTM Nominal Material Pressure Pressure Default
Spec and Composition Symbol Maximum Maximum Tubesheet
(Grade)
(Plate)
F C F C
A-213 Seamless Ferritic

steel boiler,
superheater, and
heat exchanger
tubes:
304-S18* 18Cr - 8Ni 304S 842 450 842 450 SS304
304-S14* 18Cr - 8Ni 304LS 752 400 752 400 304L
316-S18* 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316S 842 450 842 450 SS316
316-S14* 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316LS 842 450 800 426 316L
321-S18* 18Cr - 10Ni - Ti 321S 842 450 842 450 SS321
347-S18* 18Cr - 10Ni - Cb 347S 842 450 842 450 SS347
A-249 Welded austenitic

steel boiler
superheater, heat
exchanger, and
condenser tubes:
304-S25* 18Cr - 8Ni 304W 842 450 842 450 SS304
304-S22* 18Cr - 8Ni 304LW 752 400 752 400 304L
316-S26* 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316W 842 450 842 450 SS316
316-S22* 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316LW 842 450 800 426 316L
321-S22* 18Cr - 10Ni - Ti 321W 842 450 842 450 SS321
347-S17* 18Cr - 10Ni - Cb 347W 842 450 842 450 SS347
A-268
TP410 Seamless tubes 410S 752 400 752 400 SS410
TP410 13 Cr
Welded tubes
13 Cr 410W 752 400 752 400 SS410
A-789 Welded duplex

(S31803) austenitic steel 2205W 600 315 650 343 S2205
tubes:
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo
Seamless duplex
tubes:
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo

BS Non-Ferrous Tube Materials
BS*or Description and System Internal External System
ASTM Nominal Composition Material Pressure Pressure Default
Spec and Symbol Maximum Maximum Tubesheet
(Grade)
(Plate)
F C F C
B-111 Seamless copper and

copper alloy tubes for use
in surface condensers,
exchangers:
(122) CA122 400 204 150 66 A285C
Cu
(687) CA687 450 230 200 93 A285C
Cu - Al
(708) CA706 600 315 150 66 A285C
Cu - Ni 90/10
(715) CA715 700 371 200 93 A285C
Cu - Ni 70/30
(443) Admiralty Brass CA443 450 232 200 93 A285C

(444) CA444 450 232 200 93 A285C
(445) CA445 450 232 200 93 A285C
B-163 Seamless cold-drawn

nickel tubes for general
corrosive service: NI200 600 315 600 315 NI200
(200) Ni NI201 1200 648 800 426 NI201
(201) Ni - Low C
B-163 Monel (Seamless)

(400) Ni - Cu MONEL 900 482 800 426 MONEL
B-163 Inconel (Welded)

(600) Ni - Cr - Fe INCNL 1200 648 800 426 INCNL
or
I600
B-163 Incoloy
(800) Ni - Fe - Cr (Welded) I800 1292 700 800 426 I800
(825) Ni - Fe - Cr - Mo I825 1000 537 500 260 I825
- Cu (Seamless)
B-619 Hastelloy (Welded)

HASTC
B-468 Carpenter 20 (Welded)

(20Cb) Cr - Ni - Fe - Mo- Cu - Cb C 20 800 426 800 426 C 20
B-338 Titanium (Welded) TI50A 600 315 600 315 TI50A

(2) Ti

JIS Design Code - Plate Materials
JIS Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel

JIS*or Description and Nominal System Internal External
ASTM Composition Material Pressure Pressure
Spec and Symbol Maximum Temp.
Degrees Degrees
(Grade)
F C F C
G-3101* (structural steel)

SS400* A 36 650 343 - -
G-3106* Low and intermediate strength

SM520C* carbon steel plates of structural A 283 C 662 350 na na
quality
G-3115* Low and intermediate strength

SPV355* steel plates for pressure vessels A 285 or 662 350 662 350
A 285C
or
CS
G-3115* Carbon-manganese-silicon steel

SPV450* plates for pressure vessels: A 299 662 350 662 350
C - Mn - Si
A-455 Pressure vessel plates, carbon

(A) steel, high strength manganese A 455 650 343 650 343
G-3118* Carbon steel plates for pressure

SGV480* vessels for intermediate and A 515 662 350 662 350
higher temperature service
C - Si
G-3126* Carbon steel plates for pressure

SLA360* vessels for moderate and lower A 516 662 350 662 350
C - Si

JIS Ferrous Plate Materials - Heat Treated Steel
Degrees Degrees
(Grade)
F C F C
G-3127* Nine percent nickel alloy steel

SL9N520* plates, double normalized and A 353 392 200 na na
tempered for pressure vessels:
9Ni
G-3127* Eight and nine percent nickel

SL9N590* alloy steel plate, quenched and A 553 392 200 na na
tempered, for pressure vessels:
9Ni
A-517 High strength alloy steel plates,

quenched and tempered, for
pressure vessels:
(A) Cr - Mn - Si A517A 650 343 650 343
(B) Cr - Mn - Si A517B 650 343 650 343
(E) Cr - Mn - Si A517E 650 343 650 343
(E) Cr - Mn - Si A517E 650 343 650 343

JIS Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steel
Degrees Degrees
(Grade)
F C F C
A-202 Chromium-manganese-silicon
(A) alloy steel plates for pressure A202A 1000 537 900 482
vessels A 202 or 1000 537 900 482
(B)
A202B
G-3127* Nickel alloy steel plates for

SL2N255* pressure vessels: A203A 392 200 392 200
(B) 2.5Ni A203B 1000 537 900 482
SL3N255* 2.5Ni A203D 392 200 122 50
SL3N275* 3.5Ni A203E 392 200 392 200
3.5Ni
G-3103* Molybdenum alloy steel

SB450M* plates for pressure vessels: A204A 1022 550 752 400
SB480M* C - .5Mo A204B 1022 550 752 400
(C) C - .5Mo A204 or 1000 537 900 482
C - .5Mo A204C
G-3119* Manganese-molybdenum and

SBV1A* manganese-molybdenum-nickel A302A 977 525 900 482
SBV1B* alloy steel plates for pressure A 302 1022 550 900 482
vessels:
SBV2* or A302B 1022 550 900 482
SBV2* Mn - .5Mo A302C 1022 550 900 482
Mn - .5Mo A302D
Mn - .5Mo - Ni
Mn - .5Mo - Ni

Degrees Degrees
(Grade)
F C F C
G-4109* Pressure vessel plates, alloy

SCMV1(A)* steel, chromium-molybdenum: A387A 1022 550 900 482
SCMV1(N)* .5Cr - .5Mo A387G 1022 550 900 482
SCMV2(A)* .5Cr - .5Mo A387B 1157 625 842 450
SCMV2(N)* 1Cr - .5Mo A387H 1157 625 842 450
SCMV3(A)* 1Cr - .5Mo A387C 1157 625 896 480
SCMV3(N)* 1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si A387J 1157 625 896 480
SCMV4(A)* 1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si A387D 1067 575 896 480
SCMV4(N)* 2.25Cr - 1Mo A387K 1067 575 896 480
SCMV5(A)* 2.25Cr - 1Mo A387E 1157 625 896 480
SCMV5(N)* 3Cr - 1Mo A387L 1157 625 896 480
SCMV6(A)* 3Cr - 1Mo A387F 1157 625 896 480
SCMV6(N)* 5Cr - .5Mo A387M 1157 625 896 480
Cr - .5Mo
G-3120* Manganese-molybdenum and

SQV1A* manganese-molybdenum-nickel A533A 1022 550 na na
SQV2A* alloy steel plates, quenched and A533B 797 425 na na
SQV3A* A533C 797 425 na na
C - Mn - Mo
C - Mn - Mo-Ni
C - Mn - Mo-Ni

JIS Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steel
Degrees Degrees
(Grade)
F C F C
G-4303* Chromium and chromium-nickel

G-4304* stainless steel plate, sheet, and 304L 797 425 752 400
G-4305* strip for fusion-welded unfired SS304 1472 800 1200 648
pressure vessels:
SUS304L* 316L 842 450 752 400
SUS304* SS316 1472 800 1200 648
SUS316L* 18Cr - 8Ni SS316TI 1472 800 1200 648
SUS316* 18Cr - 8Ni SS317 1472 800 1200 648
SUS316* 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo SS321 1472 800 1200 648
SUS317* 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo SS347 1472 800 1200 648
SUS321* 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo-Ti SS348 1500 815 1200 648
SUS347* 18Cr - 10Ni - 3Mo S2205 600 315 650 343
(348) 18Cr - 10Ni - Ti
(2205) 18Cr - 10Ni - Cb
18Cr - 10Ni - Cb
Duplex
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo
SUS410* 13Cr SS410 1202 650 900 482

SUS430* 17Cr SS430 1202 650 1200 648

JIS Non-Ferrous Plate Materials
Degrees Degrees
(Grade)
F C F C
H-4000* Aluminum-alloy sheet and plate:

A1100P* Al A1100 392 200 na na
A3003P* Al A3003 392 200 na na
A5052P* Al A5052 392 200 na na
A5083P* Al A5083 150 66 na na
A5086P* Al A5086 150 66 na na
A6061P* Al A6061 392 200 na na
H-3100* Copper and copper alloys - Naval CA464 392 200 350 177
C4640P* brass
H3100* Copper plates for locomotive

C1100P* fireboxes: CU or 392 200 150 66
Cu CA110
B-96 Copper-silicon alloy plate and

(B55) sheet for pressure vessels: CA655 350 176 350 176
Cu - Zn
H-3100* Copper sheet, strip, plate, and

C1220P* rolled bar: CA122 392 200 150 66
Cu
H-3100* Copper-nickel alloy plate and

C7150P* sheet for pressure vessels: CA715 662 350 662 350
Cu - Ni 70/30
B-333 Hastelloy:
(B) Ni - Mo HAST or 800 426 800 426
HASTB
B-575 Hastelloy:
(C-276) Ni - Mo - Cr HASTC 1000 537 1000 537
G-4902* Specification for nickel-iron-

NCF800* chromium alloy plate, sheet, and I800 1472 800 1000 537
strip:
Ni - Fe - Cr
(825) molybdenum- copper alloy I825 1000 537 700 371

Degrees Degrees
(Grade)
F C F C
B-463 Carpenter 20 alloy plate, sheet

(20Cb) and strip: C 20 800 426 800 426
G-4902* Nickel-chromium-iron alloy plate,

NCF600* sheet, and strip, INCNL 1202 650 1000 537
Inconel: Ni - Cr - Fe or
I600
B-162 Nickel plate, sheet, and strip:

(200) Ni NI or 600 315 600 315
(201) Ni-Low C NI200 600 315 600 315
NI201 1200 648 1000 537
H-4551* Nickel-copper alloy plate, sheet,

NCuP* and strip: MONEL 932 500 800 426
Ni - Cu or
M400
H-4600* Titanium and titanium alloy strip,

TP28* sheet, and plate: TI35A 662 350 na na
TP35* Ti TI or 662 350 600 315
Ti TI50A 662 350 600 315

JIS Design Code - Clad Plate Materials
Material Classification Description Grade System
Material
Symbol
SPV350 ASTM A-285 C A285C

SB480M A-204 B A204B
SGV480 A-204 C A204C
SLA360 A-515 70 A 515
SCMV2(A) A-516 70 A 516
SCMV2(A) A-387 12 CL 1 A387B
SCMV3(A) A-387 12 CL 2 A387H
SCMV3(A) A-387 11 CL 1 A387C
SCMV4(A) A-387 11 CL 2 A387J
SCMV4(A) A-387 22 CL 1 A387D
A-387 22 CL 2 A387K
Stainless steel type

SUS304 304 SS304
SUS304L 304L 304L
SUS316 316 SS316
SUS316L 316L 316L
SUS321 321 SS321
SUS321 347 SS347
SUS321 410 SS410
SUS430 430 SS430
Monel 201 NI201
NCUP 400 MONEL
Inconel 600 INCNL
NCF600 800 I800
Ni-Fe-CR 825 I825
Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu 20 CB C 20
Carpenter 20 2 Ti
Titanium B HASTB
Hastelloy B C-276 HASTC
Hastelloy C
* See Plate Materials (JIS Code) for further material descriptions.


JIS Design Code - Tube Materials
JIS Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel

JIS* Description and System Internal External System
or ASTM
Spec and Symbol
(Grade) (Plate)
F C F C
G-3461* Seamless cold-drawn

STB340* low-carbon steel heat A 179 1022 550 752 400 A285C
exchanger and
condenser tubes
A-192 Seamless carbon steel A 192 1000 537 900 482 A 515
boiler tubes for high-
pressure service
G-3461* Seamless medium

STB510* carbon steel boiler and A210A 1022 550 900 482 A 515
STB410* superheater tubes A210C 1022 550 900 482 A 515
G-3461* Electric-resistance-
STB340* welded carbon steel A 214 1022 550 900 482 A 515
heat exchanger and
condenser tubes
G-3464* Seamless carbon steel

(1) tubes for low A334A 700 371 700 371 A 442
STBL380* temperature service A334B 700 371 700 371 A 442

JIS Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel
Nominal Composition Material Pressure Pressure Default
or ASTM
Maximum Temp. Tubesheet
Spec and Symbol
Degrees Degrees Material
(Grade) (Plate)
F C F C
G-3462* Seamless cold-drawn

STBA23* intermediate alloy steel A199C 1202 650 900 482 A387C
STBA24* heat exchanger and A199D 1202 650 900 482 A387D
condenser tubes:
(T21) A199E 1200 648 900 482 A387E
STBA25* 1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si A199F 1202 650 900 482 A387F
G-3462* 2.5Cr - 1Mo A 209 1022 550 900 482 A 204
3Cr - .9Mo A209A 1022 550 900 482 A 204
STBA12* 5Cr - .5Mo A209B 1000 537 900 482 A 204
STBA13* Seamless carbon-
(T1B) molybdenum alloy steel
boiler and superheater
tubes:
C - .5Mo
C - .5Mo
C - .5Mo
G-3462* Seamless ferritic and

STBA20* austenitic alloy steel A213A 1022 550 900 482 A387A
STBA20* boiler, superheater, A213B 1202 650 900 482 A387B
and heat exchanger
(T11) A213C 1200 648 900 482 A387C
tubes:
(T22) A213D 1200 648 900 482 A387D
(T21) .5Cr - .5Mo A213E 1200 648 900 482 A387E
(T5) 1Cr - .5Mo A213F 1200 648 900 483 A387F
1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si
2.25Cr - 1Mo
3Cr - .9Mo
5Cr - .5Mo

JIS Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy Steel
or ASTM
Spec and Symbol
(Grade) (Plate)
F C F C
G-3463* Seamless Ferritic

steel boiler,
superheater, and
heat exchanger
tubes:
SUS304TB* 18Cr - 8Ni 304S 1472 800 842 450 SS304
SUS304LTB* 18Cr - 8Ni 304LS 797 425 752 450 304L
SUS316TB* 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316S 1472 800 842 450 SS316
SUS316LTB* 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316LS 842 450 842 450 316L
SUS321TB* 18Cr - 10Ni - Ti 321S 1472 800 842 400 SS321
SUS347TB* 18Cr - 10Ni - Cb 347S 1472 800 842 450 SS347
G-3463* Welded austenitic

steel boiler
superheater, heat
exchanger, and
condenser tubes:
SUS304TB* 18Cr - 8Ni 304W 1472 800 842 450 SS304

SUS304LTB* 18Cr - 8Ni 304LW 797 425 752 400 304L
SUS316TB* 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316W 1472 800 842 450 SS316
SUS316LTB* 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316LW 842 450 842 450 316L
SUS321TB* 18Cr - 10Ni - Ti 321W 1472 800 842 450 SS321
SUS347TB* 18Cr - 10Ni - Cb 347W 1472 800 842 450 SS347
A-268
Seamless tubes 410S 752 400 752 400 SS410
13Cr
TP 410 Welded tubes
TP 410 13Cr 410W 752 400 752 400 SS410
A-789 Welded duplex

tubes:
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo
A-789 Seamless duplex

(S31803) austenitic steel 2205S 600 315 650 343 S2205
tubes:
22Cr - 5Ni - 3M

JIS Non-Ferrous Tube Materials
JIS*or Description and System Internal External System
ASTM Spec Nominal Composition Material Pressure Pressure Default
and Symbol Maximum Maximum Tubesheet
(Grade)
(Plate)
F C F C
H-3300* Seamless copper and

C1220T* copper alloy tubes for CA122 392 200 150 66 A285C
C6871T* use in surface CA687 392 200 150 66 A285C
condensers, evaporators
C7060T* CA706 572 300 150 66 A285C
and heat exchangers:
C7150T* CA715 662 350 700 371 A285C
Cu
Cu - Al
Cu - Ni 90/10
Cu - Ni 70/30
C4430T* Admiralty Brass CA443 437 225 350 176 A285C

(444) CA444 450 232 350 176 A285C
(445) CA445 450 232 350 176 A285C
B-163 Seamless cold-drawn

(200) nickel tubes for general NI200 600 315 600 315 NI200
(201) corrosive service: NI201 1200 648 1000 537 NI201
Ni
Ni-Low C
H-4552* Monel
NCuT* Ni - Cu MONEL 887 475 752 400 MONEL
G-4904* Inconel
NCF600TB* Ni - Cr - Fe INCNL 1202 650 1000 537 INCNL
or I600
G-4904* Incoloy
NCF800TB* Ni - Fe - Cr I800 1472 800 1000 537 I800
NCF825TB* Ni - Fe - Cr - Mo - Cu I825 1000 537 700 371 1825
B-619 Hastelloy
HASTC
B-468 Carpenter 20
(20Cb) Cr - Ni - Fe - Mo - Cu - C 20 800 426 800 426 C 20
Cb
H-4650* Titanium
TB35* Ti TI50A 662 350 600 315 TI50A

DIN Design Code - Plate Materials
DIN Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel

DIN*or ASTM Description and System Internal External
Spec and Nominal Composition Material Pressure Pressure
Symbol Maximum Temp.
(Grade)
Degrees Degrees
F C F C
DIN EN 10025- (structural steel) A 36 842 450 - -

91*
S235JRG1*
DIN EN 10025- Low and intermediate

91* strength carbon steel A 283C 842 450 na na
S235JRG2* plates of structural quality
DIN 17155* Low and intermediate

HII* strength steel plates for A 285 or 842 450 842 450
pressure vessels A 285C
or
CS
DIN 17102* Carbon-manganese-silicon

StE 355* steel plates for A 299 752 400 752 400
pressure vessels:
C - Mn - Si
A-455 Pressure vessel plates,

(A) carbon steel, high A 455 650 343 650 343
strength manganese
DIN 17155* Carbon steel plates for

19Mn6 pressure vessels for A 515 842 450 842 450
DIN 17155* Carbon steel plates for

19Mn6* pressure vessels for A 516 842 450 842 450
moderate and lower
C - Si

DIN Ferrous Plate Materials - Heat Treated Steel
DIN* Description and Nominal System Internal External
Composition Material Pressure Pressure
or ASTM
Maximum Temp.
Spec and Symbol
Degrees Degrees
(Grade)
F C F C
SEW 680* Nine percent nickel alloy steel

X8Ni9* plates, double normalized and A 353 250 121 na na
tempered for pressure vessels:
SEW 680* Eight and nine percent nickel

X8Ni9* alloy steel plate, quenched and A 553 250 121 na na
A-517 High strength alloy steel plates,

(A) quenched and tempered, for A517A 650 343 650 343
(B) pressure vessels: A517B 650 343 650 343
(E) Cr - Mn - Si A517E 650 343 650 343
(F) Cr - Mn - Si A517F 650 343 650 343
Cr - Mn - Si
Cr - Mn - Si

DIN Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steel
DIN*or Description and System Internal External
Nominal Material Pressure Pressure
ASTM Spec and
Symbol
(Grade) Degrees Degrees
F C F C
A 202 Chromium-
(A) manganese-silicon A202A 932 500 900 482
(B) alloy steel plates for A 202 or 932 500 900 482
pressure vessels
A202B
SEW 680* Nickel alloy steel

14Ni6* plates for pressure A203A 932 500 900 482
10Ni14* vessels: A203B 932 500 900 482
(D) 3.5Ni A203D 932 500 900 482
(E) 3.5Ni A203E 932 500 900 482
DIN 17155* Molybdenum alloy

15Mo3* steel plates for A204A 932 500 900 482
(B) pressure vessels: A204B 932 500 900 482
(C) C - .5Mo A 204 or 932 500 900 482
C - .5Mo A204C
Manganese-
VdTUV Wbl.376 WB35* molybdenum and A302A 932 500 900 482
VdTUV Wbl.377 WB36* manganese- A 302 or 932 500 900 482
molybdenum-nickel A302B
VdTUV Wbl.378* 500 900 482
alloy steel plates for
VdTUV Wbl384 WB34* pressure vessels: 500 900 482
A302C 932
A302D 932
17Mn Mo V64*
15Ni Cu Mo Nb5*
12Mn Ni Mo55*
13Mn Ni Mo54*
Pressure vessel
(A) plates, alloy steel, A387A 932 500 900 482
(G) chromium- A387G 932 500 900 482
molybdenum:
DIN 17155* A387B 932 500 900 482
DIN 17155* .5Cr - .5Mo A387H 932 500 900 482
(C) .5Cr - .5Mo A387C 932 500 900 482
(J) 13Cr Mo44* A387J 932 500 900 482
DIN 17155* 13Cr Mo44* A387D 932 500 900 482
VdTUV Wbl.404* 1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si A387K 932 500 900 482

DIN*or Description and System Internal External
Nominal Material Pressure Pressure
ASTM Spec and
Symbol
F C F C
VdTUV Wbl.007* 1.25Cr - .5Mo - Si A387E 932 500 900 482

VdTUV Wbl.007* 10Cr Mo910* A387L 932 500 900 482
(F) 12Cr Mo910* A387F 932 500 900 482
(M) 12Cr Mo195* A387M 932 500 900 482
12Cr Mo195*
5Cr - .5Mo
Cr - .5Mo
SEW 640* Manganese-

(A) molybdenum and A533A 932 500 650 343
manganese- A533B 800 426 650 343
molybdenum-nickel
A533C 800 426 650 343
alloy steel plates,
quenched and
tempered, for
pressure vessels:
C - Mn - Mo
20 Mn Mo Ni55*
12 Mn Ni Mo55*

DIN Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steel
DIN* Description and Nominal System Internal External
Composition Material Pressure Pressure
or ASTM
Maximum Temp.
Spec and Symbol
Degrees Degrees
(Grade)
F C F C
DIN Chromium and chromium-nickel

17440* stainless steel plate, sheet, and
(348) strip for fusion-welded unfired
(2205) pressure vessels:
304L 1022 550 752 400
X2 Cr Ni1911* SS304 1022 550 1022 550
X5 Cr Ni1810* 316L 1022 550 752 400
X2 Cr Ni Mo17132* SS316 1022 550 1022 550
X5 Cr Ni Mo17122* 316TI 1022 550 1022 550
X6 Cr Ni Mo Ti 17122* SS317 1022 550 1022 550
X2 Cr Ni Mo18164* SS321 1022 550 1022 550
X6 Cr Ni Ti1810* SS347 1022 550 1022 550
X6 Cr Ni Nb1810* SS348 1022 550 1022 550
Duplex S2205 600 315 650 343
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo
DIN X10 Cr13* SS410 752 400 900 482

17440* X6 Cr17* SS430 1022 550 1200 648

DIN Non-Ferrous Plate Materials
DIN*or Description and Nominal System Internal External
ASTM Spec Composition Material Pressure Pressure
and Symbol Maximum Temp.
F C F C
DIN 1745 Aluminum-alloy sheet and

A1100P* plate: A1100 392 200 na na
Al A3003 392 200 na na
Al Mn Cu* A5052 392 200 na na
Al Mg 2.5* A5083 150 66 na na
Al Mg 4.5* Mn* A5086 150 66 na na
Al Mg 4 Mn* A6061 392 200 na na
Al Mg 7.5 Si Cu*
DIN 17660* Copper and copper alloys -

Naval brass CA464 392 200 350 177
Cu Zn38 Sn1*
DIN 1787* Copper plates for locomotive

fireboxes: CU or 392 200 150 66
E Cu58* or CA110
E Cu59*
B-96 Copper-silicon alloy plate and

(655) sheet for pressure vessels: CA655 350 176 350 176
Cu - Zn
DIN 1787* Copper sheet, strip, plate, and

rolled bar: CA122 392 200 150 66
SF-Cu
DIN 17664* Copper-nickel alloy plate and

sheet for pressure vessels: CA715 662 350 662 350
Cu Ni 30 Mn1 Fe*
B-333 Hastelloy:
(B) Ni - Mo HAST or 800 426 800 426
HASTB
B-575 Hastelloy:
(C-276) Ni - Mo - Cr HASTC 1022 550 1000 537
VdTUV Specification for nickel-iron-

Wbl.412* chromium alloy plate, sheet, I800 1022 550 1000 537
NCF800* and strip:
X10 Ni Cr Al Ti 3220*
(825) molybdenum-copper alloy I825 1000 537 700 371

DIN*or Description and Nominal System Internal External
ASTM Spec Composition Material Pressure Pressure
and Symbol Maximum Temp.
F C F C
B-463 Carpenter 20 alloy plate, sheet

(20Cb) and strip: C 20 800 426 800 426
VdTUV Nickel-chromium-iron alloy

Wbl.305* plate, sheet, and strip, INCNL 1022 550 1000 537
Inconel: or
Ni Cr15 Fe I600
B-162 Nickel plate, sheet, and strip:

(200) Ni NI or 600 315 600 315
(201) Ni-Low C NI200 600 315 600 315
NI201 600 315 1000 537
DIN 17750* Nickel-copper alloy plate,

sheet, and strip: MONEL 900 482 800 426
Ni Cu 30 Fe F45* or
M400
DIN 17860* Titanium and titanium alloy

3.7025.10* strip, sheet, and plate: TI35A 600 315 na na
3.7035.10* Ti TI or 600 315 600 315
Ti TI50A 600 315 600 315

DIN Design Code - Clad Plate Materials
Material Classification Description Grade System Material Symbol
DIN 17102 St E 355 C A285C

A-204 (B) ASTM A-204 B A204B
DIN 17155 ASTM A -204 C A204C
DIN 17102 19 Mn5 70 A 515
DIN 17155 SIE 315 70 A 516
DIN 17155 13Cr Mo44 12 CL 1 A387B
A-387 (C) 13Cr Mo44 12 CL 2 A387H
A-387 ASTM A-387 11 CL 1 A387C
DIN 17155 ASTM A-387 11 CL 2 A387J
DIN 17155 10Cr Mo 910 22 CL 1 A387D
10Cr Mo 910 22 CL 2 A387K
Stainless steel type

DIN 17440 304 SS304
X5 Cr Ni189* 304L 304L
X2 Cr Ni189* 316 SS316
X5 Cr Ni Mo1810* 316L 316L
X2 Cr Ni Mo1810* 321 SS321
X10 Cr Ni Ti189* 347 SS347
X10 Cr Ni Nb1810* 410 SS410
X10 Cr13* 430 SS430
X8 Cr17* 200 NI200
Monel 400 MONEL
NCUP 600 INCNL
VdTUV Wbl.305* I800
Ni Cr15 Fe 800 I825
Ni-Fe-Cr 825 C 20
Ni-Fe-Cr-Mo-Cu 20Cb Ti
Carpenter 20 2 HASTB
Titanium B HASTC
Hastelloy B C-276
Hastelloy C
* See Plate Materials (German Code) for further material descriptions.


DIN Design Code - Tube Materials
DIN Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel

DIN* Description and System Internal External System
or ASTM
Spec and Symbol
(Grade) (Plate)
F C F C
DIN 2391* Seamless cold-drawn

St 35GBK low-carbon steel heat A 179 1022 550 752 400 A285C
NBK* exchanger and
condenser tubes
DIN 1629* Seamless carbon steel

St 37.0* boiler tubes for high- A 192 1000 537 900 482 A 515
pressure service
DIN 1629* Seamless medium

St 44.0* carbon steel boiler and A210A 1022 550 900 482 A 515
St 52.0* superheater tubes A210C 1022 550 900 482 A 515
DIN 2393* Electric-resistance-

St 37-2 welded carbon steel A 214 1022 550 900 482 A 515
NBK* heat exchanger and
condenser tubes
SEW 680* Seamless carbon steel

TTSt 35N* tubes for low A334A 700 371 700 371 A 442
(B) temperature service A334B 700 371 700 371 A 442

DIN Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel
DIN*or Description and System Internal External System
ASTM Nominal Material Pressure Pressure Default
Spec and Composition Symbol Maximum Maximum Tubesheet
(Grade)
(Plate)
F C F C
Seamless cold-drawn
intermediate alloy
DIN 17175* steel heat exchanger
DIN 17175* and condenser A199C 1202 650 900 482 A387C
tubes:
(T21) A199D 1202 650 900 482 A387D
VdTUV007* 13Cr Mo44* A199E 1200 648 900 482 A387E
DIN 17175* 10Cr Mo910* A199F 1202 650 900 482 A387F
(T1A) 3Cr - .9Mo A 209 1022 550 900 482 A 204
(T1B) 12Cr Mo195G A209A 1022 550 900 482 A 204
Seamless carbon- A209B 1000 537 900 482 A 204
molybdenum alloy
steel boiler and
superheater tubes:
15 Mo3*
C - .5Mo
C - .5Mo
Seamless ferritic and

(T2) austenitic alloy steel A213A 1022 550 900 482 A387A
DIN17175* boiler, superheater, A213B 1202 650 900 482 A387B
and heat exchanger
DIN17175* A213C 1200 648 900 482 A387C
tubes:
DIN17175* A213D 1200 648 900 482 A387D
(T21) .5Cr - .5Mo A213E 1200 648 900 482 A387E
VdTUV007* 13Cr Mo44* A213F 1200 648 900 482 A387F
13Cr Mo44*
10Cr Mo910*
3Cr -.9Mo
12Cr Mo195G*

DIN Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy Steel
ASTM Spec Nominal Material Pressure Pressure Default
and Composition Symbol Maximum Maximum Tubesheet
(Grade)
(Plate)
F C F C
DIN 17458* Seamless Ferritic and

and heat exchanger
tubes:
304S 1472 800 842 450 SS304
X5Cr Ni1810*
304LS 797 425 752 400 304L
X2Cr Ni1911*
316S 1472 800 842 450 SS316
X5Cr Ni Mo17122*
X2Cr Ni Mo18143* 316LS 842 450 842 450 316L

X6Cr Ni Ti1810* 321S 1472 800 842 450 SS321
X6Cr Ni Nb1810* 347S 1472 800 842 450 SS347
X10 Cr13* 410S 752 400 752 400 SS410
DIN 17457* Welded austenitic

steel boiler
superheater, heat
exchanger, and
condenser tubes:
X5Cr Ni1810* 304W 1472 800 842 450 SS304

X2Cr Ni1911* 304LW 797 425 752 400 304L
X5Cr Ni Mo17122* 316W 1472 800 842 450 SS316
X2Cr Ni Mo18143* 316LW 842 450 842 450 316L
X6Cr Ni Ti1810* 321W 1472 800 842 450 SS321
X6 Cr Ni Nb 1810* 347W 1472 800 842 450 SS347
X10 Cr 13* 410W 752 400 752 400 SS410
A-789 Welded duplex

tubes:
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo
Seamless duplex
tubes:
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo

DIN Non-Ferrous Tube Materials
(Grade)
(Plate)
F C F C
Seamless copper and

DIN 1787* copper alloy tubes for CA122 392 200 150 66 A285C
DIN 1785* use in surface CA687 392 200 150 66 A285C
condensers,
DIN 17664* CA706 572 300 150 66 A285C
DIN 17664* exchangers: CA715 662 350 700 371 A285C
DIN 1785* CA443 437 225 350 176 A285C
(444) SF Cu* CA444 450 232 350 176 A285C
(445) Cu Zn20 Al2* CA445 450 232 350 176 A285C
Cu Ni10 Fe1 Mn*
Cu Ni30 Mn1 Fe*
Admiralty Brass
Cu Zn28 Sn1*
Seamless cold-drawn
nickel tubes for
general corrosive
DIN 17752* service: NI200 600 315 600 315 NI200
(201) LC Ni 99F34* NI201 1200 648 1000 537 NI201
Ni-Low C
DIN 17751* Monel

Ni Cu30 Fe F45 MONEL 887 475 752 400 MONEL
VdTUV Inconel
Wbl.305* Ni Cr15 Fe* INCNL 1202 650 1000 537 INCNL
or
I600
VdTUV Incoloy
Wbl.412 X10 Ni Cr Al Ti 3220* I800 1472 800 1000 537 I800
VdTUv Ni Cr21 Mo* I825 1000 537 700 371 I825
Wbl.432*
B-619 Hastelloy
HASTC
B-468 Carpenter 20
(20Cb) Cr - Ni - Fe - Mo - Cu C 20 800 426 800 426 C 20
- Cb

(Grade)
(Plate)
F C F C
B-338 Titanium
(2) Ti T150A 662 350 600 315 T150A

EN 13445 Design Code - Plate Materials
EN Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel

EN or ASTM Description and Syste Internal External
Specification Nominal m Pressure Pressure
Composition Materi Maximum Maximum Temp.
al Temp.
F C
F C
EN 10028-2 Low and intermediate A 36 752 400 752 400

P235GH 1.0345 strength carbon steel
N plates of structural
quality
EN 10028-2 Low and intermediate A 285 752 400 752 400

P235GH 1.0345 strength carbon steel or A
N plates for pressure 285 C
vessels or CS
EN 10028-2 Carbon-manganese- A 299 752 400 752 400

P235GH 1.0345 silicon steel plates for
N plates for pressure
vessels
EN 10028-2 Pressure vessel A 455 752 400 752 400

P235GH 1.0345 plates, carbon steel,
N high strength
manganese
EN 10028-3 Carbon steel plates A 515 752 400 752 400

P355NH 1.0565 for pressure vessels
n for intermediate and
higher temperature
service:
C-Si

P355NH 1.0565 for pressure vessels
for moderate and
lower temperature
service -
C-Si

P235GH 1.0345 for pressure vessels
N for low temperature
service
C-Mn-Si

EN Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steel
EN or ASTM Description System Internal External Pressure
Specification and Nominal Material Pressure Maximum Temp.
F C
F C
Manganese -
molybdenum
and
manganese-
molybdenum-
nickel alloy
steel plates for
pressure
vessels:
EN 10028-2 Mn - .5Mo A302A 932 500 932 500

16Mo3 1.5415
N
EN 10028-2 Mn - .5Mo A302B 932 500 932 500

16Mo3 1.5415
N
Pressure vessel
plates, ally
steel. chromium
- molybdenum:
EN 10028-6 .5Cr - .5Mo A387A 572 300 572 300

P460QH
1.8871 QT
EN 10028-6 .5Cr - .5Mo A387G 572 300 572 300

P460QH
1.8871 QT
EN 10028-2 .1Cr - .5Mo A387B 932 500 932 500

13CrMo4-5
1.7335 NT
EN 10028-2 .1Cr - .5Mo A387H 932 500 932 500

13CrMo4-5
1.7335 NT

EN or ASTM Description System Internal External Pressure
Specification and Nominal Material Pressure Maximum Temp.
F C
F C
EN 10028-2 2.25Cr - .1Mo A387D 932 500 932 500

10CrMo9-10
1.7380 NT
EN 10028-2 2.25Cr - .1Mo A553K 932 500 932 500

10CrMo9-10
1.7380 NT

EN Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steel
EN or ASTM Description and System Internal External
Specification Nominal Material Pressure Pressure
Composition Maximum Temp. Maximum Temp.
F C F C
Chromium and
chromium-nickel
stainless steel
plate, sheet, and
strip for fusion-
welded unfired
pressure vessels:
EN 10028-7 18Cr -8Ni 340L 1022 550 1022 550

X2CrNi 18-10
1.4301AT
EN 10028-7 18Cr -8Ni SS304 1022 550 1022 550

X2CrNi 18-10
1.4301AT
EN 10028-7 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316L 1022 550 1022 550

X5CrNiMo 17-
12-2
1.4401 AT
EN 10028-7 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo SS316 1022 550 1022 550

X5CrNiMo 17-
12-2
1.4401 AT
EN 10028-7 18Cr - 10Ni - Ti SS321 1022 550 1022 550

X6CrNiTi18-
10
1.4541 AT

EN or ASTM Description and System Internal External
Specification Nominal Material Pressure Pressure
Composition Maximum Temp. Maximum Temp.
F C F C
EN 10028-7 18Cr - 10Ni - Cb SS347 1022 550 1022 550

X6CrNiNb18-
10
1.4550 AT
EN 10028-7 18Cr - 10Ni - Cb SS348 1022 550 1022 550

X6CrNiNb18-
10
1.4550 AT
EN 10028-7 22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo S2205 482 250 482 250

X2CrNiMoN22 (Duplex)
-5-3
1.4462 AT

EN 13445 Design Code - Tube Materials
EN Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel

EN or Description and System Internal External System
ASTM Nominal Composition Materia Pressure Pressure Default
Specificati l Maximum Maximum Tubesheet
on Symbol Temp. Temp. Material
(Plate)
F C F C
EN 10216-2 Seamless cold-drawn A-179 842 450 842 450 A 516

P235GH low-carbon steel heat
1.0345 N exchanger and
condenser tubes.
EN 10216-2 Seamless carbon steel A-192 842 450 842 450 A 516
P235GH boiler tubes for high-
1.0345 N pressure service
EN 10216-2 Seamless medium A-210 842 450 842 450 A 516

P235GH carbon steel boiler and
1.0345 N superheater tubes
EN 10216-2 Electric-resistance- A-214 752 400 752 400 A 516

P235GH welded carbon steel
1.0345 N heat exchanger and
condenser tubes
EN 10216-2 Seamless carbon steel A-334 842 450 842 450 A 516
P235GH tubes for low
1.0345 N temperature service
EN Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel

EN or ASTM Description and System Internal External System
Specification Nominal Material Pressure Pressure Default
(Plate)
F C F C
Seamless cold-drawn
intermediate alloy
steel heat exchanger
and condenser tubes:

EN 10216-2 1.25Cr - .5 Mo - Si A-199C 932 500 932 500 A387C
X11CrMo5
1.7362 I
EN 10216-2 3Cr-.9Mo A199E 932 500 932 500 A387E

10CrMo9-10
1.7380 NT or
QT
Seamless ferritic and

and heat exchanger
tubes:
EN 10216-2 .5Cr - .5Mo A213A 1022 550 1022 550 A387A

14MoV6-3
1.7715 NT or
QT
EN 10216-2 1Cr - .5Mo A213B 932 500 932 500 A387B

13CrMo4-5
1.7335 NT or
QT
EN 10216-2 2.25Cr - 1Mo A213D 932 500 932 500 A387D

10CrMo9-10
1.7380 NT or
QT
EN 10216-2 5Cr - .5Mo A213F 932 500 932 500 A387F

X11CrMo5
1.7362 I
EN Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy Steel

Symbol
(Plate)
F C F C
Seamless Ferritic
steel boiler,
superheater, and
heat exchanger
tubes:

Symbol
(Plate)
F C F C
EN 10216-5 18Cr - 8Ni 304S 1022 550 1022 550 SS304

X5CrNi18-10
1.4301 AT
EN 10216-5 18Cr - 8Ni 304LS 1022 550 1022 550 304L

X5CrNi 19-11
1.4306 AT
EN 10216-5 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316S 1022 550 1022 550 SS316
X5CrNiMo17-
12-2
1.4401 AT
EN 10216-5 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316LS 1022 550 1022 550 316L
X2CrNiMo17-
12-2
1.4404 AT
EN 10216-5 18Cr - 10Ni - Ti 321S 1022 550 1022 550 SS321

X6CrNiTi 18-10
1.4541 AT
EN 10216-5 18Cr - 10Ni - Cb 347S 1022 550 1022 550 SS347

X6CrNiNb18-
10
1.4550 AT
Welded austenitic
steel boiler
superheater, heat
exchanger, and
condenser tubes:
EN 10217-7 18Cr - 8Ni 304W 1022 550 1022 550 SS304

X5CrNi18-10
1.4301 AT
EN 10217-7 18Cr - 8Ni 304LW 1022 550 1022 550 304L

X2CrNi19-11
1.4306 AT

Symbol
(Plate)
F C F C
EN 10217-7 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316W 1022 550 1022 550 SS316
X5CrNiMo17-
12-2
1.4401 AT
EN 10217-7 16Cr - 12Ni - 2Mo 316LW 1022 550 1022 550 316L
X5CrNiMo17-
12-2
1.4404 AT
EN 10217-7 18Cr - 10Ni - Ti 321W 1022 550 1022 550 SS321

X6CrNiTi18-10
1.4541 AT
EN 10217-7 18Cr - 10Ni - Cb 347W 1022 550 1022 550 SS347

X6CrNiNb18-
10
1.4550 AT
EN 10217-7 Welded duplex

X2CrNiMolN22- austenitic steel 2205W 482 250 482 250 S2205
5-3 tubes:
1.4462 AT 22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo
EN 10216-5 Seamless duplex

X2CrNiMoN22- austenitic steel 2205S 482 250 482 250 S2205
5-3 1.4462 AT tubes:
22Cr - 5Ni - 3Mo

GB 150 Design Code - Plate Materials
GB 150 Ferrous Plate Materials - Carbon Steel

GB Material GB Material Description/ System Internal External Pressure
Standard Designation Composition Material Pressure Maximum Temp.
/Notes Symbol Maximum Temp.
F C
F C
GB 3274 Q235B Steel plates A 36 662 350 900 482

for pressure
vessels and
boilers
GB 6654-1996 16MnR Steel plates A 299 887 475 900 482

GB 713-2008 Q345R for pressure
vessels and
boilers

vessels and
boilers

vessels and
boilers
GB 3274 Q235-C Carbon and A283C 752 400 900 482

low alloy
structural
steel, rolled
plates, and
strip
GB 6654-1996 20R Steel plates A285C 887 475 900 482

vessels and
boilers
GB 6654-1996 20R Steel plates CS 887 475 900 482

vessels and
boilers

GB 150 Ferrous Plate Materials - Low Alloy Steel
GB Material GB Material Description/ System Internal External
Standard Designation Composition/ Material Pressure Pressure
Notes Symbol Maximum Temp. Maximum Temp.
F C F C
GB 713- 15CrMoR Steel plates for A387B 1022 550 900 482
2008 pressure vessels and
boilers
GB 713- 14Cr1MoR Steel plates for A387C 1022 550 900 482
boilers
GB 713- 15CrMoR Steel plates for A387H 1022 550 900 482
boilers
GB 713- 14Cr1MoR Steel plates for A387J 1022 550 900 482
boilers
GB 713- 18MnMoNbR Steel plates for A553A 887 475 650 343
boilers
GB 6654- 13MnNiMoR Steel plates for A553B 752 400 650 343
1996 13MnNiMoNbR pressure vessels and
GB 713- boilers
2008
GB 6654- 13MnNiMoR Steel plates for A553C 752 400 650 343
1996 13MnNiMoNbR pressure vessels and
GB 713- boilers
2008

GB150 Ferrous Plate Materials - High Alloy Steel
GB Material GB Material Description/Comp System Internal External
Standard Designation osition/Notes Material Pressure Pressure
Symbol Maximum Temp. Maximum Temp.
F C F C
GB 4237- 06Cr19Ni10 Hot rolled stainless SS304 1292 700 1200 649
2007 steel plate, sheet,
and strip
GB 4237- 06Cr17Ni12Mo Hot rolled stainless SS316 1292 700 1200 649
2007 2 steel plate, sheet,
and strip
GB 4237- 06Cr17Ni13Mo Hot rolled stainless SS317 1292 700 1200 649
2007 3 steel plate, sheet,
and strip
GB 4237- 06Cr18Ni11Ti Hot rolled stainless SS321 1292 700 1200 649
and strip
GB 4237- 12Cr13 Hot rolled stainless SS410 1112 600 900 482
and strip
GB 4237- 022Cr19Ni10 Hot rolled stainless 304L 797 425 800 427
and strip
GB 4237- 06Cr17Ni12Mo Hot rolled stainless 316Ti 932 500 1200 649
2007 3Ti steel plate, sheet,
and strip
GB 4237- 022Cr17Ni12M Hot rolled stainless 316L 842 450 800 427
2007 o2 steel plate, sheet,
and strip

GB150 Design Code - Tube Materials
GB150 Ferrous Tube Materials - Carbon Steel

F C F C
GB/T 8163- 10 Seamless steel A 179 842 450 900 482

2008 tubes for liquid
service
GB/T 8163- 10 Seamless steel A 192 842 450 900 482

2008 tubes for liquid
service
GB/T 8163- 10 A 214 842 450 900 482

2008
GB/T 5300- 20G Seamless steel A210A 842 450 900 482
2008 tubes and pipes for
high pressure boilers
GB/T 5300- 16Mn High-pressure A210C 887 475 900 482

2008 seamless steel tubes
for chemical
fertilizer equipment
GB/T 8163- 10 Seamless steel CS 842 450 900 482

GB 6479 15MnV High-pressure A334A 752 400 650 343

seamless steel tubes
for chemical
GB 6479 15MnV High-pressure A334B 752 400 650 343

seamless steel tubes
for chemical

GB150 Ferrous Tube Materials - Low Alloy Steel
F C F C
GB/T 5310- 12Cr1MoVG Seamless steel A199C 1067 575 900 482
GB/T 5310- 12Cr2Mo Seamless steel A199D 1067 575 900 482
GB/T 5310- 12CrMo Seamless steel A213A 977 525 900 482
GB/T 5310- 15CrMo Seamless steel A213B 1022 550 900 482
GB/T 5310- 12Cr1MoVG Seamless steel A213C 1067 575 900 482
GB/T 5310- 12Cr2Mo Seamless steel A213D 1067 575 900 482
GB/T 5310- 1Cr5Mo High-pressure A213F 1112 600 900 482

2008 seamless steel tubes
for chemical

GB150 Ferrous Tube Materials - High Alloy Steel
F C F C
GB/T 12771- 06Cr19Ni10 Seamless stainless 304S 1292 700 1000 538
2008 steel tubes for liquid
delivery
GB/T 12771- 022Cr19Ni10 Welded stainless 304W 1292 700 1000 538
delivery
GB/T 12771- 022Cr19Ni10 Seamless stainless 304LS 797 425 800 427
delivery
GB/T 12771- 022Cr19Ni10 Welded stainless 304LW 797 425 800 427
delivery
GB/T 12771- 06Cr17Ni12Mo Seamless stainless 316S 1292 700 1000 538
2008 2 steel tubes for liquid
delivery
GB/T 12771- 06Cr17Ni12Mo Welded stainless 316W 1292 700 1000 538
2008 2 steel tubes for liquid
delivery
GB/T 12771- 022Cr17Ni12M Seamless stainless 316LS 842 450 850 454
2008 o2 steel tubes for liquid
delivery
GB/T 12771- 022Cr17Ni12M Welded stainless 316LW 842 450 850 454
2008 o2 steel tubes for liquid
delivery
GB/T 12771- 06Cr18Ni11Ti Seamless stainless 321S 1292 700 100 538
delivery
GB/T 12771- 06Cr18Ni11Ti Welded stainless 321W 1292 700 100 538
delivery
GB/T 12771- 06Cr13 Seamless stainless 410S 1112 600 900 482
delivery
GB/T 12771- 06Cr13 Welded stainless 410W 1112 600 900 482
delivery

Lining Materials
Brick: Acid-Resistant Applied Over Membrane-Lined

Carbon Steel
Lining Material Description Inches MM System
Material
Symbol
Red shale brick 2.5 62 25RSB

4.5 112 45RSB
8.0 200 80RSB
Fireclay, 30 percent alumina 2.5 62 25AFC

4.5 112 45AFC
9.0 225 45AFC
Brick: Firebrick
Lining Material Description Inches MM System
Material
Symbol
Insulating firebrick 2.5 62 25IFB

4.5 112 45IFB
9.0 225 90IFB
60 percent alumina firebrick 2.5 62 25FB6

4.5 112 45FB6
9.0 225 90FB6
90 percent alumina firebrick 2.5 62 25FB9

4.5 112 45FB9
9.0 225 90FB9

Monolithic Lining
Lining Material Description System
Material
Symbol
Applied to surface with anchors on 12 INCH [300 MM] centers

50 percent alumina refractory gunning mix GUNA5
90 percent alumina refractory gunning mix GUNA9
90 percent alumina castable refractory CASA9
Applied to bare surface

50 percent alumina refractory gunning mix GUN50
90 percent alumina refractory gunning mix GUN90
90 percent alumina castable refractory CAS90
Applied over wire mesh reinforcement

Gunite GUNIT
Abrasion Resistant Linings; Replaceable

Only for use with:
• equipment items – water cyclones and linings
• plant bulk items – steel fabricated plate

Material
Symbol
Replaceable ceramic liner backed with urethane elastomer for CERML

light abrasion and light impact
Replaceable ceramic liner backed with urethane elastomer for CERMM

medium abrasion and light impact
Replaceable ceramic liner backed with urethane elastomer for CERMH

heavy abrasion and light impact
Replaceable ceramic liner backed with urethane elastomer for CERMV

heavy abrasion and heavy impact
Replaceable abrasion-resistant steel plate lining (1 INCH [25 ABRPL

MM] thick unless otherwise specified)
Replaceable rubber lining (1 INCH [25 MM] thick unless REPRB

otherwise specified)
Replaceable SS304 plate lining (1 INCH [25 MM] thick unless LS304
Replaceable SS316 plate lining (1 INCH [25 MM] thick unless LS316

Linings: Organic, Glass, Metallic
Material
Symbol
Asphaltic Resin Lining (over Carbon Steel) ASRSN
Epoxy Resin Lining (over Carbon Steel) EPLCS
Phenolic Resin Lining (over Carbon Steel) PHRSN
Kynar Sheet Lining (over Carbon Steel) PVDF
Teflon Sheet Lining (over Carbon Steel) TFELS
Glass Lining (over Carbon Steel) GSLCS
1/4 INCH [6 MM] Butyl Rubber Lining (over Carbon Steel) BUTYL
1/4 INCH [6 MM] Neoprene Sheet Lining (over Carbon Steel) NEPNE
1/4 INCH [6 MM] Soft Natural Rubber Sheet Lining (over Carbon Steel) NATRB
1/4 INCH [6 MM] Nitrile Rubber Lining (over Carbon Steel) NITRL
1/4 INCH [6 MM] Hypalon Rubber Lining (over Carbon Steel) HYPLN
1/4 INCH [6 MM] Ebonite Lining (over Carbon Steel) EBONT
16 PSF [80 KG/M2] Chemical Lead Lining CLEAD
Inorganic Zinc Coating applied by brush to 3 M [0.08 MM] thickness I-ZN
Flame sprayed Zinc Coating 8 MIL [0.20 MM] thickness ZNMZL

Casting Materials
Material Classification Casting Material Description System Material

Symbol
Aluminum Alloys Aluminum AL
Iron and Steel Alloys Low-Alloy Steel Grade B A203B

Low-Alloy Steel Grade E A203E
Low-Alloy Steel Grade C A 204
Low-Alloy Steel A 283
Carbon Steel A 299
Low-Alloy Steel Grade B A 302
Low-Alloy Steel Grade A A387A
Low-Alloy Steel Grade B A387B
Low-Alloy Steel Grade C A387C
Low-Alloy Steel Grade D A387D
Low-Alloy Steel Grade E A387E
Carbon Steel Grade 60 A 442
Carbon Steel A 455
Low-Alloy Steel Grade 1A A533A
Low-Alloy Steel Grade 1B A533B
Low-Alloy Steel Grade 1C A533C
9 Percent Nickel Steel A 553
Carbon Steel A285S
Cast Iron or CS
CI
Stainless Steel Alloys Type 304 Stainless Steel SS304

Type 304L Stainless Steel or SS
Type 316 Stainless Steel 304L
Type 316L Stainless Steel SS316
Type 321 Stainless Steel 316L
Type 347 Stainless Steel SS321
SS430
Other Alloys Nickel NI

Inconel INCNL
Monel MONEL
Titanium TI
Carpenter 20 C 20

Material Classification Casting Material Description System Material
Symbol
Other Materials Available SS304 Impeller, CS Casing 304SF

Only On Pumps Where SS316 Impeller, CS Casing 316SF
Designated Goulds Alloy 20 GAL20
High Nickel Alloy ISO B
High Nickel Alloy ISO C
Cast Steel CASTS

Packing Materials
Packing Type Size Packing Material Packing

Type Symbol
Inches MM
Activated carbon - - Carbon ACT-C
Alumina - - Alumina ALMNA
Berl saddles 0.5 15 Ceramic 0.5CBS

0.75 20 .75CBS
1.0 25 1.0CBS
1.5 40 1.5CBS
Berl saddles 0.5 15 Porcelain 0.5PBS

0.75 20 .75PBS
1.0 25 1.0PBS
1.5 40 1.5PBS
Calcium chloride - - Calcium chloride CACL
Coke - - Coke COKE
Crushed limestone - - Limestone LIME
Crushed stone - - Stone STONE
Dirt (earth) - - Earth DIRT
Gravel - - Gravel GRAVEL
INTALOX saddles 0.5 15 Ceramic 0.5CIS

1.0 25 1.0CIS
1.5 40 1.5CIS
2.0 50 2.0CIS
INTALOX saddles 0.5 15 Porcelain 0.5PIS

1.0 25 1.0PIS
1.5 40 1.5PIS
2.0 50 2.0PIS
Pall rings 0.5 15 Polypropylene 0.5PPR

1.0 25 1.0PPR
1.5 40 1.5PPR
2.0 50 2.0PPR
Pall rings 0.5 15 Stainless steel 0.5SPR

1.0 25 1.0SPR
1.5 40 1.5SPR
2.0 50 2.0SPR

Type Symbol
Inches MM
Raschig rings 0.5 15 Ceramic 0.5CRR

0.75 20 .75CRR
1.0 25 1.0CRR
1.5 40 1.5CRR
2.0 50 2.0CRR
3.0 75 3.0CRR
Raschig rings 1.0 25 Porcelain 1.0PRR

1.5 40 1.5PRR
2.0 50 2.0PRR
3.0 75 3.0PRR
Raschig rings 1.0 25 Stainless steel 1.0SRR

1.5 40 1.5SRR
2.0 50 2.0SRR
3.0 75 3.0SRR
Raschig rings 1.0 25 Carbon steel 1.0FRR

1.5 40 1.5FRR
2.0 50 2.0FRR
3.0 75 3.0FRR
Resin - - Resin RESIN
Sand - - Sand SAND
Silica gel - - Silica gel S-GEL
Tellerettes H.D. 1.0 25 Polyethylene HD-P-T
Tellerettes L.D. 1.0 25 Polyethylene LD-P-T
13X Molecular Sieve 13XMS
PVC Structured Packing 68 SF/CF [223 M2/M3] 68PVC
CPVC Structured Packing 68 SF/CF [223 M2/M3] 68CPVC
Cascade rings 1.0 25 Ceramic 1.0CCR

2.0 50 2.0CCR
3.0 75 3.0CCR
Cascade rings 1.0 25 Polypropylene 1.0PCR

2.0 50 2.0PCR
3.0 75 3.0PCR

Type Symbol
Inches MM
Cascade rings 1.0 25 Stainless steel 1.0SCR

1.5 40 1.5SCR
2.0 50 2.0SCR
3.0 75 3.0SCR
4.0 100 4.0SCR
Steel structured 107 350 410S Stainless steel M107YA

packing 45° angle 76 250 M76YA
of vertical 62 205 M62YA
orientation
35 115 M35YA
Steel structured 107 350 304 Stainless steel M107YB

packing 45° angle 76 250 M76YB
of vertical 62 205 M62YB
orientation
35 115 M35YB
Steel structured 107 350 316L Stainless steel M107YC

packing 45° angle 76 250 M76YC
of vertical 62 205 M62YC
orientation
35 115 M35YC
Steel structured 76 250 410S Stainless steel M76XA

packing 60° angle 35 115 M35XA
of vertical
orientation
Steel structured 76 250 304 Stainless steel M76XB

packing 60° angle 35 115 M35XB
of vertical
orientation
Steel structured 76 250 316L Stainless steel M76XC

packing 60° angle 35 115 M35XC
of vertical
orientation

29 Units of Measure

Introduction to Units of Measure
Units of Measure
Length
Area
Volume
Mass
Mass per Volume
Pressure
Velocity
Flow Rates
Electric
Power
Viscosity
Angular
Other
Miscellaneous Useful Constants
Project Specifications and their Use of Units of Measure
Special Units of Measure
Length and Area Units
Volume Units
Mass and Unit Mass
Pressure Units
Velocity and Flow Rate Units
Electrical Units
Power Units
Viscosity Units
29 Units of Measure - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 29-1

Introduction to Units of Measure
Icarus systems provide a choice of two sets of units of measure:
• I-P (Inch-Pound)
• METRIC (Metric).
The user must select the desired set indirectly (by specifying the country base
location) or directly. Once the appropriate set is selected, the user may wish to
redefine one or more variables from the base units of measure to some other
measure. The Units of Measure Data provides the means of identifying the
conversion.
The user should refer to units of measure later in this chapter for the basic
definitions of variables and their associated units of measure for I-P and METRIC
sets. Along with these definitions are conversion multipliers for relating I-P to
METRIC units. Each line bearing a two-digit Type Number is a candidate for user
redefinition. The type number is used to identify the specific unit of measure to be
redefined. The user would then provide a new name for that unit of measure and the
appropriate conversion multiplier to convert from the base unit of measure to the
desired unit of measure.
The following special units of measure are not characterized by a Type Number and
simple conversion multiplier:
• Temperature - User may define temperature to be in DEG C, DEG F or
DEG K.
• Process Pipe Size (diameter and thickness dimensions only) - User may specify
process pipe to be designed in INCH or MM units of measure, independently of
other linear units of measure.
• Driver Power - User may specify drivers to be specified, sized, selected, reported
in HP or KW.
Notes of Caution
All user-provided numeric values for dimensions, sizes, extents, intensities, flows,
etc., are considered by the system to conform to those units of measure selected
and/or defined by the user. It is the user’s responsibility to be constantly aware of
the units of measure so selected throughout the entire exercise of preparing project
data for the system. The user is cautioned that variable redefinition from system
base to a user unit of measure could have unpredictable downstream effects, for
example, in selection of plates, wire, tubing, pipe, etc. Further, the user is cautioned
that each base set of units, I-P and METRIC, has its own special set of default
values; the pair of default values are not necessarily related to one another by usual
conversion relationships; each is established by itself as a reasonable value in the
base unit of measure. Once the user’s set of units of measure is established, default
values are evaluated as follows:
• Unit of Measure Conversion: are used to convert the base unit of measure default
value by the user’s numeric value to obtain the value of the revised default value
in the desired units of measure.
• No Unit of Measure Conversion: the system uses the default value
as tabulated.

Example
• METRIC base set selected in Project Title Data, and
• Unit of measure data used to convert pressure in KPA (METRIC) to PSIG using
0.14504 = 1/6.894757 as conversion for Type No. 18.
• Turbine steam pressure METRIC default is 2000 KPA, which, converted to PSIG, is
290.047549 PSIG. The PSIG value is used in sizing the turbine if the user does
not enter the pressure value.
• Contrast this value with the I-P default value printed in the turbine table as 300
PSIG.
Another Example
The METRIC base user will have all length variables defined in terms of millimeters,
meters, etc. As a consequence, pipe sizes (diameters) and wall thicknesses will be
expected to be specified, sized, selected and reported in MM. Should the METRIC
base user desire pipe to be specified, sized, selected and reported in MM. Should the
METRIC base user desire pipe to be specified, sized, selected and reported as INCH
values, the user must enter the designator INCH in the field labeled Pipe Size.
This note of caution is tendered for temperature and driver power as well as pipe
sizing.
Final Note of Caution

The user of this section should exercise extreme care and deliberation in redefining
units of measure. Since, once established:
• All user input is expected in the defined units of measure.
• Default values subject to conversions will not be in rounded numbers but will be
conversions from base default values.
• Selection and design criteria may be impacted and affected by user redefinition of
units of measure.
• All reporting by the system will conform to the selected units of measure.
• The trail of consequences of redefinitions of the units of measure is one especially
difficult to backtrack, especially if that variable affects size selection of materials
in a non-standard way.

Units of Measure
Type Inch/Pound Conversion Metric

No.
Description Symbol Description Symbol
Length
01 Inches INCHES x 25.4 = Millimeters MM
02 Feet FEET x 0.3048 = Meters M
03 Miles (statute) MILES x 1.60934 = Kilometers KM
04 Mesh MESH x 1.0000 = Mesh MESH
Area
05 Square feet SF x 0.092903 = Square M2

meters
06 Square yards SY x 0.836127 = Square M2

meters
Volume
07 Cubic feet CF x 0.028317 = Cubic M3

meters
08 Cubic yards CY x 0.76455 = Cubic M3

meters
09 US Gallons GALLONS x 0.00378541 = Cubic M3

(231 cubic meters
inches, no
units for UK
imperial
gallons)
10 Barrels (42 BARRELS x 0.1589873 = Cubic M3

gallons) meters
11 Bags (94 BAGS x 0.852749 = Bags (50 BAG-50KG

pounds) kilograms)
48 Board feet BDFT x 0.0023597 = Cubic M3

meters

No.
Mass
12 Pounds LBS x 0.45359 =Kilograms KG
13 Tons (2000 TONS x 0.907185 = 1000 TON

pounds) Kilograms
Mass per Length
14 Pounds per LB/FT x 1.488156 = Kilograms/ KG/M

foot meter
15 Pounds per LB/YD x 0.496052 = Kilograms/ KG/M

yard meter
Mass per Volume
16 Pounds per LB/BATCH x 0.45359 = Kilograms KG/BATCH

batch per batch
17 Pounds per PCF x 16.01829 = Kilograms KG/M3

cubic foot per cubic
meter
Pressure
18 Pounds (force) PSIG x 6.894757 = Kilopascals KPA

per square (1000 newtons
inch, gauge per square
meter)
19 Inches of IN HG x 3.38638 = Kilopascals KPA

mercury (1000 newtons
per square
meter)
20 Inches of IN H2O x 249.082 = Pascals PA

water
21 Millimeters of MM HG x 133.322 =Pascals PA

mercury
(TORR)

No.
22 Pounds (force) PSF x 0.0478802 = Kilonewtons KN/M2

per square per square
foot (loading) meter (1
newton = 1
KG mass
under 1
meter/sec2
acceleration)
Velocity
23 Feet per FPM x 18.2880 = Meters/hour M/H

minute
24 Miles per hour MPH x 1.60934 = Kilometers/ KM/H

hour
25 Revolutions RPM x 1.0000 = Revolutions RPM

per minute per minute
na Cycles per HZ x 1.0000 = Hertz HZ

second (HZ is
frequently
used to refer
to local power
frequency)
Flow Rates
26 Cubic feet per CFM x 1.69901 = Cubic M3/H

minute meters per
hour
27 Cubic feet per CFH x 0.028317 = Cubic M3/H

hour meters per
hour
28 Cubic feet per CFM/SF x 18.28800 = Cubic M3/H/M2

minute per meters per
square foot of hour per
surface square meter
of surface
29 Gallons per GPM x 0.063090 Litres per L/S

minute second
30 Gallons per GPH x 0.003785 Cubic meters M3/H

hour per hour
31 Pounds per LB/H x 0.45359 Kilograms/hou KG/H

hour r

No.
32 Tons per hour TPH x 0.907185 = Tons per TON/H

(short tons, no hour
unit for long
tons)
33 Tons per day TPD x 0.037799 = Tons per TON/H

hour
Electric
34 Volts V x 1.0 = Volts V
35 Kilovolts KV x 1.0 = Kilovolts KV

(1000V)
36 Amperes A x 1.0 = Amperes A
37 Kiloamperes KA x 1.0 = Kiloamperes KA

(1000A)
38 Watts W x 1.0 = Watts W
39 Kilowatts KW x 1.0 = Kilowatts KW

(1000W)
40 Kilovolt- KVA x 1.0 = Kilovolt- KVA

amperes amperes
(1000V-A)
Power
na Horsepower HP x 0.74570 = Kilowatts KW
41 Tons, TONS-REF x 3.51685 = Kilowatts KW

refrigeration
(12000 BTU
per hour)
42 BTU per hour BTU/H x 0.293071 = Watts W
43 Millions of BTU MMBTU/H x 0.293071 = Megawatts MEGAW

per hour
44 BTU per hour BTU/H/SF x 3.15460 = Watts per W/M2

per square square meter
foot
45 BTU per pound BTU/LB x 2.32601 = Kilojoules KJ/KG

per kilogram

No.
Viscosity
46 Centipoise CPOISE x 1.0 = Millipascal- MPA-S

seconds
47 Centistoke CSTOKE x 1.0 = Millimeters MM2/S

squared per
second
Angular
na Degrees DEGREE x 1.0 = Degrees DEGREE
Other
na Fahrenheit DEG F (F-32)/1.8 = Celsius DEG C

temperature temperature
na Fahrenheit DEG F x 0.55555 = Celsius DEG C

temperature temperature
difference difference
na Nominal pipe INCH not applicable Nominal pipe MM

size (diameter size size (diameter
and thickness) and thickness)
na Driver power HP not applicable Driver power KW
Miscellaneous Useful Constants

1 Gravitational Constant:
o Inch-Pound 32.174 lb-ft/lb(force)-sec2
o Metric 9.80665 kg-m/kg(force)-sec2
2 Absolute temperatures:
o Rankine DEG R = 459.67 + DEG F
o Kelvin DEG K = 273.15 + DEG C
3 Gas Constant, R (basis: 22.4140 liters at 0 degrees C, 1 atm. for the volume of 1
gram-mole of gas and PV=ZnRT)
o R = 10.732 psia-ft3/lb-mole degrees R
o R = 8.3145 KPA-m3/kg-mole degrees K

Project Specifications and their Use of
Units of Measure
Special Units of Measure

Unit of Measure Name for Temperature: F (INCH-POUND) or C or K (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• All items specifying temperature
Unit of Measure Name for pipe size: INCH (INCH-POUND) or MM (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Pipe, valves, fittings
Unit of Measure Name for driver power: HP (INCH-POUND) or KW (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Electric motors, turbines
Length and Area Units

Unit of Measure Name for: INCHES (INCH-POUND) or MM (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Vessel components
° wall/plate thickness
° tube diameter
° cladding thickness
• Conveyor belts - width
• Conveyors/vibrating - width of pan
• Centrifuge bowl/basket diameter
• Dryers, pan type - depth
• Dust collectors, cyclone diameter
• Filters, plate/frame size
• Feeders, rotary - diameter
• Feeders, vibrating - width
• Heat exchangers, shell diameter
• Mills, product, feed size
• Reboilers, port area
• Stacks - diameter
• Towers - tray spacing
• Insulation thickness
• Manhole diameter
• Steel, walkway width
• Vibrating screens - sifter screen diameter

Unit of Measure Name for: FEET (INCH-POUND) or M (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Vessel size
° span, length, height, diameter,
° tube length
• Fluid head- pumps
Unit of Measure Name for: MILES (INCH-POUND) or KM (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Site development
Unit of Measure Name for: MESH (INCH-POUND) or MESH (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Crushers
• Filter, tubular
Unit of Measure Name for: SF (INCH-POUND) or M2 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Dryers - tray surface area
• Dust collectors - cloth area
• Drum dryers - peripheral area
• Evaporators - heated surface area
• Flakers - area
• Heat exchangers
• Linings
• Rotary dryers
• Tray drying systems, tray surface
• Vibrating screen
Unit of Measure Name for: SY (INCH-POUND) or M2 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Volume Units
Unit of Measure Name for: CF (INCH-POUND) or M3 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Centrifuges - capacity
• Filters, plate/frame capacity
• Mixers
• Rotary dryers, working capacity
• Vertical tanks, gas holders, live bottom
Unit of Measure Name for: CY (INCH-POUND) or M3 (METRIC)
Use to specify:

Unit of Measure Name for: GALLONS (INCH-POUND) or M3 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Vessel volume, liquids
• Kneaders
• Packings
• Vertical tanks
Unit of Measure Name for: BARRELS (INCH-POUND) or M3 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Vertical tanks
Unit of Measure Name for: BAGS (INCH-POUND) or BAGS-50KG (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Field-mixed concrete components
Unit of Measure Name for: BD FT (INCH-POUND) or M3 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Foundation formwork (shuttering)

Mass and Unit Mass
Unit of Measure Name for: LBS (INCH-POUND) or KG (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Cranes
• Scales
Unit of Measure Name for: TONS (INCH-POUND) or TON (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Elevators
• Cranes, hoists
Unit of Measure Name for: LB/FT (INCH-POUND) or KG/M (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Steel member sizes
• Pile sizes
Unit of Measure Name for: LB/YD (INCH-POUND) or KG/M (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Site development - railroad rails
Unit of Measure Name for: LB/BATCH (INCH-POUND) or KG/BATCH (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Centrifuges, batch type
• Filters
Unit of Measure Name for: PCF (INCH-POUND) or KG/M3 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Density of solids, fluids
• Blenders

Pressure Units
Unit of Measure Name for: PSIG (INCH-POUND) or KPA (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Gauge pressure
Unit of Measure Name for: IN HG (INCH-POUND) or KPA (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Vacuum pumps
Unit of Measure Name for: IN H2O (INCH-POUND) or PA (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Draft pressure measurement, ductwork
• Dust collector, cyclone - pressure drop
Unit of Measure Name for: MM HG (INCH-POUND) or PA (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Ejectors, absolute pressure
• Vacuum pumps, absolute pressure
Unit of Measure Name for: PSF (INCH-POUND) or KN/M2 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Civil - soil bearing capacity

Velocity and Flow Rate Units
Unit of Measure Name for: FPM (INCH-POUND) or M/H (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Conveyors, belt speed
Unit of Measure Name for: MPH (INCH-POUND) or KM/H (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Wind velocity
Unit of Measure Name for: RPM (INCH-POUND) or RPM (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Agitators, agitated tanks
• Motors
• Blenders
Unit of Measure Name for: CFM (INCH-POUND) or M3/H (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Air, gas compressors
• Air dryers
• Dust collectors, washers, precipitators, cyclone
• Fans
• Vacuum pumps
Unit of Measure Name for: CFH (INCH-POUND) or M3/H (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Feeders
Unit of Measure Name for: CFM/SF (INCH-POUND) or M3/H/M2 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Dust collectors
Unit of Measure Name for: GPM (INCH-POUND) or L/S (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Centrifugal pumps
• Barometric condenser - water flow rate
• Filter, cartridge, tubular
• Gear pumps
• Positive displacement pumps
• Towers, cooling
• Water treatment systems
Unit of Measure Name for: GPH (INCH-POUND) or M3/H (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Water treatment systems
Unit of Measure Name for: LB/H (INCH-POUND) or KG/H (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Dryers, evaporative capacity

• Drum dryers
• Evaporators
• Ejectors - air flow rate
• Filters
• Feeders
• Flakers, drum type
• Heat exchangers
• Reactors
• Rotary dryers
• Tray drying systems
• Towers, packed, trayed
• Water treatment systems - boilers
• Wiped film evaporators
Unit of Measure Name for: TPH (INCH-POUND) or TON/H (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Conveyors
• Bucket conveyors
• Crushers
• Feeders
• Filters
• Mills
Unit of Measure Name for: TPD (INCH-POUND) or TON/H (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Crystallizers
• Feeder, vibrating
• Mills
Electrical Units
Unit of Measure Name for: V (INCH-POUND) or V (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Electrical plant bulks
Unit of Measure Name for: KV (INCH-POUND) or KV (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Unit of Measure Name for: A (INCH-POUND) or A (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Unit of Measure Name for: KA (INCH-POUND) or KA (METRIC)
Use to specify:

Unit of Measure Name for: W (INCH-POUND) or W (METRIC)
Use to specify:
Unit of Measure Name for: KW (INCH-POUND) or KW (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Electric generators, portable
• Heat exchangers - tank heaters
Unit of Measure Name for: KVA (INCH-POUND) or KVA (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Electric generators
• Electrical substation equipment

Power Units
Unit of Measure Name for: TONS-REF (INCH-POUND) or KW (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Refrigeration units
Unit of Measure Name for: BTU/H (INCH-POUND) or W (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Heat transfer rate
Unit of Measure Name for: MMBTU/H (INCH-POUND) or MEGAW (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Furnaces
• Heating units
• Reboilers
Unit of Measure Name for: BTU/H/SF (INCH-POUND) or W/M2 (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Flarestacks
Unit of Measure Name for: BTU/LB (INCH-POUND) or KJ/KG (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Reboilers
• Flarestacks
Viscosity Units
Unit of Measure Name for: CPOISE (INCH-POUND) or MPA-S (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Pumps
• Agitated vessels
Unit of Measure Name for: CSTOKE (INCH-POUND) or MM2/S (METRIC)
Use to specify:
• Pumps, gear

30 Field Manpower Titles
and Wage Rates

US Country Base
UK Country Base
JP Country Base
EU Country Base
ME Country Base
The rates in this chapter are escalated by the Construction Index value
specified by the user in the Indexing/Escalation data.
32 Construction Equipment - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 30-1

US Country Base
Unloaded Aspen In-Plant Cost

Craft Wage Rate Estimator Loaded Wage
Code US Craft Name ($/MH) Rate ($/MH) 1
51 Laborer 18.60 40.50
52
53 *Millwright 33.40 72.80
54 Rigger 32.20 70.20
55
56 Light Vehicle Driver 20.80 45.30
57 Heavy Vehicle Driver 23.20 50.60
58
59 Oiler 30.80 67.10
60 Mechanic 31.60 68.90
61
62 Light Equipment Oper 30.80 67.10
63 Medium Equipment Oper 32.00 69.80
64 Heavy Equipment Oper 33.10 72.20
65
66 *Pipefitter 31.30 68.20
67 *Pipe Welder 34.50 75.20
68
69 Cement Finisher 27.40 59.70
70 Carpenter 26.60 58.00
71 Bricklayer 29.20 63.70
72 Ironworker - Rebar 30.80 67.10
73
74 Ironworker - Structural 29.40 64.10
75 Welder - Structural 29.40 64.10
76
30-2 32 Construction Equipment

Code US Craft Name ($/MH) Rate ($/MH) 1
77 Welder - Special 33.70 73.50
78 *Welder - Fabricator 30.80 67.10
79 *Boilermaker 30.60 66.70
80
81 *Instrument Fitter 34.30 74.80
82
83 *Electrician - Line 34.30 74.80
84 *Electrician - Wiring 32.00 69.80
85
86 *Sheetmetal Worker 29.20 63.70
87 Insulator 24.00 52.30
88
89 Painter 24.00 52.30
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98 Craft Helper 20.60 44.90
99 Foreman ** **
1
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator Loaded Wage Rate excludes equipment rental.
* Principal Crafts.
** Foreman’s rate is 110% of the highest paid craft in the crew in which the foreman works.
Base Construction Index Value (1Q 2017) = 2220.

UK Country Base
Aspen In-Plant Cost

Craft Unloaded Wage Estimator Loaded Wage
Code UK Craft Name Rate (PS/MH) Rate (PS/MH) 1
51 Laborer 17.40 48.50
52
53 *Fitter/Millwright 22.00 61.40
54 Rigger 22.00 61.40
55
58
59
60 Plant Fitter 22.00 61.40
61
63 Medium Equipment 20.60 57.50

Oper
65
66 *Plater/Pipefitter 22.00 61.40
67 *Welder 23.20 64.70
68
70 Joiner 21.60 60.30
72 Steel Fixer 19.20 53.60
73
74 Steel Erector 22.00 61.40
76

Aspen In-Plant Cost
Craft Unloaded Wage Estimator Loaded Wage
Code UK Craft Name Rate (PS/MH) Rate (PS/MH) 1
80
82
83 *Electrical Technician 23.50 65.60
84 *Electrician 21.30 59.40
85
87 Insulator 22.00 61.40
88
89 Painter 19.20 53.60
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98 Craftsman’s Mate 17.40 48.50
99 Foreman ** **
1
* Principal Crafts.
Base Construction Index Value (1Q 2017) = 5540
Note: PS indicates Pounds Sterling

JP Country Base

Code JP Craft Name (KY/MH) Rate (KY/MH)1
51 Laborer 2.10 4.40
52
53 *Millwright 2.70 5.70
54 Rigger 2.70 5.70
55
58
59 Oiler 2.60 5.50
60 Mechanic 2.80 5.90
61
63 Medium Equipment Oper 2.80 5.90
65
66 *Pipefitter 3.10 6.50
67 *Pipe Welder 3.90 8.20
68
70 Carpenter 3.10 6.50
73
74 Ironworker - Structural 3.30 6.90
76

Code JP Craft Name (KY/MH) Rate (KY/MH)1
80
82
83 *Electrician - Line 3.00 6.30
84 *Electrician - Wiring 3.00 6.30
85
87 Insulator 2.80 5.90
88
89 Painter 3.10 6.50
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98 Helper 2.20 4.60
99 Foreman ** **
1
* Principal Crafts.
Base Construction Index Value (1Q 2016 = 1510).
Note: KY indicates thousand Yen.

EU Country Base

Code EU Craft Name (EUR/MH) Rate (EUR/MH)1
51 Laborer 20.60 48.80
52
53 *Millwright 26.70 63.30
54 Rigger 26.70 63.30
55
56 Driver: Light 23.80 56.40
57 Driver: Heavy 23.80 56.40
58
59
60 Mechanic 26.70 63.30
61
62 EquipOp: Light 23.80 56.40
63 EquipOp: Medium 24.10 57.10
64 EquipOp: Heavy 26.70 63.30
65
66 *Pipefitter 26.70 63.30
67 *Pipe Welder 27.10 64.20
68
70 Carpenter 26.80 63.50
73
74 Ironworker: Struct 26.70 63.30
75 Welder: Struct 26.70 63.30
76

Code EU Craft Name (EUR/MH) Rate (EUR/MH)1
77 Welder: Special 27.40 64.90
78 *Welder: Fabr 27.40 64.90
80
81 *Instru.Fitter 26.70 63.30
82
83 *Electr: Line 26.80 63.50
84 *Electr: Wire 26.70 63.30
85
87 Insulator 26.70 63.30
88
89 Painter 23.80 56.40
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98 Helper 21.90 51.90
99 Foreman ** **
1
* Principal Crafts.

ME Country Base
Note: SAR = Saudi Arabian Riyals
Aspen In-Plant
Cost Estimator
Unloaded Wage Loaded Wage Rate
Craft Code ME Craft Name Rate (SAR/MH) (SAR/MH)1
51 Laborer 28.90 72.30
52
53 *Millwright 36.90 92.30
54 Rigger 36.90 92.30
55
56 Driver: Light 31.50 78.80
57 Driver: Heavy 31.50 78.80
58
59 Oiler 36.90 92.30
60 Mechanic 54.60 136.50
61
62 EquipOp: Light 28.90 72.30
63 EquipOp: Medium 33.20 83.00
64 EquipOp: Heavy 38.20 95.50
65
66 *Pipefitter 36.90 92.30
67 *Pipe Welder 54.60 136.50
68
70 Carpenter 30.50 76.30
73
74 Ironworker: Struct 33.70 84.30
75 Welder: Struct 33.70 84.30

Aspen In-Plant
Cost Estimator
Unloaded Wage Loaded Wage Rate
Craft Code ME Craft Name Rate (SAR/MH) (SAR/MH)1
76
77 Welder: Special 33.70 84.30
78 *Welder: Fabr 35.30 88.30
80
81 *Instru.Fitter 46.30 115.80
82
83 *Electr: Line 46.30 115.80
84 *Electr: Wire 46.30 115.80
85
87 Insulator 36.10 90.30
88
89 Painter 32.10 80.30
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98 Helper 24.90 62.20
99
1
* Principal Crafts.

31 Engineering

Design and Construction Engineering Disciplines and Wage Rates
US Country Base
UK Country Base
JP Country Base
EU Country Base
ME Country Base
Standard Engineering Drawing Types

Design and Construction Engineering
Disciplines and Wage Rates
US Country Base
Note: $ indicates US dollars
No. Design* Discipline $/MH No. Construction** $/MH

(US) Discipline
Basic Engineering: Home Office:
01 Project Engineering 71.30 01 Project Management 65.10
02 Process Engineering 64.60 02 Cost Accounting 47.40
03 Piping Design 58.10 03 Construction Dept. 35.10
04 Instrument Design 61.20 04 Planning, Scheduling 50.70
05 Mechanical Design 56.60 05 Tools, Equipment 35.60
06 Electrical Design 60.80 06 Industrial Relations 35.60
07 Civil Design 56.00 07 Subcontract Admin. 62.00
08 Piping Drafting 45.30 08 Support, Clerical 27.60
09 Instrument Drafting 47.00 Field Office:
10 Mechanical Drafting 48.30 01 Project Constrn. Supt. 56.50
11 Electrical Drafting 48.00 02 Area Superintendents 55.90
12 Civil Drafting Field

45.20
Superintendents:
13 General Drafting 37.70 03 Piping 46.40
14 Planning, Scheduling 55.50 04 Instrumentation 46.40
15 Cost Estimating 55.60 05 Electrical 46.40
16 Support, Clerical 27.60 06 Civil 46.40
Detail Engineering: 07 Mechanical 46.40
01 Project Engineering 71.30 08 QC&A, Inspection 39.80
02 Process Engineering 64.60 09 Subcontract Admin 50.60
03 Piping Design 58.10 10 Cost Engineering 48.60
04 Instrument Design 61.20 11 Field Engineering 44.50
05 Mechanical Design 56.60 12 Planning, Scheduling 51.00

(US) Discipline
06 Electrical Design 60.80 13 Safety & Medical 39.40
07 Civil Design 56.00 14 Field Accounting 37.90
08 Piping Drafting 45.30 15 Materials Control 43.10
09 Instrument Drafting 47.00 16 General Drafting 37.70
10 Mechanical Drafting 48.30 17 Support, Clerical 24.80
11 Electrical Drafting Construction Management

48.00
(Home):
12 Civil Drafting 45.20 01 Project Management 65.10
13 General Drafting 37.70 02 Cost Accounting 47.40
14 Planning, Scheduling 55.50 03 Construction Dept. 35.10
15 Cost Estimating 04 Subcon. Admin.

55.60 50.60
(Field)
16 Support, Clerical 27.60 05 Construction Manager 73.10
17 Model Building 32.30 06 Area Managers 55.90
Procurement: 07 Subcon. Coordinator 44.70
01 Procurement 53.40 08 Field Inspector 39.80
02 Support, Clerical 27.60 09 Cost Engineering 48.60
Eng'g Management: 10 Field Engineering 44.50
01 Project Engineering 81.60 11 Planning, Scheduling 51.00
12 Safety & Medical 39.40
13 Support, Clerical 27.60

(US) Discipline
*These rates are the current (1Q 2017) System Start-up, Commissioning:
base values, which are escalated by the Design
Engineering Index specified by the user in the
01 Commissioning Staff 71.30
Indexing/Escalation data.
Base Design Engineering Index = 1470
02 Start-up Staff 64.60
03 Performance Testing 56.60
**These rates are the current (1Q 2017)

System base values, which are escalated
by the Construction Management Index
specified by the user in the
Base Construction Management Index =
1850

UK Country Base
Note: PS indicates Pounds Sterling
No. Design* Discipline PS/MH No. Construction** PS/MH

(UK) Discipline
12 Civil Drafting 26.00 Field Superintendents
02 Process Engineering 37.70 09 Subcontract Admin. 32.20

No. Design* Discipline PS/MH No. Construction** PS/MH
(UK) Discipline

26.00
(Home):

26.00 33.80
(Field)
Note: PS indicates Pounds Sterling 12 Safety & Medical 25.70

*These rates are the current (1Q 2017) System
Base Design Engineering Index = 5620 Start-up, Commissioning:
** These rates are the current (1Q

2017) System base values, which are
escalated by the Construction
Management Index specified by the user
in the Indexing/Escalation data.
5420

JP Country Base
Note: KY indicates thousand Yen
No. Design* Discipline KY/MH No. Construction** KY/MH

(JP) Discipline
12 Civil Drafting 3.9 Field Superintendents:
01 Project Engineering 5.6 08 C&A, Inspection 4.3

No. Design* Discipline KY/MH No. Construction** KY/MH
(JP) Discipline
11 Electrical Drafting 3.9 Construction Management

(Home):
15 Cost Estimating 4.3 04 Subcon. Admin. 4.6

(Field)
Note: KY indicates thousand YEN 12 Safety & Medical 4.1

*These rates are the current (1Q 2016) System
Engineering Index specified by the user in the 13 Support, Clerical 2.4
Base Design Engineering Index = 2290 Start-up, Commissioning:

2140

EU Country Base
Note: EUR indicates Euros
No. Design* Discipline EUR/MH No. Construction** EUR/MH

(EU) Discipline
10 Mechanical Drafting 01 Project Constrn.

30.50 45.40
Supt.
11 Electrical Drafting 02 Area

30.50 40.00
Superintendents
12 Civil Drafting Field

30.50
Superintendents:

No. Design* Discipline EUR/MH No. Construction** EUR/MH
(EU) Discipline

30.50
(Home):

41.40 32.00
(Field)
16 Support, Clerical 05 Construction

23.20 54.40
Manager
*These rates are the current (1Q 2017) System 12 Safety & Medical 32.00
Start-up, Commissioning:

1920

ME Country Base
Note: SAR indicates Saudi Arabian Riyals
No. Design* Discipline SAR/M No. Construction** SAR/M

(ME) H Discipline H
12 Civil Drafting 165.00 Field

Superintendents:
02 Process Engineering 280.00 09 Subcontract Admin 78.00

No. Design* Discipline SAR/M No. Construction** SAR/M
(ME) H Discipline H
11 Electrical Drafting 165.00 Construction Management

(Home):
15 Cost Estimating 210.00 04 Subcon. Admin. 78.00

(Field)
07 Subcon. Coordinator 78.00
Procurement: 08 Field Inspector 71.50
01 Procurement 250.00 09 Cost Engineering 91.00
02 Support, Clerical 100.00 10 Field Engineering 162.80
Eng'g Management: 11 Planning, Scheduling 210.00
01 Project Engineering 420.00 12 Safety & Medical 71.50
*These rates are the current (1Q 2017) System 13 Support, Clerical 68.30
base values.
Start-up, Commissioning:

2017) System base values.
2450

Engineering Expenses and Indirects
(Applies to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer)

US Country Base
Phase % Eng'ng Manpower
Expense Rate Payroll Cost Indirects

($/MH)* Business
Basic Engineering 5.70 25 75
Detail Engineering 4.50 25 75
Procurement 10.20 25 75
Engineering 0.00 25 75
Management
($/MH)**
Home Office 4.20 25 75

Construction Services
Field Office 0.00 25 75

Supervision
Construction 0.00 25 75
Management
Start-up, 0.00 25 75
Commissioning
*These rates are the current (1Q 2017) System base values, which are
escalated by the Design Engineering Index specified by the user in the
**These rates are the current (1Q 2017) System base values, which are
escalated by the Construction Management Index specified by the user in the

UK Country Base

(PS/MH)* Business
Management
(PS/MH)**


Supervision
Management
Start-up, 0.00 40 90
Commissioning

Japan Country Base
Expense Rate Payroll Business Cost Indirects

(KY/MH)*
Management
(KY/MH)**


Supervision
Management
Start-up, 0.00 25 75
Commissioning

EU Country Base
Expense Rate Payroll Business Cost

(EUR/MH)* Indirects
Management
(EUR/MH)**


Supervision
Management
Start-up, 0.00 40 90
Commissioning

ME Country Base

(SAR/MH)* Business
Management
(SAR/MH)**


Supervision
Management
Start-up, 0.00 25 75
Commissioning
**These rates are the current (1Q 2017) System base values, which are escalated by
the Construction Management Index specified by the user in the Indexing/Escalation
data.
Base Design Engineering Index = 1470 (US), 5620 (UK), 2290 (JP-2016),
2080 (EU), 1620 (ME)
Base Construction Management Index = 1850 (US), 5420 (UK), 2140 (JP-
2016), 1920 (EU), 2450 (ME)
Note:
$ indicates U.S. Dollars
PS indicates Pounds Sterling
KY indicates thousand YEN
EUR indicates Euros
SAR indicates Saudi Arabian Riyals
Explanation of Expense Rate
The Expense rate is used to calculate the Basic Engineering Report's
"Overhead Items," which consist of the following:
• Reproduction

• Communications
• Travel
• Computation
These four line items collectively comprise engineering expenses. They result
from a fixed percentage split of this expense by phase. Multiply the Total
Man-hours for the phase by this rate to calculate the total expenses. The
system then allocates these to various categories by percentage as follows:
Basic Detail Procure Home
Reproduction 23% 30% 14% 42%
Communications 3% 4% 12% 8%
Travel 17% 12% 50% 50%
Computation 57% 54% 24% 0%
The amount of the expense is user-adjusted, but how it is split into these
categories is not.
Both the Payroll Burdens/Fringes and Indirects are Percentages of the Total
Engineering Cost in the Basic Engineering Report.
The relationship among the wage rates, expense rate, and cost indirect are as
follows:
• Wage rates are the wages paid to a specific disciplines (see the “Design
and Construction Engineering Disciplines and Wage Rates” section
on page 31-13).
• The Expense rate is used to calculate the Overhead items in the Basic
Engineering Report.
• Indirects are typically office expenses. Indirect office expenses include
rent, heat, electricity and other operating expenses not specifically
covered in other engineering accounts.

Standard Engineering Drawing Types
(Applies to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer)
Basic Engineering Detailed Engineering
Drawing Description Drawing Description

No. No.
1 Process Flow Diagrams 1 Piping Arrangements (Plans &

Elevns.)
2 Piping & Instrument 2 Piping Isometrics

Diagrams
3 Interconnecting Piping 3 Special Hanger/Support

Diagrams Drawings
4 Utility Flow Diagrams 4 Steam Tracing Drawings
5 Utility Piping & Instrument

Dgs
6 Electrical One Line 7 Instrument Location Drawings

Diagrams
7 Elec. System Distribution 8 Control Cable Schedules
8 General Equipment 9 Control Room/Console

Arrangements Drawings
9 Other (Plot Plans, Etc.) 10 Control Systems Schematics
11 Instrument Loop Diagrams
12 Connection
Diagrams/Junction Box Drwgs
13 Electrical One Line Diagrams
14 Substation Layout Drawings
15 Electrical Schematics
16 Power Distribution Drawings
17 Circuit Scheds, Connection

Diagrams
18 Cable Tray Drawings
User-specified Drawings 19 Lighting Drawings

Basic Engineering Detailed Engineering
Up to nine user-specified drawings (or 20 Grounding Drawings

other tasks, such as models) may be
added to the system drawings by using 21 Electrical Tracing Drawings
a drawing number from the range 91-
99.
Note: Only the drawing numbers
shown in this table and 91-99 are 23 Equipment Foundation
accepted. Drawings
24 Steelwork Foundation
Drawings
25 Area Paving Drawings
26 Misc. Concrete, Supports, Etc.
27 Underground Piping Drawings
28 Structural Steel (Plans &

Elevns.)
29 Ladders & Platforms, Misc.

Steel
30 Grating Drawings
32 Building Arrangement Plans,

Elevns.
33 Architectural Details
34 Facilities Plot Plans
35 Area Equipment Layouts
36 Site Development
38 Other Detail Drawings, Lists

32 Construction Equipment

Introduction to Construction Equipment Rental
Construction Equipment

Introduction to Construction
Equipment Rental
An Equipment Rental Report is prepared for project estimates when the
Construction Equipment Rental report option is selected. The report identifies
both user and system-selected rental items, durations and rental rates. This
report is deleted upon specific user entry of equipment/plant rental either as
a total cost or as a percentage of field manpower.
The user can revise the system’s evaluation of equipment rental requirements
on an item-by-item basis, and by contractor, by defining Equipment Rental
Data. Options are available for specifying the applicable contractor, adding
days or additional construction equipment to the account, changing days and
rental rates or deleting construction equipment from the account This chapter
includes an indexed list of several hundred rental equipment items contained
within the system base and directly related to work items for equipment and
bulk installation.
For Prime Contractor reporting, equipment rental applies to the project in its
entirety. For contract reporting, equipment rental applies to the responsible
contract and must be provided for each contract if required.

Construction Equipment
(Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer , Aspen In-
Plant Cost Estimator)
Rental days and monthly rates may be adjusted for construction equipment
items.
Size
Equip
No. Equipment Class Description I-P Units Metric Units
21 AUTOMOTIVE AMBULANCE
26 AUTOMOTIVE CAR 2-DOOR SUBCOMPACT 1.3 LITER
27 AUTOMOTIVE CAR 4-DOOR COMPACT 1.6 LITER
28 AUTOMOTIVE CAR 4-DOOR STANDARD 2.0 LITER
31 AUTOMOTIVE MINIBUS BUS 10 PASSENGER
32 AUTOMOTIVE BUS 25 PASSENGER 25 PASSENGER
33 AUTOMOTIVE BUS 40 PASSENGER 40 PASSENGER
41 TRUCK PICKUP .5 TONS - 4 X 2 .50 TON - 4 X 2
42 TRUCK PICKUP .75 TONS - 4 X 2 75 TON - 4 X 2
43 TRUCK PICKUP .75 TONS - 4 X 4 .75 TON - 4 X 4
44 TRUCK PICKUP - CREW CAB .75 TONS - 4 X 4 .75 TON - 4 X 4
45 TRUCK PICKUP 1.0 TONS - 4 X 4 1 TON - 4 X 4
46 TRUCK HIGHWAY FLATBED 2 TONS - 4 X 2 2 TON - 4 X 2
51 TRUCK OFF-ROAD FLATBED 6 TONS - 6 X 6 6 TON - 6 X 6
56 TRUCK A-FRAME 4X4 4X4
57 TRUCK LUBE/GREASE

Size
Equip
58 TRUCK FUEL/WATER 5000 GALLONS 18 M3
61 TRUCK POWERLINE, BUCKET INSULATED INSULATED
62 TRUCK CHERRY PICKER NON-INSULATED NON-

INSULATED
66 TRUCK DUMP TRUCK 6 CY 5 M3
71 TRUCK FORKLIFT 2 TONS 2 TON
72 TRUCK FORKLIFT 10 TONS 9 TON
76 EARTHMOVING WHEEL LDR. 0.75 CY 0.6 M3

W/BACKHOE
77 EARTHMOVING WHEEL LOADER CAT930 1.75 CY CAT930 1.3 M3
78 EARTHMOVING WHEEL LOADER CAT950 3.0 CY CAT950 2.3 M3
81 EARTHMOVING CRAWLER LOADER 1.0 CY 0.75 M3
82 EARTHMOVING CRAWLER LOADER CAT955 1.75 CY CAT955
83 EARTHMOVING CRAWLER LOADER CAT977 2.75 CY CAT977
84 EARTHMOVING CRAWLER LOADER 4.50 CY 3.4 M3
86 EARTHMOVING WHEEL ARTICUL CAT966 3.50 CY CAT966 2.5 M3

LOADER
87 EARTHMOVING WHEEL ARTICUL CAT988 6.00 CY CAT988 4.5 M3

LOADER
88 EARTHMOVING WHEEL ARTICUL CAT980 CAT980

LOADER PIPELOAD PIPELOAD
91 EARTHMOVING MOTOR GRADER CAT 12 CAT 12

Size
Equip
92 EARTHMOVING MOTOR GRADER CAT 14 CAT 42
95 EARTHMOVING TRENCHER, 12 IN X 3 FT 300 MM X 1.0

DITCHWITCH M
96 EARTHMOVING TRENCHER, WHEEL 16 IN X 7 FT 6 IN 400 MM X 2.0

M
97 EARTHMOVING TRENCHER, WHEEL 28 IN X 8 FT 6 IN 700 MM X 2.5

M
98 EARTHMOVING TRENCHER, WHEEL 48 IN 1200 MM
99 EARTHMOVING SCRAPER-ELEVATING CAT613 11 CY CAT613 8 M3
100 EARTHMOVING SCRAPER-ELEVATING CAT621J 21 CY CAT621J 16 M3
101 EARTHMOVING SCRAPER-ELEVATING CAT633C 32 CY CAT633C 24

M3
102 EARTHMOVING SCRAPER,WHEEL TWIN627 14-20 TWIN627 11-

TRACTR CY 15 M3
103 EARTHMOVING SCRAPER,WHEEL CAT631C 21-30 CAT631C 16-23

TRACTR CY M3
104 EARTHMOVING SCRAPER,WHEEL CAT651B 32-44 CAT651B 24-33

TRACTR CY M3
105 EARTHMOVING SCRAPER, TOWED CAT435F 14-18 CAT435F 11-14

CY M3
106 EARTHMOVING SCRAPER, TOWED CAT D4 68 HP CAT D4
107 EARTHMOVING CRAWLER TRACT. CAT D6 120 HP CAT D6

DOZER

DOZER

DOZER

DOZER
111 EARTHMOVING BACKHOE CRAWLER .50 CY .40 M3

HYDR
112 EARTHMOVING BACKHOE CRAWLER .75 CY .60 M3

HYDR
113 EARTHMOVING BACKHOE CRAWLER 1.0 CY 75 M3

HYDR

Size
Equip
114 EARTHMOVING BACKHOE CRAWLER 1.5 CY 1.1 M3

HYDR
115 EARTHMOVING BACKHOE CRAWLER 2.5 CY 1.9 M3

HYDR
116 EARTHMOVING TRUCK-MTD GRADALL 5/8 CY G660 G660
117 EARTHMOVING BACKHOE, SELF-PROP .50 CY 0.4 M3
118 EARTHMOVING BACKHOE, WHEEL .75 CY 0.6 M3

W/BREAKER W/BREAKER
121 DRILLING ROTARY ROCK DRILL CRAWLER MTD 12 CRAWLER MTD

IN
122 DRILLING TRACK DRILL,SWG 4.5 INCHES 115 MM

BOOM
123 DRILLING TWIN ROCK DRILL SUSP. VERTICAL SUSP.

VERTICAL
124 DRILLING AUGER,FLATBED- 2.5 2 TON,

MOUNTD TONS,OFFROAD OFFROAD
125 DRILLING DRILL QUAD,SWG 4.5 INCHES 115 MM

BOOM
126 COMPACTION ROLLER SELF- VIBR DRUM 7 VIB DRUM 6.5

PROPELLD TONS TON
127 COMPACTION ROLLER SELF- 9 WHEEL 15 9 WHEEL 14

PROPELLD TONS TON
128 COMPACTION ROLLER SELF- SMOOTH 10 SMOOTH 9

PROPELLD TONS TON
131 COMPACTION ROLLER,TOWED, 1 SHEEPSFT 40X60 SHEEPSFT 1

DRUM IN X1.5 M
132 COMPACTION ROLLER,TOWED, 1 VIBRATNG 30X54 VIBRG.8 X1.4

DRUM IN M
133 COMPACTION ROLLER, MANUAL VIB DRUM 1.0 VIB DRUM 1

GUIDE TONS TON
134 COMPACTION RAMMER, HANDHELD 350-700SPM, 130 350-700SPM,

60 KG
136 TRACTOR TRUCK TRACTOR 20 TONS 4X2 18 TON 4X2

Size
Equip
139 TRACTOR OFF-ROAD TRACTOR 20 TONS 4X4 18 TON 4X4
140 TRACTOR OFF-ROAD TRACTOR 40 TONS 6X6 36 TON 6X6
141 TRACTOR WHEEL, W/TOW 50 HP 40 KW

HITCH
142 TRACTOR WHEEL, W/TOW 105 HP 80 KW

HITCH
146 TRAILER LOWBOY, PLATFORM 15 TONS 15 TON
147 TRAILER LOWBOY, PLATFORM 25 TONs 25 TON
148 TRAILER LOWBOY, PLATFORM 40TONs 35 TON
155 TRAILER FLATBED - 4 WHEEL 6 TONS 5 TON
156 TRAILER FLATBED 15 TONS 15 TON
157 TRAILER FLATBED 30 TONS 25 TON
158 TRAILER FLOAT, OFFROAD 30 TONS 35 TON
159 TRAILER FLOAT, OFFROAD 60 TONS 55 TON
161 TRAILER DIESEL BOWSER 600 GALLONS 2.25 M3
162 TRAILER FUEL/WATER 2000 GALLONS 7.50 M3
166 TRAILER MOBILE OFFICE 8 X 35 FEET 2.5 X 10 M
16

Size
Equip
168 TRAILER X-RAY DARKROOM
169 TRAILER STORAGE VAN 8 X 28 FEET 2.5 X 8.5 M
171 TRAILER PIPE POLE 30 TONS 27 TON
172 TRAILER PIPE DOLLY/5TH 2 AXLE 2 AXLE

WHEEL
173 TRAILER CABLE REEL
176 CRANE TELESCOPIC JIB, SELF PROP. 5 TONS PROP 5 TON
181 CRANE TELESCOPIC JIB TRUCK - 15 TONS TRUCK - 14

TON

TON

TON

TON

TON

TON

TON

TON
189 CRANE TELESCOPIC JIB TRUCK - 110 TRUCK - 100

TONS TON
190 CRANE TELESCOPIC JIB TRUCK - 200 TRUCK - 180

TONS TON

Size
Equip
191 CRANE FIXED JIB TRUCK - 15 TONS TRUCK - 14

TON

TON

TON

TON

TON

TON

TON
198 CRANE FIXED JIB TRUCK - 120 TRUCK - 110

TONS TON
201 CRANE FIXED JIB, CRAWLER 15 TONS
212 CRANE TOWER-HORIZ. JIB MAX MAX 1900KG @

10T 4190LB@164FT 50M

20T 9260LB@213FT 65M

40T 6500LB@247FT 75M

Size
Equip
216 CRANE CLAMSHELL GRAB 1 CY 0.75 M3

ATTACHMENT

ATTACHMENT

ATTACHMENT
219 CRANE DRAGLINE BUCKET 1 CY 0.75 M3

ATTACHMENT

ATTACHMENT

ATTACHMENT

ATTACHMENT
223 CRANE CONCRETE BUCKET BTM DUMP 1 CY BTM DUMP

ATTACHMENT 0.75 M3
224 CRANE CONCRETE BUCKET BTM DUMP 3 CY BTM DUMP

ATTACHMENT 2.50 M3
226 GIN POLE W/HOIST 50 TONS 45 TON
231 DERRICK GUY DERRICK 250 TONS 225 TON
233 DERRICK CRAWLER GUY 225 TONS 200 TON

DERRICK
234 DERRICK CRAWLER GUY 400 TONS 360 TON

DERRICK
235 PILING PILE DRIVING 20 KFTLB DIESEL 27 KNM DIESEL

HAMMER
236 PILING PILE DRIVING 40 KFTLB DIESEL 55 KNM DIESEL

HAMMER

Size
Equip
237 PILING PILE DRIVING 75 KFTLB DIESEL 100 KNM

HAMMER DIESEL
238 PILING DRIVER/EXTRACTOR 70 HP VIBRO VIBRO 50 KW
239 PILING PILING FRAME, LEADS 30 FEET 10 M
240 PILING DRILLING FRAME AUGER AUGER
241 COMPRESSOR DIESEL(SLIDING 125 CFM 210 M3/H

VANE)

VANE)

VANE)
246 COMPRESSOR DIESEL(ROTARY 250 CFM 420 M3/H

SCREW)

SCREW)

SCREW)

SCREW)

SCREW)

SCREW)
256 CONCRETE BATCHPLANT, 20 CY/H 15 M3/H

DEMOUNT.
257 CONCRETE CONCRETE MIXER 6 SACK .25 M3
258 CONCRETE CONCRETE MIXER 16 SACK (1 CY) .75 M3
261 CONCRETE VIBRATOR GASOLINE 2.4 HP, 2 IN 1.8 KW, 50MM

HEAD HEAD
261 CONCRETE VIBRATOR, AIR 2.5 IN HEAD 65 MM HEAD

Size
Equip
263 CONCRETE CURB BUILDR, 75 HP, DIESEL 55 KW, DIESEL

SLIPFORM
264 CONCRETE POWER TROWEL, 4 36 IN DIA 1 M DIA

BLADE
266 CONCRETE MIXER TRUCK 6 CY 5 M3
267 CONCRETE SITE DUMPER .75 CY, DIESEL 0.5 M3, DIESEL
268 CONCRETE STATIC PUMP
269 CONCRETE TRUCK-MTD 60 CY/H, 4IN 45 M3/H, 100

PUMP&BOOM LINE MM
270 CONCRETE CONVEYOR 16 IN X 40 FEET 400 MM X 12 M
271 CONCRETE REBAR BENDER HYDRAULIC HYDRAULIC
272 CONCRETE REBAR SHEAR HYDRAULIC HYDRAULIC
274 CONCRETE SLIPFORM PAVER 10-24 FEET 3-7 M WIDE
276 WELDING PORTABLE GASOLINE 200 AMPERES 200 AMPERES

EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT
281 WELDING PORTABLE DIESEL 200 AMPERES 200 AMPERES

EQUIPMEN

EQUIPMEN

EQUIPMEN
284 WELDING PORTABLE DIESEL 650 A, TWIN ARC 650 A, TWIN

EQUIPMEN ARC
286 WELDING STATIC RECTIFIER 200 AMPERES 200 AMPERES

EQUIPMENT

Size
Equip

EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT
293 WELDING PIPE SEMI-AUTO. CO2

EQUIPMENT
294 WELDING PIPE AUTOMATIC SUBMERGED ARC SUBMERGED

EQUIPMENT ARC
296 WELDING AUTO. SUB-ARC TANK BASE PLATE BASE PLATE

EQUIPMENT
297 WELDING AUTO. SUB-ARC TANK WALL WALL

EQUIPMENT HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL
298 WELDING AUTO. SUB-ARC TANK WALL VERTICAL WALL

EQUIPMENT VERTICAL
301 WELDING OXY./ACT. WELD & COMB. UNIT COMB. UNIT

EQUIPMENT CUT.
302 WELDING PROPANE GAS SE T & PROPANE GAS SE

EQUIPMENT TRCH T & TRCH
306 WELDING ELECTRODE DRYING

EQUIPMENT OVN
311 PIPING SIDEBOOM (CAT 571) (CAT 571)

EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT

Size
Equip

EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT
316 PIPING CRAWLER TACK QUAD ARCS QUAD ARCS

EQUIPMENT TRACTOR
318 PIPING BENDING MACHINE 6 - 20 INCHES 150 - 500 MM

EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT
321 PIPING TAPESTER, HAND 2 - 12 INCHES 50 - 300 MM

EQUIPMENT WRAP
322 PIPING CLEAN PRM TAPE 8 - 16 INCHES 200 - 400 MM

EQUIPMENT MACH.

EQUIPMENT MACH.

EQUIPMENT MACH.

EQUIPMENT MACH.
326 PIPING CLEAN PRM TAPE 42-52 INCHES 1050 - 1300

EQUIPMENT MACH. MM
328 PIPING INTRNL LINE-UP 16 - 18 INCHES 400 - 450MM

EQUIPMENT CLAMP

EQUIPMENT CLAMP

EQUIPMENT CLAMP

EQUIPMENT CLAMP

EQUIPMENT CLAMP

Size
Equip

EQUIPMENT CLAMP

EQUIPMENT CLAMP
335 PIPING INTRNL LINE-UP OVER 48 INCHES OVER 1200MM

EQUIPMENT CLAMP
336 PIPING EXTRNL LINE-UP 8 - 14 INCHES 400 - 450MM

EQUIPMENT CLAMP

EQUIPMENT CLAMP

EQUIPMENT CLAMP
339 PIPING EXTRNL LINE-UP 36 - 44 INCHES 900 - 1100 MM

EQUIPMENT CLAMP
340 PIPING EXTRNL LINE-UP OVER 42 INCHES OVER 1100 MM

EQUIPMENT CLAMP
341 PIPING CUTTING & 1 - 4 INCHES 25 - 100 MM

EQUIPMENT BEVELLING

EQUIPMENT BEVELLING

EQUIPMENT BEVELLING
344 PIPING CUT & BEVEL, TORCH 10 - 48 INCHES 250 - 1200 MM

EQUIPMENT
346 PIPING PIPE/CONDUIT 0.5-2IN RATCHET UP TO 6

EQUIPMENT BENDER INCHES
347 PIPING HYDRAUL PIPE 1.25-4 INCHES 30 - 100 MM

EQUIPMENT BENDER
348 PIPING BENDER 2.5-6 IN DIA 65 - 150 MM

EQUIPMENT (MECHANICAL)
349 PIPING CUT & THREAD UP TO 6 INCHES UP TO 150 MM

EQUIPMENT MACHINE
351 PIPING DOUBLE JOINTING C/W RACK C/W RACK

EQUIPMENT YARD CONVYRS CONVYRS

Size
Equip
352 PIPING X-RAY EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT
354 PIPING INDUCTION HEATER

EQUIPMENT
355 PIPING HOLIDAY DETECTOR

EQUIPMENT
356 PIPING ELECTRIC THREADER UP TO 2 INCHES UP TO 50 MM

EQUIPMENT
358 PIPING BORING MACHINE ROAD BORER ROAD BORER

EQUIPMENT
361 MISCELLANEOUS POTENTIOMETER 12 POINT

EQUIP. 12 POINT
362 MISCELLANEOUS STRESS RELIEVER TRIPLE RELIEVER TRIPLE

EQUIP. RELIEVER
363 MISCELLANEOUS POWER DIST. CENTER 10 KVA 10 KVA

EQUIP.
364 MISCELLANEOUS BENCH SAW 10 - 12 INCHES 250 - 300 MM

EQUIP.
364 MISCELLANEOUS PAINT PRESSURE 5 GAL. 8CFM 20 LITER, 15

EQUIP. SPRAY M3/H
367 MISCELLANEOUS GUNITE 8 CY/H 6 M3/H

EQUIP.
368 MISCELLANEOUS CABLE PULLER UNIT 5000 LBF. ELEC. LEC.

EQUIP. E
369 MISCELLANEOUS AIR RECEIVING TANK 60 CF 2 M3

EQUIP.
370 MISCELLANEOUS CHAIN SAW 20 INCHES 500 MM

EQUIP.
371 MISCELLANEOUS TELEPHONES &

EQUIP. STATION

Size
Equip
374 MISCELLANEOUS TENSIOMETER WIRE 200000 LB CAP 90000 KG CAP

EQUIP. ROP
375 MISCELLANEOUS TENSIOMETER WIRE 40000 LB CAP 18000 KG CAP

EQUIP. ROP
376 PUMP CENTRIFUGAL 1.5 INCHES 40 MM
377 PUMP CENTRIFUGAL 2.0 INCHES 50 MM
378 PUMP INJECTION PUMP INHIBITOR INHIBITOR
379 PUMP SUBMERSIBLE, 4 INCHES, 9 HP 100 MM, 7 KW

DEWATERG
380 PUMP SUBMERSIBLE, 6 INCHES, 27 HP 150 MM, 20 KW

DEWATERG
381 PUMP HYDROSTATIC TEST 4000 PSI 27500 KPA
382 PUMP WATER FILL 4 IN, 110 GPM 100 MM, 7L/S
383 PUMP WELLPOINTS & HOSE 8 IN, PER 100 FT 200 MM, PER
30 M
384 PUMP WELLPOINT, 8 INCHES 200 MM

DIAPHRAGM SUCTION SUCTION
385 PUMP DIAPHRAGM 4 INCHES 100 MM

SUCTION SUCTION
386 PNEUMATIC AIR WRENCH 1.25 IN DRIVE 30 MM DRIVE

PORT. TOOL
387 PNEUMATIC JACK HAMMER 65 LBS 30 KG

PORT. TOOL
388 PNEUMATIC SAND BLAST 600 LBS, 7CF 275 KG, 0.2 M3
PORT. TOOL MACHINE
391 ELECTRIC LIGHT PLANT 3000 WATT 3000 WATT

EQUIP/TOOL
392 ELECTRIC DRILL PRESS 1.5 INCHES 40 MM

EQUIP/TOOL
395 ELECTRIC DRILL 1.0 INCH 25 MM

EQUIP/TOOL
396 ELECTRIC GENERATOR SET 6 KW 6 KW

EQUIP/TOOL

Size
Equip

EQUIP/TOOL

EQUIP/TOOL

EQUIP/TOOL

EQUIP/TOOL

EQUIP/TOOL

EQUIP/TOOL
404 ELECTRIC SAW, CIRCULAR 6 INCHES 150 MM

EQUIP/TOOL
406 ELECTRIC ELECTRIC GRINDER 6 INCHES 150 MM

EQUIP/TOOL
407 ELECTRIC PEDESTAL GRINDER 12 INCHES 300 MM

EQUIP/TOOL
408 ELECTRIC LATHE 9 INCHES 225 MM

EQUIP/TOOL
411 HOIST HAND-CHAIN 1.5 TONS 1.5 TON
412 HOIST HAND-CHAIN 4.5 TONS 4 TON
413 HOIST HAND-CHAIN 10 TONS 9 TON
414 HOIST HAND-CHAIN 2.0 TONS 2 TON
416 HOIST SINGLE DRUM 22 HP 16 KW
417 HOIST DOUBLE DRUM 32 HP 24 KW
419 HOIST PORTABLE MATL. 1.0 TONS 1 TON

TOWER

Size
Equip
419 HOIST PORTABLE MATL. 1.0 TONS 1.0 TONS

TOWER
421 ASPHALT PAVER/FINISHER 10 FEET WIDE 3 M WIDE

EQUIPMENT
422 ASPHALT SPREADER TRAILER, 2000 GAL, SPRAY 7.50 M3,

EQUIPMENT GAS SPRAY
424 ASPHALT BITUMEN TANKER 2000 7.50 M3

EQUIPMENT GALLON
425 ASPHALT ASPHALT HEATER

EQUIPMENT
426 SITE/OFFICE TRANSIT THEODOLITE

EQUIP
427 SITE/OFFICE PORTABLE BUILDINGS PER 1000 SF PER 100 M2

EQUIP
430 SITE/OFFICE SPACE HEATR, OIL, 150 MBTU 40 KW

EQUIP. AUTO
435 PIPING ROLI CRADLE 4 - 12 INCHES 100 - 300MM

EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT
438 PIPING ROLI CRADLE 36 - 42 INCHES 900 - 1050 MM

EQUIPMENT
439 PIPING ROLI CRADLE OVER 42 INCHES OVER 1050 MM

EQUIPMENT
440 PIPING HOT TAP MACHINE 2 - 4 INCHES 50 - 100 MM

EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT

Size
Equip

EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT
444 PIPING BUTT FUSION 2 - 4 INCHES 50 - 100 MM

EQUIPMENT MACHINE

EQUIPMENT MACHINE

EQUIPMENT MACHINE

EQUIPMENT MACHINE

EQUIPMENT MACHINE

33 Base Indices

Base Indices
35 Database Relations - Aspen Icarus Reference Guide 33-1

Base Indices
These indices are generated by Icarus after updating the system costs (engineering
disciplines, wage rates, material costs, shop and field labor rates, construction
equipment rental rates, etc.). We run estimates on our benchmark projects using the
updated system and then use the results to calculate the indices. Since our
benchmark projects contain a variety of component types fabricated from a variety
of materials, these indices are a composite of the individual cost adjustments that
are made. These indices do not derive from public sources and they may not
accurately reflect how the update will affect your typical projects. To evaluate this,
you should run benchmark projects and develop your own adjustments.
Note: “1Q” represents first quarter, “3Q” represents third quarter.
System Base Index by Category: US

Base Data for Design Construction
System General Construction Engineering Management
Costs: US Materials Labor Labor Labor
Current:1Q- 2230 2220 1470 1850
2017
Prior:1Q-2016 2130 2180 1470 1860
1Q-2015 2240 2130 1490 1860
1Q-2014 2250 2090 1500 1810
1Q-2013 2240 2050 1520 1790
1Q-2012 2330 2030 1530 1800
1Q-2011 2250 2000 1560 1800
1Q-2010 2120 2000 1590 1620
1Q-2009 2040 2010 1620 1660
1Q-2008 2200 1960 1620 1630
1Q-2007 2060 1890 1540 1540
1Q-2006 1900 1820 1490 1490
1Q-2005 1840 1750 1480 1480
1Q-2004 1630 1690 1460 1480
1Q-2003 1540 1630 1480 1460
1Q-2002 1510 1590 1470 1480
1Q-2001 1520 1550 1450 1470
1Q-2000 1520 1510 1440 1450
1Q-1999 1510 1460 1450 1440
1Q-1998 1525 1430 1450 1450
1Q-1997 1500 1400 1450 1450
1Q-1996 1485 1365 1460 1450
1Q-1995 1460 1340 1480 1460
1Q-1994 1390 1320 1460 1480
33-2 34 Code Accounts

Costs: US Materials Labor Labor Labor
1Q-1993 1370 1310 1450 1460
1Q-1992 1360 1290 1420 1450
1Q-1991 1350 1270 1390 1420
System Base Index by Category: UK

Base Data Design Construction
for System General Construction Engineering Management
Costs: UK Materials Labor Labor Labor
Current: 1Q- 3340 5540 5620 5420
2017
Prior:1Q-2016 3230 5430 5540 5310
1Q-2015 3220 5350 5430 5230
1Q-2014 3220 5190 5330 5070
1Q-2013 3140 5070 4950 4960
1Q-2012 3100 4970 4750 4860
1Q-2011 3080 4580 4780 4470
1Q-2010 2910 4370 4600 4270
1Q-2009 2910 4290 4450 4190
1Q-2008 2830 4020 4420 4080
1Q-2007 2630 3830 4190 3890
1Q-2006 2500 3670 3970 3790
1Q-2005 2420 3510 3810 3670
1Q-2004 2290 3360 3670 3570
1Q-2003 2230 3220 3540 3510
1Q-2002 2190 3120 3480 3410
1Q-2001 2140 2980 3360 3250
1Q-2000 2080 2850 3210 3110
1Q-1999 2140 2700 2950 3050
1Q-1998 2100 2550 2780 2880
1Q-1997 2050 2410 2620 2660
1Q-1996 1990 2310 2470 2470
1Q-1995 1910 2200 2380 2380
1Q-1994 1850 2160 2280 2280
1Q-1993 1780 2110 2210 2210
1Q-1992 1670 2050 2140 2140
1Q-1991 ----- 1930 2020 2020

System Base Index by Category: JP
Costs: JP Materials Labor Labor Labor
Current: 1Q- 1820 1510 2290 2140
2016
Prior:1Q-2015 1840 1430 2240 2090
1Q-2014 1790 1380 2150 2010
1Q-2013 1640 1300 2080 1950
1Q-2012 1550 1130 2060 1940
1Q-2010 1580 1130 2030 1910
1Q-2009 1480 1140 1950 1830
1Q-2008 1500 1150 1900 1780
1Q-2007 1750 1150 1930 1820
1Q-2006 1760 1160 1960 1840
1Q-2005 1450 1170 1460 1470
1Q-2004 1410 1180 1440 1460
1Q-2003 1330 1200 1380 1400
1Q-2002 1220 1250 1370 1380
1Q-2001 1210 1300 1350 1370
1Q-2000 1230 1330 1360 1370
1Q-1999 1260 1350 1360 1370
1Q-1998 1370 1370 1360 1350
1Q-1997 1350 1350 1360 1350
1Q-1996 1255 1340 1350 1350
1Q-1995 1250 1350 1360 1360
1Q-1994 1250 1350 1390 1390
1Q-1993 1390 1320 1460 1460
System Base Index by Category: EU

Costs: EU Materials Labor Labor Labor
Current: 1Q- 2470 2060 2080 1920
2017
Prior: 1Q- 2380 2040 2060 1900
2016
1Q-2015 2380 1990 2000 1860
1Q-2014 2360 1940 1950 1810
1Q-2013 2360 1890 1900 1760
1Q-2012 2320 1840 1850 1720

Costs: EU Materials Labor Labor Labor
1Q-2011 2280 1920 1880 1790
1Q-2010 2220 1860 1810 1740
1Q-2009 2180 1840 1790 1720
1Q-2008 2170 1790 1730 1670
1Q-2007 2030 1720 1660 1600
1Q-2006 1780 1700 1590 1580
1Q-2005 1700 1670 1560 1560
1Q-2004 1640 1650 1550 1540
1Q-2003 1580 1630 1530 1520
1Q-2002 1560 1600 1510 1490
1Q-2001 1520 1550 1450 1450
System Base Index by Category: ME

Costs: ME Materials Labor Labor Labor
Current: 2340 2990 1620 2450
1Q-2017
Prior: 1Q- 2310 2870 1620 2350
2016
1Q-2015 2340 2710 1620 2220
1Q-2014 2310 2540 1620 2080
1Q-2013 2300 2280 1620 1870
1Q-2012 2390 2280 1620 1870
1Q-2011 2380 2030 1620 1660
1Q-2010 2230 1950 1590 1590
1Q-2009 2160 1930 1580 1580
1Q-2008 2200 1970 1610 1610
1Q-2007 2060 1890 1540 1540

34 Code Accounts

Introduction to Code Accounts
Indirect Codes and Descriptions
Direct Codes and Descriptions
Equipment and Setting
Piping
Civil
Steel
Instrumentation
Electrical
Insulation
Paint

Introduction to Code Accounts
Aspen Icarus systems contain a 3-digit standard code of account set to which costs
and manhours are allocated in developing the project estimate. This is referred to as
the “ICARUS” code of accounts. The code of accounts form can be used either to
modify the ICARUS standard code of accounts or to create a completely new set of
accounts. The resulting user-developed code of accounts is termed as the “user”
code of accounts. In addition, the user may develop two sets of code of accounts,
namely, a “user-reporting” code of accounts, and an “user-internal” code of
accounts, where the reporting code of accounts represent the level of granularity
that user wishes to see in the output reports, and the internal code of accounts
refers to the allocation and grouping of the standard ICARUS system code of
accounts to a level of detail intended for the user, for the purposes of indexing and
contract scope definition. If new codes of account are defined, account codes must
be supplied and all references to the account codes in subsequent codes must
reference the new codes of account (exceptions to this rule will be discussed
subsequently). If modifications are made to existing code of accounts, the account
code must not be specified, since the account code is implicitly defined based on the
account number that is used.
The Code of Accounts input data is composed of three types. The code of account
“Definitions” are used to define either a name for a new account number or a new
name for a standard ICARUS account. The code of account “allocations” are used to
reassign costs and manhours from one or more standard system accounts into either
another ICARUS account or a newly defined user code of account. Costs and
manhours may be assigned directly into a current account or into a new account with
a supplemental cost item. The code of account “reporting” is used to further group a
very detailed user-developed code of accounts into a smaller set of accounts that can
be displayed in output reports. The user’s internal code of accounts must be used on
indexing and contract scope input forms, if the user code of accounts is developed.
However, for the ease of exchange of components between multiple projects, the
user may switch between the user-internal code of accounts and ICARUS system
code of account numbers by using the appropriate switch between user/ICARUS code
of accounts. However, the user’s reporting code of accounts is never used in the
input forms, and displayed only the output reports. In the absence of reporting code
of accounts, output reports use the user (internal) code of accounts.
Modifying the System Code of Accounts

The ICARUS standard code of accounts may be transformed into a new code of
accounts in one or more of the following ways:
• An ICARUS account name can be changed.
• A new account can be created by defining it. This must be in the range
1-999 and must not already be defined as a standard account.
• Costs and manhours can be reassigned from one account to another.
The account code for the modified code of accounts must not be specified and is
determined by the system (for example, PIPING account code includes all accounts
from 300 to 399).

Creating a Different Code of Accounts
A new code of accounts may be created that is different from the ICARUS system
standards code of accounts. A new code of accounts is the one in which one or both
of the following conditions are met:
• Account numbers are created outside the range of the ICARUS system code of
accounts (that is, outside the range of 1-999, for example, 1000-99999999).
• The account type (piping, civil, etc.) must be specified, thus changing the
account number range to which the account type is applied.
To develop a different code of accounts, every required code of account must be
specified, and the account type must be specified to designate its allocation in
various summary reports. This caveat applies to the indirect codes of account, where
all indirect account types P1 through PB must be specified. Thus, these accounts, as
defined, will constitute the entire code of accounts (direct and indirect) for the
estimate.
While modifying the ICARUS code of accounts, or creating a completely new user
code of accounts, the user may specify the currency symbol of procurement. This
currency symbol refers to direct material procurement cost, and to a limited set of
indirect, and allows the user to develop a multi-currency procurement strategy. The
symbols and conversion rates (in terms of a multiplier to one of the four country
basis currencies in the system) ate stored in a central CURRENCY.DAT file. When a
particular, direct material code of account is defined as being procured in the
selected currency, special procurement output reports display the currency exposure
of the given project in terms of that selected currency, in addition to the project
basis currency. However, all other reports are always in the project currency.
Transfers from the ICARUS system standard code of accounts to the User-internal
code of accounts can be very simple or complex, depending on the desire of
breakdown. Breakdown can be very complex, by material, subtype, size (for piping),
equipment symbol and equipment type. Thus, a single code of account can be
broken into multiple codes. This transfer is performed using the code of account
allocation, together with exceptions. User-internal code of accounts are referred to,
in the user input, in the indexing and contractor scope input. As already mentioned,
the user may choose either the user-internal code of account or the ICARUS system
code of accounts on the component forms, using the user/ICARUS switch.
Example
The allocations are one step transfers from one account to a second account. They
should not be interpreted as sequential transfers. For example, if the following costs
were calculated by the system in the designated codes of account:
COA Cost
315 1000
417 10000
591 100000

From ICARUS To ICARUS COA Allocate to ICARUS
COA User Matl COA
315 blank 4178325
417 blank 5911234
591 blank 4178325
The following resulting allocations would be reported, if no further reporting COAs

are specified:
COA Cost
315 0
4178325 1000
5911234 110000
However, allocations have been specified in a different sequence, the same result will
be reported.
Reporting Code of Accounts

Creating complex user code of accounts is important for proper indexing, contract
scope allocation, and procurement strategy. But, it may be necessary to summarize
the results in a simple form for easy understanding of results. In other cases, the
results may be summarized in to ways, one for the use of the client, and another
way for the use of the management. The reporting code of account layer provides a
method of summarizing the user-internal code of accounts into a simpler set for
reporting use. The only place that the reporting code of accounts is used, is in
reporting. The reporting COA form allows the user to group the user-internal or
ICARUS Codes of account to a more manageable subset, for reporting purposes.
Example
COA Cost
3154 1000
3191 10000
3300 100000
From ICARUS To ICARUS COA Allocate to

COA ICARUS User
Matl COA
3100 3300 3

The following resulting allocations would be reported:
COA Cost
3 111000
There are several useful applications for the Code of Accounts input:
• Multiple Codes of account files can created for different clients in the code of
accounts library. Each file can represent the client’s COA structure. Appropriate
COA file can be selected at the project level and used.
• Costs can be moved from one account group to other. For example, the system
reports electrical trenching in the electrical account, and the user may wish to
report trenching as a civil item. The system maintains fidelity in account groups,
in three distinct categories, indirects, bulks and equipment. Codes can be
transferred inside the three categories, but not between them. This applies to
both, reporting and the user-internal code
of accounts.
• A special supplemental item is to be added to the estimate. The user may wish to
create a new account to maintain visibility of the
supplemental cost.
• On the contrary, an entirely new set of code of accounts can be created. This
may be useful in clarifying the costs of the project to the management, in
addition to indexing and defining the contractor scope.
• Use of reporting codes of account allow the separation of reporting structure from
the user-internal COA structure. More importantly, it simplifies reporting the
estimate results to the client.
• Currency selection at the account definition level allows the user to develop a
procurement strategy for the project.
Output Reports
The Code of Accounts Summary reflects the user-specified account numbers and
names. The Master Summary, Contract Summaries and Area Summaries allocate the
estimated costs according to the account type (piping, civil, and so on). It is
incumbent upon the user when defining an entirely different code of accounts to
specify account types that correspond with the chosen account number groups. An
inconsistency would occur, for example, if, within a series of account numbers for
piping (P), one of the accounts were assigned an instrumentation account type (I).
This account would be grouped numerically with the piping accounts in the Code of
Accounts Summary, but it would be summarized with instrumentation in the other
summaries. This inconsistency could be avoided by allocating this account into a
numbered account in the Instrumentation group. Then the estimated costs and man-
hours for this item would appear both in a numbered instrumentation account and in
the instrumentation summary.
In the Bulk Detail and Bulk Summary Appendices of the system output report the
user-specified account numbers are reported, but the account names are the system
names and not the user-specified names. The system account name forms an
integral part of the detailed item description. It is necessary, therefore, to retain the

system account name in these appendices for clarity and for Aspen Icarus to provide
technical support.

Field Indirects (P1) Engineering Indirects (PA)
01 - 09 Titles not assigned 80 LUMP SUM CONST. MGMT

10 LUMP SUM CONST. INDIRECT 81 HOME OFFICE CONST. SUPP.
82 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT
11 FRINGE BENEFITS
83 - 84 Titles not assigned
12 BURDENS
13 CONSUMABLES, SMALL TOOLS
14 MISC. (INSURANCE, ETC)
15 SCAFFOLDING
16 EQUIPMENT RENTAL
17 VENDOR REPRESENTATIVES
18 FIELD SERVICES
19 TEMP. CONST., UTILITIES
20 MOBILIZATION, DEMOBILIZE
21 CATERING, ACCOMODATION
22 TRAVEL
23 OVERTIME PREMIUM

Special Indirects (P2 Contractor Indirects (PB)
24 SPECIAL INDIRECT ITEM 1 85 FIELD CONST. SUPERVISION

25 SPECIAL INDIRECT ITEM 2 86 STARTUP, COMISSIONING
Freight (P3) G & A Overheads (P6)
50 LUMP SUM FREIGHT 90 G AND A OVERHEADS

51 DOMESTIC FREIGHT
52 OCEAN FREIGHT
53 AIR FREIGHT
54 MODULE FREIGHT
55 OTHER FRIEGHT
Taxes (P4) Contractor Fee (P7)
60 LUMP SUM TAXES, PERMITS 91 CONTRACT FEE

61 PERMITS
62 MATERIALS TAXES
63 CONSTRUCTION TAXES
64 ENGINEERING TAXES
65 OTHER TAXES
Engineering (P5) Escalation (P8)
70 LUMP SUM ENGINEERING 97 ESCALATION

71 BASIC ENGINEERING
72 DETAIL ENGINEERING
73 MATERIAL PROCUREMENT
74 SUBCONTRACT PROCUREMENT
75 ENGINEERING MANAGEMENT
Royalty, Miscellaneous Charges (P9)
98 ROYALTY, MISC. CHARGES

Contingencies (P0)
99 CONTINGENCY

Direct Codes and Descriptions
Equipment and Setting

100 EQUIPMENT AND SETTING 200 FLUID SEPARATION EQUIP.
103 SPECIAL PLANT ITEM 201 DUST COLLECTORS
104 SPECIAL EQUIPMENT ITEM 202 SCRUBBERS
105 MISC. ITEM ALLOWANCE 203 BAG HOUSES
106 OTHER EQUIPMENT ITEMS 204 PRECIPITATORS
107 WAREHOUSE SPARES 205 SEPARATORS
109 EQUIPMENT DEMOLITION
110 PROCESS VESSELS 210 MATERIALS HANDLING EQUIP

111 TRAY TOWERS & TRAYS 211 CONVEYORS
112 PACKED TOWERS & PACKING 212 FEEDERS
113 VERTICAL VESSELS 213 CRANES,HOISTS,ETC
114 HORIZONTAL VESSELS 214 ELEVATORS
115 VACUUM VESSELS 215 SCALES
116 CRYSTALLIZERS 216 MAGNETS
117 EVAPORATORS 217 CAR DUMPERS & SHAKERS
120 STORAGE VESSELS 220 ELECTRICAL GENERATORS

121 ATMOSPHERIC STORAGE TANK 221 GAS TURBINE GENERATORS
122 PRESSURIZED STORAGE TANK 222 DIESEL GENERATORS
123 SILOS 223 STEAM TURBINE GENERATORS
124 BINS AND HOPPERS 224 PORTABLE GENERATORS
125 GAS HOLDERS
126 STOCK CHESTS
130 REACTION,MIXING EQUIP. 240 BOILER PLANT EQUIPMENT

131 REACTORS & AUTOCLAVES 241 BOILERS
132 AGITATED VESSELS 242 PACKAGE BOILER
133 BLENDERS 243 ECONOMIZERS
134 MIXERS 244 PREHEATERS
150 COMPRESSORS & BLOWERS 250 PROCESS HEATERS

151 CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSORS 251 FURNACES,HEATERS
152 RECIPROCATING COMPRESSOR 252 WASTE HEAT BOILERS
153 TURBO-EXPAND. COMPRESSOR 253 INCINERATORS
154 FANS AND BLOWERS 254 KILNS
255 STACKS

160 PUMPS 260 HEAT EXCHANGERS
161 CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS 261 SHELL & TUBE EXCHANGERS
162 RECIPROCATING PUMPS 262 REBOILERS
163 VACUUM PUMPS 263 DOUBLE PIPE EXCHANGERS
164 ROTARY,GEAR PUMPS 264 AIR COOLERS
165 VERTICAL PUMPS 265 COOLING TOWERS
166 SUMP & WELL PUMPS 266 MISC. HEAT EXCHANGERS
167 SLURRY PUMPS 267 PLATE FIN EXCHANGERS
170 DRIVERS & GEAR REDUCERS 270 LININGS

171 ELECTRIC MOTORS 271 REFRACTORY LININGS
172 STEAM TURBINES 272 ACID BRICK LININGS
173 GAS TURBINES 273 CAST LININGS
174 GAS & DIESEL ENGINES 274 POND LININGS
175 GEAR REDUCERS 275 OTHER LININGS
180 SIZE REDUCTION EQUIP 280 MISC. PACKAGE UNITS

181 CRUSHERS,BREAKERS 281 REFRIGERATION UNITS
182 MILLS 282 HVAC EQUIPMENT
183 PULVERIZERS 283 WATER TREATING UNITS
184 CUTTERS,FLAKERS 284 INSTRUMENT AIR SYSTEMS
185 STOCK TREATMENT 285 MODULE SETTING
190 SOLIDS SEPARATION EQUIP. 290 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

191 SCREENS AND GRIZZLIES 291 EJECTORS
192 FILTERS 292 PROPRIETARY EQUIPMENT
193 CENTRIFUGES 293 FLARES
194 DRYERS
195 LIQUID CYCLONES
196 FLOATATION CELLS
197 THICKENERS,CLARIFIERS
Piping
300 PIPING 350 NON-METAL PIPE/FITTINGS
302 SUBCONTRACT PIPING 351 NON-METAL FIELD MAT’L
303 SPECIAL PLANT PIPING 352 NON-METAL FIELD SHOP FAB
304 SPECIAL EQUIP. PIPING 353 NONMETAL REMOTESHOP MATL
305 OTHER EQUIPMENT PIPE 354 NONMETAL REMOTESHOP FAB
306 PIPING SYSTEM TESTING 355 NON-METAL VALVES
307 PREFAB PIPE REWORK
309 PIPING DEMOLITION

310 CARBON STL PIPE/FITTINGS 357 NON-METAL PIPE ERECTION
311CS FIELD MAT’L
312CS FIELD SHOP FAB
313CS REMOTE SHOP MAT’L
314CS REMOTE SHOP FAB
315CS VALVES: FLANGED
316CS VALVES: NON-FLANGED
317CS PIPE ERECTION
320 STAINLESS PIPE/FITTINGS 360 PIPING SPECIALTIES

321SS FIELD MAT’L 361 TRAPS & VACUUM BREAKERS
322SS FIELD SHOP FAB 362 TRACING TUBING & FITTING
323SS REMOTE SHOP MAT’L 363 JACKET INTERCONNECTIONS
324SS REMOTE SHOP FAB
325SS VALVES: FLANGED
326SS VALVES: NON-FLANGED
327SS PIPE ERECTION
330 MISC.METAL PIPE/FITTINGS 365 HAND CONTROLS

331 MISC. METAL FIELD MAT’L 366 PIPE HANGERS, SHOES ETC.
332 MISC.METAL FIELDSHOP FAB
333 MISC.METAL RMT SHOP MATL
334 MISC. METAL RMT SHOP FAB
335 MISC.METAL VALVE:FLANGED
336 MISC.METAL VALVE:NOFLANG
337 MISC.METAL PIPE ERECTION
340 LINED PIPE/FITTINGS 368 MECHANICAL CONNECTIONS

341 LINED PIPE FIELD MAT’L 369 FLOW DIVERSION PANELS
342 LINED FIELD SHOP FAB
343 LINED REMOTE SHOP MAT’L
344 LINED REMOTE SHOP FAB
345 LINED VALVES
347 LINED PIPE ERECTION 370 FIREWATER, BURIED PIPE

371 FIREWATER PIPING
372 HYDRANTS,HOSE,NOZZLE,ETC
373 DELUGE SYSTEMS
374 SHOWER, EYEWASH, ETC.
376 BURIED PIPE INSTALLATION
377 PIPE TRENCH & BACKFILL
378 COAT AND WRAP PIPE
380 DUCTWORK/LAUNDERS
381 PROCESS DUCTWORK
382 HVAC DUCTWORK
383 LAUNDERS

390 PIPELINES
391 PIPELINE-MAINLINE PIPE
392 PIPELINE-VALVES,FITTINGS
393 PIPELINE-FAB. & INSTALL
394 PIPELINE-SCRAPER L/R
395 PIPELINE-DBL JOINT/COAT
396 PIPELINE-SUPPORTS
397 PIPELINE-RADIOGRAPH TEST
398 PIPELINE-MARINE WORK
399 PIPELINE-MISC. PIPING
Civil
400 CIVIL 450 REBAR, FORMWORK, ETC.
402 SUBCONTRACT CIVIL 451 REBAR
403 SPECIAL PLANT CIVIL 452 FOUNDATION ACCESSORIES
404 SPECIAL EQUIP. CIVIL 453 INSTALL REBAR
405 SCAFFOLDING 454 FORMWORK MATERIALS
409 CIVIL DEMOLITION 455 FIELD FABRICATE FORMWORK
456 INSTALL FORMWORK
457 STRIP & CLEAN FORMWORK
458 BACKFILL
410 EARTHWORK 460 PRECAST CONCRETE

411 CLEAR SITE 461 PRECAST PIPERACK
412 BULK EXCAVATION 462 PRECAST BEAMS & COLUMNS
413 ROCK EXCAVATION
414 BLASTING
415 HAULING & DUMPING
416 SITE FILL & COMPACT
417 DEWATERING
418 STABILIZATION
419 CONTAINMENT,EMBANKMENTS
420 ROADS,RAILROADS 470 BUILDINGS

421 GRADE,COMPACT BASE 471 SUBCONTRACT BUILDINGS
422 ROADS 472 BLDG STRUCTURE/FINISHES
423 PAVING 473 BUILDING FURNISHINGS
424 RAILROADS 474 BUILDING ELECTRICAL
425 BOARD ROADS 475 BUILDING PLUMBING
476 BUILDING HVAC

430 OTHER SITEWORK 480 MISCELLANEOUS CIVIL
431 TEST BORINGS 481 LININGS AND COATINGS
432 DEMOLITION & RELOCATION 485 OFFSHORE CIVIL
433 LANDSCAPING
434 FENCING
435 RETAINING WALLS
436 PILING
437 SHORING
438 DRILLED WELLS
439 DRAINAGE
440 CONCRETE 490 PIPELINE CIVIL WORK

441 AGGREGATE 491 PIPELINE-ROW & SITE WORK
442 CEMENT 492 PIPELINE-ROW CROSSINGS
443 SAND 493 PIPELINE-DITCHING
444 POURED CONCRETE 494 PIPELINE-ANCHORS/SUPPORT
445 GROUT 499 PIPELINE-MISC. CIVIL
446 CONCRETE POUR AND FINISH
447 EXCAVATION & BACKFILL
448 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE
449 OTHER EQUIP. CONCRETE
Steel
500 STEEL 540 TOWERS AND TRUSSES
502 SUBCONTRACT STEEL 541 STEEL TOWERS
503 SPECIAL PLANT STEEL 542 STEEL TRUSSES
504 SPECIAL EQUIP. STEEL
509 STEEL DEMOLITION
510 EQUIPMENT STEEL 550 STEEL PLATE ITEMS

511 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT STEEL 551 FABRICATED PLATE
512 LADDERS
513 PLATFORMS
519 OTHER EQUIPMENT STEEL
520 STRUCTURAL STEEL 580 OFFSHORE STEELWORK

521 STEEL STRUCTURES 581 OFFSHORE JACKETS
522 PIPERACK STEEL 582 OFFSHORE TUBULAR STEEL
523 PIPE SUPPORTS
524 TUBULAR STEEL
530 OTHER STEEL ITEMS 590 OTHER STEELWORK

531 FLOORING & STAIR TREADS 591 STEEL UNLOAD & HANDLING
532 HANDRAIL AND TOE PLATE 592 THRUST ANCHORS
533 OTHER BLDG/STRUCT STEEL 593 DEFLECTION ANCHORS
534 BUILDING SIDING
535 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL ITEM

Instrumentation
600 INSTRUMENTATION 640 INSTR. SUPPORT & ENCL.
602 SUBCONTRCT INSTMENTATION 641 TRAYS & SUPPORT
603 SPECIAL PLANT INSTRUMENT 642 CONDUIT & FITTINGS
604 SPECIAL EQUIP INSTRUMENT 644 INSTRUMENT HOUSING
609 INSTRUMENT DEMOLITION 645 PNEU. JUNCTION BOXES
646 ELEC. JUNCTION BOXES
647 T/C JUNCTION BOXES
648 MULTIPLEX JUNCTION BOXES
649 OTHER SUPPORTS
610 FIELD INSTRUMENTATION 650 INSTRUMENT ELECTRICAL

611 FLOW INSTRUMENTS 651 WIRE/CABLE ETC.
612 LEVEL INSTRUMENTS 653 SOLENOIDS
613 PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS 659 OTHER INSTR. ELECTRICAL
614 TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS
615 ANALYZERS
616 MOTION INSTRUMENTS
617 BURNER INSTRUMENTS
618 ORIFICE PLATES
619 OTHER EQUIPMENT INSTR.
620 PANELS, PANEL DEVICES 660 COMPUTER CONTROL

621 CONTROL CENTER PANELS 661 CONTROLLER INTERFACES
622 CONTROL CTR CONNECTIONS 662 INDIC./RECORD INTERFACES
623 BACK OF PANEL INSTRUMENT 663 T/C INTERFACES
624 EMERGENCY SHUT-DOWN BOP 664 OPERATOR STATIONS
625 ALARM SWITCH BOP 665 CABLE/DATA HIGHWAYS
627 EQUIP. CONTROL PANEL 666 BARRIERS & TRANSDUCERS
628 EQUIP. PANEL DEVICES 667 PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS
629 OTHER PANEL DEVICES 669 OTHER COMPUTER CONTROL
630 INSTRUMENT RUNS 670 MISC. INSTRUMENTATION

631 AIR SUPPLY PIPING 671 Q.C. EQUIPMENT
632 INSTRUMENT PIPING
633 TERMINATIONS
634 PNEUMATIC TUBING
635 PNEUMATIC MULTI-TUBE
636 INSTRUMENT SIGNAL WIRING
637 MULTI-COND. INSTR. WIRE
638 T/C EXTENSION WIRING
639 T/C MULTI-COND. WIRING

680 FINAL CONTROL ELEMENTS
681 CONTROL VALVES
682 SAFETY VALVES
683 RUPTURE DISCS
684 MOTOR OPERATED VALVES
685 REGULATING VALVES
686 DIVERTER VALVES
690 OTHER INSTRUMENT WORK

691 INSTRUMENT TESTING
Electrical
700 ELECTRICAL 747 SUBSTATION STEEL
702 SUBCONTRACT ELECTRICAL 748 SWITCHRACK
703 SPECIAL PLANT ELECTRICAL 749 RECTIFIERS
704 SPECIAL EQUIP ELECTRICAL 750 BLDG/AREA ELECTRICAL
709 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITON 751 BLDG/AREA LIGHTING
752 LIGHTING FIXTURES
753 RECEPTACLES/SWITCHES
754 HVAC ELECTRICAL
755 MISC. SMALL TRANSFORMERS
756 PANELBOARDS
757 WIRE/CABLE - LIGHTING
710 WIRE, CABLE, ETC. 758 EQUIPMENT CABINETS

711 WIRE/CABLE - LOW VOLTAGE 760 BURIED CABLE
712 WIRE/CABLE -HIGH VOLTAGE 761 ELECTRICAL TRENCHING
713 PILOT LIGHT 762 UNDERGROUND CABLE DUCT
714 PUSH BUTTON STATION
715 TERMINATORS/CONNECTORS
716 JUNCTION BOXES
717 WIRE/CABLE - MV
718 WIRE/CABLE - CV
719 OTHER EQUIPMENT WIRING
720 CONDUIT, TRAYS, ETC. 770 GROUNDING, CATH. PROTEC.

721 CONDUIT 771 GROUNDING SYSTEMS
722 CONDUIT FITTINGS 772 CATHODIC PROTECTION
723 CABLE TRAYS

730 OTHER ELEC. EQUIPMENT 780 COMMUNICATION,ALARMS,ETC.
731 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE 781 TELEPHONE SYSTEM
732 CAPACITORS 782 PUB. ADDRESS GEN. ALARM
733 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER - LV 783 INTRUSION DET. SYSTEM
734 TRANSFORMERS - MV 784 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM
735 TRANSFORMERS - LV 785 CLOSED CIRCUIT TV
736 SWITCHGEAR - MV 786 RADIO SYSTEMS
737 SWITCHGEAR - LV 787 AREA NETWORK SYSTEMS
738 BUS DUCT - LV 788 METEOROLOGICAL SYSTEMS
739 DISCONNECT SWITCH
740 MAJOR ELEC. EQUIPMENT 790 OTHER ELECTRICAL

741 TRANSFORMERS - HV 791 ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT TSTNG
742 SWITCHGEAR - HV 792 ELECTRICAL TRACING
743 MCC EQUIPPED SPACE 794 SOLAR PANELS
744 MOTOR CONTROL CENTER - MV 795 BATTERY PACKS
745 BUS DUCT - MV/HV 796 UPS
746 TRANSMISSION LINES 797 EMERGENCY GENERATOR
Insulation
800 INSULATION, FIREPROOFING
802 SUBCONTRACT INSULATION
803 SPECIAL PLANT INSULATION
804 SPECIAL EQUIP INSULATION
809 INSULATION DEMOLITION
810 INSULATION
811 PIPE INSULATION
812 EQUIP INSULATION
813 MODULE INSULATION SHOP
814 MODULE INSULATION FIELD
815 PERSONNEL PROTECTION
819 OTHER EQUIP. INSULATION
820 FIREPROOFING
821 STRUCTURAL FIREPROOFING
822 SKIRT/LEG FIREPROOFING
823 CABLE TRAY FIREPROOFING
830 SPECIAL COATINGS

831 ACID TILE PAVING

Paint
900 PAINT
902 SUBCONTRACT PAINT
903 SPECIAL PLANT PAINT
904 SPECIAL EQUIP PAINT
909 PAINT DEMOLITION
910 PAINTING
911 PAINT - EQUIPMENT
912 PAINT - PIPING
913 PAINT - STRUCTURES
914 PAINT MODULE EQUIPMENT
915 PAINT MODULE PIPING
916 PAINT MODULE STRUCTURES
918 OTHER COATINGS
919 OTHER EQUIPMENT PAINT
920 SURFACE PREPARATION

921 SURFACE PREP - EQUIPMENT
922 SURFACE PREP - PIPING
923 SURFACE PREP - STEEL

35 Database Relations

Sequence Numbers of Attributes in Relations
Relationship of Database Relations
DETAILS Relation
DESIGN Relation
REMARKS Relation
PROJDATA Relation
NEWCOA Relation
EQRENT Relation
CRWSCH Relation
CSTCTRL Relation
REPGRP Relation
CNTRCT Relation
COMPONENT Relation
INDIRECTS Relation
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Indirect Codes and Descriptions
K (CUSSPC)-TABLE Relation
R-TABLE Relation
QSUM Relations
STORED REPORTS Relation
STORED QUERIES Relation
CERATE Relation (F-Table)
S-Table Relation
T-Table Relation
U-Table Relation
V-Table Relation
W-Table Relation

X-Table Relation
Y-Table Relation
Z-Table Relation
UCLEQ Relation
UOM Relation
ENG Relation
DWG Relation
PROCUR Relation
MODUL Relation
Attribute Descriptions
2 Aspen Icarus Reference Guide

Sequence Numbers of Attributes in
Relations
COMPONENT (N)
INDIRECTS (P)
PROJDATA (D)
REMARKS (C)
NEWCOA (E)
CRWSCH (G)
DETAILS (A)
EQRENT (H)
CSTCTRL (J)
CNTRCT (M)
REPGRP (L)
DESIGN (B)
CUSSPC (K)
RTABLE (R)
CERATE (F)
Attribute
Name Type Width
ACCOUNT INT 11 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ACTCOA INT - - - - - - 5 - 5 - - - - - -
ACTSEQ INT - - - - - - 3 - 3 - - - - - -
ACTSRT INT - - - - - - 4 - 4 - - - - - -
ACTTYP INT - - - - - - 2 - 2 - - - - - -
AMOUNT REAL - - - 5 - - - - - - - - - - -
APPTYPE INT - - - - - - - - - - - - 5 - -
AREA INT 12 2 2 - - - - - - - - - - - -
AREAWBS TEXT 2 - - - - - - - - - - 5 - - - -
ATYPE INT - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - - -
BTSEQ INT - 16 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
CATLNO TEXT 20 - - - - - - - - - 6 - - - - -
CCOA INT - - - - 1 - - - - - - - - - -
COADES TEXT 24 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - 2 -
CEAMT REAL - - - - - 4 - - - - - - - - -
CEDESC TEXT 60 - - - - - 5 - - - - - - - - -
CEFLAG TEXT 2 - - - - - 1 - - - - - - - - -
CENUM INT - - - - - 2 - - - - - - - - -
CESEQ INT 31 - - - - - 1 1 1 1 - - - - 1
CLASS INT 20 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

COMPONENT (N)
INDIRECTS (P)
PROJDATA (D)
REMARKS (C)
NEWCOA (E)
CRWSCH (G)
DETAILS (A)
EQRENT (H)
CSTCTRL (J)
CNTRCT (M)
REPGRP (L)
DESIGN (B)
CUSSPC (K)
RTABLE (R)
CERATE (F)
Attribute
Name Type Width
CNTRBY INT - - - - - - - - - - - 2 - - -
CNTRNM TEXT 24 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - -
CNTRNO INT - - - - - - - - - - - 1 - - -
CNTWKF INT - - - - - 3 - - - - - - - - -
COA INT 1 - - 1 - - - - - - - - - 1 -
CCOAACT TEXT 2 - - - - 3 - - - - - - - - - -
CCOADES TEXT 24 - - - - 2 - - - - - - - - - -
COAIND INT - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2
COAMOD INT 14 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
COMCOD TEXT 36 37 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
COMPWBS TEXT 3 35 - - - - - - - - - - - 7 - -
CONTRACT INT 13 - - - - - - - - - - - - 3 -
DAYPWK INT - - - - - - 7 - - - - - - - -
DESCR TEXT 76 - - 4 - - - - - - - - - - - -
DIAM REAL 24 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
DUPITEMS INT - - - - - - - - - - - - 4 - -
DUPQTY INT 33 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
EXTRA1 INT 21 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
EXTRA2 REAL 22 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
EXTRA3 TEXT 4 23 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
HOURRRAT FLOAT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4

COMPONENT (N)
INDIRECTS (P)
PROJDATA (D)
REMARKS (C)
NEWCOA (E)
CRWSCH (G)
DETAILS (A)
EQRENT (H)
CSTCTRL (J)
CNTRCT (M)
REPGRP (L)
DESIGN (B)
CUSSPC (K)
RTABLE (R)
CERATE (F)
Attribute
Name Type Width
HRSPDA REAL - - - - - - 9 - - - - - - - -
ICACOA INT 32 - - - - - - - - - - - - 6 -
ICUNIT INT 36 11 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
INDDES TEXT 32 - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9 -
INDAMOUNT REAL - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5 -
INDHOURS REAL - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4 -
ITEM TEXT 24 - - - 2 - - - - - - - - - - -
ITEMDES TEXT 28 4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ITEMCOD INT - 1 1 - - - - - - - - - - - -
INTREF INT 34 - - - - - - - - - - - 6 - -
IUMVAL REAL - 12 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LCODE INT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LDESC TEXT 24 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LCOST REAL 9 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LCOSTRAT FLOAT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5
LHOURS REAL 8 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LINELOOP INT 25 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
LOCID TEXT 8 16 - - - - - - - - - - - - -

COMPONENT (N)
INDIRECTS (P)
PROJDATA (D)
REMARKS (C)
NEWCOA (E)
CRWSCH (G)
DETAILS (A)
EQRENT (H)
CSTCTRL (J)
CNTRCT (M)
REPGRP (L)
DESIGN (B)
CUSSPC (K)
RTABLE (R)
CERATE (F)
Attribute
Name Type
Width
MATL TEXT 5 10 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MCODE INT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MCOST REAL 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MCOSTRAT FLOAT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3
MDESC TEXT - - - - - - - - - - - - -
NOITEM INT - - - - - - 10 2 6 - - - - - -
NPCT01 INT - - - - - - 11 3 7 - - - - - -
NPCT02 INT - - - - - - 12 4 - - - - - - -
NPCT03 INT - - - - - - 13 5 - - - - - - -
NPCT04 INT - - - - - - 14 6 - - - - - - -
NPCT05 INT - - - - - - 15 7 - - - - - - -
NPCT06 INT - - - - - - 16 8 - - - - - - -
NPCT07 INT - - - - - - 17 9 - - - - - - -
NPCT08 INT - - - - - - 18 10 - - - - - - -
NPCT09 INT - - - - - - 19 11 - - - - - - -
NPCT010 INT - - - - - - 20 12 - - - - - - -
NPCT011 INT - - - - - - 21 13 - - - - - - -
NPCT012 INT - - - - - - 22 14 - - - - - - -
NPCT013 INT - - - - - - - 15 - - - - - - -
NPCT014 INT - - - - - - - 16 - - - - - - -
NPCT015 INT - - - - - - - 17 - - - - - - -
ORIGIN TEXT 6 2 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - -

COMPONENT (N)
INDIRECTS (P)
PROJDATA (D)
REMARKS (C)
NEWCOA (E)
CRWSCH (G)
DETAILS (A)
EQRENT (H)
CSTCTRL (J)
CNTRCT (M)
REPGRP (L)
DESIGN (B)
CUSSPC (K)
RTABLE (R)
CERATE (F)
Attribute
Name Type
Width
PARAM TEXT 32 - 4 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PCLASS TEXT 4 - - - - - - - - - 4 - - - - -
PCTOF INT - - - 4 - - - - - - - - - 8 -
PERCENT REAL - - - 3 - - - - - - - - - 7 -
PIPSPC TEXT 8 - - - - - - - - - 2 - - - - -
PIPTYP INT 15 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PRCURC TEXT 38 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PROPNAM TEXT 36 - 13 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
PROPNUM INT - 10 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
QUANT REAL 5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
REFID INT 28 14 5 - - - - - - - - - 1 - -
REPGRP INT - - - - - - - - - - 2 - - - -
RESULT REAL - - - 6 - - - - - - - - - - -
RPGSEQ INT - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - - -
SCHAREA INT - - - - - - 6 - - - - - - - -
SCHED TEXT 4 - - - - - - - - - 3 - - - - -
SHIFTS INT - - - - - - 8 - - - - - - - -
SOURCE TEXT 2 17 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SUBAREA INT 30 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SUBTYPE INT 29 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
SUMCODE INT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

COMPONENT (N)
INDIRECTS (P)
PROJDATA (D)
REMARKS (C)
NEWCOA (E)
CRWSCH (G)
DETAILS (A)
EQRENT (H)
CSTCTRL (J)
CNTRCT (M)
REPGRP (L)
DESIGN (B)
CUSSPC (K)
RTABLE (R)
CERATE (F)
Attribute
Name Type
Width
TITLE TEXT 32 - - - - - - - - - - 4 - - - -
TYPSCT INT - - - - - - - - - 5 - - - - -
UNIT TEXT 8 - 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
UNITIN TEXT 8 - 9 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
UNITS TEXT 8 6 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
USERDES TEXT 25 26 - - - - - - - - - - - 2 - -
USERTAG TEXT 12 27 - - - - - - - - - - - 3 - -
VALUER REAL - 6 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
VALUET TEXT 12 - 5 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
VALUEU TEXT 12 - 8 - - - - - - - - - - - - -
WGT REAL 18 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
WUNIT TEXT 4 19 - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

Relationship of Database Relations

DETAILS Relation
No. Column Name Type of Data Description of Data Stored under

each Column
1 COA integer Code of Account (COA)
2 ORIGIN text 6 3 characters each of Item Type + Item

Ref No. (HE 101)
3 COADES text 24 Title of cost element which is assigned

to account code
4 ITEMDES text 28 Detailed description of cost element,

material or labor
5 QUANT real Quantity
6 UNITS text 8 Unit of measure associated with

quantity
7 MCOST real Material cost for total quantity
8 LHOURS real Man-hours of field labor for total

quantity
9 LCOST real Cost of field labor for total quantity
10 MATL text 5 Material symbol (five character string)
11 ACCOUNT integer Major account for this item.
12 AREA integer Area ID/report group, assigned an

integer value of unity
13 CONTRACT integer Contract ID
14 COAMOD integer Code of account (COA) modifier
15 PIPTYP integer Class of material for piping
16 LOCID text 8 Sub-description related to ORIGIN

(LINE 03, LOOP 02)
17 SOURCE text 2 Symbol used to characterize direct,

subcontract or remote shop costs
18 WGT real Weight
19 WUNIT text 4 Unit of measure associated with weight
20 CLASS integer Class
21 EXTRA1 integer Your use, for integer values, filled with

0

each Column
22 EXTRA2 real Your use, for decimal values, filled with

0.00
23 EXTRA3 text 4 Your use, for text, filled with blanks
24 DIAM real Pipe diameter, decimal (e.g., 2.0)
25 LINELOOP integer For piping - the line number (01-40)

For instrumentation - the loop number
(01-50)
26 USERDES text 25 For instrumentation - the loop number

(01-50)
For components - Item description
For Mat’l/Man-hour Additions - Item
description
For Pipe Bulk - Item Details - Item
description
For Instrument Bulk Items - Item
description
27 USERTAG text 12 User Tag Number or Pipe Specs if

custom pipe specs are used
28 REFID integer The 4-digit Item reference number for

the component
29 SUBTYPE integer For Equipment - cost basis

For Piping - type of valve or fitting
For Civil - type of foundation
For Instrumentation - type of loop main
component
For Insulation - type of insulation or
fireproofing
30 SUBAREA integer Subsidiary area number, within AREA
31 CESEQ integer Sequence number for records in Details

relation
32 ICACOA integer Icarus code of account for item
33 DUPQTY integer Duplicate quantity flag
34 INTREF integer Internal reference identification
35 COMPWBS text 3 Component Work Breakdown Structure

identifier
36 ICUNIT integer Internal Unit of Measure unit
37 COMCOD text 36 Commodity code for materials

(Reserved)

each Column
38 PRCURC text 33 Procurement Currency

DESIGN Relation

each Column
1 ITMCOD integer Item code.
2 AREA integer Area ID, assigned integer value of

unity.
3 ORIGIN text 6 3-characters: Item Type + Item

Reference No. (HE 101).
4 PARAM text 25 Description of design element.
5 VALUET text 12 Value of design parameter, as text.
6 VALUER real Value of design parameter, decimal

value.
7 UNIT text 8 Unit of measure associated with

numeric design value
8 VALUEU text 12 Value of design parameters specified by

user as text. (For Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator and Aspen In-Plant Cost
Estimator only.)
9 UNITIN text 8 Unit of measure associated with

VALUEU
10 PROPNUM integer Reserved
11 ICUNIT integer Internal Unit of Measure identifier
12 IUMVAL real System value in internal units of

measure
13 PROPNAM text 36 System property name
14 REFID integer Integer value of 3-digit component

number
15 INDLVL integer Indicates indent level for reports
16 BTSEQ integer Sequence number for DESIGN table

REMARKS Relation

each Column
1 ITMCOD integer Item code. (Two digits.)
2 AREA integer Area reference number defined by user.

(Two digits, default is 01.)
3 ORIGIN text 6 Responsible item for the data in the

record (e.g., "HE 101").
4 DESCR text 76 Description of ITEM as specified by user

(for example, “PROPANE STORAGE
TANK").

number

PROJDATA Relation

each Column
1 COA integer System code of account or user's

account code as revised (3 digits).
2 ITEM text 24 System-generated or user-defined

description for this item (for example,
"CONSUMABLES/SMALL TOOLS").
3 PERCENT real System-generated or user-defined

description for this item (for example,
"CONSUMABLES/SMALL TOOLS").
4 PCTOF integer System-calculated code representing

the portion of the project estimate to be
precentaged (1 digit)
5 AMOUNT real Lump sum value specified by user.
RESULT real The value calculated when PERCENT is

applied to PCTOF, where appropriate.

NEWCOA Relation

each Column
1 CCOA integer User-changed code of account
2 CCOADES text 24 User-changed code of account

description (for example, “SPECIAL
COMPANY ITEMS").
3 CCOAACT text 2 COA category (EQ, P, C, ST, I, E, IN,

PT)

EQRENT Relation
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only

each Column
1 CESEQ integer Key - relates to DETAILS relation
2 NOITEM integer Number of items in list
3 NPCT1 integer List item 1

CRWSCH Relation

each Column
2 ACTTYP integer Activity level (area, project, proc.)
3 ACTSEQ integer Activity ID at component level
4 ACTSRT integer Activity ID at area level
5 ACTCOA integer Scheduling code of account
6 SCHAREA integer Display flag
7 DAYPWK integer Working days per week
8 SHIFTS integer Number of shifts per day
9 HRSPDA real Working hours per day
14 NPCT04 integer List item4

CSTCTRL Relation

each Column
2 ACTTYP integer Activity level (area, project, proc.)
3 ACTSEQ integer Activity ID at component level
4 ACTSRT integer Activity ID at area level
5 ACTCOA integer Scheduling code of accounts

REPGRP Relation

each Column
1 ATYPE integer Report group designation (1 = report

group, 2 = sub-group)
2 REPGRP integer Report group number
3 RPGSEQ integer Report group sequence (sub-group)
4 TITLE text 24 Report group title
5 AREAWBS text 2 Area Work Breakdown Structure

identifier
6 SCHAREA integer Scheduling Area for this report group

CNTRCT Relation
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator only

each Column
1 CNTRNO Number Contractor number
2 CNTRBY Number Contracted by (parent contractor)
3 CNTRNM Short Text Contractor name
4 CWFNO Number Construction Workforce Number
5 EWFNO Number Engineering Workforce Number

COMPONENT Relation
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only

each Column
1 REFID Number The integer value of the 4-digit internal

reference number
2 USERDES Short Text Item description
3 USERTAG Short Text User Tag Number
4 DUPITEMS Number Number of duplicate items
5 APPTYPE Number Component type
6 INTREF Number Internal reference identification
7 COMPWBS Short Text Component Work Breakdown Structure

identifier
8 STRUCTAG Short Text User Tag of Structure where component

is mounted
9 USEREQPCNT Number Default or user-specified equipment

counts for each equipment item
10 SRCQUOTE Short Text Source of Quote - values only for

process equipment, EML items, and
quoted cost items with equipment code
of account.
11 DWGREF Short Text User entered P&ID reference string

INDIRECTS Relation
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator only

each Column
1 COA integer Code of Account (COA) (See list on

following page).

to account code (See list on following
page).
3 CONTRACT integer Contract ID
4 INDHOURS real Indirect hours for this account
5 INDAMOUNT real Indirect cost for this account
6 ICACOA integer Icarus code of account for item
7 PERCENT real Percent value entered by user or

calculated by system
8 PCTOF integer System-calculated code representing

the portion of the project estimate to be
percentaged (1 digit)
9 INDDES text 32 User indirect description or “SYSTEM

GENERATED”

K (CUSSPC)-TABLE Relation

each Column
2 PIPSPC text 8 Custom piping spec
3 SCHED text 4 Pipe schedule
4 PCLASS text 4 Flange class
5 TYPSCT text 4 Type of data (1 = class, 2 = schedule,

3= thickness
6 CATLNO text 20 Item designation
7 CONTYP text 2 Type of Fitting Connection (one of the

following: (SW SC SB WW WF VC PF
VS)
8 PIPTYP text 1 Pipe Type (“S” or “W” or “ “)
9 XRAYS real Weld X-Rays
10 PDEGF real Pipe Temperature in Deg Fahrenheit
11 PPSIG real Pipe Pressure in psi
12 TRACEM text4 Tracing Type
13 NPRIMR text4 Number of Primary Paint Coats
14 NFINAL text4 Number of Final Paint Coats
15 INSMTL text5 Insulation Material
16 INSTHK text5 Insulation Thickness

R-TABLE Relation

each Column
1 CESEQ integer Key- relates (links) to the DETAILS

relation (A table or AprojID)
2 COAIND integer Title of cost element which is assigned

to account code (See list on following
page)
3 MCOSTRAT float Ratio of MCOST output to MCOST

system
4 HOURRRAT float Ratio of HOURS output to HOURS

system
5 LCOSTRAT float Ratio of LCOST output to LCOST system

QSUM Relations

each Column
1 ACCOUNT integer Major account for this item. A.ACCOUNT
2 CODEGROUP integer Sub-Group of Icarus cod of account for

item. Evaluated from
Xref_ICACOA.ICACOA_Group
3 ICACOA integer Icarus code of account for item.

Evaluated from P.ICACOA and
A.ICACOA
4 ICACOADES text 25 Icarus Title of cost element which is

assigned to account code.
Evaluated from
Xref_ICACOA.ICACOA_Det_Desc_USA1
5 FULLDES text 50 Major account title for this item. (10)

Indirects.
Evaluated from Xref_Account.[Full
Description]
6 COA integer Code of Account (COA). P.COA, A.COA

to account code.
Evaluated from
Xref_ICACOA.ICACOA_Det_Desc_USA1,
E.CCOADES,
8 QSUMCOA integer Icarus sub-account for this item.

Evaluated from
Xref_ICACOAInd.ICACOA_Group,
Xref_QSUMCOA_Criteria.QSUMCOA
9 QSUMCOADES text 255 Title of sub-account which assigned to

sub-account code. Evaluated from
Xref_QSumCOA.QSUMCOADES
10 ITEMDES text 30 Detailed description of cost element,

material or labor.
Evaluated from A.ITEMDES
11 COMPONENT text 40 Item Description.

Evaluated from A.ORIGIN, A.SUBAREA
12 QUANT real Quantity.

Evaluated from A.QUANT
13 UNITS text 10 Unit of measure associated with

quantity. Evaluated from A.UNITS

each Column
14 ICUNIT integer Internal Unit of Measure unit.

Evaluated from A.ICUNIT
15 KEYQUANT real Key Quantity – Characteristic quantity

for group of items
16 KEYUNITS text 255 Key Quantity – Characteristic quantity

for group of items
17 HOURS real Unit of measure associated with key

quantity
18 LCOST real Man-hours of field labor or total

quantity. Evaluated from Sum of
P.INDHOURS
19 MCOST real Cost of field labor for total quantity.

Evaluated from A.LCOST
20 TOTCOST real Material cost for total quantity.

Evaluated from A.MCOST
21 CLASS integer Class.

Evaluated from A.CLASS
22 WGT real Weight.

Evaluated from A.WGT
23 WUNIT text 255 Unit of measure associated with weight.

Evaluated from A.WUNIT
24 DIAM integer Pipe diameter, decimal (for example,

2.0).
Evaluated from A.DIAM

(01-50)
description
description
Description
Evaluated from A.USERDES
26 MATL text 10 Material Symbol (five character string).

Evaluated from A.MATL
27 PIPTYP integer Class of material for piping. A.PIPTYP

each Column
28 LOCID text 10 Sub-description related to ORIGIN

(LINE 03, LOOP 02).
Evaluated from A.LOCID
29 LINELOOP integer For piping – the line number (01-40)

For instrumentation – the loop number
(01-50).
Evaluated from A.LINELOOP
30 COAMOD integer Code of account (COA) modifier.

Evaluated from A.COAMOD
31 LOCATION text 255 Location Description – Above

Ground/Under Ground.
Evaluated from
Xref_QSUMCOA_Criteria.LOCATION
32 SUBTYPE integer For Equipment - cost basis

For Piping - type of valve or fitting
For Civil - type of foundation
For Instrumentation - type of loop main
component
For Insulation - type of insulation or
Fireproofing
Evaluated from A.SUBTYPE
33 SOURCE text 5 Symbol used to characterize direct,

subcontract or remote shop costs.
Evaluated from A.SOURCE

the component.
Evaluated from A.REFID
35 ORIGIN text 10 3 characters each of Item Type + Tem

Ref No. (HE 101).
Evaluated from A.ORIGIN
36 AREA integer Area ID/report group, assigned an

integer value of unity.
Evaluated from A.AREA
37 SUBAREA integer Subsidiary area number, within AREA.

Evaluated from A.SUBAREA

each Column
38 COMPWBS text 5 Component Work Breakdown Structure

Identifier.
Evaluated from A.COMPWBS
39 CONTRACT integer Contract ID.

Evaluated from Table P, A.CONTRACT
40 CONTRACTOR text 30 Contractor Name.

Evaluated from M.CNTRNM
41 DUPQTY integer Duplicate quantity flag.

Evaluated from A.DUPQTY

Relation.
Evaluated from A.CESEQ
43 INTREF integer Internal reference identification.

Evaluated from A.INTREF
44 USEREQPCNT integer Default or user-specified equipment

counts for each equipment item

STORED REPORTS Relation

each Column
1 ID integer Unique ID for Query – Constant cross

releases
2 Name Text 100 Unique Text Name
3 TreeView1 text 255 Composite Tree (See Name - Lev

below)
4 Prompt text 255 Text Description for Display
5 KbaseFlag text 50 List of Products for the Report

3 – Capital Cost Report
E – Process Economic Analyzer
M – In-Plant Cost Estimator
6 UserGroupNo text 50 User Group Number

0: All Reports / All Disciplines
1: Process
2: Equipment / Insul / Paint
3: Piping / Insul / Paint
4: Civil / Structural / Arch / Insul /
Paint
5: Management / Project Level
6: Electrical / Instrumentation / Insul /
Paint
7: Quantity Info Only
8: Unit Cost Info Only
7 ImportType text 50 Type of the Import. Use Full if you

creating a custom report inside
reporter.
8 LicMgrGroupNo text 50 Reserved. Not used
9 BaseRT text 50 Reserved. Not used
10 Type text 50 Type of Report, Excel or Crystal
11 TemplName text 50 Type of Report, Excel or Crystal
12 SheetName text 50 Name of the template
13 SubQueries text 50 Sub queries to be used in the Excel

Worksheet (Excel Only)

each Column
14 PostProcedure text 50 MacroSet to be used.

MacroSet_1
MacroSet_2
MacroSet_3
MacroSet_4
15 Executable text 50 Reserved. Not used
16 Name-Lev1 text 100 Report List Tree Text – Level 1
21 AutoFilter Yes/No Auto Filter Turn ON/OFF (Excel Only)
22 MultiSheetID text 128 Used for new feature where number of

reports and sheet names are
determined by number of
contractors/identifiers in the project.
For example, for report Project
Summary by Contractor, the value in
this column is QSUM.CONTRACTOR
(TableName.Column name)
23 PreRunQueries long text Set of queries [Query 1] [Query

2]...[Query N] that must be executed
before running the report. For example,
if Query 1 and Query 2 must be run
before running this report, this field has
the value of [Query 1][Query 2].
24 PostRunQueries long text Set of queries [Query 1] [Query

2]...[Query N] that must be executed
after running the report. For example, if
Query 3 must be run after running this
report, this field has the value of
[Query 3].

STORED QUERIES Relation

each Column
1 ID text 10 Unique ID for Query – Constant cross

releases
2 Name text 255 Unique Text Name
3 Generate Yes/No Create MS Access Query from Row
4 TreeView1 text 255 Composite Tree (See Lev below)
5 Prompt text 255 Text Description for Display

(Management and UOD reports only)
6 KbaseFlag text 255 List of Products for the Report

3 – Capital Cost Report
E – Process Economic Analyzer
M – In-Plant Cost Estimator
7 UserGroupNo text 255 User Group Number

0: All Reports / All Disciplines
1: Process
2: Equipment / Insul / Paint
3: Piping / Insul / Paint
4: Civil / Structural / Arch / Insul /
Paint
5: Management / Project Level
6: Electrical / Instrumentation / Insul /
Paint
7: Quantity Info Only
8: Unit Cost Info Only
8 ImportType text 50 Type of the Import. Use Full if you are

creating a custom report inside
reporter.
9 LicMgrGroupNo text 255 Reserved. Not used
10 BaseRT text 255 Reserved. Not used
11 SQLStr Memo Query stored as text
12 fStr text 255 Format String (Management and UOD

reports only)
13 Lev_1 text 255 Report List Tree Text – Level 1

each Column

CERATE Relation (F-Table)

each Column
1 CEFLAG text 2 Record type (CR = craft, ER =

equipment rental)
2 CENUM integer Item number (CR = 51 - 99, ER = 1 -

450)
3 CNTWKF integer Contract or work force
4 CEAMT real Rate (CR = CUR/HR, ER = CUR/Month)
5 CEDESC text 60 Description of item
6 CEDUR real Total Hours for Item for Contractor

Total Hours for Craft for Contractor
(HOURS) OR
Total Rental Duration Days for
Equipment Item for Contractor (DAYS)
7 CEAMOUNT real Total Indirect Cost for Item for

Contractor Total Labor Cost for Craft for
Contractor
OR
Total Equipment Rental Cost for
Equipment Item for Contractor
8 CEALLOC integer For equipment rental: Allocated rental

days for equipment item for contractor
(DAYS).
For craft rates: Craft productivity (%)
with respect to system base.

S-Table Relation

each Column

relation
2 INTREF integer Internal reference identification
3 LINELOOP integer For piping – the line number (01-40)

For instrumentation – the loop number
(01-50)
4 LTYPE c To differentiate between branch and

main line

(01-50)
description
description
Description
6 LINETAG text 36 For Piping Bulk – User Tag

For Pipe Bulk - Item Details – Pipe Line
Tag
7 LNDESEQ integer Item reference number of the

connected equipment.
8 DIRECT text 3 Pipe Bulk - Item Details – Pipe Line

Flow Direction
9 LNDESLN integer Pipe Bulk - Item Details – Connected

Equipment Line Number
10 STREAM text 30 Pipe Bulk - Item Details - Stream

properties to be used for this line
11 MATL text 5 Material symbol (five character string)
12 DIAM integer Pipe diameter, decimal (e.g., 2.0)
13 LINLEN integer Pipe Length, decimal (e.g. 2.0)
14 PIPSPC text 10 Custom Pipe Spec

T-Table Relation

each Column
1 DUMMYCOL text 2 Dummy only
2 STREAM text 36 Stream Name
3 TEMP integer Temperature
4 PRESS integer Pressure
5 MWGT integer Molecular Weight
6 TOTMFLOW integer Total Mass Flow
7 LIQMFLOW integer Liquid Mass Flow
8 LIQMDEN integer Liquid Mass Density
9 LIQVISC integer Liquid Viscosity
10 LIQSTEN integer Liquid Surface Tension
11 VAPMFLOW integer Vapor Mass Flow
12 VAPMDEN integer Vapor Mass Density
13 VAPVISC integer Vapor Viscosity
14 SOLMFLOW integer Solid Mass Flow
15 SOLMDEN integer Solid Mass Density

U-Table Relation

each Column
1 ITMCOD integer Item code (Two digits)
2 AREA integer Area ID, assigned integer value of

unity.
3 ORIGIN text 10 3-characters: Item Type + Item

Reference No. (HE 101).
4 PARAM text 35 Description of design element.
5 VALUET text 80 Value of design parameter, as text.
6 VALUER real Value of design parameter, decimal

value.
7 UNIT text 10 Unit of measure associated with

numeric design value
8 VALUEU text 15 Value of design parameters specified by

user as text. (For Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator and Aspen In-Plant Cost
Estimator only.)
9 UNITIN text 10 Unit of measure associated with

VALUEU
10 PROPNUM integer Reserved. It should be more than

900000
11 ICUNIT integer Internal Unit of Measure unit.
12 VALUES real Same as VALUER
13 PROPNAM text 40 System property name

number
15 INDLVL integer Indicates indent level for reports

V-Table Relation

each Column
1 Index integer Sequence Number
2 Field1 text 80 Contains Aspen Process Economic

Analyzer related useful information.
Project Name, Capacity, Plant Location,
Brief Description, Schedule,
Investment, Project Information,
Simulator information etc.
3 Field2 text 80 Contains the data value for field1
4 Field3 text 30 Reserved.

W-Table Relation

each Column
1 Index integer Sequence Number
2 Item text 60 Item (Sales, Expenses, Operating Costs

etc.)
3 Units text 20 Units
4 Year1-Year20 real Contains cost spread over 20 years

X-Table Relation

each Column
1 Field1 integer Sequence Number
2 Field2 text 30 Area Name
3 Field3 text 30 Component Name
4 Field4 text 30 Component Type
5 Field5 text 30 Total Direct Cost

Y-Table Relation

each Column
1 SeqNo integer Sequence Number
2 Field2 text 60 ITEM. Contains useful information about

Project, Capital Cost Evaluation Basis,
Time Period, Schedule, Capital Costs
Parameters, Operating Costs
Parameters, General Investment
Parameters, Escalation, Project Results
Summary, Project Capital Summary,
Engineering Summary, Raw Materials
Costs and Product Sales, Operating
Labor and Maintenance Costs etc.
3 Field3 text 30 Measure of Unit for the Field2
4 Field4 text 255 Value stored for Field2.
5 Field5 text 30 Design, Eng, Procurement Cost for

Project Capital Summary Manhours for
Engineering Summary
6 Field6 text 30 Construction Material (Applicable to

Project to Project Cost Summary only)
7 Field7 text 30 Construction Manhours (Applicable to

Project to Project Cost Summary only)
8 Field8 text 30 Construction Manpower Manhours

(Applicable to Project to Project Cost
Summary only)
9 Field9 text 30 Construction Indirects Manhours

(Applicable to Project to Project Cost
Summary only)
10 Field10 text 30 Reserved
11 Field11-Field 21 text 10 Reserved

Z-Table Relation

each Column

the component
2 COMPTYPE text 10 Character Component Type
3 ORIGIN text 10 3 characters each of Item Type + Item

Ref No. (HE 101)
4 FULLNAME text 60 Object name in the Object database
5 DISPNAME text 74 User specified name in GUI along with

model name

UCLEQ Relation
UCL User-Specified Equipment Count Table
Column Type of
No. Name Data Description of Data
The 4-digit item reference number for
REFID Integer
1 the component
2 USERDES Text 30 Item Description
3 USERTAG Text 15 User Tag Number
4 DUPITEMS Integer Number of Identical Items
5 APPTYPE Integer Component type
6 INTREF Integer Internal reference identification
Component Work Breakdown Structure
7 COMPWBS Text 5 identifier
User Tag of Structure where component
8 STRUCTAG Text 15 is mounted
Default or user-specified equipment
9 USEREQPCNT Integer count
10 CESEQ Integer Key - relates to DETAILS Relation

UOM Relation
Unit of Measure Table
No. Column Name Type of Data Description of Data
Customizable Unit of Measure identifier
(A subset of ICUNIT that may be
1 UNITID Integer
modified by the user for input and
output)
2 PROJUNIT Text 8 Project Unit Description
Default or User Specified Input UOM
3 INPUTUOM Text 8 Description
Default or User Specified Input UOM
4 INPUTUOMCF Real Conversion Factor
Default or User Specified Output UOM
5 OUTPUTUOM Text 8 Description
Default or User Specified Output UOM
6 OUTPUTUOMCF Real Conversion Factor

ENG Relation
Engineering Activity Detail Table
Applies to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator only

1 SEQNO Integer Sequence Number (Primary Key)
Reference to Activity Code
2 ACTVCOD Integer
Description
3 CNTRNO Integer Contractor Number
4 GRPDESC Text 28 Group Description
5 ITEMCAT Text 28 Item Category
6 LABRAT Real Unit Labor Rate
7 ITEMMH Real Item Manhours
8 ITEMCOST Real Item Cost

DWG Relation
Engineering Drawing Detail Table

2 ACTVCOD Integer Activity Code Description
Drawing Number (From Reference
4 DWGNO Integer Guide)
5 DWGCAT Text 36 Drawing Category
6 NUMDWG Integer Number of Drawings

PROCUR Relation
Procurement Detail Table

3 GRPDESC Text 36 Group Description
4 MATLCLAS Text 36 Material Classification
5 EQUIPMH Real Mechanical Equipment Manhours
6 BULKMH Real Bulk Material Manhours
7 SUBCONMH Real Subcontract Placement Manhours
8 TOTCOST Real Total Cost

MODUL Relation
Module Weight Table

3 RGNAME Text 24 Report Group Name
4 ARNAME Text 24 Module Area Name
5 MODTYPE Text 36 Module Type
Submodule Number (Only applies to
6 SUBMOD Integer TRMD and BRGM)
7 ITEMCAT Text 36 Item Category
Item Weight, LBS or KG (Based on
8 WEIGHT Real project UOM)
9 MATCOST Real Item Material Cost
10 ITEMMH Real Item Manhours
11 LABCOST Real Item Labor Cost
12 TOTCOST Real Item Total Cost

Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Indirect
Codes and Descriptions
Field Indirects Engineering
01 - 09 Titles not assigned 70 LUMP SUM ENGINEERING

10 LUMP SUM CONST. INDIRECT 71 BASIC ENGINEERING
11 FRINGE BENEFITS 72 DETAIL ENGINEERING
12 BURDENS 73 MATERIAL PROCUREMENT
13 CONSUMABLES, SMALL TOOLS 74 SUBCONTRACT PROCUREMENT
14 MISC. (INSURANCE, ETC.) 75 ENGINEERING MANAGEMENT
15 SCAFFOLDING 76 - 79 Titles not assigned
16 EQUIPMENT RENTAL
17 VENDOR REPRESENTATIVES
18 FIELD SERVICES
19 TEMP. CONST., UTILITIES
20 MOBILIZATION, DEMOBILIZE
21 CATERING, ACCOMODATION
22 TRAVEL
23 OVERTIME PREMIUM
Special Indirects Engineering Indirects
24 SPECIAL INDIRECT ITEM 1 80 LUMP SUM CONST. MGMT

25 SPECIAL INDIRECT ITEM 2 81 HOME OFFICE CONST. SUPP.
26 - 49 Titles not assigned 82 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT
83 -84 Titles not assigned
Freight Contractor Indirects
50 LUMP SUM FREIGHT 85 FIELD CONST. SUPERVISION

51 DOMESTIC FREIGHT 86 STARTUP, COMISSIONING
52 OCEAN FREIGHT
53 AIR FREIGHT
54 MODULE FREIGHT
55 OTHER FRIEGHT
56 - 59 Tittles not assigned

Taxes G & A Overheads
60 LUMP SUM TAXES, PERMITS 90 G AND A OVERHEADS

61 PERMITS
62 MATERIALS TAXES
63 CONSTRUCTION TAXES
64 ENGINEERING TAXES
65 OTHER TAXES
Contractor Fee
91 CONTRACT FEE
Escalation
97 ESCALATION
Royalty, Miscellaneous Charges
98 ROYALTY, MISC. CHARGES
Contingencies
99 CONTINGENCY

36 Attribute Descriptions

Attribute Description
ACCOUNT Major account for this item, leading digit taken from system code of
accounts to characterize the account class:
Account Description
0 Other, indirects
1 Equipment, Code of Account (COA) 100 - 199
2 Equipment, Code of Account (COA) 200 - 299
3 Piping
4 Civil
5 Steel
6 Ins trumentation
7 Electrical
8 Ins ulation
9 Paint
ACTCOA Scheduling code of account. For Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.
ACTSEQ Activity ID at component level. For Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.
ACTSRT Activity ID at area level. For Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.
ACTTYP Activity level (area, project, proc.). For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
and Icarus Project Manager only.
ACTVCOD Activity Code Description
ACTVCOD Description
1 Basic Engineering
2 Detail Engineering
3 Home Office Construction Services
4 Field Office Construction Supervision
5 Construction Management
6 Plant Start-Up
AMOUNT Lump sum value specified by user for indirect costs.
Component Type Component Type
APPTYPE Equipment Equipment
0 Not applicable 58 TDS Tray drying systems

1 AC Air compressors 60 TW Towers
3 AD Air dryers 62 VP Vacuum pumps
4 AT Agitated tanks 63 VS Vibrating screens
6 BL Blenders 64 VT Vertical tanks
7C Condensers 65 WFE Wiped film evaporators
8 CTW Cooling towers 66 WTS Water treatment systems
9 CE Cranes 68 MOT Motors
10 CO Conveyors 69 RB Reboilers
11 CP Centrifugal pumps 70 FU Furnaces
12 CR Crushers 71 TUR Turbines
13 CRY Crystallizers 72 AG Agitators
14 CT Centrifuges 73 LIN Linings
15 DDT Double diameter 74 PAK Packings

towers
16 D Dryers
17 DC Dust collectors Known Cost
18 DD Drum dryers 76 Cost known equipment
19 E Evaluators 77 Cost known bulks
20 EG Electrical generators
21 EJ Ejectors Plant Bulks and Buildings
22 EL Elevators 80 Buildings
24 F Filters 81 PIP Piping
26 FE Feeders 82 CIV Civil
27 FL Flakers 83 STL Steelwork
28 FLR Flares 84 INS Instrumentation
29 FN Fans 85 ELC Electrical general
32 GC Gas compressors 86 INL Insulation
34 GP Gear pumps 87 PNT Paint

36 HE Heat exchangers 88 ELC Electrical substation
37 HO Hoists
38 HT Horizontal tanks Site Development
39 HU Heating units 91 DEMOL Demolition
42 K Kneaders 92 DRAINS Drainage
43 M Mills 93 EARTH Earthwork general
44 MX Mixers 94 FENCE Fencing
45 P Pumps 95 LANDSP Landscaping
48 R Reactors 96 PAVING Paving
49 RD Rotary dryers 97 PILING Piling
50 RU Refrigeration units 98 RAILRD Railroads
52 S Scales 99 EARTH Earthwork excavation
53 ST Stock treatment
54 SE Separation equipment Library Items
55 STK Stacks 100 Library items
56 STB Steam boiler 101 Equipment model library
57 T Thickeners
AREA Area reference number defined by user. Default is 01. Reference

number 00 refers to project data in the C relation.
ARNAME Module Area Name
ATYPE Report group designation (1 = report group, 2 = sub group).
AREAWBS Area level Work Breakdown Structure -- 2 characters.
BTSEQ Unique sequence number to define the order of records in the DESIGN
table for design reports.
BULKMH Bulk Material Manhours
CATLNO Item designation. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen In-Plant
Cost Estimator only.
CATLNO Item designation. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen In-Plant

CCOA User-changed code of account.
CCOAACT COA category (EQ, P, C, ST, I, E, IN, PT).
CCOADES User-changed code of account description (text, 24 characters).
CEAMT Rate (CR = CUR/HR, ER = CUR/Month). For Aspen In-Plant Cost

Estimator only.
CEDESC Description of item.
CEFLAG Record type (CR = craft, ER = equipment rental). For Aspen In-Plant
CENUM Item number (CR = 51 - 99, ER = 1 - 450). For Aspen In-Plant Cost
Estimator only.
CESEQ Sequence number for records in Details relation. For Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator and Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.

CLASS Class as defined below:
Class Description
0 Other
01 Site Developm ent
10 Process Equipment
20 Bulk Item s
30 Area components, tes ting
31 Buildings
40 Area Site Developm ent
50 Unit Substation
60 Main Substations
70 Control (CTL) Centers
80 OPS Centers
90 Project Items (rotating equipment, spare parts,
transmis sion lines , testing).
CNTRBY Contracted by (parent contractor). For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator

only.
CNTRNM Contractor name. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator only.
CNTRNO Contractor number. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator only.
CNTWKF Contract or work force. For Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.
COA System code of account or user’s account code as revised. For Aspen
In-Plant Cost Estimator, COA is 3-digits. For Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator, COA is 4-digits.
COADES System code of account description or user's description as revised

(text, 24 characters).
COAMOD Code of account (COA) modifier
COAMOD COA Range Description
0 1 - 999 Default if not shown below
Equipment
0 100 - 299 Direct Hire
1 100 - 299 Subcontract Equipment
Piping
0 300 - 399 Above Ground Piping

1 300 - 399 Underground Piping
2 300 - 399 Chemical Sewer
Civil - Site Development
1 422 - 423 Site Development Paving (Roads)
2 422 - 423 Site Development Paving (Other)
Civil - Concrete
1 400 - 459 Small blocks: < 3 CY [< 2.3 M3]
2 400 - 459 Medium blocks: 3 - 10 CY [2.3-7.65

M3]
3 400 - 459 Large blocks: 10 - 25 CY [7.65-19.1

M3]
4 400 - 459 Mass pours: 25-50 CY [19.2-38.2 M3]
5 400 - 459 Mass pours: 50 -100 CY [38.2-76.5

M3]
6 400 - 459 Mass pours: >100CY[>76.5 M3]
7 400 - 459 Piling
8 400 - 459 Conduit Envelopes
9 400 - 459 Elevated slabs
Steel
1 500 - 599 Extra light: <12 LB/FT [< 18 KG/M]
2 500 - 599 Light: 12-< 20 LB/FT [18-< 30 KG/M]
3 500 - 599 Medium : 20-< 40 LB/FT [30-< 60

KG/M]
COAMOD COA Range Description
4 500 - 599 Heavy: 40-80 LB/FT [60-122 KG/M]
5 500 - 599 Extra Heavy: > 80 LB/FT [>122 KG/M]
6 500 - 599 Stairs and Ladders
7 500 - 599 Ladders
9 500 - 599 Misc. (Fab. Plate)
Instrumentation
1 641 Pneumatic Instrument Cable Tray

2 641 Electronic Instrument Cable Tray
Electrical
0 700 - 799 Above Ground Electrical.
1 700 - 799 Underground Electrical.
0 811 Pipe Insulation
1 811 Duct Insulation
0 912 Paint Pipe
1 912 Paint Duct
0 922 Surface Prep Pipe
1 922 Surface Prep Duct

COAIND Title of cost element which is assigned to account code.
COMCOD Commodity code to uniquely identify materials used in the Icarus Evaluation
Engine (IEE). The Commodity Code COMCOD is a 30 Character code. Each
major bulk type has an individual a coding sequence. Currently only piping has
a coding sequence defined.
For Piping:
To decode use the following column breakdown:
Column: 1 2 3
123456789012345678901234567890
AMMMMMUDDDDPEECFFFFFGWRSSS####
Column Position Description

A 1 Account Code Indicator - 3=Piping
M 2-6 Pipe material code
U 7 Units of measure Indicator - I/P(I) or
Metric(M)
D 8-11 Diameter in units indicated
P 12 Material Type indicator - Pipe (P), Valve
(V) orFitting (F)
E 13-14 Subtype extension (e.g. Trim on Valve,
Flangetype, etc)(Currently Not Used)
C 15 Class/Schedule Indicator - Schedule (S),
FlangeClass (F), Din designation (D) or
Thickness (T)
F 16-20 Class/Schedule designation as indicated in
aboveunits
G 21 Location - Above Ground
(A)/UndergroundCode(U)
W 22 Pipe Fabrication - Welded(W)/Seamless(S)
R 23 Fabrication Type - Remote
Shop(R)/FieldShop(F)
S 24-26 ICARUS Subtype(See Subtype attribute)
# 27-30 Reserved
COMPWBS Component level Work Breakdown Structure -- 3 characters.
CONTRACT Reference number of contractor assigned to purchase/install this item.

For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, the default is one. For all other
systems, the default is zero.
DAYPWK Working days per week. For Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.
DESCR Description of item as specified by user (text, 76 characters).
DIAM Pipe diameter, decimal (for example, 2.0).
DUPITEMS Number of duplicate items.

DUPQTY Duplicate quantity flag. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen In-
Plant Cost Estimator only.
0 = standard (unique quantity field)
1 = QUANT field of this record duplicated elsewhere.
DWGCAT Drawing Category
DWGNO Drawing Number (from Reference Guide)
EQUIPMH Mechanical Equipment Manhours
EXTRA1 Integer. Not assigned. This is a spare attribute for the user to allocate
values as necessary. The system will initialize to integer zero. The
attribute name can be changed and values calculated as a function of
other numeric data.
EXTRA2 Real. Not assigned but initialized to a real number of the value 0.0.
EXTRA3 Text. Not assigned but initialized to a value of four blank characters (“
").
GRPDESC Group Description
HOURRAT Ratio of HOURS output to HOURS system.
HRSPDA Working hours per day. For Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.
ICACOA Icarus code of account for item. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.

ICUNIT Icarus Internal Units of Measure identifier.
Unit I/P Conversion Metric Notes

No. Description I/P Metric Description
1 INCHES 2.5400E+01 MM
2 FEET 3.0480E-01 M
3 MILES 1.6093E+00 KM
4 MESH 1.0000E+00 MESH
5 FT 3.0480E-01 M
6 SF 9.2903E-02 M2
7 SY 8.3613E-01 M2
8 SQ IN 6.4516E+02 MM2
9 IN THK 2.5400E+01 MM THK
10 IN DIAM 2.5400E+01 MM DIAM Piping Diameters
11 CF 2.8317E-02 M3
12 CY 7.6455E-01 M3
13 GALLONS 3.7854E-03 M3
14 BARRELS 1.5899E-01 M3
15 BD FT 2.3597E-03 M3
16 BAGS 8.5275E-01 BAG-50KG
17 cur/CY cur/M3 Currency Units/Unit

Volume
18 cur cur Currency Units
19 cur/LB cur/KG Currency/Unit

Weight
20 LB 4.5359E-01 KG
21 LBS 4.5359E-01 KG
22 TONS 9.0718E-01 TONNE
23 LB/FT 1.4882E+00 KG/M
25 LB/YD 4.9605E-01 KG/M
26 cur/SF cur/M2 Currency/Unit Area

27 LB/BATCH 4.5359E-01 KG/BATCH
28 LB/MMBTU 7.5066E+00 KG/MW-HR
29 PCF 1.6018E+01 KG/M3
30 W/SF 1.0753E+01 W/M2
31 PSIG 6.8948E+00 KPA Vessel pressure
32 PSI 6.8947E-03 PA
33 IN H2O 2.4908E+02 PA
35 IN HG 3.3864E+00 KPA
36 MM HG 1.3332E+02 PA
37 PSF 4.7880E-02 KN/M2
38 LBF 4.4482E+00 N
39 FT-LB 1.3558E+00 N-M
40 IN/S 2.5400E+00 CM/S
41 FPM 1.8288E+01 M/H
42 RPM 1.0000E+00 RPM Motor RPM
43 MPH 1.6093E+00 KM/H
44 HERTZ 1.0000E+00 HERTZ Country Based
45 RPM 1.0000E+00 RPM
46 CFH 2.8317E-02 M3/H
47 CFM 1.6990E+00 M3/H
48 MINUTE 1.0000E+00 MINUTE
49 TPD/SF 4.0689E-01 TPH/M2
50 GPM 6.3090E-02 L/S
51 GPH 3.7854E-03 M3/H
52 LB/H 4.5359E-01 KG/H
53 TPH 9.0718E-01 TONNE/H
54 TPD 3.7799E-02 TONNE/H
55 CFM/SF 1.8288E+01 M3/H/M2

56 V 1.0000E+00 V
57 W 1.0000E+00 W
58 A 1.0000E+00 A
59 KV 1.0000E+00 KV
60 KW 1.0000E+00 KW
61 KA 1.0000E+00 KA
62 KVA 1.0000E+00 KVA
63 HP 7.4570E-01 HP Motor Power
64 MVA 1.0000E+00 MVA
65 OHM-IN 2.5400E+00 OHM-CM
66 DEG F 1.0000E+00 DEG C Temperature
67 DEG F 5.5556E-01 DEG C Temperature

Difference
68 FC 1.0764E+01 LUX Lighting
69 TONS-REF 3.5169E+00 KW Tons of Refrigeration
70 GPM/SF 6.7909E-01 L/S/M2
71 BTU/H/SF 3.1546E+00 W/M2
72 BTU/H 2.9307E-01 W
73 BTU/LB 2.3260E+00 KJ/KG
74 MMBTU/H 2.9307E-01 MEGAW
75 BTU/CF 3.7250E+01 KJ/M3
76 CPOISE 1.0000E+00 MPA-S
77 CSTOKE 1.0000E+00 MM2/S
78 BTU/LB/F 4.1868E+00 KJ/KG/K
79 DEGREE 1.0000E+00 DEGREE Slope
80 PERCENT 1.0000E+00 PERCENT
81 GAUGE 1.0000E+00 GAUGE Duct, HEX tubing
82 PAIR 1.0000E+00 PAIR Instrumentation

83 BWG 1.0000E+00 BWG HEX tubing
84 LOOP(S) 1.0000E+00 LOOP(S) Instrumentation
85 COATS 1.0000E+00 COATS Paint
86 wire size wire size Electrical
87 MCM 1.0000E+00 MCM Electrical
88 AWG 1.0000E+00 AWG Electrical
89 CUTS 1.0000E+00 CUTS Piping
90 SECTION 1.0000E+00 SECTION
91 CLASS 1.0000E+00 CLASS Electrical
92 SPACES 1.0000E+00 SPACES Electrical
93 CIRCUITS 1.0000E+00 CIRCUITS Electrical
94 CIRCUITS 1.0000E+00 CIRCUITS Compressors
95 STAGES 1.0000E+00 STAGES
96 FLOORS 1.0000E+00 FLOORS
97 EACH 1.0000E+00 EACH
98 BAYS 1.0000E+00 BAYS Buildings, Air Coolers
99 1.0000E+00 Blank Units
101 IN 2.5400E+01 MM
102 IN DIA 2.5400E+01 MM DIA
103 IN LG 2.5400E+01 MM LG
104 IN THK 2.5400E+01 MM THK
105 IN DP 2.5400E+01 MM DP
106 IN WD 2.5400E+01 MM WD
107 IN SZ 2.5400E+01 MM SZ
108 IN HT 2.5400E+01 MM HT
109 IN WL 2.5400E+01 MM WL
111 FT 3.0480E-01 M
112 FT DIA 3.0480E-01 M DIA

113 FT LG 3.0480E-01 M LG
114 FT DP 3.0480E-01 M DP
115 FT WD 3.0480E-01 M WD
116 FT HT 3.0480E-01 M HT
117 FT MHOLE 3.0480E-01 M MHOLE
118 HOURS 1.0000E+00 HOURS
119 WEEKS 1.0000E+00 HOURS

INDAMOUNT Indirect cost for this account.
INDDES Indirects description. Either user-supplied or “SYSTEM GENERATED”.
INDHOURS Indirect hours for this account.
INPUTUOM Default or user-specified Input UOM Description
INPUTUOMCF Default or user-specified Input UOM Conversion Factor
INTREF Internal reference identification.
ITEM System-generated or user-defined description for this item (text, 24

characters)
ITEMCAT Item Category
ITEMCOST Item Cost
ITEMDES System-generated or user-defined description for this item (text, 28

characters).
ITEMMH Item Manhours
ITMCOD Item code:
ITMCOD Description
DESIGN
0 Other
10 For equipment design data -— brief
11* For equipment design data — full (10 is a subset

of 11 with the provision that it must be a design
item)
19 For driver power only (where applicable).
20 For brief plant bulk, area bulk and area site

development items
21* For plant bulk items — full
30* For project site development items
40 For library items
96 Custom pipe specs
97 Project or area data sheets
98 For design and project estimate basis
REMARKS Equipment Items:

10 For user's description
11 For equipment symbol
12 For first 2 lines of remarks
13 For user's tag number
Plant Bulk Items:
23 For first 2 lines of remarks
Project Site Development:
IUMVAL System value in internal Units of Measure. Does not apply when
ICUNIT is 0 or 99 and may be incorrect for items containing costs.
LABCOST Item Labor Cost
LABRAT Unit Labor Rate
LCOST Field manpower cost for this item.
LCOSTRAT Ratio of LCOST output to LCOST system.
LHOURS Field man-hours associated with this item.
LINELOOP Piping line number (01 - 40) or instrument loop number (01 - 50). O if
not applicable.
LCODE Not assigned. Used in cost tracking programs to identify a category of

labor costs.
LDESC Not assigned. Used in cost tracking programs to describe a category of

labor costs
LOCID Identifier to help qualify the part associated with this item (text, 8
characters).
Examples:
Piping
Line 1 PLT AIR
DRAINS
Instrumentation
LOOP 1 UNIV
AIR SUP LOCAL

Civil
TYPE 15
Electrical
MOTOR PUSHB
FEEDER
MATCOST Item Material Cost
MATLCLAS Material Classification
MATL System material symbol characteristic of the material of construction

for this item (text, 5 characters; for example, "SS304").
MCODE Not assigned. Used in cost tracking programs to identify a category of

material costs
MCOST Material cost for this item.
MCOSTRAT Ratio of MCOST output to MCOST system.
MDESC Not assigned. Used in cost tracking programs to describe a category of

material costs.
MODTYPE Module Type
NOITEM Number of items in list.
NPCTnn List item for number nn. For Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.
The CRWSCH relation includes nn for 1 to 12.

The EQRENT relation incudes nn for 1 to 15.
The CSTCTRL relation includes nn for 1.
NUMDWG Number of Drawings

ORIGIN Responsible item for the data in this record (text, 6 characters).
Example:
CP 100 GRADE PIP001 USS110 (unit substation)
DDT222 PAD CIV001 MSS001(main)
BLD001 OPEN STL001 CTL 60
AREA EXOPEN INS001 SUBSTN (project testing - all substations)
UT HDR MILBLD ELC001 UT STN
INL001
PNT001
OUTPUTUOM Default or user-specified Output UOM Description
OUTPUTUOMCF Default or user-specified Output UOM Conversion Factor
PARAM Parameter description (text, 32 characters).
PCLASS Flange class. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen In-Plant Cost
Estimator only.
PCTOF A system-allocated code representing the portion of the project

estimate to be percentaged, as follows. For IPM only.
Description
1 Direct materials plus direct field labor costs
2 Direct material costs
3 Direct field labor cost
4 Direct material plus labor, and construction indirect costs
5 All project costs
6 Unit Cost Library Item(s) Booked to COA 1-48
7 Unit Cost Library Item(s) Booked to COA 49-98
8 Unit Cost Library Item(s) Booked to COA 99
PERCENT Percentage value specified by the user.
PIPSPC Custom piping spec. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen In-
Plant Cost Estimator only.
PIPTYP Class of material for piping.

PIPTYP Piping Material
0 Pipe labor
1 Carbon steel
2 Stainless steel
3 Titanium
5 Aluminum
6 Monel/Inconel
7 Copper
8 Hastelloy
9 Lined pipe, miscellaneous pipe

PRCURC Procurement Currency symbol for alternate material sources.
PROJUNIT Project Unit Description
PROPNAM System Property Name
PROPNUM Property number used to describe the field description
QUANT Quantity, used in conjunction with "UNITS" attribute.
REFID For Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator and COST® — 3-digit component
number.
For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator — 4-digit internal reference number.
REPGRP Report group number.
RESULT The value calculated when PERCENT is applied to the values,

represented by PCTOF, where appropriate.
RGNAME Report Group Name
RPGSEQ Report group sequence (sub-group).
SCHAREA In Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator: Display flag

In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator: For concurrent scheduling within the
project used for reporting and schedule tracking.
SCHED Pipe schedule. For Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen In-Plant
SEQNO Sequence Number (Primary Key)
SHIFTS Number of shifts per day. For Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.
SOURCE Symbol used to characterize direct, subcontract or remote shop costs

(text, 2 characters):
SOURCE Description
RS Remote shop
IT User input — total direct cost
lM User input — direct material costs
lL User input — direct manpower cost
IS User input — total subcontract cost
SS User input — direct costs, system-prepared subcontract cost
ST User input — subcontract total cost
SM User input — subcontract material cost
SL User input — subcontract manpower cost.
STRUCTAG Indicates structure to which the component is assigned.

SUBAREA Subsidiary area number, within AREA. For Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator and Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.
SUBCONMH Subcontract Placement Manhours
SUBMOD Submodule Number (only applies to TRMD and BRGM)

SUBTYPE For Equipment — cost basis
0 System calculated
1 User specified
2 Remote shop paint
For Piping — type of valve or fitting
0 Other
2 Remote shop paint
80 Steam tracing
98 Tubing
99 Pipe
101 90 DEG elbow
102 Flange
103 Reducer (to next lower size)
104 Tee
105 Blind
106 Union (also Couplings)
107 Spectacle blind
108 Strainer
109 Threadolet
110 Expansion joint
111 Transition joint
112 WYE for HDPE only
113 Steam trap
120 Clamp
121 45 DEG elbow
122 Ferrule
123 Cross
124 Eccentric reducer
125 Hose adapter
126 Pipe adapter
127 Swivel joint
128 Caps
129 Screwable Plugs
130 Weldolet
131 Sockolet
201 Globe valve
202 Ball valve
203 Butterfly valve
204 Gate valve
205 Knife gate valve
206 Plug valve
207 Angle valve
208 Check valve
214 Gate valve with post indicator plate
215 Ground mounted post indicator
216 Wall mounted post indicator
311 Rotameter

314 Meterrun
332 Vortex flow meter
333 Mag meter
334 Mass flow meter
390 Orifice flange-union
391 Orifice plate
401 Control valve GLO
402 On/off ball valve
403 Control valve BUO
411 Control valve GLP
412 Control valve BAP
413 Control valve BUP
421 Control valve ANO
422 Control valve ANP
423 Control valve DVS
424 Control valve TKS
431 Control valve (no reducers)
432 Control valve
433 3-way valve
434 Regulating valve
481 Slide gate on/off
482 Slide gate positioning
483 Diverter valve
501 TSV
502 Relief valve
503 Rupture disk
801 Victaulic coupl.
802 Insul. Flange
899 Vent/drain
900 Gaskets
950 Bolts
951 Pre-fab pipe supports
952 Tubing elbow
953 Tubing reducer
954 Tubing tee
955 Tubing union
956 Tubing ball valve

SUBTYPE For Piping - Field Labor Subtype
(cont.) STRESS RELIEF 3

FIELD ERECTION 4
MISC FIELD FABRICATION 5
CUT PIPE 6
BEVEL PIPE 7
WELD PIPE 8
PIPE TESTING 9
ERECT VALVES 10
BOLT-UP CONNECTIONS 11
FIELD X-RAY 12
Bend Pipe 13
threadolets 14
weldolets 15
JUMPER CONNECTIONS 16
SWAGE AND WELD JACKET 17
Shop Handling Small Pipe 18
Cut & Thread Pipe 19

For Ducting — type of fittings and/or Duct type

701 Round Duct
702 Round duct and stiffeners
703 Elbows
704 Tees
706 Dampers
707 Access doors
708 Flexible connections
709 Duct hangers
711 Spiral duct
712 Spiral duct and stiffeners
713 Elbows
714 Tees
715 Reducers
716 Dampers
717 Access doors
719 Duct Hangers
721 Square duct
722 Square duct and stiffeners
723 Elbows
724 Tees
725 Reducers
726 Dampers
727 Access doors
729 Duct Hangers

For Ducting - Field Labor Handle and Erect Duct

Round Duct 31
Spiral Duct 32
Square Duct 33

For Civil — type of foundation
0 Other
1 OCT+PROJ
2 OCTAGONL
3 PAVING
4 MASSPOUR
5 S M BLOCK
6 LG BLOCK
7 PILECAP
8 CONDUIT
9 RING
10 BASIN
11 EL SLAB
12 COLM/BM
13 WALL
14 GRAD BM
15 PIER
16 FOOTING
17 BOX
18 SLAB GRD
30 Rectangular - Above grade and below grade concrete tanks,
and tile chests
31 Cylindrical - Above grade and below grade concrete tanks,
and tile chests
50 User defined excavation in Bulk Adjustment Civil entry
60 Standard Rebar
61 Epoxy Coated Rebar
Note: The subtype associated with the rebar line item depends
on the rebar subtype option specified in the Project Design
Basis, General Civil/Steel Specs. The default ‘R’ rebar type
option will use subtype 60 or 61. The 'F' foundation type
option can be specified to replace the rebar type with the
relevant foundation type (subtypes 1 to 18).
Subtype Piling
71 SHEET PILING
72 HPILE
80 User defined piles in Bulk Adjustment Civil entry or in Site
Design.
81 RAYMOND
82 WOOD
83 PIPE
84 PRECAST
85 POURED
86 STEEL-H
87 CAISSON

88 FRANKI
89 AUGUR
90 Rigging and dismantling pile driving/drilling equipment
• For Steel
2 Remote shop paint
11 Remote shop CONC Fireproof
12 Remote shop MAGN Fireproof
13 Remote shop Pyrocrete FPR
692 DIAG
693 HORIZ
694 VERT
695 JOINT
696 LEG
697 PILE
698 Steel fabrication cost line item
Note: A steel fabrication cost line item is produced by the

system when an external steel file has been specified and a
fabrication cost entry has been added to the steel file for the
steel item type.
For Electrical
• Type of wire/cable and cable termination
– Where xx = position of the wire size in the Wire Sizes table. For
example:
Wire size 14 AWG is in Position 1 on the Wire Sizes table for US
Country Base; therefore, a low voltage (LV) 14 AWG wire would be
expressed as 101.
– Wire size 35 MM2 is in Position 8 on the Wire Sizes table for UK, JP,
and EU Country Bases; therefore, a medium voltage (MV) 35MM2
wire would be expressed as 208. Note that the position of the wire
size on the table is determined by counting down, not across.1xx
Low voltage (LV) cable/wire2xx Medium voltage (MV) cable/wire3xx
High voltage (HV) cable/wire4xx Control voltage (CV) cable/wire5xx
Lighting (LT) cable/wire
• Type of wire/cable and cable termination

100 LV conduit
200 MV conduit
300 HV conduit
400 CV conduit
500 LT conduit
551 Low Voltage Feeder Cable - Lighting
552 Low Voltage Feeder Cable - Electrical Tracing
• Type of termination
611 LV termination
612 MV termination

613 HV termination
614 CV termination
615 LT termination
616 LV termination - Electrical Tracing'
• Communication and Alarm Systems

650 PAGA System Cabinets
651 CCTV System Cabinets
652 Telephone System Cabinets
653 Area Network System Cabinets
654 Radio System Cabinets
655 Access Control System Cabinets
656 Intrusion Detection System Cabinets
657 Meteorological Monitoring System Cabinets
658 7C 16 AWG cable/12 pair 7C 1.25 mm2 cable
659 4 pair phone cable
660 12 pair 18 AWG cable/12 pair .8 mm2 cable
661 3C 14 AWG cable/3C 1.5 mm2 cable
662 24 fiber armor cable
663 24 fiber armor terminations
664 25 pr OSP CAT5 armor cable
665 25 pr OSP CAT5 armor terminations
• Cathode Protection
701 Bonding Station
702 Pipeline Cathodic Protection
703 Install Anode
704 Coke Breeze Backfill
705 Anode Bed Watering Pipe
706 Galvanic Anodes
707 Install Surface Casing
708 Anode Support Pipe
709 Termin Junction Box
710 Transformer/Rectifier
711 Solar Panels
712 Solar Panel Connection
713 Underground Cable
714 Potential Measure Test Station
• Grounding Systems
750 Grounding wire/cable
751 Ground rods, studs, clamps
752 Cadweld ground conductor bonding
753 Thermoweld, mold usage
754 Brazed connections
755 Servit Post
756 Ground/earthing well

757 Ground/earthing grid

758 Fill hole-Lyconite
759 Fill trench-Lyconite
760 Excavate trench
761 Backfill & compact
• Tracing
800 Electrical tracing
801 Self-Regulating Heating Cable
811 Mineral Insulated Alloy
821 Tracing Panelboard
825 Heating Cable
831 Tracing Controller
• For Instrumentation — type of main loop component construction -

continued
110 PI Gauge
111 PI Gauge
112 PI Draft
120 PIT
121 PT W/ Seal
130 PIC Local
140 PS Switch
160 DPI Gauge
170 DPIT
171 DPT W/ Seal
190 DPS Switch
200 Testwell
210 TE/TC
211 TI Dial
230 TT/TC
231 TIT/FILL
232 TT/RTD
233 TT Wet Bulb
234 TT Surface
250 TIC Local
270 TS Switch
310 FI Gauge
311 FI ROT
312 FI DP Cell
313 FQI
314 FI Meterrun
330 FIT DP Cell
331 FIT W/O SEN
332 FIT Vortex
333 FIT Magnet.

334 FIT Mass FL

335 FIT Ultras
336 FIT Turbine
350 FIC Local
360 FS Switch
361 FQIS
390 Orifice Flange
391 Orifice Plate
410 LI Gauge
411 LI Gauge
412 LI Bubbler
430 LIT DP
431 LIT Tape FL.
432 LIT DISP
433 LIT Ultras.
434 LIT Nuclear
435 LIT Radar
450 LC DISP
460 LS Wet
461 LS Dry
462 LS Vibrating
463 LS Cond.
464 LS CAP.
510 AT (PH)
511 AT (ORP)
512 AT (O2)
513 AET BTU
514 Density Inst.
515 Consistency
516 AT%LEL
517 AT H2S DET.
518 AT CO2
519 AT VIST.
520 AT Color
521 AT Flame
522 AT Cloud
523 AT Smoke
524 AT Flash
525 AT Gravity
526 AT Heating
527 AT GC.
528 AT H2&HC
529 AT H2S PHY.
530 AT HC
531 AT H2S/SO2
532 AT Sulphur
600 CT Conduct.

620 W LD 4 Cell
621 W LD 3 Cell
622 W LD 6 Cell
640 SIT
650 SS
660 XE Axial
661 XE Radial
For Instrumentation — type of main loop component construction -

continued
670 XS VIB
680 PNT Variable
681 PNT ON/OFF
690 PNS
691 EL Position
700 HIC Local
701 HIC
710 HSW
720 BS Infrared
740 Solenoid
999 CV CNTRL VLV
For Insulation — type of insulation or fireproofing

0 Other
1 CASIL (Hot insulation)
2 MWOOL
3 FOAM (Hot insulation)
4 FOAM (Cold insulation)
5 CWOOL
6 PURIF (Cold insulation)
7 PURIF (Hot insulation)
8 CASIL (Cold insulation)
11 CONC Fireproof
12 MAGN Fireproof
13 Pyrocrete FPR
For Piping: Pipeline

Note: For Cathodic Protection Subtypes, see Electrical
601 Haul pipe to R-O-W
602 Stringing pipe on R-O-W
603 Launcher
604 Receiver
605 Main road/RR crossing
606 Minor/Dirt road crossing
607 Clearing and Grading
608 Clean up R-O-W
609 R-O-W blasting

610 Build BERM through marsh

611 Build BERM on trench
613 Concrete Anchor, Weld Plate
614 Haul Concrete Pipe Support
615 String, Set Pipe Support
616 Ditch Blasting
617 Ditch, Sand & Softsoil
618 Ditch, Rocky Soil
619 Ditch, Weathered Shale
620 Ditch, Weathered Rock
621 Ditch, Hard Rock
622 Rework after Blasting
623 Rock Ditch By Hand
624 Ditch Trimming
625 Haul, Place Sand
626 Haul Piles
627 String Piles
628 Drive Support Piles
629 Drive Thrust Anchor
630 Drive Deflection Anchor
631 Drilled Piles
632 Concrete Fill, Drilled Piles
633 Cut Off Piles
634 Anode Trench
635 Surface Bed Vertical Anode
636 Anode Surface Casing
637 Drill Cased Anode Well
638 Drill Uncased Anode Well
639 Cement Plug
643 Access Roads to R-O-W
644 Concrete Valve Boxes
651 Double Joint
652 FBE External Coat
653 Internal Coating
654 Coating Inspection
655 Line Up & Connect Pipe
656 Tie-in Connection
657 Line Up & Weld
658 Tie-in Welds
659 X-Ray Field Inspection
660 Epxoy Shrink Sleeves
661 Hydrotest
662 Aerial KM Markers
663 KM Markers
664 Warning Signs
665 Pipeline Vents
666 Pipeline Drains

667 Place Pipe in Support

668 Lower In, Backfill, Clean
669 Haul Ring Girder
670 String Ring Girder
For Piping: Pipeline

671 Dress & Grind Pile Head
672 Weld Pipe Pile Cap Plate
673 Weld Tee
674 Weld Ring Girder
675 Place Pipe In Support
676 Install Insulation & Bolt Down
677 Guide Bars for Tee
678 Welding
679 Miscellaneous Drains
680 Relief Line
681 Steel Support Shoes
690 Steelwork Thrust Anchor
691 Steelwork Deflection Anchor
692 Solar Panel Steel
699 Pipeline Instruments
SUMCODE Not assigned. Used in cost tracking programs to group costs into
cost centers.
TITLE Report group title.
TOTCOST Item Total Cost
TYPSCT Type of data (1 = schedule, 2 = class). For Aspen Capital Cost

Estimator and Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator only.
UNIT Unit of measure associated with numeric design value.
UNITID Customizable Unit of Measure identifier (a subset of ICUNIT that

can be modified by the user for input and output)
UNITIN Unit of measure associated with user specified design value.
UNITS Units of measure associated with QUANT (ity) (text, 8 characters;

for example, “FEET”, “CY”, “M3”).
USERDES User specified description for component, installation

material/man-hour additions, installation pipe or installation
instrumentation.
USEREQPCNT Default or user-specified equipment count

USERTAG Equipment component user tag or pipe specs if custom pipe specs
are used.
VALUER The value of the design parameter (PARAM) as a real number

(useful in calculations). For parameter (PARAM) "ITEM TYPE",
VALUER contains the number of items.
VALUET Value of design parameters, as text.
VALUEU Value of design parameter specified by user as text.
WEIGHT Item Weights, LBS or KG (based on project UOM)
WGT Weight of this item.
WUNIT Unit of measure associated with item weight (WGT) attribute

(text, 4 characters; for example, "LBS ", "KG ").
35 Database Relations - 36-85

37 Icarus Technology

Introduction to Areas
Area Specifications
Report Groups
Icarus Systems are Based on Craft Labor
Project Schedule
Equipment Fabricate/Ship Items
Barchart Report Format
Equipment Procurement Schematic
Process Control
Overview of System Input Specifications for Power Distribution
Power Distribution
Mode of Supply and Distribution
Power Distribution Components
Redundancy
Usage Instructions
Reporting of Results
Project Definition
Workforce
Construction Overhead - Prime Contractor Basis
Contracts: Description/Scope
36 Icarus Technology 37-1

Introduction to Areas
In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, areas can be
defined as a way to describe the construction methodology that prevails for that
section of the project. Specifications are defined for each area. These specifications
include mechanical design specifications for each of the major accounts along with
dimensions and indexing.
Reasons for Areas

Areas are defined for the following reasons:
• Cost accounting: Project components arranged into areas are easier to review.
Many of the cost reports are arranged by area.
• Site conditions: Different sections of the plant site may contain different site
conditions. The user can define these site conditions, such as soil type,
instrumentation type, electrical class and division, or area type (on-grade, in-
steel, and so on.), in the area specifications. As a result, the site conditions will
impact the area bulk quantities, costs, and man-hours developed for an area.
• Contractor assignments: As contractors and contractors’ scope of work
(CONSETs) are defined, areas are then assigned to the defined scope of work.
Areas can affect the flexibility of assigning work to contractors. For example, if
different contractors are responsible for above grade and below grade piping,
each of these can be defined in separate areas and assigned to the appropriate
contractors. Without these being defined in separate areas, it would be
impossible to assign above grade and below grade pipe to different contractors.
• Process control and power distribution: Once the user defines the major process
control and power distribution elements in the estimate, the user must assign
areas to defined control centers and unit substations. For example, the total
instrumentation developed for an area would be used to size that area’s Control
Center. Details of process control and power distribution are developed and
reported in the last area sections of the Detailed Bulk report and Area Bulk
section of the Equipment List report for the last area. It is suggested that users
define one last area as an OFFSITES/PROCESS & POWER area to separate the
numerous details developed for Process Control and Power Distribution from all
other detail.
• Importing: When defining areas, keep in mind that whole areas and their
components can be imported into other projects with matching country base,
currency and units of measure. “Checklist” areas can be created as a way to
prevent from forgetting typical project components in a new project estimate. An
example of this would be a steelwork Checklist Area that would include all typical
sitework items. Once imported into a project, sitework items that are not needed
in a project would be deleted and design specifications for the different sitework
components would be revised.
Area Types
There are several different area types to select from. Each area type has its own set
of default area bulks that will be developed. The different area types that may be
defined are:
37-2 36 Icarus Technology

• On-Grade (with or without concrete pad). This is the default area type. By
default the system develops the following bulks for an on-grade area:
o Perimeter lights (Number of lighting fixtures is calculated based on the
lighting data specifications in the area electrical specification form)
° Lights are supplied from 1 or more area panelboards, supplied from a
disconnect switch in the MCC for this area.
° A ground grid the length of the perimeter.
° A concrete pad will be developed based on the dimensions of the area if the
PAD option is selected.
• Open-Steel (OPEN)
The following area bulks will be developed for an OPEN type area:
° A multi-level, open-steel structure developed based on the dimensions of the
area.
° One in-steel level for every 15 feet [4.5 M] of height.
° 75% of each level is floor grating for steel structure and concrete slab for
concrete structure, with perimeter toe-plate and handrail.
° Pendant lights supplied from a local panelboard developed just to supply the
lights in the structure.
° Structural members are sized for both dead and live loads based on the
weight of equipment “hung” in the structure. See section below for
information on “hanging” equipment.
Note: Equipment items that are “hung” lose their foundations and support steel
is provided to tie the item into the structure.
° Bracing is provided according to wind and seismic requirements.
• Open-Structure (OPEN)
Open structure type can be steel, pre-cast concrete, or cast-in-place concrete.
Steel is the default structure type.
The following area bulks will be developed for an OPEN type area:
° A multi-level, open-steel structure developed based on the dimensions of the
area.
° One in-steel level for every 15 feet [4.5 M] of height.
° 75% of each level is floor grating for steel structure and concrete slab for
concrete structure, with perimeter toe-plate and handrail.
° Pendant lights supplied from a local panelboard developed just to supply the
lights in the structure.
° Structural members are sized for both dead and live loads based on the
weight of equipment “hung” in the structure. See section below for
information on “hanging” equipment.
Note: Equipment items that are “hung” lose their foundations and support steel
is provided to tie the item into the structure.
° Bracing is provided according to wind and seismic requirements.
• Existing Open-Steel (EX-OPEN)
The following area bulks are developed for an EX-OPEN type area:

° All bulks that were developed for the OPEN type area will be developed except
for the OPEN STEEL STRUCTURE as it is assumed to exist.
° Support steel is provided.
Logic for Hanging Equipment
Equipment Loaded Automatically Loaded when Skirt/Leg
is set to 0
Shell & Tube Heat Yes
Exchanger
Horizontal Tank Yes
Thermosiphon reboiler Yes
Other reboilers No
Agitated Tank Yes
Double-Diam. Tower Yes
Packed Tower Yes
Trayed Tower Yes
Vertical Tanks Yes
All Others (pumps and so No or N/A No or N/A
on)
See also: Chapter 20: Steel - Logic for Hanging Equipment in Steel Structures
• Module
These area bulks are developed for a MODULE type area:
° A SKID (flat base structural model) module is developed by default or the
user can select from the following module types:
- Cylindrical 1-bay cold box
- Rectangular, 1-bay cold box fully enclosed
- Rectangular, 1-bay cold box 3 sides enclosed
- Truckable* (See details below.)
- Bargeable* (See details below)
- Module lighting
° Ground grid
• * Truckable Module - TRMD
The truckable module is designed as a one bay braced frame structure and the
user can specify the number of levels. The user can add up to four truckable
modules within the area and up to two modules can be stacked. Use the
Structure Tag TRMD-1 to TRMD-4 for specifying the module to which the
equipment is loaded. If no Structure Tag is specified, equipment weight is
distributed among the modules. One dimension can be up to 80ft (24m) [Length,
Width, or Height] and the other two dimensions up to 25ft (7.6m).

You can specify an allowance for temporary bracing used during shipping. The
default is 10% of the steel weight.
• * Bargeable Module - BRGM
The Bargeable Process Module is designed as a braced frame structure.
Dimensions can be up to 230ft(70m) [Length] x 230ft (70m) [Width] x 170ft
(51.8m) [Height]. You can add up to four modules within an area and up to two
modules can be stacked similar to Truckable. Use structure tag BRGM-1 to
BRGM-4 for specifying the module to which the equipment is loaded. If no
structure tag is specified, equipment weight is distributed among the modules.
The transportation cost varies significantly from project to another, so you should
enter the transportation cost from module shop to site.
You can specify:
° the shipping season (Default: Summer)
° the shipping route
° transverse, longitudinal and vertical acceleration values
° an allowance for temporary bracing used during shipping. The default is 5%
of the steel weight
These specifications work in conjunction with each other:
When a BRGM module type is selected, the selected season, route, and module
height (the tallest module of the four governs) enable calculation of the shipping
acceleration fields. Thus, based on these selections, acceleration values are
automatically calculated.
Notes:
• BRGM sub-modules with heights greater than 100ft (30.4m) may not be stacked.
• The maximum of the area-level seismic acceleration and the module shipping
acceleration values is used for design of the bargeable module. The area-level
seismic acceleration is used for bargeable module foundation design.
• The shipping accelerations determined by the system are good for initial
estimates when no information or data is available. To fine tune the estimate
using more accurate acceleration coefficients, it is recommended that a naval
architect be consulted to determine the particular barge type, season, shipping
route, and module height. You can input the shipping accelerations provided by
the naval architect into the acceleration fields to override the defaults provided
by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

• * Piperack (see details) - Piperack Module - PRMD
A plant bulk piperack is required to specify the piperack module dimensions and
details. Specify only one piperack in one piperack module area. equipment,
Structures, and Buildings are not allowed on the piperack module except Air
cooler.
• Floor
The following area bulks are developed for a FLOOR type area:
° Pendant lights
Figure A.1: How Aspen Capital Cost Estimator Hangs Equipment in an OPEN or EX-
OPEN Area
Equipment Automatic Set Skirt/Leg = 0
Shell & Tube Exchanger Yes
Horizontal Tank Yes
Thermosiphon Reboiler Yes
Other Reboilers No
Agitated Tank Yes
Double-Diameter Tower Yes
Packed Tower Yes
Trayed Tower Yes
Vertical Tank Yes
All others (pumps, and so No or N/A No or N/A

on.)
Default Area Bulks

There are area bulks that are automatically generated for an area. These area bulks
are developed to meet the requirements of the area and can be suppressed in the
Area Specifications for that area. If you execute a project level estimate, you can
review these area bulks in the Area Bulks section of the Equipment List report.
Figure A.2: Summary of Area Bulks Automatically Developed for Each Area
Area Bulks On-grade Pad Area Types

Open Ex-open Module Floor
Area Lighting & Grounding X X X X X X
Equipment Grounding X X X X X
Concrete Pad X
Open Steel Structure X X

Module Structure
Area Specifications
For each defined area, the user may enter specifications that will affect designs and
quantities of bulks in an area. While most of the area specifications are design
specifications that will override design specifications entered at the project level, the
most significant area specifications are those that will affect lengths of pipe, electrical
cable, and instrument signal wiring or tubing. These length specifications include:
• Area Dimensions
Defined in Area Type Definition, Area Dimensions are used as a default to
develop lengths for all of the following system developed items:
- Piping.
- Electrical cable/wiring.
- Instrument signal wiring /tubing.
Note: Area dimensions do not have any effect on user-added bulks, such as yard
pipe, cable runs, signal wire runs, and so on.
The user can enter area length (L), width (W), and height (H). Only area types OPEN
or EX-OPEN will recognize and use the height dimension.
One example of how the system uses Area Dimension is the determination of pipe
lengths. If an area dimension of 30 X 30 is entered, the system will take ½ (L+W) of
the area to determine the default final cut-off lengths of pipe, so in the above
example, ½(L+W)= ½ (30+30) = ½ (60) = 30. The default final cut-off length of
pipe in this area would be 30’. Any line of pipe that had an original length of less
than 30’ would be unaffected by this 30’ x 30’ area dimension.
Area Dimensions are used in a similar way to determine cable and signal wiring
lengths in an area unless the user overrides this calculation with
specific entries.
The area dimensions are also used to size and/or quantify area pads, modules, open
steel structures, grounding, area lighting, concrete pads, and so on.
• Pipe Envelope
Defined in Area Pipe Specifications, Pipe Envelope takes precedence over Area
Dimensions in calculating pipe lengths in an area. Just as Area Dimensions did
in the above example, Pipe Envelope defines the final cut-off length of pipe for all
system developed piping in an area. The user can make entries for Pipe
Envelope length, width, and height as well as% Adjustment and Maximum Pipe
Length.
The following is an example of how the system will use this information to
calculate pipe length:
1 The “standard length” is calculated using the line length equation.
2 The “standard length” is multiplied by area pipe spec for% adjustment.
3 The final cutoff length is calculated:
a) EQPIPELEN + 0.5 * HT
- EQPIPELEN=0.5*(Area Pipe Envelope L+W+H)
- if not set, then EQPIPELEN=0.5*(Area L+W+H)

b)Then area spec for Maximum Pipe Length is applied.
• Electrical cable run lengths
Defined in Area Electrical Specifications, there are distance specifications
available that will be used to calculate lengths for all system developed electrical
cable in an area. These specifications include Distance to MCC and Distance to
Panel.
• Instrument signal wiring or tubing lengths
Defined in Area Instrumentation Specifications, there are distance specifications
available that will be used to calculate lengths for all system developed signal
wiring or tubing lengths in an area. These include Distance from Junction Box
(JB) to Control Center (CC).
Report Groups
All defined areas are assigned to defined Report Groups in the Area Tree diagram.
Report groups are a way to group areas together for reporting in various Report
Group summary reports. For example, if you had a process area where some
components were on-grade and some were in-steel, you could define two separate
areas: an ON-GRADE area and an OPEN-STEEL area. These two areas are separate
to ensure that the appropriate bulks are developed, but can be assigned to the same
REPORT GROUP so costs and man-hours can be summarized together in REPORT
GROUP summary reports.
Icarus Systems are Based on Craft Labor

All country base locations are based on a division of labor along craft lines. Each craft
performs only those work items assigned to it — pipefitters only perform pipefitting
operations; welders only perform welding operations; etc. In Icarus systems, work
items can be reassigned to a craft to reflect site conditions.
This strict default division of labor is a necessary starting point if you are to be able
to change the work rules. It is only because hours are initially “booked” to the
correct crafts that you can subsequently book them to different crafts and thereby
change the division of labor appropriate for any contractor. This is done by creating a
new workforce and then reassigning the labor hours away from the default crafts to
the new workforce crafts.
For example, a skid fabrication shop might be represented as follows:
1 Create a new workforce to be used by the skid fabricator. This workforce is
initially an exact copy of the system’s default workforce. Change (or add) the
craft names in the new workforce to reflect those present in the skid fabrication
workforce. For example, change “laborer” to “day-laborer,” add a new craft called
“mechanical,” etc.
2 Change the division of labor. Reassign labor hours booked to the default crafts in
the workforce to the newly-defined crafts. For example, reassign 100% of the
labor hours booked to riggers and pipefitters to the new “mechanical” craft.
3 Enter the wage rate and productivity for each craft in the new workforce.
4 Link (assign) the new workforce to the skid contractor. Any work assigned to this
contractor is performed using the new workforce.

5 Using this method, up to nine distinct construction workforces for each project
can be created. This permits the simulation of an extremely complicated mix of
contractors having diverse work rules.

Project Schedule
A project schedule is developed based on the estimate scope of work for a project
estimate. This schedule includes dates and durations for design engineering,
procurement, delivery of material and equipment, site development and
construction. The construction schedule is integrated with the cost estimate to
provide the basis for estimation of schedule-dependent costs such as equipment
rental requirements, field supervision and construction management.
The schedule information may be reported in three different ways:
1 The total construction duration will be shown on the Project Data Sheet, and, if
applicable, the construction durations for each contract will also be shown on the
Contract Data Sheet.
2 If the Schedule report option is specified, the system generates two histogram
reports, the Project Cash Flow Summary and Project Manpower Schedule (which
displays the manpower resources required for each week of the construction
schedule). Manpower should also be provided for any contracts refined.
3 The Project Schedule Data may be used to develop barchart reports in addition to
the histograms for greater schedule detail.
The Project Schedule Data, with an entry for the date to start engineering, is
required to generate the barchart reports. These standard barcharts
are produced:
• General Schedule - Provides a balanced view of all phases of the project
schedule.
• Engineering Schedule - Focuses on details of the design phase, such as the
production of piping isometrics, and on specific procurement items, showing only
a single bar for all construction.
• Construction Schedule - Shows only a single bar for the design and procurement
phases but focuses on major construction elements such as piperack erection and
piping installation.
Each barchart may also show additional bars created by the user. Also, if contracts
are used, another barchart is provided for the Contracts Schedule. The barcharts
appear within the body of the project estimate report and a duplicate is appended to
the report.
The project schedule is affected by adjustments to engineering man-hours, field
man-hours and productivity and construction workweek specified elsewhere and any
schedule modifications requested in the Project Schedule Data. The techniques of the
scheduling system are utilized in the logical sequencing of the adjusted design and
construction tasks to produce a summary schedule. Simulation of delayed or
accelerated schedules is possible through the various adjustments available.
However, the user interested in developing a detailed schedule for rush projects, or
projects using offset prefabrication, is advised to use the scheduling system, where
control of activity logic is possible.
Regardless of whether the barchart reports are to be produced, the Project Schedule
Data may be used to adjust the schedule and therefore adjust the cost estimate. The
data provides percentage adjustment fields for design/procurement duration, for
delivery times and for construction duration. Changes to the system default
equipment fabricate/ship times, which may increase or decrease the total

construction duration, can be made in various ways. A specific value for total
construction weeks may be specified.

Equipment Fabricate/Ship Items
In the absence of user input, the system will use the fabricate/ship times (in weeks)
shown in Table PS-2. If a percentage adjustment is specified for deliveries, these
defaults will all be adjusted accordingly. An entry for a particular class will be used
exactly as entered. A fabricate/ship time entry for a particular piece of equipment
will also be used as entered; all other equipment of the same class will be assigned
the system default value as adjusted, or the value of the class if specified.
Equip. Equipment Class 1 2 3

Class
Receive Receive Fabricate
No.
Quotes Vendor and Ship
(weeks) Data (weeks)
(weeks)
01 Process Vessels 3 4 14
02 Towers 4 4 26
03 Storage Vessels 3 4 33
04 Pumps 3 0 18
05 Compressors 6 8 24
06 Turbines 4 8 32
07 Heat Exchangers 3 4 20
08 Boilers 6 8 32
09 Furnaces 4 6 26
10 Air Coolers 4 4 18
11 Package Refrigeration 4 6 30
12 Electric Generators 4 6 22
13 Air Dryers 3 3 16
14 Conveyors 3 4 20
15 Mills; Crushers 6 6 30
16 Fans, blowers 3 2 12
17 Elevators 4 4 16
18 Motors 3 4 10
19 Dust Collectors 3 4 14
20 Filters 2 3 12
21 Centrifuges 4 6 28

Equip. Equipment Class 1 2 3
Class
Receive Receive Fabricate
No.
Quotes Vendor and Ship
(weeks) Data (weeks)
(weeks)
22 Agitators, Mixers 3 4 12
22 Cooling Towers 4 3 26
24 Miscellaneous Equipment 4 4 16
25 Pre-Engineered Package 4 4 24
26 Packings, Linings 3 4 12
Note: For field erected equipment, the schedule will be sequenced with the field
erection period included in the fabricate and ship deliver time.
1 No user adjustments available
2 User may specify a % adjustment with Project Schedule Data.
3 A % adjustment or weeks may be specified with Project Schedule Data.
The user intending to substantially reduce the default fabricate/ship times is
cautioned to specify a value for all classes or use a percentage adjustment to
deliveries, to avoid overlooking a longer delivery time for a minor piece of
equipment.

Barchart Report Format
For the user interested in restricting each barchart report to a single page to improve
the appearance of the report, the following table shows the maximum number of
summary bars on each barchart (that is, report length) developed by the system:
System Summary Bars With Basic Without Basic

Engineering
General Schedule 24 20
Engineering Schedule 16 14
Construction Schedule 19 18
The user may highlight up to five classes of equipment and up to five specific items
of equipment which appears on all reports except the Contracts Schedule. Up to five
user-defined bars may be added, which appear on the Engineering and Construction
Schedules.
User Additions Bars Equipment
General Schedule N/A 10
Engineering Schedule 5 10
Construction Schedule 5 10
Since a single page report can contain only 24 summary bars, a combination of
system summary bars and user additions that exceeds 24 is printed on a second
page.
The horizontal time scale is adjusted automatically by the system to show either six
years, three years or one and a half years on one page-width
as required.
Fabricate and Ship Weeks

When defining the equipment fabricate and ship time per class, you are specifying
the number of weeks for equipment fabrication and shipping of vendor data. These
times should be entered for any equipment classes whose anticipated fabricate and
ship time differs from the system default. Refer to “Equipment Procurement
Schematic” for the procurement/delivery sequence.
Impacting the Project Schedule

To produce a project schedule when using Aspen Capital Cost Estimator or COST ,
TM ®
an engineering start date must be specified. (Specifying a construction start date is

optional.) The system then develops a critical path method (CPM) planning schedule
based on the estimate scope of work. The estimate scope of work is tied to the
engineering and construction work items in the project. Included in this schedule
are:
• Dates and durations for design engineering
• Procurement

• Delivery of materials and equipment
• Construction.
Equipment Procurement Schematic
The following items have an impact on the project schedule:

• Percentage adjustments for design/procurement duration, delivery times and
construction duration
• Project scope
• Field labor shifts, productivities, etc.
• Index man-hours
• Percentage adjustments to man-hours through material/man-hours adjustments
• Supplemental man-hours added through material/man-hour additions
• Overrides to the system’s fabrication and ship times to increase or decrease the
total construction duration by equipment class (for example, HE - 20 weeks) or
by equipment item (for example, DDT 101 - 10 weeks).
Remember that the project schedule is based on project scope. The project schedule
is more realistic if components are specified correctly and accurately. Most
importantly, keep in mind that the schedule is a preliminary conceptual schedule.
The schedule is not for execution.

Process Control
The Process Control Data may be used to specify the desired configuration and type
of control scheme:
• Analog
• Digital
• Combinations of analog and digital control.
Overview
Two types of process control systems are discussed here:
• Analog
• Distributed digital control.
The user may select either type, or combinations of each type, to represent the
desired control scheme.
The process control scheme may be defined by two types of data. Control Center
data defines a group of analog or digital devices of similar types, assigned by the
user via a Control Center Reference Number, to provide control system functions to
one or more Areas for Sub-units.
Operator Center data defines a distributed digital control Operator Center; that is, a
staffed center consisting of video display and computer-controlled indicating,
recording, controlling, processing, and transmitting devices. Operator Centers are
used in conjunction with Control Centers only for digital control schemes.
Groups of analog devices are defined only by analog types of Control Centers.
If Process Control Data is not defined by the user, the system develops one digital
Control Center and one Operator Center for the project to be estimated.
Note: The costs of Operator and Control Centers will be reported in project
estimates only, against the Instrumentation account for the last Area in the project.
Accordingly, control room specifications and other instrumentation-related items to
be reported with project process control items should be included as part of the last
Area.
Introduction
The system is designed to develop a list of quantities of materials, material costs,
and field manpower needed to install items relating to the instrumentation and
control of process equipment.
The user’s equipment list, as organized into Areas, is used to develop individual
items of instrumentation in the following major categories.
• Sensors and transmitters
• Panels and panel mounted devices - analog; front/back of panel, ESD
(emergency shut-down), annunciators, switches, etc.
• Supply and signal tubing, wiring, bundles
• Supports, racks, enclosures, junction boxes

• High voltage instrumentation (switches, switch wire, solenoids)
• Computer-controlled instruments: controllers, process interface units (high and
low entry level signals), operator stations, co-axial data cable, redundancy,
transducers, barriers, etc.
• Final control elements.
The user guides the system in developing instrumentation by defining the desired
control scheme at four discrete levels which are listed here and discussed below:
• Equipment: Instrumentation Volumetric Model
• Area considerations (Area, Sub-unit)
• Control Center: one or more, each serving a group of areas, containing panels,
mounted instruments (if analog) or computer-controlled instruments (if digital)
• Operator Center: one or more, if required, each serving one or more Control
Centers, containing computer console operator stations for purposes of
processing:
- process information
- alarm conditions
- control signals
- records for display and printing.
Equipment-Instrumentation Volumetric Model

Each item of equipment selected by the user is assigned a model for
instrumentation. Specific Volumetric Model drawings in the Piping and
Instrumentation Drawings illustrate piping (by line number) and instrumentation (by
loop number).
Volumetric Models for instrumentation of process equipment are assigned based
upon equipment item and type, function to be performed, and special user
requirement identified by applicable type or installation bulks.
For example, a tower would be instrumented as a distillation tower (default
application type) unless it was redefined to function as an absorber, thereby
receiving piping and instrumentation for use as an absorber.
A tank, horizontal or vertical, will be instrumented for normal process conditions.
However, the user may designate knock-out or storage application requirements
thereby revising the nature of piping and instrumentation to be provided to the
vessel.
An installation bulk feature permits the user to create an entire instrumentation
scheme for any item of equipment, or for the user to modify the system’s
instrumentation Volumetric Model on a loop by loop basis - adding a new loop,
deleting a system defined loop, or appending loops to a loop thereby providing for
extremely flexible instrumentation schemes.
For each loop, you can specify a sensor, two control valves and their costs with
currency.
There is a field for Hookup option at the Project, Area and bulk level to specify
the hookup option to be used. The default is Primary hookup option. For creating
custom assemblies and choosing your own hookup parts, use Customer External
Files.

In each case, instrumentation materials, quantities, material costs, and field man-
hours to install equipment instrumentation would be reported against the item of
equipment. Material items include:
• All local instrumentation, sensors, transmitters, air supplies, tubing, wiring,
control, and relief valves
• Equipment panel and instrument costs for those items of equipment designated
by the system (turbine, gas compressor) or by the user to bear local panel
mounted instruments.
Area Considerations
The concept of an Area and Sub-unit are discussed in the Area section. The Area or
Sub-unit may be viewed, for present purposes, as an area or section of the project,
and includes all equipment and bulk items so contained.
For instrumentation, an Area or Sub-unit grouping of equipment items would be
characterized by a unique set of the following:
• Designated Control Center
• Design level - standard or full. (See Piping and Instrumentation Drawings.)
• Type of instrumentation - pneumatic or electronic
• Type of transmission, thermocouple extension cabling, and nature
of support
• Average length of transmission line from equipment item to Control Center
• Cable tray dimensions
• Electrical classification to establish cabling and barrier requirements.
It is important that these area criteria affect the installed cost of each equipment
item requiring instrumentation; the design level and type of instrumentation are
most important influences on instrument selection, quantities and costs. The
remaining area criteria heavily influence the lengths and type of signal wire cable
and tubing and are not insignificant.
Instrument materials, quantities, costs and field man-hours to install and test will be
developed by the system and assigned and reported against the area. These include
field junction boxes and wire, cable and tubing runs, conduit, cable trays serving the
area and communicating with the designated
Control Center.
Control Centers
The system surveys the various items of equipment within an Area for Control Center
instrumentation requirements. More than one Area may be delegated to a Control
Center; several Control Centers may be designated by the user. If of the digital type,
such Control Centers would normally be unstaffed electronic centers that may be
grouped together for operator control using the Operator Center concept described in
the next section.
Two classes of Control Centers are defined by the following characteristics:
1 Analog Control Centers -

• Electrical, panel mounted instruments based upon pneumatic, electronic, high
voltage switching.
• Instruments to record or indicate the value of a variable, or develop and transmit
a control signal (pneumatic, electronic, high voltage switch signal) to field
mounted control elements.
• Four types, depending upon desired extent of graphic panels:
o NONE: totally devoid of instruments, panels, etc.
o CONV: conventional panel board (4.75 instruments per linear foot [15.6 per
meter])
o SEMI: semi-graphics panel (3.75 instruments per linear foot [12.3 per
meter])
o FULL: full graphic display (2.5 instruments per linear foot [8.2 per meter]).
• Staffed by Control Center operators.
2 Digital Control Centers -
• Devices, that is, process interface units, for conversion of analog signals
(pneumatic, electronic, high voltage switching) into digital computer signals to be
utilized at the designated Operator Center.
• Reconversion of computer developed digital control signals into analog signals
(pneumatic, electronic, high voltage switch signals) for transmission to field
mounted control elements.
• Limited pretreatment of digital signals (arithmetic, logical, combinatorial).
• Display devices appropriate to testing, maintenance functions.
• Not generally staffed by operator personnel except for maintenance and testing.
Designation of Control Center Requirements

The user may designate the desired control scheme, first at the Unit Area level for
purposes of designating area requirements and then at the Control Center level to
establish the nature of the Control Center. Areas and Control Centers are linked
together by a user assigned Control Center Reference Number; the reference
number is defined for each Control Center and referenced for each Unit Area
assigned to transmit/receive signals to/from the defined Control Center.
Absence of User Control Center Designation

Should the user not define or refer to a Control Center for one or more Areas, the
system develops a digital Control Center for those units. This system-developed
Control Center is referred to as Control Center Reference Number “0” in SCAN and
PROJect Estimate reports. Quantities, costs, and man-hours for instrumentation
items required to support those Unit Areas unreferenced by the user will be
developed and listed by the system for Control Center “0”.
Operator Centers
The system is designed to evaluate, size, and develop installed costs of digital
control and data processing equipment, cabling and furnishings for
Operator Centers.
The major cost items considered are:

• CRT’s - though termed CRT’s (cathode ray tubes) these are microprocessors that
provide supervisory, control, and data processing functions in addition to multi-
color display and keyboard entry functions.
• History module - hardware and software devices for displaying or recording the
history of a variable (important for large or complex process, less so for small
process facilities).
• Printers - to permit printed output of selected current or historical values of
variables; to log the operations of the center.
• Engineers keyboard - for building and changing configurations or displays.
• Local Control Network (LCN) - principally fiber-optic cable (redundant) and
associated microelectronics to direct data “moving” along the data path to and
from:
- devices in one Operator Center
- one Operator Center and another
- the Operator Center and each of its subordinate Control Centers.
• Other data processing peripherals and furniture.
The user may designate the type (local or universal) and size of an Operator Center,
or alternatively permit the system to determine Operator Center requirements.
Sizing an Operator Center is accomplished by the system by matching the list of
items with process equipment requirements. The principal sizing parameters are the
number of digital control loops and control points to be serviced by the Operator
Center. These parameters are obtained at the Operator Center level according to the
following hierarchy:
• Operator Center
• Control Center
• Area
• Equipment and piping control instrumentation.
Thus, control instrumentation requirements at the equipment level are used first to
size individual Control Centers and then to size each Operator Center upon grouping
relevant Control Center requirements.
Example
In the sketch below, a proposed project is to be provided with a combined
analog/digital control system for five areas, that is, Area 100, 200, 300, 400, 500.
One section of Area 100 and all of Area 500 is to be provided with a conventional
analog control system. Further, suppose that Area 100 and 400 require individual
process interface unit locations, that is, different Control Centers.

Because Area 100 requires both digital and analog control, it is convenient to split it
into two Areas, one a Sub-unit of the other, and thereby enable the description of
one portion as digitally controlled and the other as analog controlled.
Reference numbers need be assigned to the Unit Areas and centers. Suppose:
MAIN-100: Area No. = 01
SUB-UNIT 100: Area No. = 01
AREA-200: Area No. = 02
and for the Control Centers:
Digital, for MAIN 100: Center No. 10

Analog, for SUB-UNIT-100: Center No. 11
Digital for AREA-200: Center No. 20
Analog for AREA-500: Center No. 11
and for the Area, a reference number of 90.
The Project Control Data

The Project Control Data would be prepared as follows:
Project Control
Center No. Type

90 Operator Center
10 Digital Control Center
11 Analog Control Center
Note that additional Project Control Data may be appended to this list to expand the
control system for other yet undefined process areas. Up to five independent
Operator centers may be defined along with their subordinate Control Centers to a
combined maximum total of 20.
The Area Data for this Example

In the text below, the Unit Area Data is illustrated; the term “etc.” denotes all
remaining area information, that is, the complete set of area data and the
component descriptions. Area 100 is split into two sub-units, named MAIN-100 and
SUB-UNIT-100:
Area Title MAIN-100
Area Number 01
Control Center Number 10
etc.
Area Title SUB-UNIT-100

Area Number 01
etc.
Note: The Control Center Number is 10 for the Main Section and 11 for the Sub-unit.
Then for the remaining units:
Area Title MAIN-200
Area Number 02
etc.
Area Title MAIN-300

Area Number 03
etc.
Area Title MAIN-400

Area Number 04
etc.

Area Title MAIN-500
Area Number 05
etc.
Note: AREA-200 and AREA-300 share Control Center Number 20; SUB-UNIT-100
and AREA-500 share analog Control Center Number 11.
Reporting of Results for this Example

Project estimate reports would be prepared for this example as follows:
• Equipment: instrumentation local to the item would be reported in the detailed
listing of field materials and manpower for the item of equipment.
• Area: junction boxes, bundle runs (and associated tray and conduit) would be
developed as an Unit Area cost for each Sub-unit; instrument testing would be
developed for each area.
• Project costs: all instrumentation costs for the project would be developed and
reported against the last Unit Area in the project. Analog Control Centers would
be sized and reported independently of digital centers. Digital Control Center
Number 10 would be sized based upon the requirements of equipment in MAIN-
100. Center Number 20 would be sized from requirements of both AREA-200 and
300; and Center Number 40 from AREA-400 requirements. The Operator Center
would be developed from group requirements, that is, those of Control Centers
10, 20, and 40.
Notes for Defining the Operator Center

The following entry field notes are helpful when defining the type of Operator Center
to serve the instrumentation requirements of subordinate digital Control Centers. A
maximum of five sets of PC OPS Data may be used.
An Operator Center is not provided in support of analog Control Centers.
Entry field Note
Operator center no. The Operator Center Reference Number is a unique number
assigned by the user to identify each digital Operator
Center. The reference number, from 01 to 99, is used to
identify the Operator Center in detailed system reports.
Conset The contract set number (CONSET) identifies which group of

contractors is performing work in this Operator Center. The
CONSET number must have been previously defined with
Contract Scope Data.
CONSET must be specified for multiple contractor type
estimates. CONSET is not applicable to prime contractor type
estimates.
Configuration The configuration consists of items affecting the design of a

Universal Operator Center.

Entry field Note
No. of operator CRT Specifies the total number of Operator CRT’s (cathode
ray tube terminals) required for the Operator Center;
includes touch screen console and operator keyboard. Micro-
electronics associated with the CRT’s provide supervisory
and control functions.
No. of indicating Specifies the total number of Indicating CRT’s required

CRT for the Operator Center. Upper tier units for indicating
only. The number specified must be less than or equal to the
number of Operator CRT’s and the sum of the Operator
CRT’s and Indicating CRT’s must be 10 or less.

Entry field Note
History module Indicates inclusion or exclusion of the history module for

trend analysis.
Engineer’s Indicates inclusion or exclusion of an engineering keyboard

keyboard: for configuration and display building.
LCN Cable Indicates inclusion or exclusion of the Local Control Network

Cable. The Cable is a pair of fiber-optic cables connecting up
to 10 Universal Operator Centers with their associated
Control Centers.
Power supply data The Power Supply to Operator Center specifies the feeder
type and source of power for this Digital Operator Center.
Unit Substation ID A value must be specified if Power Distribution Data is

present in the project or an ERROR condition will prevail.
If Power Distribution Data is not provided, the system will
generate a MAIN and UNIT substation to serve power at the
voltage(s) required by loads in this Operator Center. The
system generated UNIT substation(s) will be assigned ID=0.
The Reference Number consists of two parts:
• ID- The ID portion of the Reference Number of the stand-
alone UNIT or principle UNIT substations in the family of
UNIT substations serving power to this Operator Center.
• No. - The “NO.” portion of the Reference Number of the
subordinate Unit substation in the family of UNIT
substations serving power to this Operator Center.
See Power Distribution Data for further information.
Cable type Denotes the type of power cable to be used for this
Operator Center.
Cable placement Indicates the desired method of cable placement for

this Operator Center.
Valid entries include:
• ABOVE - Cable run above ground.
• BELOW - Cable run below grade (not available for wire-
/cable in trays); includes trenching, sandbed and backfill;
one trench allocated for four equipment item cable runs;
cable protection type is defined by the user by General
Project Data Electrical.
Distance to MCC Specifies the distance to the motor control center

serving power to this Operator Center.

Notes for Defining the Standard Control
Center
The following entry field notes are helpful when defining the standard control center.
Entry field Note
Control center no. The Control Center Reference Number is a unique number,
from 01 to 99, assigned by the user to identify each Control
Center to serve the instrumentation requirements of the
various Area or Sub-units. This is the same reference number
used in the Area Description to identify the relationship
between the Area and Control Center.

contractors is performing work in this Control Center. The
CONSET number must have been previously defined in
A Control Center Reference Number must be specified for

multiple contractor estimates. This field is not applicable for
prime contractor type estimates.
Control center type Specifies a symbol representing the types of Control Center,
devices, and general configuration.
Valid entries are:
Analog Control Center

• CONV - Conventional display.
• SEMI - Semi-graphics display.
• FULL - Full graphics display.
• NONE - Existing Control Center; costs and manpower
pertaining to all instruments, panels, and peripheral
equipment will be excluded from the estimate.
Digital Control Center

• DDCTL - Distributed digital Control Center.
Distance to OPS ctr For distributed digital Control Centers only. Specifies the
distance between this Control Center and the supervisory
Operator Center. The range is 0 to 5000 FEET [0 to 1525 M].
A redundant data digital path or “highway” will be developed
using this distance.
Design data Design allowance, as a percentage (0 to 100%) of the number

of instrumentation points, loops, devices, etc., that are
developed by the system from Volumetric Models or from
user-defined loops of instrumentation.

Entry field Note
Note: 1.If this PC CTL Data is for an analog Control Center

(type symbol = CONV, SEMI, FULL, NONE), the only
functional design allowance is that for Spares.
If for a digital Control Center, allowances apply to each of the
five categories.
Note: 2. The design allowance will be applied on a

percentage basis, that is 100% indicates a one for one basis
(exception, 100% for recorders is a one per ten basis).
Spares(%) If an analog Control Center, allowance for spares will be

delegated the sizing and selection of field junction boxes, and
pneumatic and cable bundle runs from the field junction box
to the Control Center.
If a digital Control Center, the spares allowance will be
delegated to junction box and tube and cable bundle sizing
and selection, as above, and additionally to spare boards in
either multifunction controllers or process interface units for
(a) controllers, (b) recorders, and indicators, and (c)
thermocouples.
Analog For digital Control Centers only. The design allowance for
indicators(%) analog indicator type instrumentation to be installed in the
Operator Center for this Control Center. The allowance will be
applied to develop additional analog indicators (TI, FI, etc.) in
Operator Center cabinetry based upon the number of
indicating loops serviced by the Control Center.
Redundant For digital Control Centers only. Indicate the percent of the
control(%) controllers determined by process specifications that require
redundancy. Multifunction - UAC units will be substituted for
the requested percentage of controllers.
Battery back- For digital Control Centers only. The design allowance for
up(%) battery operated back-up supply. The design allowance
provides battery backup for multifunction controller cabinets
only.
Power supply data Specifies the feeder type and source of power for this
Control Center.
Unit substation
Specifies the Reference Number of the UNIT substation
serving power to this Control Center. The Reference Number
consists of two parts, as defined by the user with Power
Distribution Data.
ID - The ID portion of the Reference Number of the stand-

alone UNIT or principle UNIT substations in the family of UNIT
substations serving power to this Control Center.

Entry field Note
No. - The “No.” portion of the Reference Number of the

subordinate UNIT substation in the family of UNIT substations
serving power to this Control Center.
Cable type
Denotes the type of power cable to be used for this Control
Center.
Cable placement
Indicates the desired method of cable placement for this
Control Center.
• ABOVE - Cable run above ground.

• BELOW - Cable run below grade (not available for
wire/cable in trays); including trenching, sandbed and
backfill, one trench allocated for four equipment item cable
runs; cable protection type is defined by the user in the
General Project Data - Electrical.
Distance to MCC
Specifies the distance to the motor control center serving
power to this Control Center

Notes for Defining the PLC Control Center
The following entry field notes are helpful when defining the PLC control center.
Entry field Note
Control center no. The Control Center Reference Number is a unique number,
from 01 to 99, assigned by the user to identify each Control
Center to serve the instrumentation requirements of the
various Unit Areas. This is the same reference number used in
the Unit Area Description to identify the relationship between
the Unit Area and Control Center.

contractors is performing work in this Control Center. The
CONSET number must have been previously defined in
A Control Center Reference Number must be specified for
multiple contractor estimates. This field is not applicable for
prime contractor type estimates.
Power supply data Specifies the feeder type and source of power for this Control
Center.
Unit substation Specifies the Reference Number of the UNIT substation serving
power to this Control Center. The Reference Number consists of
two parts, as defined by the user with Power Distribution Data.
ID - The ID portion of the Reference Number of the stand-alone
UNIT or principle UNIT substations in the family of UNIT
substations serving power to this Control Center.
No. - The “No.” portion of the Reference Number of the
subordinate UNIT substation in the family of UNIT substations
serving power to this Control Center.
Cable type Denotes the type of power cable to be used for this Control
Center.
Cable placement Indicates the desired method of cable placement for this
Control Center.
ABOVE - Cable run above ground.

BELOW - Cable run below grade (not available for wire/cable in
trays); including trenching, sandbed and backfill, one trench
allocated for four equipment item cable runs; cable protection
type is defined by the user in the General Project Data -
Electrical.
Distance to MCC Specifies the distance to the motor control center serving
power to this Control Center.

Overview of System Input Specifications
for Power Distribution
The following figure graphically displays the four levels of input specifications for
defining electrical installation bulks:
1 Project level
2 Area level
3 Component Level
4 Component Installation Level.
The electrical input specifications, which include default values that may be
overridden, take a few minutes to define for even the most detailed power
distribution network.
At the component level, process equipment, plant bulks and buildings give rise to
electrical bulks. Installation procedures are available for quoted items as well as
items from the user library of components.

Power Distribution
The Power Distribution Data specifies the configuration and size of a project’s
electrical power distribution system. The user may specify the location and size of
each transmission line, main and unit substation, the degree of redundancy, and the
type and method of placement of distribution cable.
The Power Distribution Data works in conjunction with the voltage levels defined by
the user for General Project Data and Area specifications and component
requirements within the unit.
Most users define the distribution configuration (for example, which main substation
is to feed which “downstream” unit substation) and cable placement. The system will
then size the components based upon power requirements to be fulfilled in each area
by drivers, lighting, tracing, etc. and then size unit and main substation components,
always heading “upstream,” to size the transmission line.
Mode of Supply and Distribution

The system offers the user a choice of either a US-based or UK-based mode of
electrical power supply, distribution, and associated components. The mode is
currently determined by the user’s selection of the country base location. The
following table identifies the default values and principal differences between the two
bases.
Principal Differences of Electrical Power Supply Between Country Base Location
Electrical Power Supply Items US Base UK Base
Line or feeder voltage 34.5 KV at 60 HZ 33 KV at 50 HZ
Main Substation Secondary voltage 13.8 KV 11.0 KV

(distribution and equipment voltage)
Unit Substation Secondary voltages 4160 V 3300 V

(distribution and equipment voltages) 480 V 415 V
Cable Types Wire (individual Multi-core cable

conductors) on tray on tray or in
or in conduit, or conduit, or
armored cable armored cable
Cable Gauge AWG MM2 gauge

Power Distribution Components
Power distribution components are sized and cost estimated based on information
provided with General Project Data, (project cabling and intermediate voltage
levels), the Power Distribution Data (distribution scheme), the Unit Area Data and
the list of equipment and bulk items requiring electrical power.
Figure PD-1 serves two purposes. The left side of the figure lists the major power
distribution components that are designed and reported by the system. The right
side is a schematic of a sample power distribution network.
Figure PD-1: Illustration of Power Distribution Components
The individual components constituting a typical power distribution system (detailed

data instructions follow).

Primary Feeders - Transmission Lines
Electrical power for a processing facility is either generated directly by the consumer
or transmitted to the processing facility at high voltage (generally less than 250 KV)
on overhead transmission lines. Primary feeder lines run on poles from the grid tie-in
to a dead-end structure in the main substation switchyard.
Main Substation
The main substation consists of one or more main transformers that distribute power
through switchgear to unit substations.
The main transformer reduces the voltage of the incoming power (at the
transmission line voltage) to a level at which it may be safely and economically
distributed through switchgear to:
1 Unit substation for further transformation and distribution at a lower voltage
2 Drivers in the 11-14 KV class within the process plant.
A disconnect switch isolates each main transformer from its power supply when
necessary, while the oil circuit breaker protects against abnormal conditions. Oil
circuit breakers (O.C.B.) are generally used in high voltage (over 10 KV)
applications.
The main substation switchgear protects each unit substation from damage due to
abnormal operating conditions. The main substation switchgear includes circuit
breakers and metering devices that can detect an abnormal condition and
automatically open the current-carrying circuit in which the fault occurs.
Cable from the main substation terminates at either unit substations or at motors
requiring power at the high voltage supplied by the main substation.
Unit Substations
Electrical equipment is normally not evenly dispersed throughout a process facility.

Heavy power users (pumps, compressors, etc.) usually are located within well-
defined boundaries. The substations serving these areas of high load-density are
called unit substations or load centers because they are located near the center or
the electrical load.
The transformer in the unit substation reduces the voltage of power supplied by the
main substation to the voltage required for the equipment served by this substation.
The power path consists of motor starters, power cable, and control wire. The user
can specify a maximum of three transformers in a unit substation.
The on/off switch for the motor is connected by control wire to a set of contacts in
the motor starter, which, when closed, allows power to be sent to the motor.
The motor starter provides a means of starting and stopping the motor and also
protects the motor from abnormal operating conditions.
When several motor starters are installed together in a common cabinet, they
become a motor control center (MCC). Each MCC is protected from abnormal
operating conditions by unit substation switchgear.

Redundancy
When designing an electrical distribution system, a decision must be made as to the
degree and type of redundancy to be built into the power distribution system. The
greater the degree of redundancy, the more reliable the system. The additional
equipment required for increased reliability will make the power distribution system
more expensive.
The system offers the user two options:
1 The simple radial system
2 The spot network system.
Both radial and spot systems are illustrated in Figure PD-2.
The following table lists the characteristics of each option.
Characteristics Simple Radial Spot Network
Redundancy 0% 100%
Cost Less expensive More expensive
Reliability Less reliable More reliable
Typical usage:
Spare parts On-hand Scarce
Skilled maintenance On-hand Scarce
Severity of shutdown Not critical Critical
Referring to Figure PD-2A for an illustration of a simple radial system, a single main
substation transformer is shown to distribute power to two unit substation
transformers and a 5,000 HP motor. The unit substation transformers in turn are
shown to distribute power via switchgear and MCC’s to the equipment in the
appropriate Areas.
Should a unit substation or main substation transformer fail, the equipment served
by these would be inoperative.
The spot network system has 100% redundancy. It is the most expensive and the
most reliable power distribution system. Each set of switchgear is fed by two
transformers. Either transformer is capable of handling the entire electrical load by
itself. This system is commonly used in remote locations where replacement parts
and skilled power system maintenance personnel are scarce.
Figure PD-2B is an illustration of a spot network system. Two transformers in a
single main substation are shown delivering power to two unit substations. Each unit
substation contains two transformers which in turn distribute power via switchgear
and MCC’s to the process equipment classified in the appropriate Area.
Should one transformer fail in either the main or unit substation, the companion
transformer would carry the entire load.

Figure PD-2B Schematic= Spot Network System
Some sections of a process plant are more critical to the continuous operation of the
plant than other sections. For example, a section of the plant which operates in the
batch mode may have sufficient surge capacity so that the rest of the facility would
continue operating until repairs were made if this section lost power. The user may

therefore want to specify some substations to be spot network systems and others to
be simple radial systems. Further, one user might require several main substations.
A general example showing combinations of multiple systems of simple radial and
spot networks is shown in Figure PD-3.

Usage Instructions
Power Distribution Information

The Power Distribution Data provides the means of designating each transmission
LINE, MAIN, and UNIT substation and the cable between them.
The transmission line provides power to a “family” of MAIN and UNIT substations.
If the MAIN substation provides service to one or more UNIT substations, each may
be described in detail using the input parameters in the Power Distribution Data.
A unit substation may be designated to supply power to one or more areas, and/or
to supply power at reduced voltage to another UNIT substation. In the latter case,
the higher voltage UNIT substation is termed a principle UNIT substation, providing
power to one or more subordinate unit substations. The relationship between
principle and subordinates is indicated by defining a group “ID” and individual
member “No.”, thus forming the unit substation reference number.
The Substation Reference Number is important for accumulating power usage. This
reference number points to those Unit Areas to be served by the referenced unit
substation.
All equipment in an Area, except motors driven at the distribution voltage, must be
served by the referenced UNIT substation. Should a motor require power at the
distribution voltage, than a separate power line would automatically be “drawn” from
the MAIN substation serving that unit. Should a motor require power at some voltage
not supplied by the referenced UNIT substation, then the system will make that
voltage available by:
1 Creating a new UNIT substation that draws power from the MAIN substation
serving the referenced substation, if it is of single tap type, or
2 Drawing power form another tap from the referenced substation, if it is of the
multi-tap type.
Substation Buildings
Substation buildings are not automatically generated and must be specified
separately using the Building Data.
Non-Standard Power Networks
The user may wish to incorporate a power distribution network of special design.
Practiced users use a strategy based upon one or more system power estimates,
using the system design methods in combination with user-selected power
equipment bulk items.

Figure PD-3: Illustrative Example of Multiple Main and Unit Substations with Radial
and Spot Network Systems
Unreferenced Area Requiring Power

One UNIT substation is generated to serve those Areas for which a substation
reference number was not specified.
Absence of Power Distribution Data
If no Power Distribution Data is specified, the system generates one UNIT substation
and one MAIN substation to serve the entire facility. The characteristics of the
substations and components are determined from the default values for the Power
Distribution Data.

Reporting of Results
Project estimate reports will be prepared as follows:
1 Component: Electrical materials local to a component would be reported in the
detailed listing of field materials and manpower for the component; for example,
power and signal cable, local and remote start/stop switches, indicator lights,
electrical heat tracing, lights, masts, and grounding.
2 Area: MCC (Motor Control Centers cabinetry and starters), MCC equipped space
(empty cabinetry), area lighting, lighting and heat tracing transformers and
associated panels, switchgear and cabling, ground grid, cable trays testing.
3 Project: UNIT and MAIN substation costs of transformers, switchgear, cabling,
transformer concrete pads, grounding, transmission LINE, structures, testing,
etc.; costs are reported against the last Unit Area in the project data.
Power Description Data

A series of data is used to identify a unique segment of the power distribution
network. Individual types of one or more Power Distribution Data includes the
following:
• Transmission LINE
• MAIN substation
• Stand-alone UNIT or family of UNIT substations.
The sequence of Power Distribution Data designates the top-down hierarchy of the
user’s power distribution network.
If no Power Distribution Data is specified, the system sizes and costs a MAIN
substation and UNIT substation to provide power to the various load centers
contained in the Unit Area descriptions. The characteristics of the substations and
electrical components are defined by the General Project - Electrical Data, Unit Area -
Electrical Data, and power requirements (power and supply voltage). The entire
power network is conditioned by the country base location defined for the project.

Project Definition
Project Title Data is used to convey user descriptions and specifications for the
following major items:
• Project title and document data.
• Country base location - establishes basis for design procedures, currency, and
evaluation of costs and man-hours.
• Currency data - used to enter the display costs in all reports in a currency other
than the system currency base for the country base location of
the estimate.
• Units of Measure - used to select either of two system-defined base sets of units
of measure: I-P (Inch-Pound) or METRIC. See “Units of Measure” for a complete
definition of these and other user-defined sets of units
of measure.
• Rates to be applied for evaluating costs of freight, taxes, contingencies, fee, and
special charges.
The specification of the Project Title Data should be prepared and reviewed carefully.
Special consideration should be given to this data since it controls the content and
numeric values of the entire project.
Country Base
Table T-1 illustrates the differences in style upon selection of the “country base.” The
differences are summarized in this table according to the hierarchy of the system;
the tabulation does not imply relative importance of each item.
Designation of the country base location is mandatory, as the country base defines
the style of engineering, materials selection and costs, and construction manpower
and costs. Specifically, the country base
location defines:
• Base monetary unit (which may be redefined)
• Base set of units of measure (which may be redefined)
• Base indices for system costs of material, construction, design engineering, and
construction management, important for purposes of escalating an estimate
• Base construction manpower pool: crafts, productivity, wage rates, crew mix,
work week, and shift work (which may be adjusted to suit the actual manpower
pool)
• Base of engineering: disciplines, wage rates, and expenses (which may be
adjusted to reflect the rates, productivities, etc. for the proposed scope of
engineering)
• Base of design codes and installation standards and practices, for example,
vessel design, electrical power distribution (which may be selected or adjusted).
Currency Base
The user-designated country base location implies a base monetary unit, for
example, Dollars for US, Pounds Sterling for UK, Thousand Yen for JP, Euros for EU,

and Saudi Arabian Riyals for Saudi Arabia. You can define a currency unit for the
estimate and provide a conversion for the estimate currency relative to the base
monetary unit. Once the currency base is defined by the user, all user-entered costs,
such as freight rates, ready-mix cost, wage rates, lump sum costs, and equipment or
bulk costs, are expected to be in the user-defined currency units. The system uses
the user-defined currency and conversion value to convert system-developed costs
from the system monetary base to the user-defined currency.

Table T-1: System Default Values Affected by Selection of Country Base
Primary Effect of Selected Country Base
Item Description US Base UK Base JP Base EU Base ME Base
Base monetary Unit US Dollars Pounds Thousand Yen Euros Saudi Arabian
Sterling Riyals
Base Units of Measure I-P METRIC METRIC METRIC I-P
Units of Measure revise I-P revise METRIC revise METRIC revise METRIC revise I-P
variable variable variable variable variable
System Base Indices US indices UK indices JP indices EU indices ME indices
Electrical Feeder Line 34.5KV 33KV (50HZ) 33KV (50HZ) 33KV (50HZ) 115KV (60HZ)
Voltage (and entire (60HZ)
mode of distribution)
Pressure Vessel ASME BS5500 JIS DIN ASME (Section

Design Code (Section VIII, Division
(materials and VIII, 1)
temperature/stress Division 1)
relationships)
Depth of Concrete 48 INCHES 36 INCHES 36 INCHES 36 INCHES 30 INCHES

Footings [1200 MM] [1000 MM] [1000 MM] [1000 MM] (750 MM)
Structural Steel AISC AISC AISC AISC I-P: AISC

Shapes (INCH- AISC BSI BSI Euronorm METRIC:
POUND/METRIC) Euronorm
Note 1: See Below
• Houston/ • Northwest • Tokyo, Japan • Rotterdam, • Dhahran,

Manpower pool; base
Gulf UK • 100,000 MHR Netherlands Saudi
of crafts, crew mix,
Coast • 100,000 • Union • 100,000 MHR Arabia
productivity, wage
rates • 100,000 MHR • 1 shift • Site • 100,000
MHR • Site or Nat’l • 40 hr. week Agreement MHR
• Union Agreement • 1 shift • Site
• 1 shift • 1 Shift • 40 hr. week Agreement
• 40 hr. • 40 hr. week • 1 shift
week • Bonus • 40 hr. week
Project Schedule: Adjusted Adjusted UK Adjusted JP Adjusted EU Adjusted ME

duration US MHRS MHRS MHRS MHRS MHRS
Equipment US rates UK rates and JP rates and EU rates and ME rates and
Rental/Plant rental and selection selection selection selection
rates selection

Table T-1: System Default Values Affected by Selection of Country Base
Primary Effect of Selected Country Base
Item Description US Base UK Base JP Base EU Base ME Base
Engineering US Base UK Base JP Base EU Base ME Base

Department: base of
disciplines, wage
rates, productivity ,
and expenses
Prime Contractors: From From adjusted From adjusted From adjusted From adjusted
construction adjusted UK MHRS or JP MHRS or user EU MHRS or user ME MHRS or
overheads US MHRS user entry UK entry JP indirect entry EU indirect user entry ME
or user indirect rates rates rates indirect rates
entry US
indirect
rates
Contract Fee Costs Costs reduced Costs reduced to Costs reduced to Costs reduced
Structure: based on reduced to to £, UK Thous ¥, JP €, EU indirect to SAR, ME
costs reduced to base $, US indirect rates indirect rates rates indirect rates
time indirect
rates
Power Distribution 60 HZ 50 HZ 50 HZ 50 HZ 60 HZ
MAIN distribution 13.8 KV 11KV 11KV 11KV 13.8 KV
voltage UNIT voltage 4160V 3300 V 3300 V 3300 V
Wire types wire multi-core multi-core cable multi-core cable
(trayed or cable (trayed (trayed or in (trayed or in
in conduit) or in conduit) conduit) or conduit) or
or armored or armored armored gauge armored gauge
US wire gauge in MM2) in MM2) in MM2)
gauge
Process equipment US cost UK cost JP cost models, EU cost models, ME cost

models, US models, UK JP base costs EU base costs models, ME
base costs base costs base costs
Bulks: piping, civil, US cost UK costs JP cost modes, EU cost modes, ME cost
steel, modes, US modes, UK JP type EU type modes, ME
instrumentation, type type descriptions, JP descriptions, EU type
electrical, insulation, descriptions descriptions, base costs base costs descriptions,
paint , US base UK base costs ME base costs
costs
User-specified none none none none none

supplemental cost
Note 1: If GB150 Equipment Design is selected:

° I-P: AISC
° METRIC: Chinese Structural Shapes per GB/T 11263

Cost Reporting: Currency and System
Base Indices
Costs developed by the system without assistance of user-entered rates, costs, and
so on, are evaluated at the reported values of the System Base Indices for the
designated country base. See Indexing/Escalation Data.
Escalation
Cost Reporting: Currency and Costs provided by the user in the form of a cost, cost
per unit, etc., are presumed to be in the user-defined currency and valued at a point
in time reflected by the user-specified values for the User Base Indices.
System-developed costs will be elevated from the system base to the user base
condition by index ratio and further escalated by escalation indices.
Units of Measure
The country base location, once designated by the user, implies a base set of units of
measure, for example, I-P for US, METRIC for UK, EU, JP, and ME. You can reverse
this choice, or create a hybrid unit of measure, by defining the variable to be revised,
the label for the new unit of measure, and the conversion from old to new unit of
measure. However, such redefinition could have unpredictable downstream effects;
for example, in selection of plates, wire, tubing, pipe, and so on.
Again, all user input is expected to be in the defined set of units of measure and all
reporting by the system conforms to the established set of units
of measure.
Workforce
Two of the most significant variables that account for construction cost differences
from one location to another are the productivity of field manpower and the wage
rates that prevail for each geographic area.
The system recognizes four country base locations — US, UK, JP, EU, and ME. Upon
selecting a country base location, the user obtains a base set of crafts, wage rates,
crew mixes, production rates, and so on, for field manpower consistent with the
selected country base location.
The Workforce Data can be used to change the system base wage rates, workweek,
and productivities. This input can, therefore, be an effective tool in helping the user
examine the effects of local field manpower on prospective plant sites. In addition,
modifications may be made to the system craft and crew mixes.
Multiple Workforces
In a prime contractor estimate, the system is limited to one set of wage rates,
workweek and productivities (that is, one workforce) per estimate. In a contracts

case, however, the user may define up to nine different construction workforces
(CWF) in one project. This is accomplished by developing multiple sets of wage rates
and productivities with each set identified by a workforce reference number. This
reference number is used in the Contract Definition Data to indicate which workforce
is assigned to each contractor.
Wage Rates/Productivity
There are two types of wage rate and productivity data:
• General data applicable to all crafts in the workforce
• Specific data by craft.
The general data may be used to globally set the wage rates and productivities of all
crafts, either as a percentage of some reference base or as a fixed rate. The
reference base may be either the system base rates or the rates of a previously
defined workforce. These globally assigned rates may then be modified for individual
crafts by entering specific rate data for those crafts.
Example 1:
Suppose workforce “1” is to be assigned wage rates that are 110% of the system
base rates and a productivity of 80% of the system base (the symbol “B” signifies
the system base).
Then the general data would be coded as follows:
CWF = 1
(ALL CRAFTS -% OF BASE)
BASE = B
WAGE RATE% = 110
PROD.% = 80
Example 2:
Suppose workforce “2” is to be assigned wage rates that are 105% of the rates of workforce
“1” and a productivity equal to the system base (100%). Then a second set of general data
would be added as follows:
CWF = 2
(ALL CRAFTS -% OF BASE)
BASE = 1
WAGE RATE% = 105
PROD.% = 125
This would result in wage rates that are 110 x 105/100 = 115.5% of the system
base and a productivity that is 80 x 125/100 = 100% of the system base. Obviously,
the same result could have been obtained for workforce “2” by using the system
base “B” as the referenced base, a “WAGE RATE%” equal to 115.5 and a PROD.%”
equal to 100.
Example 3:
Suppose in workforce “2” Craft X (where X is the craft code) is to have a rate of
$17.70 per hour and a productivity of 75%. Then specific craft data would be added
for workforce “2” with the follow data:
CWF = 2

(CRAFT WAGE RATES/PRODUCTIVITIES)
CRAFT CODE = X
WAGE RATE COST/MH =17.50
PROD.%= 75
Example 4:
Suppose workforce “3” is to be assigned a fixed wage rate and productivity for all
crafts of $12.00 per hour and 90%, respectively. Then a third set of general data
would be coded as follows:
CWF = 3
(ALL CRAFTS - FIXED RATES)
WAGE RATE COST/MH= 12.00
PROD.% = 90
Again, exceptions could be made to the fixed rates for workforce “3” by entering
specific data for individual crafts.
Unless the user had adjusted indirects, the wage rate used in the estimate should be
the actual unloaded cost (in the user-defined currency) per man-hour for the craft,
and should not include any fringe or burdens. Fringe benefits, burdens, and other
related construction overhead accounts are itemized and determined separately by
the system.
Data is available for deleting indirect costs from the estimate. This may be used if
the wage rates are to be considered all-inclusive rates, and separate calculation of
indirect costs is unnecessary.
The wage rates for two general crafts are itemized separately. These are craft code
98 (Helper) and craft code 99 (Foreman). These two crafts are accorded special
treatment because they appear in most crews, and their wage rates and
productivities are typically related to the crew in which they appear. Their wage rates
may be specified as either fixed rates or crew dependent rates. Their productivities,
however, are determined by the system and are a function of the crew productivity.
The user may enter one or more craft wage rates. Omitted rates are calculated by
the system based upon a set of system default values as tabulated elsewhere in the
Icarus Reference. The ultimate value used by the system is determined by:
• The degree to which the user has provided craft rates
• The user-specified value of the Escalation and User Base Indices for Construction
in the Indexing/Escalation Data.
For instance, if a user has not submitted any Workforce Data, then the values for
wage rates for all crafts are based upon the system Base Wage Rates, subject to:
• Elevation to the user base of construction (UBI/SBI)
• Escalation (EI/UBI).
If, however, the user has specified one or more craft wage rates, those rates are
taken by the system as valued at the User Base Index and subject to escalation.
Example 5:
To illustrate escalation, suppose the user entered a craft rate of 12.00 per hour and
construction indices of 1248 for escalation and 1200 for the base (see
Indexing/Escalation Data). The system considers the user rate at the user’s base

index for “ACCUM” reporting and for “SPREAD” reporting will figure an escalated rate
of 12.00 x (1248/1200) = 12.48.
It should be noted that productivity is expressed as a percentage value; that is, 100
implies a base productivity. A value of 50 implies a less effective workforce, thereby
doubling the system-calculated base man-hours. A value of 150 implies a more
effective work force, thereby obtaining man-hours at two thirds (100/150) of the
system-calculated base man-hours. For a more detailed description of the base or
norm productivity for each craft, refer to the discussion of productivity provided later
in this section.
Crew Mix Modifications

The system crew mixes may be modified using Crew Mix Data. This data enables the
transfer of man-hours from one craft to another. By manipulating crafts in this
manner, a project may be modeled as an open or a closed shop or some variation of
the two. All or a portion of the man-hours in one craft may be transferred to one or
more other crafts. Man-hours may be deleted from the estimate by transferring them
out of a craft and by not indicating a second craft to which they are assigned. A
useful example of this procedure is the removal of crane operators from the estimate
if the rental rates for cranes include operators.
Man-hours are transferred between crafts by indicating “FROM” which craft the man-
hours are removed and “TO” which craft they are added. The man-hours that will be
transferred are only those initially assigned to the craft by the system and not those
previously assigned to the craft by the user through other Crew Mix Data.
Crafts 98 and 99 (Helper and Foreman) may be assigned man-hours from any other
craft, but their man-hours may not be assigned to any other single craft. If their
man-hours are reassigned, they will be allotted to the principal crafts in each crew.
The principal crafts are indicated elsewhere in the Icarus Reference. The reason for
this special condition is that these two crafts are composite crafts that appear in
most crews, and to allow their assignment to any single other craft would distort the
consistency of many crews. For example, if man-hours were transferred from
Foreman to Pipefitters, then Pipefitters would appear incorrectly in every crew which
had contained a Foreman.
If multiple workforces are used, each workforce may be structured differently by
providing the appropriate man-hour transfers. If a workforce is defined as having
wage rates and productivities at some percentage of a previously defined workforce,
it will also use the same crew mix modifications as that workforce. This may be
changed, however, by coding new crew mix modifications for the second workforce.
Craft Names
The name of any system base craft may be replaced by entering the craft code and
the desired name. The system base craft codes and craft names are listed elsewhere
in the Icarus Reference. In addition, a new craft may be created by specifying a
name for one of the blank craft codes. If, however, a new craft is created, it must be
assigned a wage rate and productivity and it must be assigned some man-hours
from another craft. Only one set of craft names may be defined per estimate (that is,
craft names may not be changed from one workforce to another). It is not, however,
necessary for all crafts to be used by all workforces.

Reports
Wage rates and productivity values, as adjusted, develop man-hours and manpower
costs, craft by craft. Craft man-hours and costs are reported against tasks performed
in various system reports and summarized for the project in the Field Manpower
Summary.
Productivity Concepts
This section is devoted to a discussion of:
• How the system utilizes a user-specified productivity value
• The variables affecting productivity and their numeric evaluation.
The user may enter an all-crafts productivity figure and specific craft productivity.
The all-crafts productivity value, set at 100% by the system in the absence of a user
entry, will be used to establish the productivity for any and all user-omitted craft
productivities. The all-crafts productivity will not be applied in any manner to user-
specified craft productivity
User-entered craft productivities should be considered as efficiencies, and man-hours
developed by the system to perform a specific task by that craft will be adjusted
accordingly.
Example 6:
Suppose at the system’s base, six hours of Craft A are required to set a vessel. If the
productivity of Craft A were entered as 50%, then the adjusted system value would
be (100/50) x 6 = 12 hours. Thus Craft A is 50% efficient compared to the system’s
base. Similarly, a craft productivity of 200% relative to the system’s base will
indicate doubly effective craftsmen and thus half the base man-hours.
A time-proven and extremely useful method of quantifying a complex subject such
as field productivity is as follows:
• Establish a standard set of key variables and base conditions for each variable
• Evaluate, for each variable, the deviations expected for the actual conditions from
the base conditions
• Combine the identified individual deviations, thereby forming an overall
productivity relative to the base conditions.
The five key productivity variables (PV) and their associated system-base definitions
are:
PV1:
Source of Manpower Pool, sometimes identical to location of construction site.
US Base - Houston/Gulf Coast, time period 1972-1973.
UK Base - Northwest UK, 1979.
JP Base - Japan.
Evaluation of deviation for other sources - area data sources.
PV2:
Size of Project, as measured by total direct and subcontract field man-hours.
Base - Medium-size, 100,000 man-hours of field manpower.

Evaluation of deviation for other project sizes - change in productivity vs.
man-hours shown in Figure W-1.
Figure W-1: Job Size Adjustment (PV2)

PV3:
Mode of Manpower; closed or open shop.
US Base - Closed shop.
UK Base - Site or national agreement.
JP Base - Closed shop.
ME Base - Site agreement.
Evaluation of deviation - determined by construction site location and local
conditions, effect of site/national manpower agreements for the particular
project.
PV4:
Length of Work Week:
Base - 40-hour work week.
Evaluation of deviation - automatically evaluated by system based upon user
work week input on general Workforce Data, specifically through relationships
shown in Figure W-2. The system value may be offset by creating a value of PV4
sufficient to adjust the system value to the user’s desired value.

Figure W-2: Productivity Versus Work Week (PV4) - First Shift
PV5:
All Other Effects, such as general economy, work to be performed, kind of
manpower, quality of supervision, job conditions, weather, and so on. Base -
Reasonably average conditions, all other productivity variables at their base
value. Evaluations of deviations - Table W-1 and the following associated
discussion for this productivity variable.
Table W- 1: Productivity Element Table (PV5)
Productivity Element Productivity (%)

Low Average High
50 85 100 115 140
1 General Economy Prosperous Normal Hard times

Local business trend Stimulated Normal Depressed
Construction volume High Normal Low
Unemployment Low Normal High
2 Amount of work Extensive Average Limited

Site complexity Dense Average Sparse
Manual Operations Extensive Average Limited
Mechanized operations Limited Average Extensive
3 Field Manpower Pool Poor Average Good

Training Poor Average Good
Wages Low Average High
Supply Scarce Normal Surplus

Productivity Element Productivity (%)
Low Average High
50 85 100 115 140
4 Field Manpower Supervision Poor Average Good

Training Poor Average Good
Wages Low Average High
Supply Scarce Normal Surplus
5 Job Conditions Poor Average Good

Management Poor Average Good
Materials and site Unfavorable Average Favorable
Required workmanship First Rate Regular Passable
Length of operation Short Average Long
6 Weather Bad Fair Good

Precipitation Much Some Occasional
Cold Bitter Moderate Occasional
Heat Oppressive Moderate Occasional
7 Construction Equipment Poor Normal Good

Applicability Poor Normal Good
Condition Poor Fair Good
Maintenance and repairs Slow Average Quick
8 Delays Numerous Some Minimum

Job Flexibility Poor Average Good
Equipment delivery Slow Normal Prompt
Expediting Poor Average Good
The overall productivity per craft or for all crafts is developed from the product of the
individual deviations and final conversion to a percentage figure:
Overall Productivity = PV1 x PV2 x PV3 x PV4 x PV5
In the reference charts and tables mentioned, productivity variables are each
identified as a percentage deviation from the system base of 100% for that variable.
In developing the overall productivity, each deviation should be reduced to a fraction
by division by 100, and the final resulting figure appropriately rounded to a
significant value and then converted to a percentage for entry in the data.
Productivity Variable: Other Effects - PV3

The Productivity Element Table (Table W-1) enables you to determine productivity
for proposed plant facilities over a wide range of working conditions and local
restrictions. Productivity deviation is classified into three basic ranges: low, average
and high. The “low” end of the range indicates an efficiency of 50% to 85%;
“average” is indicated by an efficiency of 85% to 115%; and the “high” end of the
range is indicated by an efficiency of 115% to 140%. These percentages are based
on the amount of work a typical construction worker can be expected to perform
under a given set of conditions. Given ideal circumstances, a field crew may achieve

an approximation of 140% efficiency. In actual estimating, you should not count on
this high degree of productivity unless the operations in the project are highly
mechanized. In manual-operations such as bricklaying, pipe fitting, and insulating,
for example, the scheduling of high-range productivity may mean that the contractor
will have to push field crews for maximum production during the entire course of the
projects.
In general, the productivity represented by this class of variables is a function of two
major factors: the present national economy and the specific local conditions under
which the work is to be accomplished for the project. The first major factor (present
economy) directly affects the productivity of the individual construction worker. In
good times, when construction jobs are plentiful and manpower is scarce,
productivity usually decreases, resulting in increasing field costs. In normal times,
average productivity and costs are the rules. During depressions, recessions or
slumps in the economy, manpower becomes plentiful and more productive;
consequently, field costs decline. The Productivity Element Table (Table W-1) has
been assembled to reflect variables of major impact.
The second major factor (local conditions) affecting productivity relates more directly
to the project. It consists of the many variables that influence construction activity,
such as the character of the job site, volume of work to be performed, quantity of
available manpower, and other such unusual conditions as dense or sparse plot
plans, etc. Each of these variables is listed in the Productivity Element Table. You
should review these variables, keeping in mind both the existing and foreseeable
conditions that will affect the proposed construction project. At the same time, you
must make an evaluation of the contractor as a productive unit to determine
potential performance under a given set of circumstances. A reasonable approach to
obtain a composite value of Productivity Variable 5 (PV5) is the averaging of the
eight major categories of individual elements in Table W-1.
Example 7:
After studying a proposed project, a user arrived at the following values for
individual categories of productivity:
Item Productivity Deviation,%

Element Category
1 General economy 9
2 Amount of work 100
3 Manpower 75
4 Manpower supervision 100
5 Job conditions 110
6 Weather 90
7 Construction equipment 110
8 Delays 100
Total 765
The average value for productivity is the total divided by eight:

Productivity Variable (PV5) = 765/8 = 99.6%.
Example 8:
Consider Example 7 to be extended to a revamp. Suppose the revamp requires twice
the man-hours of a normal grassroots project. Then, a large revamp project (assume
a 90% Job Size Productivity, Figure W-1) would be figured at a compounded effect:
Productivity per Productivity Element Table x Job Size Productivity x Revamp
Productivity =.956 x.9 x.5 = 0.43 (43% productivity).
Example 9:
Should but a small portion of the project be subject to revamp, that portion may be
described as one or more Areas or Sub-areas. In this example, the man-hours would
be adjusted by 200% values for the appropriate accounts using code of account
indexing within the area. The workforce productivities would, of course, be entered
free of the revamp effect.
Work Item Concept

The work item concept, Figure W-3 relates manpower to materials installation
requirements. The user may recall the role of the Volumetric Model to generate a bill
of material types and quantities. The role of the Work Item Model is to develop crew
requirements to accomplish the task of installing each item in the bill of materials.
Thus the Work Item Model, when applied to a particular task such as placing ribber
(Figure W-4), must develop a crew mix and man-hours for each craft.
Figure W-3: Typical Civil Tasks and Work Items

Adjustment for Craft Productivity
The system contains several hundred Work Item Models with base manpower
requirements established for the particular country base location. A user-entered
craft productivity would be used to adjust the base man-hours developed by the
Work Item Models.
Adjustment for the Effective Hour
In the Work Item Models, when man-hours are assigned to crafts, consideration is
made as to the reality of work spread over a day rather than over a short time-
measured duration. Thus system-base man-hours are actual hours, based on a 42-
minute hour, reflecting the time required to initiate the complete task. Should the
project be managed under a different working time, the productivity should be
adjusted as in Figure W-5.

Figure W-5: Productivity Versus Working Minutes Per Hour
Adjustments for Work Week
The duration of the actual work week and number of shifts to be employed during
construction may be defined in the Workforce Data. Should the user’s schedule
deviate from the 40-hour, 1-shift basis for Work Item Models, the system makes an
automatic adjustment to the Work Item-developed man-hours for each craft by the
relationship illustrated in Figure W-6.

Figure W-6: Job Duration Versus Work Week
Engineering
The project scope is analyzed by the system’s engineering model to determine man-
hours and costs for design engineering, procurement and construction supervision.
The system-calculated values for engineering may be adjusted by using the
Engineering Data. This data allows input modifications/adjustments at two levels:
• An entire phase of engineering
• A particular discipline within a phase.
The system’s engineering model may be modified by specifying total man-hours and
cost or by specifying a proportional adjustment to system-calculated man-hours.
The Engineering Drawings Data may be used to modify the Basic and Detail
Engineering phases by specifying adjustments to the number and type of drawings
produced. This data may also be used to add a lump sum of engineering hours for
special drawings or specific tasks, such as small scale models, which are not
provided by the system.
Definitions of the task and work products considered for each engineering phase are
presented in Table EN-1.
Prime Contractor Engineering

The system’s Prime Contractors engineering account includes four major categories
or phases:
• Basic engineering
• Detail engineering
• Procurement
• Home office construction services.

Field supervision and project start-up are affiliated with engineering activities and
are discussed later; these are, however, considered to be construction overhead
items and are reported as contributions to the system’s construction overhead
account.
Because of the turnkey nature of the Prime Contractor mode, the Engineering
Management and Construction Management phases are inappropriate, and these
phases are excluded from Prime Contractor estimates.
Contracts - Assignment of Engineering

By use of the Contracts Description and Scope Data, each phase of engineering may
be assigned to a different contract or to the owner. Moreover, each phase may be
split between multiple engineering contracts according to unit area. In addition, the
Contracts feature allows two optional phases of supervision to be assigned:
• Engineering Management
• Construction Management
Engineering Workforce (EWF)

(When contracts have been specified, the user may create multiple engineering
workforces (EWF). The system uses the concept of an Engineering Work Force (EWF)
in order to allow the user the flexibility of specifying different adjustments (for
example, hourly rates), for different engineering contractors. Each contract can be
cross-referenced to a particular EWF (see Contract Description). An EWF is, in effect,
a description of a work force resulting from a combination of user-specified and
system default values for hourly rates, productivity, and indirect costs. Up to 9 EWF
sets may be created. An EWF set will not be used by the system unless it is
referenced by a contract that has been assigned an engineering scope of work.
It is not necessary to define multiple engineering workforces for the contracts mode;
however, if used, the EWF numbers must be referenced by all engineering contracts.
The EWF serves no purpose for estimates in the Prime Contractor mode (since only
one work force is possible).
Phase Adjustments
The user may specify both the total man-hours and cost for an entire phase,
however, if one is specified, the other is also required. When these totals have been
specified for a phase, any subsidiary data for that phase will not be used by the
system.
A percentage adjustment to an entire phase should be considered as an adjustment
to the scope of the estimate, rather than a productivity adjustment. The change will
be reflected in the quantity of work performed, for example, the drawing count and
other tasks listed in Table EN-1, with a corresponding change in man-hours.
An adjustment by phase is convenient way to allow for project complexity, (see
Table EN-2), but an adjustment by discipline, which does not affect the drawing
count, may be preferable.

The user may set the appropriate profile for payroll burdens, indirects, and
expenses. If contracts are specified, this information could also be provided as part
of the Contract Description.
Only one Engineering by Phase set of data is used per phase and EWF combination.
If global (that is, phase = *) Engineering by Phase Data are used, however,
additional Engineering by Phase data may be subsequently added to adjust individual
phases separately.
Discipline Adjustments
Adjustments by discipline will not affect the number of drawings in the estimate and
should appropriately be considered as productivity or complexity adjustments.
The user may combine phase and discipline percentage adjustments, thereby
changing both the number of drawings and the man-hours. In this case, the overall
effect is a compounding of the adjustments, since new productivity is calculated
based on the new scope of work.
Table EN-1: Engineering Accounts - Tasks and Work Products
BASIC ENGINEERING: Includes engineering and drafting for the following items:
• Project and Process Scope Definition
• Process Flow Diagram
• Heat and Material Balances
• Equipment Process Data Sheets and Requisitions
• Long-Lead Equipment Purchase/Commitment
• Equipment Lists
• Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams
• Control System Vendor Selection
• Interconnecting Piping Diagrams
• Utility Process Flow Diagrams
• Utility Balance
• Utility Piping and Instrumentation Diagrams
• Electrical One-Line Diagram

• Electrical System Distribution
• Equipment Specifications
• Job Specifications
• Overall Facilities Plot Plans
• Site Location Plot Plans

• Area Equipment Arrangements
• Fire Protection and Safety Systems
• Environmental Data
• Building and Enclosure Requirements

• Comparative Economic Evaluations
• Documentation
• Early Scheduling

DETAIL ENGINEERING - Includes engineering and drafting for the following items
Equipment
• Review Vendor Design
Piping
• Piping Arrangements
• Piping Isometrics
• Pipe Support
• Steam Tracing Drawings
• Piping Text Schedules
Instrumentation
• Instrumentation Location Drawings
• Cable Schedules
• Instrumentation Schematics & Connection Diagrams
• Instrument Loop Diagrams
• Control Room/Console Design
Electrical
• One-Line Diagrams
• Electrical Schematics
• Substation Layout Drawings
• Power Distribution
• Lighting
• Tracing
Civil
• Equipment Foundation Drawings
• Steelwork Foundation Drawings
• Area Paving Drawings
• Misc. Concrete, Supports, Etc.
• Underground Piping Drawings
• Structural Steel Plans and Elevations
• Ladder and Platform Details
• Grating Drawings
Buildings and Enclosures

• Building Arrangement Plans and Elevations
• Architectural Details
General Facility Requirements

• Facility Plot Plans
• Area Equipment Layouts
• Site Preparation Plans, Details
Other Job Requirements

• Cost Estimation
• Planning and Scheduling

• Material Takeoffs
• Equipment, Line Lists
• Project Operations and Start-up Manual
PROCUREMENT - Includes all in-country purchasing, inspection, and expediting.

International purchasing and shipping administration costs are not included.
Requisitioning and technical review are included in Basic or Detail Engineering.
ENGINEERING MANAGEMENT - Client liaison and design coordination for projects

with multiple design contractors.
HOME OFFICE CONSTRUCTION SERVICES - Includes costs for construction

department, cost control, construction planning and scheduling, industrial relations
and administration, subcontract administration, construction cost engineering, and
drafting.
FIELD OFFICE CONSTRUCTION SUPERVISION - Includes costs for project
superintendent, site engineers, subcontract coordination, planning and scheduling,
safety and medical, field engineering, field drafting, and construction accounting.
CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT - An independent, client- appointed, organization

responsible for overall construction budget and schedule monitoring, inspection for
contract and specifications compliance, subcontract coordination.
SUPPORT PERSONNEL - Includes costs for secretarial, clerical, administrative, and

accounting support in each engineering category.
INDIRECTS - Includes rent, heat, electricity, and other operating expenses not
specifically covered in other accounts in each engineering category.
PAYROLL BURDENS - Includes the following:
For US country base - mandatory contributions to vacations, holidays, workmen’s

compensation, social security, and unemployment insurance in each engineering
category.
For UK country base - mandatory contributions for National Insurance, pensions in

each engineering category.
ENGINEERING AND MISCELLANEOUS EXPENSES - Includes cost of reproduction,

communication (telephone, telex, and postage), travel, and computer services in
each engineering category.
PROJECT START-UP - Includes the construction contractor's support of plant start-

up, instrument calibration, and plant commissioning. Does not include the Owner's
costs.
MECHANICAL COMPLETION: The point in time when instrument testing, electrical

testing and piping system testing are all complete for all construction areas.
Landscaping, insulation and painting may still be unfinished.

Contracts Engineering
Detailed reports are included with the reports for each contract, where applicable,
when the Engineering report option is selected.
The Engineering Summary for each contract is part of the Contract Data Sheet.
Construction Management will not be developed by the system unless assigned to a
specific contractor (see Contract Scope - Engineering Data). The system-calculated
man-hours would then be based on the scope of work for all construction contracts
to be managed.
Table EN-2: Plant Complexity - Guidelines for Adjusting Basic and Detail
Engineering Man-hours
Suggested Percent
Adjustment to
Engineering Man-hours
Basic Detail Typical Facility Type
48 60 Storage Facilities
Gas/Oil Separation Facilities
60 70 Mining Facilities
Ore Processing Facilities
84 90 Basic Chemical Manufacturing

Ambient Temperature and Pressure Processes
100 100 Typical Petrochemical/Refinery Facilities

Municipal Sewage Treatment Facilities
Industrial Wastewater Treatment Facilities
120 125 Organic Chemical Manufacturing

Vacuum Processes
Cryogenic Processes
High Pressure/High Temperature Processes
140 150 Coal Gasification/Liquification Facilities

Specialized Polymer Production Facilities
160 175 Pharmaceutical Facilities

Specialty Food Processing Facilities
200 200 Coal Gasification/Liquification Pilot Facilities

High Temperature/High Pressure Pilot Facilities
Engineering Management will not be developed by the system unless assigned to a

specific contractor (see Contract Scope - Engineering Data) and all man-hours are
specified in the Engineering Data. The system will not develop man-hours for
Engineering Management.

The Engineering Organization
Engineering costs may be affected not only by the scope of the project and its
complexity, but also by the size and nature of the engineering organization assigned
to execute the design and procurement phases of the project.
As engineering man-hours, costs, and calendar time comprise a large proportion of
the total project effort, it is important to consider the nature of the organization(s)
assigned to perform the various phases of engineering. The system evaluates
engineering man-hours and costs based upon the user’s project scope definitions, as
if performed in-country by a large national or international engineering organization
for a large-scale project. An expanded discussion of project types and guidelines for
adjusting from a large-scale project/large contractor basis to the user’s project
requirements
follows.
Adjustments to Engineering Costs

Engineering costs may be affected not only by project size and complexity (see Table
EN-2), but also by the size of the engineering organization executing the design and
procurement phases of the project. In order to illustrate the effect of organization
size, three guideline categories are defined:
Small - 100 to 400 employees, performing smaller, local projects to less than US
$50 [PS25] million total installed cost (TIC).
Medium - 300 to 750 employees, performing fairly large national projects of $50-
500 [PS25-250] million TIC.
Large - over 600 employees, performing large and very large national or
international projects of greater than $50 [PS 25] million TIC. (The system basis
is in-country design and procurement by a large engineering contractor.)
For the purpose of estimating, the three categories generally are defined with the
following characteristics:
Small organizations, under normal marketing conditions, pay slightly less in salaries,
offer slightly less in fringe benefits, and yet have higher productivity for a number of
reasons. Work volume is typically steadier, staff turn-over lower, and time
management more effective than in larger design groups because problems are less
likely to be obscured by the volume of work and the number of people involved. Staff
are productive since their work is highly visible, projects are rarely very complex and
the effects of changes are minimized because of ease of communication within the
group. However, working conditions and limited equipment/systems may be a
drawback. Such organizations tend to use less specialists in scheduling and
estimating; instead the project manager may develop his own barcharts, while
project engineers may handle all estimating except for take-off. Overhead costs are
reduced by lower real estate and office equipment expenses. While ideally structured
for a certain project size and complexity, small organizations will usually be unable
to quickly staff larger, fast-tracked projects or meet the technical needs of complex
projects. It should be noted, however, that many larger organizations currently
maintain a specialized small projects group, with the benefits of economy and
flexibility.
Medium-sized, national engineering companies are generally very close to the large
organizations in terms of adjustments to engineering cost estimation, except in the

areas of overhead costs for maintaining under-utilized office space and key staff, and
productivity advantages derived from low staff turn-over and centralized engineering
offices. Productivities may further improve if the company tends to specialize in
certain kinds of work. Salaries will be the same or slightly less than paid by the
largest companies.
Large organizations are accustomed to maintaining excess capacity in terms of
offices and staff in order to be responsive to the client’s needs on large projects, and
this naturally carries a price reflected in overhead costs. Productivity will generally be
dependent upon project size, time constraints and project definition. The largest
projects also often cause unusually high project management and procurement costs
due to complex contracting procedures and exacting approval cycles. Note that the
system does not currently allow for worldwide procurement of equipment or
materials, nor for overseas expediting and ocean freight.
Evaluation of these effects for each project is a matter of estimating judgment.
Different engineering organizations can be characterized, phase-by-phase, as
illustrated in the following table. The use of engineering adjustments is strongly
recommended, since few other elements of a project comprise as large a proportion
of the total project costs as does engineering.
The following table demonstrates how the appropriate adjustments for different sizes
of engineering organizations may be represented to the system.
Adjustment to:
Size of Phase Discipline Adjustment Item Adjustment

Organization Range
** Operation Costs **
Small All na % rates 85-95

(on local projects) na % indirects 55-65
na % expenses 0 (incl.)
Medium All na % rates 90-100

(on national projects) na % indirects 65-75
Basic na % expenses 6-8
Detail na % expenses 6-8
Large (for worldwide Procurement na % expenses 50-100

procurement)

Adjustment to:
Size of Phase Discipline Adjustment Adjustment

Organization Item Range
**Man Hours**
Small Basic All % manhours 85-90

(on local projects) 01 % manhours 95-100
14 % manhours 0
15 % manhours 50
Detail All % manhours 80-85
01 % manhours 95-105
14 % manhours 0
15 % manhours 50
Procurement 01 % manhours 90-95
Home Office All % manhours 50-70
03 % manhours 0
04 % manhours 0
07 % manhours 0
Field Office All % manhours 60-80
13 % manhours 0
15 % manhours 0
16 % manhours 0
Medium (on national Basic All % manhours 90-100

projects) Detail All % manhours 85-95
Procurement 01 % manhours 95-100
Home Office All % manhours 85095
Field Office All % manhours 85-100
Large (for worldwide Procurement All % manhours 150-200

procurement)
General Instructions: SPAN* Users Only

Since only four activity groups have been reserved for each account in the SPAN*
network, no more than four user-specified drawing types should be added to any one
major account (piping, civil, etc.). User drawings in excess of four per account will
not be passed from the estimate into the network.
*SPAN is a Proprietary Mark of Icarus Corporation.

Construction Overhead - Prime Contractor
Basis
The information in this section applies only to estimates prepared on a prime
contractor reporting basis. If the project estimate require contracts based on
reporting, the procedures of this section are bypassed.
Construction overhead includes field manpower fringe benefits, associated burdens,
small tools, temporary facilities, field services, construction equipment rental and
miscellaneous overhead expenses. The construction overhead data can be used to
adjust any of the values within the construction overhead accounts. The user may
adjust each account by specifying the cost in the user-defined currency units or as a
percentage of the direct field manpower cost. Note that the user-defined costs are
presumed to be referenced to a time frame denoted by the User Base Construction
Index. Costs are subject to escalation.
The following table includes a description of the overhead accounts.
Description of Overhead Accounts
Project Costs
Engineering General and Administrative overhead costs for engineering

(basic, detail, procurement, engineering management, home
office construction services and construction management)
performed under this contract, as a percent or lump sum of
engineering discipline costs, payroll burdens and other indirects
and expenses. The fee for engineering performed under this
contract, as a percentage of engineering and G&A costs.
Construction General and Administrative overhead costs for construction

performed under this contact, as an Overhead & Fees percentage
or lump sum of construction costs (direct field manpower,
construction equipment rental, field supervision and other
indirects). The fee for construction performed under this
contract, as a percentage or lump sum of construction and G&A
costs.
Contingency The contingency for materials purchased under this contract, as

a percentage of cost of materials, G&A and fee.
Indirects:
Fringe Benefits Prime contractor’s contribution to vacations, holidays, sick leave,

retirement, health insurance, etc.
Burdens Prime contractor’s mandatory contributions for Federal Social

US Country Base Security (FICA), Federal Unemployment Insurance (FUI),
Workmen’s Compensation and State Unemployment Insurance
(SUI).
UK Country Base
Prime contractor’s mandatory contributions for National
Insurance.

Description of Overhead Accounts
Consumables/ Includes small tools and consumable materials.

Small Tools
Miscellaneous Includes job cleanup costs, watchmen, construction equipment

(Insurance, servicing and handling, public liability, public damage,
Safety, etc.) automobile and all-risk insurance, warehousing and
nonproductive field manpower.
Scaffolding Includes all scaffolding, except as required for assembly and/or

field erection by vendor.
Vendor Includes travel and subsistence as well as average rates for

Representatives vendor field representatives.
Field Services Includes medical, first aid, transportation, weld tests and
welding supplies.
Construction Construction rental equipment costs.

Rental
Equipment
Temporary Cost of temporary sanitary and shelter facilities, roadways,

Construction and rigging, utilities and fencing.
Utilities
Mobilization/ Cost of construction equipment handling and transport to and

Demobilization from jobsite.
Catering/ Includes all catering and accommodations for all field personnel
Accommodations at site.
Travel Includes all travel and subsistence when required.

Contracts: Description/Scope
The contracts feature provides the user with the means of:
• Describing the desired owner-contractor relationships and scopes of effort to
prevail during the course of the proposed project.
• Obtaining detailed estimates of the cost-to-construct for the project, the owner
and each contractor in turn, with each estimate reflecting the tiered nature of
contracts, scope of effort, and individual contractors’ costs of “doing business”.
In this section, the term “owner” is used to identify the “one” or “Number 01”
contract at the top of the tier of contracts. The “owner”, whether operating company
or contractor, is the focal point for payment of all contract costs relative to the
project. An operating company preparing an estimate of the cost-to-construct might
designate itself as the owner for purposes of evaluating bid package proposals and
the total cost of the project. Or, a contractor might designate itself the owner when
preparing a client bid.
Organizations providing services directly to another organization are termed
contractors, or, if indirectly through another contractor, are termed subcontractors.
Prime Contractor Basis: Default Condition (Contracts

Not Defined)
In the absence of contract descriptions the system will revert to its standard
reporting method. That is, all costs and cost structures will be on a Prime Contractor
basis. Engineering, materials, and construction will be charged to the Prime
Contractor and reported in a single summary report.
Within the Prime Contractor basis of reporting, subcontracting is limited to individual
bulk accounts for designated Unit Areas and site development, all under
nonadjustable cost structures. The contracts feature of this section relieves these
constraints.
Contract Definition - Description and Scope

Two sets of contract information must be assembled. The Contract Description Data
and the Contract Scope Data provide the means of assembling this information.
Contract Description
The contract description must be provided for each contract and is assembled in the
Contract Description Data. The contract description includes:
• Characteristic name or title, for reporting purposes
• Reference number of contract, to identify the contract and chain of responsibility
• To whom responsible, via contract reference number
• Contract overheads to be applied (G&A, fee, contingency) for -
- engineering
- materials
- construction

• Charge for handling subcontracts
• Field indirects, in lieu of the Indirect Data, see Construction Overhead - Prime
Contractor Basis Data Equipment rental
• Definition of the engineering workforce (EWF) to be used for each engineering
contract. Adjustments to wages, man-hours and overheads for the desired EWF
are made using Engineering Data.
• Definition of the construction workforce (CWF) to be used for each contract.
Adjustments to wages, productivity and crafts for the desired CWF are made in
the Workforce Data.
The second set of contract information is entered in the Contract Scope Data.
Contract Scope Data describes the scope of each contract for:
• has of engineering, which may be allocated to areas (Unit Areas):
- basic engineering
- detail engineering and procurement
- engineering management (optional)
- construction management (optional)
- start up.
• Materials and/or construction (installation) within defined areas (Unit Areas) and
covering or excluding items or tasks in the following categories as defined by the
code of accounts:
- equipment
- piping
- civil
- steel
- instrumentation
- electrical
- insulation
- paint.
Contracts - Concepts
By the very nature of contracts and this contracts feature, costs of engineering,
materials, and construction are assigned to that contact bearing the scope
responsibility. Contract Scope Data forms a contract set (CONSET) and is used to
assign scope responsibilities. The function of the CONSET is to define a framework of
contract responsibilities for engineering, materials, and construction. This framework
may be detailed down to the phase level for engineering, and to the code of account
(COA) level for materials and construction. The CONSET number which identifies this
framework may then be indicated in the following project areas to designate
responsibility:
• Unit areas
• Power Distribution items
• Process Control Centers or Operator Centers
• Site Development items (project-level only).
Multiple CONSETS would be required only where different frameworks of
responsibility exist; for instance, varying by area or groups of areas.

The responsibilities of a contract for materials purchasing and construction are
defined first for each major account, that is, equipment, piping, etc., then by COA
exception. Materials contract responsibilities are for payment for materials, but not
procurement. The responsible purchasing contractor is defined for each major
account. Construction contract responsibilities include field manpower, equipment
rental, field supervision, and home office construction services. The responsible
construction contractor is identified for each major account.
Contract exceptions are defined for materials and construction by identifying the
contract (contract number) responsibility by the code of account (COA).
Owner-contract-subcontract responsibilities are identified by the system based upon
the user’s assignment of contract numbers. The owner is always assigned contract
reference number “01”. Contractors directly responsible to the owner would be
assigned contract numbers such as “02”, “03”, etc. To identify the chain of
responsibility, a “contracted-by” reference number is required. Thus “02” is
responsible to “01”. Should a subcontractor to “02” be desired and identified as
contractor number “13”, the chain would be: “13” is responsible to “02”. These
reference numbers are assigned as part of the contract description.
Contracts - Cost Elements

Table CDS-1 illustrates the principal cost elements of a contract; each will be
discussed in turn relative to the manner of evaluation and adjustment.
Table CDS-1: Cost Components of Contract Elements
Class Expenditures
Construction
Data Type Design Eng’g @ Materials Manpower Indirects All

Procurement Subcontract
s
Engineering Basic, Detail, na na Start-up na

Procurement
Mgt,
Construction
Mgt.
G@A, Fee,
G@A, Fee, Contingency
Contingency
Purchasing na Equipment na Freight, na

and bulks Taxes
G@A, Fee, G@A, Fee, (1)

Contingency Contingency

Installation Home Office na Manpower Field na
Construction to Install Indirects,
Services Field
Supervision
G@A, Fee, G@A, Fee, G@A, Fee, (1)

Contingency Contingency Contingency
na = not applicable
(1) = Subcontract costs are allocated to each contractor based on the contract
hierarchy established.
Overheads, fee, and contingency are added to the direct costs to develop the
contract total for each category.
Contract costs are then charged to the responsible contract higher in the chain as a
subcontract with attendant handling charge.
Contract Engineering and Procurement
Each phase of contract engineering:

• Basic
• Detail (with procurement)
• Engineering management
• Construction Management
• Start-up
is considered assignable to an individual contract. Work efforts within a phase may
be split among several contracts. A contract may cover one or more phases for the
entire project. Contracts must be assigned for basic, detail, and start-up. If
construction management is not assigned, construction management will not be
included in the estimate. If engineering management is not assigned and the
required man-hours and cost have not been specified by the user, engineering
management will not be included in the estimate.
Note that the procurement effort for materials and equipment is not assigned by the
user, but follows the detail engineering assignment automatically. The procurement
effort for subcontracts is automatically assigned to the responsible contract.
Similarly, home office construction services and field office supervision are not
assigned by the user, but follow the construction assignment. However, these costs
are adjustable by the user via Engineering Data.
Discipline man-hours are evaluated by the system using engineering models for
equipment, unit bulk items, area and project bulks, and site development for the
above categories in the same manner as for Prime Contractor reporting (construction
management excluded). For contract engineering, the system uses the Engineering
Data to define the engineering workforce (EWF). An engineering contract is cross-
referenced to an EWF, and discipline and phase adjustments are made in the
Engineering Data.
Engineering discipline costs (product of man-hours x wage rate for each discipline)
are combined with user-specified or system default values for payroll burdens, office
indirects, and miscellaneous expenses. The contract total is evaluated upon
considering G&A, fee, and contingency as described later in this section as Contract
Overheads.

Materials
A materials contract consists of payment for materials, subcontracts, freight, and

taxes. General and administrative costs (G&A), fee and contingency specific to each
contract are combined with these material costs to form the contract total.
The system generates material types, quantities, and costs based upon Equipment
Models and Volumetric Models. Material costs are established by the system through
the appropriate country base of costs, adjusted for escalation and indexing and any
other material adjustments, and converted to the user’s country base.
Each contract assigned the responsibility for materials is charged with payment for
those materials.
The total material cost is reported in the contract summary as the cost of materials,
including freight and taxes, for construction. Detail reports identify the contract
responsibility for materials.
Construction Contracts
A construction contract consists of the following classes of expenditure:
• Construction:
- direct field manpower
- field supervision
- G&A, fee, contingency.
• Construction Supervision:
- home office construction services
- field supervision
- G&A, fee, contingency.
Each of these classes is described in detail below. G&A, fee and contingency are
covered below under Contract Overheads.
Direct Field Manpower

Construction - The system develops crew mix, man-hours and construction
equipment requirements from Work Item Models for equipment, unit and area bulks,
and site development. These values and user-entered man-hours are combined with
the appropriate craft wage rates to obtain manpower costs.
Construction - Field-erected Vessels

A special contracts feature may be used to change the way the system reports
manpower for field-erected storage vessels.
The system will normally include the cost of field-erection (materials and manpower)
as part of the purchased equipment cost of a field-erected storage tank. The user
may then only adjust the overall equipment cost, but will not have the opportunity to
adjust manpower (such as wages, productivity, burdens). In fact, the manpower
would be considered to be the equipment vendor’s manpower and not subject to
adjustments pertinent to the materials contractor.
However, if the user includes an installation assignment to designate a specific
contract for code of account 121 (or the equivalent new COA, the system will then

consider all field-erected storage vessels (within the area specified), as being
installed by direct manpower and consequently the particular designated contract
adjustments for manpower will be observed. Note that this must be done specifically
for the indicated COA only, not as part of a range.
In the absence of an installation assignment designating a contract for this specific
code of account, the costs for field-erection vessels would be charged as a material
cost to the contract responsible for equipment purchase.
Construction - Field Indirects

An equipment rental estimate is developed for each construction contract based upon
rental items developed from Work Item Models. In determining equipment rental
rates and rental durations, the system uses a contract duration based upon the
user’s defined schedule or a system-developed schedule. The value for contract
equipment rental is adjustable in terms of rental rates. Should the user wish to enter
a lump sum cost or take equipment rental as a fraction of manpower costs, the user-
specified value will prevail over the system-calculated figures.

Other field indirect costs such as fringe benefits, burdens, travel, consumable,
scaffolding, field services, temporary construction and utilities, and miscellaneous
items may be specified relative to direct field manpower.
Costs of vendor representatives, mobilization/demobilization, catering and
accommodation, and any special items may be specified as lump sum costs. Should
a single value for field indirect costs be entered, this value will prevail for field
indirects over any other user-specified or system-developed field indirect category
value.
Construction - Field Supervision

Field supervision is estimated for each construction contract based upon the direct
field manpower requirements and contract duration in the same manner as for Prime
Contractor reporting. Payroll burdens, indirects, and miscellaneous expenses are
evaluated and added to the supervision cost, thus arriving at the total cost for field
supervision - classed as a construction field indirect cost.
Construction - Home Office Construction Services

Home office construction services cost is estimated in the same manner as field
supervision. Man-hour requirements (tied to contract duration and field
requirements) are combined with appropriate discipline rates to develop direct
discipline costs. The payroll burdens, indirects, and miscellaneous expenses are
added to develop the total cost. Associated costs for G&A, fee, and contingency are
applied as described below.
Contract Overheads
The overheads:
• General and administrative costs (G&A)
• Fee
• Contingency
are part of the user’s contract description or are evaluated through system default
procedures. These overheads are applied and reported against costs in the following
categories:
• Design (engineering and procurement, including home office construction
services)
• Materials
• Construction.
General and administrative costs are evaluated as a percentage of direct and indirect
costs.
Contract fee percentages are calculated by the system as a function of the total cost
of the scope of effort: directs, indirects, and G&A. Figure CDS-1 and the example
below illustrate the method used by the system to develop a fee. The fee is
determined by the phase (engineering, materials, construction) and extent (total
cost) of each phase. The total cost of directs, indirects, and G&A is reduced by the
Escalation Index to a graph base. The fee percentage obtained from Figure CDS-1
using this reduced cost is applied to the phase total cost.

For example, suppose (1) a US country base is chosen and all costs are in US
Dollars, (2) the System Base Index for all costs is set and tabulated (see
Indexing/Escalation Data) at “1200,” (3) the user has indicated a requirement for
21% escalation from the base by entering 1.21 x 1200 = 1452, and (4) the system
has arrived at an escalated total cost for construction directs, indirects, and G&A of
$290,400. The system would develop a reduced total cost of $290,400/(1452) =
200. Applying this value to Figure CDS-1, the curve for construction would be used
to obtain the fee percentage (11.1% for construction) applied to the $290,400
figure. The user of another country base location and currency would use the
appropriate country base scale and currency conversion to use Figure CDS-1; the
system would perform these conversions automatically.
Contingency may be adjusted by the user on a contract basis or on a project basis.
A fee for handling other contracts is determined by the percentage of the value of
contracts handled.
The above individual fee categories are disregarded should the user enter a single
lump sum fee for the contract.
Contracts - Impact Upon Other User Input

The use of the contracts feature has a significant impact on other user input. The
interrelationships between contract definitions and other system data are described
in each section of this document so affected.

Figure CDS-1: System Calculated Fee Percentage to be Applied to Total Cost of
Directs, Indirects, and Overheads for Engineering (Curve E), Materials (Curve M),
and Construction (Curve C).
Note: Use the appropriate country base location scale and Escalation Index and
should apply the appropriate currency conversion to enter this chart. The system will
perform this calculation in normal fashion.

38 Release Notes – What’s
New V7.0-V10
37 Release Notes – What’s New V7.0-V8.4 38-1

New Features and Enhancements in V10
(All)
Icarus Evaluation Engine

Technology Description
The Icarus Evaluation Engine (Icarus Evaluation Technology) provides state-of-the-art
economic evaluation services to the entire Aspen Icarus product suite: Aspen In-Plant Cost
Estimator, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, and Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

The following have been added to Aspen Icarus Evaluation Engine V10:
2016 Cost Basis Update - Pricing Changes

The pricing basis for this release has been updated to the First Quarter 2016. The table below
summarizes an approximation of material pricing changes from the V9 EP1 version of Aspen
Economic Evaluation (i.e. 2015 pricing basis). These results were obtained by running a
general benchmark project containing a representative mix of equipment found in a gas
processing plant. In addition to pricing changes, model enhancements and defect corrections
have affected overall percentage differences. Note: this may include quantity or design
differences as various models and methods have been updated or fine-tuned based on client
feedback and defect resolution (see information provided in this document regarding defect
corrections which may cause pricing and/or installation scope changes in the V9.1 What’s
Fixed section of Economic Evaluation release notes for further information). Your results will
differ based on the overall mix of equipment, bulk items, and specified materials of
construction contained in your project. Note: there are no pricing differences between V9 and
V9 with EP1 installed – it is just the reference basis used for the comparison.
38-2 37 Release Notes – What’s New V7.0-V8.4

Notes:
* The V10 release includes the pricing update for the Japan Basis (changes noted in the table
above). The EE V10 release does not co-exist with the EE V9.1 release, thus the pricing
changes made in the other country bases in V9.1 also apply to the V10 release. Furthermore,
defect corrections made in V10 may alter pricing results in comparison to V9.1 in specific
circumstances (these are documented in the V10 Release/What’s Fixed Notes). Project
evaluations using the project benchmark described above have been made in all country bases
to compare V10 results vs. V9.1. (This excludes the Japan basis as the V10 changes were
intentional). For these benchmark projects no changes were seen in V10 results vs. V9.1 for
the US, UK, EU, and ME bases. The following notes include the changes described in V9.1 with
the changes seen for Japan in V10.
1
Starting with the V8.7.1/V8.8 release, a change was made to have control valve pricing be
consistent with bulk valve pricing (see V8.7.1/V8.8 release notes for further information on
this change). Due to this change, we have split the Instrumentation pricing changes as
depicted in the table.
• Specifically, the following items will affect pricing for each country base (detailed
descriptions and impact of these changes are documented elsewhere in this document):
o Update Substation Switchgear & Circuit Breaker Plant Bulk Weights
o Updates to surface preparation for equipment, piping, and steel
o Model updates to lap joint flanges
o Updated Cost Estimation Model for Furnaces
o Communication and Alarm Systems does not reset for multiple entries
o Incorrect Transformer and Feeder Breaker Estimation in HV Unit Substation
o Minimum LV wire size spec not working for Flow Transmitters
o Insulation Not Estimated for Crude Oil Desalter
• Electrical wire pricing for each country basis is affected by the Copper pricing specification.
The Copper pricing has been updated in the V10 release (see copper wire pricing change
below).
In general, the following system pricing changes were observed:
• Based on fabricator data, Carbon Steel plate pricing has shown the following changes:
o A515, A516, & A285C: ~ 0.2% decrease
o Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel (A179) seamless tube pricing has shown a
decrease of 7%.
o Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel (A214) welded tube pricing has decreased ~9%.
• Based on vendor data, stainless steel plate pricing has shown the following changes:
o SS304: ~9% decrease
• Based on vendor data, pricing changes for stainless steel welded tubing is as follows:
o 304W ~ 24% decrease
• Based on vendor data, pricing changes for stainless steel seamless tubing is as follows:
o 304S ~ 41% decrease
o Titanium plate and tube pricing have decreased app. 2%.
• Based on vendor data, the following changes were observed for Non-Ferrous materials:
o Hastelloy ~ -15% plate, ~ -8% tube

o Inconel ~ -17% plate, ~ -9% tube
o Monel ~ -20% plate, ~ -10% tube
• The following changes have been observed for Copper and Aluminum pricing:
o Copper ~ -18% sheet, ~-14% tube, ~ -20% wire
o Aluminum ~ 5% decrease plate & tube
• The following Rebar pricing changes have been made for each location basis:
o US Basis: ~ 19% decrease
o UK Basis: ~ 1% increase
o EU Basis: ~ 1% decrease
o JP Basis: ~ 1.4% increase
o ME Basis: ~ 10% decrease
• Ready Mix Type “B” Concrete pricing was updated in each location based on spot pricing
received:
o US Basis: ~ 7% increase
o EU Basis: ~ 2% increase
o JP Basis: ~ 1.5% increase
o ME Basis: no change from the 2015 pricing basis
• Pricing for structural steel shapes and beams have been updated accordingly:
Underground Cable Duct Plant Bulk Item Enhancements

(CQ00604710)
New fields have been added to Underground Cable Duct. The underground cable duct plant
bulk now has options to add conduit. The new cable duct height specification is applicable
when the ENVEL cable duct type is selected and by default is calculated based on size and
number of conduits specified. Refer to the documentation for additional information.
Brake Horsepower Value in Design Data Sheet for Pumps and

Compressors (CQ00697746)
For the following compressor and pump models, the brake horsepower value is now reported
in the design data sheet. The brake horsepower value will always be less than the system
calculated driver power value since the driver power value is based on standard driver power
values available.
Compressor models:
• Centrifugal air compressor with motor [EAC CENTRIF M]
• Centrifugal air compressor with turbine [EAC CENTRIF T]
• Reciprocating air compressor with motor [EAC RECIP MOTR]
• Single reciprocating air compressor - 1 stage [EAC SINGLE 1 S]
• Single reciprocating air compressor - 2 stage [EAC SINGLE 2 S]
• Centrifugal compressor - horizontal [DGC CENTRIF]

• Centrifugal - integral gear [DGC CENTRIF IG]
• Reciprocating compressor [DGC RECIP MOTR
Pump models:
• Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump [DCP CENTRIF]
• API 610 pump [DCP API 610]
• API 610 in line pump [DCP API 610 IL]
• High speed vertical in line API 610 pump [DCP HIGH SPEED]
• Standard ANSI single stage pump [DCP ANSI]
• Standard ANSI magnetic drive pump [DCP MAG DRIVE]
• Plastic ANSI single stage pump [DCP ANSI PLAST]
• Axial flow vertical pump [ECP AXIAL FLOW]
• Canned motor pump [DCP CANNED]
• General service pump [DCP GEN SERV]
• General service in line pump [DCP IN LINE]
• Vertical sump pump - turbine impeller [ECP TURBINE]
• Low consistency stock pump [ DCP PULP STOCK]
• Sanitary centrifugal pump [DCP SAN PUMP]
• Sanitary fluming pump with feeder hopper [DCP FLUME PUMP]
• Canned rotor gear pump [EGP CANNED RTR]
• Standard external gear rotary pump [EGP GEAR]
• Mechanical seal gear pump [EGP MECH SEAL]
• Diaphragm pump - TFE type [EP DIAPHRAGM]
• Reciprocating simplex pump - Steam driver [EP SIMPLEX]
• Reciprocating duplex pump - Steam driver [EP DUPLEX]
• Triplex (plunger) pump - motor driver [EP TRIPLEX]
• Reciprocating positive displacement plunger pump [EP RECIP MOTR]
• Rotary (sliding vanes) pump [EP ROTARY]
• Slurry pump [EP SLURRY]
• High density stock pump [DP HD STOCK]
• Sanitary rotary lobe pump [DP ROTARYLOBE]
• Mechanical booster vacuum pump [EVP MECH BOOST]
• Mechanical oil-sealed vacuum pump [EVP MECHANICAL]
• Water-sealed vacuum pump [EVP WATER SEAL]
What's Fixed in the Aspen Icarus Evaluation Costing

Engine V10.0
Backfilling after Below Grade Tank Construction (CQ00735277)

Backfill is now estimated for Civil Plant Bulks Below Grade and Above Grade Concrete Tanks
(BCIVBELGR TANK, BCIVABVGR TANK).
Soil excavation due to "Fall-In" (CQ00604712)

Previously, additional soil excavation due to "Fall-In" was not accounted for in backfill
calculations for the following components (BPIPRCON PIPE, BCIVRCON PIPE, BPIPYARD PIPE,
BCIVYARD PIPE, BPIPHDPE PIPE, BCIVHDPE PIPE, BPIPPIPE, BCIVPIPE, and Volumetric piping

/ Piping item bulks for equipment with the buried pipe option specified). This may effect
backfill material cost and man-hours for these components.
The "Fall-In" calculation for Tile and Envelope cable duct electrical trenching has been updated
to match the "Fall-In" calculation used in pipe trench calculations. This may effect excavation,
backfill, and compaction material cost and man-hours for tile and envelope cable duct
electrical trenching.
Compatibility Notes for V10

There are no compatibility notes listed for this release.
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator

Product Description
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator® is the state-of-the-art, fully integrated design, estimating and
scheduling system designed to help you evaluate the capital cost of process plants and mills
worldwide—quickly, accurately and early in the project life cycle.
Using as little information as your list of sized equipment and a general arrangement of your
project, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator develops a complete, detailed engineering, procurement
and construction estimate and critical path method (CPM) schedule. Because Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator automatically performs mechanical designs for equipment and bulks, using
self-contained international design, estimating, and scheduling procedures, you have the
accurate, detailed answers you need at the 3-5% stage of engineering.
With Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, you profit from early information. You can evaluate
projects during the preliminary design phase, evaluate projects during the design and
construction phases, and evaluate process/project design alternatives. You can evaluate scope
changes, bid tabs, vendor quotes, change orders, as well as offer new services with current
resources, making use of time saved by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

The following new features and enhancements were added in release V10:
New Calibration Feature and Reports

In ACCE, users can calibrate their project by comparing actual incurred material cost and
man-hour data from past projects with ACCE estimated values and creating an indexing file to
adjust the material costs and man-hours accordingly. A new ‘Calibrate’ feature has been
added to the indexing file which allows the users to calibrate material cost and man-hours at
three different levels of detail:
Level 1: Major accounts level
Level 2: Code of Accounts (COA) groups level
Level 3: Individual COA level
Using this feature, users can enter material, man-hour and location index values at any of
these levels in Excel. The data will then be saved in the indexing file which can be used to
calibrate the project. This feature can be accessed to edit the indexing file in the libraries or in
a project.

New calibration Excel reports have been added to make it easier for users to compare ACCE
estimated values to actual incurred values. Using these reports, users can directly update the
indexing in the project to calibrate the project.
For details, please see the “Indexing” topic under “Defining the Project Basis” in the online
help or the ACCE User Guide (PDF) document.
New 8 Digit External Code of Accounts File (CQ00707869)

A new 8-digit external Code of Accounts (COA) file is now included in the out-of-box
installation of Economic Evaluation products. This external COA named ‘AspenTech_8Digit’
defines and allocates detailed code of accounts for equipment, piping, civil, steel, electrical
and instrumentation bulks. Having a detailed COA enables the users to calibrate their project
at a more detailed level through indexing or detailed unit rate estimation. This file is meant to
be an example and a starting point for users to duplicate and extend to suit the needs of their
projects and in-house standards.

New OOTB sample project for modules (CQ00701907)
A new “Modular Gas Plant” project has been added to the ACCE sample projects. An example
estimate plan document has been attached to this project and can be accessed from the Tools
menu when the project is opened in ACCE. The attached estimate plan summarizes the project
and includes the contracting strategy and project WBS.
New EE password protection feature (CQ00701495)

The new ACCE password protection feature is optional and allows users to set, change, or
remove a project password via the ACCE UI File menu. The project password will be inherited
if a user performs a "Save As" on the project.
The user will be prompted for the project password when any of the following actions are
performed within the EE UI:
1. Opening a password protected project
2. Importing an IZP project file that is password protected
3. Renaming a password protected project
4. Deleting a password protected project
5. Using the password protected project as a source in a drag/drop workflow
6. Using the password protected project as a source in a merge project/area workflow
7. Opening a password protected project backup file
8. Recovering a crashed password protected project
Notes:
The project must be saved once the password is set, changed, or removed for the new action
to take effect.
Users will not be able to set, change, or remove a project password in APEA or AICE.
However, APEA and AICE will prompt the user for the password if one of the actions
described above is performed on a password protected project. This could occur if a user
opens a password protected ACCE project in either APEA or AICE.
The password protection only applies to IZP project files. Passwords will not be applied to
templates, external/library files, or specs files.
Blank passwords are not allowed. The password must be at least six characters long, have at
least one capital and one lower case letter, and contain at least one number or
punctuation character.
Important: If you send a password-protected project to customer support, you must supply
the project password.
New Standard Basis View Streamlined for Typical Estimating

Work Phases (CQ00707868)
We have added a new standard basis view that is streamlined for typical estimating work
phases. This view will align the various specifications available in the standard basis with the
typical estimating workflow phases such as general project data, cost breakdown and
calibration, specifying the design basis, specifying the contracting strategy etc. To enable this
new basis view, go to the ‘General’ tab in the ‘Preferences’ dialog and check the box labeled
“Use ‘Project Basis by Work Phase’ view”.

Bargeable Module (BRGM) Length and Width Increases
(CQ00570220)
The maximum bargeable module (BRGM) length and width has been increased from 200 FT
[60.8 M] to 230 FT [70M].

(CQ00604710)
New 'Trench excavation protection' field in Civil/Steel Specs

(CQ00604712)
Trench excavation protection protects personnel from cave-ins when the trench depth is
greater than 5 FEET [1.5 M].
The following options are available:
• 'SHLD' - Trench shielding per OSHA standards (Default)
• 'SLOP' - Trench sloping per OSHA standards
If 'SLOP' is specified, the sloping protection is only applicable to trenches with a depth greater
than 5 FEET [1.5 M] per OSHA standards. The slope depends on soil type / user specified
value and starts 5 feet from the bottom of the trench.
Handrail and Toe Plate Fields Added to the Piperack and Steel
Grate Components (CQ00601604)
A new field, 'Length handrail and toeplate' is added to the piperack form. The new field will
only be applicable for a piperack with an aircooler.
A new field, 'Include toeplate' is added to the BSTLGRATE form with Yes as default.
• If No is specified, only handrail will be estimated with the line item description, 'HANDRAIL
W/O TOE PLATE'
New fire protection equipment added to system – PIV,

Monitors, and Bollards (CQ00700586)
A new “Post indicator valve (PIV)” component has been added to the Piping Plant Bulks. PIV’s
are used to open or close the water supply to hydrants and fire protection systems. Both
ground mounted and wall mounted PIV’s are available with an optional gate valve and
concrete valve box. Refer to the documentation for additional information.
Additionally, new fire protection equipment fields have been added to the Piping Plant Bulk
component, “Sprinkler fire system (water / water+foam)”:
1. No. of combo hydrants + monitors
• Each combo unit includes a hydrant, monitor, nozzle, and hydrant mount.
2. Number of monitors-only

• Each portable monitor includes a nozzle
3. Total number of bollards
• Default: 2 bollards per hydrant
• Bollards are concrete filled steel posts and provide hydrant protection.
Note: The hydrant material cost and man hours have also been updated.
Add Drain Diameter and Drain Length Specification to

Component – Pipe General Specs (CQ00694795)
Two new fields – ‘Drain diameter’ and ‘Drain length’ have been added to the Component >
Pipe - general specs form. These fields let you change the diameter and length of the drain
lines for that component. This along with the pre-existing ‘Drain material’ input specification
provides greater flexibility in specifying drain lines at the component level.
Specify Lighting Data at Project or Area Level (CQ00494756)

Lighting data can be specified at project level as well as at area level. When the lighting data
fields are specified at the project level and left blank at the area level, the lighting fixtures,
lighting poles and subsequent lighting circuit models generated are estimated in all the areas
in the project. When the fields are specified at the area level, the lighting model generated
based on the entries is only estimated for that area.
Note: Lighting (which includes lighting fixtures, poles, receptacles and wiring) can be
excluded from an area by selecting the – Delete area lights and earth/ground option or the G
– Area earth/ground required, delete lights option from the Lights and grounding drop-down
list in the area level electrical specifications form.
UI Enhancement, Structure Tags (CQ00703844)

The UI has been enhanced to include the equipment structure tag on the List tab for the
component and area. This new feature enables users to quickly determine which equipment
has been loaded on a specific open steel structure or sub-module. The user can hide the
structure tag in the area list view by using the existing right click functionality.
Note: This feature is not available in the AICE UI.
‘Duplicate’ Button in Custom Pipe Specs Dialog (CQ00414325)

A new ‘Duplicate’ button has been added to the custom pipe specs dialog:

This button will allow the users to quickly duplicate existing spec(s) and then edit them as
needed. Before this enhancement, users would have to add a blank spec by clicking the “Add”
button and then manually enter data into the added spec. This enhancement will improve the
usability of the custom piping specs dialog. Users will be able to duplicate single or multiple
specs at a time. To duplicate the specs, select a single item by left-clicking on the column
header (e.g. ‘Item 1’) OR select multiple items but left-clicking on a column header and
dragging the mouse over adjacent columns; then click the ‘Duplicate’ button.
Add Control Valve Minimum Class to Design Basis

(CQ00485685)
The ‘Control valve minimum class’ specification has been added to Design Basis | Piping specs
| General and to the Area | Piping specs forms. This would allow users to specify the control
valve minimum class at the project level and area level. Before this enhancement, this
specification was available only at the component level.
Add Block-Bypass Configuration to Design Basis (CQ00601599)

Currently users can specify that a block-bypass be estimated for a control valve. However, the
configuration of the block-bypass (e.g. block valve type, bypass valve type and size) is
determined by the system. In V10, new fields have been added to Design basis | Piping specs
| General to allow users to change the block-bypass configuration based on three different
diameter ranges. For details see the ‘Defining the Project Basis’ chapter ACCE User Guide
(PDF) documentation.
Pipe Line Tag Field Added to Plant Bulk Pipe [BPIPPIPE] Model
(CQ00600826)
A new ‘Pipe Line tag’ input field has been added to the ‘Above grade or buried piping’
[BPIPPIPE] plant bulk item. This field, like the pipe line tag field in the installation bulk pipe
form, can be used to specify a line tag up to 36 characters long. The line tag can be used to
specify instrument sensor location or control valve location in the installation bulks.

What's Fixed
Aspen Economic Evaluation V10 includes a number of software fixes that further improve the
product. Selected fixes contained in ACCE V10 are listed below. This list is a subset of all the
corrections included in ACCE V10.
CQ Number Description
CQ00729805 Previously, we removed the warning for structural steel

field touch-up percentage in the Project Basis Paint Specs
Removed the warning
since the steel field touch-up percentage is used by default
messages for the Project
in module areas. However, we neglected to remove the
Basis equipment and pipe
warning messages for the equipment and pipe paint field
paint touch-up fields
touch-up percentages. In this version, we have removed
the warning messages for the equipment and pipe paint
touch-up fields. Additionally, we've updated the field
description notes for all the paint touch-up fields and
mentioned their applicability to module areas for field paint
touch-up.
To summarize, the area level field paint touch-up (for steel,
equipment, and pipe) specifications work as expected in
module areas. However, the project basis equipment and
pipe field paint touch-up specifications were previously
ignored unless the remote shop paint option was specified
for primer and finish coats in the corresponding project
basis equipment and pipe paint options.
CQ00736053 In previous versions, a crash could occur when selecting
multiple external hot insulation, cold insulation, or steel
Fixed custom insulation specs
files with long filenames. The crash has been fixed and long
crash
filenames can now be used for these custom external files.
CQ00740851, CQ00742000 Previously, the following shipping costs were not included
in the estimate when specified on the module area form:
Fixed module shipping costs
and piperack module field 1. Shop to barge transport. cost
work fatal error 2. Barge loadout, sea fasten. cost
3. Transport to offload loc. cost
4. Module offloading cost
5. Barge to site transport. cost
Also, the bargeable module shipping costs are now applied
to the piperack module (PRMD) if specified by the user.
In some cases, a fatal error was generated for a piperack
module after specifying field work contractors for the
‘Insulation, installation’ and/or ‘Piping connections,
installation’ fields on the modular area form in the ‘Piperack
Module Field Work’ section.
CQ00755566 In previous versions, the message box modal behavior did
not work correctly for the warning displayed by the UI
Fixed the message box modal
when duplicate area names were specified. The modal
behavior for the warning
behavior has been fixed and the duplicate area name must
displayed by the UI when
be resolved before the user can continue.
duplicate area names are
specified

CQ00756381 In previous versions, a crash occurred when a

project/scenario is open in one EE product (e.g. ACCE) and
Fixed EE crash in APEA when
simultaneously a new project/scenario with the same
creating a new
project and scenario name is created in another EE product
project/scenario with the
(e.g. APEA). The crash has been fixed and EE will stop the
same project/scenario name
process of creating a new project/scenario in this case after
currently open in ACCE
a warning dialog has been displayed to the user.
Other Selected Fixes

The table below lists other selected fixes for ACCE:
CQ00698243 Performance during Evaluation can become problematic when using

slower license servers
CQ00707828 Overall quantity basis report error
CQ00710240 Error 1326 from Economic Evaluation V9 when opening Hysys for
the first time.
CQ00729733 EE V9.1: incorrect unit in the Totals grid of Motor List excel report
CQ00729805 EE V9.1: give field touch-up for both Structure steel and
equipment, only Equipment has warning
CQ00731543 EE V9.1: some valves only have one Inlet Piping port
CQ00732394 EE V9.1: drag areas to a Report Group, several Report Groups
generated with exactly same name
CQ00732429 EE V9.1: issues with line with arrow
CQ00732457 EE V9.1: Modify piping description through Group Manager, it
reverted after View Piping Line Properties
CQ00732930 EE V10.0: Update Documentation for Bargeable Module Length and
Width
CQ00733024 EE V9.1: change Temperature units input, Approach gradient error
check issue for ECTWCOOLING WP
CQ00735277 Backfilling after Below Grade Tank Construction
CQ00736053 Custom Insulation Specs
CQ00737852 EE V10.0: Got negative SAND BED for Underground cable duct for
certain scenario
CQ00740199 error in direct cost metrics report at process equipment cost field.
This field provides the TDC instead of provide the equipment cost
therefore lang factors are not right
CQ00740851 Module shipping costs defect
CQ00741324 EEV10: Update P&ID drawings in documentation for Graphite heat
exchanger, Plate Frame heat exchanger
CQ00742000 EE V10.0: Piperack module shipping cost issue
CQ00743071 EE V 10.0 P&ID:P&ID Icon Editor crash when click show scale after
Zoom fit.

CQ00743304 EE V10.0 P&ID: P&ID crashed when right click the pipeline after
undo the split the stream
CQ00744080 EE V 10.0 :The drag and drop function shoule be disable for unit
subsatation.
CQ00746175 EE V10.0: Equipment unit cost metrics report - material cost
column has equipment total cost
CQ00749499 API Ref V9: Objects with hyphenated names have multiple entries
CQ00749505 Incorrect subtypes written for BINLINSUL PIPE hot insulation
CQ00750595 Control valve cost when using vendor supplied still appearing on
pipe line for pvc, cpvc
CQ00750817 EEV10: Drain diameter, length reported incorrectly in project data
sheet in CCP report
CQ00751526 Buried pipeline data is not written to Project Metrics report
CQ00751527 Piping quantity data is not correct in Project Metrics report if
Project contains Pipeline
CQ00752070 Spreadsheet import/export crashes during import
CQ00752976 EE V10.0: not able to drag component from Pipeline project
CQ00753256 EE V10.0: Avg Pipe Size - All Pipe is same as Avg Pipe Size - AG
Pipe in Project Metrics report
CQ00758657 Quantities Changed between V9.0 and V9.1
CQ00760371 Instrument Loop Modifications
CQ00762668 Unable to develop schedle for ACCE
CQ00764247 URE problem when previous line has a user specified item and
following line is equipment code
CQ00764655 IPA Cost and Resource Data Collection Sheet, freight does not
appear on the right side


Product Description
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator is a fully-integrated design, estimating, scheduling, cost
tracking, and reporting system for plant expansions, renovations, revamps, and retrofits.
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator is the only one of its kind that provides a complete precedence
network through an embedded interface to Primavera's Project Planner® - P3® for Windows, a
premier scheduling package for the Engineering and Construction market. Use Aspen In-Plant

Cost Estimator to reduce risk in maintenance turnaround planning and maximize the return-
on-investment (ROI) of capital expenditures.

The following are new features in Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator V10.0:

(CQ00604710)

o Each combo unit includes a hydrant, monitor, nozzle, and hydrant mount.
o Each portable monitor includes a nozzle
o Default: 2 bollards per hydrant
o Bollards are concrete filled steel posts and provide hydrant protection.
New 'Trench excavation protection' field in Civil/Steel Specs

(CQ00604712)
Trench excavation protection protects personnel from cave-ins when the trench depth is
greater than 5 FEET [1.5 M].
The following options are available:
• 'SHLD' - Trench shielding per OSHA standards (Default)
• 'SLOP' - Trench sloping per OSHA standards
If 'SLOP' is specified, the sloping protection is only applicable to trenches with a depth greater
than 5 FEET [1.5 M] per OSHA standards. The slope depends on soil type / user specified
value and starts 5 feet from the bottom of the trench.

• If No is specified, only handrail will be estimated with the line item description, 'HANDRAIL
W/O TOE PLATE'
‘Duplicate’ Button in Custom Pipe Specs Dialog (CQ00414325)

A new ‘Duplicate’ button has been added to the custom pipe specs dialog:
This button lets you quickly duplicate existing spec(s) and then edit them as needed. Before
this enhancement, you would have to add a blank spec by clicking the “Add” button and then
manually enter data into the added spec. This enhancement improves the usability of the
custom piping specs dialog. You will be able to duplicate single or multiple specs at a time.
To duplicate the specs, select a single item by left-clicking on the column header (e.g. ‘Item
1’) OR select multiple items but left-clicking on a column header and dragging the mouse over
adjacent columns; then click the ‘Duplicate’ button.
Add Control Valve Minimum Class to Design Basis

(CQ00485685)
The ‘Control valve minimum class’ specification has been added to Design Basis | Piping specs
| General and to the Area | Piping specs forms. This would allow users to specify the control
valve minimum class at the project level and area level. Before this enhancement, this
specification was available only at the component level.
Add Block-Bypass Configuration to Design Basis (CQ00601599)

Currently users can specify that a block-bypass be estimated for a control valve. However, the
configuration of the block-bypass (e.g. block valve type, bypass valve type and size) is
determined by the system. In V10, new fields have been added to Design basis | Piping specs
| General to allow users to change the block-bypass configuration based on three different
diameter ranges. For details see the ‘Defining the Project Basis’ chapter ACCE User Guide
(PDF) documentation.

(CQ00600826)
Allow Specs File Import in APEA and AICE (CQ00711075)

Creating a new project by importing a specs file is now enabled in Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer (APEA) and Aspen In-plant Cost Estimator (AICE). Previously this was allowed only in
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator (ACCE). The process of creating a new project by importing
specs file has also been updated by removing the redundant ‘specs file type’ selection dialog.
For details see the ‘Importing an Icarus 2000 Specifications File’ topic under ‘Getting Started’
in the User Guide (pdf) for the respective products.

What’s Fixed
product. Selected fixes contained in AICE V10 are listed below. This list is a subset of all the
corrections included in AICE V10.
CQ00736053 In previous versions, a crash could occur when selecting

multiple external hot insulation, cold insulation, or steel files
with long filenames. The crash has been fixed and long
filenames can now be used for these custom external files.
CQ00755566 In previous versions, the message box modal behavior did not
work correctly for the warning displayed by the UI when
duplicate area names were specified. The modal behavior has
been fixed and the duplicate area name must be resolved before
the user can continue.
CQ00756381 In previous versions, a crash occurred when a project/scenario

is open in one EE product (e.g. ACCE) and simultaneously a new
project/scenario with the same project and scenario name is
created in another EE product. The crash has been fixed and EE
will stop the process of creating a new project/scenario in this
case after a warning dialog has been displayed to the user.
CQ00756636 EE V10.0: Data in the exported excel is different from report

viewer when run updata on demand report.
CQ00756654 EE V10.0: Data in the reports viewer changes every time you
double click UOD Example.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer

Product Description
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer® provides a window into the economic viability of a
particular process or project. Aspen IPE automatically selects and creates a sized equipment
list. It then develops detailed designs with the associated capital costs and construction and
engineering man-hours. It also produces return-on-investment (ROI) reports. The equipment
list, designs, and ROI reports are all directly linked to your flowsheet and /or process
simulation output.
Most importantly, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides these detailed evaluations of
process alternatives early in the life of a project. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer enables
management to focus the engineering process on business priorities—by enabling you to
integrate business considerations with sophisticated engineering analysis. With more timely
and accurate engineering information, management can make faster, better informed, and
more confident decisions. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer enables more effective strategic
planning, faster reaction to market developments, and improved efficiency, which enhances
your competitive position.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer can work from your sized equipment list or can size
equipment from your simulator-generated heat and material balance. You can identify the
impact of your scope definition on cost and profit early, quickly, and inexpensively, thereby
eliminating the need for expensive change orders for revisions that typically arise during later
design stages.
Pumps, storage tanks, and other offsite equipment are generally disregarded during process
simulation. These and other items can be easily added to your scope definition using the
graphical interface in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.

The following are new features in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer V10.0.

(CQ00604710)
The "Air cooler loading" field must be specified on the pipe rack form.
When both fields are specified, a 'HANDRAIL' line item is added to the estimate with a
If No is specified, only handrail will be estimated with the line item description, 'HANDRAIL
W/O TOE PLATE'
Add Drain Diameter and Drain Length Specification to

Component – Pipe General Specs (CQ00694795)
Two new fields – ‘Drain diameter’ and ‘Drain length’ have been added to the Component >
Pipe - general specs form. These fields let you change the diameter and length of the drain
lines for that component. This along with the pre-existing ‘Drain material’ input specification
provides greater flexibility in specifying drain lines at the component level.


o Each combo unit includes a hydrant, monitor, nozzle, and hydrant mount.
o Each portable monitor includes a nozzle
o Default: 2 bollards per hydrant
o Bollards are concrete filled steel posts and provide hydrant protection.
UI Enhancement, Structure Tags (CQ00703844)

The UI has been enhanced to include the equipment structure tag on the List tab for the
component and area. This new feature enables users to quickly determine which equipment
has been loaded on a specific open steel structure or sub-module. The user can hide the
structure tag in the area list view by using the existing right click functionality.
Note: This feature is not available in the AICE UI.
(CQ00600826)
Enhancement for Shell & Tube Heat Exchangers Sized Using

EDR (CQ00694459)
When a simulation unit-operation is mapped to a shell & tube heat exchanger model in APEA
(or activated Economics), and the unit-op contains rigorous EDR design data, the EDR data is
used in APEA. In such cases, certain checks performed by the cost engine have been relaxed
so that warning/error messages are not generated during evaluation of the heat exchanger.
For such heat exchangers, the ‘Heat exchanger design+cost tool’ field will have the value set
to ‘E’ (EDR) during mapping and sizing.
Allow Specs File Import in APEA and AICE (CQ00711075)

Creating a new project by importing a specs file is now enabled in Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer (APEA) and Aspen In-plant Cost Estimator (AICE). Previously this was allowed only in
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator (ACCE). The process of creating a new project by importing
specs file has also been updated by removing the redundant ‘specs file type’ selection dialog.
For details see the ‘Importing an Icarus 2000 Specifications File’ topic under ‘Getting Started’
in the User Guide (pdf) for the respective products.

What's Fixed
product. Selected fixes contained in APEA V10 are listed below. This list is a subset of all the
corrections included in APEA V10.
CQ00755566 In previous versions, the message box modal behavior did not
work correctly for the warning displayed by the UI when
duplicate area names were specified. The modal behavior has
been fixed and the duplicate area name must be resolved before
the user can continue.
CQ00756381 In previous versions, a crash occurred when a project/scenario

is open in one EE product (e.g. ACCE) and simultaneously a new
project/scenario with the same project and scenario name is
created in another EE product (e.g. APEA). The crash has been
fixed and EE will stop the process of creating a new
project/scenario in this case after a warning dialog has been
displayed to the user.
CQ00703218 EE V9.0: change the default mapping of RADFRAC to sinle

trayed tower, still got DTW TOWER when mapping
CQ00697711 Activated Economics V9.0:The dropdown list can not be opened
for block petrofrac after send to APEA in A+.
CQ00749500 Activated Economics: Custom sizing dialog should be forced into
focus after clicking interactive sizing
CQ00684564 EE V9.0: APEA Default Project Directory was changed after run
activated economics
CQ00696248 Activated Economics V9.0: results difference from V8.8 for lower
Operating temperature
CQ00743978 EE V10.0: APEA crashed when create project with long name or
certain characters
CQ00395592 Decision Analyzer Cooling Water Utility will not run from
Integrated Sizing/Costing Case
CQ00703423 Add LMTD and F Correction Factor to Air Cooler interactive sizing
form

Icarus Reporter
There are no new features or enhancements added in release V10.


New Features and Enhancements in V9.1
(All)
The following have been added to Aspen Icarus Evaluation Engine V9.1:
• 2016 Pricing Update Summary
• Size specification of lap joint stub end flanges are expanded to 24"

The pricing basis for this release has been updated to the First Quarter 2016. The table below
summarizes an approximation of material pricing changes from the V9 EP1 version of Aspen
Economic Evaluation (i.e. 2015 pricing basis). These results were obtained by running a
general benchmark project containing a representative mix of equipment found in a gas
processing plant. In addition to pricing changes, model enhancements and defect corrections
have affected overall percentage differences. Note: this may include quantity or design
differences as various models and methods have been updated or fine-tuned based on client
feedback and defect resolution (see information provided in this document regarding defect
corrections which may cause pricing and/or installation scope changes in the V9.1 What’s
Fixed section of Economic Evaluation release notes for further information). Your results will
differ based on the overall mix of equipment, bulk items, and specified materials of
construction contained in your project. Note: there are no pricing differences between V9 and
V9 with EP1 installed – it is just the reference basis used for the comparison.
Percent Change from V9.1 (2016 Basis) vs. V9EP1 (2015 Basis)
Category
US UK JP EU ME
Equipment -7.6% -6.6% * -7.5% -10.1%

Piping -4.1% 0.8% * 0.2% -6.9%
Civil -0.8% 0.3% -0.3% 0.8% 0.8%
Steel -18.2% 0.9% * -1.0% -4.7%
Control
Valves -6.8% 0.5% * 0.3% -8.7%
Instrumentation
(see note 1) Instruments -5.2% 0.4% * -0.8% 3.4%
Overrall -5.6% 0.4% * -0.2% -2.4%
Electrical -1.1% -2.1% * -3.0% 4.9%
Insulation 0.1% -2.3% * -1.1% -0.8%
Paint 0.0% -1.3% -2.7% 0.2% -0.1%
Notes:
* Data was not available to perform a complete pricing update for the Japan country
base. However, there will be pricing changes in the Japan basis due to model
corrections and system enhancements. The civil difference shown in the table is due
to CQ00606798 (Update Substation Switchgear & Circuit Breaker Plant Bulk
Weights) which affects all country bases. The paint difference shown in the table is
due to CQ00694808 (Surface preparation for equipment, piping, and steel) which
affects any project where brush paint application method is specified (brush paint is
the default method for the Japanese basis). These are documented elsewhere in the
What’s New content.

1 Starting with the V8.7.1/V8.8 release, a change was made to have control valve
pricing be consistent with bulk valve pricing (see V8.7.1/V8.8 release notes for
further information on this change). Due to this change, we have split the
Instrumentation pricing changes as depicted in the table.
• Specifically, the following items will effect pricing for each country base (detailed
descriptions and impact of these changes are documented elsewhere in this
document):
o Update Substation Switchgear & Circuit Breaker Plant Bulk Weights
o Updates to surface preparation for equipment, piping, and steel
o Model updates to lap joint flanges
o Updated Cost Estimation Model for Furnaces
o Communication and Alarm Systems does not reset for multiple entries
o Incorrect Transformer and Feeder Breaker Estimation in HV Unit
Substation
o Minimum LV wire size spec not working for Flow Transmitters
o Insulation Not Estimated for Crude Oil Desalter
• Electrical wire pricing for each country basis is affected by the Copper pricing
specification. The Copper pricing has been updated in the V9.1 release (excludes
Japan basis, see copper wire pricing change below).
o A515, A516, & A285C: ~ 0.2% decrease
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel (A179) seamless tube pricing has shown a
decrease of 7%.
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel (A214) welded tube pricing has decreased ~9%.
• Based on vendor data, pricing changes for stainless steel seamless tubing is as
follows:
• Titanium plate and tube pricing have decreased app. 2%.
• Based on vendor data, the following changes were observed for Non-Ferrous
materials:
o Hastelloy ~ -15% plate, ~ -8% tube
o Inconel ~ -17% plate, ~ -9% tube
o Monel ~ -20% plate, ~ -10% tube

o JP Basis: NA
o ME Basis: ~ 10% decrease
• Ready Mix Type “B” Concrete pricing was updated in each location based on spot
pricing received:
o JP Basis: NA
Approximate Structural Steel Pricing Changes

Type US UK JP EU ME
Ladders, Handrails, Grating
-12% 1% NA -1% 3%
(avg.)
Stairways (avg.) 2% 1% NA -1% -1%
Platforms (avg.) 2% 1% NA -1% -6%
Steel Members (avg.) -23% 1% NA -1% -13%
Allow lap-joint flanges up to 24 inch [600 mm] diameter

Size specification of lap joint stub end flanges are expanded to 24" [600 mm].
Compatibility Notes for V9.1

What’s Fixed in V9.1

Aspen Economic Evaluation V9.1 includes a number of software fixes that further improve the
product. Selected fixes contained in APEA, ACCE and AICE V9.1 are listed under their
corresponding applications below. This list is a subset of all the corrections included in V9.1.

(CQ00727236) Insulation Not Estimated for Crude Oil Desalter
In previous releases there was a defect due to which equipment
insulation was not estimated for the Crude Oil Desalter [DHT DESALTER]
process equipment and associated piping, even when the operating
temperature was greater than the minimum temperature for hot
insulation. This defect has been fixed. Also included in this fix was a
correction in the insulation thickness calculations. Due to this, in certain
edge cases, users may see a change in the calculated thickness for
process equipment and piping.
(CQ00527699) Updated Cost Estimation Model for Furnaces
There was a defect in the cost estimation model for furnaces due to
which for the same duty, at a certain temperature value, increasing the
design temperature would reduce the estimated cost. This defect has
been fixed. Due to this fix, users may see a significant difference in the
estimated equipment cost for furnaces compared to previous versions.
This affects all furnace models - EFU BOX, EFU HEATER, EFU
PYROLYSIS, EFU REFORMER, and EFU VERTICAL.
(CQ00694808) Surface preparation for equipment, piping, and steel
Material cost for brush cleaning has been removed from piping and
equipment surface prep line items.
Material cost for sand blasting has been added to steel line items. The
default steel surface prep area has been changed from 100% to 10%.
Equipment rental for steel sand blasting has been updated.
Some changes have been made to equipment surface prep line items.
Previously, only "BRUSH CLEANING" line items were generated. Now,
either sand blasting or brush cleaning will be generated depending on
the paint application method in the paint specs. This applies to most
vessels, towers, heat exchangers etc.
(CQ00711531) Open Steel Structure fatal error, "Quantity exceeds system limits"
An uninitialized variable was used to check if a beam or column section
was available for design by FEM analysis. If the maximum beam or
column size in the system was inadequate to support the loads, the
variable was not updated. Subsequent calculations based on the
uninitialized variable caused the fatal error to be generated. This issue
has been fixed.

Product Description
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator® is the state-of-the-art, fully integrated design, estimating and
scheduling system designed to help you evaluate the capital cost of process plants and mills
worldwide—quickly, accurately and early in the project life cycle.
Using as little information as your list of sized equipment and a general arrangement of your
project, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator develops a complete, detailed engineering, procurement
and construction estimate and critical path method (CPM) schedule. Because Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator automatically performs mechanical designs for equipment and bulks, using
self-contained international design, estimating, and scheduling procedures, you have the
accurate, detailed answers you need at the 3-5% stage of engineering.
With Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, you profit from early information. You can evaluate
projects during the preliminary design phase, evaluate projects during the design and
construction phases, and evaluate process/project design alternatives. You can evaluate scope
changes, bid tabs, vendor quotes, change orders, as well as offer new services with current
resources, making use of time saved by Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.

The following new features and enhancements were added in release V9.1:
Round fiber formed foundation type added for steel pipe racks
Round fiber formed pier foundations are occasionally used to support steel piperacks instead
of spread footings or deep pile foundations. For this enhancement, we have added a
foundation type field to the piperack form that lets you select between spread footing
foundations and round tube formed pier foundations. (TYP vs. PIER) In addition, several pier
foundation size fields are added to the sizing fields that let you specify pier foundation
geometry in place of system calculated values. The new fields are only applicable when the
pipe rack type is specified as 'STEEL' which is the default pipe rack type for Plant Bulks, Civil
and Steel, Pipe rack. The new fields are also applicable to 'STEEL' type pipe rack modules
(PRMD).
Above: New pier definition fields on the piperack component form.
Larger pile diameters have been added for Auger cast piles (AUGR), Franki
piles (FRNK), and Poured concrete piles (POUR)
Larger pile diameters have been added for Auger cast piles (AUGR), Franki piles (FRNK), and
Poured concrete piles (POUR). These pile types now include 30 IN [750 MM], 36 IN [900 MM],
and 42 IN [1050 MM] diameters.
The Site Development, Drilled and cast-in-place concrete piles (SD POURED) component has
been updated to include these new pile diameters.
As discussed in the documentation for Vertical Tanks(VT)-LNG, if piles are required (based on
soil strength) and the cost engine is called from either Aspen Process Economic Analyzer or
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator, the system designs Auger Cast piles. Since larger diameter
Auger cast piles are now available, this may effect the size, spacing, and number of piles used
to support the LNG tank and as a result may change the cost of the LNG tank in AIPE and
APEA.
LED lighting fixtures added to ‘Lights and Outlets’ plant bulk and area level
specification.
LED fixtures are added as follows:
• LED - LED vapor proof, less mounting module
• LEDP - LED vapor proof, pendant mount
• LEDC - LED vapor proof, ceiling mount
• LEDW - LED vapor proof, wall mount
• LEDS - LED vapor proof, 25 deg. stanchion mount
• (20 - 400 W; Default *46*)

Vessel electric tracing enabled for Agitated Tank Components
Vessel Electrical Tracing is added for the Agitated Tank-Enclosed and Agitated Tank-Open Top
components.
Add 34.5 KV/33 KV options to power cable and bus duct plant bulks.
Power Cable and Bus Duct Plant Bulks now have 33 kV and 35 kV rated voltage options.
Update Substation Switchgear & Circuit Breaker Plant Bulk Weights

The weights of the circuit breakers estimated in the substations and the circuit breaker plant
bulk were quite high. The weight data has been updated and a significant change will be
observed compared to previous versions as shown below. The weights of the switchgear
cabinets have also been added and will now be included in the APROJID file.
V 9.0
Total switchgear weight: 128,885 lbs.
V 9.1
Total switchgear weight: 13,371 lbs.

In addition, the change in switchgear weight will affect the civil work/foundation quantities in
the substation as shown below, and subsequently the costs estimated.
V 9.0

V 9.1


product. Selected fixes contained in ACCE V9.1 are listed below. This list is a subset of all the
corrections included in ACCE V9.1 and includes fixes made to the Evaluation Engine and
System Framework.
(CQ00686501) Dragging/dropping areas or copying area specs to a new Report Group
should inherit the new RG's ISBL/OSBL setting
When you copy or drag/drop an area from a Report Group to a new Report
Group, the ISBL/OSBL settings are maintained (i.e. same as the source
Report Group) and thus do not inherit these settings from the target Report
Group. This means you can have some areas that have "I" specified but
are in Report Groups that have "O" specified (and vice versa). This setting
is only used in the IPA reports and may create inconsistencies in the results
if the user dragged/dropped (or copied) a lot of areas. The current way of
addressing this is to reset the RG ISBL/OSBL setting after all the area
moves and/or creations have been made. This issue has been fixed.
(CQ00728546) Piperack Module fatal error, "Invalid Contractor Number”
The fatal error was generated for Piperack Modules when an error existed in
the piperack component input specifications. Examples of invalid input
specifications include: Specifying a piperack item count greater than one in
a modular piperack area; Specifying a cast-in-place or precast concrete
piperack in a modular piperack area. This issue has been fixed.
Additionally, specifying a piperack height to first level of 4 feet [1.2 m]
produced an input error and caused the fatal error to be generated.
Although this specification is valid, a compiler bug caused the input error.
This issue has been fixed.
(CQ00702059) Piperack calculated values differ for the Area Steel and the Plant Bulk
Component
The default value in Area steel for number of pipe rack levels was not 1 as
claimed on the input field. The default value is the same as the Plant Bulk
Steel piperack and is a calculated value. The default value of 1 for number
of pipe rack levels has been removed from the Area steel form.

(CQ00727425) Incorrect # of reuses shown in Project Data Sheet for steel formwork
In the Project Data Sheet section of the ccp report, the # of reuses for steel
formwork was 1. This is really not accurate as the # of reuses is already
priced into steel formwork and is consistent with the typical wood formwork
default reuse # for each location basis (i.e. US/ME: 2.5; UK/EU: 3; JP: 4).
The correct reuse # for steel formwork is now shown in the Project Data
Sheet section of the ccp report.
(CQ00709701) Communication and Alarm Systems does not reset for multiple entries
In previous versions, if you add one Communication and Alarm plant bulk to
an area you get the correct quantities during project evaluation. Each
succeeding Communication and Alarm plant bulk however, will use
quantities from the previous Communication and Alarm plant bulk if not
overridden. This has been fixed in V9.1 to give the correct items for each
Communication and Alarm plant bulk estimated.
(CQ00706484) Copper price does not get correctly adjusted to the new location currency
when projects are relocated
In previous versions, when using decision analyzer to relocate a project to a
new country, the copper cost for the initial project location (i.e. one of the 5
system basis locations) was not being properly converted to the currency in
the new location. In V9.1, when a project is relocated, the copper cost in
the currency of the new location will now be displayed in the ‘Copper cost’
field in the project Electrical specs form and location indexing does not
apply to this value.
In addition, for V9.1 the 'Material user base index' specified in the General
Escalation form, is not applied to the user specified copper cost value but is
applied to default system value (if the copper cost field is left blank). The
'Material escalation index' is however, applied to both the user specified and
default system copper cost values.
(CQ00708579) Set Self-regulating cable and M10, got TRACER CABLE 20P
In previous versions, when the Electrical trace cable category specified
doesn't match the cable type specified e.g. MI cable category selected along
with 3A self-regulating cable type, an error message is generated when the
component is evaluated to alert user that a wrong cable type has been
selected and the system uses a different cable type matching the cable
category specified.
For V9.1, the Electrical trace cable type field now has precedence over the
Electrical trace cable category field. The cable type specified by the user is
what is estimated; if there is a conflict with the cable category field, a
warning message is generated to alert the user that the tracing cable
category will be ignored.
(CQ00685550) Incorrect Transformer and Feeder Breaker Estimation in HV Unit Substation
In previous versions, the incorrect capacity of transformers and quantity of
feeder breakers was being estimated in a HV unit substation (supply voltage
of 34.5/33 kV) and in the subsequent unit and sub-unit substations linked
to it. This has been fixed for V9.1: the quantities of feeder breakers are now
being correctly estimated and the transformer estimation workflow in the
system has been updated. Some old projects opened in V9.1 may therefore
result in a change in transformer capacities and feeder breaker quantities in
the substations.
(CQ00710438) Minimum LV wire size spec not working for Flow Transmitters
In previous versions, the low voltage minimum wire size specification was
not being applied to the flow transmitter instruments. This has been fixed
for V9.1 such that the Minimum wire size input in the project level electrical
specs will now impact the flow transmitters and also the LV Electrical
Tracing Cable (for MI Cable and from Elec. Tracing Panel Board to the MCC).
CQ00527699 Heater (Box type process furnace) cost estimation: Lower cost at higher
design temperature
CQ00685550 Incorrect Transformer and Feeder Breaker Estimation in Unit Substation
When 34.5 kV Supply Voltage is Specified
CQ00693653 Negative number being produced when running reports
CQ00694808 Question on Material Cost for BRUSH CLEANING (SURFACE PREP - PIPING)

CQ00695843 V9 PID Editor: show scale become unchecked after Preview and then Esc
CQ00696056 V9 PID Editor: left mouse click on select one elements to hit Delete, other
element is highlighted
CQ00697230 V9 PID Editor: double click on the arrow of loop doesn't work when the line
is on top of block icon
CQ00697927 V9 PID Editor: select Cloud before Lock Flowsheet, it still can be drawn
CQ00698082 V9 PID Editor: group select with cloud, press on cloud boundary to move
doesn't work
CQ00698084 V9 PID Editor: group select with cloud/annotation to move, cloud and
annotation are still highlighted
CQ00698177 V9 PID Editor: Delete keyword in the search function, the line type and
custom equipment turn gray.
CQ00698422 V9 PID Editor: ports left in the drawing after undo to remove all lines and
block
CQ00698906 V9 PID Editor: the Undo/Redo dropdown option can be selected when Lock
Flowsheet is checked
CQ00698925 V9 PID Editor: with Icon view, the second sub categores have confusing
names
CQ00699759 V9 PID Editor: RMB menu didn't go away when click Close in the P&ID
Editor
CQ00699802 V9 PID Editor: edit icon and save, then a piping line drawing changed
CQ00699806 V9 PID Editor: not able to catch some bubble/loop line drawn on top of
Block
CQ00699836 V9 PID Editor: bubble number dislocated when Print Preview with multiple
Pages
CQ00699899 Incorrect Motor Type on Equipment Design Data Sheet for Motors Greater
than 300 HP (224 kW)
CQ00699988 V9 PID Editor: not able to move connection of some lines under certain
circumstance
CQ00700064 Piping material in COA 311 is incorrect for X70S and X70W pipe materials
CQ00700233 V9 PID Editor: Significant performance issue if you zoom area and select a
very small area.
CQ00700270 Units of Measure conversion help page is missing
CQ00700490 V9 PID Editor: delete all items then undo, save and close, crash when
reopen the file
CQ00700590 V9 PID Editor: layout of Jacketed VT continuous FULL 606J is confusing
CQ00700795 V9 PID Editor: bubble wasn't connected to the block in the drawing
CQ00700954 Click F1 in the Aspen Economic Evaluation V9: Spreasheet Import /Export
dialog will launch IE help
CQ00702059 Pipe rack calculated values differ from the Area Civil Steel and the Plant
Bulk Component.
CQ00702865 HTML5: Decision Analyzer figure need to be updated for topic: Analyzer
Relocation Module (ARM)
CQ00703210 Enter New Lines in Spreasheet View Via Copy/Paste, Rename, and then
Copy/Paste to add an Extra Line Overwrites Changed Name
CQ00703211 Copy paste equipment item in spreasheet view deletes any previously
defined specs
CQ00703556 Check Change Plant Location to then check Scale by Area got warning to
select a plant location
CQ00704102 HTML5: got several empty topic when search ACCE help with: index
CQ00704104 Can we display the outside project COA file name for Indexing Status not
*****
CQ00704682 V9 PID Editor: Context menu options for line with branch/join connection
CQ00704751 Warning about NON-STANDARD POWER SPECIFIED MOTOR WILL BE
PRICED AS NEXT LARGER SIZE
CQ00705165 ACCE crash without hyphen for tag name.

CQ00705391 Got quite large Stiffening ring spacing for Agitator tank -enclosed, jacketed
with EU country base
CQ00705424 V9 PID Editor: PID Cosmetic changes to drawing are not retained after
saving/reopening the drawing
CQ00706156 Got same unit manhours for SURFACE PREP of STEEL as
PIPING&EQUIPMENT
CQ00706610 V9 PID Editor: Not able to move the piping line segment correctly
CQ00706679 Error in metric fitspec files - diameters are in ip instead of metric
CQ00706948 DIN pipe and flange class error specification.
CQ00707121 V9 PID Editor: not able to select Cloud/arrow/ annotation if it is drawn on
top of model icon
CQ00707127 V9 PID Editor: with German OS, not able to get the file when run Microsoft
Print to PDF for P&ID
CQ00708521 Equipment item delivery times missing from Bar Chart schedule for multi-
diameter columns
CQ00708801 Not able to evaluate the project after run Decision Analyzer
CQ00709136 User entered copper value wasn't used to convert to the relocated location
currency
CQ00709277 Got error when only specify Feeder breaker rating for substation
CQ00709353 Typo in Reference Guide: Ch 31 pg 18 Drawing #9 Plot Plants should be
Plot Plans
CQ00709419 Got 0 cost for breaker of 13.8 KV*2000A
CQ00709624 V9 PID Editor: can't click Undo if donot release the menu selection first
CQ00709625 V9 PID Editor: got extra angle when drawing a line with length of x >
length of y axis
CQ00709701 Communication and Alarm Systems does not reset for multiple entries
CQ00710053 V9 PID Editor: load P&ID, re-number loop, Undo then Redo, got error when
evaluate the item
CQ00710438 Minimum LV wire size spec not working for Flow Transmitters
CQ00710905 Replace 'icObjectClass' with 'icObjectClassType' in Icarus API guide
CQ00711351 V9 PID Editor: documentation contains screenshot from old PID editor
CQ00711531 Got fatal error QUANTITY EXCEEDS SYSTEM LIMITS
CQ00715521 HTML5: title shows as "Adding or Editing P&ID Labels" in the returned
results when search in the HTML help
CQ00715671 V9 PID Editor: user created icon can't be used when the Label positon
wasn't placed in the center
CQ00715689 V9 PID Editor: Delete Custom equipment then left click on drawing area, it
still can be drawn
CQ00715999 V9 PID Editor: Re-number Piping line then Undo, got blank Description and
Fitting
CQ00716001 V9 PID Editor: Maximize P&ID Editor, Zoom Fit then Zoom Previous,
disaplay issue
CQ00724475 Question about Power Distribution changed during run Decison Analyzer
CQ00724761 V9 PID Editor: Question about select Provide item and installation for P&ID
Sensor
CQ00724812 Got "AspenTech Support Center has moved" dialog when click See Also
video link
CQ00726273 Question about the Power factor influence over transformer cost
CQ00727236 Crude Oil Desalter - No Insulation estimated
CQ00727303 HTML5: Link doesn't work in the Area Specifications help topic
CQ00727425 Incorrect # of reuses shown in Project Data Sheet for steel formwork
CQ00727505 Cannot select fittings external file from project basis view
CQ00728546 ACCE gives "Invalid Contractor Number. Contact Icarus for assistance"
error message

CQ00728878 V9 PID Editor: Drag items outside the drawing area then drop back the
center, got some red lines/dots for ports
CQ00729112 Pipe Racks: MIN of Height to 1st level is incorrect in the help
CQ00729113 Error didn't show in the scan message when select PRECAST for tall pipe
rack
CQ00729222 Add 355 KW as a Standard Motor Size in Aspen Icarus Reference Guide
CQ00729548 V9 PID Editor: Select all items in the P&ID drawing, left click on the block to
move, layout got messed up
CQ00729935 V9 PID Editor: Select all items in the P&ID drawing, left click on loop
number to move, got dislocated loop numbers
CQ00730445 V9 PID Editor: ports dislocated after certain procedure
CQ00730459 V9 PID Editor: Double click RMB on piping/loop line will bring Properties
dialog with RMB menu on top of it
CQ00730539 Spreadsheet does not check for maximum number of Bulk Additions
CQ00730886 In the IPA Detail Cost report, incorrect average pipe diameter, shop pipe
fabrication percentage and percent alloy pipe is being shown
CQ00731440 In ACCE, after using the N option, multiple contractor reports are missing in
interactive reporter.

Product Description
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator is a fully-integrated design, estimating, scheduling, cost
tracking, and reporting system for plant expansions, renovations, revamps, and retrofits.
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator is the only one of its kind that provides a complete precedence
network through an embedded interface to Primavera's Project Planner® - P3® for Windows, a
premier scheduling package for the Engineering and Construction market. Use Aspen In-Plant
Cost Estimator to reduce risk in maintenance turnaround planning and maximize the return-
on-investment (ROI) of capital expenditures.

There are no new items for V9.1.


product
This section describes some software fixes to Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator V9.1.

(CQ00709227) LNG Tank costing bug
If piles are required (based on soil strength) for the DVT LNG TANK and
the cost engine is called from either Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
(APEA) or Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator (AICE), the system determines
the piling parameters and uses Auger cast piles. The costing bug is due
to the piling cost and only occurs in APEA and AICE. Although the
number of piles, required pile capacity, and required spacing is
determined correctly, the Auger cast pile size used for costing is 12
inches [300 mm]. As a result, the piling costs are underestimated for
the DVT LNG TANK component in APEA and AICE.
The correct pile size is now used for piling costs. The pile size has been
added to the piling parameters reported in the APEA and AICE warning
message. Also, the maximum compressive capacity used for Auger cast
pile sizing has been updated and is based on the new pile sizes added in
CQ00539183. Previously the largest AUGR pile size was 24 inches [600
mm] (250 Tons [226 MT]). Now the largest AUGR pile size is 42 inches
[1050 mm] (750 Tons [680 MT]). The larger pile sizes will be used as
necessary when the required capacity exceeds 250 Tons at a 6 foot
spacing.
CQ00702377 COA not correctly reported for CP (Cap) fitting on PVC, CPVC and FRP
materials
CQ00705454 The miscellaneous concrete allowance feature doesn't work
Miscellaneous Concrete Allowance (Details)
Due to changes made in CQ00325192, the miscellaneous concrete
allowance field in the AICE project civil/steel specs has no effect on the
estimated concrete bulks. Going forward, the 'Accumulated'
miscellaneous concrete allowance method will be used in AICE and misc
concrete item bulks will be added to each area. We are minimizing the
impact on existing projects by changing the default value for the
miscellaneous concrete allowance field in AICE from 15% to 0%. The
miscellaneous concrete allowance % is applied to the total concrete qty
in the area. By default, concrete bulks are not generated for components
in AICE. Concrete bulks are automatically generated for components
with 'V' specified in the Civil requirement field on the Civil bulk items
form.
CQ00706291 Got warning message when evaluation pipe in AIPCE: NO DEFAULT
COMPONENT INSULATION AVAILABLE, PLEASE PROVIDE COMPLETE
SPECIFICATIONS

Product Description
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer® provides a window into the economic viability of a
particular process or project. Aspen IPE automatically selects and creates a sized equipment
list. It then develops detailed designs with the associated capital costs and construction and
engineering man-hours. It also produces return-on-investment (ROI) reports. The equipment
list, designs, and ROI reports are all directly linked to your flowsheet and /or process
simulation output.
Most importantly, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer provides these detailed evaluations of
process alternatives early in the life of a project. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer enables
management to focus the engineering process on business priorities—by enabling you to
integrate business considerations with sophisticated engineering analysis. With more timely
and accurate engineering information, management can make faster, better informed, and
more confident decisions. Aspen Process Economic Analyzer enables more effective strategic
planning, faster reaction to market developments, and improved efficiency, which enhances
your competitive position.

Aspen Process Economic Analyzer can work from your sized equipment list or can size
equipment from your simulator-generated heat and material balance. You can identify the
impact of your scope definition on cost and profit early, quickly, and inexpensively, thereby
eliminating the need for expensive change orders for revisions that typically arise during later
design stages.
Pumps, storage tanks, and other offsite equipment are generally disregarded during process
simulation. These and other items can be easily added to your scope definition using the
graphical interface in Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.

There are no new features for Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.


product. Selected fixes contained in APEA V9.1 are listed below. This list is a subset of all the
corrections included in APEA V9.1.
This section describes the software fixes to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer V9.1:
(CQ00709227) LNG Tank costing bug
If piles are required (based on soil strength) for the DVT LNG TANK and
the cost engine is called from either Aspen Process Economic Analyzer
(APEA) or Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator (AICE), the system determines
the piling parameters and uses Auger cast piles. The costing bug is due
to the piling cost and only occurs in APEA and AICE. Although the
number of piles, required pile capacity, and required spacing is
determined correctly, the Auger cast pile size used for costing is 12
inches [300 mm]. As a result, the piling costs are underestimated for
the DVT LNG TANK component in APEA and AICE.
The correct pile size is now used for piling costs. The pile size has been
added to the piling parameters reported in the APEA and AICE warning
message. Also, the maximum compressive capacity used for Auger cast
pile sizing has been updated and is based on the new pile sizes added in
CQ00539183. Previously the largest AUGR pile size was 24 inches [600
mm] (250 Tons [226 MT]). Now the largest AUGR pile size is 42 inches
[1050 mm] (750 Tons [680 MT]). The larger pile sizes will be used as
necessary when the required capacity exceeds 250 Tons at a 6 foot
spacing.
CQ00710404 Cost of item evaluation differs from the cost of project evaluation for the
same components.
CQ00706484 Decision Analyzer: Copper price does not get correctly adjusted to the
new location currency when projects are relocated
CQ00731453 "P and I Design Level" does not change FULL option (APEA)
Icarus Reporter

There are no new features listed for this release.


There are no What’s Fixed items listed for this release.

APEA New Features and Enhancements in
V9
Pipe Truss Bridge Allows Specification of Number of Bents
(CQ00584609) A new field, “Number of bents” has been added to the Pipe truss
bridge component form. The field has a minimum of 2 bents and a maximum of 4
bents. The default is 2 bents (4 columns). When 3 bents are specified, 6 columns
are provided and the truss length is divided into two equal spans. When 4 bents are
specified, 8 columns are provided and the truss length is divided into three equal
spans. The “Number of bents” is reported in the design data sheet for the Pipe truss
bridge component.
New Civil/Steel Spec: Epoxy Grout for Pumps and Compressors

(CQ00600989) Use the Epoxy Grout for Pumps and Compressors settings to specify
epoxy grout for pumps and compressors. The default setting is "N." If set to ‘Y,’
epoxy grout is used for all pumps and compressors in the project that include a
foundation and a grout line item. See the topic “Epoxy Grout Appendix” for a list of
applicable pumps and compressors. In this case, the line item description for COA
445 is updated to “EPOXY GROUT.” The epoxy grout quantity, material cost, and
manpower is generated.
• A grout height of 6 inches is typically used for small pumps that are less than 500
HP.
• A grout height of 12 inches is typically used for large pumps and compressors.
The cost engine currently calculates the equipment footprint area for all pumps and
compressors. For estimating purposes it is assumed that the pump or compressor
base plate area is equal to the equipment footprint area.
Use the associated setting Grout Quantity (Adjustment %) to adjust the calculated
grout quantity to user requirements. The percentage applies to both cement based
non-shrink grout and epoxy grout. The default is 100% of the system calculated
grout quantity.
“Manpower Productivity Expert” Utility Discontinued

Manpower Productivity Expert (MPE) is a utility that has been delivered within all
products of AspenTech’s Economic Evaluation family. MPE is implemented using a
technology that can only run on 32-bit Windows. Beginning in V9, 32-bit Windows is
no longer supported. As a result, Version 8.8.2 was the last release of the Aspen
Economic Evaluation family to include MPE.
For more details, including an extensive FAQ section, see the associated document
on the Aspentech EE support website.
IPA Detail Cost form updated

(CQ00562177) A total % field is added to sum the individual percentages. A note on
project definition is added.

Better user control of fire water header, loop, and lateral piping
calculations
(CQ00586797) A new field “Firewater loop length” is added to the form after the
“Length parameter” input field. The default for this field is the current default value
of 2 x Length parameter. If you specify a value in this field then the specified value is
used to calculate the firewater loop length.
User tag added to the Excel Pipe Line List report

(CQ00582749) Now it is easier to match an equipment designation to a user tag if
you renumber the components and the equipment designation changes.
P3 (Project Planner) is Removed from AICE

We have removed P3 (Project Planner) for AICE. It is not supported past Windows 7.
Primavera is Updated to P6. Java Must be 8.x or later

Primavera is updated to P6 Professional 15.2. Java version prior to 8.x is not
supported.

V8.8.2
The following new features and enhancements are added in release V8.8.2:
New Ductile Iron Pipe Plant Bulk Item (CQ00327989)

Ductile iron (DI) pipe is commonly used for water and wastewater applications. In
V8.8.2 a design and cost estimation model for ductile iron pipe is added to all three
Economic Evaluation products. This model is classified under the piping plant bulks in
the component palette and in the “Add component” dialog in the EE products.
For a detailed outline of the Ductile Iron Pipe model, see the Piping Plant Bulks
section in Chapter 18 of the Aspen Icarus Reference Guide or the Aspen Economic
Evaluation Help.
New seamless 2205 (duplex) steel tube material added

(CQ00582780)
Seamless 2205 (duplex) steel tube material is added to the list of tube materials
available in the Economic Evaluation products. The material symbol for this tube
material is “2205S”. This tube material is available for all shell and tube heat
exchanger models, reboilers, and air-cooled heat exchanger.

"NONE" Added for Driver Option for Electrical Generator -
Steam or Gas turbine Drive Component (CQ00584068)
In previous versions, users had the option to specify either a Steam Turbine driven
or Gas Turbine driven Electrical Generator, with the default driver type being a
Steam Turbine. Users had no way of excluding the driver from the Electrical
Generator estimate. In V8.8.2, a ‘No driver’ option is added to the ‘Driver Type’ drop
down list.
If you select the ‘NONE’ option for driver type, an electrical generator without a
driver is estimated. As a result, in the .ccp report there will be no driver setting -
labor hours, cost and the material cost of the item will exclude the cost of a driver. A
new code of account (COA), “225 – GENERATORS NO DRIVER” is added and will be
used for the electric generator without driver.
Note: When you open existing projects with external code of accounts files in
V8.8.2, you may receive a FATAL error related to un-allocated codes of account for
the new code of account that was added to the system. You must add new
definitions and allocations to your external code of account files for this new system
code of accounts.
Fixed defect for “Vertical Sump Pump” with piping and

instrument design level set to SIS (CQ00597810)
In V8.8 or earlier, if Vertical Sump Pump (ECP TURBINE) component was added to
the project and the “Piping and Instrument design” field in the Design Basis |
Instrumentation Specs form was set to “SIS” (Safety Instrumented System), an
error message was generated for the component during project or item evaluation.
This defect was fixed in V8.8.2 and the item can now be evaluated with the SIS
design level. The defect was also fixed in V8.8 CP1.

V8.8
The following new features and enhancements are added in release V8.8:
Activated Economics Improvements in V8.8
Dashboard Update
The Activation dashboard is updated to show the most common KPIs for cost
analyses. The dashboard now has a clear on/off toggle, a status area, KPIs, and a
reduced/expanded state. Clicking the dashboard reveals further details about the
economic analysis.
Key changes are as follows:

• The dashboard is now controlled by an on/off button. This is analogous to the
Economics Active check box on the ribbon, which controls whether the Aspen
Process Economic Analyzer (APEA) engine is turned on/off in the background.
• There is a new status area in the top right for a more complete description of
what state Economics is in, if there are any warnings or errors, and other
indicators.
Economics Equipment Summary Form Usability Enhancements

You can now launch the Economics Equipment Summary form by clicking
anywhere on the Economics dashboard tile (except the on/off button) or by using the
View Equipment button on the Economics ribbon. A number of changes have been
made to the forms within to help facilitate their use.
Key changes are as follows:

• A new Unit Operations tab in the Economics Summary form – this takes the
place of the Unit Ops chart previously in the Model Summary grid from V8.4

and V8.6. This brings up all the cost information totaled at the unit operation
level for ease of review.
• Improved naming conventions for equipment type tabs – the names of the
equipment type tabs were updated to make them easier to understand.
Addition of LNG Exchanger and Venturi Scrubber models

Default cost models for LNG exchangers and Venturi scrubbers are added. They are
automatically picked up from the flowsheet and correctly evaluated. Previously,
these two unit operations did not have associated cost models in the simulators.
Users had to insert them as “quoted” items and manually assign a cost.
Multi-stage Compressor Support (HYSYS)

Simulations in HYSYS using Activated Economics and multi-stage compressors were
previously modeled as individual pieces of equipment. Support for HYSYS has been
added to recognize where a multi-stage compressor is the more appropriate
equipment choice, increasing the accuracy of the estimate.
This means that in HYSYS, when compressors are linked, Activated Economics
interprets them as being driven by the same driver. Separate compressor equipment
components do not need to be created in Economics for each stage. Activated
Economics considers the system as a whole compression train.
Partial Flowsheet Costing

Previously, if you wanted to perform costing on only a subset of units, you needed to
evaluate the entire project and then review the set of desired units separately. A
new workflow is added for costing a set of units directly from the flowsheet. Simply
select any number of unit operations on the flowsheet, right-click, and select the
Cost option. This requires the flowsheet to be converged (and have results) to be
enabled.
This can be performed at any point after running the flowsheet (regardless of the
progress of any other economics calculations). An instance of the Equipment grid
relevant to the selected units appears, resulting in easy review and quick insights.
You can also un-map and edit the mapping of units directly from this form for a quick
update on how the change affects the cost of the equipment.

Note: Any changes made in the Partial Costing form do not immediately update
the dashboard. You must perform a full project evaluation using the Evaluate button
in the Economics ribbon to update the dashboard numbers.
Improved File Management

File handing for layered products such as Activated Economics, Activated Energy and
Activated EDR is streamlined in this release. From V8.8 forward, saving a simulation
file saves all of the associated files simultaneously without requiring user
intervention.
Performance Improvements
Performance of Activated Economics is greatly improved. The time it takes to initiate,
run and load results has been addressed by several methods including the way
HYSYS and Aspen Plus access and store economic data.
A summary of the expected improvements is provided in the table below:
Activated Economics Performance Improvements*
Product Performance Test Workflows Results (V8.6 to V8.8)
Activation speed for first run 1.9X to 4.7X improvement
Activation Sspeed for subsequent runs 1.9X to 2.3X improvement
Mapping 1.4X to 2.6X improvement
Sizing 2.5X to 30X improvement
Evaluation 1.7X to 3X improvement
Dashboard auto-run speed 1.4X to 2.6X improvement
Aspen Plus
Drop-down menu display time Instant to a couple seconds
Equipment Tab load time Instant to a couple seconds
Equipment Tab hyperlink load time Instant to a couple seconds
Utilities tab load time Instant to a couple seconds
Summary tab load time Instant to a couple seconds
Equipment type tab data load time Instant to a couple seconds
Activation speed for first run 1.4X to 3.6X Improvement
Activation Sspeed for subsequent runs 1.1X to 2.5X Improvement
Mapping 1.3X to 4.3X improvement
Sizing 2.5X to 5.3X improvement
Evaluation 1.3X to 2X Improvement
Dashboard auto-run speed 2.5X to 7X improvement
HYSYS
Drop-down menu display time Instant to a couple seconds
Equipment Tab load time Instant to a couple seconds
Equipment Tab hyperlink load time Instant to a couple seconds
Utilities tab load time Instant to a couple seconds
Summary tab load time Instant to a couple seconds
Equipment type tab data load time Instant to a couple seconds
Note: The ranges on performance results are due to the variety of file sizes and
models across tested simulation files.

New Process Equipment Models
Multi-stream, Plate Fin Heat Exchanger [DHE PLATE FIN]

Multi-stream plate-fin heat exchangers are commonly used in LNG processing, air
separation and HyCO (Syngas) facilities. Typically the plate fin exchangers used in
these services are brazed aluminum heat exchangers. A new model to design and
estimate plate-fin heat exchangers is added in V8.8. It can be found in the
components palette under Process equipment | Heat exchangers, heaters |
Heat exchanger | Multi-stream plate-fin heat exchanger. You can specify up to
6 different connected streams and up to 6 different fin layer types in the new model.
In V7.2 and earlier versions, you could size multi-stream heat exchangers using
Aspen MUSE through the integration link between Process Economic Analyzer (IPE)
and MUSE. The development of a new link between HYSYS and the successor to
MUSE (EDR Plate Fin) in V7.3 enabled sizing of the plate-fin exchanger in HYSYS.
Currently, the LNG Exchanger unit operations in HYSYS can be sized using EDR Plate
Fin. By default, they are mapped to “C” (Quoted cost) items in APEA and in Activated
Economics. The cost is estimated using a custom model which must be selected for
these items.
In V8.8 the LNG Exchanger in HYSYS is mapped to the new model and the cost is
estimated by the cost engine. Only the internal P&ID/volumetric model was
developed for this model - there is no default external P&ID or volumetric model. The
internal P&ID depends on the number of connected process streams. A new
equipment code of account – 267 ‘PLATE FIN EXCHANGERS’ is added for this model.
See the Icarus Reference Guide for further details about the new model.
Note: When you open existing projects with external code of accounts files in V8.8,
you may receive FATAL error related to un-allocated codes of account for the new
code of account that was added to the system. You must add new definitions and
allocations to your external code of account files for this new system code of
accounts.
Venturi and Cyclone Scrubber [EDC VENTURI SC]

A new model called Venturi and cyclone scrubber was added to the list of
available process equipment models in Economic Evaluation (EE) V8.8. This item is
classified under Process equipment | Separation equipment | Dust collector |
Venturi and cyclone scrubber in the component palette and in the Add
component dialog in EE products. The VSCRUB unit operation in Aspen Plus is
mapped to the new model by default. Only the internal P&ID/volumetric model was

developed for this model. There is no default external P&ID or volumetric model. See
the Icarus Reference Guide for further details about the new model.
Enhancements to Centrifugal Gas Compressor [DGC

CENTRIF] Model
In V8.8, the cost and weight estimation model for the centrifugal gas compressor
(DGC CENTRIF) was updated. The maximum actual gas flow rate at inlet that can be
specified for this mode has increased to 300,000 CFM [509,700 M3/H], and the
maximum design gauge pressure outlet was increased to 5000 PSIG [34,470 KPAG].
New fields have been added to allow you to include intercooler(s)/ aftercooler in the
cost estimate of the compressor, select the intercooler(s)/ aftercooler type, and
specify intercooler/ aftercooler excess area (%). A new field to specify maximum
interstage pressure drop has also been added. By default, intercooler(s)/aftercooler
are not included in the compressor cost. If you select Y in these fields,
intercooler(s)/ aftercooler cost and weight are included in the cost of the
compressor. The design data sheet for the compressor contains information about
the estimated heat transfer area for each intercooler and the aftercooler, if included.
Other enhancements to the model are as follows:
• The model was updated to treat small negative inlet gauge pressure (-0.5 PSIG <
P < 0 PSIG) the same as atmospheric pressure (CQ00555464).
• When a motor driver is being used and the estimated driver power is larger than
the largest motor size available in the system (50,000 HP [37,000 KW]), the
driver was estimated using the largest available size. In V8.8, a WARNING
message is generated to indicate this to you and to suggest that turbine driver
should be used for the item. (CQ00558720)

The workflow for mapping the MCOMPR unit operation in Aspen Plus and the
compressor unit operation in HYSYS has also been improved. For MCOMPR,
information pertinent to the newly added fields is transferred during sizing. For the
compressor unit operation in HYSYS, you can link several unit-ops together. These
linked unit-ops are mapped to a single compressor in APEA.
Performance Improvement in Standalone EE Products

Due to Updates to ICARUS Project Object Database
(IPOD)
In V8.8, the ICARUS project object database, which is a core component for all
Economic Evaluation projects, was updated. This update replaces the .d0* files (5
files per database) with a single .aee file per database. These enhancements can
result in significant performance improvement in typical workflows in the Economic
Evaluation standalone products. Typical expected improvements are:
• Speed of opening a saved project (already converted to the new format): ~1.4X
improvement
• Evaluation: ~1.25X improvement
• Dragging and dropping components/areas from another project: ~2X
improvement
• Sorting items in the list view: ~2X improvement
Note: These results vary based on your specific machine specifications, operating
system, virtualization, size and type of project, and location of the installed files.
The following items should be taken into consideration regarding projects and
libraries from older versions:
• When a project from V8.6 or earlier is opened for the first time in V8.8, the
object database files (.d0*) are automatically converted into the new format.
When you save the project in V8.8 the old format files are discarded and the
project is saved with only the new format files.
• If custom user attributes are being used, you must recompile the attributes in
V8.8 and copy the IPUSER.aee and METUSER.aee files to the UserData
directory.
• Migrating library files in .d0* format from old versions to V8.8 applies to the
following libraries:
o Basis for Capital Cost
o Unit Cost Library (UCL)
o Equipment Model Library (EML)
o Design Criteria, Investment Parameters
o Operating Unit Costs
o Product Specifications
o Project Component Map Specifications
o Raw Material Specifications
o Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs
o Utility Specifications
o Sizing Selection
o Project Scheduler

The procedure to migrate old library files is as follows:
a. Make sure that no Economic Evaluation products are running.
b. Copy the library files in the .d0* format from the location corresponding to the
previous version to the V8.8 library location.
c. Open any Economic Evaluation standalone product (ACCE, APEA, or AICE).
d. Select the Libraries palette from the right hand side. The copied d0* files are
automatically converted to the new format and are visible in the list of libraries. A
copy of the old format .d0* files are saved in a Backup directory inside each library
directory.
Note: If you use a common library file location and point to this common location by
selecting Preferences and changing the Other Location Specifications, then you
must create a new common libraries location for V8.8 by copying the libraries from
the previous version. The steps for migrating the library files in this case are as
follows:
a. After installing V8.8, make a copy of the common library file location for V8.8.
b. Open the desired Economic Evaluation V8.8 application and select Preferences to
change the library locations. The location settings in Preferences are application
specific. If you use multiple EE applications, you must change the settings for each
one separately.
c. Close the application.
d. Reopen the V8.8 application for which you have changed the library locations – old
format library files in the specified location are converted to the new format and are
available in the Libraries view. A copy of the old format files is saved in a Backup
directory in each library directory.
Ability to Import Economic Evaluation Files with an

.izp Extension
In previous versions, if you had an Economic Evaluation project file with an .izp
extension, to open the file, you first needed to manually copy it into the appropriate
directory, and it was necessary that the directory name match the file name. In
V8.8, a new feature was added that allows you to directly import a file with an .izp
extension from any location on your machine. To import an .izp file, click File |
Open and click the Import izp button. The detailed procedure can be found in
Chapter 2: “Getting Started” of the Aspen Process Economic Analyzer User’s Guide.
Ability to Change Plant Capacity by Individual Project

Area
In previous versions, you could change the plant capacity for the whole project using
the Decision Analyzer. In V8.8 plant, capacity can be changed for individual areas.
Select the Scale by Area check box, and then click the Select Areas button. The
Scale by Areas dialog box appears. On the Scale by Areas dialog box, select the
check boxes for the areas where you want to adjust the scale. In the Scaling Factor
column, edit the scale as desired for each selected area. Click OK to return to the
Decision Analyzer form.

Usability Improvement for the Components Palette
(CQ00528772)
Certain sections of the components palette have been reorganized to improve
usability. In the Heat Exchangers category, the most commonly used heat
exchangers have been moved to the top of the list. In the Pumps category, the
centrifugal single or multi stage pump was moved to the top of the list, followed by
API 610 pumps, followed by ANSI pumps. In horizontal and vertical vessels, jacketed
vessels have been moved above multi-wall vessels.
VFD Driver Type Option for Air Coolers [DHE AIR

COOLER] (CQ00518904)
In previous versions, a standard motor driver was estimated for the air cooler [DHE
AIR COOLER]. In V8.8, a new field, Driver type, was added to the air cooler input
form. This field has following options:
• MOTOR | Standard motor drive
• VFD | Variable frequency motor drive
• NONE | No motor drive

This new field lets you specify either a standard motor drive or a variable frequency
drive, or you can choose not to include a motor drive. The Default driver type is
Standard motor drive (MOTOR). If you select the Variable frequency motor
drive (VFD) option, a variable frequency drive is estimated in addition to the motor
and the motor cables (power cable from motor to MCC and CV cable from the
pushbutton station to the Control center). If you select the No motor drive (NONE)
option, even if the Power per fan field was specified with a value greater than zero,
the motor and its corresponding cables and pushbuttons are not estimated.
Fixed Defect in Attaching P&ID or Loading Volumetric

Model for Large Volume DVT LNG TANK (CQ00545031)
For a large tank volume Cryogenic, double wall, full containment storage tank
component (DVT LNG TANK), attaching a P&ID or load volumetric model resulted in
errors for Civil. This defect was fixed, and the attach P&ID and load default
volumetric model tasks now work correctly for the large volume DVT LNG TANK
component in the ACCE and APEA.
Fixed Defect in External P&ID, Volumetric Model, and

Internal Model for Gas Turbine (CQ00548988)
In the internal and external P&ID and volumetric model for a gas turbine with driver
power > = 500 HP [373 KW], instrument loop#12 and 16 were shown as ESD loops
on the drawing but did not result in an ESD control center type when the drawing
was attached or volumetric model was loaded. This was fixed in V8.8. This may
result in a warning about the ESD control center if the project does not have an ESD
control center specified. You may also see a change in the estimated instrumentation
bulks for this component.
Fixed Defect for Unit-op Mapped to a Triplex Pump [EP

TRIPLEX] (CQ00543160)
In previous revisions, if a unit-op from a simulation was mapped to a triplex pump
[EP TRIPLEX] model in APEA or in Activated Sizing/Costing, an error occurred
regarding material symbol for the pump. Only CS (Carbon steel) material is
allowed for the pump. When the pump was created by mapping a unit-op, the
default material symbol was not passed to the engine, resulting in an error. This was
fixed in V8.8.


Aspen Economic Evaluation V8.8 includes a number of software fixes that further
improve the product. Selected fixes contained in APEA V8.8 are listed below. This list
is a subset of all the corrections included in APEA V8.8.
This section describes the software fixes to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer V8.8.
ID Issue Description Issue Resolution
CQ00469304 When mapping a Reactor unit to a Fixed S&T The issue is resolved.
Exchanger, the heat duty value from the
Reactor in Aspen Plus and the Shell&Tube
Heat Exchanger in APEA were different.
CQ00543160 For EP triplex pumps, the Material field The issue is resolved.
appeared blank and did not display choices
in the drop-down list, and it did not
recognize the CS material.
CQ00543304 Unexpected behavior occurred when The issue is resolved.
performing costing for spiral heat
exchangers with SS304 material.
CQ00560300 Errors occurred in the Block Flow Diagram The issue is resolved.
built by Aspen Process Economic Analyzer.
CQ00562619 When using Activated Economics in V8.6, The issue is resolved.
custom models did not work.
CQ00088701 After importing a Distl block from Aspen The issue is resolved.
Plus, the equipment cost was not reported in
APEA.
CQ00541511 In EE V8.6, a user-specified Packing Factor The issue is resolved.
for Packings value (specified in the Project
Basis view) was not used when sizing DTW
TOWER.
CQ00545031 APEA failed to load the P&ID/Volumetric The issue is resolved.
Model for a large tank volume LNG
component.
CQ00550055 In Activated Economics V8.8, some blocks The issue is resolved.
were not sized with the BPA process.
CQ00551575 Specifying 0 for Outlet Pressure for a The issue is resolved.
turboexpander resulted in an error.
CQ00561818 The Heat Exchanger Design Tool field The issue is resolved.
appeared on the Equipment Grid for
S&T/Reboiler exchangers for Aspen Plus and
HYSYS. This field needed to be removed,
since it was not applicable.
CQ00580207 Installed weights differ between full The issue is resolved.
evaluation and item evaluation for certian
units
CQ00579431 HYSYS Economics not responding The issue is resolved.
CQ00577027 my apea keeps shutting down when i The issue is resolved.

evaluate an exchanger of mine
CQ00575487 Heat Exchanger Design Option note is The issue is resolved.
confusing for Thermosiphon V-COLM
reboilers

V8.6
The following new features and enhancements were added in the V8.6 APEA release:
Vibrating Screen Models Are Not Correctly Moved to

New Model When Item Description is Not Unique
(CQ00540302)
In V8.4, all rectangular vibrating screen models in previous versions (VS ONE DECK,
VS TWO DECK and VS THREE DECK) were consolidated into a single new model – VS
RECTANGLE. Similarly all the circular vibrating screen models in the previous
versions (VS SIFTER 1, VS SIFTER 2 and VS SIFTER 3) were consolidated in a single
new model (VS CIRCULAR). When projects from previous versions (V8.2 or earlier)
are opened in V8.4, any vibrating screen items are converted to use the new
consolidated models with the number of decks input set appropriately. However,
there was a defect in the program in which this conversion would not happen
correctly if multiple vibrating screen models in previous versions (V8.2 or earlier)
had the same “Item description”. In such a case, only one of the items was
converted correctly. This defect has now been fixed, enabling proper conversion of
vibrating screens to take place when opened in V8.6.
Engineering Man-hours for Quoted Cost Items with No

Cost (CQ00520179)
In previous versions, a quoted cost item with no cost or labor hours specified was
included in the calculation for engineering man-hours. This would lead to incorrect
estimation of engineering costs when certain blocks like mixers and splits from a
simulation were mapped to quoted cost items with no cost specified in APEA. This
has been fixed, and quoted cost items are included in the calculation for engineering
costs only when they have non-zero material cost or labor hours specified.

There are no compatibility notes for this release.

improve the product.


CQ00527273 Activated Economics V8.4: Deleted mappings return on

subsequent mapping runs
CQ00527394 APEA is not calculating correct reflux pump flow rate and
specific gravity from Radfrac column
CQ00528246 Small Cosmetic Changes: Investment Metrics in drop down
and summary grid
CQ00528259 Aspen Plus Towers (for example, Radfrac) do not always
default to the DTW TOWER Model
CQ00528836 Dashboard economic results issues with German OS
CQ00528931 Set France locale for English OS, the investment metric can't
be expanded
CQ00529124 Delete Stream Price Factor, re-calculated raw material cost/
product sales is wrong
CQ00529427 No status to indicate that EE was rerun after Simulation
changed with "equipment summary grid" opened
CQ00529889 Solids - cffilter - the value of 'liquid flow rate is not
transferred to equipment after sizing.
CQ00537405 Packing Sizing data wasn't transferred to EE when mapped to
DTW TOWER
CQ00538299 Solids - Filter Rotary Vacuum - The Disk diameter wrongly equal to
Outer radius.
CQ00541569 Raw Material and Product Stream does not clear when new
data is loaded.

V8.4
Activated economics builds upon earlier releases of activated economics with Aspen
Plus and Aspen HYSYS. Product enhancements focus on increasing integration of
simulation with economics and sizing, as well as improving the Activated Economics
usability, functionality, and workflow. The features described here require installation
of Aspen Plus, Aspen HYSYS, and APEA V8.4. In addition, older versions of Aspen
Plus and Aspen HYSYS (i.e. before V8.4) will not function with APEA V8.4. Refer to
the APEA User Guide for further information regarding supported simulator versions.
Some of the key new features of Activated Economics in Aspen Plus and Aspen
HYSYS V8.4 include:
• Improved performance
° Faster activation
° Faster evaluation
° Improved performance in populating equipment grids
• Improved transparency for defining stream pricing in Aspen HYSYS
° Filtering of Feed and Product streams enabling easier identification, navigation
and entry of stream pricing
• Usability improvements to Equipment Mapping Interface
° Updated mapping form to better match user workflow
° Auto sizing of equipment types tags/id and better descriptions
° Reworked column configuration sketches
• Added support for Unit Operations (aggregation of multiple pieces of equipment
that make up a unit) pricing
° Unit Op equipment cost
° Unit Op installed equipment cost
° Unit Op utility cost
• Dashboard enhancements
° Added error flag on Economics Tile to indicate either sizing or costing
evaluation errors
° Error flag serves as a navigation button to launch equipment grid where error
occurred
° Added tool tip for utility costs
° Added link to new Unit Operations cost table
° Added link to new Unit Operations utility cost table
° Pull down display of investment metrics
° Operating profit
° Payout period
° Return on investment
• Improved handling of Aspen HYSYS columns

° Segregating Aspen HYSYS column subflowsheet unit ops into unique areas in
APEA UI
° New Default Mapping of Aspen HYSYS and Aspen Plus columns to Multiple
Diameter Column in APEA
° Improved workflow in supporting Tray Sizing utilities (including support for
TPSAR Acid Gas Column Tray Sizing Utility)
° Support for Aspen HYSYS Acid Gas Columns
• Equipment Grid Upgrades
° Faster data loading
° Error flags shown in grid when either sizing or cost evaluations errors occur
° Grid reformatting
° Automatic formatting of equipment tags/IDs
° Active links to equipment specifications
• Unit Op pricing shown in Model Summary Grid
• Economic Unit Op overlay support
° Highlight up to ten Unit Ops on flowsheet filtered by either:
° Highest equipment costs
° Highest installed costs
° Highest utility costs
° Highest weight
° Access overlay setting from dashboard or economic ribbon
As before, you can access Aspen HYSYS Activated Economic Analysis either from the
Activated Analysis panel or the Economics ribbon. The Activated Economics Analysis
pane shows the predicted capital cost and utility cost for the process. The reported
values are based on calculations from Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. Mapping
and equipment specifications can be modified from the ribbon to achieve the highest
accuracy for each simulation.
Activated Economics Performance Improvements

Performance of Activated Economics has been improved. The length of time it takes
to initiate, run, and load results have been addressed by several methods, including
the way Aspen HYSYS and Aspen Plus access and stores economic data. The change
in method also allows for economic data to be aggregated and summarized by Unit
Operations.
Note: Because a new method for data retrieval from Aspen HYSYS has been
developed for V8.4, older Aspen HYSYS simulations should be opened and saved in
Aspen HYSYS V8.4 before proceeding with either Activated Economics or ‘Send To’
APEA workflows.
Improved Transparency for Defining Stream Pricing in Aspen

HYSYS
To calculate operating costs and investment metrics, it is necessary to provide feed
stream costs and product stream prices. In Aspen HYSYS V8.3 and earlier, it is up to
the user to identify and locate the feed and product streams to provide the desired

cost factors. Locating the feed and product streams for a typical flowsheet with
dozens of variables can be challenging. For instance, the Model Summary Grid
(Case-Material Stream tab) provides no indication of which streams are the feed and
product streams, but instead mixes all the streams together in a single tab.
Two new tabs have been added to the Model Summary Grid which clearly identifies
the feed and product streams. Filtering of feed and product streams enables easier
identification and navigation to enter stream pricing.
Equipment Mapping Interface Improvements

In earlier versions, the Map Preview form has several columns that do not
automatically adjust to the appropriate width, but instead truncates the name or
item description. In addition, after the user manually adjusts the column widths and
navigates away from the form and back to the form, the formatting reverts back to
the initial incorrect state.
The Map Preview form has been redesigned to automatically adjust column
formatting. In addition, the layout of the form has been modified to better match
user workflow and improve usability. Also, the column configuration sketches have
been redesigned to provide better visualization of the actual columns.

Dashboard Enhancements and Unit Op Costing
A new Unit Op costing feature has been added the V8.4 release. This new feature
allows for the aggregation of individual pieces of equipment to be grouped and
summarized in terms of actual Unit Operations equipment and utility costs as well as
other economic evaluation parameters. The economic evaluation cost parameters for
individual pieces of equipment are still accessible and displayed in the Equipment
Summary Grid.
The Dashboard enhancements build upon the Dashboard introduced in V8.0. A
tooltip was developed for capital cost that displays the total equipment cost and total
installed cost. A similar tooltip for the utility cost displays the highest utility cost for
the process when the user hovers over the utility cost section of the dashboard with
the mouse.
Additionally, three buttons have been added to the left of the Economic Dashboard
along with a pull down bar on the bottom and an error flag in the Capital Cost
section should a costing or sizing evaluation error occur.
The top button on the left launches the Unit Op Equipment Cost table. The Unit Op
Equipment Cost table has three columns. The first column consists of the Unit
Operations sorted in descending order by the highest installed equipment costs. The
second column indicates the equipment cost for those units and the third column
displays the installed equipment costs.

The middle button on the left launches the Unit Op Utility Cost Table. The Unit Op
Utility Cost table displays the utility type and cost associated with each Unit
Operation.
The bottom button of the left launches the flowsheet overlay settings form and will
be discussed later in this document.
The pull-down bar on the bottom of the Dashboard displays investment metrics such
as Operating Profit, Payout Period, and Return on Investment (ROI) over the payout
period.
The error message icon under the capital cost, when displayed, indicates a sizing or
costing error occurred and requires user attention. Clicking the warning icon
launches the Equipment Summary grid. The Equipment Summary grid has been
updated to show which pieces of equipment have the corresponding sizing or cost
evaluation errors. The feature is explained in later sections of this document.

Improved Handling of Aspen HYSYS Columns
There have been several improvements to increase data transparency between
Aspen HYSYS columns and APEA. In addition, APEA will now support new Aspen
HYSYS Acid Gas Columns and TPSAR sizing technologies.
In order to improve transparency of Aspen HYSYS columns in APEA, all the unit
operations contained in the Aspen HYSYS column environment (that is, sub-
flowsheet) will appear as a unique area in the APEA UI. In addition, the default
mapping for all supported Aspen Plus and Aspen HYSYS unit op columns has changed
to the APEA Multiple Diameter Column component. In the example below, two Aspen
HYSYS columns (Absorber and Regenerator) create two separate Areas in APEA
which house the equipment items defined within each column environment.
Note: Aspen HYSYS users will now need to explicitly define reflux pumps and/or
accumulators within the column environment in order for them to create APEA
equipment components. In V8.4, since each Aspen HYSYS column unit op is being
read explicitly from the unit ops contained in the column environment, there will no
longer be a one to many mapping of Aspen HYSYS columns to APEA components.
The Aspen HYSYS column will appear as a BARECOLUMN in APEA. In addition, for
pumps within a pump-around to be included in the APEA estimate, the following
should be checked when pump-arounds are defined:

Workflow improvements have been made in supporting and retrieving results from
Aspen HYSYS Tray Sizing utilities. This includes support of the new Aspen HYSYS
TPSAR Acid Gas Column Tray Sizing Utility. Previously, multiple tray sections had to
be defined in the column environment along with multiple Tray Sizing utilities in
order for APEA to interpret the results as a multi-diameter column (if applicable). In
V8.4, when a tray sizing utility is defined for an Aspen HYSYS column, APEA will
retrieve and use the results (if reasonable) in sizing the APEA column component.
Thus, if a single tray sizing utility contains multiple unique stages defined, the
specifications will be used in the APEA column component without the need for
defining multiple tray sections in the column environment.
In the example below, a single tray sizing utility is defined for a column with multiple
stages defined (2 tray sections and 1 packed section). When the mapping/sizing to
APEA has been completed, the results from this utility will be used.

Note: Aspen HYSYS contains many more packing types and sizes than APEA. In
most instances, a mapping to an equivalent APEA packing type has been made.
Users are encouraged to review and validate the APEA packing selections to ensure
accurate results.

Aspen HYSYS Acid Gas Column Support
Within an Aspen HYSYS Acid Gas Column, users may prefer to enter their own
column geometry. If the specified geometry is to be used within costing, then the
“Use Specified Geometry for Costing” must be enabled as shown below.
Note the following when using Aspen HYSYS Acid Gas Columns with Costing (APEA):
• The Option “Auto-size Column for Costing” selection will utilize the APEA sizing
methodologies (including defaults) for sizing and specifying the column design.
• The Option “Use Specified Geometry for Costing” selection will utilize the
specifications defined by the user in defining and specifying the column design in
APEA except when a TPSAR sizing utility exists for the column.
• When a TPSAR sizing utility is available for an Acid Gas Column, the results from
this utility (when reasonable) will be used in defining and specifying the column
design in APEA.
Equipment Grid Upgrades

There have been numerous equipment grid improvements. Some of the
improvements are intended to improve performance by loading data into the grid
faster. Other improvements focus on usability.
Columns in the Equipment Grid now auto-size and retain formatting for equipment
tags and IDs. Furthermore, the equipment names are now active links that once
clicked navigate directly to the specific equipment parameter tab within the
Equipment Results Summary Tab.

To help users navigate and find errors associated with relative economic evaluation,
the Equipment Summary Grid now displays errors flags. Where appropriate, tooltips
are provided to help the user understand which error(s) occurred.
Unit Operations Cost Evaluation Summary

A new form has been added to the Model Summary Grid to display the Unit
Operations results in tabular format. The table summarizes the unit operations

costing results for all the unit operations and consists of equipment cost, installed
equipment cost, equipment weight, installed equipment weight, and utility cost.
Activated Economics Unit Operations Overlay

To make Activated Economics results highly visible, the concept of Unit Operations
Overlay are used. Overlays make Unit Ops costing information available directly on
the flowsheet.
The overlays consist of two parts:
• A green colored circle is used to highlight the unit operations and hierarchies that
have the highest relative operating cost compared to other unit operations in the
flowsheet or filtered by other parameters such as capital cost, installed cost, or
weight.
• A table that displays the actual economic results for a unit op when the user
hovers over it.
You can access the overlay feature from either the Economics Ribbon or the
Economics Dashboard. By default, the when the user activates economics from the
dashboard, the overlay feature will also be activated.

You can toggle the overlay on and off from the Economic Overlay Setting form
launched from either the Dashboard or the Economics Ribbon.
New Safety Instrumented System (SIS) Drawings

In V8.2, we added the new option to enable safety instrumented volumetric P&IDs in
APEA and ACCE. A limited number of SIS drawings were available in that release. In
V8.4 release, thirty six new SIS VPIDS (for example, external graphical drawings,
external volumetric models, and internal model) have been added to the system.
These drawings are:
• HT continuous SIS 804
• Jacketed HT Continuous SIS 804J
• Jacketed VT continuous SIS 806VJ
• HT storage SIS 819H
• Jacketed HT storage SIS 819HJ
• VT storage SIS 819V
• Jacketed VT storage SIS 819VJ
• Gear pump SIS 820 (Default SIS drawing when SIS flag is set at Project Level)
• Gear pump SIS 820RV (Contains extra Relief Valve. Available as an alternate
external graphical drawing and volumetric PID only at the component level)
• Positive displacement pump SIS 820 (Default SIS drawing when SIS flag is set at
Project Level)
• Positive displacement pump SIS 820RV (Contains extra Relief Valve. Available as
an alternate external graphical drawing and volumetric PID only at the
component level)
• HT knockout SIS 822H
• Jacketed HT knockout SIS 822HJ
• VT knock out SIS 822V

• Jacketed VT knock out SIS 822VJ
• In line pump SIS 827 (Default SIS drawing when SIS flag is set at Project Level)
• In line pump SIS 827RV (Contains extra Relief Valve. Available as an alternate
• Smokeless flare SIS 848
• TW liquid adsorption SIS 852
• TW liquid absorption SIS 854
• Thermosiphon reboiler horizontal SIS 857H
• Thermosiphon reboiler vertical SIS 857V
• TW distillation with thermosiphon RB SIS 859
• Non Smokeless flare SIS 869
• Air compressor SIS 872
• Gas Turbine SIS 940
• HT pressure vessel with boot SIS 941H
• Jacketed HT pressure vessel with boot SIS 941HJ
• HT 3phase separator with boot SIS 942
• Jacketed HT 3phase separator with boot SIS 942J
• HT 3phase separator with baffles SIS 943
• Jacketed HT 3phase separator with baffles SIS 943HJ
• HT liquid liquid separator SIS 944
• HT liquid liquid separator with boot SIS 944
• Jacketed HT liquid liquid separator SIS 944J
• Jacketed HT liquid liquid separator with boot SIS 944HJ
The workflow for using the SIS drawings is the same as outlined in the V8.2 release
notes and documentation. You can see graphical representations of these new SIS
drawings in the Aspen Icarus PID Reference Guide pdf.
Increased Number of Installation Bulk Pipe Lines and

Instrumentation Loops for Project Components (CQ00447747)
• Maximum number of instrumentation loops has been increased to 99 from 50 in
previous versions.
• In previous versions up to 40 installation bulk pipe lines could be specified.
However if drains were specified on any of the lines then line 40 was not
estimated and the drains were estimated as line 40. With this enhancement,
maximum number of installation bulk lines has been increased to 98. Internally
line 99 will be used for drains (if specified on any of the installation bulk lines).
• The maximum for installation bulk duct line number field has been increase to 98
(old value was 40). We allow a total of 5 duct lines but the duct line number can
be any number from 1 to 98 in order to avoid a clash with installation bulk pipe
line numbers on the same component.
• The spreadsheet import/export application has been updated so that 98 lines and
99 loops can be imported using the spreadsheet. Users should be able to do
“NEW”, “CHANGE” and “DELETE” operations on all lines and loops using the
spreadsheet. The pre-check will check the new maximum values and give errors
if user has specified more than 98 lines or 99 loops or 5 duct lines.

• The external volumetric model libraries also support 98 lines and 99 loops.
These changes affect the following input fields in the GUI:
Note: In previous versions users were able to use the “C” (Change) option for the
“Piping volumetric model” input field and change the properties of line 40 which was
the drain line. With this enhancement since line 40 is just a regular installation bulk
line, such inputs will be flagged as errors by the engine. Also users will not be able to
use the “C” option for line 99 which is reserved for drains. Users can modify drain
line properties by using drain specs in “Design basis | Piping specs | General” or in
the “Pipe – general specs” for each item.

Instrument Sensor Location and Control Valve Location Can
Now Be Specified Using Pipe Line Tag (CQ00472088)
New fields for specifying the instrument sensor and control valve (CV) location using
the pipe line tag have been added to the instrument bulk addition forms.
• All three fields are character input fields and a string 36 characters long can be
entered – similar to the pipe line tag field in the “Pipe – Item details” form.
• In previous versions, the default for “Instrument sensor location” field was shown
as 0 (see screenshot below) in ACCE. This default value is no longer displayed in
the form because now the default is 0 only if line tag is also blank. The note for
that field has been updated to:
“Line number of the pipe on which sensor or transmitter is located. 0 =
Component location. Default: 0 if sensor line tag is also blank.”
• These fields are an alternative to the existing instrument sensor/CV location

fields where the location needs to be specified as the pipe line number. For
example, users can enter either the instrument sensor location (that is, the line
number) or enter the instrument sensor pipe line tag.
• When both line number and line tag is specified, the line number will get
precedence and the line tag will be ignored by the engine. A warning message
will be generated.
• The evaluation engine will search for the line tag only in the installation bulk pipe
lines specified for that component in the “Pipe – Item details” form.
• In previous versions users could specify duplicate line tags on the installation
bulk pipe lines for a component. This has NOT changed. If there are duplicate line
tags on the pipe lines and if the line tag is used to specify a sensor or CV location
in a loop, the sensor or CV will be placed on the first line on which the line tag is
found.
• Errors are generated when the specified line tag is incorrect.

Consolidated Vibrating Screen Equipment Models
In previous versions, there are two kinds of vibrating screen models in Economic
Evaluation (EE) – rectangular and circular and for each kind, there are three
separate models for different number of decks (single, double or triple). All
rectangular screen models have the same input fields and all circular models have
same input fields. In V8.4, the rectangular models have been consolidated into a
single model and the circular models into a single model with an added input field for
the number of decks in each model. This will enable users to map to the screen unit-
operation in Aspen Plus to the consolidated model.
The new model name for the rectangular screen is EVS RECTANGULAR and the new
model name for the circular screen is EVS CIRCULAR. In the new models there is an
additional input field – “Number of decks”. The default for this field will be 1 and the
maximum value will be 3. The material and labor quantities (i.e. weight, man-hours,
and so on) estimated for the old separate models and the corresponding consolidated
model with the number of decks input set appropriately, is the same.
Changes to default mappings from Aspen Plus

In V8.2 the ‘SCREEN’ unit-operation is mapped to either the single, double or triple
deck rectangular model based on the number of decks input in the unit-operation. In
V8.4, the default mapping will be changed to the consolidated rectangular model
(EVS RECTANGULAR) and the number of decks input will be appropriately mapped
during sizing. The circular screen model will be available as an alternate mapping
choice.

Updating old projects
Users may have used the separate models in their projects in previous (V8.2 or
earlier) versions of the software. When these projects are opened in V8.4, the old
model inputs will be transferred to the new consolidated models. Depending on the
old model type, the number of decks input will be set to match the old model.
Maximum Steam Gauge Pressure Value and Tracing

Calculations for Plant Bulk Pipe [BPIPPIPE] (CQ00503923)
In the “Above ground or buried pipe” plant bulk (BPIPPIPE), the maximum value for
"Steam gauge pressure" was 25 PSIG (175 KPAG for metric). This was incorrect. This
value should be the "default" value. This has been fixed. The yard pipe plant bulk
always had the correct default value of 25 psig (175 KPAG). Also in V8.2 and earlier
versions, changing the steam gauge pressure value in the yard pipe plant bulk did
not change the estimated steam tracing bulks. The steam gauge pressure affects the
trapping distance and therefore affects the estimate number of steam traps,
supply/return headers etc. Icarus reference, Chapter 18, page 26 shows the different
trapping distances used for various diameters and steam gauge pressure. For a given
diameter of traced line, the trapping distance changes as a step function at 25 psig,
150 psig and 200 psig. After this fix, changing the steam gauge pressure will change
the steam tracing bulks estimated appropriately. This will improve the estimation of
the steam traced plant bulk pipe lines.



CQ00490805 The warning for Vacuum pump is wrong.

CQ00501256 When mapping to an Air Cooler from either Aspen Plus or
HYSYS, APEA always calculates a tube wall thickness of 0.035
inches regardless of operating pressure
CQ00504605 Aspen Plus File Does Not Update Upon Save (apwz format) and
Activated Costing Issues
CQ00504770 EEV8.2: APEA does not retrieve ACOL data from HYSYS
Simulation
CQ00504772 Compressor Design Criteria is not correct in APEA OOTB
Templates
CQ00509381 PEA does not launch. No error and no happen.

CQ00519440 Cladding channel material is specified as CS, but system
appears using shell material

V8.2
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer (APEA) support for

Aspen Plus Solids Models
In APEA V8.2 tighter integration between existing APEA solids processing equipment
and Aspen Plus solids unit operations has been implemented. This includes new
Aspen Plus SolidSim models that were featured in the Aspen Plus V8.0 and V8.2
releases. In addition, improved handling and characterization of Aspen Plus solid
stream data has been implemented in V8.2 APEA.
Note: In order to fully utilize this improved integration, both Aspen Plus and APEA
V8.2 must be installed.
This scope only covers integration between Aspen Plus solids unit operations with
existing APEA solids models. Thus, no new APEA solids models or changes to
existing models (except for the Gyratory and Cone Crushers listed below) are
included in the V8.2 APEA release. In addition, support for legacy or shortcut Aspen
Plus solids models (where no sizing is provided) has been dropped in lieu of support
for the newer more detailed models. In places where shortcut models are used,
users are expected to customize mapping and sizing to utilize corresponding relevant
APEA components.
The improved integration between APEA and Aspen Plus involves the following:
• Adding new APEA mapping logic for new Aspen Plus solids unit operations
• Developing new APEA sizing methods for those models where exposed
information does not correlate directly into an APEA model
• Improved handling and characterization of Aspen Plus solid stream data in APEA
• Persisting results of the Aspen Plus solids models in the Aspen Plus xml results
file
• Removing support for non-detailed/shortcut Aspen Plus solids unit operations
The following table lists the V8.2 Aspen Plus solids unit operations (with UO type
where applicable) and corresponding APEA mappings that are supported in V8.2
Aspen Plus and APEA:
Aspen Plus Unit Unit Operation Default APEA Mapping Component

Operation Type
Centrifuge Decanter CT SOLID BOWL
Centrifuge Disk CT DISK
Centrifuge Perforated Basket CT BATCH AUTO
Centrifuge Pusher CT RECIP CONV
Crusher Ball Mill M BALL MILL
Crusher Cone CR CONE
Crusher Gyratory CR GYRATORY

Crusher Hammer Mill CR REV HAMR
Crusher Impact Mill CR S IMPACT
Crusher Jaw CR JAW
Crusher Rod Mill M ROD MILL
Crusher Single Roll CR S ROLL MED
Crystallizer NA CRY OSLO
Cyclone NA DC CYCLONE
Dryer Convective Dryer – D ATMOS TRAY
Batch Tray
Electrostatic Precipitators NA DC ELC H VOLT
Filter - Fabric (Cffilter) Liquid/Solid - Capillary F TUBULAR
Filter - Fabric (Cffilter) Liquid/Solid – Plate F TUBULAR
Filter - Fabric (Fabfl) Gas/Solids DC CLOTH BAY
Filter - Fabric (Fabfl) Gas/Solids DC PULSE SHKR – if Area/Gas Flow Rate calculated
by A+ is > 4, else mapped to DC CLOTH BAY
Filter - Rotary Vacuum Disk F ROTY DISK
Filter - Rotary Vacuum Drum F ROTY DRUM
Hydrocyclone NA SE WATER CYCL
Screen NA VS ONE DECK
Spray Towers (Vscrub) NA DC WASHERS
As mentioned above, the only equipment models that have been updated in EE V8.2
are the Cone Crusher (ECR CONE) and Gyratory Crusher (ECR GYRATORY). This
update will be seen in all EE V8.2 products (that is, ACCE, APEA, and AICE).
Previously, the “Mantle diameter” was a required field on the input forms for both of
these models. In V8.2, the input has changed so that you can enter either the
“Mantle diameter” or the “Crusher flow rate.” Thus, when only the crusher flow rate
is entered, the model calculates the mantle diameter and estimates the cost based
on the mantle diameter. If both flow rate and mantle diameter are specified, the
specified values are used.
In addition, minimum and maximum values for the crusher flow rate input field have
been added for both models. The min/max values are as follows:
Model Minimum flowrate Maximum flowrate
Cone crusher 50 TPH \ 46 TONNE/HR 1300 TPH \ 1179 TONNE/HR
Gyratory crusher 200 TPH \ 182 TONNE/HR 10,000 TPH \ 9071

TONNE/HR
The following screen shots show the input differences for the Gyratory Crusher in
V8.0 vs. V8.2:

New Option to Enable Safety Instrumented VPIDS
In V8.2 a new Instrumentation option is available within ACCE and APEA that lets
you select Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS) drawing types in addition to
Standard (STD) and Full.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer (APEA):
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator (ACCE)

Note: You can also select this option in APEA and/or ACCE Templates which enables
usage within Aspen Plus or Aspen HYSYS Activated Economics in addition to typical
APEA/ACCE template functionality.
This new option provides a more accurate representation of the Piping and
Instrumentation requirements/scope to safely operate Offshore processes. This
includes changes in piping and instrumentation scope (including additional relief
valves, automatic and manual blowdowns), addition of line drains, addition of
Secondary Emergency Shutdown devices, and new methods in calculating relief line
diameters and length. In the V8.2 release, seven new SIS VPIDS (for example,
external graphical drawings, external volumetric models, and internal model) are
available for the following equipment types (only these drawings employ the changes
listed above):
• Centrifugal Pump motor drive SIS #816 (default SIS drawing when SIS flag is set
at Project Level)
• Centrifugal Pump motor drive SIS #816RV contains extra Relief Valve (available
as an alternate external graphical drawing and volumetric PID only at the
component level)
• VT continuous SIS #806
• Shell and Tube exchanger SIS #811
• Flat Bottom Storage Tank SIS #818
• Reciprocating gas compressor SIS #821
• U-tube Kettle reboiler SIS #803
You can see graphical representations of these new SIS drawings in the Aspen Icarus
PID Reference Guide pdf.
Estimate results will be different when the SIS VPIDs are used due to the scope
increases referenced. There are several ways the SIS VPIDs can be activated:
Project level
When SIS is selected at the Project Level (refer to screenshots above for where to
set this in APEA and ACCE), the drawings listed above will become the default VPID
for that component. This includes the internal, graphical, and volumetric PIDs. For
example:
• Centrifugal Pump models (for example, ANSI, API, Centrifugal single or Multi-
stage, and so on) use the new Centrifugal Pump SIS drawing #816 as the default
• Vertical process vessels (including multi-wall) use the new VT continuous drawing
#806 as the default

• The same applies for Shell and Tube Exchangers (for example, Fixed Tube, U-
Tube, TEMA, Floating Head) where the new SIS drawing #811 becomes the
default
• The same effect can be seen with the Flat Bottom Storage Tank where the new
SIS drawing #818 becomes the default and the Reciprocating gas compressor
where the new SIS drawing #821 becomes the default.
Area Level
When SIS is selected at the Project Level, Areas inherit this specification unless
something else is specified in the Area form (for example, Full or Standard). Here
are some examples of how the system operates for each of the new VPIDs:
• SIS Specified at the Project Level, Area Instrumentation Spec left blank – default
for that area is SIS (see above for behavior)
• SIS Specified at the Project Level, SIS specified at Area level – default for that
area is SIS (see above for behavior)
• SIS Specified at the Project Level, “Full” specified at Area level – default for that
area is Full and thus all “old” Full VPIDs will be used (internal, graphical, and
volumetric)
• Full Specified at the Project Level, SIS specified at Area level – default for that
area is SIS for relevant VPIDs (internal, graphical, and volumetric – see above for
examples)
Component Level
You can select any one of the new drawings at the component level as an alternate
drawing (graphical or volumetric). In addition, there is a new Centrifugal pump
drawing which includes a relief valve that may be selected as an alternate at the
component level. As typical, regardless of Project or Area level settings, specific
drawings selected at the component level will serve as the basis in the estimation.
Templates
SIS has been added as an option within APEA and ACCE templates which will set the
Project Level Piping and Instrumentation Design specification. In addition to ACCE
and APEA projects, these templates can be used in Aspen Plus and HYSYS for use
within Activated Economics. Once a template with the SIS flag set is selected within
Activated Economics (Aspen Plus or HYSYS), the new VPIDs listed above will become
the default volumetric models for those components.

Addition of structure tag field to quoted equipment
form and allow weight to be allocated to structures
The structure tag field has been added to quoted equipment. This tag in the quoted
equipment item works the same as the structure tag on equipment components.
The quoted equipment weight is allocated to a structure when the quoted equipment
COA is specified as an equipment COA, a valid structure tag for the structure is
specified, and a quoted equipment weight is specified. You can assign the quoted
equipment weight to Open Areas, Plant Bulk Open Structures, Bargeable Modules,
Truckable Modules, and Skid Modules. See the Icarus Reference Guide for additional
information about adding equipment to structures.
Correct selection of the heat tracing cable for the

vessels
• For the heat tracing of vessels for the self-regulating cable category, if you do not
specify the cable type, the program selects a cable type depending on the
maintenance temperature.
• If the maintenance temperature is less than or equal to 120 F or 48 C, type 10A
cable is used. If the maintenance temperature is more than 120 F or 48 C, type
20P cable is used.
• Generally you should use 'A' series cables for maintenance temperatures up to
120 F or 48 C; 'P' series cables can be used for maintenance temperatures up to
250 F or 120 C.
• If the maintenance temperature is more than 120 F or 48 C and you select any of
the 'A' series cables, a warning message "MAINTENANCE TEMP. IS TOO HIGH

FOR THE CABLE TYPE SELECTED, 20P CABLE IS USED" is generated and 20P type
cable is used and lengths are calculated accordingly.
• The note for the Percent of area for elec. trace field has been modified to
Must specify percent of equipment area to be traced. Default: 0 percent.
Cable for the welding receptacles is not estimated for

the plant bulk item ‘Lights and Outlets’
• For the plant bulk item Lights and outlets, the system does not estimate the
cable for the welding receptacles.
• For the Number of weld receptacles field, we have added the note Cable for
welding receptacles is not estimated.
Update min/max fields in the user interface to current

values
The min/max fields have been updated as listed below:
• Add maximum number of Valves/Fittings as 99 on the Bulk Additions Pipe
Item Details dialog box.
Add maximum number of Valves/Fittings as 999 on

the Plant Bulk Pipe Item details dialog box Above

grade or buried piping located under both Piping
(BPIPPIPE) and Civil (BCIVPIP) Plant Bulks.

V8.0
• New Features and Improvements in Integrated Economics in Aspen Plus and
HYSYS V8.0
° Integrated Analysis
° Activated Economic Analysis
° Ribbon Commands
° Integrated and Activated Economics Workflow
° Auto-Evaluate
° Modifications to the Equipment Summary Grid
• Process Modeling Enhancements
• New Map Options Dialog
• New Map Preview Dialog
• Enhancements to Custom and Interactive Sizing
• New Feature to Lock Equipment Sizing
• Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM) Update
• Line Sizing Equations Now Loaded From Volumetric Model Library
• Length Parameter Added to Control Utility Station Drop Piping Length
• Duplicate Line Numbers Are Not Allowed in Installation Bulks | Pipe – Item
Details
• ‘Installation Option’ Moved to Component Main Form
• New ‘Source of quote’ Field
• New Communication and Alarm Systems Plant Bulk
• Five Additional Items Can be Specified for Installation Bulks | Steel
• Mega Project Performance improvements
• New "List of Equipment - Source of Quote" Excel Report
• IPA Detail Cost Report Updated
Activated Economics builds upon earlier releases of integrated economics with Aspen
Plus and HYSYS. Product enhancements focus on increasing integration of simulation
with economics and sizing, as well as improving the Activated Economics usability,
functionality, and workflow.
Some of the key new features of Aspen Plus and HYSYS V8.0 include:
• Improved conceptual design workflow featuring more interactive links between
process simulation and economic analysis.
• The new ‘Activated Analysis’ panel displays key cost performance indices,
updated each time the simulation case is changed or run.
• Automatic evaluation mode for economics enables ASW scenario studies in which
operating and capital costs can be evaluated in sensitivity or case studies.
You can access Activated Economic Analysis either from the Activated Analysis panel
or the Economics ribbon. The Activated Economics Analysis pane shows the predicted
capital cost and utility cost for the process. The reported values are based on

calculations from Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. Mapping and equipment
specifications can be modified from the ribbon to achieve the highest accuracy for
each simulation.
Integrated and Activated Analysis

Aspen Plus and HYSYS now have the ability to automatically perform costing with
each run. This can be controlled with a new checkbox Auto-Evaluate on the
Economics tab of the ribbon.
It is now easier to perform economic analysis on Aspen Plus and HYSYS models. The
Activated Analysis panel, accessible from the Home tab of the ribbon, lets you run
each analysis with a single click and displays a summary of results. The analyses are
automatically updated after each run.
Ribbon Commands
Some commands have been moved, renamed, or added to the ribbon for ease of
use. These include:
• Home tab:
° A new Activated Analysis command has been added to show the Activated
Analysis panel. This replaces the Energy Analysis command that was
present previously.
• Economics tab:
The Operation Cost group has been renamed Prepare, and the Cost Options
command has been moved into it.
° Material Cost has been renamed Stream Price.
° A new group Economics Solver has been added. The Activate Economics
command is now a checkbox named Economics Active in this group, and
Delete Scenario has also been moved into the group. The new command
Auto-Evaluate appears in this group.
° The Model Summary command (which also appears on the Home tab) has
been removed from the Economics tab.
° The Status indicator has been expanded to show the Mapping, Sizing, and
Evaluation statuses separately.

Integrated and Activated Economics Workflow
The Economics ribbon has been updated as shown above. The new ‘Prepare’
group includes all of the steps required to prepare a model before evaluation. The
‘Economics Solver’ group includes options to activate or deactivate the economics
engine, to run on ‘Automatic Evaluation’ and to delete cost scenarios.
The new ‘Status’ group shows the state of the mapping, sizing, and evaluation steps
for a simulation. Blue checks show that a step is complete and in synch with the
process model.
Yellow ‘caution’ icons are displayed when the economics workflow is out of synch
with the simulation. For example, after changing simulation inputs all of the
economics icons will change to the caution state. The second example at right shows
the state is partially complete – the equipment has been mapped and sized, but the
evaluation is not up to date. Additional states include ‘in progress’ (rotating wait
icon) and ‘error’ (red error icon).
The View Equipment button has been moved ahead of the Evaluate button to
encourage users to review equipment specifications before evaluating costs.
Auto-Evaluate
The new ‘Auto-Evaluate’ mode forces Aspen Plus to re-evaluate capital and
operating costs each time the simulation case is run. These calculations are
performed after the simulation report pass. It forces Aspen HYSYS to re-evaluate
capital and operating costs after each change. This feature supports the new
‘Activated Economics’ panel which displays the current capital and operating costs.
This feature also allows users to perform scenario studies to evaluate capital and
operating costs using Aspen Simulation Workbook. For example, you could use the
Scenario feature in Aspen Simulation Workbook to manipulate key operating
conditions, and plot changes to the estimated capital and/or operating costs.
Modifications to the Equipment Summary Grid

Several changes to the Equipment Summary Grid have been made to improve
usability. Column headers have been changed to make it easier to understand.
Specifically:
• Row name is a proper column heading
• Removed “Group” field
• Removed “Item Description” row for all object types
• Elevated “Tag Number” to first data row
• Added Capital and Utility costs to summary grid
• Added a new field “Allow resizing”, Yes/No, defaulting to Yes

Activated Analysis
Activated Analysis is a new feature designed to guide design decisions through

automatic energy and economic analysis. The Activated Analysis panel displays
key performance indicators which get updated each time you run the simulation
case.
The Activated Analysis panel can be displayed on the top, bottom, or side of the
screen, or in a floating window. You can also use ‘auto-hide’ to minimize the panel
temporarily. Right click the top of the control to see these options.
Activated Economics Analysis
The Activated Economic Analysis pane displays the predicted capital cost and
utility cost for the process. The reported values are based on calculations from
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer. They depend on the mapping and equipment
specifications set up through the integrated economic analysis workflow described
previously.
Process Modeling Enhancements

Numerous other enhancements have been introduced in V8.0 including the following:
• New mapping for HYSYS Fired Heater Unit Op
• Compressors in HYSYS sub-flowsheets now sized correctly
• Heat Exchanger Unit Ops now map to TEMA type exchangers as the default
(mapping default changed from BES to BEM tema type)
• Heat Exchanger Design Option added to Equipment Grid in A+ and HYSYS (for
example, allows for estimation of only a tube bundle or stab-in bundle)

• Tube and shell side pipe material selection has been enabled for Heat Exchangers
and Reboilers in the Equipment Grid for A+ and HYSYS
• Equipment Installation Option in Equipment Grid in A+ and HYSYS allows
specification for Spares or Revamps (see discussion below).
• Equipment and Installed weight have been added to the Excel Investment
Analysis results report in the native APEA interface.
New Map Options Dialog

The ‘Map Options’ dialog now includes options to size and evaluate equipment cost.
If you use Excel to size equipment, you can apply the ‘Customize sizing’ option to
force APEA to open the Excel sheets used to perform the sizing. This option allows
the user to enter input data or view the spreadsheets before continuing.
New Map Preview Dialog

The ‘Map Preview’ dialog has been re-designed to show more information. The list of
unit operations on the left side of the form now shows the name and type of each
unit operation. The ‘Configuration’ section at the top of the form displays a preview
of the equipment mapping (for RADFRAC and FLASH2 unit operations, which can be
mapped to different types of equipment configurations). The lower section of the
form displays the equipment tag, type, and description for each item mapped to the
unit operation selected on the left side of the form. To change mappings, select a
row and click on the combo box that appears under the ‘Equipment Type’ column.
Equipment tag names may be changed by clicking on the default tag name to make
the field editable. In addition, schematics are available representing the different
tower configurations to give a visual aid in selecting the desired configuration.
Hovering over the schematic with the mouse will enlarge the schematic.

Enhancements to Custom and Interactive Sizing
Custom and interactive sizing has been improved in V8.0. Users can over-ride built-
in sizing with their own sizing methods for specific equipment items. The general
case for customizing sizing for a class of equipment is through the existing template
workflow. From the mapping form, the user selects the custom sizing button to
select an alternate sizing method. The user then selects a sizing method for the
desired equipment.
The current interactive sizing remains the same and is only available from the
equipment summary grid. However, there is a new option to allow users to open the
Excel GUI by individual components. For only those components having a custom
model defined and the checkbox enabled, Excel will launch allowing for interactive
use of the custom model.
In addition, the custom model feature has been updated to allow retrieval of unit
operation data that can be used in custom model calculations.
New Feature to Lock Equipment Sizing

Users now have the ability to prevent the APEA from resizing equipment. The ability
to prevent equipment resizing will only be available from the Equipment Summary
grid. A new option will be available for each component to “Allow Resizing”. The
default will be “Yes” to allow resizing (this matches the current workflow). Users will
be able to select “No” to prevent resizing (due to flowsheet changes) of desired
components. Once No is selected for a component all previous sizing information and
design conditions (for example, Design Pressure/Temperature) will be retained
regardless of whether the simulation conditions have changed considerably. Since
this ability has inherent risk, the user must assume the liability.
Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM) updates

In the V8.0 release, the currency exchange rates, construction and engineering wage
rates have been updated for all the 89 locations available in the Analyzer Relocation
Module (ARM).

Line Sizing Equations Now Loaded From Volumetric
Model Library
In previous versions, the pipe line sizing equations specified in user defined
volumetric model library files were not loaded when the user defined volumetric
model library file was loaded for an equipment item. This has been fixed in V8.0 and
the line sizing equation inputs will now get loaded correctly.
Length Parameter Added to Control Utility Station

Drop Piping Length
CQ00432171: Add length parameter for utility station drops

In the ‘Utility pipe and utility stations’ (BPIPUTIL PIPE) piping plant bulk item, a new
field has been added to specify the length of utility station drop pipe lengths. When
utility stations are specified by user, this length will be used to estimate the drop
pipe length for the air, water, steam and condensate return utility station. The
default value is 100 FEET [30 M] for air, water and steam and 50 FEET [15 M] for
condensate return utility station.
Duplicate Line Numbers Are Not Allowed in

Installation Bulks | Pipe – Item Details
CQ00484064: EE V8.0 - Error reporting - Flange rating changes

in Merged project
In V7.3.2 or earlier, it was possible for the user to specify the same “Piping line
number” input for different entries in the Installation bulks | Pipe – Item Details
forms. This will not be allowed in V8.0. If user has existing projects which contains
installation bulk pipe lines with the same line number specified for multiple entries,
an error will be generated for that item and the user will have to correct the error for
the item and associated bulks to be correctly estimated. This change was made to

make the behavior in the application consistent with the restrictions applied for data
imported using the spreadsheet export/import feature.
‘Installation Option’ Moved to Component Main Form
CQ00468278: Move Installation Option to Equipment Form to

Enable Activated Economics
In V7.3.2 and earlier versions, on process equipment, plant bulks, quoted cost items
and equipment model library (EML) items, there was an input field for “Installation
option” on the Installation bulks | Mat’l/man-hour %adj., vessel tracing form. This
field has now been moved to the main form. It is located below the “Number of
identical items” field 5. The installation option field works the same was as it used to
work in V7.3.2 or earlier. However, since it is now directly available on the main
form, it can be accessed easily. It is now also available on the equipment grid in
integrated sizing and costing (ISC) in Aspen Plus or HYSYS, where it can be used to
specify if certain mapped equipment is a spare or existing equipment and adjust the
cost estimate accordingly.
New ‘Source of quote’ Field

A new ‘Source of quote’ field has been added to the main input form for process
equipment, quoted cost equipment and equipment model library (EML) items. It is
located next to the ‘Currency unit for material cost’ input field. The tables below
outline the behavior of this input field. A new Excel report “List of Equipment –
Source of Quote” has been added to the reporter which sorts all the equipment in the
project based on the source of quote.
• For quoted cost items and equipment model library (EML) items: (Cost is always
user specified):
Source of Quote – Source of Quote – SUBTYPE set by engine

Entered value Reported value
BLANK OTH: Other 1: User specified
SPECIFIED VALUE SPECIFIED VALUE 1: User specified
• For process equipment:
Source of Quote Quoted Cost Source of SUBTYPE set Notes

– Entered value per item – Quote – by engine
Entered Reported
value value
BLANK BLANK SG or SGL 0: System SGL for gas turbines,
calculated gas compressors and
boilers. SG for rest of
the items
BLANK SPECIFIED OTH 1: User
VALUE specified

SPECIFIED VALUE BLANK SPECIFIED IF user This assumes that
VALUE specified user is adjusting
value is not system value via
SG, SGL or material/man-hour
OTH: adjustments instead
1: User of entering a quoted
specified cost
ELSE:
0: System
calculated
SPECIFIED VALUE SPECIFIED SPECIFIED 1: User

VALUE VALUE specified
New Communication and Alarm Systems Plant Bulk

In V8.0 we have added a new plant bulk item to estimate communication and alarm
systems in APEA. See the “What’s new?” section for Aspen Capital Cost Estimator for
details on the new plant bulk item (Project Level features for Communication and
Alarm Systems is not available in APEA).
Five Additional Items Can be Specified for Installation

Bulks | Steel
In Installation Bulks | Steel for a component, five additional (eight total)
structural steel items can now be specified. This will let you better define the
equipment support steel structure at the installation bulks level.

Mega Project Performance Improvements
In earlier versions, loading and displaying components in the list view (center pane)
was a very time consuming task (this is especially true for large projects). In V8.0,
we have significantly improved the performance for loading items in the list view,
switching between various views (Project Basis View, Process View and Project View)
and sorting the list view items. This improves the usability of the product for
estimating mega projects.
New "List of Equipment - Source of Quote" Excel

Report
A new report, "List of Equipment - Source of Quote", is added for process equipment,
equipment model library (EML) item, and quoted cost items having an equipment
COA. This report will contain the source of quote for the items and will be sorted by
the source of quote value.

In the Aspen Icarus Reporter GUI, this report can be found at Full Import | Other
Reports | Project | List of Equipment - Source of Quote tree view location:
To run this report:

• Select the List of Equipment - Source of Quote report; then click Run
Report.
IPA Details Cost Report updated

In IPA Details Cost report, material cost for equipment is further broken down
into “Mechanical” and “Fabricated” equipment costs as shown below:

V7.3.2
Support for HYSYS duplicate stream & unit operation

names in hierarchies
HYSYS permits streams and/or unit operation blocks to have the same name in
different sub-flowsheets. However, when this data was loaded into APEA, the unit
op/stream data was lost because APEA does not represent this information in a
hierarchical way like HYSYS (that is APEA “flattens” the objects contained within
multiple sub-flowsheet levels). Because a unique name is needed for unit ops or
streams in APEA, objects having the same name would have data overwritten.
In V7.3.2, changes have been made in APEA to handle such cases and avoid data
loss. The names of all unitop blocks and streams in HYSYS subflowsheets are
appended with the HYSYS subflowsheet tag name. For example, a sub-flowsheet
(TP1) that contains unitop B1 and stream S1 when loaded in APEA will be displayed
as TP1-B1 and S1_@TP1 respectively. Also, two connector blocks will be added to
maintain the connectivity between the main flowsheet and sub-flowsheet. These
connector blocks can be mapped to a cost known item or ignored during mapping.
Similar methodologies are employed when handling a sub-flowsheet inside a sub-
flowsheet (that is, two hierarchies down).
Updated HYSYS tower packing mappings to APEA

In prior APEA releases, the packing type and HETP specified in a HYSYS tray sizing
utility was not loaded to APEA, resulting in loss of data. In APEA V7.3.2, this issue
has been corrected where packing types and HETP values specified in a HYSYS tray
sizing utility are now loaded into APEA. Because HYSYS has many more packing
types than APEA, a mapping has been developed to map the HYSYS packing types to
equivalent types in APEA. Thus, when a HYSYS packed tower (sized with the HYSYS
tray sizing utility) is mapped to an APEA costing case, the equipment form will show
the equivalent APEA packing type.
Improvements to the way tower height is calculated

from unit op packed bed specifications
Prior to V7.3.2, HETP specified in packed sizing sections in Aspen Plus or the HYSYS
tower sizing utility were not read into APEA. Thus, when the packed tower was sized
in APEA, tower height was calculated based on the HETP value specified in design
criteria. As a result of this, the tower height calculated by APEA did not match the
simulators.
In APEA V7.3.2, HETP values specified in the simulators are now loaded into APEA.
The APEA sizing routine will now look for simulator specified HETP values to calculate
column height. If no HETP simulator values are found, then the design criteria value
will be used. If a tower has multiple sections with different HETP values specified in
the simulation, such values will be used in sizing when the tower is mapped to Multi-
Diameter Tower or Double-Diameter Packed Tower in APEA.

Note: The HETP value specified in the simulator will not be displayed in the
interactive sizing dialog box. This field works in the same way that tray spacing does.
Improved APEA support for handling multiple tray

sections defined in HYSYS column
Prior to V7.3.2, if a HYSYS column had two or more tray sections specified, only data
for one section was loaded to APEA and data for the other section was lost. In APEA
V7.3.2, upgrades were made to the way APEA handles multiple section specifications
in HYSYS columns. The following table illustrates how APEA V7.3.2 handles potential
scenarios in HYSYS:
HYSYS column configuration APEA configuration
All standard sections APEA will load as one single column

with the name of first tray section.
The column will contain stage data
for all sections.
Any number of Standard sections One column containing all the

followed by Side Stripper standard sections and the other
column for the Side-Stripper Side
Rectifier followed by any number of APEA will load as two columns. One
Standard Sections column containing all the standard
sections having the name of first
standard tray section and the other
column for the Side-Rectifier.
Any number of Standard sections APEA will load as three columns:

followed by Side Stripper followed One column containing the first set
by any number of Standard Sections of standard sections, one column for
the Side-Stripper, and the last
column for another set of standard
sections. Side-Strippers and Side-
Rectifiers are now always treated as
separate columns.
EDR ASME Plate and Tube material mapping to APEA

Aspen Plus or HYSYS simulations having exchanger unit ops designed with Aspen
Technology’s EDR products can be successfully loaded into APEA costing with the
EDR sizing information preserved. Although the rigorous sizing results from EDR are
preserved in APEA, the shell and tube material specifications made in EDR were not
persisted in the APEA costing case. In APEA V7.3.2, mappings have been created
between EDR ASME materials and APEA materials for both plate and tubes. The
specified EDR material is read and mapped to an equivalent APEA material. This
improves transparency and lessens input of the same information when using
different tools. However, with all mapping type operations, users are encouraged to
validate and make changes as needed.

Note: The EDR material database is extensive and thus there are situations
(especially with materials not widely used) where an equivalent APEA material is not
available. In these situations, a question mark (?) will be displayed in the
component form prompting users to intervene and select a suitable alternative from
the APEA materials list that can be used in costing.
Number of Identical Items added to APEA List View

A new column, No. Items, has been added to list view in the Project Basis View.
This column shows the number of identical items of each component in the project.
The default position is after the Model column and can be moved to any location or
made invisible by changing the list view settings.
Updates to Resize behavior for magnetic drive pumps

to be consistent with other pump types
When Resize operations were performed on Magnetic Drive Pumps, driver power
and pump efficiency were not being overridden. This is not consistent behavior when
compared to other pump models where these values are overridden (during resize).
This has been corrected in APEA V7.3.2 where these values will now be overridden
during resizing of Magnetic Drive Pumps.
Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger Tube Geometry

Parameters added to the Design Criteria
Tube Geometry information has been added to the Heat Exchanger Design Criteria
form. This lets you specify tube length, tube outside diameter, and tube pitch in one
place (that is, design criteria) if different from default values.

New Custom Model for Vertical Vessel Sizing
A new custom model template has been created for sizing vertical separators with up
to three input streams and two output streams. The custom model is intended to
illustrate how to retrieve stream data from a process simulator and use that
information to perform simplified sizing calculations to design a vertical vessel. It is
not intended to match the sizing results from APEA. Nozzle Sizing is also included to
demonstrate how nozzles can be defined for a vessel (using a custom model).
However, once nozzles are defined, this will override any system generated default
nozzles. The calculations contained in this example are based on the default APEA IP
project units, custom or metric units will require user conversions in this
spreadsheet.
Note: The custom model file is provided as a Microsoft Excel 2007/2010 file having
the .xlsx extension. You should have one of these versions of Excel in order to use
this custom model.
Orifice plate and flanges added to the bulk pipe

component
In the plant bulk pipe or installation bulk pipe input forms, for the “Valve or fitting A-
F type” input fields, a new option – OP: Orifice plate and union – has been added
to the drop down list. When you select this option and specify the quantity in the
adjoining field, the appropriate number of orifice plates and orifice unions will be
estimated for that pipe. Prior to this enhancement, this fitting type was only
available with the Above grade or buried yard pipe item which has been
deprecated. After this enhancement, this fitting option will be available for Above
grade or buried pipe plant bulk item which is the preferred way of specifying plant
bulk pipe and also for the installation bulk pipe.

"Back of panel option" input field for instrumentation
bulk items removed from input form
The "Back of panel option" field in the instrumentation bulks input form has been
removed from the input form. To support existing projects having this specified, the
field will now be hidden. However, existing input will continue to be read by the
evaluation engine so that existing projects will continue to work as before.
Volume units input field removed from VT STORAGE

model
Prior to V7.3.2, for the Flat bottom storage tank, optional roof equipment item
(model = DVT STORAGE), there was a Volume units input field to specify the units
for the tank volume. This input field has been removed in V7.3.2. You can specify the
tank volume in GALLONS for I-P unit system and M3 for metric units. If existing
projects contain equipment items of this type, the volume will be updated and
converted (if necessary) to the appropriate unit based on the project units of
measure.

In V7.3.2 the currency exchange rates, construction wage rates and engineering
wage rates have been updated for all 89 worldwide locations.

V7.3
Run multiple Economic Evaluation products/processes

simultaneously
• You now have the ability to open multiple projects simultaneously from among
any of the three Economic Evaluation programs of the same version (Process
Economic Analyzer, Capital Cost Estimator, and In-Plant Cost Estimator).
• This includes the ability to work on several Aspen Plus and/or HYSYS costing
cases simultaneously.
• Multiple Reporter sessions are capable when different project/scenario names are
open. However, neither Excel nor Word support opening duplicate file names, so
reports run in one instance will need to be renamed before reports of the same
type (for example, Excel reports) are run in another instance.
• In order to support multiple processes, the project iccache location was changed
to capture the project and scenario names (previously only the project name was
used). As an example (for the default installation), when opening the ETOH
Sample Project in V7.3, the new iccache location will be:
° \Local Settings\Application Data\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation
V7.3\Projects\Sample Projects\ETOH
• As a reference the V7.2 location for the same sample project is:
° \Local Settings\Application Data\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation
V7.2\Projects\Sample Projects
Note: The Cached Project Shortcut located in My Documents\AspenTech\My

Economic Evaluation V7.3 Files will still migrate to:
\Local Settings\Application Data\AspenTech\Economic Evaluation
V7.3\Projects
This lets you select which project cache they want to access in the event multiple
projects are open.
• Certain restrictions apply:
° Opening projects with the same project/scenario name in multiple instances
will not be permitted even if they are in different applications. An example of
this is if the Sample Projects\Gas Plant is open in ACCE (instance 1) and in
another instance (APEA instance 2), a project with the name Sample
Projects\Gas Plant is attempted to be opened, even if the projects are located
in different places. In this example, an error message will be generated
either to close the original project/scenario or to open a project with a
different name.
° Saving a project/scenario with the same name as one already open (even if
they are in different applications) will not be permitted. In this instance, an
error message will be generated either to close the original project/scenario
or to save the project with a unique name.
° Although projects and products may be opened and worked on
simultaneously, it is recommended that certain actions be allowed to
complete before activating the same action in a different instance. As an

example, allow a project evaluation (or a mapping/sizing) stage to complete
in instance 1 before performing a project evaluation (or mapping/sizing) in
instance 2. Note: instances can be a combination of APEA, ACCE, AICE,
and/or Costing cases within Aspen Plus or Aspen HYSYS.
° Opening of Library files in one instance will lock out that particular library file
from being opened in another instance, even if the file is attempted to be
opened in a different product. An example of this is if in instance 1 (ACCE),
the EML IP Sample library is opened, a lock will be generated which will
prevent this library file from being opened in another instance (for example,
APEA instance 2). The same policy applies to opening projects located in the
same place.
Note: In order to support multiple simultaneous processes, a change was made in

the closing behavior of the ICEdit application (for viewing ccp reports).
Consequently, ICEdit no longer closes when a project is opened or closed. Previously,
any running instances of ICEdit would be shut down when a project was closed or
opened. In order to differentiate between multiple CCP reports, it is recommended to
use unique ccp file names. CCP file names are defined when a project evaluation is
made. In addition, when multiple ccp reports are opened, the following will display in
the status toolbar (which will disappear when the ICEdit application is shutdown):
Cryogenic Double-Walled, Full Containment Storage

Tank model
• A new equipment model has been developed for Cryogenic Double-Walled, Full
Containment Storage Tanks (specific details related to this new model is
presented in the Icarus Evaluation Engine section of this document).
• Specific to running this model in APEA since pile specifications are not available,
the following will apply.
• If piles are required (based on soil strength), the system will determine the piling
parameters based on the following parameters:
° Pile type = ‘AUGR’, Auger cast pile
° Pile depth = 60 FT
° Pile compressive capacity = Calculated by the system (Min = 50 TONS, Max =
250 TONS)
° Pile spacing = 6 FT (if the required compressive capacity exceeds 250.0
TONS, the spacing will be decreased in 0.5 FT increments to a minimum of
3.0 FT)
• Further piling specifications can be made by opening the saved APEA project in
ACCE or using ACCE layered with APEA from the beginning.

• Pricing updates for the Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM) have been made to all
89 worldwide locations.

Removed default speed from input form for certain
centrifugal pumps
For the following centrifugal pump models:
• Standard ANSI single stage pump
• Plastic ANSI single stage pump
• API 610 pump
• General service pump
• Standard ANSI magnetic drive pump
The input form in the GUI previously showed the default driver speed as 30 x Hz
(1800 rpm in US basis). However, if speed was not specified, the evaluation engine
would design the pump for a higher speed if the head requirements exceeded
internally set limits. To better reflect this behavior the default value was removed
from the input form in the GUI. A descriptive note was added to this field to indicate
that the speed varies with pump head. In the pump head input field, the descriptive
note typically provides the maximum head values for a particular speed.
Integrated simulation and sizing/costing Costing

template support
• A new method for creating projects via templates is now available. Templates are
blank projects containing various project level specifications (the type of
specifications that can be made within a template will vary with the Product used
to create the template, that is APEA, ACCE, and/or AICE) without any project
components. Thus, all the specifications available in the project basis view can be
defined within the template. As an example, APEA users can customize
component mappings, design criteria, custom sizing (via Sizing Selection),
investment parameters, and so on based on internal company standards and/or
location specific requirements within a template. The saved template will have an
extension .izt located in the EE_Templates folder. The saved templates can
then be used while creating a project. This provides an advantage in that users
will not have to enter the same data multiple times for every project created
which simplifies the workflow in setting up project level specifications. In
addition, you can also save existing projects (after deleting all project
components and areas) as templates if valuable project specifications are to be
persisted.
• In APEA new File menu options have been added to create New Templates,
Open existing Templates, and to Save As Template (discussed previously).
In addition a new Templates Tab has been added to the right side palette for
easy retrieval of existing templates (shown below):
• When templates are opened, the Project and Process View tabs are disabled
because templates do not contain any project components. In addition, all icons
such as Load/Map/Evaluate in the toolbar are disabled since these operations

do not have functions within template mode. Further information on creating and
importing templates into projects can be found in the User Guide.
Note: Templates created in ACCE containing multiple contractors, construction

workforces, process control, and power distribution hierarchies can be used when
creating APEA projects. However, these specifications will not be used and the
default APEA contractor, PD, PC, and so on specifications will govern instead.
• Integrated sizing and costing users can select desired templates to be used in via
the new costing options form in Aspen Plus and Aspen HYSYS before activating
costing. The specified template will be used in creating the costing case.
Note: Specific only to Integrated Sizing and Costing simulations, if custom sizing
methods are defined (via Excel spreadsheets) either in a template or during Sizing
step, the custom model will run silently in the background and the results will be
returned as defined in the spreadsheet. This is different behavior vs. running custom
models within the APEA GUI where Excel will appear and run interactively for each
custom model defined/selected.
APEA support for stream pricing defined in Aspen Plus

• If stream pricing is defined in Aspen Plus, APEA will automatically retrieve the
pricing data and based on flowsheet convention (process inputs vs. outputs) will
automatically create and assign the data to either the Raw Material or Product
Specifications.
Updated Aspen Plus tower packing mappings to APEA

• The mappings of Aspen Plus tower packing specifications to APEA packings has
been updated. As there are many more packings available in Aspen Plus than
APEA, many packings were mapped to like or similar APEA packings. Users
should review the default mappings and change the specification as necessary in
APEA (or the equipment grid in Aspen Plus).
Improvements to remember selections feature of

Reporter
• The Reporter allows users to select and run multiple Standard reports or Excel
reports or Update On Demand reports. These selections can be retained for
further use by clicking the Remember Selections button shown in the figure
below. When Remember Selections is used, the selections are retained and
shown the next time the Reporter application is run. In V7.3, the Reporter will
retain the selections in both the product as well as the project.
• In V7.2 and prior versions the selections are cleared once the reports are
displayed. In V7.3 these selections are displayed until the user chooses to do
otherwise.

• Remembering selections product wise: in V7.2 and prior versions, the
Remember Selections feature did not store the selections product-wise separately
and only retained the last selections made amongst all three Economic Evaluation
Products (ACCE, AICE, and APEA). In V7.3, this limitation has been removed so
the Reporter can now retain the selections made for each of the 3 products
separately.
• In addition, when the Reporter application is now run on a newly created project,
the last remembered selections (if defined) for that product type, will be shown
by default. Similarly, for an existing unsaved project, the last remembered
selections (if any), for that product type will be shown by default.
• Remembering selections project wise: in V7.3, selections can be saved
project wise as well. The selections will be saved permanently when the project is
saved. When the Reporter is invoked on such a saved project, the retained
selections will be displayed.
Note: Clicking the Remember Selections button will save or update the selections
made within the current report mode (Standard Reports or Excel Reports or Update
On Demand) only. If you want to save or update the selections for other type of
reports then you need to select that report type and then click on Remember
Selections button after selecting the reports.
Note: These selections should be cleared before adding or removing any new custom
reports.
Remarks cards are added to spreadsheet view

• In the spreadsheet view for Heat Exchangers, Pumps, Compressors, Quoted
Items, Towers and Vessels, two new fields displaying Remarks 1 and Remarks
2 have been added at the end of the list by default.

Display warning message when scaling rules do not
apply due to equipment limits
• Warning messages will now be generated after project scaling (via ASM) is
performed notifying users if scaling rules could not be applied to certain
equipment components due to min/max limits on equipment specs being
reached. In the event scaled values fall outside either min. or max. equipment
spec limits, the pre-scaled value is retained. Once an error condition is met, a
user has the option to either stop the scaling operation or continue. If stop is
clicked then further operations based on users selection in the Decision Analyzer
dialog (for example, evaluation) will not be run. These error messages are
similar to scan errors dialog and will provide users with a listing of components in
which the ASM rules cannot be applied (see example below). In prior versions, no
warning messages were generated giving users no indication that scaling was not
performed on certain components. This led to a time consuming task for large
projects of having to review each component to validate proper application of
scaling rules.
Spreadsheet View for Quoted Components

In V7.3 the spreadsheet view has been extended to included quoted cost
components. This will enable users to modify COA, material costs, and so on of all
quoted items in one form. A new menu item under View | Spreadsheet View |
Quoted Item | All has been added to display the form (example below).
Weight field on item Options Material/Manhour

additions form/Manhour additions form
• Total weight per item field has been added to the Material and Manhour Additions
form. The Quantity adjustment option on this form will affect the new weight
specification in the same manner it is applied to material cost and/or labor hours.

This field would enable users to account for the weights of special items to more
accurately calculate freight costs.
Specify quantity for Quoted Equipment Items

• A new quantity field has been added to Quoted Cost item form which allows real
number specifications. If quantity adjustment option is specified as Y or unit of
measure is ITEMS, then total material cost = Material cost per unit * Quantity *
Number of identical items. A similar calculation is done for labor hours and
weight.
• In the equipment results section of the .ccp report, Quantity will be displayed in
place of Number of identical items. As before, Number of identical items will be
displayed as ITEMS in the left most column. Previously for quoted bulk item
material cost and COA are not displayed in this block. From V7.3 these two
values will also appear:

Due to this addition, there will be significant changes when an old project having
quoted item is opened in V7.3:
1. For old projects containing quoted items with Quantity Adjustment = N and no
installation bulks specified, the following will occur when migrated to V7.3:
Number of identical items value will be migrated to the new Quantity field
and Number of identical items will be set to 1.
2. For old projects containing quoted items with the Quantity Adjustment = Y and
no installation bulks specified, the following will occur when migrated to V7.3:
and Number of identical items will be set to 1.
3. For old projects containing quoted items with Quantity Adjustment = Y and
any installation bulks specified, the following will occur when migrated to V7.3:
and Number of identical items will be set to ?. This will alert you to specify
the Number of identical items since under these conditions, the system
cannot interpret the intent of the specifications. This will alert you that
interaction is necessary to complete the evaluation.
4. Similar behavior will be observed when importing specs file.
Note: When migrating old projects containing Quoted Cost items into EE V7.3, you
should review the results for these items after the upgrade. The inclusion of Quoted
Cost items into the spreadsheet view can facilitate this review.
Import data from 2nd level sub flowsheet from HYSYS

to APEA
• Prior to V7.3 data from only one level of a HYSYS sub-flowsheet could be
imported into APEA. A change was made in V7.3 to read data from all sub-
flowsheet levels. The data is correctly transferred if there are no duplicate stream
names and unit op names within all the levels.
New method for recovering crashed projects

A new method for recovering crashed projects has been implemented in V7.3 for all
Economic Evaluation products. In prior versions, crashed projects were recovered by
zipping the iccache folder to an archive location specified by the user. Starting with

the V7.2 release, changes were made to file handling methods to improve
performance and support Mega projects. Due to these changes, the crash/recovery
methods previously used were no longer valid/effective. Thus, a new recovery
method has been designed and employed in V7.3.
A Specs file will now be written to the project iccache folder as a timed event based
on a callback function. A new option is available in the Backup/Recovery section
within Preferences (Timed Recovery) allowing a time interval to be specified on
how often the specs file is to be generated (the option can also be turned off). When
a project crash now occurs, to a user the recovery procedure will appear the same as
previous versions, that is the system will detect a crash upon re-opening the
application and the user will be prompted as to whether the project should be
recovered. If the user selects to recover the project, a new project/scenario name
will need to be specified. Once the project/scenario name is specified, the recovery
process will use the specs file in the iccache folder to regenerate the project. In
addition to recovering components, project specs and any attached PID xml files will
also be recovered. In the current version, the process will not recover user specified
attributes created using UserAttributes.exe.
Note: The recovery process is not real time so there may be a time lag between a
crash event and the point at which the recovery was last made. Upon recovery,
users should review the recovered project for any missing changes/entries to the
project. Missing items or specifications will have to be re-entered in the recovered
project. As mentioned, the default recovery is set at 10 minutes, a shorter duration
can be set if deemed necessary.
Updated link to latest version of Cost Data Online

WinRACE application
• The link with WinRACE has been updated in V7.3 allowing users to link with
either WinRACE 8.0 or 9.0. If both versions are installed, only a link to WinRACE
9.0 will be active.
Removal of Automatic Item Evaluation feature

• Due to lack of use, the Automatic Item Evaluation feature has been removed
from the Tools | Options menu and is no longer available.
Support for MS Windows 7 64 bit Operating System

and MS Office 2010 (32 bit version only)
• APEA V7.3 can be run on the MS Windows 7 64-bit operating system and is
compatible with MS Office 2010 (32-bit version only).

V7.2.1
The V7.2.1 release of Aspen Process Economic Analyzer (APEA) and the V7.2 release
of Aspen Plus and HYSYS enables users of Integrated Sizing and Costing within these
application to work seamlessly together. Previously, in order for Integrated Sizing
and Costing to function properly within V7.1 Aspen Plus/HYSYS and V7.2 APEA,
emergency patches had to be applied for the simulator products. This is no longer
required as Integrated Sizing and Costing in the V7.2 simulation tools will function
transparently with the V7.2.1 release of APEA OOTB. Projects and costing cases
created in either Aspen Plus or HYSYS V7.1 will work with the new software versions.
It is recommended to back-up these projects before installing the new versions.
The area spreadsheet view capabilities are no longer enabled within APEA. This
option should only have been available in ACCE since the underlying options pertain
only to ACCE and are not available within APEA via a right-click area modify. The
correction is to gray out in V7.2.1 APEA the Spreadsheet View | Areas.

V7.2
The following new features and enhancements are contained in the V7.2 release of
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer (APEA). However, current Aspen Plus and Aspen
HYSYS V7.1 users realize these improvements upon the installation of APEA V7.2.
Note: In order for Integrated Sizing and Costing within Aspen Plus and Aspen HYSYS
V7.1 to utilize the following improvements in APEA V7.2, V7.1 Emergency Patches for
both Aspen Plus and/or Aspen HYSYS must also be applied. Check the Aspen Tech
support website for access to these EPs.
Enhancements to Integrated Sizing and Costing in Aspen Plus

and Aspen HYSYS
A correction was made that allows users to make changes to a simulation (after the
creation of a costing case) and run the simulation without having to create a new
costing scenario every time to realize the simulation changes. In addition, previously
entered equipment mappings and specifications (for example, Materials of
Construction, TEMA Type, and so on) are retained.
After making changes and converging the simulation, the updated data is reloaded
into costing by pressing the Load button. During the mapping step, the “Last
Mapping” option is selected by default in the mapping dialog and permits mapping
changes via the “Map Preview” dialog. During this cycle, pressing the size button
performs a “Resize” (instead of size) since the equipment components are already
sized during the initial run. This enables persistence of any component specific data
previously entered in the equipment grid forms during initial run. As an example, if
Materials of Construction (MOC) for the mapped components are specified during the
initial run and the simulation is subsequently changed, the initial MOC specifications
are maintained when the data is reloaded. This pertains to newly created simulation
and costing projects using APEA V7.2.
For existing simulations containing costing projects created in previous versions of
APEA (that is, V7.1), there may be mapping losses for columns/towers the first time
data is reloaded/mapped into costing (after simulation changes described previously
are made). If this occurs, make another minor change in the simulation, then
perform a reload, then make the simulation change back to the desired value and
reload. Original mappings for columns/towers appear as expected.
Note: If mapping changes are made after reloading all the previously defined data for
the unit op(s) is lost.
Significant performance improvements are noticed when Loading and Mapping
simulation data into a Costing project

V7.1
• Further improvements for equipment and area data entry via grid mechanism
• Transfer operating temperature for heat exchanger unit operations
Further Improvements for Equipment and Area Data

Entry via Grid Mechanism
• Provide additional equipment breakdowns so the equipment grids can display
input specifications for more alike component types. From the original View Menu
a user will be able to go directly to any category under the spreadsheet view
either with a single drop down or dropdown with -> to go to a further level. The
breakdowns that will be presented are:
° Vessels
° All
° Horizontal
° Vertical
° Pressure (containing models: CYLINDER, MULTI WALL, JACKETED,
SPHERE, SPHEROID)
° Storage (containing models: STORAGE, GAS HOLDER, CRYOGENIC, PLAST
TANK, WOOD TANK, CONE BTM, LIVE BTM, SAN TANK)
° Tile Chest (containing models: CHEST CYL, CHEST RYL, CHEST MTL)
° Heat Exchangers
° All
° Reboilers
° Heat Exchangers
° All
° TEMA (containing models: FIXED T S, FLOAT HEAD, U TUBE, TEMA, PRE
ENGR)
° Sanitary (containing models: CORRUGATED, HOT WATER, MULTI P F, STM
HE MOD
° Air Cooler (containing model AIR COOLER)
° Miscellaneous (containing all models not included above)
° Compressors

° All
° Gas
° Centrifugal (containing models: CENTRIF, CENTRIF IG)
° Reciprocating (containing models: RECIP MOTR, RECIP GAS)
° Air
° Pumps
° All
° Gear
° Positive displacement
° Centrifugal
° All
° Process (containing models: ANSI, ANSI PLAST, API 610, GEN SERV, API
610 IL, HIGH SPEED, IN LINE, MAG DRIVE)
° Vertical/Sump (containing models: AXIAL FLOW, CANNED, TURBINE)
° Sanitary/Stock (containing models: PULP STOCK, SAN PUMP, FLUME PUMP)
° Towers
° All
° Single
° Double
• Allow user defined custom attributes to appear on the equipment grids (not area
grids). Currently in the V7.0 release, user defined custom attributes will only
appear on the standard equipment component input forms and will not be shown
on the spreadsheet grids. This prevents a user from exporting all of the
information about the equipment. Implementing this capability will enable all
fields that appear on the standard input forms to also appear on the equipment
grids.
Using the ALL COMPONENTS should also include the various equipment
spreadsheet views. If a user wants a custom attribute to appear on a specific
spreadsheet view, then the MODEL name use should be that shown in the
preferences for the view the attribute is to appear in.
• Allow User Customization of Spreadsheet Forms. Use new options in the
Tools/Preferences, a user can now define the desired fields to be visible in the
various flavors of Spreadsheet Views in the GUI. The default fields displayed will
be predetermined by Aspen and users will be able to make desired modifications.
Transfer Operating Temperature for Heat Exchanger

Unit Operations
• Operating temperatures specified in simulator heat exchanger unit ops are now
transferred to Aspen Process Economic Analyzer to help in scoping and design of
insulation thicknesses.

Compatibility Notes
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer V7.0 and V7.1 can be installed and used at the
same time as version 2006.5 and other previous versions of Aspen Process Economic
Analyzer.

V7.0
• Multiple component copying capabilities
• Crystal Reports upgrade
• Data entry for equipment and area specifications via grid mechanism
• On-line help functionality
• New reports
Multiple Component Copying Capabilities

This feature enables selecting and copying multiple components and areas from an
external project. The same unit and currency conversion capabilities introduced in
previous versions are maintained. In addition, target rule behavior regarding copying
is the same as previous versions:
• Areas copied to the Project level will create a new Report Group and Area
• Areas copied to a Report Group will create new area in the Report Group
• Areas copied on another Area will copy all components to that area
Note: This feature will not permit simultaneous area and component selections.
Crystal Reports Upgrade

The version of Crystal Reports has been upgraded to Version XI. This will enable
users to prepare custom reports using this version of Crystal Reports. No changes to
existing Icarus Crystal Reports will result from this upgrade.
Data Entry for Equipment and Area Specifications via

Grid Mechanism
A new mode of inputting and/or editing data specifications is available in the GUI.
New Grid type (that is, spreadsheet) layouts enable the following:
Modification of Area Specs across all areas by

Discipline
Modification of Equipment Specs can be made by equipment type (for example,
pumps, vessels, heat exchangers, towers, and so on)
The new grids will expedite data entry, edit, and review in an easier grid layout.
From the grid, users will be able to:
• Access main component forms to access installation bulks, VPIDS, Volumetric
Model, and so on
• Copy and paste data to and from Excel

• Sort by different equipment type or column (for example, Materials of
Construction, Flowrate, and so on)
• Add/Delete components
This new feature will help increase data entry speed and review.
On-Line Help Functionality

Lets you press F1 on equipment component forms and the help will navigate to the
applicable topic in the reference guide. This feature is enabled only for equipment in
this release.
New Reports
New Standard Area Reports are included with this release: Component Listings with
Equipment Cost (equipment cost was not previously included in the component
listings reports). The new reports are located:
• Full Import_Other Reports_Area_Component Listings_Sorted by ID
• Full Import_Other Reports_Area_Component Listings_Sorted by Name

ACCE New Features and Enhancements in
V9
The following new features and enhancements were added in release V9:
New External SP3DImport Mapping Workflow

A new workflow has been added to let users modify the mapping codes or add new codes used
in the SP3D Import feature. The workflow uses an Excel file which behaves in a similar way to
the existing customer external library files. By default it contains the table of component code
mappings between SP3D and ACCE. You can add and modify the code mappings as you please
and save the file to finalize your changes. Once the library file is added to the project, the
project references the newly defined 3D code mappings when an import from SP3D is done.
Updated and Improved P&ID Editor

The P&ID editor interface is updated and improved, with new capabilities for categorizing,
tagging and connecting drawing components. The new P&ID editor is compatible with any
previously created ACCE or APEA drawings.

(CQ00584609) A new field, “Number of bents” has been added to the Pipe truss bridge
component form. The field has a minimum of 2 bents and a maximum of 4 bents. The default
is 2 bents (4 columns). When 3 bents are specified, 6 columns are provided and the truss
length is divided into two equal spans. When 4 bents are specified, 8 columns are provided
and the truss length is divided into three equal spans. The “Number of bents” is reported in
the design data sheet for the Pipe truss bridge component.

(CQ00600989) Use the Epoxy Grout for Pumps and Compressors settings to specify epoxy
grout for pumps and compressors. The default setting is "N." If set to ‘Y,’ epoxy grout is used
for all pumps and compressors in the project that include a foundation and a grout line item.
See the topic “Epoxy Grout Appendix” for a list of applicable pumps and compressors. In this
case, the line item description for COA 445 is updated to “EPOXY GROUT.” The epoxy grout
quantity, material cost, and manpower is generated.
A grout height of 6 inches is typically used for small pumps that are less than 500 HP.A grout
height of 12 inches is typically used for large pumps and compressors.
compressors. For estimating purposes it is assumed that the pump or compressor base plate
area is equal to the equipment footprint area.
Use the associated setting Grout Quantity (Adjustment %) to adjust the calculated grout
quantity to user requirements. The percentage applies to both cement based non-shrink grout
and epoxy grout. The default is 100% of the system calculated grout quantity.

Manpower Productivity Expert (MPE) is a utility that has been delivered within all products of
Aspentech Economic Evaluation family. MPE is implemented using a technology that can only
run on 32-bit Windows. Beginning in V9, 32-bit Windows is no longer supported. As a result,
Version 8.8.2 was the last release of the Aspen Economic Evaluation family to include MPE.

For more details, including an extensive FAQ section, see the associated document on the
Aspentech EE support website.
Digit Limit for "Number of piles" field on civil bulks form

increased from 3 to 6
(CQ00586316) The entry limit for The "Number of piles" field on the civil bulks form has been
increased from 3 digits to 6 digits.
Bargeable Module Changes

(CQ00520469) The maximum bargeable module (BRGM) height has been updated from 100
FT [30.4 M] to 170 FT [51.8 M].
We are not allowing BRGM sub-modules with heights greater

than 100 FT [30.4 M] to be stacked.
The area level seismic acceleration is now used for BRGM foundation design instead of the
maximum of the area level seismic acceleration and the module shipping acceleration. As a
result, users may possibly see a change in foundation quantities for bargeable modules in
existing projects depending on bargeable module geometry, weight, shipping acceleration,
area level seismic acceleration, and area level soil type / allowable bearing capacity.
New “N” Option To Suppress Volumetric And Area Level Bulks,

While Allowing Multiple Contractors And Workforces In ACCE
(CQ00590864) A new "N" option has been added to the "Suppress default
equipment/area/project bulks" field in the "General project data" form.
The "M" option suppresses equipment volumetric model bulks and most of the system
developed area and project bulks. It ignores Engineering and Construction (crew mixes, craft
names) Workforce, Power Distribution, Process control, Panel Board, Contracts, Project
Execution Schedule, and all area design basis options to develop estimates and reports. No
standard Kbase estimates and reports are developed.
The 'N' option suppresses equipment volumetric model bulks and most of the system
developed area bulks. However multiple contractors and consets are allowed and standard
Kbase estimates and reports are generated for the 'N' option.
New "Basis for Estimate Template" Attachment Option in

Preferences
(CQ00592052) A new section called “Estimate Plan” has been added to the Tools | Options |
Preference | Miscellaneous tab, where the full path (including file name and extension) to the
Estimate Plan Document has been specified. You can set a new path if desired.
Ability to Select External Steel Files by Area

(CQ00590851) Individual steel material external files may now be attached at the area level
as well as the project level. Using this feature, you load multiple external files (up to 10) into
the project at once, and then assign individual files at the project level and/or the area level
using the Steel material external file field in the Civil/Steel Design Basis setup table for the
project, or the Area – Area Steel Specifications table for a selected Area.

(CQ00562177) A total % field is added to sum the individual percentages. A note on project
definition is added.
Better User Control Of Fire Water Header, Loop, And Lateral

Piping Calculations
(CQ00586797) A new field “Firewater loop length” is added to the form after the “Length
parameter” input field. The default for this field is the current default value of 2 x Length
parameter. If you specify a value in this field then the specified value is used to calculate the
firewater loop length.
User Tag Added to the Excel Pipe Line List report

(CQ00582749) Now it is easier to match an equipment designation to a user tag if you
renumber the components and the equipment designation changes.
Custom Naming Convention Approach For Power Control

Systems
(CQ00583412) User defined descriptions in the power distribution, process control and panel
board item forms are now be displayed in the Component/Source column in the excel reports
instead of the internal names (MSS 1, USS 1, CTL 1 etc.) that were previously being used.

Primavera is updated to P6 Professional 15.2. Java version prior to 8.x is not supported.

V8.8.2
The following new features and enhancements were added in release V8.8.2:

Evaluation Help.
Specify pipe remote shop productivity and wage rate

(CQ00373863)
Two new fields have been added to Design Basis | Piping Specs | General form and
the area level piping specs form, to allow users to specify pipe remote shop
productivity and wage rate. The productivity can be specified as a percent of base.
The default value will be 100. The wage rate specified by the user will be considered
to be all-in (loaded) wage rate for all crafts. These two new fields are not applicable
to module type areas. In module areas, we estimate each remote shop activity
separately and report it as man-hours and labor cost. This allows users to control the
wage rate and productivity using the construction work-force assigned to the
appropriate contractor. For further details, refer to Chapter 3 of the Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator User Guide or to the help section.

(CQ00582780)

Separate Steel Fabrication Costs From Steel Material Costs In
Steel External File (CQ00532506)
You now can separate steel fabrication costs from steel material costs using the new
Fabrication Cost column in the Steel External file. The fabrication cost per lb [or kg]
should include the typical steel fabrication operations (i.e. CNC Controlled
Equipment, Sawing, Drilling, Punching, Flame Cutting, Plasma Cutting, Shearing,
Coping, and Welding).
If you enter a fabrication cost per lb [or kg] in the fabrication field, two report lines
are generated per item - the first represents steel material cost, steel erection man-
hours, and steel labor cost.
The next line (with “FAB” added to the description ) includes the estimated cost of
typical steel fabrication operations (i.e. CNC Controlled Equipment, Sawing, Drilling,
Punching, Flame Cutting, Plasma Cutting, Shearing, Coping, and Welding). There is
no labor cost on the FAB line since labor is still considered a part of the steel material
cost.
A subtype 698 is also added to the fabrication line for identification in the Database.
Previous versions of the Steel External file are compatible with the new file format.
Pile size field added to general civil/steel specs and area civil
specs (CQ00275578)
A new pile size field is added to the general civil/steel specs and the area civil specs.
The pile size specified at the project level may be overridden by the area level
specification. An error message is generated if a specified pile size is not available for
the selected pile type.
The new pile size scroll-list contains a truncated list of common pile sizes. You can
select “PILE SIZES…” from the scroll-list to review all available pile sizes and default
compressive capacities for each pile type in the system. You can make a size
selection from this new dialog box as well. The pile size descriptions in the scroll-list
and dialog box change depending on the Units of Measure selected for the project
(i.e. I-P or MET).

The table in the right pane shows the available sizes and default compressive
capacity for each pile type in the system. The default size for each pile type is also
shown and is applicable when:
• The pile size field is left blank at the project level
• A different pile type is selected at the project level and the area level pile size
field is left blank.
Pile tensile capacity calculations at the area level

(CQ00591026)
The area level pile tensile capacity was previously calculated incorrectly when the
following combination of specifications were provided:
• The pile type specified at the area level is the same as the pile type specified at
the project level.
• The pile compressive capacity specified at area level is different than the
compressive capacity at the project level.
• The pile tensile capacity at the area level is left blank.
The calculations have been fixed and the pile tensile capacity at the area level is now
equal to 1/2 of the pile compressive capacity at the area level unless specified
otherwise by the user.
Minimum values for the pile compressive and tensile capacities at the project and
area levels have been added and are based on the minimum values checked in the
cost engine code.
• Pile compressive capacity minimum value: 9 TONS [8.2 TONNE]
• Pile tensile capacity minimum value: 4.5 TONS [4.1 TONNE]

Updated weights and costs in the module summary report
(CQ00584376) [ACCE]
The following changes have been made to ensure the weights and costs for each
account tally with each other when tallied across the module summary report and
COA summaries by area or TDC item summaries by area. These changes were also
included in V8.8 CP1.
• Electrical COA’s 733, 743, and 744 (Motor Control Centers and MCC Equipped
Space) are not included in the module summary report.
• All other costs and weights for COA's assigned to the module contractor are
included the module summary report and are based on the information printed to
the database A-Table.
• Module fireproofing and paint line items have been moved into the module
section of the .ccp report. This is necessary to account for these bulk weights in
the module setting line item.
• The remote shop paint option is used by default for equip, piping, and steel
primer/finish in modular areas.
• The weights for all paint line items including brush clean and sandblast have been
set to zero.
The table and examples below summarize the module changes in ACCE
V8.8CP1/V8.8.2.
Summary of Module Changes in ACCE V8.8CP1/V8.8.2
V8.8 V8.8CP1/V8.8.2
Coldbox Module Field Insulation AREA MODULE
Coldbox Module Shop Insulation MODULE MODULE
Coldbox Module Field Paint MODULE MODULE†

Coldbox Module Shop Paint MODULE MODULE†
Other Module Steel Field Paint AREA MODULE†

Other Module Steel Shop Paint AREA MODULE†
Other Module Steel Field Fireproofing AREA MODULE

Other Module Steel Shop Fireproofing AREA MODULE
† In V8.8CP1/V8.8.2 we have intentionally removed the paint weight from the

database A-Table and the module summary report.
Note: The modular area contractor set must include a module contractor (Type M -
Module/skid fabrication shop). All work performed in the module shop should be
assigned to the module contractor. Any work performed in the field should be
assigned to the appropriate field contractor. The module summary report will only
include material costs, labor costs, and material weights for work assigned to the
module contractor.

Truckable Module (TRMD) Example 1:
If we assume the TRMD is painted and fireproofed in the shop before shipping then
the following differences will be seen in V8.8 vs. V8.8CP1/V8.8.2.
In V8.8 the TRMD module summary report will not include the module steel paint or
module steel fireproofing costs/weights since they have an “AREA” origin tag. Since
the module shipping weight is derived from the module summary report, the
shipping weight will be underestimated.
In V8.8CP1/V8.8.2 the TRMD module summary report will include the module steel
paint and module steel fireproofing costs/weights and the correct shipping weight will
be reported. All line items with a “MODULE” origin tag are included in the module
summary report.

If we assume the TRMD is painted and fireproofed in the field after the module is
installed then the following differences will be seen in V8.8 vs. V8.8CP1/V8.8.2.
module steel fireproofing costs/weights since they have an “AREA” origin tag.
But, in V8.8CP1/V8.8.2 the module steel paint and module steel fireproofing
costs/weights are included in the module summary report and shipping weight unless
a field contractor is assigned to the COA’s applicable to field paint and field
fireproofing via the contractor set.
New rebar subtype option field available on the General

Civil/Steel Specs form (CQ00593836)
In V8.4 we added subtypes 60 (Standard rebar) and 61 (Epoxy coated rebar) to the
rebar line items in the database A-Table. In V8.8.2 (and V8.8 CP1) we have added a
new Rebar subtype option field to the General Civil/Steel Specs form.
Two options are available; ‘R’ Rebar type and ‘F’ Foundation type. The default value
for the field is ‘R’. When the default or ‘R’ option is specified, subtypes 60 and 61 are
used for Standard and Epoxy coated rebar (current V8.8 behavior). When the ‘F’
option is specified, the applicable foundation subtype is used instead (old – pre V8.4
behavior).
Improved Custom User Attributes Workflow (CQ00566303)

In previous versions, the custom user attributes workflow required the user to edit
the custom user attributes input file (UserAttributesCust.xlsm), which is located in
the Program\Sys directory under the default installation location, run the User

Attributes executable (UserAttributes.exe), which is located in the same directory, to
compile the user attributes and finally manually copy the generated database files
(ipuser.aee and metuser.aee) to the UserData directory. Due to the access
permissions and security features in Windows 7 and 8+, this workflow was difficult to
implement for users with restricted permissions.
In the updated workflow, the custom user attributes input file
(UserAttributesCust.xlsm) has been installed in the shared documents location. The
UserAttributes.exe application can be launched from a menu item in the ACCE and
AICE user interface and the user attribute database files are subsequently created in
the correct location.
For a more detailed outline of the enhancements made to the Custom User Attributes
workflow, refer to the Aspen Economic Evaluation Help, which can directly be
accessed using the help icon on the Custom User Attributes window.

down list.
code of accounts.
Fixed Insulation quantities generated for Cold box Modules

(CQ00586320, CQ00595721, CQ00597238, CQ00606653)
• Insulation volume for cylindrical (CYLN) cold boxes was previously based on the
rectangular (VCB4/VCB3) coldbox volume.
• Cold box shop installed insulation (type ‘S’) was previously double counted and
two identical line items were included in the estimate results.

• Cold box module ‘ROCKWOOL-FIELD INSTALLED' insulation weight was
previously incorrect in the database A-Table.
If a SKID (with a specified height) or PRMD module was specified and the insulation
type was specified as ‘S’ in the Cold Box Data section of the module area form, then
line items with the description, ‘ROCKWOOL-SHOP INSTALLED’ were previously
incorrectly included in the estimate results. A warning message is now generated if
the module is not a cold box type and the cold box insulation type has been
specified.

LV Feeder breakers not estimated when system calculated

quantity is 0 but user specifies quantity greater than 0
(CQ00598151)
The following cases have been fixed in relation to LV feeder breaker estimation in a
Unit Substation:
• In the previous version, when a value was entered in the 'Number of feeder
breakers' and 'Feeder breaker rating' fields in the Unit SS form of a LV/MV USS
with no LV/MV load connected to it (No Motors in Area & no Sub Unit SS or CC
linked to it), feeder breakers were not being estimated. In V8.8.2, a warning
message has been added to notify the user that the feeder breakers will not be
estimated when there is no load linked to it. The feeder breakers will still not be
estimated.
In the previous version, the system was calculating one extra feeder breaker than was required in a low
voltage unit substation (with no user input in ‘Number of feeder breakers’ field in the USS form),
subsequently resulting in the estimation of a larger quantity of foundation bulk material than was required
and extra LV switchgear cabinet spaces. This has been fixed in V8.8.2, the correct system calculated
quantity of feeder breakers is now being estimated.

V8.8

separation, and HyCO (Syngas) facilities. Typically, the plate fin exchangers used in
estimate plate-fin heat exchangers was added in V8.8. It can be found in the
components palette under Process equipment | Heat exchangers, heaters | Heat
exchanger | Multi-stream plate-fin heat exchanger. You can specify up to 6
difference connected streams and up to 6 different fin layer types in the new model.
MUSE (that is, EDR Plate Fin) in V7.3 enabled sizing of the plate-fin exchanger in
HYSYS. Currently, the LNG Exchanger unit operations in HYSYS can be sized using
EDR Plate Fin. By default, they are mapped to “C” (Quoted cost) items in APEA and
in activated economics. The cost is estimated using a custom model, which must be
selected for these items. In V8.8, the LNG Exchanger in HYSYS is be mapped to the
new model, and the cost is estimated by the cost engine. Only the internal
P&ID/volumetric model was developed for this model. There is no default external
P&ID or volumetric model. The internal P&ID depends on the number of connected
process streams. A new equipment code of account – 267 ‘PLATE FIN EXCHANGERS’
was added for this model. See the Icarus Reference Guide for further details about
the new model.

accounts.

classified under Process equipment | Separation equipment | Dust collector | Venturi
and cyclone scrubber in the component palette and in the Add component dialog in
EE products. The VSCRUB unit operation in Aspen Plus is mapped to the new model
by default. Only the internal P&ID/volumetric model was developed for this model.
There is no default external P&ID or volumetric model. See the Icarus Reference
Guide for further details about the new model.
Enhancements to Centrifugal Gas Compressor [DGC CENTRIF]

Model
(DGC CENTRIF) was updated. The maximum actual gas flow rate at inlet that can be
specified for this mode has increased to 300,000 CFM [509,700 M3/H], and the
New fields have been added to allow you to include intercooler(s)/ aftercooler in the
cost estimate of the compressor, select the intercooler(s)/ aftercooler type, and
specify intercooler/ aftercooler excess area (%). A new field to specify maximum
intercooler(s)/ aftercooler cost and weight are included in the cost of the
compressor. The design data sheet for the compressor contains information about
the estimated heat transfer area for each intercooler and the aftercooler, if included.

Enhancements to Detailed Unit Rate Estimating
Unit Material Cost on Weight Basis for Piping (CQ00543293)

The unit rate pricing for piping was enhanced to allow the input of user unit material
cost by UOM basis or weight basis. The piping worksheet also contains the unit
weight and pipe diameter data for line items where applicable. For all other accounts,
you can enter unit material cost by UOM basis only. Your data from an older version
of the unit rate input file can be automatically migrated to the new unit rate input file
format by selecting the old version of the unit rate input file in the Detailed Unit Rate
Estimating interface and selecting one of the Append to existing options. See the
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator User’s Guide for additional details.
New Field to Add Details to Piping Labor Line Items

Currently, the piping labor line items generated by the cost engine do not contain
details such as pipe diameter, schedule, or wall thickness and flange class in the item
description. Due to this, in the bulk summaries, unit rate report, and unit rate file,
these activities are summarized together. They are grouped by the activity type,
material, and code of account, but are not separated by diameter, schedule, or
flange class. A new field was added to the Design Basis | Piping Specs | General

form, allowing you to choose whether detailed piping labor line items are generated
by the engine. The default for this field is N (Do not create detailed line items).
By generating detailed piping labor line items, you can adjust the unit labor costs at
a detailed level in the unit rate file.
Maximum Length of User Specified Item Description String

Changed to 27 Characters (CQ00547276)
In V8.6, the limit for User Item Description input in the unit rate input file was 28
characters. Due to formatting limitations in the Icarus Evaluation Engine, this limit
was changed to 27 characters. Any input longer than 27 characters is truncated
when the file is added to the project.
Errors/warnings Worksheet in the Unit Rate Input File

An errors/warnings feature was added to Detailed Unit Rate Estimating. Any
errors/warnings found when adding the unit rate input file to the project are logged
in an errors/warnings worksheet that is added to the unit rate input file. You must fix
the errors and add the file to the project again in order for the line items that
generated the errors to be incorporated into the project.
CWF Productivity Adjustments Applied to UCL and Quoted Cost

Line Items Changed Through Unit Rate File (CQ00555466)
In V8.6, you can specify whether CWF productivity adjustments should apply to unit
man-hours specified using the unit rate file. When this option was set to Yes (Apply
productivity adjustments), the adjustments were not applied to line items
generated from a UCL (Unit cost library) or quoted cost item but adjusted through a
unit rate file. In V8.8, the productivity adjustments also apply to line items
generated from a UCL (Unit cost library) or quoted cost item but adjusted through a
unit rate file.
Power Distribution System Revamp

In previous versions, the power distribution tree was unable to handle certain step-
down scenarios represented in single-line diagrams. You could not specify both
supply and delivery voltage, number and capacity of feeder breakers, and capacity of
main breakers. Due to this, you needed to manually specify all components of the
power distribution network as plant bulks.
In order to address this, enhancements to the main and unit substations forms have
been made in V8.8:
• To allow specification of up to 3 transformers in a unit substation
• To allow specification of delivery voltage
• To allow specification of feeder breaker rating and quantity
• To allow specification of main breaker rating
System defaults have also been changed to match current industry practices: Single
tap transformer tapping and Spot network distribution system. There are also better
checks for consistency and errors.

For a more detailed outline of the enhancements made to the Power Distribution
System, refer to the “Power Distribution System” section in Chapter 3 of the Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator User’s Guide or the Aspen Economic Evaluation Help.
Piperack Module Enhancements

The piperack module functionality was enhanced and now includes the following
features:
a. Number of modules to be shipped
b. Transverse, longitudinal, and vertical shipping accelerations
c. Field work contractor specifications allow specific contractors to be selected to
perform piperack module field work.
d. Piperack modules can be specified with steel columns (STEEL), cast-in-place

concrete columns (STEEL-C), or pre-cast columns (STEEL-P) below the first
level and installed in the field.
See the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator User’s Guide for additional information.
Ability to Import Economic Evaluation Files with an .izp

Extension
Chapter 2: “Getting Started” of the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator User’s Guide.

Ability to Change Plant Capacity by Individual Project Area
In previous versions, you could change the plant capacity for the whole project using
the Decision Analyzer. In V8.8 plant, capacity can be changed for individual areas.
Select the Scale by Area check box, and then click the Select Areas button. The
Scale by Areas dialog box appears. On the Scale by Areas dialog box, select the
check boxes for the areas where you want to adjust the scale. In the Scaling Factor
column, edit the scale as desired for each selected area. Click OK to return to the
Decision Analyzer form.

(CQ00528772)

Updates to Instrumentation Cable Tray Input Form and Pricing

(CQ00442375)
In previous versions, the instrumentation cable tray plant bulk (BINSINST TRAY)
form had different input fields compared to the electrical cable tray bulk (BELCELEC
TRAY) form. In V8.8, the instrumentation cable tray bulk form was changed to
include the Material, Cable tray rung spacing, Number of 90 degree bends, and Tray
type fields to make it similar to electrical cable tray form.
The pricing data and the method of cost estimation for the instrumentation cable
trays was changed to be the same as for the electrical cable trays. The pricing
update applies to the plant bulk, as well as system generated instrumentation cable
trays at the area level. Instrumentation cable trays are, however, still reported in the
Instrumentation Code of Accounts.
Performance Improvement in Standalone EE Products Due to

Updates to ICARUS Project Object Database (IPOD)
files per database) with a single .aee file per database. These enhancement can
improvement
improvement

Note: These results vary based on your specific machine specifications, operating
system, virtualization, size and type of project, and location of the installed files.
When you save the project in V8.8, the old format files are discarded, and the
directory.
o Sizing Selection
o Project Scheduler
copy of the old format .d0* files is saved in a Backup directory inside each
library directory.
follows:
one separately.

VFD Driver Type Option for Air Coolers [DHE AIR COOLER]
(CQ00518904)
New Option to Delete All Drains (CQ00541557)

In V8.4, the number of pipe lines that can be specified for a project component was
increased to 98. Line number 99 was reserved for drains. In previous versions, line#
40 was reserved for drains, but it was possible to delete all drains by specifying D in
the Piping volumetric model field for line# 40. From V8.4 onwards, the GUI allows
input for piping lines for 1 through 98, and data cannot be specified for line# 99. In
order to let you delete all drains for a particular component, a new Delete all drains
input field was added to the Installation bulks | Pipe – General Specs form. The
default for this field is N. When the field value is set to Y, all drains are deleted for
that component.
New Field to Add Redundant Fiber Optic Cable from Process

Control Center to Operator Center (CQ00532508)
In V8.8, a new field, Redundant fiber optic cable, was added below the Cable
type to Operator center input field in the Control Center, PLC Center, and
Specialty Center input forms. The options for this field are as given below; the
default is N.
• Y | Include Redundant Fiber Optic Cable

• N | Do not Include Redundant Fiber Optic Cable
If you specify F (Fiber optic cable) as the cable type and choose Y for the
Redundant fiber optic cable field, a second fiber optic cable and set of cable
terminations are included in the estimate. The length of the estimated fiber optic
cable is doubled, as the number of terminations; therefore, material cost, man-
hours, and labor cost estimated for the fiber optic cable are doubled.
New Input Fields to Control the Number of General and

Welding Receptacles (CQ00521407)
The Area Level Electrical Specs input form and the following plant bulk input
forms now include an option for you to specify the number of general receptacles
and welding receptacles to be estimated:
• Open concrete structure [BCIVOPN CON ST]
• Open steel structure [BSTLOPN STL ST]
• Multiple bay mill building [BSTLMILL BLDG]
• Elevated access platform [BSTLPLATFORM]
• Conveyor transfer tower [BSTLTRNS TOWER]
A field to control the number of welding receptacles per circuit has also been added
at the area level.
Length of Welding Receptacle Cable: The cable run length from the MCC to the
first weld receptacle is estimated as Distance to MCC, which can also specified in
the Area Electrical Specs form. There is an extra 25 FEET of cable added for each
additional welding receptacle. By default, each 2 AWG 600 V welding receptacle
circuit is comprised of a maximum of 3 welding receptacles. The number of welding
receptacles per circuit can be changed on the Area Electrical Specs form.

If you delete the area level lighting and do not explicitly specify welding/general
receptacles on the Area Electrical Specs form, the welding/general receptacles and
associated cable are not estimated.
Lights and Outlets Plant Bulk: The Lights and Outlets [BELCAREA LIGHT] plant
bulk has input fields where you can specify the number of general and weld
receptacles. However, previously, a cable was not estimated for the weld
receptacles.
A LV cable of length equal to the Distance to MCC is now estimated for the welding
receptacles, as is done with all other plant bulks that estimate welding receptacles.
Lights and Grounding Are Not Estimated by Default for Piperack

Module Area (CQ00241606)
In previous versions, lights and grounding were estimated by default for the piperack
module area. In V8.8, lights and grounding are not estimated by default for piperack
module areas. A new B option was added to the Lights and grounding field in the
Area Electrical Specs form, allowing you to include the lighting and grounding if
needed for the piperack module. The note for this field was updated to state that the
default for piperack module areas is - (Delete area lights and earth/ground),
and the blank option (Area lights and earth/ground required) is the default for
all other modular and non-modular areas.
Fixed Defects in Calculation of TEMPORARY PIPE SUPPORTS in

Cold Box Module Areas (CQ00557157)
A couple of defects were found related to the Temporary Pipe Supports line items for
piping located in Cold Box Module Areas.
The first defect was related to the order that rectangular and cylindrical coldbox
module areas are specified in the project. When a cylindrical coldbox modular area is
inserted between two identical rectangular coldbox modular areas, the quantity and
material cost of the temporary pipe supports in the rectangular cold box areas
differed. If the cylindrical coldbox module area was moved below the rectangular
coldboxes, then the quantity and material cost of the temporary pipe supports were
the same. This defect was resolved, and the correct quantity and material costs of
temporary pipe supports are correct no matter what order the rectangular and
cylindrical coldbox module areas are specified in the project.
The second defect was related to the labor costs for the temporary pipe supports in
coldbox areas. The installation labor hours were previously calculated incorrectly.
The labor hours are now calculated correctly and result in a higher labor cost for the
temporary pipe supports.

Fixed Defect in Platform Width Input in Design basis | Civil
specs (CQ00553022)
An invalid platform width (such as 15 INCHES) could previously be input in the
Design basis | Civil specs form. The invalid width specification produced an error
message when the project was evaluated. This defect was fixed, and the minimum
allowable platform width was updated to 30 INCHES [750 MM]. Now, the form does
not let you enter a value less than the minimum.
Fixed Defect in Attaching P&ID or Loading Volumetric Model for

Large Volume DVT LNG TANK (CQ00545031)
For a large tank volume Cryogenic, double wall, full containment storage tank
component (DVT LNG TANK), attaching a P&ID or load volumetric model resulted in
errors for Civil. This defect was fixed, and the attach P&ID and load default
volumetric model tasks now work correctly for the large volume DVT LNG TANK
component in the ACCE and APEA.
Fixed Defect in Creating a Project by Importing a SPECS File

that Contains Noncontiguous Contractor Data (CQ00549408)
If a project was created in ACCE by importing a specs file or using the specs file
based recovery of a crashed project, and if the specs file contained noncontiguous
contractor data – for example, if an intermediated contractor had been deleted in the
source project – then in the recovered project, the contractor tree was not stable.
Operations such as adding a new contractor or deleting a contractor in the recovered
project led to a crash or incorrect behavior. This defect was fixed. The SPECS file
import assumed there were no gaps in the contractor data (CD) cards and
incremented a counter instead of reading the contractor number from the CD card.
Some Fields on the Contractor Form Do Not Apply to Pipeline

Projects (CQ00538944)
Some of the fields on the contractor form do not apply to pipeline projects. The field
description notes have been updated to make it clear if a particular field does not
apply to a pipeline project. These fields include:
a. Engineering G and A, Percent
b. Engineering fee, Percent
c. Engineering contingency, Percent
d. Material G and A, Percent
e. Material fee, Percent
f. Material contingency, Percent
g. Construction G and A, Percent
h. Handling fee, Percent
i. Lump sum fee (thousands), CUR
Note: The construction fee and construction contingency percentages are
applicable to pipeline projects.

j. The total freight percent material Freight Charges field is applicable to
pipeline projects. However, the other two Freight Charges fields (Domestic
freight unit cost and Ocean freight unit cost) do not apply.
k. The Taxes on Material Percent Taxes field is applicable to pipeline projects.
However, the other three Taxes fields (Taxes on labor, Indirects, and
Engineering) do not apply.
Fixed Defect in Cable Tray (Raceway) Length Calculation for

Communication and Alarm Systems (CQ00552907)
In previous versions, the default calculation for raceway Length, if not specified by
the user in the Public Address General Alarm (PAGA) system and the CCTV system of
the Communication and Alarm Systems plant bulk, produced an incorrect length
estimate. This was fixed for V8.8. The notes for the Raceway Length fields in the
input form have also been updated.
New Raceway Length Calculations in PAGA and CCTV:
Public Address General Alarm (PAGA) System
Default Raceway length if not specified by user:
Raceway length: 30 % of the Cable length (3 Cables per Tray)
Raceway length calculation: Roundup ((Total no of Outdoor speakers + Indoor
speakers + Outdoor strobes + Indoor strobes + Outdoor handsets + Indoor
handsets) / 3) * Cable length per device * 0.3
Closed Circuit Television
Default Raceway length if not specified by user:
Raceway length: 30 % of the Cable length (3 Cables per Tray)
Raceway length calculation: Roundup (Total no of CCTV cameras/3) *Cable
length per device *0.3
Fixed Defect in External P&ID, Volumetric Model, and Internal

Model for Gas Turbine (CQ00548988)
In the internal and external P&ID and volumetric model for a gas turbine with driver
power > = 500 HP [373 KW], instrument loop#12 and 16 were shown as ESD loops
on the drawing but did not result in an ESD control center type when the drawing
was attached or volumetric model was loaded. This issue was fixed in V8.8. This may
result in a warning about the ESD control center if the project does not have an ESD
control center specified. You may also see a change in the estimated instrumentation
bulks for this component.


improve the product. Selected fixes contained in ACCE V8.8 are listed below. This list
is a subset of all the corrections included in ACCE V8.8.
This section describes the software fixes to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator V8.8.
CQ00473705 The 750NB Control Valve was represented as The issue is resolved.
nearly half the price of the Manual Valve due
to different sets of pricing data.
CQ00534000 In V8.3 and V8.4, the inclusion of an Oiler with The issue is resolved.
Craft code 59 resulted in a fatal error
message.
CQ00538116 In the Aspen Icarus V8.4 Reference Guide, The issue is resolved.
several drawings were blurry and/or contained
outdated procedures.
CQ00538944 For pipeline projects, if you entered a The issue is resolved.
Material Fee on the Contractor Definition
form, it was not included in the CCP report.
CQ00542788 In the Aspen Icarus V8.4 Reference Guide, the The issue is resolved.
“Standard Equations for Pipe Diameter (New)”
section of Chapter 18 contained several
equations with errors, including the equation
for pipe liquid diameter.
CQ00543019 Having different units of measure (IP and The issue is resolved.
Metric units) for the project level and the
Custom Pipe Specs file resulted in a
schedule error.
CQ00543406 There were inconsistencies in the number of The issue is resolved.
manhours required to install Control Cable vs.
Low Voltage Cable.
CQ00543890 In the Aspen Icarus V8.4 Reference Guide, in The issue is resolved.
Chapter 36, Figure CDS-1 did not include
labels on the curves.
CQ00545619 In the Fireproofing section, mesh did not The issue is resolved.
exceed pyrocrete quantities by at least 10%
for overlap; this was an incorrect approach.
CQ00546140 When specifying the Helper Wage Rate % The issue is resolved.
Craft and including a PAGA System, a Fortran
error occurred during project-level evaluation.
CQ00546480 The calculated skirt height was incorrect for The issue is resolved.
short vessels (less than 32 ft) and large
diameters (greater than 6.67 ft).
CQ00549408 After importing a specs file and deleting The issue is resolved.
Contractor 7, ACCE crashed.
CQ00549563 The External Proratable File produced incorrect The issue is resolved.
results for Labor Proratables.
CQ00552154 For bulk pipe components, modeling heat The issue is resolved.
tracing did not work properly.
CQ00553539 If you selected the No fins option for the Fin The issue is resolved.
type of an Air Cooler, an error occurred.

CQ00554340 When you added a material labor addition to The issue is resolved.
quoted equipment with a cost of zero, an error
occurred.
CQ00314380 Several pumps could not be scaled correctly The issue is resolved.
due to missing Scaling Rules.
CQ00480883 In V8.0, a warning message did not appear for The issue is resolved.
short vessels (L/D < 3.0).
CQ00530608 In V8.4, if you specified a value of 0 for The issue is resolved.
Percent of hand excavation, the HAND
EXCAVATION line still appeared in the CCP
report.
CQ00538863 In V8.6, the default Vessel leg height for The issue is resolved.
Metric UOM was 0.9144 M, but was listed as 3
M in the UI description.
CQ00546685 For Quoted Items, Total cost per unit, The issue is resolved.
Material cost per unit, and Labor hours
per unit all had the same description in the
UI. This description needed to be updated.
CQ00549562 For the Multi Diameter Tower (TW TOWER), The issue is resolved.
incorrect information was written to the Export
Spreadsheet.
CQ00555466 Unit Rate Estimating did not allow Productivity The issue is resolved.
Adjustments on UCL and Quoted Items.
CQ00557376 Unit Rate Processing required changes in order The issue is resolved.
to improve usability.
CQ00582895 The tag numbers under "Piping Items Bulk The issue is resolved.
Details" do not exportr properly to the
spreadsheet.
CQ00581415 Weights for cost known items with equipment The issue is resolved.
COA are not reported in the "List of
equipment" Excel report
CQ00581232 TW multi-diameter tower model needs better The issue is resolved.
handling of Manholes
CQ00581231 Equipment Rental Generating error message in The issue is resolved.
ccp report
CQ00580800 Negative number of receptacles shown in ccp The issue is resolved.
report for area data sheet
CQ00580780 Lifting lug weights are not included in the The issue is resolved.
Steel line item of the Module Report
CQ00580779 Incorrect defaults in GUI for Unit of Measure The issue is resolved.
and Quantity Adjustment Option in Mat'l/Man-
hour Additions (Metric Projects only)
CQ00580409 Discrepancy in equipment weight in module The issue is resolved.
summary report and sum of equipment
weights in the module area from the "List
equipment" report.
CQ00579490 Corrections needed to UserAttributesCust.xlsm The issue is resolved.
CQ00571296 Getting "Unable to complete vacuum design" The issue is resolved.
error

CQ00568501 An equipment weight does not show up for The issue is resolved.
"High Voltage Electrical Precipitators"
CQ00568184 Piping man hours different in Major Account The issue is resolved.
Summary and Bulk Summary (CCP report)
CQ00565640 Magnetic Drive Pump cost different for user The issue is resolved.
specified SS vs default of SS value

V8.6
The following new features and enhancements were added in the V8.6 ACCE release:
New Economic Evaluation Icons in V8.6

This release contains new Economic Evaluation icons, so after installation, the new
icons will be present in various places (for example, application shortcuts in
menus/tiles, taskbar, application title bars, and so on).
Detailed Unit Rate Estimation

In ACCE material costs and man-hours can be adjusted at the code of account (COA)
level by specifying indexing values via an external indexing file. This is useful to
make quick changes at the conceptual estimation stage (+/- 10 to 20%). During the
estimation required for authorization (+/- 5 to 10%) this may be a problem because
one or more items in a certain COA may not be estimated correctly even after
applying the indexing. This may introduce individual line item inaccuracies within a
detailed estimate.
The new ‘Detailed Unit Rate Estimation’ feature in ACCE allows users to control unit
material cost and man-hours at the line item level. Using this feature, users can also
customize the item descriptions and material symbols generated by the program to
match their needs. This will allow users to adjust the line items to meet their in-
house standards and enable ACCE usage during detailed estimating phases.
The unit rate report can be generated after project evaluation by clicking Display
Unit Rate Report in the Run menu. The detailed estimation dialog can be accessed
by clicking Run | Detailed Unit Rate Estimating. More information regarding this
feature can be found in the documentation accessible from the “Help” menu and in
the ACCE User Guide (.pdf). The basic workflow is depicted below:
Estimation of Skirt/Leg for Vessels/Towers Mounted in Open

Steel Structure (CQ00535150)
In previous versions, if a vessel was mounted or “hung” in a plant bulk open steel
structure (BSTLOPEN STL ST) by specifying a valid structure tag number, skirt/leg
for the vessel or tower and the foundation would get estimated unless the user

specified the skirt/leg height = 0. In V8.6, this has been changed so that specifying a
valid structure tag is the only thing needed to mount the vessel on the structure.
When a valid user tag is specified, skirt/leg and the foundation will not be estimated.
This applies to vertical pressure vessels (VT), agitated tanks (AT), single, double and
multiple diameter towers (TW, DDT). See the flow chart “Logic for Hanging
Equipment in Structures” in Chapter 20 of Icarus Reference Guide for details.
Note: For vessels/towers in OPEN or EXOPEN type area, specifying skirt/leg height =
0 is needed to stop estimating skirt/leg and the foundation. This is because the
structure tag mechanism is not applicable in these areas.
Vibrating Screen Models Are Not Correctly Moved to New Model

When Item Description is Not Unique (CQ00540302)
In V8.4, all rectangular vibrating screen models in previous versions (VS ONE DECK,
VS TWO DECK and VS THREE DECK) were consolidated into a single new model – VS
RECTANGLE. Similarly all the circular vibrating screen models in the previous
versions (VS SIFTER 1, VS SIFTER 2 and VS SIFTER 3) were consolidated in a single
new model (VS CIRCULAR). When projects from previous versions (V8.2 or earlier)
are opened in V8.4, any vibrating screen items are converted to use the new
consolidated models with the number of decks input set appropriately. However,
there was a defect in the program in which this conversion would not happen
correctly if multiple vibrating screen models in previous versions (V8.2 or earlier)
had the same “Item description”. In such a case, only one of the items was
converted correctly. This defect has now been fixed enabling proper conversion of
vibrating screens to take place when opened in V8.6.
Error Message for Multiple Construction Work Forces or

Multiple Contractors in a Pipeline Project (CQ00524375)
Multiple construction work forces (CWFs) or multiple contractors are not allowed in a
pipeline project. However, the fatal error message generated by the engine was not
clear when multiple CWFs were specified as no error message was generated when
multiple contractors were specified in a pipeline project. This has been changed. In
both cases, the engine now generates a fatal error message, indicating that multiple
CWFs and/or multiple contractors are not allowed.
Exception Generated in Spreadsheet Export When an Area

Contains Only Site Development Items (CQ00531803)
Site development (SD) items cannot be exported to an Excel spreadsheet using the
spreadsheet import/export tool in ACCE. If a project area contains only SD items and
if that area is selected for export in the Export project data | Component by Area
mode during spreadsheet export; an exception would be generated during export
and the spreadsheet creation would not get created. This has been fixed. The
spreadsheet is successfully created. If there are no items that can be exported to the
spreadsheet then a warning message is generated and only the area data is exported
to the spreadsheet.

Hardware System Material Costs for Non-US Country Bases Was
Incorrect When the External Instrumentation Control Systems
File Was Attached to the Project (CQ00533508)
Previously, an internal currency conversion factor was incorrectly applied to the
hardware system material cost for non-US country bases when the external
instrumentation control systems file was attached to the project. This resulted in a
higher cost than expected based on the user specified hardware system material cost
per I/O loop. This has been fixed in V8.6.
When Using the External ‘Indirects – Proratables’ File with

Non-US Country Bases, Some Indirects Were Not Calculated
Correctly (CQ00532802)
Previously, an internal currency conversion factor was incorrectly applied to some of
the user specified proratable indirect items in projects with a non-US country base.
This resulted in higher indirect item costs than expected.
The problem occurred with proratables specified in the external indirects file where
the "Direct Code of Accounts Only" section, "Percent of direct Material" field is
specified and the "Percent of category" field is an M (Material Cost), L (Labor Cost),
or T (Total Cost).
Error in Open Concrete Structure between Item and Project

Evaluation (CQ00535986)
Previously, the plant bulk open concrete structure design and cost was different
between project and item evaluations when no equipment was assigned to the
structure and the plant bulk open concrete structure user tag was left blank. This
has been fixed and the results are now the same for project and item evaluations.
Additionally, plant bulk open concrete structures should only be placed in Grade or
Pad Areas. A warning message has been added to alert the user. The warning
message states, "INCORRECT AREA TYPE SPECIFICATION FOR PLANT BULK OPEN
CONCRETE STRUCTURE. PLACE OPEN CONCRETE STRUCTURES IN GRADE OR PAD
AREAS."
Errors in Single Item and Multiple Item Evaluation
Equipment evaluation with structure tag does not work if

structure item description is changed (CQ00536552)
In V8.4 we implemented the changes for single item evaluation when a valid
structure tag is specified on the item. Previously, if the structure item description
was changed, an error message was generated by during an item evaluation for any
item that referred to that structure tag, similar to, "ERROR> 'QCD- 2' STRUCTURE
REFERRED TO, BY TAG "STL1 " DOES NOT EXIST". The item evaluation with
structure tag now works as expected when the item description of the structure is
changed.

Multiple item evaluation that results in a report group error
message (CQ00536898)
Previously, the wrong report group id was being assigned to the first area created
within a new report group. When items were added to the new area and a multiple
item evaluation was performed, the error message "ERROR> 'U0 - 1' REPORT
GROUP NUMBER MUST BE FROM 1-90." was generated by the cost engine. This has
been fixed in V8.6.
Multiple item evaluations that include items with a specified

structure tag (CQ00536911)
Previously, an error message was generated when a multiple item evaluation was
performed that included items with a specified structure tag, and the specified
structure existed in the area. The error message was similar to, “STRUCTURE
REFERRED TO, BY TAG "SS1 " DOES NOT EXIST”. The multiple item evaluation
with valid structure tags now works similarly to single item evaluations with structure
tag.
There are three possibilities in multiple item evaluation:
• The equipment and associated structure are both part of the multiple selection.
• The equipment is part of the selection but the structure is not
• The structure is part of the selection but equipment is not.
The cost engine designs and costs the structure for cases 1 and 3 (i.e. only when the
user explicitly includes the structure item in the multiple item evaluation list).
Bug in Structure Height for Truckable/Bargeable Modules with

Structure Tag (CQ00537334)
The defect in the algorithm used to calculate structure height (used to determine the
ladder/platform quantities for a tower) has been fixed. If the module type is BRGM
or TRMD and n modules have been defined (n max = 4), then the tower can be
assigned to a specific sub-module, x, where 1<=x<=n, by specifying a structure tag
BRGM-x or TRMD-x. If the sub-module structure tag is specified, then the structure
height (used to determine ladder/platform quantities) will be based on sub-module x.
If no structure tag is specified, then the structure height (used to determine
ladder/platform quantities) will be based on the area height. In this case, if the area
height has been left blank, then structure height will default to 15ft [4.5m].
Engineering Man-hours for Quoted Cost Items with No Cost

(CQ00520179)
In previous versions, a quoted cost item with no cost or labor hours specified was
included in the calculation for engineering man-hours. This would lead to incorrect
estimation of engineering costs when certain blocks like mixers and splits from a
simulation were mapped to quoted cost items with no cost specified in APEA. This
has been fixed and quoted cost items are included in the calculation for engineering
costs only when they have non-zero material cost or labor hours specified.



CQ00521263 Program has responsiveness issues even after upgrading to

V8.2.
CQ00523170 The hyperlink for What's New in ACCE V8.4 does not work.
CQ00523178 What's New in ACCE - wrong format for CQ00520182 item
and following item.
What's New in ACCE V8.4 - An extra icon is wrongly added for the
CQ00523179
Offshore steel subtype COA - 697.
What's New in ACCE V8.4 - Strange format of instruction note for
CQ00523186
'User Specified equipment count'.
CQ00523191 Button picture issues with What's New in Aspen Process

Economic Analyzer V8.4.
CQ00527910 Shell material sized from EDR was A 285, but EE didn't have
this option.
CQ00532196 Update documentation for Steel Plant Bulks, Tubular Steel
Items
TDC Key Qty Sumry Report not matching TDC Key Qty Sumry by RG
CQ00532358
for steel when User units are different.
Reports showing user Control Valve different than used by system -
CQ00532360
engine uses user specified
Missing PID No. 145 Turbo Expander
CQ00532361
Excel Report Issue with some indirects (COA 80)
CQ00533298
Custom Reports having problem with V8.4
CQ00533330
Remove Oiler Craft from Euro Country Base in Reference Guide
CQ00533720
Air Coolers should not recalculate tube diameters when scaled
CQ00533970
Description for Construction escalation index grid is incorrect
CQ00534904
"VT knock out SIS 822V" cannot be dragged to "User P&ID Library"
CQ00536859
Make the highlight is in Project Basis View, click "Help/What's New?"
CQ00539411
didn't link to What's New
Some pictures are wrong for What's New/Aspen Capital Cost
CQ00539420
Estimator V8.0 & Aspen Process Economic Analyzer V8.0

Manhour results in Report Group Summary Reports (Crystal) are
CQ00539588
double for Quoted Items having equipment COAs in Module
CQ00539889 Update documentation for skirt/leg height and structure tag related
changes
CQ00541469 Why are screwed plugs in 313 remote shop material? Should
be 311 field material

V8.4
Product Description
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator® is the state-of-the-art, fully integrated design,
estimating and scheduling system designed to help you evaluate the capital cost of
process plants and mills worldwide—quickly, accurately and early in the project life
cycle.
Using as little information as your list of sized equipment and a general arrangement
of your project, Aspen Capital Cost Estimator develops a complete, detailed
engineering, procurement and construction estimate and critical path method (CPM)
schedule. Because Aspen Capital Cost Estimator automatically performs mechanical
designs for equipment and bulks, using self-contained international design,
estimating, and scheduling procedures, you have the accurate, detailed answers you
need at the 3-5% stage of engineering.
With Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, you profit from early information. You can
evaluate projects during the preliminary design phase, evaluate projects during the
design and construction phases, and evaluate process/project design alternatives.
You can evaluate scope changes, bid tabs, vendor quotes, change orders, as well as
offer new services with current resources, making use of time saved by Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator.

New Offshore Steel Plant Bulks

In order to support out-of-the-box cost estimation of shallow water upstream
Exploration and Production (E&P) platforms, additional steel plant bulks have been
added to Economic Evaluation.
Offshore Jacket (3 Legs, 4 Legs, or 8 Legs).

The offshore jacket structure supports shallow water E&P platforms. These jacket
structures are fabricated with large diameter tubular steel members. The offshore
jacket plant bulk consists of the following:
• Jacket diagonals (tube steel items), COA 581 - Offshore Jackets
• Jacket horizontals (tube steel items, COA 581 - Offshore Jackets
• Jacket joint cans (tube steel items), COA 581 - Offshore Jackets
• Jacket legs (tube steel items), COA 581 - Offshore Jackets
• Jacket piles (tube steel items), COA 485 - Offshore Civil
• Grout, COA 485 - Offshore Civil
• Sacrificial anodes, COA 772 - Cathodic Protection
• Jacket paint, COA 913 - Paint Structures

• Jacket launch and set, COA 581 - Offshore Jackets
Steel COAMOD's 1 to 5 will be applied depending on the member unit weight. The
following steel SUBTYPE's will be applied:
• 692 = DIAG
• 693 = HORIZ
• 694 = VERT
• 695 = JOINT
• 696 = LEG
• 697 = PILE

Tubular Steel Item
The large diameter tubular steel item is typically used in the construction of offshore
jacket structures. An application type field is available to choose from Onshore and
Offshore application.
• Offshore tubular steel items will be allocated to COA 582 - Offshore tubular steel.
• Onshore tubular steel items will be allocated to COA 524 - Tubular steel.
• When the "Include labor?" field is specified as 'N', the labor man-hours and cost
will be set to 0.
• Steel COAMOD's 1 to 5 will be applied depending on the member unit weight
• The following steel SUBTYPE's will be applied:
° 692 = DIAG

° 693 = HORIZ
° 694 = VERT
° 695 = JOINT
° 696 = LEG
° 697 = PILE
Fixed Defect for Installation Bulk Worksheets (CQ00508092)

In V8.2 we enhanced the spreadsheet export feature to improve the performance
during exporting the data to a spreadsheet. A defect was introduced in this change
due to which for certain installation bulk spreadsheets, items were being written past
the “LAST ROW” in the worksheet. The data written after the “LAST ROW” would not
get imported. This defect was fixed in V8.4 and an emergency patch was provided to
fix it in V8.2 (EP1).
Validation of Long User Tag Numbers during Spreadsheet

Import (CQ00477531)
In the spreadsheet exported from ACCE, data validation to check for character length
(<=12 characters) has been added to the user tag number columns in the
spreadsheet. Note that in Excel data validation works only for input that the user
directly types into a cell. It doesn’t work for copy/pasted data or when cell value is
calculated by a formula. In addition to the data validation a note has been added to
the user tag columns. In the “Max” row for the user tag number and item description
column, the maximum length will be mentioned as shown in the screenshot below.
During import, if an equipment item or installation bulk spreadsheet has a user tag
that is longer than 12 characters then an error message will be generated in pre-
check and the spreadsheet import will not be successful. Users will have to fix the
long user tags in the spreadsheet before importing into the ACCE project.
Changed Format of Certain Input Fields to ‘Text’ (CQ00501107)

The format of the fields mentioned below in the exported spreadsheet was changed
to ‘Text’. This will facilitate exporting and importing areas where the area name
contains only numeric characters with trailing ‘0’s.
‘AREAS’ worksheet:
• Area Name
• Report group name
Equipment/Plant bulks worksheets:

• Item description
• User tag number
• Parent area
The Spreadsheet Import/Export Feature for Pipeline Projects

Has Been Disabled (CQ00517031)
This feature has been disabled because Pipeline areas are not compatible with the
Icarus API. Due to this incompatibility, exceptions and errors were previously
encountered when importing a spreadsheet into a pipeline project.
New Safety Instrumented System (SIS) Drawings

In V8.2, we added the new option to enable safety instrumented volumetric P&IDs in
APEA and ACCE. A limited number of SIS drawings were available in that release. In
V8.4 release, thirty six new SIS VPIDS (for example, external graphical drawings,
external volumetric models, and internal model) have been added to the system.
These drawings are:
• HT continuous SIS 804
• Jacketed HT Continuous SIS 804J
• Jacketed VT continuous SIS 806VJ
• HT storage SIS 819H
• Jacketed HT storage SIS 819HJ
• VT storage SIS 819V
• Jacketed VT storage SIS 819VJ
• Gear pump SIS 820 (Default SIS drawing when SIS flag is set at Project Level)
• Gear pump SIS 820RV (Contains extra Relief Valve. Available as an alternate
• Positive displacement pump SIS 820 (Default SIS drawing when SIS flag is set at
Project Level)
• Positive displacement pump SIS 820RV (Contains extra Relief Valve. Available as
an alternate external graphical drawing and volumetric PID only at the
component level)
• HT knockout SIS 822H
• Jacketed HT knockout SIS 822HJ
• VT knock out SIS 822V
• Jacketed VT knock out SIS 822VJ
• In line pump SIS 827 (Default SIS drawing when SIS flag is set at Project Level)
• In line pump SIS 827RV (Contains extra Relief Valve. Available as an alternate
• Smokeless flare SIS 848
• TW liquid adsorption SIS 852
• TW liquid absorption SIS 854
• Thermosiphon reboiler horizontal SIS 857H
• Thermosiphon reboiler vertical SIS 857V
• TW distillation with thermosiphon RB SIS 859

• Non Smokeless flare SIS 869
• Air compressor SIS 872
• Gas Turbine SIS 940
• HT pressure vessel with boot SIS 941H
• Jacketed HT pressure vessel with boot SIS 941HJ
• HT 3phase separator with boot SIS 942
• Jacketed HT 3phase separator with boot SIS 942J
• HT 3phase separator with baffles SIS 943
• Jacketed HT 3phase separator with baffles SIS 943HJ
• HT liquid liquid separator SIS 944
• HT liquid liquid separator with boot SIS 944
• Jacketed HT liquid liquid separator SIS 944J
• Jacketed HT liquid liquid separator with boot SIS 944HJ
The workflow for using the SIS drawings is the same as outlined in the V8.2 release
notes and documentation. You can see graphical representations of these new SIS
drawings in the Aspen Icarus PID Reference Guide pdf.

previous versions.
• The maximum for installation bulk duct line number field has been increased to
98 (old value was 40). We allow a total of 5 duct lines but the duct line number
can be any number from 1 to 98 in order to avoid a clash with installation bulk
pipe line numbers on the same component.
• These changes affect the following input fields in the GUI:


• New fields for specifying the instrument sensor and control valve (CV) location
using the pipe line tag have been added to the instrument bulk addition forms.

example, users can enter either the instrument sensor location (i.e. the line
• When both line number and line tag is specified, the line number will get
precedence and the line tag will be ignored by the engine. A warning message
will be generated.
• The evaluation engine will search for the line tag only in the installation bulk pipe
in a loop, the sensor or CV will be placed on the first line on which the line tag is
found.

User Specified Equipment Count Enhancement (CQ00270959)
A new field has been added that allows users to specify how many equipment items
to count and include in the output reports. The enhancement applies to Process
equipment, Quoted cost equipment, Equipment Model Library (EML) items, and Unit
Cost Library (UCL) items. This enhancement only applies to items that have an
associated equipment COA.
Process Equipment, Quoted Equipment, And Equipment Model

Library Items
The option is available in the ‘Installation bulks | Mat’l/Man-hour %Adj., Vessel
Tracing’ form.
• By default, if the new field is left blank, then the system will use the Number of
identical items specified on the project component form. However, the system
will use a default value of 0 for all Agitators (AG), Packing (PAK), Linings (LIN),
and Tray stack for tray tower. Equipment COA’s 100 to 109 will also use a
default value of 0.
• The user may not specify a larger count than the Number of identical items field
on the project component form except when the component type is a Cooling
Tower (CTW), Heat Exchanger (HE), or Reboiler (RB).
• If the User specified equipment count is larger than the Number of identical items
field (except for specific cases discussed above) then the cost engine will report a
warning message and the system will use the Number of identical items specified
on the project component form.
Unit Cost Library Items

For UCL items, the new field is available in the unit cost items forms.

• The User specified equipment count field only applies to Unit Cost Library (UCL)
items with an equipment COA. Also, the Unit of measure field must be left blank
or set to “ITEM(S)”, “EA”, or “EACH”.
• By default, if the new field is left blank, then the system will use the Number of
identical items specified. However, the system will use a default value of 0 for
equipment COA’s 100 to 109.
• The user may not specify a larger count than the ‘Number of identical items’ field.
• If the User specified equipment count is larger than the Number of identical items
field then the cost engine will report an error message and the system will use
the Number of identical items specified.
User Specified Equipment Count Results

The user specified equipment counts will be reported in Appendix E of the CCP report
and the specific reports noted below within Aspen Icarus Reporter. The
“COMPONENT” database relation table will have a new integer field named ‘USERQTY’
in column 9 that includes the default or user specified equipment counts for each
equipment item.
Is component counted?1
Description Appendix E in CCP Icarus reporter

report reports
Process equipment YES YES
Process equipment = $0.002 YES YES
Quoted equipment YES YES
Equipment model library item YES YES
Unit cost library item YES YES
<BLANK> YES YES
SPAR YES YES
WHSP NO3 NO3
SUPP YES YES

EXIS YES YES
DEML NO3 NO3
Notes:
• Valid equipment COA’s are 100 to 293. Equipment categorized with COA’s 100 to
109 will only be counted if a ‘User specified equipment count’ is explicitly
specified.
• Equipment costs can be set to “0” in the quoted cost field or % Mat’l/MH
adjustments.
• The default value of the ‘User specified equipment count’ field will be 0 for WHSP
and DEML. However, the user may have their equipment included in the item
count if a value is specified in the ‘User specified equipment count’.
Aspen Icarus Reporter Reports

Standard Reports
• Capital Cost Reports
o Project Summaries  Key Quantity Basis
o Project Summaries  Contractor Basis  Key Quantity Basis
• Other Reports
o Project  Component Listings  Summary Key Quantities
o Project  Component Listings  Key Quantities
o Contractor  Component Listings  Key Quantities
o Report Group  Component Listings  Key Quantities
o Area  Component Listings  Key Quantities
HTML Reports
o Project Summaries  Key Quantity Basis
o Project Summaries  Contractor Basis  Key Quantity Basis
• Other Reports
o Project  Component Listings  Summary Key Quantities
o Project  Component Listings  Key Quantities
o Contractor  Component Listings  Key Quantities
o Report Group  Component Listings  Key Quantities
o Area  Component Listings  Key Quantities
Excel Reports
o Direct Costs  Overall - Key Quantity Basis
o Direct Costs  Report Group - Key Quantity Basis
• Other Reports
o Project  Metrics
o Project  IPA Detail Cost
o Project  IPA PES Summary
o Project  IPA dbase

o Project  IPA Metrics

maximum value will be 3. The material and labor quantities (that is, weight, man-
hours and son on) estimated for the old separate models and the corresponding
consolidated model with the number of decks input set appropriately, is the same.
Updating Old Projects

Spreadsheet Import/Export
Users may have exported data from the old separate models into spreadsheets from
previous versions (V8.2 or earlier). Users will not be able to directly import these
spreadsheets into V8.4 since the old models will no longer be available in V8.4. The
users will have to use one of the work-around given below:
• Import the spreadsheet into a project using the older version of EE and then
open this project in V8.4
• Export an empty spreadsheet for the new consolidated models in V8.4, copy the
data from the old spreadsheet into the new spreadsheet appropriately, set the
number of decks input appropriately and then import the new spreadsheet in
V8.4.

Stress-Relieving For Pipeline Segments in Pipeline Projects
(CQ00295382)
• A new input field “Stress relief” was added to the pipeline segment (PCCP) form.
The default for this field is based on the value in the design basis, piping, general
specs.
• All the pipeline materials (API 5L) are carbon steels. So if the option in the new
field is “C”, stress relieving is generated for all of them when the pipe wall
thickness is >= 0.75 inch. We have used the same stress relieving man-hours
that are used for plant bulk and installation bulk pipe.
• If users select “Yes” for the stress relief option, stress relieving will be estimated
irrespective of the wall thickness.
• The quantity in the “Field stress relief” line item generated will be the total
number of welds – that is, the line-up welds + the tie-in welds.
• In the CCP report the line items generated for stress relieving is as below:
The Wind and Seismic Design Requirement for Tall Vessels Can
Now Be Specified at the Project Level (CQ00216075)
The wind and seismic design requirement for tall vessels is now available at the
project level in the ‘Design basis | Equipment Specs’ and includes the options ‘W+S’,
‘WIND’, ‘SEIS’, and ‘NONE’. By default, the option ‘W+S’ (Wind and seismic design
required) applies.

The area equipment specs field previously named “Wind design required” has been
changed to “Wind or seismic design” and the options now include ‘W+S’, ‘WIND’,
‘SEIS’, and ‘NONE’. If this area level field is left blank, the project level option will
be used. This change provides consistency across the project, area, and component
specs for the wind and seismic design requirement for tall vessels and allows the
user to override the project level design option at the area and component levels.
The “Wind or seismic design” field that was previously available on tall vessel
equipment forms has not been changed and still includes the options ‘W+S’, ‘WIND’,
‘SEIS’, and ‘NONE’. When this component field is left blank, the area level option will
be used.
Previously, when the area level “Wind design required” field was set to ‘NONE’ (No
wind design) and the tall vessel equipment component “Wind or seismic design” field
was left blank; the tall vessel equipment component included a seismic design. As
discussed above, the area level now includes the ‘SEIS’ design option for tall vessels.
When old projects are opened in the latest version of EE, any areas that had ‘NONE’
specified for the “Wind design required” field will have a new specification of ‘SEIS’ in
the area level field now labeled “Wind or seismic design”. This ensures the same
design basis is used for tall vessel lateral load analysis in both the old and new
versions of EE.

Rebar Type Can Now Be Specified Separately for Each Area and
Each Component (CQ00313690)
• The rebar type specification is now available at the Area and Component levels in
addition to the previously available Project level spec. This enhancement gives
the user precise control of the rebar specs throughout the entire project.
• As was previously available, the rebar type and cost are specified in the Project
Basis Civil / Steel Specs form.
• The available rebar types are either Standard (S) or Epoxy coated (E). The
default rebar type is Standard.
• If a rebar cost is specified, it will correspond with the selected rebar type. The
ratio of Epoxy coated rebar cost to Standard rebar cost will always be equal to
1.2. For example if the rebar type is specified as E and the cost is specified as
0.72 $/LB, then the system will use 0.60 $/LB for the S type rebar.
• If the rebar cost is left blank, then the system will use an internal price for the S
type rebar. The internal price selected varies depending on the project country
base. Once the internal price of the S type rebar is selected, the internal price of
the E type rebar is calculated with the 1.2 cost factor.
• The rebar type field has been added to the Area civil specs form. By default, the
rebar type specified in the Project Basis is used for the Area. The available rebar
types are either Standard or Epoxy coated.

• The rebar type has also been added to the component civil bulk items form. By
default, the rebar type specified in the Area civil specs form is used for the
component. The available rebar types are either Standard or Epoxy coated. It is
important to choose (V) for the Civil volumetric model field if the intent is to only
change the rebar type used for the default civil bulks generated by the system.
• The output line descriptions for rebar installation have been enhanced to include
the rebar type.
• Civil subtypes have been added for Standard and Epoxy coated rebar.
° Civil subtype 60 = Standard rebar (Type S)
° Civil subtype 61 = Epoxy coated rebar (Type E)

Enhancement to Estimate Cable for Welding Receptacles at
Area Level (CQ00498747)
In previous versions, only one welding receptacle was being estimated per area and
cable to this receptacle was not being estimated. In V8.4, the number of welding
receptacles was increased to 3 per area. One run of a 100 Amp, 2 AWG [25 MM2]
low voltage cable is estimated between the Motor Control Center (MCC) and the
receptacles. The run length of the cable is estimated to be twice the `Distance to
Motor Control Center’, which is set in the area level electrical specs form.
For the Open Steel Structure (BSTLOPN STL ST) and Open Concrete Structure
(BCIVOPN CON ST) plant bulk items, one welding receptacle is still being estimated
as was in the previous version. However, a LV cable from the welding receptacle to
the MCC is estimated. The run length of the cable is estimated to be the `Distance to
Motor Control Center’ which is set at the area level specs as opposed to twice the
`Distance to Motor Control Center’ since there is no cable run length between
additional receptacles.
Warning Messages for Emergency Shutdown (ESD) Control

Centers for Internal Volumetric Models (CQ00512690)
In ACCE and APEA, piping and instrumentation bulks are estimated for process
equipment based on the internal volumetric model. Certain internal volumetric
models have instrumentation loops with control connections to an emergency
shutdown (ESD) control center (e.g. the internal model for GC CENTRIF type
equipment). When such instrumentation loops are specified on the external
volumetric models or P&IDs, the system generates a warning message if an ESD
control center is not specified in the project. However similar warning was not
generated for the internal volumetric models with an ESD loop. In V8.4 such warning
will be generated for ESD loops in internal models. The users can remedy the
warning by adding a specialty control center of the type “ESD” in the process control
tree for the project.
In addition, we have fixed an inconsistency in the internal and external “FULL”
drawing (#623) for AT REACTOR equipment model. There was a loop which was
coded as an ESD loop in the internal model but was not an ESD loop in the external
PID. We have changed the internal model to match the external PID.


Paint Specifications In “Design Basis | Piping Specs | Material”

(CQ00510627, CQ00509463)
If users specified the sandblasting percentage as 0 for a particular material spec in
“Design basis | Piping specs | Material”, it would not get used correctly in a plant
bulk pipe (BPIPPIPE) in which the material spec was used. This was fixed in V8.4. If
users had specified a material spec and also specified some inputs in the “Pipe –
general specs” for a particular item, the paint specifications from the material spec
would get applied to any installation bulk pipe for that item irrespective of whether
the material spec applied to the pipe or not. This was fixed in V8.4. If users have
specifications mentioned above in their existing projects, they may see differences in
paint and sandblasting quantities.
External Insulation Schedules (CQ00499401)

There was a defect in the system due to which the insulation thickness was not
correctly calculated from the selected external insulation tables when the user had
not selected an “Insulation equivalent length rules” external file. This has been fixed
in V8.4. The dependency between these two external files was due to historical
reasons. In V8.4, users will be able to select and use external insulation schedules
without also having to select the equivalent length rules file.
Updates to Continuous Current Field in the Electrical Circuit

Breaker Plant Bulk and Bus Duct Plant Bulk (CQ00516905)
In the ‘Circuit breaker - main, feeder, tie’ plant bulk (BELSBREAKER), under Plant
bulks | Electrical -Substation, the ‘Continuous current’ input field had a maximum
value of 3000 A. This value was increased to 4000 A to make the estimation of 4000
A low voltage circuit breakers available to the user and a note was added to state
that for LV the maximum value is 4000 A and for MV and HV the max is 3000 A.
The limit on continuous current for the bus duct plant bulk, which is also found under
the electrical-substation plant bulks, also had a maximum value of 3000 A. This
value was increased to 4000 A.
The Default Formwork Material Type Has Been Updated

The steel rental formwork specification is now used by default for new projects in
V8.4. The formwork material type is available in the ‘Design basis | Civil/steel
specs’.

Older projects when opened in V8.4 will be updated and the formwork material used
will be as follows:
Project was last Value specified in Formwork material in

saved in: Formwork material V8.4
field
V8.0 (Nov 2012) or Not applicable because WOOD (changed by
earlier the field was not there updater)
in these versions.
V8.2 (May 2013) BLANK STEEL
V8.2 (May 2013) User specified value – Maintains user specified
either WOOD or STEEL value
COA Indexing Speed Improvement (CQ00480790)

When 8 digit external Code of Accounts (COA) file was used in a project, specifying
indexing for these COAs was extremely slow due to incorrect algorithm and gave the
impression of the program being unresponsive. The code has been improved to be
able to specify indexing for 8 digit external COA files.
Pipeline Length Field Update for IP UOM (CQ00514806)

Pipeline projects with I-P units of measure now show a ‘?’ in the total pipeline length
field in the ‘Pipeline Area’ specs form instead of a ‘0’. This is a required field which
should be specified by users.
Module Summary Report Updated (CQ00520182)

Previously, the tabulated values in the module summary report in the CCP report
were correct with exception of line "10. MODULE TOTAL".
A The total reported weight is now correct when Metric UOM are specified.
B The total reported direct costs are now correct when IP and Metric UOM are
specified.

B R G M - 1 M O D U L E S U M M A R Y - M O D U L E F A B R I C A T O R
=======================================================================================================================
: : : D I R E C T C O S T S : : TOTAL : PERCENT : PERCENT :
: : :----------------------------------: WEIGHT : AMOUNT : OF : OF :
:NO.: I T E M : MATERIAL : MANHOURS : MANPOWER : KG : USD : PURCHASED : TOTAL :
: : : K-USD : : K-USD : : : EQUIPMENT : COST :
=======================================================================================================================
1. PURCHASED EQUIPMENT 354.8 - - 195495. 354800. 100.0 6.9
2. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - 2533 101.3 - 101300. 28.6 2.0
3. PIPING 392.9 5291 211.6 99391. 604500. 170.4 11.8
4. CIVIL 0.0 0 0.0 0. 0. 0.0 0.0
5. STEEL 2586.0 13561 542.4 663205. 3128500. 881.8 61.2
6. INSTRUMENTATION 400.2 4221 168.8 4783. 569100. 160.4 11.1
7. ELECTRICAL 245.0 1277 51.1 15320. 296100. 83.5 5.8
8. INSULATION 0.0 0 0.0 0. 0. 0.0 0.0
9. PAINT 8.0 1247 49.9 1539. 57900. 16.3 1.1
---------------------------- ---------- --------- ---------- ------------ ------------ -------- --------
10. MODULE TOTAL 3987.0 28130 1125.2 979733. 5112200. 1440.9 100.0
Modular Steel Structure Design Update (CQ00521963)

Previously, the bargeable and truckable module design did not correctly account for
the loaded equipment weight. This defect has been corrected and results in a
heavier modular structure with higher steel material and labor costs. It is still very
important to use the proper workflow i.e. specifying a module contractor and module
fabrication conset and properly associating the modular area with the correct conset.
Otherwise, the equipment weight will not be accounted for in the module design.


CQ00295382 Stress Relieving for Pipeline segments

CQ00485952 User Guide mistake Chapter 3
CQ00486239 Data missing in line list report
CQ00489476 Home Office Const Support (COA 81) should be reported as non-
field cost, instead of field cost
CQ00497159 Terminations cost does not change between pairs and triad cable
selections.
CQ00499401 Insulation thickness calculated does not match custom insulation
table
CQ00499820 Online Help and Reference Manual listing multi-diameter tower
under DDT instead of its own category
CQ00500456 Dual vessel temperature swing absorber does not allow you to add
vessel diameter and height.
CQ00501859 HDPE Quantity of Fused Joint

CQ00503806 How do you come up with 10,999.1 kg for 1m3 of steel?
CQ00503923 The field for this in BPIPE should show the default as 25 psig
instead of it being the max.
CQ00505629 Update Icarus Engine Heat Exchanger Design Optimization
parameters
CQ00507008 incorrect excel calculations - wrong All In Rate values
CQ00508092 The Export (into Excel) in ACCE is adding line items below the "Last
Row" for certain tabs.
CQ00508832 Adding flowmeter on plant bulk pipe adds orifice plate/union on
drains
CQ00508844 When generating an Excel Report / Full import, Icarus Reporter
Crashes and error 9 appears.
CQ00509463 Painting of SS pipe
CQ00510627 Sandblasting entry of 0 does not delete sandblasting specified on
Piping Specs - Material
CQ00511500 Any project with more than 5000 User Tags the system has the
potential to crash
CQ00512581 Spreadsheet import\export - Sanitary rotary lobe pump 'Pump size
selection' drop down list issue

V8.2
Performance Improvements:
• In V8.2 we have enhanced the spreadsheet export code such that it significantly
reduces the time required to create empty spreadsheets or spreadsheets with
project data. The requirement that Excel 2007 or Excel 2010 should be installed
on your machine is still applicable. If Excel is not available, then the menu item
for Spreadsheet Import/Export is unavailable in the ACCE GUI.
• The Spreadsheet Import/Export feature now lets you export project components
with duplicate user tag numbers to a spreadsheet when installation bulks are not
selected. A warning message is generated during export highlighting the
components with duplicate user tag numbers. This lets you fix these duplicate
tags in a spreadsheet and re-import the components back into the project.
• During import the Spreadsheet Import/Export feature now does not include user
tag numbers of components with DELETE action in the pre-check for duplicate
user tags. This lets you create new components with the same user tag numbers
as those of other components which are being deleted with a DELETE action tag.
This can enable workflows where you want to export one type of component (for
example, Float head or Fixed Tubesheet heat exchangers) to the spreadsheet and
replace them with another type of component (for example, TEMA Heat
Exchanger). You can export a spreadsheet containing both types of components
and the project data; then mark the first type of components with DELETE action
and create the second type of component with NEW action and same user tag
number in the same spreadsheet. When the spreadsheet is imported, the
components of the first type are deleted and new components of the second type
are created simultaneously.
• For new items being created using the spreadsheet, you must specify the parent
area name for each item. The spreadsheet provides a drop-down list of all the
areas defined in the project and spreadsheet for this field; however you can also
type in the area name, and sometimes there are spelling errors in this field. This
used to create a cryptic exception message when importing the spreadsheet. This
has been improved and now the specific item with incorrect area name is
indicated in the errors dialog during import.
Addition of Solids Models

• Enhancements to Gyratory and Cone Crusher Models
For the Cone Crusher (ECR CONE) and Gyratory Crusher (ECR GYRATORY) the
Mantle diameter was a required field on the input forms in V8.0. These models
have been updated in V8.2 so that you can enter either the Mantle diameter or
the Crusher flow rate. When you enter only the crusher flow rate the model
calculates the mantle diameter and estimates the cost based on the mantle
diameter. When you enter both values, the user specified values are used.

Model Minimum flowrate Maximum

flowrate
Cone crusher 50 TPH [46 1300 TPH [1179

TONNE/HR] TONNE/HR]
Gyratory crusher 200 TPH [182 10,000 TPH [9071

TONNE/HR] TONNE/HR]
Addition of a steel formwork option to the general

civil/steel specs
In previous versions of Economic Evaluation, field-fabricated wood forms were

automatically generated by the system and you could not directly enter the
formwork material cost or the backup/bracing lumber cost. The system has been
enhanced to offer you a choice between field-fabricated wood forms and pre-
fabricated steel forms via the Formwork material type drop-down list. By default,
wood forms are still used in Economic Evaluation V8.2. The new formwork material
cost and the backup/bracing material cost fields let you directly specify the forming
material costs for their project.
Details:

In V8.2, both old and new projects use wood formwork unless the formwork material
type is changed in the project level civil specs. The new formwork material cost
fields are considered all-inclusive and should already account for the number of
formwork reuses (NOFR); the NOFR field is ignored when you specify the new
material cost fields.
If you select wood for the formwork material and do not specify material costs in the
new fields, there are no changes to the current system generated formwork material
and labor costs.
If you select steel for the formwork material and do not specify material costs in the
new fields, a default internal steel formwork cost is used (without modification due to
NOFR) and the existing internal backup/bracing lumber cost is used. Otherwise, the
material costs will be used as specified by you.
When you select the steel formwork option, CS is be used as the material
designation and the field-fabrication labor costs (COA 455) are not included. No
changes are made to the labor crew or rental equipment.
The following bulk material line items are produced by the system when you select
steel formwork:
COA 454 Formwork Materials CS Contact Surface Formwork, SF
COA 454 Formwork Materials Wood Backup/Bracing Lumber, BD FT
COA 456 Install Formwork Formwork Installation, SF
COA 457 Strip & Clean Formwork Strip and Clean Formwork, SF

Addition of structure tag field to quoted equipment
form and allow weight to be allocated to structures
The structure tag field has been added to quoted equipment. This tag in the quoted
equipment item works the same as the structure tag on equipment components.
The quoted equipment weight is allocated to a structure when the quoted equipment
COA is specified as an equipment COA, a valid structure tag for the structure is
specified, and a quoted equipment weight is specified. You can assign the quoted
equipment weight to Open Areas, Plant Bulk Open Structures, Bargeable Modules,
Truckable Modules, and Skid Modules. See the Icarus Reference Guide for additional
information about adding equipment to structures.

values
• Add maximum number of Valves/Fittings as 99 on the Bulk Additions Pipe Item
Details dialog box.

• Add maximum number of Valves/Fittings as 999 on the Plant Bulk Pipe Item
details dialog box Above grade or buried piping located under both Piping
• Add maximum of 6 in/150 mm for General Electrical Specs - Control Cable Min.
Conduit Diameter.
• Add maximum of 100 to General Instrument Specs and Area Instrument Specs -
Freeze Protect Instrument Transmitter.

Specifying all in wage rate would not remove
equipment rental cost in pipeline project.
In V8.2, the equipment rental report is no longer included in the pipeline .ppp report
when the all-in wage rate is specified or the total indirect cost for the prime
contractor is set to 0. Also, the equipment rental data results have been removed
from the database file FPROJID.
• All-in wage rates are specified, “-” for Indirect under Construction Workforce |
Wage Rates.
• The total indirect cost for the prime contractor is set to 0 in the contractor form

New Option to Enable Safety Instrumented VPIDS
In V8.2 a new Instrumentation Option is available within ACCE and APEA that lets
you select Safety Instrumented Systems (SIS) drawing types in addition to Standard
(STD) and Full.
Aspen Process Economic Analyzer (APEA):
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator (ACCE):
Note: You can also select this option in APEA and/or ACCE Templates which enables
usage within Aspen Plus or Aspen HYSYS Activated Economics in addition to typical
APEA/ACCE template functionality.
This new option provides a more accurate representation of the Piping and
Instrumentation requirements/scope to safely operate Offshore processes. This
includes changes in piping and instrumentation scope (including additional relief
valves, automatic and manual blowdowns), addition of line drains, addition of
Secondary Emergency Shutdown devices, and new methods in calculating relief line
diameters and length. In the V8.2 release, seven new SIS VPIDS (for example,
external graphical drawings, external volumetric models, and internal model) are
available for the following equipment types (only these drawings employ the changes
listed above):
• Centrifugal Pump motor drive SIS #816 (default SIS drawing when SIS flag is set
at Project Level)

• Centrifugal Pump motor drive SIS #816RV contains extra Relief Valve (available
as an alternate external graphical drawing and volumetric PID only at the
component level)
• VT continuous SIS #806
• Shell and Tube exchanger SIS #811
• Flat Bottom Storage Tank SIS #818
• Reciprocating gas compressor SIS #821
• U-tube Kettle reboiler SIS #803
You can see graphical representations of these new SIS drawings in the Aspen Icarus
PID Reference Guide pdf.
Estimate results will be different when the SIS VPIDs are used due to the scope
increases referenced. There are several ways the SIS VPIDs can be activated:
Project level
When SIS is selected at the Project Level (refer to screenshots above for where to
set this in APEA and ACCE), the drawings listed above will become the default VPID
for that component. This includes the internal, graphical, and volumetric PIDs. For
example:
• Centrifugal Pump models (for example, ANSI, API, Centrifugal single or Multi-
stage, and so on) use the new Centrifugal Pump SIS drawing #816 as the default
• Vertical process vessels (including multi-wall) use the new VT continuous drawing
#806 as the default
• The same applies for Shell and Tube Exchangers (for example, Fixed Tube, U-
Tube, TEMA, Floating Head) where the new SIS drawing #811 becomes the
default
• The same effect can be seen with the Flat Bottom Storage Tank where the new
SIS drawing #818 becomes the default and the Reciprocating gas compressor
where the new SIS drawing #821 becomes the default.
Note: SIS volumetric models require Emergency Shut Down Devices. An ESD
Specialty Control Center must be defined for projects using any SIS models.
Area Level
When SIS is selected at the Project Level, Areas inherit this specification unless
something else is specified in the Area form (for example, Full or Standard). Here
are some examples of how the system operates for each of the new VPIDs:
• SIS Specified at the Project Level, Area Instrumentation Spec left blank default
for that area is SIS (see above for behavior)
• SIS Specified at the Project Level, SIS specified at Area level default for that
area is SIS (see above for behavior)
• SIS Specified at the Project Level, Full specified at Area level default for that
area is Full and thus all old Full VPIDs will be used (internal, graphical, and
volumetric)
• Full Specified at the Project Level, SIS specified at Area level default for that
area is SIS for relevant VPIDs (internal, graphical, and volumetric see above for
examples)
Component Level

You can select any one of the new drawings at the component level as an alternate
drawing (graphical or volumetric). In addition, there is a new Centrifugal pump
drawing which includes a relief valve that may be selected as an alternate at the
component level. As typical, regardless of Project or Area level settings, specific
drawings selected at the component level will serve as the basis in the estimation.
Templates
SIS has been added as an option within APEA and ACCE templates which will set the
Project Level Piping and Instrumentation Design specification. In addition to ACCE
and APEA projects, these templates can be used in Aspen Plus and HYSYS for use
within Activated Economics. Once a template with the SIS flag set is selected within
Activated Economics (Aspen Plus or HYSYS), the new VPIDs listed above will become
the default volumetric models for those components.
Different scroll lists for some fields in AICE when

compared with the same fields in ACCE or APEA
• In AICE, for the Instrumentation system the fieldbus system is not supported.
But in the Instrumentation specifications the Instrumentation to junction box field
had PM - pluggable/pre-molded, for fieldbus only option which has been
removed.
• Similarly there are some fields in the Electrical specifications which have different
selections in AICE when compared to ACCE. The fields are:
a) HV cable/wire type
b) MV cable/wire type
c) LV cable/wire type
d) Lighting cable/wire type
e) Control cable/wire type

• In AICE V8.2, the above fields have the following selections:
• In the Electrical bulk items the following fields have different selections in AICE
when compared to ACCE or APEA:
a) Cable type Item 1
b) Cable type Item 2
c) Cable type Item 3
• In AICE V 8.2 the above fields have the following selections:

vessels
20P cable is used.
• Generally you should use ‘A’ series cables for maintenance temperatures up to
120 F or 48 C; ‘P’ series cables can be used for maintenance temperatures up to
250 F or 120 C.
the ‘A’ series cables, a warning message “MAINTENANCE TEMP. IS TOO HIGH
FOR THE CABLE TYPE SELECTED, 20P CABLE IS USED” is generated and 20P type

• The note for the Percent of area for elec. trace field has been modified to Must
specify percent of equipment area to be traced. Default: 0 percent.

the plant bulk item Lights and Outlets

V8.0
• China Design Basis
• Communication and Alarm Systems
• New Fields to Specify Pipe Wall Thickness Standard And Flange Rating Standard
• Additional Breaks by Size Range and New Remarks Field for Custom Pipe Specs
• Add Field for Percentage of Field Hours Sent to Shop for Pipe Hangers
• Allow Changing Length per Fitting Procured in Remote Shop at Area Level
• Duplicate Line Numbers Are Not Allowed in Installation Bulks | Pipe ñ Item
Details
• Add “Buried depth” Field to Pipeline Segments
• Added Missing API Pipe Materials to Scroll-List
• “Installation Option” Moved to Component Main Form
• New “Source of quote” Field
• Custom Pipe Specs Drop-Down List now Available in Excel Spreadsheet Exported
from the Project
• New Option to Automatically Open Exported Spreadsheet After Create
• Drop-down Lists for Custom User Attributes Available in Exported Spreadsheet
• Enhanced Workflow for Module Areas
• Externalize DCS System Pricing
• Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM) Update
• FATAL Error for Unlinked Process Control Centers
• Line Sizing Equations Now Loaded From Volumetric Model Library
• New ABE Class Views for New Equipment Models Added in V7.3
• Primavera Link Upgraded to P6V8.2
• New "List of Equipment - Source of Quote" Excel Report
• IPA Detail Cost Report Updated
• MPE Menu Items Disabled for 64-Bit Operating Systems
China Design Basis

In V8.0 we have implemented the following new features for supporting a China
Design Basis:
• Implemented the GB 150 (vessels) and GB 151 (shell and tube heat exchangers)
design codes. A new option GB 150 is available in the vessel design code input in
Design basis | Equipment specs. GB 151 will be used for heat exchangers when
GB 150 is selected as vessel design code.

• Chinese standard steel shapes for structural steel (beams and columns): for a
project with metric units, when GB 150 is selected as vessel design code, Chinese
standard steel shapes will be selected for structural steel (beams and columns):
• Piping standards (see the next section for details):

° Flange classes based on Chinese standard HG/T 20615-2009 or PN rated
flanges based on Chinese standard HG/T 20592-2009 can be used.
° Standard pipe wall thickness based on Chinese standard GB/T 21835-2008
can be used.
• Material properties: Plate and tube materials in the program have been mapped
to comparable material specifications based on various Chinese material
standards. For these materials, the material properties used in the calculation of
wall thickness have been obtained from the appropriate Chinese material
standards. For those materials for which a comparable Chinese material
specification was not available, ASME material properties will be used.
Note: See Icarus Reference Chapter 28, Material Selections for details about the
mapped plate, tube and pipe materials.
• Chinese templates: Two project templates have been created in the template
library as an example go-by for users:
° One for Metric units with inch pipe diameters and one for Metric units with
mm pipe diameters
° Uses US Country Basis with Currency set to Chinese RMB Yuan at a
conversion rate of 6.35
° Units are Metric with Pressure in Bars and Pump Flow Rates in M^3/hr
° 5-digit Code of Accounts to allow for desired Indexing

° Indexing File demonstrates calibration methodology
° Steel External file serves as an example for setting structural steel pricing
° Contractors and Workforces set as examples for wage rates and productivities
Communication and Alarm Systems

In V8.0, we have added the capability to estimate communication and alarm systems
for projects. The following systems can be designed and estimated:
• Paging and General Alarm System (PAGA)
• Telephone System
• Closed Circuit Television (CCTV)
• Area Networking (LAN)
• Radio Systems
• Access Control
• Intrusion Detection
• Meteorological
Users can specify the systems that they want to be designed and estimated at the
project level in Design basis | Electrical specs. They can also select these systems at
the Area level electrical specifications. The project level specifications are inherited
by the area unless the OSBL flag is set in the report group for that area.
The estimate for each system includes:
• Equipment Cabinets
• Cable Runs
• Raceways (Cable Trays)
• Junction Boxes if necessary
• Field Devices
• Monitors if necessary
• Mounting Poles if necessary
A minimum area of 400 ft^2 (37 m^2), for an area or a building, is required for it to
be counted in for designing these systems. The bulks for these systems get
estimated in the last area in the project.
Note: See the Basis for Capital Costs | Design basis section in the ACCE User
Guide, Chapter 2 - Defining project basis, for details about the calculations for each
system.

We have added a new plant bulk item ñ Plant bulks | Electrical ñ General |
Communication and alarm systems (BELCCOMALM SYS). The plant bulk allows the
users to specify the components of the various systems directly. Only the user
specified components get estimated in the plant bulk item.
Note: See Icarus Reference, Chapter 22, “Electrical,” for details about the new plant
bulk.
New codes of account added and the descriptions of certain existing codes of account
have been changed as they are now used for communication and alarm systems.
Updated codes of account:

• 781 Telephone System (previously Telephone)
• 782 Public Address Gen. Alarm (previously Intercom)
• 783 Intrusion Det. System (previously Annunciators)
New codes of account:

• 758 Equipment Cabinets
• 784 Access Control System
• 785 Closed Circuit TV
• 786 Radio Systems
• 787 Area Network Systems
• 788 Meteorological Systems
The following new subtypes have been added for the communication and alarm
systems.
For Equipment Cabinets (Code of account 758):

• 650: PAGA system cabinets
• 651: CCTV system cabinets
• 652: Telephone system cabinets
• 653: Area network system cabinets
• 654: Radio system cabinets
• 655: Access control system cabinets
• 656: Intrusion Detection system cabinets

• 657: Meteorological monitoring system cabinets
For wire/cable used in communication alarm systems (Code of

account 711):
• 658: 7C 16 AWG cable/7C 1.25 mm2 cable
• 659: 4 pair phone cable
• 660: 12 pair 18 AWG cable/12 pair 0.8 mm2 cable
• 661: 3C 14AWG cable/3C 1.5 mm2 cable
• 662: 24 fiber armor cable
• 664: 25 pr OSP CAT5 armor cable
For wire/cable terminations (Code of account 715):

• 663: 24 fiber armor terminations
• 665: 25 pr OSP CAT5 armor terms
Note: When users open existing projects with external code of accounts file in V8.0,
they may get FATAL error related to un-allocated codes of account for the new codes
of account that have been added to the system. Users will need to add new
definitions and allocations to their external code of account files for these new
system codes of account.
New Fields to Specify Pipe Wall Thickness Standard

and Flange Rating Standard
Two new fields have been added to Design basis | Piping specs | General to let
you specify pipe wall thickness standard and flange rating standard independently.
Pipe flange rating standard

The options for this field are as follows:
• ASME: Flange classes per ASME B16.5 standard
• DIN EN: PN rated flanges per DIN EN 1092
• HGT20592: PN rated flanges per HG/T 20592-2009 (Chinese standard)
• HGT20615: Flanges classes (similar to ASME) per HG/T 20615-2009 (Chinese
standard)

The default for this field is ASME.
Piping wall thickness standard

The options for this field are as follows:
• ASME: Wall thickness schedule per ASME B36.10M and 36.19M
• DIN EN: Standard wall thickness input per EN 10220 and EN ISO 1127
• GB: Standard wall thickness per GB/T 21835-2008 (Chinese standard)
• PN: Old method that allowed PN numbers to be input on pipe schedule fields
The default value for this field depends on the value specified for the flange rating
standard as follows:
Flange rating standard Default value for wall thickness

standard
ASME DIN EN
ASME DIN EN
HGT20592 or HGT20615 GB
These fields replace the old field Piping design and schedule opt. which was used
to specify DIN piping and the field DIN pipe thickness option field which was added
in V7.3.2. Existing projects with values specified in these fields are updated to
appropriate values for the new fields above to produce the same results as before.
The new fields allow the users to use the Chinese wall thickness and flange rating
standards. They also allow the users to independently change the flange rating
standard and wall thickness standard in any country base as opposed to previous
versions where DIN piping option was allowed only for EU and UK country bases.
Additional Breaks by Size Range and New “Remarks”

Field for Custom Pipe Specs
A new Piping spec remarks input field has been added to the custom pipe specs
input form (Design basis | Piping specs | Custom). Use this field to enter a
descriptive remark for the spec. The field is for the GUI only and is not read or
reported by the evaluation engine.
In V7.3.2 or earlier, you could specify three diameter breaks (Small, Medium and
Large) in the custom pipe specs. In this release, two additional diameter breaks
(Extra-small, Extra-large) have been added to custom pipe specs input form. In
addition, the pipe/fittings material adjustment, pipe valve material adjustment, and
pipe labor adjustment fields are now available in each diameter break separately
instead of once for the whole custom pipe spec. This lets you separately manipulate
the material and labor costs for different diameter ranges for the same pipe material.

The small diameter break in the existing custom pipe specs are be mapped to the
new, extra-small diameter break. The default values for the different inputs for the
old small break now apply to extra-small break. The material and labor adjustment
values in the existing custom pipe specs are mapped to material and labor
adjustments in the new extra-small break. The other diameter breaks inherit these
values unless different values are specified for them. Users need not make any
changes to their existing custom pipe specs as they continue to function as before.
Add Field for Percentage of Field Hours Sent to Shop

for Pipe Hangers
In V7.3.2, we added the capability to allow users to estimate certain portion of the
prefabricated pipe supports in the remote pipe shop. Based on the value specified by
users, certain portion of the prefabricated supports was procured in the remote shop.
In addition 30% of the hours required to install these supports were also estimated
as remote shop hours. With this enhancement, the user can control the percent of
field man-hours that are estimated in the shop for the pipe supports and thus change
the value from the default 30% to a different value.

Allow Changing Length per Fitting Procured in Remote
Shop at Area Level
In V7.3.2 we added the capability to allow the users to change the length of pipe per
fitting that is procured in the remote shop from the system default of 10 FEET [3 M].
This new field was added to the Design basis| Piping specs | General. In this
enhancement, this field has been added to the area level piping specs. The area level
value will inherit the project level value as the default.

Drop Piping Length
In the Utility pipe and utility stations (BPIPUTIL PIPE) piping plant bulk item, a
new field has been added to specify the length of utility station drop pipe lengths.
When you specify utility stations, this length is used to estimate the drop pipe length
for the air, water, steam and condensate return utility station. The default value is
100 FEET [30 M] for air, water, and steam; and 50 FEET [15 M] for condensate
return utility station.

Installation Bulks | Pipe - Item Details
In V7.3.2 or earlier, it was possible for the user to specify the same Piping line
number input for different entries in the Installation bulks | Pipe - Item Details
forms. This is not allowed in V8.0. If user has existing projects which contains
an error is generated for that item and user has to correct the error for the item and
associated bulks to be correctly estimated. This change was made to make the
behavior in the application consistent with the restrictions applied for data imported
using spreadsheet export/import feature.
Add “Buried depth” Field to Pipeline Segments

In V7.3.2 or earlier, in Pipeline projects, for pipeline segment plant bulk item (PCCP),
you could specify the pipeline segment to be partially or fully buried but could not
change the buried depth, in the fully buried case, from the default value of 3 feet. In
this enhancement a new field Buried depth has been added to this item. This field
lets you change the buried depth of the pipeline segment.
Added Missing API Pipe Materials to Scroll-List

In the extended scroll list for pipe materials:

• Seamless API pipe materials - X42S, X52S, X60S, X65S, X70S & GRBS have been
added to the scroll list. These materials have also been added to help text in the
pane on the right hand side of the extended scroll list dialog.
• X70W material was missing from the help text in the pane, it has now been
added.
This change affects the pipe material fields on the following forms:
• Plant bulk pipe (BPIPPIPE)
• Installation bulks| Pipe - general specs| Pipe material and Drain pipe material
fields
• Installation bulks | Pipe - item details| Pipe material field
• Yard pipe (BPIPYARD PIPE)
• Custom pipe specs ñ pipe material fields for each pipe diameter break.
On the plant bulk pipe and installation bulk pipe forms, for the Pipe type field, the
note in the properties window has been modified to indicate that the field is not
applicable to API materials (since users can specify welded or seamless material
directly).
“Installation Option” Moved to Component Main Form

In V7.3.2 and earlier versions, on process equipment, plant bulks, quoted cost items
and equipment model library (EML) items, there was an input field for Installation
option on the Installation bulks | Mat/man-hour %adj., vessel tracing form. This field
has now been moved to the main form. It is located below the Number of identical
items field. 5. The installation option field works the same was as it used to work in
V7.3.2 or earlier. However, since it is now directly available on the main form, it can
be accessed easily. It is now also available on the equipment grid in integrated sizing
and costing (ISC) in Aspen Plus or HYSYS, where it can be used to specify if certain
mapped equipment is spare or existing equipment and adjust the cost estimate
accordingly.
New “Source of quote” Field

A new Source of quote field has been added to the main input form for process
located next to the Currency unit for material cost input field. The tables below
outline the behavior of this input field. A new Excel report List of Equipment · Source
of Quote has been added to the reporter which sorts all the equipment in the project
based on the source of quote.
For quoted cost items and equipment model library (EML) items:
(Cost is always user specified)
Source of Quote · Entered value
Source of Quote · Reported value
SUBTYPE set by engine
BLANK
OTH: Other

1: User specified
SPECIFIED VALUE
SPECIFIED VALUE
1: User specified
For process equipment:
Source of Quote · Entered value
Quoted Cost per item · Entered value
Source of Quote · Reported value
SUBTYPE set by engine
Notes
BLANK
BLANK
SG or SGL
0: System calculated
SGL for gas turbines, gas compressors and boilers. SG for rest of the items
BLANK
SPECIFIED VALUE
OTH
1: User specified
SPECIFIED VALUE
BLANK
SPECIFIED VALUE
IF user specified value is not SG, SGL or OTH:
1: User specified
ELSE:
0: System calculated
This assumes that user is adjusting system value via material/man-hour adjustments
instead of entering a quoted cost
SPECIFIED VALUE
SPECIFIED VALUE
SPECIFIED VALUE
1: User specified

Custom Pipe Specs Drop-Down List now Available in
Excel Spreadsheet Exported from the Project
In V7.3.2 when a spreadsheet was created from ACCE using the spreadsheet
export/import feature, the custom pipe specs drop down list was not available in the
input fields in plant bulk and installation bulk pipe worksheets. After this
enhancement:
• When a custom pipe spec file is included in a project, the custom pipe spec
symbols from this file will be available in the exported spreadsheets, thus
allowing users to scroll-down and pick the desired custom pipe spec. If users
manually enter the pipe spec symbol in Excel, it will be validated against the
drop-down list. Thus an invalid entry will not be permitted (unless it is
copied/pasted from elsewhere which eliminates the validation).
• If no pipe spec file is included in a project, the exported spreadsheet will not
have a drop-down list of custom pipe spec symbols and no validation will be
made. This means the user can enter any pipe spec name in these fields.
Ultimately, if the correct pipe spec file is not attached to the project in which the
spreadsheet will get imported or incorrect names are given, these will be flagged as
usual when a project evaluation is performed.
New Option to Automatically Open Exported

Spreadsheet after Create
In the spreadsheet import/export GUI a new check-box option has been added to
enable automatically open the exported spreadsheet after the spreadsheet is
created. The option is enabled by default.
Drop-down Lists for Custom User Attributes Available

in Exported Spreadsheet
In V7.3.2, when you exported the project data to a spreadsheet using the
spreadsheet import/export feature, custom user attributes defined in the project
were exported to the spreadsheet. If you had defined drop-down lists for certain
custom user attributes, the lists were not available in the exported spreadsheet. In
V8.0, these lists are now available in the exported spreadsheet.
Enhanced Workflow for Module Areas

If you specified a modular area height and did not specified a module type, then
either a TRMD or BRGM module type is assumed. If the modular area dimensions
are too large for a TRMD, then a BRGM module is used. The specified area
dimensions will be used to design a single sub module. An informational message
informs you of the module type assumed by the system.

Bulks | Steel
In Installation Bulks | Steel for a component, five additional (eight total) structural
steel items can now be specified. This lets you better define the equipment support
steel structure at the installation bulks level.
Externalize DCS System Pricing

You can now specify hardware and software man-hours, material cost, advanced
cost, supervisory cost per I/O for each type of control center using an external file.
These costs are used for estimating the hardware and software costs for the control
centers specified by the user in the process control tree. Users are able to create this
file in the external libraries and select/edit it within the project similar to other
customer external files.

In the V8.0 release, the currency exchange rates, construction wage rates and
engineering wage rates have been updated for all the 89 locations available in the
Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM).

In V7.3.2, for a mega project, loading and displaying components in the list view
(center pane) was a very time consuming task. In V8.0, we have significantly
improved the performance for loading items in the list view, switching between
various views (Project Basis View, Process View and Project View) and sorting the list
view items. This improves the usability of the product for estimating mega projects.
FATAL Error for Unlinked Process Control Centers

In previous versions of ACCE, the control center and operator center could be
unlinked from a conset and the project evaluation could proceed without a FATAL
error in the same version. However when the same project was later opened in a
newer version, the engine generated a FATAL error for the unlinked control centers.
In V8.0, ACCE has been updated to be consistent with the expected behavior; that
the users get FATAL errors for unlinked operator center or control center in the same
version.
Line Sizing Equations Now Loaded From Volumetric

Model Library
In previous versions, the pipe line sizing equations specified in user defined
volumetric model library files were not loaded when the user defined volumetric
model library file was loaded for an equipment item. This has been fixed in V8.0 and
the line sizing equation inputs are now get loaded correctly.

New ABE Class Views for New Equipment Models
Added in V7.3
In V7.3 we added the following new equipment models:
• Multiple diameter, trayed or packed towers (DTW TOWER)
• Cryogenic double-walled, fully containment storage tank (DVT LNG TANK)
• Crude oil desalter (DHT DESALTER)
• Sediment removal filter (DF FILTER)
In V8.0 new class views have been added to Aspen Basic Engineering for these
equipment models. This lets you send the design data sheets and plot plan related
data for these items to ABE and create data sheets for them or use them in creating
plot plan layout.
Primavera Link Upgraded to P6V8.2

In V8.0, we have upgraded the link to Primavera Project Management applications
from P6.2 to Oracle Primavera P6 Enterprise Project Portfolio Management (EPPM)
V8.2. The link continue to work for Primavera Project Management P6.2 as it was in
V7.3.2.

Report
A new report, List of Equipment - Source of Quote, is added for process equipment,
equipment model library (EML) item or quoted cost item with an equipment COA.
This report contains the source of quote for the items and is sorted by the source of
quote value.
In the Aspen Icarus Reporter GUI, this report can be found at Full Import | Other
Reports | Project | List of Equipment - Source of Quote tree view location:
To run this report:

• Select List of Equipment - Source of Quote report; then click Run Report.

In IPA Details Cost report, material cost for equipment is further broken down into
“Mechanical” and “Fabricated” equipment costs as shown below:

MPE Menu Items Disabled for 64-Bit Operating
Systems
The menu option Tools | Manpower Productivity Expert (MPE) has been disabled
when the software is installed in a 64-bit operating system environment because
MPE is not compatible with 64-bit OS.

V7.3.2
The following new features, updates and/or enhancements are contained in this
release:
• New Excel Spreadsheet Import/Export Capabilities
• New option allows Pipe Supports to be sent to Remote Shop
• New option allows for welded valves to be installed in the Remote Shop
• New option allows for users to change length of Pipe per fitting going to Remote
Shop
• New option allows users to make Custom Pipe Specs specify a mandatory pipe
schedule rather than minimum
• In Custom Pipe Specs fields, allow “0” to be entered for “Pipe and fittings
material adjustments”
• Improved method for calculating wall thickness of DIN Pipe
• Number of Identical Items added to ACCE List View
• Orifice plate and flanges added to the bulk pipe component
• “Back of panel option” input field for instrumentation bulk items removed from
input form
• “Volume units” input field removed from VT STORAGE model
• Wind and seismic load calculations updated to ASCE 7-05 and ASCE 7-10
• User defined building type and description fields added to the external Building
Unit Cost file
• Added capability to modify customer external text files that do not currently have
a GUI interface
• API VB6 example program updated to VB.NET
• Double-click behavior is changed for Report Group and Main Project
• Scheduling support available for 98 contractors instead of 40
• New field to input copper cost for electrical wiring/cable
• Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM) updates
New Excel Spreadsheet Import/Export Capabilities

A new feature is available within ACCE that provides the ability to either import
project data from a MS Excel spreadsheet into an ACCE project or export ACCE
project data to a MS Excel spreadsheet. This feature is compatible only with MS
Office 2007 or 2010.
This feature can be used to create Excel worksheets for:
• All process equipment
• All plant bulks (excludes pipelines)
• Quoted cost items
• All installation bulk options for project components (that is, all options available
in the “options” drop down in the EE GUI)

• Areas (Parent report group name, Area title, Area type, Area dimensions only)
Note: Site Development (SD), Unit Cost Library (UCL), Equipment Model Library
(EML) items and Buildings are excluded from this feature.
This feature allows creating new components in a project based on the data specified
in the spreadsheets. Existing components (either newly created by importing from
the spreadsheet or exported from the project to the spreadsheet) may be deleted
from a project or changed/updated with new specifications from the spreadsheets.
This allows for rapid creation of project components and eliminates transposing data
from Equipment Lists into the ACCE component forms which can lead to errors. It
also enables rapid circulation and validation of equipment specifications by Subject
Matter Experts as the spreadsheets can be easily distributed for review.
Generated worksheets have the following structure:
• One worksheet for each type of project component (process equipment, plant
bulk, and quoted cost items)
• One worksheet for each of the installation bulk options (items on the “Options”
drop-down)
• One worksheet for area specs (area name, report group, area type, dimensions)
• Worksheets are created for only the items chosen in the tree-view of the
spreadsheet import/export dialog
• One “Index” worksheet is created in the beginning of the file to aid navigation to
all the worksheets as it is hyperlinked to the other worksheets.
The feature is available only when a project is open. This will ensure consistency with
units of measure customizations and currencies for a given project. Within a project,
it can be accessed on the File menu:
Selecting File | Spreadsheet Import/Export will launch the Spreadsheet feature

User Interface:

Exporting a spreadsheet
Users will be able to create an empty spreadsheet selecting desired process
equipment types, plant bulk types, and installation bulk options from tree view of the
spreadsheet import/export dialog.
• Example: Process Equipment | Pumps | Centrifugal | select ‘DCP API 610.
• Selecting “Installation bulks” will create all installation bulk options (no
individual selections can be made).
Exported Spreadsheets will contain information about:
• Minimum/maximum/default values of input fields.
• Explanatory notes about input fields.
• Input fields with min/max values will automatically have data validation in the
spreadsheet to flag incorrect input values. Note: Data validation will not occur
for values copy/pasted from a different cell.
Users can also export data from a project (having existing component specifications)
either by type or project area.
• Installation bulks will be exported only for those project components which have
a user tag number specified.
• Project components without user tag number will be flagged in error/warning
messages.
• When data is exported for selected project areas, installation bulks will also be
exported for the components in the areas.
Note: Selecting to export components that are not present in a project will create
empty worksheet(s) for said components.
Importing spreadsheet data into a Project

Data pre-checks will be performed prior to spreadsheet import:

• Min./Max. limits will be validated by data validation added to the Excel sheet
which will prevent users from entering data outside component limits.
• A pre-check will ensure component tag numbers in the worksheets are unique so
the correct associations for installation bulks in the project can be made.
• A pre-check will ensure the number of pipe lines and loops for any equipment
does not exceed ACCE system limits.
• Errors will be flagged and displayed so they can be corrected in the ACCE project
or the spreadsheet.
• A validation will be made to ensure every area specified for components has the
area specified in the Area Worksheet.
Spreadsheet structure
The following features are common to all worksheets:
• One row defines a single item.
• Input fields are in columns (e.g. one column for Design Pressure).
• Input field columns will show min/max/default values and descriptive notes for
that field.
• Input fields with drop-down lists in the GUI will have drop-down list in the
spreadsheet.
• Required fields will adhere to the same color coding as the ACCE GUI.
• Support for Custom User Attributes is the same as ACCE and will appear in the
worksheets. However, any defined scroll lists for custom user attributes will not
appear in the worksheets.
Note: “Extended” scroll lists that appear in the ACCE GUI are not available in the
worksheets. Consult the Aspen Icarus Reference and ACCE User Guides for non-
obvious scroll down values (for example, civil foundation types).
A column is provided to indicate the desired “action” for each row of input during the
“Read” operation.
Actions for each row could be New, Change, Delete or Ignore
• New will create a new item
• Change will update an existing component with data in the worksheet row
• Delete will delete an existing component
• Ignore will skip the item during read
The following features are for specific worksheets:
• Project components (process equipment and plant bulks) worksheets:
° A column to indicate the parent area for the project equipment
° Installation bulk options worksheets
° Each row will be 1 installation bulk item associated with a project component.
For example, on the Pipe – Item details worksheet, each row of input will
be 1 piping line associated with a project component.
° There will be a User Tag column to indicate the component associated with
the installation bulk.
° Tag number input is mandatory and must match the tag of a component that
is unique.

Note: Tag number uniqueness is only applicable/required for spreadsheet
import/export. It is not enforced within ACCE GUI.
Simplified Instructions for using the worksheet – components

and plant bulks:
• Do not delete rows 1 – 10 or the “LAST ROW”
• Do not delete columns A-F or the “LAST COLUMN”
• To add a new line of input:
° Insert a row above the “LAST ROW”
• To remove a line of input from the spreadsheet:
° Delete the input row completely
• To modify the input fields to match user preferences:
° Delete, hide or move whole columns past column F
• When moving columns, insert them before the “LAST COLUMN”
Spreadsheet Example
Consult the ACCE User Guide for further and detailed information on using this
feature.
New option allows Pipe Supports to be sent to Remote Shop

A new input field - Pipe supports in remote shop (PERCENT) - has been added to
Design basis | Piping Specs | General with the default being 0 percent. If pipe is
being sent to remote shop, a portion of the total number of pre-fabricated pipe
supports (based on value specified in the new field), will be procured in remote shop.
Thirty percent (30%) of the man-hours for installing the supports will also be
estimated in the remote shop. The labor cost for these man-hours will be added to
the material cost of the remote shop pipe supports. The rest of the pre-fabricated

pipe supports will be procured in the field. The man-hours to erect all pipe supports
will be booked in the field as well.
As an example, for a remote shop pipe having 8 pipe supports with 50% of the
supports specified in remote shop:
• Remote shop cost = (material cost of 4 pipe supports) + (unit-man-hours for
pipe supports)*(0.3)*(4 supports)*(shop labor rate)*(shop productivity
adjustments)
• Field material costs = (material cost of 4 supports)
• Field labor costs = (unit-man-hours for pipe supports)*0.7*(4 remote shop
supports) + (unit-man-hours for pipe supports)*(4 field procured pipe supports)
These changes will apply to:
• Installation bulk pipe associated with project components.
• Plant bulk pipe
• Utility piping and utility stations
• Yard pipe
The same code of account (366) will be used for pipe supports procured in remote
shop or field. The subtype 951 will be specified for pipe supports procured in remote
shop. Users can use this subtype to create code of account exception and book the
remote-shop pipe supports to a new user-defined code of account if needed.
New option allows for welded valves to be installed in the

Remote Shop
A new input field - Welded valves in remote shop (Y/N) – has been added to
Design basis | Piping Specs | General. The default value for this field is “N”.
When “Y” is selected and pipe diameter is in the remote shop pipe diameter range,
non-flanged valves will be counted as fittings to determine length of pipe that is sent
to the remote shop. The number of welds in the remote shop will be increased to
account for welding the valves to the pipe spool and the number of field welds will be
decreased appropriately. Valve erection man-hours will also be accounted in the
remote shop and the line item for valve erection in the field will not be generated.
This will only apply to:
• Pipe less than 2 inch (50 mm) NPS with SW (Socket-welded) connection type
• Pipe with 2 inch (50 mm) or more NPS and WW (Weld pipe/weld valves)
connection type
Note: For SC, SB, VC, VS and PF connection types, even when the pipe diameter is
in remote shop diameter range, the pipe is fabricated in the field., so these
connection types will not be affected by this change.
New option allows for users to change length of Pipe per fitting
going to Remote Shop
A new input field - Length/fitting to remote shop (FEET/M) - will be added to Design
basis | Piping Specs | General. The default value will be 10 feet (3 m). This value will
be used to determine the length of pipe to be procured and fabricated in remote
shop as follows:
Let,

Length per fitting to remote shop specified in the newly added field = Lfit
Total length of pipe (specified by user on the pipe input form) = Ltotal
Number of fittings = N with N > 0
Then:
IF (Ltotal - N*Lfit) >= Lfit
Length of pipe procured/fabricated in remote shop = N*Lfit
ELSE
Length of pipe procured/fabricated in remote shop = Ltotal
Note: When N = 0, and pipe fabrication type is RMT, the pipe is procured in field.
The method described above is different than the existing method and will result in
changes for the length of pipe procured in remote shop vs. field in existing projects.
Users will have to make necessary adjustments to account for this in their existing
projects when used in V7.3.2. The existing method employed by the system is:
Length of pipe procured/fabricated in remote shop = N*10 feet IF (N*14.95) >=
Ltotal
New option allows users to make the Custom Pipe Specs

specify a mandatory pipe schedule rather than minimum
In the custom pipe specs form a new field - Make minimum schedule mandatory
(Y/N) has been added with the default value set as "N". When this field is set to
"Y", the minimum schedule specified in the pipe spec will be treated as a mandatory
schedule when using the pipe spec for a given plant bulk or installation bulk pipe.
Setting this field to “Y” allows for different scenarios for the pipe to which the pipe
spec is applied:
• Actual calculated schedule is smaller than mandatory schedule specified - this is
OK because mandatory schedule thickness will be sufficient in this case.
• Actual calculated schedule is greater than mandatory schedule. For example, the
minimum schedule (which becomes mandatory when the newly added field is set
to “Y”) specified in the pipe spec is 10 and the design conditions for the pipe
result in a schedule 20 pipe. Then schedule 10 thickness will not be sufficient to
meet design conditions. In this case, a warning is generated for the pipe but the
mandatory pipe schedule will still be used in estimating the pipe.
Note: This option will NOT apply to DIN piping irrespective of whether user has
selected the old method (PN number inputs on schedule field) or new method for
DIN piping (see discussion for the two methods used in DIN piping).
In Custom Pipe Specs fields allow “0” to be entered for "Pipe

and fittings material adjustments”
In the custom pipe specs form the following three fields:
• Pipe and fittings material adj.
• Pipe valves material adj.
• Pipe labor adjustment

You can now enter 0 as the adjustment value. Prior to V7.3.2, only values > 0 were
allowed. Also, four digit adjustment values up to 9999 can be entered (previously
only three digit values up to 999 were allowed). For the material adjustment fields,
when 0 is entered, the actual unit cost for pipe and fittings is set to a small value
($0.01) which will generate a very small, negligible material cost. This is based on
customer feedback where users want the costs to be zero (that is, negligible) but
want to see the key quantities counted. In order for the key quantities to be
counted, the cost had to be a small non-zero positive value.
For the four digit values, the adjustment will continue to be applied as it would for a
three digit value. The adjustment will be indexed to 100. Thus, if 1000 is entered as
the adjustment for pipe and fitting material, the material cost will get multiplied by
(1000/100) = 10.
Improved method for calculating wall thickness of DIN Pipe

A new input field – DIN pipe thickness option – has been added to Design basis
| Piping Specs | General. The options for this field are:
• PN: Allow PN number input for schedule
• DIN EN: Thickness per EN 10220 & EN ISO 1127
The default value is DIN EN which is described below. Selecting PN keeps the
current method unchanged, that is, you can specify PN numbers in the schedule
field for DIN pipe and PN numbers are shown in the detailed bulks results for pipe
and fittings.
Selecting DIN EN means that PN numbers will not be allowed on the schedule field
for DIN pipe. Instead thicknesses will be calculated according to the appropriate DIN
EN standards referenced. If DIN EN method is selected AND PN numbers are input
on the schedule fields for DIN pipe, warnings are generated and the PN number input
is ignored. When the DIN EN option is selected, the method for calculating wall
thickness is as follows:
The dimensional standards that govern the pipe thickness in DIN piping are:
• DIN EN 10220 for seamless and welded carbon steel pipe. (This replaces earlier
DIN 2448 and DIN 2458 standards for seamless and welded CS pipe
respectively).
• EN ISO 1127 for stainless steel pipe. (This replaces earlier DIN 2462 and DIN
2463 standards for seamless and welded SS pipe respectively)
DIN pipe thicknesses will be calculated based on material properties, design
temperature and pressure, and corrosion allowance. The next higher standard
thickness, based on the dimensional standards referenced, will be selected and
reported. Pipe weight will also be calculated per the equations given in the
dimensional standards. The standard thickness determined for pipe will also be used
for fittings such as elbows, tees, reducers, and so on. In the detailed bulk section of
the output report, thicknesses will be output instead of PN numbers for pipe and
fittings.
Pressure classes (PN numbers) may be entered in the "Flange class" input for DIN
pipe. These classes will be used for flanges, valves and gaskets.

Number of Identical Items added to ACCE List View
A new column, No. Items, has been added to list view in the Project Basis View.
This column shows the number of identical items of each component in the project.
The default position is after the Model column and can be moved to any location or
made invisible by changing the list view settings.
Orifice plate and flanges added to the bulk pipe component

In the plant bulk pipe or installation bulk pipe input forms, for the “Valve or fitting
A-F type” input fields, a new option – OP: Orifice plate and union – has been
added to the drop down list. When users select this option and specify the quantity in
the adjoining field, the appropriate number of orifice plates and orifice unions will be
available with the “Above grade or buried yard pipe” item which has been
deprecated. After this enhancement, this fitting option will be available for “Above
grade or buried pipe” plant bulk item which is the preferred way of specifying plant
"Back of panel option" input field for instrumentation bulk

items removed from input form
"Volume units" input field removed from VT STORAGE model

For the “Flat bottom storage tank, optional roof” equipment item (model = DVT
STORAGE), there used to be a “Volume units” input field to specify the units for the
tank volume. This input field has been removed in V7.3.2. Users will be able to
specify the tank volume in GALLONS for I-P unit system and M3 for metric units. If
existing projects contain equipment items of this type, the volume will be updated
and converted (if necessary) to the appropriate unit based on the project units of
measure.
Wind and seismic load calculations updated to ASCE 7-05 and

ASCE 7-10
The wind and seismic load calculations have been updated to ASCE 7-05 and ASCE
7-10. As a result of this, several new fields have been added to the General
Civil/Steel Specs form.

• The design loads reference code specified will determine whether ASCE 7-05 or
ASCE 7-10 will be used for the wind and seismic load calculations (default is set
to ASCE 7-05).
• The ASCE 7 occupancy/risk category represents the hazard to human life in event
of failure. The default setting is Category III which represents a substantial
hazard to human life in the event of failure.
• Seismic parameters Ss and S1 are used to calculate the horizontal seismic
acceleration in the ASCE 7-05 and ASCE 7-10 standards. If the horizontal
acceleration, Ss, S1, UBC Zone, and Mercalli number fields are left blank, then a
seismic design will be performed based on the design load reference code
chosen. The parameters Ss and S1 will automatically be chosen based on the
project country base.
Note: Old projects having a Japan Country base may see significant differences in
support steel design in V7.3.2 vs. previous versions as a result of this active seismic
region.
• If older projects are opened in V7.3.2 with seismic data already specified, then an
ASCE 7-05 or ASCE 7-10 seismic design will not be performed. In order to use
the updated seismic calculations, the UBC zone, Mercalli number, and horizontal
acceleration fields must be left blank. The Ss and S1 fields may optionally be
specified, but we recommend that the appropriate values be used since Ss and
S1 are location specific and are found on the seismic ground motion map included
in the ASCE 7 standards.
• The three methods of specifying the seismic data are Ss and S1, UBC Zone, or
Mercalli number. Each method ultimately determines the horizontal seismic
acceleration. The horizontal acceleration field may be used to override horizontal
acceleration determined by the three methods.
• See the V7.3.2 Icarus Reference Guide for additional information about the ASCE
7-05 and ASCE 7-10 wind and seismic load calculations.

User defined building type and description fields added to the
external Building Unit Cost file
User defined building types and descriptions have been added to the external
building unit cost file:
The updated version of ‘BLTABL.dat’ has new fields defined for USER type and USER
DESCRIPTION.
• The user defined building types map directly to the system defined building
types.
• The default USER type and USER DESCRIPTION contain the system defined
defaults.

• These defaults may be changed by the user as shown in the example above.
• User defined types and descriptions will appear in the building type scroll list on
the Plant Bulk Civil Building component and will also be shown in the output
reports.
• The system remains backwards compatible with building unit cost files defined
prior to V7.3.2.
Added capability to modify customer external text files that do

not currently have a GUI interface
The following highlighted customer external files may be modified with notepad.exe
in either the library or project basis (ACCE only):
An example of modifying the library version of the building unit cost file follows.
Right click the external file and select modify. The file will open in notepad.exe.
Save the file in notepad.exe after making desired changes.

API VB6 example program updated to VB.NET
The API example program has been updated from VB6 to VB.NET.
• The executable program and source code is located in \Documents and
Settings\All Users\Documents\AspenTech\Shared Economic Evaluation
V7.3.2\Examples\Dot Net\APICOMExample
Double click behavior is changed for Report Group and Main

Project
In prior versions of ACCE, double clicking on the Report Group expanded/ contracted
the Report Group. This behavior has changed in ACCE V7.3.2 where a double click on
Report Groups now activates the Add Area (Process or Pipeline area) dialogue.
Note: A Pipeline project must be created during initial project creation by setting
the “Allow Pipeline Areas” option to P on the General Project Data form.
Similarly, a new Report group is added if Main Project is double clicked.
Scheduling support available for 98 contractors instead of 40

In prior versions of ACCE, scheduling capabilities supported a maximum of 40
contractors. This limit has been increased to 98 in ACCE V7.3.2.
The Interface ACCE and Primavera Project Management (P6) requires the Java
Runtime Environment (JVM). The default memory settings consumed by JVM is
sufficient for most projects. However, large “mega” projects require more memory
which may cause a failure in data loading from ACCE to P6 if all the JVM memory is
consumed. A new file PMDataImport.ini is introduced in ACCE V7.3.2 to make the
memory used by the JVM configurable. This may improve performance of large
projects.
In the INI file, there are 2 settings related to JVM:

Xmx argument is for maximum heap size, and -Xms is for initial heap size.
Xms: Initial Memory allocated to JVM
Xmx: Maximum Memory that can be allocated to JVM. This can be set up to
maximum physical memory (RAM) installed on system.
Copper pricing update for electrical wire/cable

The methods used to calculate wire price for electrical power, control, lighting and
feeder cables in has completely changed in V7.3.2.
Note: The copper pricing update also affects equipment, area, and structure
grounding wire costs.
A new field, Copper Price, has been added in the General electrical specifications
with units dependent on selected country base (for example, $/lb, SAR/lb, PS/kg, K-
Y/kg, or EUR/kg).
Generally the total cost of wire = Cost of Copper in it (‘X’) + Cost of Armor,
insulation, sheath, and so on. (‘Y’).
The new methods for calculating price and weights were validated against a set of
comprehensive vendor pricing data/weights.
Users will be able to modify ‘X’ by specifying a copper price in the new field. This will enable
users to adjust/account for fluctuations in copper pricing markets.
For V7.3.2 the internal copper prices are set as follows. These values will be updated
annually:
• US: 4.26 USD/lb
• ME: 15.97 SAR/lb
• JP: 1.41 K-Y/kg
• UK: 4.27 PS/kg
• EU: 10.43 EUR/kg

As a result of this change, differences in wire costs will be apparent vs. previous
versions. To assist in understanding these changes, the following tables have been
generated where comparisons between wire prices and weights in V7.3.1 vs. V7.3.2
are illustrated.
Note: The wire prices in the tables below are calculated with copper price of
$4.26/lb. The wire quantities are the default lengths calculated internally by the
system.
Results for the US country base project with wire size input units as ‘A’ and ‘M’:

In V7.3.2 the currency exchange rates, construction wage rates and engineering
wage rates have been updated for all 89 worldwide locations.
In addition, the following is applied to RM concrete prices when projects are
relocated. When projects are relocated, user entered type B concrete price is
updated (for the new location). However, the concrete price of types A, C, and D
were not updated by ARM. In V7.3.2, the system has been updated to remove user
specified concrete prices for types A, C, and D when the project is relocated with
ARM.

V7.3
The following new features and enhancements are added in this release:
• Run multiple economic evaluation projects simultaneously
• Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM) updates
• Removed default speed from input form for certain centrifugal pumps
• Costing Template support
• Improvements to remember selections feature of Reporter
• Remarks cards are added to spreadsheet view
• Display warning message when scaling rules do not apply due to max equipment
limits
• Spreadsheet view for quoted components
• Weight field on item options material/manhour additions form
• Specific quantity for quoted equipment items
• A new field has been added to the module form called ‘Equipment bracing
allowance (Percent)’
• The shipping acceleration fields and calculations for bargeable modules have
been enhanced for ocean shipping
• Galvanized steel cost is now customizable through the external steel file
• Interface changes for API users
• Removal of Batch Import Feature
• Zick analysis option for horizontal tanks and shell & tube heat exchangers on
saddle supports
• New method for recovering crashed projects
• Updated link to latest version of Cost Data Online WinRACE application
• Removal of Automatic Item Evaluation feature
• Support for MS Windows 7 64 bit Operating System and MS Office 2010 (32 bit
version only)

simultaneously
• Users now have the ability to open multiple projects simultaneously from among
• This includes the ability to work on several Aspen Plus and/or HYSYS costing
cases simultaneously.
type (e.g. Excel reports) are run in another instance.
• Certain restrictions apply:

° Opening projects with the same project/scenario name in multiple instances
will not be permitted even if they are in different applications. An example of
this is if the Sample Projects\Gas Plant is open in ACCE (instance 1) and in
another instance (APEA instance 2), a project with the name Sample
Projects\Gas Plant is attempted to be opened, even if the projects are located
in different places. In this example, an error message will be generated
either to close the original project/scenario or to open a project with a
different name.
° Saving a project/scenario with the same name as one already open (even if
they are in different applications) will not be permitted. In this instance, an
error message will be generated either to close the original project/scenario
or to save the project with a unique name.
° Although projects and products may be opened and worked on
simultaneously, it is recommended that certain actions be allowed to
complete before activating the same action in a different instance. As an
example, allow a project evaluation (or a mapping/sizing) stage to complete
in instance 1 before performing a project evaluation (or mapping/sizing) in
instance 2. Note: instances can be a combination of APEA, ACCE, AICE,
and/or Costing cases within Aspen Plus or Aspen HYSYS.
° Opening of Library files in one instance will lock out that particular library file
from being opened in another instance, even if the file is attempted to be
opened in a different product. An example of this is if in instance 1 (ACCE),
the EML IP Sample library is opened, a lock will be generated which will
prevent this library file from being opened in another instance (e.g. APEA
instance 2). The same policy applies to opening projects located in the same
place.
Note: In order to support multiple simultaneous processes, a change was made in

the closing behavior of the ICEdit application (for viewing ccp reports).
Consequently, ICEdit will no longer close when a project is opened or closed.
Previously, any running instances of ICEdit would be shut down when a project was
closed or opened. In order to differentiate between multiple CCP reports, it is
recommended to use unique ccp file names. CCP file names are defined when a
project evaluation is made. In addition, when multiple ccp reports are opened, the
following will display in the status toolbar (which will disappear when the ICEdit
application is shutdown):

• Pricing updates for the Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM) have been made to all
89 worldwide locations.

centrifugal pumps

• API 610 pump
Costing template support

• A new method for creating projects via templates is now available. Templates are
specifications that can be made within a template will vary with the Product used
to create the template, i.e. APEA, ACCE, and/or AICE) without any project
defined within the template. As an example, ACCE users can customize craft
rates, construction, engineering work forces, contractors, project level standard
basis information, etc. based on internal company standards and/or location
specific requirements within a template. The saved template will have an
extension “.izt” located in the EE_Templates folder. The saved templates can
then be used while creating a project. This provides an advantage in that users
will not have to enter the same data multiple times for every project created
which simplifies the workflow in setting up project level specifications. In
addition, users may also save existing projects (after deleting all project
components and areas) as templates if valuable project specifications are to be
persisted.
• In ACCE new File menu options have been added to create New Templates, Open
existing Templates, and to Save As Template (discussed previously). In addition
a new Templates Tab has been added to the right side palette for easy retrieval
of existing templates (shown below):
• When templates are opened, the Project and Process View tabs are disabled
because templates do not contain any project components. In addition, all icons
such as Load/Map/Evaluate in the toolbar are disabled since these operations do
not have functions within template mode. Further information on creating and
importing templates into projects can be found in the User Guide.

Reporter
• The Reporter allows users to select and run multiple Standard reports or Excel
reports or Update On Demand reports. These selections can be retained for
further use by clicking the Remember Selections button shown in the figure
below. When Remember Selections is utilized, the selections are retained and

shown the next time the Reporter application is run. In V7.3, the Reporter will
retain the selections in both the product as well as the project.
• In V7.2 and prior versions the selections are cleared once the reports are
displayed. In V7.3 these selections are displayed until the user chooses to do
otherwise.
• Remembering selections product wise: in V7.2 and prior versions, the

and only retained the last selections made amongst all three Economic Evaluation
separately.

• Remembering selections project wise: in V7.3, selections can be saved
Notes:
• Clicking on the Remember Selections button will save or update the selections
made within the current report mode (Standard Reports or Excel Reports or
Update On Demand) only. If you want to save or update the selections for other
type of reports then you need to select that report type and then click on
Remember Selections button after selecting the reports.
• These selections should be cleared before adding or removing any new custom
reports.

• In the spreadsheet view for Heat Exchanges, Pumps, Compressors, Quoted
Items, Towers and Vessels, two new fields displaying Remarks 1 and Remarks 2
have been added at the end of the list by default.
Display warning message when scaling rules do not

apply due to equipment limits
• Warning messages will now be generated after project scaling (via ASM) is
performed notifying users if scaling rules could not be applied to certain
equipment components due to min/max limits on equipment specs being
reached. In the event scaled values fall outside either min. or max. equipment
spec limits, the pre-scaled value is retained. Once an error condition is met, a
user has the option to either stop the scaling operation or continue. If stop is
clicked then further operations based on user’s selection in the Decision Analyzer
dialog (e.g. evaluation) will not be run. These error messages are similar to scan
errors dialog and will provide users with a listing of components in which the ASM
rules cannot be applied (see example below). In prior versions, no warning
messages were generated giving users no indication that scaling was not
performed on certain components. This lead to a time consuming task for large
projects of having to review each component to validate proper application of
scaling rules.

• In V7.3 the spreadsheet view has been extended to included quoted cost
components. This will enable users to modify COA, material costs, etc. of all
quoted items in one form. A new menu item under View->Spreadsheet View->
Quoted Item->All has been added to display the form (example below).

additions form
• Total weight per item field has been added to the Material and Manhour Additions

• A new quantity field has been added to Quoted Cost item form which allows real
number specifications. If quantity adjustment option is specified as ‘Y’ or unit of
Number of identical items. A similar calculation is done for labor hours and
weight.

• In the equipment results section of the .ccp report, Quantity will be displayed in
place of Number of identical items. As before, Number of identical items will be
displayed as ITEMS in the left most column. Previously for quoted bulk item
material cost and COA are not displayed in this block. From V7.3 these two
values will also appear:
• Due to this addition, there will be significant changes when an old project having

1. For old projects containing quoted items with Quantity Adjustment = N and
a. Number of identical items value will be migrated to the new Quantity
field and Number of identical items will be set to 1.
2. For old projects containing quoted items with the Quantity Adjustment = Y
and no installation bulks specified, the following will occur when migrated to
V7.3:
3. Number of identical items value will be migrated to the new Quantity field and
Number of identical items will be set to 1.
4. For old projects containing quoted items with Quantity Adjustment = Y and
any installation bulks specified, the following will occur when migrated to
V7.3:
5. Number of identical items value will be migrated to the new Quantity field and
Number of identical items will be set to “?”. This will alert user to specify
Number of identical items since under these conditions, the system cannot
interpret the intent of the specifications. This will alert users interaction is
necessary to complete the evaluation.
6. Similar behavior will be observed when importing specs file.
Note: When migrating old projects containing Quoted Cost items into EE V7.3, it is
recommended users review the results for these items after the upgrade. The
inclusion of Quoted Cost items into the spreadsheet view can facilitate this review.
Equipment bracing allowance specification

• A new field has been added to the area module form providing users with a
means of specifying an allowance for temporary equipment bracing used during
shipping. This field applies only to truckable and bargeable modules and the
default is set to 10% of the steel weight for truckable modules and 5% of the
steel weight for bargeable modules.
Shipping acceleration fields and calculations for

bargeable modules have been enhanced for ocean
shipping
• The shipping horizontal acceleration field was changed to transverse shipping
acceleration on the area module form. Module specifications made in ACCE V7.2
using the area horizontal acceleration field will get migrated to the transverse
field when these projects are opened in V7.3.
• A longitudinal and vertical shipping acceleration field was added to the area
modules form.
• A season drop down menu was added to the area modules form allowing
specification options for selecting shipping season.
• A route drop down menu was added to the area modules form containing 15
worldwide shipping route possibilities.
• These specifications work in conjunction with each other:
° When a BRGM module type is selected; selected season, route, and module
height (tallest module of 4 will govern) will enable calculation of the shipping

acceleration fields. Thus, based on these selections, accelerations values will
automatically be calculated.
• The shipping acceleration determined by the system are good for initial estimates
when no other information or data is available. To fine tune the estimate using
more accurate acceleration coefficients, it is recommended that a naval architect
be consulted to determine the particular barge type, season, shipping route, and
module height. The shipping accelerations provided by the naval architect may
be inputted into the acceleration fields to override the defaults given by ACCE.
Galvanized steel cost is now customizable through the

external steel file
• “Galvanized steel added cost per unit weight” has been added to the external
steel file:
• The default value of the cost adder will be 0.

• If any old project from V7.2 or V7.2.1 has an external steel file attached to it, the
file will be updated and the cost adder item (item#15) will be added to the file.
• When users select “Galvanized finish” for steel AND when they select external
steel file, the cost per unit weight of galvanized steel will include the cost adder
specified in external steel file.
• Example:

° Users have selected the default file and changed the Galvanized steel added
cost to .10 $/lb
° If painted finish is selected, cost of “Ladders without cage” will be 1 $/lb
° If galvanized finish is selected cost of “Ladders without cage” will be 1.10 $/lb
Interface changes for API users

• Due to support for allowing multiple simultaneous ACCE (and other estimating
product) instances, changes have been made to where project iccache directories
are temporarily stored/located. The iccache folder is now one level deeper and
includes the scenario name. This may impact ACCE API users who will have to
make modifications to their API applications to account for capturing the scenario
name.
• In V7.2 and prior ACCE versions, API user needed to pass only the project name
to the open method. In V7.3 one additional parameter, scenario name is now
required to be passed to the API open method. Thus, the API will now require
passing both project and scenario name to its open method.
Here is an example code snippet for VB user:
Dim MySysObj As ICAPILib.System
Dim ProjObj As ICAPILib.Project
Private Sub OpenProject_Click()
‘Open connection to a currently active (open) project
Dim Icarus As ICAPILib.System
Dim Proj As ICAPILib.Project
Dim szProjName As String
Dim szScenarioName As String
Dim nUserInstance As Long
Dim bRet As Boolean
Set Icarus = New ICAPILib.System

Set Proj = New ICAPILib.Project
szProjName = "Sample Project"

szScenarioName = "Gas Plant"
If Icarus.Initialize Then
bRet = Icarus.Login("John Smith", nUserInstance)
If bRet Then
If Proj.Open(Icarus, szProjName, szScenarioName) Then
MsgBox "Successfully opened a connection to a project "
End If
End If
bRet = Icarus.Terminate
End If
End If
Set Proj = Nothing
Set Icarus = Nothing
End Sub
In addition, due to the new equipment models, additional object names are
available in the API. Refer to the Aspen Icarus API Reference Manual for the new
object names and for further API information.

Removal of Batch Import Feature
• The batch import feature was intended to transition Icarus 2000 users to ACCE
(aka Kbase) by migrating/importing IC2000 projects. Since IC2000 has not been
available for over 7 years, this feature is now obsolete and has been removed in
V7.3.
Zick analysis option for horizontal tanks and shell and

tube heat exchangers on saddle supports
• An option has been added to Design basis  Equipment specs to enable Zick
analysis for horizontal vessels and shell & tube heat exchangers installed on
saddle supports. This analysis takes into account stresses due to vessel weight at
the saddle support with potential modification of vessel wall thickness determined
from pressure considerations. For certain long horizontal tanks with low design
pressure, the thickness determined by Zick analysis may be controlling (i.e.
greater than the thickness determined by pressure). This method is not used by
default and users will have to select it explicitly in the design basis if this analysis
is desired. Once selected, differences in shell wall thickness may result for
horizontal tanks and shell & tube heat exchangers, corresponding to differences
in weight and cost.
New method for recovering crashed projects

A new method for recovering crashed projects has been implemented in V7.3 for all
Economic Evaluation products. In prior versions, crashed projects were recovered by
zipping the iccache folder to an archive location specified by the user. Starting with
the V7.2 release, changes were made to file handling methods to improve
performance and support Mega projects. Due to these changes, the crash/recovery
methods previously used were no longer valid/effective. Thus, a new recovery
method has been designed and employed in V7.3.
A Specs file will now be written to the project iccache folder as a timed event based
on a callback function. A new option is available in the Backup/Recovery section
within Preferences (Timed Recovery) allowing a time interval to be specified on
how often the specs file is to be generated (the option can also be turned off). When
a project crash now occurs, to a user the recovery procedure will appear the same as
previous versions, i.e. the system will detect a crash upon re-opening the application
and the user will be prompted as to whether the project should be recovered. If the
user selects to recover the project, a new project/scenario name will need to be
specified. Once the project/scenario name is specified, the recovery process will use
the specs file in the iccache folder to regenerate the project. In addition to
recovering components, project specs and any attached PID xml files will also be
recovered. In the current version, the process will not recover user specified
attributes created using UserAttributes.exe.

Note: The recovery process is not ‘real’ time so there may be a time lag between a
crash event and the point at which the recovery was last made. Upon recovery,
users should review the recovered project for any missing changes/entries to the
project. Missing items or specifications will have to be re-entered in the recovered
project. As mentioned, the default recovery is set at 10 minutes, a shorter duration
can be set if deemed necessary.
Updated link to latest version of Cost Data Online

WinRACE application
• The link with WinRACE has been updated in V7.3 allowing users to link with
either WinRACE 8.0 or 9.0. If both versions are installed, only a link to WinRACE
9.0 will be active.
Removal of Automatic Item Evaluation feature

Due to lack of use, the Automatic Item Evaluation feature has been removed from
the Tools\Options menu and is no longer available.
Support for MS Windows 7 64 bit Operating System

and MS Office 2010 (32 bit version only)
• ACCE V7.3 can be run on the MS Windows 7 64-bit operating system and is
compatible with MS Office 2010 (32-bit version only).
Note: The Manpower Productivity Expert (MPE) will not run under any 64-bit
operating system (see Known Issues section of this document).

V7.2.1
A number of defection corrections are included in the ACCE V7.2.1 release. These
defect corrections are included in the defect corrections for ACCE V7.2.0 below.

ACCE New Features and Enhancements
V7.2
• Mega Project Support
° Increase number of components to 99999
° Increase number of contractors to 98 and number of construction workforces
to 98 (one per contractor if desired)
° Increase the number of custom pipe specifications to 999
° Increase the number of external insulation specifications handled
° Allow ability to specify vessel field fabrication type in the equipment
specifications under the design basis
° Allow users to modify the vessel fabrication diameter at the Area level
° Merge multiple projects containing an equivalent project basis
° New Excel and Crystal reports are added
° New ICedit features to manage ccp reports
° CCP report Enhancements
° Significant performance improvements to handle larger project sizes
° Scheduling improvements to accommodate single activities requiring
substantial manhours
• Add shipping horizontal acceleration to bargeable modules for ocean shipping
• Primavera scheduling updates
• External steel pricing capabilities
• Addition of new fields to equipment the GUI
• Field bus enhancements in Instrumentation
• ‘Q’ usability improvement indicating equipment components where quoted costs
are given
Allow up to 99999 components

The maximum number of components allowed in V7.2 is increased to 99999.
Allow 98 independent contractors to be created

Users can create and use 98 contractor definitions with 98 unique workforce
specifications. This allows a separate set of workforce specifications for each
contractor.
Users are now able to:
• Create 98 independent contractors with 10 levels of hierarchy where a contractor
can be a sub-contractor or a main contractor. They can also specify a name for
the workforce to help identify the workforce.
• Create and edit 98 contractors that each links to a separate workforce in the
contractor definition tree. When the user selects workforces (both construction
and engineering), the dialog shows the workforce name.

General wage rate/productivity form
• On the General wage rate form, the Construction workforce number is a

required field now.
• Access to the craft wage rates form is achieved by clicking on the red arrow in
the Craft Wage Rates field.
• Construction workforce # must be defined on this form in order to gain access to
the individual craft wage rates form.
• If for instance, in an old project there is one General wage rate item with no
construction work force number specified, when it is opened in V7.2, then 1
appears in the Construction workforce number field since it is a required field
now.
• In addition, each column in this form can be copied/pasted with all underlying
Construction workforces being copied as well.

Craft wage rate/productivity form
• This form is designed to allow easier review and entry of wage rates and
productivities.
• It also allows easier copying/pasting of data to/from Excel.
• The copy button on the form lets you paste the entire form into Excel.
• In addition, crafts specified using craft names feature/form are added into this
list of existing crafts.
Note: The first two fields, Craft Codes and Craft Name, are non-editable.
Allow users to use 999 custom piping specifications

The system is able to handle and manage a larger number of custom pipe
specifications. Specifically, users are now able to:
• Create and edit 999 custom pipe specs in the custom pipe spec library.

• Use a library with 999 or create 999 custom pipe specs in the design basis -
custom pipe specifications.
• Use up to 999 custom pipe specs in the piping inputs, including process pipe
plant bulk pipe components and installation bulk piping details and general
specifications. Custom pipe specs are now sorted alphabetically in the drop down
menus.
• Significant performance improvement gains have been made in both displaying
the pipe spec forms and selecting a pipe spec from the scroll list.
Allow users to use 20 hot insulation and 10 cold

insulation specification tables
The system is able to handle and manage a larger number of insulation specification
tables. Specifically, users are now able to:
• Create any number of hot insulation schedule libraries with 1 insulation
specification table/file. Users can use up to 20 hot insulation specification tables
in a project.
• Create any number of cold insulation schedule libraries with 1 insulation
specification table/file. Users can use up to 10 cold insulation specification tables
in a project.
• Create any number of insulation equivalent length libraries with 1 insulation
specification table/file. Users can use 1 insulation equivalent length table in a
project.
• Specify the hot insulation specifications in the project design basis as either the
internal default hot light, medium or heavy tables or specify a named insulation
table to use as the default for all the areas.
• Specify the cold insulation specifications in the project design basis as the
internal default cold table or specify a named insulation table to use as the
default for all areas.
• Specify the insulation specifications for hot and cold insulation for each area as
either an internal default table or specify a named insulation table to use.
Allow users to specify the vessel field fabrication type

in the equipment specifications under the design basis
Vessel field fabrication type can be changed to either shop labor field fabrication
(default) or contractor field labor fabrication by selecting a new field Vessel field
fabrication option added in the general equipment specifications under the design
basis.
Allow users to specify the vessel shop fabrication

diameter in the equipment area specifications
Users can now specify different maximum shop fabrication diameters for different
areas by changing the shop fabrication maximum diameter field that is added in the
area level equipment specifications form.

Allow users to merge projects with equivalent project
bases
A new capability has been developed enabling project merging (of the same design
basis) from multiple users working on different parts of the project.
A proposed workflow is the following:
• Create a starting project basis for use in all sub-projects.
• Create ‘partial’ projects which encompasses different parts of the project, using
the same starting project basis for all projects.
• Open a copy of one of the ‘partial’ projects (or a fresh copy of the starting design
basis). The project in the open state from which other ‘partial’ projects are
merged into is known as the target project.
• Select run-merge project and select a second project to merge into the current
(that is, ‘target’) project. The system verifies whether the project bases are
identical or not (if they are not identical, the process aborts). The system copies
all the areas, and components into the target project from the source project
with minimal checking for conversion/verification performed (Item Description
clashes are detected and resolved in the same manner as current drag/drop
rules). No project basis data is copied and links to the project basis definition are
disconnected. However, all target project links are preserved and all source
project links are un-linked. Source project RG/Areas are added to the end of the
Target project.
• Report group and area checking are made prior to merging. If the merged project
results in Report Groups exceeding 90 or areas exceeding 300, a message
appears and the merging terminates.
The following new Excel and Crystal Reports have

been added in V7.2
S.N. Report Name Type Description

1. Overall Craft Summary Excel/Crystal Overall project direct field labor
Report Reports summary and overall project total
direct field labor summary.
2. Craft Summary Report by Excel/Crystal Direct field labor summary and total
Contractor Reports direct field labor summary by
contractor
3. Overall Equipment Rental Excel/Crystal Overall Project equipment rental
Summary Report Reports summarized.
4. Equipment Rental Summary Excel/Crystal Equipment rental summarized by
Report by Contractor Reports Contractor.
5. Key Quantity Summary by Excel Only Direct cost summary by Report Group.
Report Group Direct costs presented with key
quantities at a sub-account level.

6. Project Summary by Excel Only Project summary (direct and indirect
Contractor costs) by Contractor. Direct costs
presented at an account level by
Contractor. Indirect costs presented at
a detail level by Contractor.
Each contractor report is generated in

a separate worksheet – a new report
feature
A new feature was added to Excel reports wherein the number of reports and sheet
names are determined by the number of contractors/identifiers in the project.
• Each page of this kind of report is created in a separate worksheet.
• A new column MultiSheetID (type - text) is added to the StoredReports table.

The report sheet name and report are created based on the value of this column.

Allow users to specify the shipping horizontal
acceleration in the area module specifications
• You can now specify the horizontal load on a structure during shipping for
different modules by changing the shipping horizontal acceleration field that is
added in the area level module specifications form.
• This field overrides the project design basis horizontal acceleration design value
only if this value is larger than the value specified at the project level.
• This allows different module source locations to be accommodated in a single
project (via different areas) rather than different projects as is the case with
older versions.
The API version used by the link between Aspen

Capital Cost Estimator and Primavera Project
Management has been updated from version (5) to
version (6+)
In previous releases, the link between Aspen Capital Cost Estimator and Primavera
Project Management utilized the Primavera API version (5). In V7.2 this link is
upgraded from version (5) to version (6+).
Externalize steel pricing

Steel material pricing is updated in the system during the annual costing update. In
prior versions users are not able to modify bulk commodity steel costs directly. This
new feature in V7.2 allows the users to modify these costs by specifying them in an
external file and selecting the file through the UI.
The following commodity steel items may be updated via this file:
• Five classes of steel used for columns and beams in open steel structures and
pipe racks. Users can also change the steel member sizes that are assigned to
each class.
• Reinforcing bars (Rebar)
• Ladders
• Ladders without cage
• Handrails
• Stair channels
• Stair treads
• Platforms
• Bracing
• One type of steel grating (default)
External steel rebar pricing is overridden if rebar pricing is provided in the project
level civil specifications.
Note: AspenTech does not update the pricing for these items annually; thus as a
default the price for each item is set at $1/lb.

New Fields have been Added to the GUI
• Two new fields, Code of Account and Icarus/User code of account are added to all
equipment components.
• Users can now override the Code of Accounts at the component level and an
option is available for the user to choose between the Icarus Code of Accounts
and User Code of Accounts.
• New paint fields for percent equipment field touch up and percent pipe field touch
up are added to the Project level and Area level specifications.
• Users can now specify the percent of field touch up needed for equipment and for
pipe structures by specifying this field in the project level and area level paint
and pipe specifications.
• In the General equipment specifications under the design basis, new field to print
equipment coordinates is added.
• Users can now choose to view or not view equipment footprint coordinates in the
output reports by specifying this in the equipment specifications under the design
basis. The footprints generated are used for drawing plot plans in Aspen Basic
Engineering.
Note: This entry must be manually selected as “Y” if the plot plan feature is to be
used, as by default this setting is turned off (“N”).
Field bus Enhancements in Instrumentation

New fields are added in both Project level and Area level Instrumentation
specifications related to Field bus:
• Field bus back up power supply – Added at both project and area levels.
• Field bus short circuit protection – Added at the area level.
• Percent active bricks – Added at the area level.
Users are now able to:
° Specify whether they need a backup power supply in addition to the main
power supply for the field bus system. This can be done at both project and
area levels.
° Select specific areas that need short circuit protection.
° Specify the active-passive bricks ratio at the area level.
‘Q’ Usability Improvement

• Users are now able to see ‘Q’ in the installation bulk column of the list view when
they specify a value in the quoted cost per item field in the component form.
• This enables easier identification of components that have quoted costs specified.
New ICedit Feature to Manage ccp Reports

• A new option to split file size is added in the ICedit preferences. This enables
viewing of very large results reports generated by Mega Project estimates within
performance tolerances. The default size is 100Mb.

Note: Setting this value too high can result in an application crash if a very large ccp
report is generated.
• In CCP files larger than this setting, browsing of the ccp report is only via section.
• To browse to other sections, you must navigate to them via the contents pane.
• The search option searches only within the current selected section.
Enhancements in the ccp report

Ccp reports now have an extra feature to browse the design data sheets and detailed
bulks by the different report groups in a project on the left side contents pane.
Standard voltages should be printed when

nonstandard voltages are entered to describe cables
In the electrical system there are four standard voltage levels:
• 600V, 5000V, 15000V and 35000V for US, ME base (IP and Metric)
• 600V, 3300V, 11000V and 33000V for UK, EU, JP base (IP and Metric)
The lines describing cables in the report should print the standard voltages when the
user puts in a non-standard voltage in the general electrical specifications. The
engine uses the voltage entered by the user for calculations, but prints the next
standard value to the corresponding non-standard voltage entered.
New Pipeline and Electrical Subtypes

New pipeline subtypes (617-699) are added under Piping, and cathodic protection
subtypes (701-714) are added under Electrical.

V7.1
• Plot plan layout
• Further improvements for equipment and area data entry via Grid Mechanism
Plot Plan Layout
Performance Improvements
The code has been modified to increase the speed of data transfer from Aspen Basic
Engineering (aka Zyqad) to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator (aka Kbase) using ABE
Costing Interface (Cost Mapper). Also error messages generated during data transfer
are displayed at the end of the transfer so they do not to interrupt the process. This
enhances the workflow for transferring data to and from Aspen Basic Engineering.
In the Drawing Editor, while drawing the plot plan layout, users can filter the
stockpile by Areas (Areas defined in the CCE project that has been transferred for
plot plan layout). This improves the workflow by making it easier for users to
determine which equipment belongs to which area.
Quoted Cost and Equipment Model Library (EML) Items

You can now transfer Quoted cost items and EML items from CCE projects to ABE.
Users need to enter the desired footprint and safety dimensions on these items. The
items will be transferred to Mechanical Equipment class objects in ABE.
Plant Bulk Pipe Racks

Users will be able to transfer plant bulk pipe racks (concrete and steel) to ABE to be
displayed on plot plan lay out. The drawing editor can be used to graphically change
the length and width of the pipe rack(s). Pipe racks can be laid out to span multiple
areas and can be placed outside areas. The length, width and location of the pipe
rack placed in the plot plan can be imported back to CCE for re-estimation.
Further Improvements for Equipment and Area Data

Entry via Grid Mechanism
• Provide additional equipment breakdowns so the equipment grids can display
input specifications for more alike component types. From the original View Menu
a user will be able to go directly to any category under the spreadsheet view
either with a single drop down or dropdown with -> to go to a further level. The
breakdowns that will be presented are:

Vessels
All
Horizontal
Vertical
Pressure (containing models: CYLINDER, MULTI WALL, JACKETED,
SPHERE, SPHEROID)
Storage (containing models: STORAGE, GAS HOLDER, CRYOGENIC,
PLAST TANK, WOOD TANK, CONE BTM, LIVE BTM, SAN TANK)
Tile Chest (containing models: CHEST CYL, CHEST RYL, CHEST MTL)
Heat Exchangers
All
Reboilers
Heat Exchangers
All
TEMA (containing models: FIXED T S, FLOAT HEAD, U TUBE, TEMA,
PRE ENGR)
Sanitary (containing models: CORRUGATED, HOT WATER, MULTI P F,
STM HE MOD
Air Cooler (containing model AIR COOLER)
Miscellaneous (containing all models not included above)
Compressors
All
Gas
Centrifugal (containing models: CENTRIF, CENTRIF IG)
Reciprocating (containing models: RECIP MOTR, RECIP GAS)
Air
Pumps
All
Gear
Positive displacement
Centrifugal
All
Process (containing models: ANSI, ANSI PLAST, API 610, GEN SERV,
API 610 IL, HIGH SPEED, IN LINE, MAG DRIVE)
Vertical/Sump (containing models: AXIAL FLOW, CANNED, TURBINE)
Sanitary/Stock (containing models: PULP STOCK, SAN PUMP, FLUME
PUMP)
Towers
All
Single
Double

grids.

V7.0
• Plot plan layout
• Crystal reports upgrade
• Index improvements
• New reports
Plot Plan Layout

This feature lets you generate a graphical representation of a preliminary equipment
layout. The equipment arrangement on the layout will be used (in conjunction with
Volumetric PID Connectivity) to determine piping lengths in the project estimate. The
new lengths will replace the system calculated lengths which will improve piping run
estimates since the layout serves as the basis for the length calculations. In order to
use this layout feature, Aspen Basic Engineering (formerly Aspen Zyqad) must be
licensed and installed. A new plot plan drawing type has been created in Aspen Basic
Engineering to support this workflow.
The workflow for this feature is described in the following:
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator calculates and exports data to Aspen Basic
Engineering:
• Area dimensions (if not specified by user)
• Equipment footprint dimensions (if not specified by user)
• Dimensions of exclusion zone around equipment (if not specified by user)
In Aspen Basic Engineering, the new Layout drawing type is accessed in the Drawing
Editor application. These functions can be performed to create the project layout:
• Locate areas defined in the Aspen Capital Cost Estimator project
• Locate/arrange project equipment within designated areas. Exclusion or ‘safety’
zones conforming to Industrial Insurance spacing requirements are calculated
and shown on the layout drawing (as dashed lines) for each equipment item to
assist in arrangement.
• Area dimensions and location can be changed graphically
• Equipment locations can be changed graphically
• Equipment within an area will move with the area when the area is relocated on
the drawing
• Update scaling to zoom in/out of layout to fine tune equipment arrangement
• Printout hard copies of plot plan for areas and project
Note the following restrictions within the layout drawing:
• Equipment cannot be placed outside an area

• Equipment cannot be placed in areas different from their ‘parent’ areas (areas
they were specified in Aspen Capital Cost Estimator)
• Equipment cannot be placed on each other, which would violate the exclusion
zone concept unless the area type is specified as OPEN, EXOPEN or MODULE. If
the area type is OPEN, EXOPEN or MODULE, equipment can be placed on each
other, which is assumed to be at different levels (or Z – height coordinates).
However, the layout represents a top down view and, as such, different levels are
not isolated within the view.
• Areas cannot be placed where they will get negative coordinates
• Piperack symbols can be placed on a drawing for graphical representation only.
• Note: No data resulting from the layout arrangement for piperacks will be
transmitted back to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator.
• Areas cannot be rotated; equipment can be rotated only through 90 degree
increments.
• Area size can be changed by using top and right handles only
• Equipment footprint size and safety dimensions cannot be graphically modified in
the plotplan. These values (either calculated or inputted by the user) are set in
Aspen Capital Cost Estimator. Only equipment coordinates (used to calculate
spatial relationships) are modified within the layout.
Import the data back to Aspen Capital Cost Estimator:
• Area dimensions, locations and equipment locations from the user generated plot
plan are imported into Aspen Capital Cost Estimator
In Aspen Capital Cost Estimator, a project evaluation is performed to calculate
interconnected piping lengths:
• Aspen Capital Cost Estimator uses equipment locations to calculate
interconnected piping lengths
Note: Use of interconnected VPID feature is necessary to calculate new line lengths.
The lengths calculated for Interconnected Lines are composed of two parts:
• A fixed length determined from the layout using equipment X, Y, Z coordinates to
calculate relative distances between the components
• A variable length calculated from equipment internal volumetric models using
equipment parameters (e.g., tower height)
• Total length is the sum of both parts



Grid Mechanism
New Grid type (i.e. spreadsheet) layouts enable the following:
• Modification of Area Specs across all areas by Discipline
• Modification of Equipment Specs can be made by equipment type (e.g. pumps,
vessels, heat exchangers, towers, etc.)
The new grids will expedite data entry, edit, and review in an easier grid layout.
Model, etc.
• Sort by different equipment type or column (e.g. Materials of Construction,
Flowrate, etc.)
• Add/Delete components
Indexing Improvements
Real Number Indexing

This new feature enables Real Number Indexing (XXX.XX format). The indexing can
be done on:
• Project Level
• Area Level (Replace Model) – this option replaces Project Level Indexing
• Area Level (Multiply Model) – this option multiplies the area and project indexing
External Indexing
This new feature externalizes Material, Man-hour, and Location indexing. This helps
assist users in calibrating to a new cost basis by updating an existing Project Level
Index with a new one. Also, external index library file can be created using the
library editor. The external index file can be selected, edited, and used at the project
level. At the area level, indices may be edited and applied cumulatively or to replace
the project level indices.

On-Line Help Functionality
Allows users to press F1 on equipment component forms and the help will navigate
to the applicable topic in the reference guide. This feature is enabled only for
equipment in this release.
New Reports
New Standard Area Reports are included with this release: Component Listings with
Equipment Cost (equipment cost was not previously included in the component
listings reports). The new reports are located:
• Full Import_Other Reports_Area_Component Listings_Sorted by ID
• Full Import_Other Reports_Area_Component Listings_Sorted by Name

AICE New Features and Enhancements in
V9

• A grout height of 6 inches is typically used for small pumps that are less than 500 HP.

Manpower Productivity Expert (MPE) is a utility that has been delivered within all products of
AspenTech’s Economic Evaluation family. MPE is implemented using a technology that can
only run on 32-bit Windows. Beginning in V9, 32-bit Windows is no longer supported. As a
result, Version 8.8.2 was the last release of the Aspen Economic Evaluation family to include
MPE.
For more details, including an extensive FAQ section, see the associated document on the
Aspentech EE support website.

(CQ00562177) A total % field is added to sum the individual percentages. A note on project
definition is added.
Better user control of fire water header, loop, and lateral piping calculations

User tag added to the Excel Pipe Line List report
(CQ00582749) Now it is easier to match an equipment designation to a user tag if you
renumber the components and the equipment designation changes.
P3 (Project Planner) is Removed from AICE

We have removed P3 (Project Planner) for AICE. It is not supported past Windows 7.

Primavera is updated to P6 Professional 15.2. Java version prior to 8.x is not supported.

V8.8.2

Evaluation Help.
Specify pipe remote shop productivity and wage rate

(CQ00373863)
Two new fields have been added to Design Basis | Piping Specs | General form and
the area level piping specs form, to allow users to specify pipe remote shop
productivity and wage rate. The productivity can be specified as a percent of base.
The default value will be 100. The wage rate specified by the user will be considered
to be all-in (loaded) wage rate for all crafts. These two new fields are not applicable
to module type areas. In module areas, we estimate each remote shop activity
separately and report it as man-hours and labor cost. This allows users to control the
wage rate and productivity using the construction work-force assigned to the
appropriate contractor. For further details, refer to Chapter 3 of the Aspen Capital
Cost Estimator User Guide or to the help section.

(CQ00582780)

Separate Steel Fabrication Costs From Steel Material Costs In
Steel External File (CQ00532506)
You now can separate steel fabrication costs from steel material costs using the new
Fabrication Cost column in the Steel External file. The fabrication cost per lb [or kg]
should include the typical steel fabrication operations (i.e. CNC Controlled
Equipment, Sawing, Drilling, Punching, Flame Cutting, Plasma Cutting, Shearing,
Coping, and Welding).
If you enter a fabrication cost per lb [or kg] in the fabrication field, two report lines
are generated per item - the first represents steel material cost, steel erection man-
hours, and steel labor cost.
The next line (with “FAB” added to the description ) includes the estimated cost of
typical steel fabrication operations (i.e. CNC Controlled Equipment, Sawing, Drilling,
Punching, Flame Cutting, Plasma Cutting, Shearing, Coping, and Welding). There is
no labor cost on the FAB line since labor is still considered a part of the steel material
cost.
A subtype 698 is also added to the fabrication line for identification in the Database.
Previous versions of the Steel External file are compatible with the new file format.
Pile size field added to general civil/steel specs and area civil
specs (CQ00275578)
A new pile size field is added to the general civil/steel specs and the area civil specs.
The pile size specified at the project level may be overridden by the area level
specification. An error message is generated if a specified pile size is not available for
the selected pile type.
The new pile size scroll-list contains a truncated list of common pile sizes. You can
select “PILE SIZES…” from the scroll-list to review all available pile sizes and default
compressive capacities for each pile type in the system. You can make a size
selection from this new dialog box as well. The pile size descriptions in the scroll-list
and dialog box change depending on the Units of Measure selected for the project
(i.e. I-P or MET).

The table in the right pane shows the available sizes and default compressive
capacity for each pile type in the system. The default size for each pile type is also
shown and is applicable when:
• The pile size field is left blank at the project level
• A different pile type is selected at the project level and the area level pile size
field is left blank.
Pile tensile capacity calculations at the area level

(CQ00591026)
The area level pile tensile capacity was previously calculated incorrectly when the
following combination of specifications were provided:
• The pile type specified at the area level is the same as the pile type specified at
the project level.
• The pile compressive capacity specified at area level is different than the
compressive capacity at the project level.
• The pile tensile capacity at the area level is left blank.
The calculations have been fixed and the pile tensile capacity at the area level is now
equal to 1/2 of the pile compressive capacity at the area level unless specified
otherwise by the user.
Minimum values for the pile compressive and tensile capacities at the project and
area levels have been added and are based on the minimum values checked in the
cost engine code.
• Pile compressive capacity minimum value: 9 TONS [8.2 TONNE]
• Pile tensile capacity minimum value: 4.5 TONS [4.1 TONNE]

Updated weights and costs in the module summary report
(CQ00584376) [ACCE]
The following changes have been made to ensure the weights and costs for each
account tally with each other when tallied across the module summary report and
COA summaries by area or TDC item summaries by area. These changes were also
included in V8.8 CP1.
• Electrical COA’s 733, 743, and 744 (Motor Control Centers and MCC Equipped
Space) are not included in the module summary report.
• All other costs and weights for COA's assigned to the module contractor are
included the module summary report and are based on the information printed to
the database A-Table.
• Module fireproofing and paint line items have been moved into the module
section of the .ccp report. This is necessary to account for these bulk weights in
the module setting line item.
• The remote shop paint option is used by default for equip, piping, and steel
primer/finish in modular areas.
• The weights for all paint line items including brush clean and sandblast have been
set to zero.
The table and examples below summarize the module changes in ACCE
V8.8CP1/V8.8.2.
Summary of Module Changes in ACCE V8.8CP1/V8.8.2
V8.8 V8.8CP1/V8.8.2
Coldbox Module Field Insulation AREA MODULE
Coldbox Module Shop Insulation MODULE MODULE
Coldbox Module Field Paint MODULE MODULE†

Coldbox Module Shop Paint MODULE MODULE†
Other Module Steel Field Paint AREA MODULE†

Other Module Steel Shop Paint AREA MODULE†
Other Module Steel Field

Fireproofing AREA MODULE
Other Module Steel Shop
Fireproofing AREA MODULE
† In V8.8CP1/V8.8.2 we have intentionally removed the paint weight from the

database A-Table and the module summary report.
Note: The modular area contractor set must include a module contractor (Type M -
Module/skid fabrication shop). All work performed in the module shop should be
assigned to the module contractor. Any work performed in the field should be

assigned to the appropriate field contractor. The module summary report will only
include material costs, labor costs, and material weights for work assigned to the
module contractor.
If we assume the TRMD is painted and fireproofed in the shop before shipping then
the following differences will be seen in V8.8 vs. V8.8CP1/V8.8.2.
module steel fireproofing costs/weights since they have an “AREA” origin tag. Since
the module shipping weight is derived from the module summary report, the
shipping weight will be underestimated.
In V8.8CP1/V8.8.2 the TRMD module summary report will include the module steel
paint and module steel fireproofing costs/weights and the correct shipping weight will
be reported. All line items with a “MODULE” origin tag are included in the module
summary report.

If we assume the TRMD is painted and fireproofed in the field after the module is
installed then the following differences will be seen in V8.8 vs. V8.8CP1/V8.8.2.
module steel fireproofing costs/weights since they have an “AREA” origin tag.
But, in V8.8CP1/V8.8.2 the module steel paint and module steel fireproofing
costs/weights are included in the module summary report and shipping weight unless
a field contractor is assigned to the COA’s applicable to field paint and field
fireproofing via the contractor set.
New rebar subtype option field available on the General

Civil/Steel Specs form (CQ00593836)
In V8.4 we added subtypes 60 (Standard rebar) and 61 (Epoxy coated rebar) to the
rebar line items in the database A-Table. In V8.8.2 (and V8.8 CP1) we have added a
new Rebar subtype option field to the General Civil/Steel Specs form.
Two options are available; ‘R’ Rebar type and ‘F’ Foundation type. The default value
for the field is ‘R’. When the default or ‘R’ option is specified, subtypes 60 and 61 are
used for Standard and Epoxy coated rebar (current V8.8 behavior). When the ‘F’
option is specified, the applicable foundation subtype is used instead (old – pre V8.4
behavior).

Improved Custom User Attributes Workflow (CQ00566303)
In previous versions, the custom user attributes workflow required the user to edit
the custom user attributes input file (UserAttributesCust.xlsm), which is located in
the Program\Sys directory under the default installation location, run the User
Attributes executable (UserAttributes.exe), which is located in the same directory, to
compile the user attributes and finally manually copy the generated database files
(ipuser.aee and metuser.aee) to the UserData directory. Due to the access
permissions and security features in Windows 7 and 8+, this workflow was difficult to
implement for users with restricted permissions.
In the updated workflow, the custom user attributes input file
(UserAttributesCust.xlsm) has been installed in the shared documents location. The
UserAttributes.exe application can be launched from a menu item in the ACCE and
AICE user interface and the user attribute database files are subsequently created in
the correct location.
For a more detailed outline of the enhancements made to the Custom User Attributes
workflow, refer to the Aspen Economic Evaluation Help, which can directly be
accessed using the help icon on the Custom User Attributes window.

down list.
code of accounts.

Fixed Insulation quantities generated for Cold box Modules
(CQ00586320, CQ00595721, CQ00597238, CQ00606653)
• Insulation volume for cylindrical (CYLN) cold boxes was previously based on the
rectangular (VCB4/VCB3) coldbox volume.
• Cold box shop installed insulation (type ‘S’) was previously double counted and
two identical line items were included in the estimate results.
• Cold box module ‘ROCKWOOL-FIELD INSTALLED' insulation weight was
previously incorrect in the database A-Table.
If a SKID (with a specified height) or PRMD module was specified and the insulation
type was specified as ‘S’ in the Cold Box Data section of the module area form, then
line items with the description, ‘ROCKWOOL-SHOP INSTALLED’ were previously
incorrectly included in the estimate results. A warning message is now generated if
the module is not a cold box type and the cold box insulation type has been
specified.

LV Feeder breakers not estimated when system calculated

quantity is 0 but user specifies quantity greater than 0
(CQ00598151)
The following cases have been fixed in relation to LV feeder breaker estimation in a
Unit Substation:
• In the previous version, when a value was entered in the 'Number of feeder
breakers' and 'Feeder breaker rating' fields in the Unit SS form of a LV/MV USS
with no LV/MV load connected to it (No Motors in Area & no Sub Unit SS or CC
linked to it), feeder breakers were not being estimated. In V8.8.2, a warning
message has been added to notify the user that the feeder breakers will not be
estimated when there is no load linked to it. The feeder breakers will still not be
estimated.
In the previous version, the system was calculating one extra feeder breaker than
was required in a low voltage unit substation (with no user input in ‘Number of
feeder breakers’ field in the USS form), subsequently resulting in the estimation of a
larger quantity of foundation bulk material than was required and extra LV

switchgear cabinet spaces. This has been fixed in V8.8.2, the correct system
calculated quantity of feeder breakers is now being estimated.

V8.8

separation, and HyCO (Syngas) facilities. Typically, the plate fin exchangers used in
estimate plate-fin heat exchangers was added in V8.8. It can be found in the
components palette under Process equipment | Heat exchangers, heaters |
Heat exchanger | Multi-stream plate-fin heat exchanger. You can specify up to
6 difference connected streams and up to 6 different fin layer types in the new
model.
MUSE (that is, EDR Plate Fin) in V7.3 enabled sizing of the plate-fin exchanger in
HYSYS. Currently, the LNG Exchanger unit operations in HYSYS can be sized using
EDR Plate Fin. By default, they are mapped to “C” (Quoted cost) items in APEA and
in activated economics. The cost is estimated using a custom model, which must be
selected for these items. In V8.8, the LNG Exchanger in HYSYS is mapped to the new
model, and the cost is estimated by the cost engine. Only the internal
P&ID/volumetric model was developed for this model. There is no default external
P&ID or volumetric model. The internal P&ID depends on the number of connected
process streams. A new equipment code of account – 267 ‘PLATE FIN EXCHANGERS’
was added for this model. See the Icarus Reference Guide for further details about
the new model.

accounts.

classified under Process equipment | Separation equipment | Dust collector |
Venturi and cyclone scrubber in the component palette and in the Add
component dialog box in EE products. The VSCRUB unit operation in Aspen Plus is
mapped to the new model by default. Only the internal P&ID/volumetric model was
developed for this model. There is no default external P&ID or volumetric model. See
the Icarus Reference Guide for further details about the new model.
Enhancements to Centrifugal Gas Compressor [DGC CENTRIF]

Model
(DGC CENTRIF) was updated. The maximum actual gas flow rate at inlet that can
be specified for this mode has increased to 300,000 CFM [509,700 M3/H], and the
New fields have been added to allow you to include intercooler(s)/aftercooler in the
cost estimate of the compressor, select the intercooler(s)/aftercooler type, and
specify intercooler/aftercooler excess area (%). A new field to specify maximum
intercooler(s)/aftercooler cost and weight are included in the cost of the compressor.
The design data sheet for the compressor contains information about the estimated
heat transfer area for each intercooler and the aftercooler, if included.

Ability to Import Economic Evaluation Files with an .izp

Extension
Chapter 2: “Getting Started” in the Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator User’s Guide.
Performance Improvement in Standalone EE Products Due to

Updates to ICARUS Project Object Database (IPOD)
files per database) with a single .aee file per database. These enhancement can
improvement

improvement
Note: These results are vary based on your specific machine specifications,
operating system, virtualization, size and type of project, and location of the installed
files.
When you save the project in V8.8, the old format files are discarded, and the
directory.
o Sizing Selection
o Project Scheduler
copy of the old format .d0* files is saved in a Backup directory inside each
library directory.
follows:

one separately.

(CQ00528772)
Updates to Instrumentation Cable Tray Input Form and Pricing

(CQ00442375)
In previous versions, the instrumentation cable tray plant bulk (BINSINST TRAY)
form had different input fields compared to the electrical cable tray bulk (BELCELEC
TRAY) form. In V8.8, the instrumentation cable tray bulk form was changed to
include the Material, Cable tray rung spacing, Number of 90 degree bends, and Tray
type fields to make it similar to electrical cable tray form.
The pricing data and the method of cost estimation for the instrumentation cable
trays was changed to be the same as for the electrical cable trays. The pricing
update applies to the plant bulk, as well as system generated instrumentation cable
trays at the area level. Instrumentation cable trays are, however, still reported in the
Instrumentation Code of Accounts.

VFD Driver Type Option for Air Coolers [DHE AIR COOLER]
(CQ00518904)


improve the product. Selected fixes contained in AICE V8.8 are listed below. This list
is a subset of all the corrections included in AICE V8.8.
This section describes the software fixes to Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator V8.8.
CQ00558157 IPA reports had a reference to the The issue is resolved.
incorrect version.
CQ00581996 Field Labor Summary - Project has The issue is resolved.
negative cost for foreman

V8.6
Total Cost and Quantity/Quantity Adjustment Field for Quoted

Cost Items (CQ00538672)
The total cost field in the Quoted Cost Item form is applicable only in AICE. When the
total cost was specified and the number of identical items was > 1, the quantity
reported in the evaluation reports (item report and reporter reports) was incorrect.
The total cost reported was correct. This defect has been fixed and the quantity
reported is now correct.
For the quoted cost items, users cans specify a non-integer quantity using the
Quantity field. They can choose to apply this quantity to the specified total cost
(AICE only) or material cost/man-hours using the quantity adjustment field. In
previous versions, the quantity and quantity adjustment fields were not being
correctly used when total cost was specified for a given quantity. This has been fixed
and the engine correctly uses the specified non-integer quantity and the input in
quantity adjustment field.



This section describes the software fixes to Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator V8.6.
CQ00531911 Unit Cost library item is duplicated on V8.4 without applying any
change to this file.

V8.4
Product Description
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator is a fully-integrated design, estimating, scheduling,
cost tracking, and reporting system for plant expansions, renovations, revamps, and
retrofits. Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator is the only one of its kind that provides a
complete precedence network through an embedded interface to Primavera's Project
Planner® - P3® for Windows, a premier scheduling package for the Engineering and
Construction market. Use Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator to reduce risk in
maintenance turnaround planning and maximize the return-on-investment (ROI) of
capital expenditures.


previous versions.
• The maximum for installation bulk duct line number field has been increased to
98 (old value was 40). We allow a total of 5 duct lines but the duct line number
can be any number from 1 to 98 in order to avoid a clash with installation bulk
pipe line numbers on the same component.
• These changes affect the following input fields in the GUI:


• New fields for specifying the instrument sensor and control valve (CV) location
using the pipe line tag have been added to the instrument bulk addition forms.

example, you can enter either the instrument sensor location (i.e. the line
• When both line number and line tag is specified, the line number is given
precedence and the line tag is ignored by the engine. A warning message is
generated.
• The evaluation engine searches for the line tag only in the installation bulk pipe
in a loop, the sensor or CV is placed on the first line on which the line tag is
found.


maximum value will be 3. The material and labor quantities (that is, weight, man-
hours, and so on) estimated for the old separate models and the corresponding
consolidated model with the number of decks input set appropriately, is the same.
Updating Old Projects

The Wind and Seismic Design Requirement for Tall Vessels May
Now Be Specified At the Project Level (CQ00216075)
The wind and seismic design requirement for tall vessels is now available at the
project level in the ‘Design basis | Equipment Specs’ and includes the options ‘W+S’,
‘WIND’, ‘SEIS’, and ‘NONE’. By default, the option ‘W+S’ (Wind and seismic design
required) applies.

The “Wind or seismic design” field that was previously available on tall vessel
equipment forms has not been changed and still includes the options ‘W+S’, ‘WIND’,
‘SEIS’, and ‘NONE’. When this component field is left blank, the area level option will
be used.
Vessel Field Fabrication Man-Hours in AICE (CQ00482227)

In Aspen In-plant Cost Estimator (AICE), for a field fabricated vessel, the labor cost
for field fabrication is included in the total cost reported for the vessel. There was a
defect in the system due to which the labor hours for field fabrication were also
written in the database files with zero labor costs. Due to which there was an
inconsistency between the reported man-hours for the vessel in the CCP item report
and certain other Excel or standard reports. This was fixed in V8.4. Since the field
fabrication labor cost is included in the total cost for the vessel, the field fabrication
man-hours are not written to the database files anymore.


Paint Specifications In “Design Basis | Piping Specs | Material”
(CQ00510627, CQ00509463)
If users specified the sandblasting percentage as 0 for a particular material spec in
“Design basis | Piping specs | Material”, it would not get used correctly in a plant
bulk pipe (BPIPPIPE) in which the material spec was used. This was fixed in V8.4. If
users had specified a material spec and also specified some inputs in the “Pipe –
general specs” for a particular item, the paint specifications from the material spec
would get applied to any installation bulk pipe for that item irrespective of whether
the material spec applied to the pipe or not. This was fixed in V8.4. If users have
specifications mentioned above in their existing projects, they may see differences in
paint and sandblasting quantities.
External Insulation Schedules (CQ00499401)

There was a defect in the system due to which the insulation thickness was not
correctly calculated from the selected external insulation tables when the user had
not selected an “Insulation equivalent length rules” external file. This has been fixed
in V8.4. The dependency between these two external files was due to historical
reasons. In V8.4, users will be able to select and use external insulation schedules
without also having to select the equivalent length rules file.
Updates to Continuous Current Field in the Electrical Circuit

Breaker Plant Bulk and Bus Duct Plant Bulk (CQ00516905)
bulks | Electrical -Substation, the ‘Continuous current’ input field had a maximum
value of 3000 A. This value was increased to 4000 A to make the estimation of 4000
A low voltage circuit breakers available to the user and a note was added to state
that for LV the maximum value is 4000 A and for MV and HV the max is 3000 A.
The limit on continuous current for the bus duct plant bulk, which is also found under
the electrical-substation plant bulks, also had a maximum value of 3000 A. This
value was increased to 4000 A.
The Default Formwork Material Type Has Been Updated

The steel rental formwork specification is now used by default for new projects in
V8.4. The formwork material type is available in the ‘Design basis | Civil/steel
specs’.
Older projects when opened in V8.4 will be updated and the formwork material used
will be as follows:
Project was last saved in: Value specified in Formwork Formwork material in V8.4
material field
V8.0 (Nov 2012) or earlier Not applicable because the field WOOD (changed by updater)
was not there in these
versions.

V8.2 (May 2013) BLANK STEEL
V8.2 (May 2013) User specified value – either Maintains user specified value
WOOD or STEEL



This section describes the software fixes to Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator V8.4
CQ00482227 AIPCE gives different values of MH in different reports

CQ00499822 Standard Rental Report showing "## days" instead of "22
days"
CQ00500879 HTML Reports with combine into Single File showing error
message on AICE.
CQ00515393 EE V8.4: got Aspen Icarus Reporter - Word Report Error when
selected append the report
CQ00482227 AIPCE gives different values of MH in different reports

V8.2
Addition of Solids Models

Enhancements to Gyratory and Cone Crusher Models
For the Cone Crusher (ECR CONE) and Gyratory Crusher (ECR GYRATORY) the
“Mantle diameter” was a required field on the input forms in V8.0. These models
have been updated in V8.2 so that you can enter either the “Mantle diameter” or the
“Crusher flow rate.” When you enter only the crusher flow rate the model calculates
the mantle diameter and estimates the cost based on the mantle diameter. When
you enter both values, the user specified values are used.
Model Minimum flowrate Maximum flowrate

Cone crusher 50 TPH [46 TONNE/HR] 1300 TPH [1179 TONNE/HR]
Gyratory crusher 200 TPH [182 TONNE/HR] 10,000 TPH [9071
TONNE/HR]
Addition of a steel formwork option to the general

civil/steel specs

In previous versions of Economic Evaluation, field-fabricated wood forms were
automatically generated by the system and you could not directly enter the
formwork material cost or the backup/bracing lumber cost. The system has been
enhanced to offer you a choice between field-fabricated wood forms and pre-
fabricated steel forms via the formwork material type drop-down list. By default,
wood forms are still used in Economic Evaluation V8.2. The new formwork material
cost and the backup/bracing material cost fields let you directly specify the forming
material costs for their project.
Details:
In V8.2, both old and new projects use wood formwork unless the formwork material
type is changed in the project level civil specs. The new formwork material cost
fields are considered all-inclusive and should already account for the number of
formwork reuses (NOFR); the NOFR field is ignored when you specify the new
material cost fields.
If you select wood for the formwork material and do not specify material costs in
the new fields, there are no changes to the current system generated formwork
material and labor costs.
If you select steel for the formwork material and do not specify material costs in the
new fields, a default internal steel formwork cost is used (without modification due to
NOFR) and the existing internal backup/bracing lumber cost is used. Otherwise, the
material costs will be used as specified by you.
When you select the steel formwork option, CS is be used as the material
designation and the field-fabrication labor costs (COA 455) are not included. No
changes are made to the labor crew or rental equipment.
The following bulk material line items are produced by the system when the you
select steel formwork:
COA 454 – Formwork Materials CS Contact Surface Formwork, SF
COA 454 – Formwork Materials Wood Backup/Bracing Lumber, BD FT
COA 456 – Install Formwork Formwork Installation, SF
COA 457 – Strip & Clean Formwork Strip and Clean Formwork, SF

values

Conduit Diameter.


compared with same fields in ACCE or APEA
But in the Instrumentation specifications the ‘Instrumentation to junction box’
field had ‘PM - pluggable/pre-molded, for fieldbus only’ option which has been
removed.

• In AICE V 8.2 the above fields have the following selections:

vessels
20P cable is used.
250 F or 120 C.


values

Conduit Diameter.

compared with the same fields in ACCE or APEA
But in the Instrumentation specifications the ‘Instrumentation to junction box’
field had ‘PM - pluggable/pre-molded, for fieldbus only’ option which has been
removed.
• In AICE V8.2 the above fields have the following selections:

vessels
20P cable is used.
250 F or 120 C.


V8.0
The following new features and enhancements were added in the V8.0 release:
• New Fields to Specify Pipe Wall Thickness Standard And Flange Rating Standard
• Additional Breaks by Size Range and New Remarks Field for Custom Pipe Specs
• Add Field for Percentage of Field Hours Sent to Shop for Pipe Hangers
• Duplicate Line Numbers Are Not Allowed in Installation Bulks | Pipe – Item
Details
• Installation Option Moved to Component Main Form
• New Source of quote Field
• New Communication and Alarm Systems Plant Bulk
• Primavera Link Upgraded to P6V8.2
• Modifications to Rental Equipment Calculations
• New List of Equipment - Source of Quote Excel Report
• Detail Cost Report Updated
• Removal of Custom Task feature
• Disabling of Manpower Productivity Expert (MPE) for 64bit Operating Systems
New Fields to Specify Pipe Wall Thickness Standard

And Flange Rating Standard
Two new fields have been added to Design basis | Piping specs | General to allow
users to specify pipe wall thickness standard and flange rating standard
independently.
Pipe flange rating standard: The options for this field are as
follows:
• ASME: Flange classes per ASME B16.5 standard
• DIN EN: PN rated flanges per DIN EN 1092

• HGT20592: PN rated flanges per HG/T 20592-2009 (Chinese standard)
• HGT20615: Flanges classes (similar to ASME) per HG/T 20615-2009 (Chinese
standard)
The default for this field is ASME.
Piping wall thickness standard: The options for this field are as
follows:
• ASME: Wall thickness schedule per ASME B36.10M and 36.19M
• DIN EN: Standard wall thickness input per EN 10220 and EN ISO 1127
• GB: Standard wall thickness per GB/T 21835-2008 (Chinese standard)
• PN: Old method that allowed PN numbers to be input on pipe schedule fields
The default value for this field depends on the value specified for the flange rating
standard as follows:
Flange rating standard Default value for wall thickness standard
ASME ASME
DIN EN DIN EN
HGT20592 or HGT20615 GB
These fields will replace the old field Piping design and schedule opt.’ which was used
to specify DIN piping and the field ‘DIN pipe thickness option’ field which was added
in V7.3.2. Existing projects with values specified in these fields will be updated to
appropriate values for the new fields above to produce the same results as before.
The new fields will allow the users to use the Chinese wall thickness and flange
rating standards. They will also allow the users to independently change the flange
rating standard and wall thickness standard in any country base as opposed to
previous versions where DIN piping option was allowed only for EU and UK country
bases.
Additional Breaks by Size Range and New ‘Remarks’

Field for Custom Pipe Specs
A new ‘Piping spec remarks’ input field has been added to the custom pipe specs
input form (Design basis | Piping specs | Custom). This field can be used to enter a
descriptive remark for the spec. The field is for the GUI only and will not be read or
reported by the evaluation engine.
In V7.3.2 or earlier, users could specify three diameter breaks (Small, Medium and
Large) in the custom pipe specs. In this release, two additional diameter breaks
(Extra-small, Extra-large) have been added to custom pipe specs input form. In
addition, the pipe/fittings material adjustment, pipe valve material adjustment and
pipe labor adjustment fields are now available in each diameter break separately
instead of once for the whole custom pipe spec. This allows the users to separately
manipulate the material and labor costs for different diameter ranges for the same
pipe material.

The small diameter break in the existing custom pipe specs will be mapped to the
new, extra-small diameter break. The default values for the different inputs for the
old small break will now apply to extra-small break. The material and labor
adjustment values in the existing custom pipe specs will be mapped to material and
labor adjustments in the new extra-small break. The other diameter breaks inherit
these values unless different values are specified for them. Users need not make any
changes to their existing custom pipe specs as they will continue to function as
before.
Add Field for Percentage of Field Hours Sent to Shop

for Pipe Hangers
In V7.3.2, we added the capability to allow users to estimate certain portion of the
prefabricated pipe supports in the remote pipe shop. Based on the value specified by
users, certain portions of the prefabricated supports were procured in the remote
shop. In addition 30% of the hours required to install these supports was also
estimated as remote shop hours. With this enhancement, the user can control the
percent of field man-hours that are estimated in the shop for the pipe supports and
thus change the value from the default 30% to a different value.

Drop Piping Length
In the ‘Utility pipe and utility stations’ (BPIPUTIL PIPE) piping plant bulk item, a new
field has been added to specify the length of utility station drop pipe lengths. When
utility stations are specified by user, this length will be used to estimate the drop
pipe length for the air, water, steam and condensate return utility station. The
default value is 100 FEET [30 M] for air, water and steam and 50 FEET [15 M] for
condensate return utility station.

Installation Bulks | Pipe – Item Details
In V7.3.2 or earlier, it was possible for the user to specify the same “Piping line
number” input for different entries in the Installation bulks | Pipe – Item Details
forms. This will not be allowed in V8.0. If user has existing projects which contains
an error will be generated for that item and the user will have to correct the error for
the item and associated bulks to be correctly estimated. This change was made to
make the behavior in the application consistent with the restrictions applied for data
imported using the spreadsheet export/import feature.
“Installation Option” Moved to Component Main Form

In V7.3.2 and earlier versions, on process equipment, plant bulks, quoted cost items,
and equipment model library (EML) items, there was an input field for “Installation
option” on the Installation bulks | Mat’l/man-hour %adj., vessel tracing form. This
field has now been moved to the main form. It is located below the “Number of
identical items” field 5. The installation option field works the same was as it used to
work in V7.3.2 or earlier. However, since it is now directly available on the main
form, it can be accessed easily. It is now also available on the equipment grid in
integrated sizing and costing (ISC) in Aspen Plus or HYSYS, where it can be used to
specify if certain mapped equipment is a spare or existing equipment and adjust the
cost estimate accordingly.

New “Source of quote” Field
A new ‘Source of quote’ field has been added to the main input form for process
located next to the ‘Currency unit for material cost’ input field. The tables below
outline the behavior of this input field. A new Excel report “List of Equipment –
Source of Quote” has been added to the reporter which sorts all the equipment in the
project based on the source of quote.
For quoted cost items and equipment model library (EML) items: (Cost is always user
specified):
Source of Quote – Source of Quote – SUBTYPE set by

Entered value Reported value engine
BLANK OTH: Other 1: User specified
SPECIFIED VALUE SPECIFIED VALUE 1: User specified
For process equipment:
Source of Quoted Source of SUBTYPE set Notes

Quote – Cost per Quote – by engine
Entered item – Reported
value Entered value
value
BLANK BLANK SG or SGL 0: System SGL for gas turbines, gas

calculated compressors and boilers. SG
for rest of the items
BLANK SPECIFIED OTH 1: User

VALUE specified
SPECIFIED BLANK SPECIFIED IF user This assumes that user is

VALUE VALUE specified adjusting system value via
value is not material/man-hour
SG, SGL or adjustments instead of
OTH: entering a quoted cost
1: User
specified
ELSE:
0: System
calculated
SPECIFIED SPECIFIED SPECIFIED 1: User

VALUE VALUE VALUE specified

New Communication and Alarm Systems Plant Bulk
In V8.0 we have added a new plant bulk item to estimate communication and alarm
systems in AICE. See the “What’s new?” section for Aspen Capital Cost Estimator for
details on the new plant bulk item (Project Level features for Communication and
Alarm Systems is not available in AICE).
In addition, new codes of accounts have been added to support the new
communication and alarms components. Existing projects having COA files will need
to be updated to include the COAs. Refer to the “What’s new?” section for Aspen
Capital Cost Estimator and the Icarus Reference Guide for details on the COAs.

Bulks | Steel
In Installation Bulks | Steel for a components, five additional (eight total) structural
steel items can now be specified. This will allow users to better define the equipment
support steel structure at the installation bulks level.

In earlier versions, loading and displaying components in the list view (center pane)
was a very time consuming task (this is especially true for large projects). In V8.0,
we have significantly improved the performance for loading items in the list view,
switching between various views (Project Basis View, Process View and Project View)
and sorting the list view items. This improves the usability of the product for
estimating mega projects.
Primavera Link Upgraded to P6V8.2

In V8.0, we have upgraded the link to Primavera Project Management applications
from P6.2 to Oracle Primavera P6 Enterprise Project Portfolio Management (EPPM)
V8.2. The link will continue to work for Primavera Project Management P6.2.
Modifications to Rental Equipment Calculations

In V7.3.2 and earlier, for In-plant Cost Estimator, rental equipment was not being
allocated any days if the hours estimated for that equipment was less than 1 day.
Also the minimum allocated days for any equipment was one week. This has been
changed as follows:
• If any rental equipment is needed for more than 4 hours (or 1 hour for cranes),
days are allocated by rounding up to next higher integer days.
• The minimum rental period is not 1 week but 1 day.
This could possibly result in some additional equipment rental items being included
which were previously being excluded due to the small amount of estimated hours.

Report
A new report, "List of Equipment - Source of Quote", is added for process equipment,
equipment model library (EML) item, and quoted cost items having an equipment
COA. This report will contain the source of quote for the items and will be sorted by
the source of quote value.
In the Aspen Icarus Reporter GUI, this report can be found at 'Full Import | Other
Reports | Project | List of Equipment - Source of Quote’ tree view location:
To run this report:

• Select List of Equipment - Source of Quote report; then click the Run Report
button.

In the IPA Details Cost report, material cost for equipment is further broken down
into Mechanical and Fabricated equipment costs as shown below:

Removal of Custom Task feature
The custom task feature has been disabled in the AICE V8 User Interface. Users will
no longer be able to run custom tasks in AICE.
Disabling of Manpower Productivity Expert (MPE) for

64bit Operating Systems
The Manpower Productivity Expert cannot run on 64 bit operating systems.
Installations on 64 bit Operating Systems will be detected by AICE and will disable
MPE on the Tools menu.

V7.3.2
What's New in Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator V7.3.2
The following new features, updates and/or enhancements are contained in this
release:
• New option allows Pipe Supports to be sent to Remote Shop
• New option allows for welded valves to be installed in the Remote Shop
• New option allows for users to change length of Pipe per fitting going to Remote
Shop
• New option allows users to make the Custom Pipe Specs specify a mandatory
pipe schedule rather than minimum
• In Custom Pipe Specs fields allow “0” to be entered for "Pipe and fittings material
adjustments”
• Improved method for calculating wall thickness of DIN Pipe
• Number of Identical Items added to AICE List View
• Orifice plate and flanges added to the bulk pipe component
• "Back of panel option" input field for instrumentation bulk items removed from
input form
• "Volume units" input field removed from VT STORAGE model
• Wind and seismic load calculations updated to ASCE 7-05 and ASCE 7-10
• User defined building type and description fields added to the external Building
Unit Cost file
• Added capability to modify customer external text files that do not currently have
a GUI interface
• New field to input copper cost for electrical wiring/cable
New option allows Pipe Supports to be sent to Remote

Shop
A new input field - Pipe supports in remote shop (PERCENT) - has been added to
Design basis | Piping Specs | General with the default being 0 percent. If
pipe is being sent to remote shop, a portion of the total number of prefabricated pipe
supports (based on value specified in the new field), will be procured in remote shop.
Thirty percent (30%) of the man-hours for installing the supports will also be
estimated in the remote shop. The labor cost for these man-hours will be added to
the material cost of the remote shop pipe supports. The rest of the pre-fabricated
pipe supports will be procured in the field. The man-hours to erect all pipe supports
will be booked in the field as well.
As an example, for a remote shop pipe having 8 pipe supports with 50% of the
supports specified in remote shop:
Remote shop cost = (material cost of 4 pipe supports) + (unit-man-hours for pipe
supports)*(0.3)*(4 supports)*(shop labor rate)*(shop productivity adjustments)
Field material costs = (material cost of 4 supports)

Field labor costs = (unit-man-hours for pipe supports)*0.7*(4 remote shop supports)
+ (unit-man-hours for pipe supports)*(4 field procured pipe supports)
These changes will apply to:
Installation bulk pipe associated with project components.
Plant bulk pipe
Utility piping and utility stations
Yard pipe
The same code of account (366) will be used for pipe supports procured in remote
shop or field. The subtype 951 will be specified for pipe supports procured in remote
shop. Users can use this subtype to create code of account exception and book the
remote-shop pipe supports to a new user-defined code of account if needed.
New option allows for welded valves to be installed in

the Remote Shop
A new input field - Welded valves in remote shop (Y/N) – has been added to Design
basis | Piping Specs | General. The default value for this field is “N”. When “Y” is
selected and pipe diameter is in the remote shop pipe diameter range, non-flanged
valves will be counted as fittings to determine length of pipe that is sent to the
remote shop. The number of welds in the remote shop will be increased to account
for welding the valves to the pipe spool and the number of field welds will be
decreased appropriately. Valve erection manhours will also be accounted in the
remote shop and the line item for valve erection in the field will not be generated.
This will only apply to:
Pipe less than 2 inch (50 mm) NPS with SW (Socket-welded) connection type
Pipe with 2 inch (50 mm) or more NPS and WW (Weld pipe/weld valves) connection
type
Note: For SC, SB, VC, VS and PF connection types, even when the pipe diameter is
in remote shop diameter range, the pipe is fabricated in the field., so these
connection types will not be affected by this change.
New option allows for users to change length of Pipe

per fitting going to Remote Shop
A new input field - Length/fitting to remote shop (FEET/M) - has been added to
Design basis | Piping Specs | General. The default value will be 10 feet (3 m). This
value will be used to determine the length of pipe to be procured and fabricated in
remote shop as follows:
Let,
Length per fitting to remote shop specified in the newly added field =
Lfit
Total length of pipe (specified by user on the pipe input form) =
Ltotal
Number of fittings = N with N > 0
Then:

IF (Ltotal - N*Lfit) >= Lfit
Length of pipe procured/fabricated in remote shop = N*Lfit
ELSE
Length of pipe procured/fabricated in remote shop = Ltotal
Note:
When N = 0, and pipe fabrication type is RMT, the pipe is procured in field.
The method described above is different than the existing method and will result in
changes for the length of pipe procured in remote shop vs. field in existing projects.
Users will have to make necessary adjustments to account for this in their existing
projects when used in V7.3.2. The existing method employed by the system is:
Length of pipe procured/fabricated in remote shop = N*10 feet IF (N*14.95) >=
Ltotal
New option allows users to make the Custom Pipe

Specs specify a mandatory pipe schedule rather than
minimum
In the custom pipe specs form a new field - Make minimum schedule mandatory
(Y/N) has been added with the default value set as "N". When this field is set to "Y",
the minimum schedule specified in the pipe spec will be treated as a mandatory
schedule when using the pipe spec for a given plant bulk or installation bulk pipe.
Setting this field to “Y” allows for different scenarios for the pipe to which the pipe
spec is applied:
Actual calculated schedule is smaller than mandatory schedule specified - this is OK
because mandatory schedule thickness will be sufficient in this case.
Actual calculated schedule is greater than mandatory schedule. For example, the
minimum schedule (which becomes mandatory when the newly added field is set to
“Y”) specified in the pipe spec is 10 and the design conditions for the pipe result in a
schedule 20 pipe. Then schedule 10 thickness will not be sufficient to meet design
conditions. In this case, a warning is generated for the pipe but the mandatory pipe
schedule will still be used in estimating the pipe.
Note: This option will NOT apply to DIN piping irrespective of whether user has
selected the old method (PN number inputs on schedule field) or new method for
DIN piping (see discussion for the two methods used in DIN piping).
In Custom Pipe Specs fields allow “0” to be entered for "Pipe and fittings material
adjustments”
In the custom pipe specs form the following three fields:
Pipe and fittings material adj.
Pipe valves material adj.
Pipe labor adjustment
You can now enter 0 as the adjustment value. Prior to V7.3.2, only values > 0 were
allowed. Also, four digit adjustment values up to 9999 can be entered (previously
only three digit values up to 999 were allowed). For the material adjustment fields,
when 0 is entered, the actual unit cost for pipe and fittings is set to a small value
($0.01) which will generate a very small, negligible material cost. This is based on

customer feedback where users want the costs to be zero (that is, negligible) but
want to see the key quantities counted. In order for the key quantities to be
counted, the cost had to be a small non-zero positive value.
For the four digit values, the adjustment will continue to be applied as it would for a
three digit value. The adjustment will be indexed to 100. Thus, if 1000 is entered as
the adjustment for pipe and fitting material, the material cost will get multiplied by
(1000/100) = 10.
Improved method for calculating wall thickness of

DIN Pipe
A new input field – DIN pipe thickness option – has been added to Design basis |
Piping Specs | General. The options for this field are:
• PN: Allow PN number input for schedule
• DIN EN: Thickness per EN 10220 & EN ISO 1127
The default value is DIN EN which is described below. Selecting PN keeps the
current method unchanged, that is, you can specify PN numbers in the schedule field
for DIN pipe and PN numbers are shown in the detailed bulks results for pipe and
fittings.
Selecting DIN EN means that PN numbers will not be allowed on the schedule field
for DIN pipe. Instead thicknesses will be calculated according to the appropriate DIN
EN standards referenced. If DIN EN method is selected AND PN numbers are input
on the schedule fields for DIN pipe, warnings are generated and the PN number input
is ignored. When the DIN EN option is selected, the method for calculating wall
thickness is as follows:
The dimensional standards that govern the pipe thickness in DIN piping are:
• DIN EN 10220 for seamless and welded carbon steel pipe. (This replaces earlier
DIN 2448 and DIN 2458 standards for seamless and welded CS pipe
respectively).
• EN ISO 1127 for stainless steel pipe. (This replaces earlier DIN 2462 and DIN
2463 standards for seamless and welded SS pipe respectively)
• DIN pipe thicknesses will be calculated based on material properties, design
temperature and pressure, and corrosion allowance. The next higher standard
thickness, based on the dimensional standards referenced, will be selected and
reported. Pipe weight will also be calculated per the equations given in the
dimensional standards. The standard thickness determined for pipe will also be
used for fittings such as elbows, tees, reducers, etc. In the detailed bulk section
of the output report, thicknesses will be output instead of PN numbers for pipe
and fittings.
Pressure classes (PN numbers) may be entered in the "Flange class" input for DIN
pipe. These classes will be used for flanges, valves and gaskets.
Number of Identical Items added to AICE List View

A new column, No. Items, has been added to list view in the Project Basis View. This
column shows the number of identical items of each component in the project. The

default position is after the Model column and can be moved to any location or made
invisible by changing the list view settings.
Orifice plate and flanges added to the bulk pipe

component
In the plant bulk pipe or installation bulk pipe input forms, for the “Valve or fitting A-
F type” input fields, a new option – OP: Orifice plate and union – has been added to
the drop down list. When users select this option and specify the quantity in the
adjoining field, the appropriate number of orifice plates and orifice unions will be
available with the “Above grade or buried yard pipe” item which has been
deprecated. After this enhancement, this fitting option will be available for “Above
grade or buried pipe” plant bulk item which is the preferred way of specifying plant
"Back of panel option" input field for instrumentation

bulk items removed from input form
"Volume units" input field removed from VT STORAGE

model
For the “Flat bottom storage tank, optional roof” equipment item (model = DVT
STORAGE), there used to be a “Volume units” input field to specify the units for the
tank volume. This input field has been removed in V7.3.2. Users will be able to
specify the tank volume in GALLONS for I-P unit system and M3 for metric units. If
existing projects contain equipment items of this type, the volume will be updated
and converted (if necessary) to the appropriate unit based on the project units of
measure.

Wind and seismic load calculations updated to ASCE 7-
05 and ASCE 7-10
The wind and seismic load calculations have been updated to ASCE 7-05 and ASCE
7-10. As a result of this, several new fields have been added to the General
Civil/Steel Specs form.
• The design loads reference code specified will determine whether ASCE 7-05 or
ASCE 7-10 will be used for the wind and seismic load calculations (default is set
to ASCE 7-05).
• The ASCE 7 occupancy/risk category represents the hazard to human life in event
of failure. The default setting is Category III which represents a substantial
hazard to human life in the event of failure.
• Seismic parameters Ss and S1 are used to calculate the horizontal seismic
acceleration in the ASCE 7-05 and ASCE 7-10 standards. If the horizontal
acceleration, Ss, S1, UBC Zone, and Mercalli number fields are left blank, then a
seismic design will be performed based on the design load reference code
chosen. The parameters Ss and S1 will automatically be chosen based on the
project country base.
Note: Old projects having a Japan Country base may see significant differences in
support steel design in V7.3.2 vs. previous versions as a result of this active seismic
region.

If older projects are opened in V7.3.2 with seismic data already specified, then an
ASCE 7-05 or ASCE 7-10 seismic design will not be performed. In order to use the
updated seismic calculations, the UBC zone, Mercalli number, and horizontal
acceleration fields must be left blank. The Ss and S1 fields may optionally be
specified, but we recommend that the appropriate values be used since Ss and S1
are location specific and are found on the seismic ground motion map included in the
ASCE 7 standards.
The three methods of specifying the seismic data are Ss and S1, UBC Zone, or
Mercalli number. Each method ultimately determines the horizontal seismic
acceleration. The horizontal acceleration field may be used to override horizontal
acceleration determined by the three methods.
See the V7.3.2 Icarus Reference Guide for additional information about the ASCE 7-
05 and ASCE 7-10 wind and seismic load calculations.
User defined building type and description fields

added to the external Building Unit Cost file
User defined building types and descriptions have been added to the external
building unit cost file:
• The updated version of ‘BLTABL.dat’ has new fields defined for USER type and
USER DESCRIPTION.
• The user defined building types map directly to the system defined building
types.

• The default USER type and USER DESCRIPTION contain the system defined
defaults.
• These defaults may be changed by the user as shown in the example above.
• User defined types and descriptions will appear in the building type scroll list on
the Plant Bulk Civil Building component and will also be shown in the output
reports.
• The system remains backwards compatible with building unit cost files defined
prior to V7.3.2.
Added capability to modify customer external text

files that do not currently have a GUI interface
The following highlighted customer external files can be modified with notepad.exe in
the library:
An example of modifying the library version of the building unit cost file
follows. Right click on the external file and select modify. The file will open in
notepad.exe. Save the file in notepad.exe after making desired changes.

Copper pricing update for electrical wire/cable
The methods used to calculate wire price for electrical power, control, lighting and
feeder cables in has completely changed in V7.3.2.
Note: The copper pricing update also affects equipment, area, and structure
grounding wire costs.
A new field, Copper Cost, has been added in the General electrical specifications
with units dependent on selected country base (for example, $/lb, SAR/lb, PS/kg, K-
Y/kg, or EUR/kg).

Generally the total cost of wire = Cost of Copper in it (‘X’) + Cost of Armor,
insulation, sheath, and so on. (‘Y’).
The new methods for calculating price and weights were validated against a set of
comprehensive vendor pricing data/weights.
Users will be able to modify ‘X’ by specifying a copper price in the new field. This will
enable users to adjust/account for fluctuations in copper pricing markets.
For V7.3.2 the internal copper prices are set as follows. These values will be updated
annually:
• US: 4.26 USD/lb
• ME: 15.97 SAR/lb
• JP: 1.41 K-Y/kg
• UK: 4.27 PS/kg
• EU: 10.43 EUR/kg
As a result of this change, differences in wire costs will be apparent vs. previous
versions. To assist in understanding these changes, the following tables have been
generated where comparisons between wire prices and weights in V7.3.1 vs. V7.3.2
are illustrated.
Note: The wire prices in the tables below are calculated with copper price of
$4.26/lb. The wire quantities are the default lengths calculated internally by the
system.
Results for the US country base project with wire size input units as ‘A’ and ‘M’:

V7.3
• Capabilities for running multiple Economic Evaluation processes simultaneously
• A new equipment model for Cryogenic Double-Walled, Full Containment Storage
Tanks
• Removed default speed from input form for certain centrifugal pumps
• Template support within AICE
• Galvanized steel cost is now customizable through the external steel file
• Improvements to remember selections feature of Reporter
• Remarks cards included in spreadsheet views
• Spreadsheet view created for quoted components
• A Weight field has been added to Item options\Material/Manhour additions form
• A new quantity field has been added to quoted equipment items allowing non-
integer specifications
• Zick analysis option for horizontal tanks and shell & tube heat exchangers on
saddle supports

simultaneously
• Users now have the ability to open multiple projects simultaneously from among
type (for example, Excel reports) are run in another instance.
Certain restrictions apply:
• Opening projects with the same project/scenario name in multiple instances will
not be permitted even if they are in different applications. An example of this is if
the Sample Projects\Gas Plant is open in ACCE (instance 1) and in another
instance (AICE instance 2), a project with the name Sample Projects\Gas Plant is
attempted to be opened, even if the projects are located in different places. In
this example, an error message will be generated either to close the original
project/scenario or to open a project with a different name.
• Saving a project/scenario with the same name as one already open (even if they
are in different applications) will not be permitted. In this instance, an error
message will be generated either to close the original project/scenario or to save
the project with a unique name.
• Although projects and products may be opened and worked on simultaneously, it
is recommended that certain actions be allowed to complete before activating the
same action in a different instance. As an example, allow a project evaluation (or
a mapping/sizing) stage to complete in instance 1 before performing a project

evaluation (or mapping/sizing) in instance 2. Note: instances can be a
combination of APEA, ACCE, AICE, and/or Costing cases within Aspen Plus or
Aspen HYSYS.
• Opening of Library files in one instance will lock out that particular library file
from being opened in another instance, even if the file is attempted to be opened
in a different product. An example of this is if in instance 1 (ACCE), the EML IP
Sample library is opened, a lock will be generated which will prevent this library
file from being opened in another instance (for example, AICE instance 2). The
same policy applies to opening projects located in the same place.
Cryogenic Double-Walled, Full Containment Storage

Tank model
A new equipment model has been developed for Cryogenic Double-Walled, Full
Containment Storage Tanks (specific details related to this new model is presented in
the Icarus Evaluation Engine section of this document.
Specific to running this model in AICE since pile specifications are not available, the
following will apply.
If piles are required (based on soil strength), the system will determine the piling
parameters based on the following parameters:
• Pile type = 'AUGR', Auger cast pile
• Pile depth = 60 FT
• Pile compressive capacity = Calculated by the system (Min = 50 TONS, Max =
250 TONS)
• Pile spacing = 6 FT (if the required compressive capacity exceeds 250.0 TONS,
the spacing will be decreased in 0.5 FT increments to a minimum of 3.0 FT)
Costing template support

A new method for creating projects via templates is now available. Templates are
specifications that can be made within a template will vary with the Product used to
create the template, that is APEA, ACCE, and/or AICE) without any project
defined within the template. As an example, AICE users can customize craft rates,
project level standard basis information, and so on based on internal company
standards and/or location specific requirements within a template. The saved
template will have an extension “.izt” located in the EE_Templates folder. The saved
templates can then be used while creating a project. This provides an advantage in
that users will not have to enter the same data multiple times for every project
created which simplifies the workflow in setting up project level specifications. In
addition, users may also save existing projects (after deleting all project components
and areas) as templates if valuable project specifications are to be persisted.
In AICE new File menu options have been added to create New Templates, Open
existing Templates, and to Save As Template (discussed previously). In addition a
new Templates Tab has been added to the right side palette for easy retrieval of
existing templates (shown below):

When templates are opened, the Project and Process View tabs are disabled because
templates do not contain any project components. In addition, all icons such as
Load/Map/Evaluate in the toolbar are disabled since these operations do not have
functions within template mode. Further information on creating and importing
templates into projects can be found in the User Guide.
Note: Templates created in ACCE containing multiple contractors, construction

workforces, process control, and power distribution hierarchies can be used when
creating AICE projects. However, these specifications will not be used and the default
AICE contractor, PD, PC, and so on specifications will govern instead.
Galvanized steel cost is now customizable through the external steel file
Galvanized steel added cost per unit weight has been added to the external steel file:
• The default value of the cost adder will be 0.

• If any old project from V7.2 or V7.2.1 has an external steel file attached to it, the
file will be updated and the cost adder item (item#15) will be added to the file.

• When users select “Galvanized finish” for steel AND when they select external
steel file, the cost per unit weight of galvanized steel will include the cost adder
specified in external steel file.
Example:
Users have selected the default file and changed the Galvanized steel added cost to
.10 $/lb
• If painted finish is selected, cost of “Ladders without cage” will be 1 $/lb
• If galvanized finish is selected cost of “Ladders without cage” will be 1.10 $/lb

centrifugal pumps
• API 610 pump

Reporter
The Reporter allows users to select and run multiple Standard reports or Excel
reports or Update On Demand reports. These selections can be retained for further
use by clicking the Remember Selections button shown in the figure below. When
Remember Selections is utilized, the selections are retained and shown the next time
the Reporter application is run. In V7.3, the Reporter will retain the selections in both
the product as well as the project.
In V7.2 and prior versions the selections are cleared once the reports are displayed.
In V7.3 these selections are displayed until the user chooses to do otherwise.

• Remembering selections product wise: In V7.2 and prior versions, the
and only retained the last selections made among all three Economic Evaluation
separately.
• Remembering selections project wise: In V7.3, selections can be saved

Notes:
• Clicking the Remember Selections button will save or update the selections made
within the current report mode (Standard Reports or Excel Reports or Update On
Demand) only. If you want to save or update the selections for other type of
reports then you need to select that report type and then click the Remember
Selections button after selecting the reports.
• These selections should be cleared before adding or removing any new custom
reports.

In the spreadsheet view for Heat Exchanges, Pumps, Compressors, Quoted Items,
Towers and Vessels, two new fields displaying Remarks 1 and Remarks 2 have been
added at the end of the list by default.

In V7.3 the spreadsheet view has been extended to included quoted cost
components. This will enable users to modify COA, material costs, and so on of all
quoted items in one form. A new menu item under View->Spreadsheet View->
Quoted Item->All has been added to display the form (example below).

additions form
Total weight per item field has been added to the Material and Manhour Additions

A new quantity field has been added to Quoted Cost item form which allows real
number specifications. If quantity adjustment option is specified as ‘Y’ or unit of
Number of identical items. A similar calculation is done for labor hours and weight.

In the component item summary standard report, Key Quantity will be displayed as
Quantity*Number of identical items. In the example below, the Quantity for COA 682
= 4 and the Number of Identical Items = 2:
Due to this addition, there will be significant changes when an old project having
• For old projects containing quoted items with Quantity Adjustment = N and no
• Number of identical items value will be migrated to the new Quantity field and
• For old projects containing quoted items with the Quantity Adjustment = Y and
• For old projects containing quoted items with Quantity Adjustment = Y and any
Number of identical items will be set to “?”. This will alert the user to specify
Number of identical items, since under these conditions, the system cannot
interpret the intent of the specifications. This will alert users that interaction is
necessary to complete the evaluation.
• Similar behavior will be observed when importing specs file.
Note: When migrating old projects containing Quoted Cost items into Aspen
Economic Evaluation V7.3, it is recommended users review the results for these
items after the upgrade. The inclusion of Quoted Cost items into the spreadsheet
view can facilitate this review.
Zick analysis option for horizontal tanks and shell &

tube heat exchangers on saddle supports
An option has been added to Design basis | Equipment specs to enable Zick analysis
for horizontal vessels and shell & tube heat exchangers installed on saddle supports.
This analysis takes into account stresses due to vessel weight at the saddle support
with potential modification of vessel wall thickness determined from pressure
considerations. For certain long horizontal tanks with low design pressure, the
thickness determined by Zick analysis may be controlling (that is greater than the
thickness determined by pressure). This method is not used by default and users will
have to select it explicitly in the design basis if this analysis is desired. Once

selected, differences in shell wall thickness may result for horizontal tanks and shell
& tube heat exchangers, corresponding to differences in weight and cost.

V7.2.1
The following new features and enhancements are added in release v.7.2.1:
The area spreadsheet view capabilities are no longer enabled within AICE. This
option should only have been available in ACCE since the underlying options pertain
only to ACCE and are not available within AICE via a right-click area modify. The
correction is to gray out in V7.2.1 AICE the Spreadsheet View\Areas.

V7.2
• Increased the number of custom pipe specifications to 999
• Increased the number of external insulation specifications handled
• Improved workflow for wage rates and craft rates
• Primavera scheduling updates
Allow users to use 999 custom piping specifications

The system is able to handle and manage a larger number of custom pipe
specifications. Specifically, users are now able to:
• Create and edit 999 custom pipe specs in the custom pipe spec library.
• Use a library with 999 or create 999 custom pipe specs in the design basis -
custom pipe specifications.
• Use up to 999 custom pipe specs in the piping inputs, including process pipe
plant bulk pipe components and installation bulk piping details and general
specifications. Custom pipe specs are now sorted alphabetically in the drop down
menus.
• Significant performance improvement gains have been made in both displaying
the pipe spec forms and selecting a pipe spec from the scroll list.
Allow users to use 20 hot insulation and 10 cold insulation

specification tables
The system is able to handle and manage a larger number of insulation specification
tables. Specifically, users will now be able to:
• Create any number of hot insulation schedule libraries with 1 insulation
specification table per file. Users can use one hot insulation specification table in
a project.
• Create any number of cold insulation schedule libraries with 1 insulation
specification table per file. Users can use one cold insulation specification tables
in a project.
• Create any number of insulation equivalent length libraries with one insulation
specification table per file. Users can use one insulation equivalent length table in
a project.
• Specify the hot insulation specifications in the project design basis as either the
internal default hot light, medium or heavy tables or specify a named insulation
table to use.
• Specify the cold insulation specifications in the project design basis as the
internal default cold table or specify a named insulation table to use.

Improved workflow for wage rates and craft rates
General wage rate/productivity form
Workflow improvements to wage rates and construction craft rates forms allow
easier entry and review of data. This includes the ability to copy/paste data to/from
a spreadsheet application.
• On the General wage rate form the Construction workforce number is a

required field now.
• Access to the craft wage rates form is achieved by clicking on the red arrow in
the Craft Wage Rates field.
• Construction workforce # must be defined on this form in order to gain access to
the individual craft wage rates form.
• If for instance in an old project there is one General wage rate item with no
construction work force number specified, and when it is opened in V7.2 then 1
appears in the construction workforce number field since it’s a required field now.

Craft wage rate/productivity form
• This form is designed to allow easier review and entry of wage rates and
productivities.
• It also allows easier copying/pasting of data to/from Excel.
• The copy button on the form lets you paste the entire form in Excel.
Note: The first two fields, Craft codes and Craft Name, are non-editable.
A new link between Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator and

the latest Primavera scheduling application Primavera
Project Management (P6) has been added
A new link between Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator and Primavera’s new version
Primavera Project Management (P6) is developed.
• In prior versions, Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator uses Primavera Project
Management (P3) to enable customers to perform project scheduling functions.
• In addition to the original P3 link, in 7.2, a new link to Primavera Project
Management (P6) is developed.
• The Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator supports Primavera Project Planner (P3) and
Primavera Project Management (P6) Scheduling programs. It automatically
detects if these applications are installed and displays the information on the
Schedule tab.

• AICE 7.2 uses Primavera Project Management (P6) as the default scheduling
application if both Primavera P6 and P3 applications are installed.
• However, this can be changed by specifying the desired version in the Schedule
tab view of Preferences dialog (Tools | Options | Preferences)
• For P6, specify Primavera user name, Primavera database name and Primavera
integration root.
Externalize steel pricing

• Steel material pricing is updated in the system during the annual costing update.
In prior versions, you could not modify bulk commodity steel costs directly. This
new feature in V7.2 lets you modify these costs by specifying them in an external
file and selecting the file through the UI.
• The following commodity steel items can be updated via this file:
° Five classes of steel used for columns and beams in open steel structures and
pipe racks. You can also change the steel member sizes that are assigned to
each class.
° Reinforcing bars (Rebar)
° Ladders
° Ladders without cage
° Handrails
° Stair channels
° Stair treads
° Platforms

° Bracing
° One type of steel grating (default)
External steel rebar pricing is overridden if rebar pricing is provided in the project
level civil specifications.
Notes:
• AspenTech does not update the pricing for these items annually, thus, as a
default the price for each item is set at $1/lb.
• In AICE, editing of this file can only be performed while in Library mode.

V7.1
• Further improvements for equipment and area data entry via grid mechanism
• Updated design bases for Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator
Further Improvements for Equipment and Area Data Entry via

Grid Mechanism
Provide additional equipment breakdowns so the equipment grids can display input
specifications for more alike component types. From the original View Menu a user
will be able to go directly to any category under the spreadsheet view either with a
single drop down or dropdown with -> to go to a further level. The breakdowns that
will be presented are:
• Vessels
° All
° Horizontal
° Vertical
° Pressure (containing models: CYLINDER, MULTI WALL, JACKETED, SPHERE,
SPHEROID)
° Storage (containing models: STORAGE, GAS HOLDER, CRYOGENIC, PLAST
TANK, WOOD TANK, CONE BTM, LIVE BTM, SAN TANK)
° Tile Chest (containing models: CHEST CYL, CHEST RYL, CHEST MTL)
• Heat Exchangers
° All
° Reboilers
° Heat Exchangers
° All
° TEMA (containing models: FIXED T S, FLOAT HEAD, U TUBE, TEMA, PRE
ENGR)
° Sanitary (containing models: CORRUGATED, HOT WATER, MULTI P F, STM HE
MOD
° Air Cooler (containing model AIR COOLER)
° Miscellaneous (containing all models not included above)
• Compressors
° All
° Gas
° Centrifugal (containing models: CENTRIF, CENTRIF IG)
° Reciprocating (containing models: RECIP MOTR, RECIP GAS)
° Air
• Pumps
° All
° Gear

° Positive displacement
° Centrifugal
° All
° Process (containing models: ANSI, ANSI PLAST, API 610, GEN SERV, API 610
IL, HIGH SPEED, IN LINE, MAG DRIVE)
° Vertical/Sump (containing models: AXIAL FLOW, CANNED, TURBINE)
° Sanitary/Stock (containing models: PULP STOCK, SAN PUMP, FLUME PUMP)
• Towers
° All
° Single
° Double
grids.
Updated Design Bases for Aspen In-Plant Cost

Estimator
• In General Equipment Specs Design Allowance Method and Rotating Equipment
Spares Method has been removed.
• In General Civil Specs Wind Load, Soil Type, and Soil Density have been added
and Misc. Concrete allowance method has been removed.
• In General Instrumentation Specs Control Center Type default has been changed
to DGTL (previously ALOG).

V7.0
• Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator Escalation
• Crystal Reports upgrade
• Index improvements
• New reports
Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator Escalation

In Kbase, system developed four major cost categories - general material,
construction man-hour, design engineering, and construction management can be
adjusted for time-dependent cost variations through an Escalation option. The same
feature has been implemented in the Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator product. This
enables SPREAD and ACCUM escalation via 3 sets of indices:
• System base indices (SBI)
• User base indices (UBI)
• Escalation indices (EI)
This will enable Aspen In-Plant Cost Estimator users to account for time dependent
cost effects in these categories within their project estimates.



Grid Mechanism
New Grid type (that is spreadsheet) layouts enable the following:
• Modification of Area Specs across all areas by Discipline
• Modification of Equipment Specs can be made by equipment type (for example,
pumps, vessels, heat exchangers, towers, and so on)
• The new grids will expedite data entry, edit, and review in an easier grid layout.
Model, and so on.
• Sort by different equipment type or column (for example, Materials of
Construction, Flowrate, and so on.)
• Add/delete components
Indexing Improvements
Real Number Indexing

This new feature enables Real Number Indexing (XXX.XX format). The indexing can
be done on:
• Project Level
• Area Level (Replace Model) – this option replaces Project Level Indexing
• Area Level (Multiply Model) – this option multiplies the area and project indexing
External Indexing
This new feature externalizes Material and Man-hour indexing. This helps assist users
in calibrating to a new cost basis by updating an existing Project Level Index with a
new one. Also, external index library file can be created using the library editor. The
external index file can be selected, edited, and deleted.

Icarus Evaluation Engine New Features
and Enhancements in V9

The pricing basis for this release has been updated to the First Quarter 2015. The
table below summarizes an approximation of material pricing changes from the V8.8
CP1 version of Aspen Economic Evaluation (i.e. 2014 pricing basis). These results
were obtained by running a general benchmark project containing a representative
mix of equipment found in a gas processing plant. In addition to pricing changes,
model enhancements and defect corrections have affected overall percentage
differences. Note: this may include quantity or design differences as various models
and methods have been updated or fine-tuned based on client feedback and defect
resolution (see information provided in this document regarding defect corrections
which may cause pricing and/or installation scope changes and the V9 What’s Fixed
section of Economic Evaluation release notes for further information). Your results
will differ based on the overall mix of equipment, bulk items, and specified materials
of construction contained in your project.
Percent Change from V9 (2015 Basis) vs. V8.8 CP1 (2014 Basis)
Category
US UK JP EU ME
Equipment 3.6% 4.5% 4.2% 3.9% 3.6%
Piping -1.0% 1.3% 3.8% 1.3% 1.2%
Civil 2.9% 2.3% 3.0% 1.8% 2.7%
Steel 5.0% -2.2% 1.8% 1.7% 5.8%
Instrumentation -1.7% -0.5% 2.4% 1.7% 1.3%
Electrical -0.3% 0.6% 2.3% 2.3% 1.8%
Insulation -0.3% -2.0% 2.8% 4.3% 1.7%
Paint -1.5% -1.7% 4.0% 1.0% -0.2%
Notes:
* The V9 release includes the pricing update for the Japan Basis (changes noted in
the table above). The EE V9 release does not co-exist with the EE V8.8.2 release,
thus the pricing changes made in the other country bases in V8.8.2 also apply to the
V9 release. Furthermore, defect corrections made in V9 may alter pricing results in
comparison to V8.8.2 in specific circumstances (these are documented in the V9
Relase/What’s Fixed Notes). Project evaluations using the project benchmark
described above have been made in all country bases to compare V9 results vs.
V8.8.2. (This excludes the Japan basis as the V9 changes were intentional). For
these benchmark projects no changes were seen in V9 results vs. V8.8.2 for the US,
UK, EU, and ME bases. The following notes include the changes described in V8.8.2
with the changes seen for Japan in V9.
document):

o Module modifications and updates
o Corrections for Low Voltage Feeder breakers
o Corrections to Tubular steel plant bulk item
o Corrections to steel items to include galvanized finish
o Model changes for underground cable duct trenching
specification. The Copper pricing has been updated in the V8.8 release (excludes
Japan basis, see copper wire pricing change below).
• Based on fabricator data, Carbon Steel plate pricing has shown the following
changes:
o A515, A516, & A285C: ~1.5% increase
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel (A179) seamless tube pricing has shown a
large decrease of 22.5%.
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel (A214) welded tube pricing has decreased
~8%.
• Based on vendor data, stainless steel plate pricing has shown the following
changes:
• Based on vendor data, pricing changes for stainless steel welded tubing is as
follows:
follows:
o 304S ~ 17% increase
• Titanium plate and tube pricing have increased app. 3%.
materials:
o Hastelloy ~ +6% plate, ~ +3% tube
o Inconel ~ +8% plate, ~ +5% tube
o Monel ~ +8% plate, ~ +4% tube
o UK Basis: ~ 2% decrease
o JP Basis: ~ 2% increase
o ME Basis: ~ 1% increase

pricing received:

Type US UK JP EU ME
Ladders, Handrails, Grating (avg.) 9% -2% 1.8% 1.8% 6%
Stairways (avg.) 16% -2% 1.8% 1.8% 6%
Platforms (avg.) -1% -2% 1.8% 1.8% 6%
Steel Members (avg.) -7% -2% 1.8% 1.8% 6%

(CQ00584609) A new field, “Number of bents” has been added to the Pipe truss
bridge component form. The field has a minimum of 2 bents and a maximum of 4
bents. The default is 2 bents (4 columns). When 3 bents are specified, 6 columns are
provided and the truss length is divided into two equal spans. When 4 bents are
specified, 8 columns are provided and the truss length is divided into three equal
spans. The “Number of bents” is reported in the design data sheet for the Pipe truss
bridge component.

(CQ00600989) Use the Epoxy Grout for Pumps and Compressors settings to specify
epoxy grout for pumps and compressors. The default setting is "N." If set to ‘Y,’
epoxy grout is used for all pumps and compressors in the project that include a
foundation and a grout line item. See the topic “Epoxy Grout Appendix” for a list of
applicable pumps and compressors. In this case, the line item description for COA
445 is updated to “EPOXY GROUT.” The epoxy grout quantity, material cost, and
manpower is generated.
• A grout height of 6 inches is typically used for small pumps that are less than 500
HP.
compressors. For estimating purposes it is assumed that the pump or compressor
base plate area is equal to the equipment footprint area.
Use the associated setting Grout Quantity (Adjustment %) to adjust the calculated
grout quantity to user requirements. The percentage applies to both cement based
non-shrink grout and epoxy grout. The default is 100% of the system calculated
grout quantity.

Better User Control Of Fire Water Header, Loop, And Lateral
Piping Calculations
(CQ00586797) A new field “Firewater loop length” is added to the form after the
“Length parameter” input field. The default for this field is the current default value
of 2 x Length parameter. If you specify a value in this field then the specified value is
used to calculate the firewater loop length.

and Enhancements in V8.8.2
New 2015 Cost Basis Update - Pricing Changes

which may cause pricing and/or installation scope changes and the V8.8.2 What’s
Fixed section of Economic Evaluation release notes for further information). Your
results will differ based on the overall mix of equipment, bulk items, and specified
materials of construction contained in your project.
Percent Change from V8.8.2 (2015 Basis) vs. V8.8 CP1 (2014 Basis)
Category
US UK JP EU ME
Equipment 3.6% 4.5% * 3.9% 3.6%
Piping -1.0% 1.3% * 1.3% 1.2%
Civil 2.9% 2.3% * 1.8% 2.7%
Steel 5.0% -2.2% * 1.7% 5.8%
Instrumentation -1.7% -0.5% * 1.7% 1.3%
Electrical -0.3% 0.6% * 2.3% 1.8%
Insulation -0.3% -2.0% * 4.3% 1.7%
Paint -1.5% -1.7% * 1.0% -0.2%
Notes:
* Data was not available to perform a complete pricing update for the Japan
country base. However, there will be pricing changes in the Japan basis due
to model corrections and system enhancements. These are documented
elsewhere in the What’s New content.
• Specifically, the following items will effect pricing for each country base
(detailed descriptions and impact of these changes are documented
elsewhere in this document):

• Electrical wire pricing for each country basis is affected by the Copper
pricing specification. The Copper pricing has been updated in the V8.8
release (excludes Japan basis, see copper wire pricing change below).
changes:
o A515, A516, & A285C: ~1.5% increase
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel (A179) seamless tube pricing has shown
a large decrease of 22.5%.
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel (A214) welded tube pricing has
decreased ~8%.
changes:
follows:
• Based on vendor data, pricing changes for stainless steel seamless tubing is
as follows:
materials:
o JP Basis: NA

• Ready Mix Type “B” Concrete pricing was updated in each location based on
spot pricing received:
o JP Basis: NA

Type US UK JP EU ME
Ladders, Handrails, Grating (avg.) 9% -2% NA 1.8% 6%
Stairways (avg.) 16% -2% NA 1.8% 6%
Platforms (avg.) -1% -2% NA 1.8% 6%
Steel Members (avg.) -7% -2% NA 1.8% 6%
Trenching changes for underground cable duct (CQ00581363,

CQ00583544)
The "Fall-In Factor" has been added to the underground cable duct excavation
calculations. This results in increased excavation volume and man hours for all
underground cable ducts of type TILE and ENVEL. The “Fall-In Factor” varies based
on the soil type specified for the project and accounts for volume increases from soil
breaking loose at the top edges and corners of the excavation.
The Buried depth field has been updated to a new minimum value of 12 IN [305
MM]. Projects created in previous versions will have the specified buried depth
updated to the new minimum values if they are less than 12 IN [305 MM].
Additionally, the engine code is checking maximum values for the following fields:
Duct length (10,000 FT [3000 M]); Buried depth (120 IN [3000 MM]); Cable duct
width (144 IN [3600 MM]). These maximum values have been added to the form
fields.
Updated piling line item descriptions (CQ00521547)

The piling line item descriptions in the output reports have been updated to include
the pile type, size, and depth. This will improve the reporting and give users
additional flexibility for specifying unit costs via the detailed unit rate estimating
(DURE) functionality.
Galvanized finish option is not applied to some of the steel line

items (CQ00593151)
The following items did not have the galvanized finish option applied when specified
by the user. Also, galvanized steel line items now have the ‘GALV’ material tag.
• Conveyor Transfer Tower, Steel Plant Bulk

o Steel towers line item
o Handrail and toe plate line item
o Ladders line item
• Fabricated Steel Plate Items, Steel Plant Bulk
o There are three plate materials available (CS, SS304, and SS316). When the
painted finish option is specified with a stainless steel plate material, the
stainless steel material was previously painted.
o When the galvanized finish option is specified with a CS plate material, the
galvanizing was previously not applied. But, this is working as expected for
the stainless steel plate materials since galvanizing is unnecessary.
• Module lifting lug line item
Tubular steel items Plant Bulk; Painting/Galvanizing and

Unloading/Handling line items were not included in the
estimated cost (CQ00588739)
The Painting/Galvanizing and Unloading/Handling line items have been added to the
Tubular Steel Items Plant Bulk.
Plant Bulk Steel, Siding Component previously had an incorrect

line item description when the default 'CORR' material was
specified (CQ00585901)
This defect only impacted the description for the siding line item. The costs are the
same when the default material is used or if the 'CORR' material is selected in this
steel plant bulk component.
Fixed defect with schedule XXS specified for 321P pipe material
(CQ00588192)
In V8.8 or earlier, if the schedule XXS was specified on the plant bulk pipe form, for
a plant bulk pipe with diameter less than 8 inch (200 mm) and 321P pipe material,
then an error message regarding incorrect schedule was generated. This has been
fixed in V8.8.2 and the error message won’t be generated for the above combination
of input. This defect has been fixed in V8.8 CP1 also.
Fixed defect in supply/return connections for steam tracing or

jacket (CQ00595651)
In V8.8 CP1 or earlier, if the “Pipe fabrication” was set to “ALL” and “Remote shop
minimum diameter” was set to 0.75 inch (15 mm) or less, then pipe material costs
are missing the in items estimated for supply/return sub-header and supply/return
lines that are estimated for stream traced or jacketed piping. This defect has been
fixed in V8.8.2 and the pipe material costs for the supply/return sub-headers and
supply/return lines is now correctly estimated.

Fixed defect in Reciprocating Conveyor Centrifuge (ECT RECIP
CONV) (CQ00586480)
In V8.8 or earlier, for the “Reciprocating Conveyor Centrifuge” model, if “SS”
material was specified and diameter < 20 inch (508 mm) was specified, an error
message was generated. The minimum value for diameter as shown in the input
form is 15 inch (375 mm). This has been fixed in V8.8.2 and the item can be
evaluated without error for the above noted input condition. This defect has also
been fixed in V8.8 CP1.
Fixed defect in Flat Bottom Storage Tank (DVT STORAGE)

(CQ00605350)
In V8.8 CP1 or earlier, for the “Flat Bottom Storage Tank” (DVT STORAGE), if a non-
ferrous metal alloy such as HASTC (Hastelloy C) was specified as the material and
design pressure was specified to be higher than 0.05 psig (0.35 KPag) then an error
message was generated during evaluation. In V8.8.2 we have changed the code and
removed this error message for non-ferrous alloys such as Hastelloy, Nickel alloys,
Titanium etc. For Copper and Aluminum alloys only atmospheric pressure will be
allowed and error message will be generated if design pressure is > 0.05 psig (0.35
KPag).
Fixed crash when fieldbus control system is specified

(CQ00584045)
In the previous version, when a fieldbus instrumentation control system was
specified and an area in the project was not linked to a control center, the ACCE
application would crash during evaluation. In V 8.8.2, when an area is not linked to a
control center in a field bus system, a warning message is generated to alert the
user that a control center has not been specified for that particular area.
Subsequently, a default control center, 0, is assigned to any unlinked areas.
Provide alert that setting the distance to zero will result in no

field junction boxes (CQ00583493)
If the user sets distance from field junction box to control center to zero, ACCE does
not model a junction box. In the previous version however, there was no message
being generated to alert the user of this. In V 8.8.2, a warning message will be
generated alerting the user that the distance from the junction box to the control
center has been set to zero and therefore an area junction box will not be estimated.

Fixed defect in the “Lights and Outlets” plant bulk item
(CQ00594441)
The user has an option to specify a number of weld receptacles in the lights and outlets plant bulk. If the
user specifies a number greater than 0, the weld receptacles and a LV cable & cable accessories are
estimated. By default the number of weld receptacles is 0 and if this field is left blank or the user specifies
0, neither the weld receptacles nor the cable & cable accessories should be estimated. In the previous
version, when the user specified 0 in the number of weld receptacles field the LV cable terminations were
being estimated. This has been fixed in V 8.8.2, weld receptacles and an associated LV cable & cable
accessories are only estimated when a number greater than 0 is specified in the ‘Number of weld
receptacles’ field in the lights and outlets plant bulk.

and Enhancements in V8.8

version of Aspen Economic Evaluation (i.e. 2013 pricing basis). These results were
obtained by running a general benchmark project containing a representative mix of
equipment found in a gas processing plant. In addition to pricing changes, model
enhancements and defect corrections have affected overall percentage differences.
Note: this may include quantity or design differences as various models and
methods have been updated or fine-tuned based on client feedback and defect
which may cause pricing and/or installation scope changes and the V8.8 What’s Fixed
Percent Change from V8.8 (2014 Basis) vs. V8.6

(2013 Basis)
Category
US UK JP EU ME
Equipment -1.7% 0.8% 3.4% -0.6% -2.7%
Piping 0.1% 5.6% 12.4% 0.7% -3.3%
Civil 0.4% 4.4% 8.9% 0.0% 4.3%
Steel 0.6% 2.6% 14.6% -1.3% 3.0%
Instrumentation 7.5% 13.8% 24.7%* 11.1% 10.7%
Electrical -0.5% -0.7% 2.9% -2.3% -0.3%
Insulation 0.7% 1.7% 9.5% -3.1% -1.0%
Paint 0.8% 0.5% 12.9% 0.7% 0.9%
Notes:
descriptions and impact of these changes are covered elsewhere in this
document):
o Modifications to control valve pricing
o Modifications to Instrumentation and Electrical cable tray pricing
o Updates to Centrifugal compressor pricing model
o Updates to Variable Frequency Drive pricing
o Model changes that calculate fireproofing mesh quantities
o Model changes that determine vessel skirts and legs
o Corrections to 304SS Spiral heat exchangers pricing model

o Addition of ESD loops to Turbine volumetric models
specification.
changes:
o A515 & A285C: ~8% increase
o A516: ~1% increase
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel (A179) seamless tube pricing has not
changed since the last pricing update.
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel (A214) welded tube pricing has decreased
~9%.
changes:
follows:
follows:
materials:
o Monel ~ -0.3% plate, ~ -0.1% tube
o Aluminum ~ 0.2% increase plate & tube
o ME Basis: no change from 2013 update
pricing received:

* Japanese Basis Control Valve Pricing
In V8.8, a new separate cost model has been developed to estimate the JP Basis
Control Valves. This model is for the On/Off and Positioner type Globe, Ball and
Butterfly JP Basis Control Valves. The V8.6 and V8.8 costs for these valves should
now be between 1.0 and 1.3. Also, please note the following:
All 300 Class Valves. In V8.6, the costs for 300 Class Valves was not being
updated properly, i.e. the cost for 150 class valves was the same as that of 300 class
valves. This change was implemented in V 8.7.1 for all country bases excluding JP.
In V8.8, the same correction has been applied to the JP Basis.
Control Valve Pricing Updated (CQOO473705)

In previous versions, there were some inconsistencies in the estimated price of
On/off and positioner type control valves compared to the estimated price of regular
valves of same kind (that is, ball, globe, or butterfly). In V8.8, the pricing model
used to estimate the cost of On/Off and Positioner type globe, ball, and butterfly
control valves was changed. A change is seen in the costs estimated for these control
valve types between V8.8 and previous versions.
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) Pricing and Weights Updated

(CQ00532596)
Due to feedback from customers that the estimated price for variable frequency
drives (VFDs) in previous versions was high, in V8.8, the VFD pricing data was
updated. The costs estimated for VFDs are now lower compared to those estimated
in previous versions. The weight data for the VFDs was also updated.
Vessel Skirt Height Design Calculations (CQ00546480)

The default calculated skirt height was incorrect for short vessels (less than 32 FEET
[9.75 M]) and large diameters (greater than 6.67 FEET [2 M]). The documentation is
correct, and the default calculated skirt height should always be 1.5D with a
minimum skirt height of 4 FEET and a maximum skirt height of 32 FEET. This issue
was fixed, and the skirt height is no longer dependent on the vessel height. For short
vessels with large diameters, the vessel cost increases, because the 10 FEET skirt
height limit no longer applies. This change does not affect tall vessels with heights
greater than or equal to 32 FEET.
The Quantity for Joint Kit Line Item for FRP pipe Changed to
Number of Joints (CQ00539730)
For a plant bulk or installation bulk pipe with FRP pipe material, joint kits are
estimated by the engine. The joint kit material cost was always calculated based on
pipe diameter and number of joints. The number of joints depend on the specified
pipe length and number of fittings. In previous versions, the quantity reported on the

joint kit line item was the pipe length in FEET or M. In V8.8, the quantity reported is
the number of joints.
New Subtypes Added for Grounding Systems (CQ00427077)

In V 8.8, the following Subtypes were added to Grounding systems and Electrical
trenching associated only with grounding systems.
• 750 Grounding wire/cable
• 751 Ground rods, studs, clamps
• 752 Cadweld ground conductor bonding
• 753 Thermoweld, mold usage
• 754 Brazed connections
• 755 Servit Post
• 756 Ground/earthing well
• 757 Ground/earthing grid
• 758 Fill hole-Lyconite
• 759 Fill trench-Lyconite
• 760 Excavate trench
• 761 Backfill & compact
These grounding systems are estimated:
• In the Ground grid plant bulk
• At Area level
• For Structure grounding and Equipment grounding in an area
• Grounding of poles in some Comm. & Alarm systems
• Grounding in substations
Changes to Fireproofing Mesh Area Calculations (CQ00545619)

The mesh area for PYRO and MAGN fireproofing was implemented as 60% of the
total fireproofing area and did not exceed the fireproofing area quantities as
expected to account for overlap. The mesh area calculations were updated and now
exceed the fireproofing quantities by at least 10%, as expected. The mesh area now
matches that produced by the CONC fireproofing type.
Additionally, since PYRO and MAGN fireproofing is priced per SF [per M2 for metric]
based on the hour rating, the hour rating has been added to the line item
description. This is important for the new detailed estimating feature, since unit
prices and man-hours can now be entered on UOM basis for a given hourly rating of
PYRO or MAGN fireproofing.
Transformer Type Added to Item Description for Transformer

(CQ00545690)
In previous versions, the electrical transformer type being estimated did not appear
in the item description for the transformer line item in detailed bulks. This has been
changed for V8.8, and the transformer type estimated now appears in the item
description field in line item in the detailed bulks output. This allows you to specify
different unit material costs and man-hours for transformers based on type
(DRY/OIL) and capacity in the Detailed Unit Rate Estimating input file.

Fixed Defect in Custom Pipe Specs File with Mixed Units
(CQ00543019)
In V8.6 or earlier versions, if a metric custom pipe specs file was used in an I-P
project, the engine incorrectly read the corrosion allowance values in INCHES instead
of MM as specified in the custom specs file. As a result, large wall thickness values
were calculated in some cases. The engine code has been updated to correctly
handle metric custom specs file in an I-P project and vice versa.
Fixed Defect in Open Steel Structure (BSTLOPN STL ST)

Weights in US and ME basis, Metric Units Projects
(CQ00554787)
The same set of steel shapes is used by the cost engine for the design of US Metric
and ME Metric steel structures. A defect existed that produced slightly different steel
designs and structure weights for identical open steel structures with US Metric and
ME Metric projects when the same seismic acceleration and wind load was specified
for each project. This defect was corrected, and the design and weight of the ME
Metric open steel structure now matches the design and weight of the US Metric
open steel structure when the seismic accelerations and wind loads are the same.
Fixed Defect in Estimating Man-hours for Control Cable

(CQ00543406)
In the previous versions, different man-hours were estimated for installing the same
cable type, size, and length of a 3C (three conductor) low voltage power cable and of
a 3C control cable. This occurred for the Multi-core cable types (M-C, M-NC and M-
TR). These two cable types (power cable and control cable) are installed in the same
way; therefore, similar specifications of the two cable types should yield the same
man-hours. However, since you can specify the number of conductors in the control
cable, the man-hours for the Multi-core control cable type are adjusted based on the
number of conductors specified. This was performed incorrectly in the previous
versions and has been corrected for V8.8. As a result, you can see a change in the
control cable installation man-hours for the above mentioned cable types. The man-
hours for 3C control cable and 3C low voltage power cable are the same.
Fixed Defect in Default Leg Height for On Machine and Off

Machine Pulper in Metric Projects (CQ00538863)
In previous versions, for the On machine and Off machine pulper models [DAT MACH
PULP & DAT OFF MACH], the default leg height was shown in the input form as 3 M,
but after evaluation, in the Design data sheet, the value used by system was 0.9144
M. This incorrect value was caused by a unit conversion related defect. This defect
was fixed in V8.8. You may see a difference in estimated weight and cost of these
items in metric projects if you did not explicitly specify the leg height.

Fixed Defect in Adding Material Man-hour Additions for a
Quoted Equipment [C] Item with Zero Cost (CQ00554340)
In V8.6, if material man-hour additions were used with a quoted cost [C] item with
equipment COA, and the quoted item itself had 0 material cost and man-hours
specified, for certain codes of account used for the material/man-hour addition, an
error message was generated. This issue was fixed in V8.8. The error message is no
longer necessary and was removed.
Fixed Engine Crash When Helper Wage Rate % of Craft is

Specified and PAGA system is Included (CQ00546140)
In V8.6, if, in a construction workforce, the helper wage rate was specified as a
percent of craft rate, and if the Public Address General Alarm (PAGA) system was
included in the estimate at a project or area level, the engine crashed if the project
scope was such that devices (specifically acoustic hoods) were estimated for the
PAGA system. This issue also occurred if the communication & alarm systems plant
bulk item was used and acoustic hoods were specified in the PAGA system. This issue
was fixed in V8.8, and the crash no longer occurs.
Fixed FATAL Error Message When Oiler Craft Rate or

Productivity was Specified in a Project with UK or EU Country
Base (CQ00534000)
The craft Oiler (craft code 59) is not applicable for the EU and UK country bases. In
previous versions, if oiler wage rate or productivity was specified in a project with
these country bases, a FATAL error message was generated by the engine. This
message was not obvious to Activated Economics users using an ACCE template. In
V8.8, the engine ignores the oiler data specified in these country bases and does not
generate a FATAL error message.
Fixed Memory Corruption That Resulted in Error or Incorrect

Heat Tracing Quantities When Drains were Specified for Plant
Bulk Pipe. (CQ00552154)
In V8.4 or V8.6, for a plant bulk pipe item, if drains were specified and if E-PRO heat
tracing was also specified, a defect in the engine caused memory corruption, leading
to an error message being generated or incorrect heat tracing quantities being
estimated based on the heat tracing input. This issue was fixed in V8.8. Emergency
patches were issued for V8.4 (EP04) and V8.6 (EP01) to fix this defect in the
previous versions.
Fixed Defect in Paint Bulks for Plant Bulk Pipe When Insulation
Thickness is Specified (CQ00552421)
In previous versions, for a plant bulk pipe item, if insulation thickness is specified
then a primer coat is not estimated. If insulation is automatically estimated by the
engine based on operating temperature, a primer coat is estimated. For installation
bulk pipe, the primer coat is correctly estimated when insulation (user specified or
system designed) is estimated. In V8.8, the defect in the plant bulk pipe item is
fixed, and a primer coat is estimated when user specifies insulation thickness.

Fixed Inconsistency in Spiral Plate Heat Exchanger Cost for
SS304 Material (CQ00543304)
In previous versions, for the spiral plate heat exchanger [EHE SPIRAL PLT] with
SS304 material, there was an adjustment for the material cost which led to
inconsistency in the estimated equipment cost such that for certain heat transfer
area values the estimated cost was lower than another spiral plate heat exchanger
with a smaller heat transfer area. This issue was fixed in V8.8.
Fixed Defect in Turboexpander Model When Outlet Pressure = 0

PSIG (CQ00551575)
The minimum value for outlet pressure for turboexpander model (DTURTURBOEXP)
in the input form in 0 PSIG. However, when this value was specified in previous
versions, an error message was generated from the engine, stating that this was an
incorrect value. This defect was fixed in V8.8. Also, the model now accepts slightly
negative (-0.5 PSIG < P < 0 PSIG) values for the outlet pressure to facilitate
components mapped from a simulation where the outlet pressure is specified as 1
barg (a commonly used value to indicate atmospheric pressure).
Fixed Defect in Air Cooler “Fin Type Symbol” Option

(CQ00553539)
There is a Fin type symbol input field for the Air Cooler (DHE AIR COOLER) model.
However, in previous versions, selecting this option resulted in an error message for
the component. This defect was fixed, and this option can now be used to specify
bare tubes for the air cooler.
Fixed Defect Related to Hand Excavation Man-hours for Tank

Containment Walls (CQ00530608)
Previously, hand excavation man-hours were generated for tank containment walls
(Plant bulks | Civil | Tank containment – concrete paving, wall
[BCIVCONTAINMNT]) when the percent of hand excavation was specified as zero.
The percent of hand excavation is now correctly applied, and when the percentage is
set to zero, all of the excavation is performed by machine.


The following new features and enhancements were added in the V8.6 release:

Changes to User Specified Equipment Count Feature

In V8.4, we implemented the user specified equipment count feature. The following
changes were made in V8.6 that affect the equipment count.
Agitated Tanks and Centrifugal Pumps Have Been Added to the User Specified
Equipment Count Exception List (CQ00529732)
Agitated tanks (AT) and Centrifugal pumps (CP) are now allowed to have a user
specified equipment count that is larger than the number of identical items.
Agitator Equipment Count Now Defaults to the Item Count

Instead Of 0 (CQ00533969)
Previously, Agitators (AG) had their default equipment count set to 0. They are now
counted as regular equipment items and the user can decide which ones should not
be counted.
Equipment Count Should Not Default to 0 for COA 100-106

(CQ00534993)
The user specified equipment counts for COA's 100 to 106 now have a default User
Specified Equipment count equal to the item count. COA's 107 and 109 still get a
default User Specified Equipment count of 0.
Push Button Stations, Control Cable Length and Control Cable

Conductors (CQ00496321)
Length of Control Cable and Number of Terminations

The number of pushbuttons, control cable length, type and size and the number of
conductors can be specified on the electrical installations bulk form (Options |
Electrical) for each component. The length of the control cable and the number of
terminations estimated from the pushbutton stations in the previous version was
incorrect. We reviewed the procedure for wiring the pushbutton stations for motors
and changed the calculations for the control cable length and number of
terminations.

In the previous version, if the user did not specify the number of conductors, the
default number of conductors per pushbutton was being estimated as 4. The length
of the control cable was then estimated as (control cable length) x (total number of
conductors). The number of terminations was being estimated as (total number of
conductors) x 2. If the user specified the number of conductors, this number of
conductors was being estimated for each additional pushbutton. The length of the
control cable in that case was estimated as (control cable length) x (user specified
number of conductors) x (number of pushbuttons). The number of terminations was
then being estimated (user specified number of conductors) x (number of
pushbuttons) x 2.
In V8.6, if the user does not specify the number of conductors, the default number of
conductors per pushbutton is estimated as 2. The length of the control cable is still
estimated as (control cable length) x (total number of conductors). The number of
terminations is still estimated as (total number of conductors) x 2. If the user
specifies the number of conductors, this value represents the total number of
conductors from the pushbutton station regardless of the number of pushbuttons
specified. The length of the control cable is then estimated as (control cable length) x
(user specified number of conductors). The number of terminations is then estimated
as the (user specified number of conductors) x 2. Thus the length of control cable
estimated is not dependent on the number of pushbuttons
The above description assumes control cable type B (Single core wire pulled in
conduit). For multi-core type control cable, the number of conductors determines the
number of cores in the multi-core cable.
Number of Conductors
In the previous version, the “Number of conductors” field in the electrical
installations bulk form for each component (Options | Electrical) and the “Control
number of conductors” field in the Design Basis | Electrical Specs form had a
minimum value of “> 0”. However, when a value less than 3 was entered in the
“Number of conductors” field in the electrical installations bulk form, an error
message - "Number of control cable conductors must be 3-37" was generated.
This was not the case for the “Control number of conductors” field in Design Basis |
Electrical Specs form. A value less than 3 would not result in an error message.

In V8.6, the “Number of conductors” field in the GUI in the electrical installations
bulk form for each component (Options | Electrical) and the “Control number of
conductors” field in the Design Basis | Electrical Specs form now both have a
minimum value of 2 and a maximum value of 37 specified in the GUI.
Incorrect Cable Drop Estimated for Electrical Items

(CQ00535975)
For ‘Lights and Outlets’ and ‘High mast lighting’ plant bulks
Cable drop for electrical cables in plant bulks should not be estimated therefore the
‘cable drop length’ and ‘cable drop support’ fields in the Design Basis | Electrical
Specs form should not affect the plant bulks.
In the previous version, a cable drop was being estimated for the lighting cable
estimated in the ‘Lights and outlets’ and the ‘High mast lighting’ plant bulks. In V8.6,
no cable drop and cable drop support is being estimated for these plant bulks.
With the "Control cable conduit option" - X (No separate conduit for control
cable)
In the previous version, the "Control cable conduit option" - X (No separate conduit
for control cable) in the Design Basis | Electrical Specs form did not work correctly
with these control cable/wire types: Multi core cable in conduit (less conduit) (M-NC)

and Single core wires in conduit (less conduit) (W-NC). A cable drop conduit was still
being estimated for these two cable types when the `X’ option had been selected by
the user.
In V8.6, when the user selects the ‘X’ option for this field, no conduit is estimated for
the cable drop estimated for the control cables.
Design Data Sheet for Buildings Incorrect When Labor

Adjustment Used (CQ00532319)
The design data sheet reporting defect has been corrected when "Labor adjustment
required" is specified as "Yes" on the Building component (BCIVBUILDING) form.
The value reported by the system in this case should be the total of the adjusted
material cost plus the adjusted labor cost divided by the total square footage of the
building as reported in the Design Data Sheet. This applies with and without the
external building file added to the project.
Field Fabrication Man-hours for Packed Tower (DTW PACKED)

(CQ00512925)
There was a defect in the program due to which the man-hours for the packing
support plates were not included in the field fabrication hours for a packed tower
when the tower diameter is greater than the maximum shop fabrication diameter for
vessels. This has been fixed. Users will see a change in the field fabrication man-
hours for packed towers (DTW PACKED).
Vessel Skirt for Multiple Diameter Tower (DTW TOWER)

(CQ00532598)
In previous versions, for the multiple diameter tower component (DTW TOWER), the
vessel skirt would be estimated by the engine even when the skirt height was
specified as ‘0’. This has been fixed. When ‘0’ skirt height is specified, the skirt is not
estimated.
Legs for Agitated Tanks (DAT MACH PULP, DAT OFF MACH)
(CQ00536928)
In previous versions, for the ‘On machine pulper’ (DAT MACH PULP) and ‘Off machine
pulper’ (DAT OFF MACH) components, vessel legs were estimated even when the leg
height was specified as ‘0’. This has been fixed and vessel legs will not be estimated
when leg height is specified as ‘0’.
Error in Desalter (DHT DESALTER) When Pipe Wall Thickness

Standard is not ASME (CQ00538995)
In previous versions, if the ‘Pipe wall thickness standard’ in ‘Design Basis | Piping
Specs | General’ was not ASME, the desalter component (DHT DESALTER) would get

error messages regarding incorrect pipe schedule during item or project evaluation.
This defect has been fixed and the desalter component can be estimated when the
‘Pipe wall thickness standard’ is not ASME.
Error in Double Walled Full-containment Tank (LNG Tank, DVT

LNG TANK) Component in a Country Base with 60 Hz Power
Cycle (CQ00539265)
For a project with UK/EU/JP country base which has a 50 Hz power cycle, if the pump
speed for submerged pumps in the double walled full-containment tank (LNG tank,
DVT LNG TANK) was specified as 1500 rpm, an error message was generated
indicating the speed was incorrect and the component would not be evaluated. This
has been fixed. The component is now correctly evaluated when the pump speed is
specified as 1500 rpm.
Motor Operated Valves Written to Wrong Code of Account

(CQ00531124)
In the previous version, motor operated remote on/off control valves were assigned
to code of account (COA) 681: CONTROL VALVES, along with other control valve types.
In V8.6, the motor operated remote on/off control valves - globe type (GLO), ball
type (BVO), and butterfly type (BUO), are now being written to COA 684: MOTOR
OPERATED VALVES.
Mill buildings, Elevated Platforms & Conveyor Transfer Tower

Plant Bulks Getting Extra Welding Receptacles and LV Cable
(CQ00540740)
In V8.2, one welding receptacle was estimated at area level and for the open steel
structure (BSTLOPN STL ST), open concrete structure (BCIVOPN CON ST), multiple
bay mill building (BSTLMILL BLDG), elevated access platform (BSTLPLATFORM) and
conveyor transfer tower (BSTLTRNS TOWER) plant bulks. After CQ00498747 was
implemented in V8.4; 3 welding receptacles are estimated at area level and a LV
cable of length equal to 2 x ‘Distance to MCC’ was added for the weld receptacles.
For the plant bulks the welding receptacles estimated remained as 1 per item, but a
LV cable of length equal to ‘Distance to MCC’ was added. This change took effect
correctly for the open steel structure and open concrete structure plant bulks.
However, for the mill building, elevated platform and conveyor transfer tower plant
bulks, 3 welding receptacles and a LV cable of length equal to 2 x ‘Distance to MCC’
is being estimated in V8.4.

In V8.6, for the multiple bay mill building, elevated access platform and conveyor
transfer tower steel plant bulks, only 1 welding receptacle and a LV cable of length
equal to ‘Distance to MCC’ will be estimated for each item to make it consistent with
the open steel structure and open concrete structure plant bulks.
Updated Man-Hours for Platforms Specified on the Installation

Bulk - Steel Form (CQ00528477)
The man-hours generated for platforms specified on the installation bulk steel
(Options | Steel) form have been updated. Previously, the hours generated were
higher than those obtained from the internal steel volumetric model. The man-hours
per square foot of platform area is now consistent throughout the cost engine. The
same issue also existed with platform man-hours associated with the Plant Bulk Civil
item, 'Tank containment - concrete paving, wall'. The platform man-hours for the
tank containment plant bulk are now lower as well.
Hand Excavation Man-Hour Inconsistencies (CQ00529525)

The hand excavation man-hour inconsistencies occurred when a high bearing
capacity soil type was specified (i.e. Soft Rock, Hardpan, Medium Rock, or Hard
Rock) with a component level civil bulk item foundation. The inconsistency has been
resolved and the unit man-hours for hand excavation are consistent across the
system for a given soil type, foundation type, and excavation depth. This results in a
smaller number of hand excavation man-hours for component level civil bulk
foundation items.
One of the crew members in the hand excavation crew mix array was not specified
correctly and caused the hand excavation man-hours to become very large. This
crew member is only used in conjunction with the air compressor and jack hammer
equipment needed to break up the rocky soils for removal with a hand shovel.


There are no software fixes for Aspen Icarus Evaluation Engine for V8.6.

Technology Description
The Icarus Evaluation Engine (Icarus Evaluation Technology) provides state-of-the-
art economic evaluation services to the entire Aspen Icarus product suite: Aspen In-
Plant Cost Estimator, Aspen Process Economic Analyzer, and Aspen Capital Cost
Estimator.
New Features and Enhancements in V8.4:
Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE) Can Potentially Crash For Any

Project with More Than 5000 User Tag Numbers (CQ00511500)
In previous versions (V8.2 and earlier) when evaluating any project that contains
more than 5000 items with user tag numbers specified for each one of them, the
evaluation engine can potentially crash due to a memory corruption defect. This was
fixed in V8.4 and an emergency patch was issued for V8.2 (EP2).
Modified Shell Diameter Optimization Logic for Shell and Tube

Heat Exchangers (CQ00505629)
In V8.4 we changed the logic for shell diameter optimization in the evaluation engine
as follows:
• In previous versions, when only the “Heat transfer area” was specified, the
program would try to estimate a single shell heat exchanger up to 48 inch shell
diameter and 20 ft. maximum shell length. If the required area could not be
achieved in a single shell multiple shell design would result.
• In V8.4, we have increased the cut-off diameter above which multiple shell
design would result to 72 inches. This is in accordance to the detailed exchanger
design programs such as Shell&TubeMechanical and corresponds to the limits
placed on shipping a single shell.
• Similarly we have also increased the maximum tube length that gets calculated
by the program to 40 ft.
• We have also changed the limits for L/D for the shell based on some up to date
heat exchanger design references.
Due to these changes, single shell designs may result for heat exchangers for which
multiple shell designs occurred in the previous releases. E.g. with only the heat
transfer area specified, for a non-U-tube TEMA configuration such as BEM, multiple
shell designs would results for heat transfer area above 6534 sq. ft. [607 sq. m]. In
V8.4, single shell designs will occur up to approximately 14780 sq. ft. [1373 sq. m].
Also for certain small heat transfer area values, in V8.4, a shorter shell with a larger
diameter may result due to the changes in the L/D limits.

Note: These changes apply mainly to the case in which the heat transfer area is the
only input specified by the user. Users can always enter the desired number of
shells, shell-diameter, extended tube length etc. to over-ride the calculated
parameters.
Instrument Cable Terminations (CQ00497159)

There was a defect in the calculation for instrument cable termination man-hours and
material cost that was fixed in V8.4. This fix affects instrument cable terminations
estimated for plant bulk instrument cable (BINSINST WIRE), installation bulk
instrument cable generated by the internal VPID and the area level instrument cable
estimated for control center connections. For the plant bulk instrumentation cable, in
previous versions, the cable termination cost would not change when conductor set
type was changed from pair to triad. This was fixed in V8.4. For the installation bulk
and area level instrument cable terminations, the number of conductors was not
properly accounted for, which was fixed in V8.4.
Number of Fused Joints for HDPE Pipe (CQ00501859)

For the HDPE pipe plant bulk (BPIPHDPE PIPE), there was a defect in the algorithm
to calculate the number of fused joints for straight run pipe when several fittings
were specified for the pipe. Due to this the number of joints were underestimated.
This has been fixed in V8.4. Users who have this plant bulk in their projects may see
an increase in the number of joints estimated for the pipe depending on the pipe
length and fittings specified for the pipe.
Updated Fiber Optic Cable Cost (CQ00487360)

The 2 plant bulks in the system which have a fiber optic cable estimated are:
• Data highway cable (BINSDATA HIWAY) under Plant bulks | Instrumentation
• Communication and alarm systems (BELCCOMALM SYS), under Plant bulks |
Electrical - General
The material price for the data highway fiber optic cable estimated was too high in
the previous version. The communication and alarm systems plant bulk was added in
V8.0 and therefore has more recent costing information for the fiber optic cable. The
costing information used to estimate the data highway fiber optic cable has therefore
been updated to be the same as that used to estimate the communication and alarm
system fiber optic cable.
Validation for the ‘Rated Voltage’ Input Field for the Circuit
Breaker Plant Bulk Item (CQ00521958)
bulks | Electrical -Substation, the rated voltage field requires that the voltage
specified by the user must match the project level electrical design specs for LV, MV
and HV.

In the previous versions, an error message was generated when there was a
mismatch between the user specified voltage in the ‘Rated voltage’ input field and
the project level low voltage or medium voltage. However, this was not the case for
the high voltage. This is because the transmission voltage (33 kV for UK, EU and JP
and 34.5 kV for US and ME country bases) is also supported, therefore the rated
voltage field allows the user to specify voltages above the project level high voltage
(13.8 kV /11 kV) and an error message was only generated if the user specified a
voltage above 33 kV for UK, EU and JP and 34.5 kV for US and ME country bases.
The user should not be able to specify voltages above the project level high voltage,
but should be able to specify the transmission voltage.
In V8.4 this has been fixed. Error message is generated when there is a mismatch
between the user specified voltage in the ‘Rated voltage’ input field and the project
level high voltage (13.8 kV /11 kV) or the project level transmission voltage (34.5
kV/33 kV), such that the breaker will not be estimated for user specified voltages
between (13.8 kV /11 kV) and (34.5 kV/33 kV).
Item Evaluation with Valid Structure Tag (CQ00499874)

When a single item evaluation is run on a component that has a valid structure tag,
the component is evaluated by the cost engine in the same way it is evaluated
during a project evaluation. This means the same costs will be generated for the
component and related bulks in the single item run and the project run. For example
a 70 foot trayed tower hung in a 50 foot open steel structure will have its civil bulks
removed, support steel added, 20 feet of ladder, less platform area, and less
electrical bulks. The difference can be seen by running the single item evaluation
with the structure tag included and again with the structure tag removed.

Piling Costs Updated for POUR Type Piles (CQ00502252)
The piling cost for POUR type piles has been updated. The material and labor costs
now include load testing of POUR type piles. Previously, load testing was only
included for AUGR and FRNK type piles.
Steel Plant Bulk – Fabricated Steel Plate Items (CQ00503806)

The calculated steel weight was previously larger than the expected value. This was
due to a 1.4 factor being incorrectly applied to the calculated steel weight when the
“Weight per fabricated plate” field was left blank. The calculated plate weight is now
in agreement with the expected value. This bug fix results in a lower cost of the
fabricated plate material.
Storage Tank Foundation Type Update (CQ00517997)

The foundation type for storage tanks (DVT STORAGE) has been updated from
OCT+PROJ (Type 1) to OCTAGONL (Type 2) when piling is specified at the area level.
The OCTAGONL foundation type serves as a mat foundation to distribute the load
from the tank to the individual piles. This results in lower material and labor costs
for the civil foundation bulks including: excavation and backfill, formwork, rebar and
concrete.
Electrical Trenching Cost Update (CQ00518902)

The electrical trenching quantities, material costs, and labor hours have been
updated in order to maintain consistency across the system for equipment electrical
trenching and plant bulk electrical trenching. Users will see differences for both
types of buried cable protection (concrete envelope and sand bed with tiling). Also,
sand bed with tiling was previously not generated for plant bulk communication and
alarm systems.
The line item details have been expanded for equipment and area bulk cable
trenching with sand bed and tiling cable protection specified at the project level in
the general electrical specs. The sand bed quantity and tile quantity are now included
in separate line items.

Ring Foundation Minimum Diameter (CQ00519165)
The "Ring foundation minimum diameter" default value of 10 m was not properly
applied to projects with Metric UOM. Previously, storage tanks with a specified
diameter as small as 8 m incorrectly generated a ring foundation. This defect did not
affect Metric projects with a user specified value in the "Ring foundation minimum
diameter" field.

(including Emergency Patches) version of Aspen Economic Evaluation (i.e. 2012
pricing basis). These results were obtained by running a general benchmark project
containing a representative mix of equipment found in a gas processing plant. In
addition to pricing changes, model enhancements and defect corrections have
affected overall percentage differences.

Note: This may include quantity or design differences as various models and
methods have been updated or fine-tuned based on client feedback and defect
which may cause pricing and/or installation scope changes and the V8.4 What’s Fixed
Percent Change from V8.4 (2013 Basis) vs. V8.2+ EPs (2012 Basis)
Category
US UK JP EU ME
Equipment 4.2% 6.8% * 8.0% 6.1%
Piping -5.4% 1.3% * 4.1% -7.8%
Civil 2.0% 1.9% * 1.8% 1.7%
Steel -1.3% 2.5% * 0.8% -8.4%
Instrumentation -4.9% 2.7% * 4.6% -8.8%
Electrical 0.9% -0.2% * 3.2% 7.0%
Insulation -1.3% 0.6% * -3.4% -1.9%
Paint 0.8% -0.5% * 0.9% 0.5%
Notes:
• * Data was not available to perform a complete pricing update for the Japan
country base. However, there will be pricing changes in the Japan basis due to
model corrections and enhancements. These are documented elsewhere in the
“What’s New” content.
• Specifically, the following items will effect pricing for each country basis (detailed
document):
° Modified shell diameter optimization logic for shell and tube heat exchangers
– depending on the specifications this enhancement may also effect piping,
foundation/steel, insulation, and/or paint results
° Instrument cable terminations
° Maximum Steam Gauge Pressure Value and Tracing Calculations for Plant
Bulk Pipe (BPIPPIPE)
° Enhancement to Estimate Cable For Welding Receptacles At Area Level
° The Default Formwork Material Type Has Been Updated
° Number of Fused Joints for HDPE Pipe
° Updated Fiber Optic Cable Cost
° Piling Costs Updated for POUR Type Piles
° Steel Plant Bulk – Fabricated Steel Plate Items
° Storage Tank Foundation Type Update
° Electrical Trenching Cost Update
° Recalibration of piping costs (see note below)
• Based on client feedback, a recalibration of all steel piping materials (excluding
API pipe) and sizes has been completed which will affect all country bases. The
range of adjustments is from approximately -20% to 30%.

specification. The Copper pricing has been updated in the V8.4 release.
changes:
° A515, A516, A285C: ~7% decrease
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel seamless tube pricing has shown a decrease
of app. 8%.
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel welded tube pricing has not changed since
the last pricing update.
changes:
° SS304: ~6% decrease
follows:
° 304W ~ 19% decrease
follows:
° 304S ~ 50% increase
• Decreases in Nickel pricing has resulted in price decreases for such materials as:
° Hastelloy ~ 3% plate, ~ 2% tube
° Inconel ~ 2% plate, ~ 1% tube
° Monel ~ 2% plate, ~ 1% tube
° Copper ~ -8% sheet, ~-8% tube, ~ -15% wire
° Aluminum ~ 5% decrease plate & tube
° US Basis: ~ 2% increase
° UK Basis: ~ 2% increase
° EU Basis: ~ 1% increase
° JP Basis: NA
° ME Basis: ~ 1% decrease
pricing received:

° JP Basis: NA
° ME Basis: ~ 6% increase


There are no software fixes listed for this release.

Icarus Evaluation New Features and
Enhancements in V9

which may cause pricing and/or installation scope changes and the V9 What’s Fixed
Percent Change from V9 (2015 Basis) vs. V8.8 CP1 (2014 Basis)
Category
US UK JP EU ME
Equipment 3.6% 4.5% 4.2% 3.9% 3.6%
Piping -1.0% 1.3% 3.8% 1.3% 1.2%
Civil 2.9% 2.3% 3.0% 1.8% 2.7%

Steel 5.0% -2.2% 1.8% 1.7% 5.8%
Instrumentation -1.7% -0.5% 2.4% 1.7% 1.3%
Electrical -0.3% 0.6% 2.3% 2.3% 1.8%
Insulation -0.3% -2.0% 2.8% 4.3% 1.7%

Paint -1.5% -1.7% 4.0% 1.0% -0.2%
Notes:
* The V9 release includes the pricing update for the Japan Basis (changes noted in the table
above). The EE V9 release does not co-exist with the EE V8.8.2 release, thus the pricing
changes made in the other country bases in V8.8.2 also apply to the V9 release. Furthermore,
defect corrections made in V9 may alter pricing results in comparison to V8.8.2 in specific
circumstances (these are documented in the V9 Relase/What’s Fixed Notes). Project
evaluations using the project benchmark described above have been made in all country bases
to compare V9 results vs. V8.8.2. (This excludes the Japan basis as the V9 changes were
intentional). For these benchmark projects no changes were seen in V9 results vs. V8.8.2 for
the US, UK, EU, and ME bases. The following notes include the changes described in V8.8.2
with the changes seen for Japan in V9.
descriptions and impact of these changes are documented elsewhere in this document):

• Electrical wire pricing for each country basis is affected by the Copper pricing specification.
The Copper pricing has been updated in the V8.8 release (excludes Japan basis, see
copper wire pricing change below).

o A515, A516, & A285C: ~1.5% increase
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel (A179) seamless tube pricing has shown a large
decrease of 22.5%.
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel (A214) welded tube pricing has decreased ~8%.
• Based on vendor data, pricing changes for stainless steel seamless tubing is as follows:
• Based on vendor data, the following changes were observed for Non-Ferrous materials:
• Ready Mix Type “B” Concrete pricing was updated in each location based on spot pricing
received:

Type US UK JP EU ME
Ladders, Handrails, Grating (avg.) 9% -2% 1.8% 1.8% 6%
Stairways (avg.) 16% -2% 1.8% 1.8% 6%
Platforms (avg.) -1% -2% 1.8% 1.8% 6%
Steel Members (avg.) -7% -2% 1.8% 1.8% 6%


• A grout height of 6 inches is typically used for small pumps that are less than 500 HP.
Better User Control Of Fire Water Header, Loop, And Lateral Piping
Calculations

The following new features, enhancements, and or corrections are included in this
release:
• Updates to Centrifugal Fan (EFN CENTRIF) and Vaneaxial Fan (EFN VANEAXIAL)
Models
• Updated cost for large diameter stainless steel flanges
• Updated pricing for cable terminations and calculations for push-buttons in
Electrical Installation Bulks
• Wording in reports changed from “EQUIPMENT CONTINGENCY” to “DESIGN
ALLOWANCE”
• Changed the tolerance margin between specified and calculated heat transfer
area for shell and tube heat exchangers
• Modifications for pipe fittings (elbows and tees) for sizes greater than 48 INCH
[1200 MM]
• Allow selection of pipe bends and branches in lieu of elbows and tees at the
Installation Bulks| Pipe – General Specs Level
• Updated man-hour estimates for electric and control cabling
2012 Pricing Update Summary
Updates to Centrifugal Fan (EFN CENTRIF) and Vaneaxial Fan

(EFN VANEAXIAL) Models
For Vaneaxial fan, the cost estimation model has been updated with new cost data.
The maximum actual gas flow rate has been increased to 45000 CFM [76450 M3/H].
For the Centrifugal fan, the cost estimation model has been updated with new cost
data. The maximum actual gas flow rate has been increased to 900000 CFM
[1529000 M3/H]. Two new input fields have been added:
Driver type: The options are MOTOR, VFD, TURBINE, NONE. This field allows users to
select a driver for the fan or select NONE to exclude the driver cost from the
estimate.
Application: The options are STD: standard duty (up to 150,000 CFM [254,850
M3/H] actual gas flow rate) and HVY: heavy duty (actual gas flow rate from 50,000
CFM [84,950 M3/H] up to 900,00 CFM [1529000 M3/H]).
Updated Cost of Large Diameter Stainless Steel Flanges

Adjustments have been made to the cost of large diameter (> 12 INCH [300 MM])
stainless steel flanges. This results in lower material cost of these flanges in V8.0. In
addition, a change has been made to estimate slip-on type flanges instead of weld
neck flanges when body flanges are specified for vessels. This affects the material
cost of the vessel.

Updated Pricing for Cable Terminations and Calculations for
Push-Buttons in Electrical Installation Bulks
The terminations pricing and man-hour estimates for armored and non-armored,
electrical and control cables have been revised in V8.0. Users now see significant
differences between material and man-hour estimates for cable terminations
between V7.3.2 and V8.0.
In V8.0 calculations have been modified for number of terminations, number of cores
in the control cable, and the length of the control cable in Installation Bulks |
Electrical:
There are 4 fields which govern control cable length and number of terminations:
• Distance to substation
• Number of pushbuttons
• Control cable length
• Control cable no. of conductors
The best practice would be to specify all of these fields above. The cases below
explain the calculations for various different cases:
Case 1: If the user specifies the ‘Number of pushbuttons’ field as ‘2’ and leaves
everything blank: The number of control conductors would be 2*4 = 8 conductors
and the number of terminations would be 8*2 = 16 terminations.
The control cable run length would be:
[‘Distance to substation field’ specified here OR if left blank the ‘Distance between
MCC and equipment’ set at the area level electrical specifications for which the
default is 25 feet.]
+
[‘Distance between MCC and CC’ set in the process control tree for which the default
is 100 feet]
So, the control cable run length will be 100+25 =125 feet. Hence, the total control
cable length will be (125+10)*8 = 1080 feet.
Case 2: If the user specifies the ‘Number of pushbuttons’ field as ‘3’ and also
specifies the ‘Control cable length’ as ‘100 feet’: The number of conductors would be

3*4= 12 conductors. The number of terminations would be 12*2 = 24 terminations.
The total cable length will be (100+10)*12 = 1320 feet.
Case 3: If the user specifies the ‘Number of pushbuttons’ field as ‘4’ and also
specifies the ‘Control cable no. of conductors’ as ‘5’: The number of terminations
would be 5*2*4= 40 terminations and the total control cable length would be
((100+25) + 10)*5*4 = 2700 feet.
The control cable wire lengths would change with the ‘Control cable wire type’
selection made by the user. For example, Multi-core cable lengths for the above Case
3 would be 5C, 540 feet and single core cable lengths would be 1C, 2700 feet.
Wording in Reports Changed from “EQUIPMENT

CONTINGENCY” to “DESIGN ALLOWANCE”
In V7.3.2 or earlier, the accumulated design allowance for equipment (the value in
Design basis| Equipment specs – Design allowance input field) was reported in the in
CCP report and the details table (A-table) in the reports.mdb as “EQUIPMENT
CONTINGENCY”. Since the word “contingency” has a specific connotation in
estimating which is not applicable in this case and since the value being reported is
actually an allowance for design changes, the wording in the reports was changed.
The value is calculated in the same way as it was before.
Changed the Tolerance Margin between Specified and

Calculated Heat Transfer Area for Shell and Tube Heat
Exchangers
In V7.3.2 and earlier, if the calculated heat transfer area (i.e. area calculated from
the number of tubes per shell, number of shells, tube O.D. and tube length extended
inputs) differed from the specified heat transfer area by more than 5%, an error
message was generated for the heat exchanger. This resulted in a large number of
error messages especially for the case where the heat exchangers were designed
using EDR in a simulation and then imported from the simulation into APEA or
through Integrated Sizing and Costing (ISC). The cause of this was because the
‘effective’ heat transfer area calculated by EDR gets imported in the ‘Heat transfer
area’ field. This area is typically less than the calculated area and may differ from the
calculated area by more than 5%. To avoid excessive error messages in such cases,
the tolerance margin for this difference was changed to 10% for shell and tube heat
exchangers and reboilers.
Modifications for Pipe Fittings (Elbows and Tees) for Sizes

Greater than 48 INCH [1200 MM]
In V7.3.2 or earlier, when users specify elbows and tees on pipe with diameter larger
than 48 INCH [1200 MM], the fittings (elbows and tees) are not estimated directly.
Instead the fitting is considered to be fabricated from beveled pipe sections.
Therefore additional man-hours required for the cuts/bevels/welds to fabricate these
fittings are estimated. However the material cost of the extra length of pipe to
fabricate these fittings was not estimated or reported in the line item details and the
details table (A-table). Therefore they are not included in the report. With this
enhancement, the material cost of the fabricated elbow/tee is estimated and
reported. The material cost is estimated as cost of straight pipe of the same
diameter and length equal to [2 x nominal pipe diameter].

Due to this, the fitting counts will no longer be missed in the installation details and
they will also result in additional material cost.
In V7.3.2 or earlier, if large diameter pipe was in remote shop range and user had
specified only elbows and tees on a pipe, the pipe would not get procured and
fabricated in remote shop because the fabricated fittings were being deleted after
increasing the number of cuts/bevels/welds. After this enhancement, if users have
specified elbows and tees on a pipe > 48 INCH in diameter and the diameter is in
remote shop range, then a portion of the pipe (based on number of fittings) and
material to fabricate the fittings will be procured and fabricated in remote shop.
Allow Selection of Pipe Bends and Branches in Lieu of Elbows

and Tees at the Installation Bulks| Pipe – General Specs Level
In V7.3.2 and earlier, users can specify bends in lieu of pipe elbows and fabricated
branch connections in lieu of tees on an individual plant bulk pipe or installation bulk
pipe lines. In V8, this option has been added to Installation bulks| Pipe – general
specs to enable users to specify this option on a per component basis. User selection
in this form is applicable to all the installation bulk lines specified for that
component. User section in the Installation bulks| Pipe – general specs form can be
over-ridden by the user input for these fields on the individual plant bulk pipe.

table below summarizes an approximation of material pricing changes from the
V7.3.2 (including Emergency Patches - see note below) version of Aspen Economic
Evaluation (i.e. 2011 pricing basis). These results were obtained by running a
general benchmark project containing a representative mix of equipment found in a
gas processing plant. In addition to pricing changes, model enhancements and defect
corrections (this includes corrections made in V7.3.2 emergency patches) have
affected overall percentage differences. Note: this may include quantity or design
differences as various models and methods have been updated or fine-tuned based
on client feedback and defect resolution (see information provided in this document
regarding defect corrections which may cause pricing and/or installation scope
changes and the V8.0 What’s Fixed section of Economic Evaluation release notes for
further information). Your results will differ based on the overall mix of equipment,
bulk items, and specified materials of construction contained in your project.
Category Percent Change from V8.0 (2012 Basis) vs. V7.3.2+ EPs (2011 Basis)
US UK JP EU ME
Equipment -3.8% -4.4% -5.9% -6.0% -2.4%
Piping 6.5% 1.0% 2.2% -0.5% -0.1%
Civil 3.8% 8.8% 0.6% 4.7% 3.5%
Steel -6.2% 13.3% 0.5% 2.5% -34.6%
Instrumentation 2.6% 1.6% -0.9% 0.7% -0.9%
Electrical 3.1% -2.0% -3.3% 1.2% -8.8%
Insulation -4.2% 0.7% -2.6% -3.6% -2.9%
Paint 3.3% 3.8% 10.0% 3.7% 3.6%
Notes:

• The V7.3.2 basis includes the Emergency Patches generated for V7.3.2 as
corrections to quantity and/or manhour estimates were made in some patches.
Those corrections made in the V7.3.2 Emergency Patches will not be documented
in these notes.
• The significant decrease in steel cost for the Middle East basis can be attributed
to market pricing for various structural steel shapes and members (see specific
notes below).
• Based on client feedback, a recalibration of 2 INCH [50 MM] CS piping has been
made in this release. When piping costs estimated by the evaluation engine were
analyzed on a unit cost (Cost/LB) basis, it was observed that unit pricing for the
2 inch [50 mm] diameter pipe was unusually higher compared to pipe either
smaller or larger in size than 2 inch. So we have adjusted the pricing for 2 inch
pipe downward to bring it more in line with the expected unit cost value. The
adjustments have been made in US, UK, EU and ME country bases for 2 inch pipe
and in UK and EU country bases for 1.5 inch pipe. The range of adjustments is
from 11% to 30%. This adjustment affects the cost of CS and low alloy pipe
materials.
• A recalibration of large diameter stainless steel flanges have been made in this
release. See discussion for specific details of the changes.
• Electrical wire pricing for each location is affected by the Copper pricing
specification. The Copper pricing has been updated in the V8.0 release.
• Based on client feedback, terminations pricing and installation man hours for
Low, Medium, High, and Control voltages for armored/non armored cables have
been completely revised in V 8.0.
• Estimate lengths for conduit have been corrected in V8.0. See discussion on
“Incorrect man hours for some cable types when part of the cable is in conduit
and the rest in the tray.”
changes:
° A515: 5% decrease
° A516: 18% decrease
° A285C: 8% decrease
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel seamless tube pricing has shown a large
decrease of app. 22%.
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel welded tube pricing has shown a slight
increase of app. 1%.
• Based on vendor data, stainless steel plate pricing (304SS and 316SS) has
decreased approximately 14%.
follows:
° 304W ~ 13% increase
° 321W ~ 29% increase
follows:
° 304S ~ 16% decrease

• Decreases in Nickel pricing has resulted in price decreases for such materials as:
° Copper ~ -12% sheet, ~+3% tube, ~ -10% wire
° Aluminum ~ 22% decrease sheet & tube
° JP Basis: ~ 1% increase
° ME Basis: no change
° Ready Mix Type “B” Concrete pricing was updated in each location based on
spot pricing received:
° EU Basis: ~ 3% decrease
° JP Basis: ~ 5% decrease
° ME Basis: ~ 1% increase
Type US UK JP EU ME
Ladders, Handrails, Grating (avg.) 0% 4.3% 0.3% 2.5% -43%

Stairways (avg.) 0% 21% 0.3% 2.5% -50%
Platforms (avg.) 0% 67% 0.3% 2.5% -63%
Steel Members (avg.) -10% 8% 0.3% 2.5% -21%

and Enhancements in V7.3.2
The following new features, enhancements, and or corrections are included in this
release:
• Subtype added for Tubing
• Correct engineering costs for new multiple diameter tower model
• Resolve differences for skirt wall thickness in item run vs. project run
• Modify "Air Supply Drop" pipe quantity in the INASSEMBLY.dat file
• Correct external pressure max temperature for S2205
• Updates to the Galvanization Cost Adder in External Steel File
• Correction to Insulation equivalent length table when using metric units
• Remove “Barometric pressure at site” field
• Corrected issue related to number limits in EML items
• New COAs added for Duct Insulation
• COA for “Seal Coat – Concrete” has been moved to the civil account group
• Added a new piling subtype for rigging and dismantling pile drilling/driving
equipment
• Increased the maximum weight limit for steel bulk items located in “Project
Component | Options | Steel”
• Updated the maximum gravel base course depth of Site Development item
“Paving/Roads | Gravel base course - no base prep"
• Updated the maximum spread footing size
• Updated the handrail and toe plate weight
• Added an error message for stacked modules if the module stacking configuration
is incorrectly specified
• Updated default cable type for 34.5kV high voltage cables is changed to ARMOR
type for US/ME basis
• Cable drop support neglected for 34.5/33 kV W-NC and M-NC cables
• Wire size conversion and wire size input corrected in ARM
• Change in methods for calculating control cable lengths and number of
terminations at the electrical installation bulk level for equipment
Subtype added for Tubing

A new subtype of 98 has been assigned to the tubing line item for the tubing plant
bulk item (Plant bulks | Piping | Tubing). Prior to this enhancement, the tubing line
item had the same subtype as piping (99).
Also, tubing fittings would get the same subtypes as pipe fittings. Now tubing fittings
will get new subtypes as follows:
• Tubing elbow = 952
• Tubing reducer = 953

• Tubing tee = 954
• Tubing union = 955
• Tubing ball valve = 956
This enhancement will allow users to create code of account exceptions based on
these subtypes and separate the tubing items from piping items.
Engineering costs for new tower model do not match

old model with same input specs
The engineering costs estimated for the new “Multiple diameter tower” component
(added in EE V7.3) do not match that of an equivalent single or double diameter
tower specified using the single/double diameter tower models. This has been fixed
in EE V7.3.2. If users have used the new multiple diameter tower in projects created
in V7.3, they might see a change in the engineering costs for the multiple diameter
tower when the existing project is opened and evaluated in V7.3.2.
Resolve differences for skirt wall thickness in item run

vs. project run
The root cause of this bug was that in the evaluation engine a flag for cold-box
module area was not being reset after the cold-box area was processed. In the cold-
box area, the wind design is turned off for vessels in the cold-box. Since the flag was
not being reset after processing the cold-box area, wind design remained turned off
for subsequent vessels also. This resulted in incorrect results for vessels specified in
areas after the cold-box area.
When any of the subsequent vessels were evaluated independently (item
evaluation), the engine did not process the cold-box area first, so in that case, wind
design was being performed. This resulted in different skirt thicknesses during item
evaluation vs. project evaluation. This bug has now been fixed. Users may see
different (but correct) results for vessels in their projects if they have a cold-box
area specified before the area in which the vessels exist when these projects are
evaluated in V7.3.2.
Modify "Air Supply Drop" pipe qty in the

INASSEMBLY.dat file
In the external instrumentation assemblies file (Customer External Files |
Instrumentation Assemblies) if the user modified the length of the “Air Supply Drop
pipe” in the Air supply drop assembly, there was a defect which would add an extra
length of air supply drop pipe along with the default length generated by the
evaluation engine. This has been corrected so only the length specified by the user in
the external file will be generated.

Correct external pressure maximum temperature for
S2205
The maximum external pressure design temperature for SS2205 given in Icarus
reference and used by the evaluation engine was 400 F (204 C) which was incorrect.
This has been fixed both in the evaluation engine and the Icarus reference so the
correct value 650 F (343 C) is now used.
Updates to the Galvanization Cost Adder in External

Steel File
In this release, methods for applying the “Galvanization cost adder” from the
customer external steel file (Customer External Files | Steel Material) has been
updated:
• Method used before this change: The cost adder was applied to the steel weight
after galvanization. For example, if bare steel weight was 1000 LBS,
galvanization would cause an addition of ~ 3-5% of weight. Assuming 3%, the
adder was being applied to 1030 LBS of steel. The quantity reported in the detail
line item was also the weight after galvanization. Thus the galvanization cost
adder was based off of the incorrect weight. incorrectly include
• Updated method in V7.3.2: The cost adder will be applied to the bare steel
weight before galvanization. The quantity in the detail line item will always be the
bare steel weight. The weight column in the APROJID file (A-Table in
reports.mdb) will have the actual weight which includes any galvanization.
Correction to Insulation equivalent length table when

using metric units
When the external insulation equivalent length file (Customer External File |
Insulation External Files | Insulation Equivalent Length Rules) is in metric units,
there was a defect in the conversion of the "B" parameter. This caused incorrect
equivalent lengths to be generated for valves and fittings. This has been fixed in EE
V7.3.2. A change in the insulation equivalent lengths may be seen in existing
projects having metric files when they are evaluated in V7.3.2.
Note: The How Icarus calculates insulation lengths on piping section in chapter
18 of Icarus reference explains how the evaluation engine calculates equivalent
lengths of insulation.
Remove “Barometric pressure at site” field

The Barometric pressure at site field in the Design Basis | Equipment Specs form was
not being read by the evaluation engine or being used anywhere in the evaluation
engine. This field has been removed in V7.3.2. Existing projects containing
specifications for this field will have this field deleted when opened in V7.3.2.

Corrected issue related to number limits in EML items
In the equipment model library item, if a value entered was > 200,000 for the
primary sizing parameter, the calculation to determine cost, labor hours, and weight
would not work correctly. -This was due to a defect which has been fixed in V7.3.2.
New COAs added for Duct Insulation

In previous versions, when user specified insulation or paint bulks for ducts, the
equipment insulation or paint code of accounts was used for duct insulation or paint.
After this enhancement, the pipe insulation or paint COA will be used for duct
insulation or paint. Separate codes of account modifiers (COAMOD) have been
created to distinguish duct paint and insulation from pipe paint and insulation. Refer
to ‘Icarus Reference – Chapter 35 – Database Relations’ in the documentation for
these COAMODs. These COAMODs may be used for creating a separate code of
account for these items. Also a number of subtypes have been added for all the
components of the duct based duct type (round, square, and spiral). Refer to ‘Icarus
Reference – Chapter 35 – Database Relations’ in the documentation for these
subtypes. These subtypes can be used to create separate codes of account for
different types of ducts.
COA for “Seal Coat – Concrete” has been moved to the

civil account group
The assignment of "SEAL COAT – CONCRETE" has been moved from COA 918 (Paint)
to COA 481 (Civil) The following items are affected by this change:
• Civil Bulk Additions with a sealcoat specified.
• Civil Plant Bulk "Foundations, slabs, other concrete items (BCIVCONCRETE)" with
a sealcoat specified.
• Civil Plant Bulk "Tank containment - concrete paving, wall (BCIVCONTAINMNT)"
with a sealcoat specified.
Added a new piling subtype for rigging and

dismantling pile drilling/driving equipment
Piling subtype 90 has been added for rigging and dismantling pile drilling/driving
equipment.
Increased the maximum weight limit for steel bulk

items located in “Project Component | Options |
Steel”
The "Steel Installation Bulk Items" form located in the project component Options
contains fields for three steel bulk items. Previously the structure weight of each
item was limited to a maximum of 100 tons (90 metric tons). The limits have now
been increased to 4500 tons (4000 metric tons).

Updated the maximum gravel base course depth of Site Development item
“Paving/Roads | Gravel base course - no base prep"
The maximum gravel base course depth has been increased from 12" (300mm) to
24" (600mm).
Updated the maximum spread footing size

The maximum spread footing width and length designed by the system has been
updated to 15’-0” x 15’-0”.
Updated the handrail and toe plate weight

Handrail and toe plate weight has been updated from 10 lb/ft to 17 lb/ft. This change
affects the steel bulks for projects with and without an external steel file defined.
Railing assemblies defined by OSHA specification 1910.23e include a top rail
(L2x2x3/8), intermediate rail (L2x2x3/8), posts (L2x2x3/8) spaced at 8ft o/c, and a
4" toe plate which corresponds approximately to 17 lb/ft.
If an external steel file was defined in a previous project, the handrail and toe plate
weight will automatically be updated when the project is opened in V7.3.2.
Added an error message for stacked modules if the

module stacking configuration is incorrectly specified
An error message has been added to the system in order to inform users if the
module stacking configuration for bargeable or truckable modules is incorrectly
specified.

Updated default cable type for 34.5kV high voltage
cables is changed to ARMOR type for US/ME basis
The default cable type for HV, MV, LV cables is generally W-C type for a US/ME basis
project. However, 34.5/33 kV HV cables cannot be W-C type since the cable
diameter is more than 6” and the maximum conduit size is limited to 6”. A warning
message will now be generated for 34.5/33 kV high voltage with W-C selected as the
cable type. The warning message will be “34.5/33 KV CABLE CANNOT BE W-C TYPE,
ARMOR TYPE WILL BE USED” and the cable type will be changed to ARMOR type.
Cable drop support neglected for 34.5/33 kV W-NC

and M-NC cables
Cable drop supports can either be ‘conduit’ or ‘tray’ type depending upon the
selections made by the user. When high voltage is selected as 34.5/33kV the engine
automatically neglects the cable drop supports since it is unnecessary to design
trays/conduits for cable drops for 34.5/33 kV HV cables.
Wire size conversion and wire size input corrected in

ARM
Relocating projects using ARM to locations which have wire size input units as ‘M’ or
‘A’ now show the correct wire size tables in the ‘wire size’ fields by setting the ‘wire
size units input’ field correctly in the input units of measure form . The wire sizes if
specified anywhere in the project should also change from AWG/KCMIL to the
equivalent size in MM2 from the corresponding table and vice versa.
Change in methods for calculating control cable

lengths and number of terminations at the electrical
installation bulk level for equipment
The control cable lengths and number of terminations calculations have been
changed at the electrical installation bulk level.
Generally there are 4 fields which govern the control cable lengths and their
terminations.
• Distance to substation
• Number of push buttons
• Control cable length
• Control cable no. of conductors

The best practice would be to fill out all the fields like ‘no. of push buttons’, ‘Control
cable length’ and ‘control cable no. of conductors’.
Case 1: If the user specifies the ‘no. of push buttons’ field as ‘2’ and leaves
everything blank. Then the number of control conductors would be 2*2 = 4
conductors and the number of terminations would be 4*2 = 8 terminations.
The control cable run length would be:
‘Distance to substation field’ specified here or if left blank the ‘Distance between MCC
and equipment’ set at the area level electrical specifications (default = ’25 feet’).
+
‘Distance between MCC and CC’ set in the process control tree (default = ‘100 feet’).
The control cable run length will be 100+25 =125 feet and the total control cable
length will be (125+10)*4 = 540 feet.
Case 2: If the user specifies the ‘no. of push buttons’ field as ‘3’ and specifies the
‘control cable run length’ also as ‘100 feet’. Then the no. of conductors would be
3*2= 6. The number of terminations would be 6*2 = 12 terminations. So, the total
cable length will be (100+10)*6 = 660 feet.
Case 3: If the user specifies the ‘no. of push buttons’ field as ‘4’ and also specifies
the ‘control cable no. of conductors’ as ‘5’. Then the no. of terminations would be
5*2= 10 terminations and the total control cable length would be ((100+25) +
10)*5 = 675 feet.
The control cable wire lengths would change with the ‘control cable wire type’
selection made by the user. For example, Multi core cable lengths for the above
Case: 3 would be 5C, 135 feet and single core cable lengths would be 1C, 675 feet.
2011 Cost Basis Update Pricing Changes

table below summarizes an approximation of the material pricing changes from the
V7.3.1 version of Aspen Economic Evaluation (i.e. 2010 pricing basis). These results
model enhancements and defect corrections (including corrections made in V7.3.1
emergency patches) have affected overall percentage differences. Note: this may

include quantity or design differences as various models and methods have been
updated or fine-tuned based on client feedback and defect resolution (see
information provided in this document regarding defect corrections which may cause
pricing and/or installation scope changes and the V7.3.2 What’s Fixed section of
Economic Evaluation release notes for further information). Your results will differ
based on the overall mix of equipment, bulk items, and specified materials of
construction contained in your project.
Notes:
• The significant increase in steel cost (and to a lesser degree civil cost) for the
Japanese basis can be attributed to the inclusion of the new seismic design code
methodologies. See the “What's New topic: “Wind and seismic load calculations
updated to ASCE 7-05 and ASCE 7-10” for further information.
• Electrical wire pricing for each location is effected by the inclusion of Copper
pricing. See the “What's New topic: “New field to input copper cost for electrical
wiring/cable” for further information.
• Heat exchanger costs may be affected by accounting for missing tubesheet
drilling hours. See the “What's New topic: “Corrected defect in heat exchanger
fabrication to include man hours for cutting tubesheet holes” for further
information.
• Increases in US based Fabricated and Mechanical Equipment (11% & 8%
respectively)
• Increases in UK based Fabricated and Mechanical Equipment (8% & 4%
respectively)
• Increases in JP based Fabricated and Mechanical Equipment (9% & 7%
respectively)
• Slight Increases in EU based Fabricated and Mechanical Equipment (4% & 2%
respectively)
• Increases in ME based Fabricated and Mechanical Equipment (7% & 4%
respectively)
• Based on fabricator data, Carbon Steel plate pricing has shown a significant
increase > 45%.
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel seamless tube pricing has shown a
significant increase > 40%.

• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel welded tube pricing has shown an increase
of app. 18%.
• Based on spot pricing, US Rebar pricing has decreased significantly by app. 30%
Ready Mix Type “B” Concrete pricing was updated in each location based on spot
pricing received:
• US Basis: 0% change
• UK Basis: 2.9% increase
• EU Basis: 30.0% decrease
• JP Basis: 17.0% decrease
• ME Basis: 3.0% decrease
Based on vendor pricing, structural steel shapes and beams have changed via the
following for the US
Basis:
• Ladders w/Cage: -3.5%
• Grating: 21%
• Ladders excl/cage: 28%
• Handrails: 22%
• Stair Channel: 18%
• Stair Treads: 19%
• Platforms: 24%
• Bracing: 48%
• Extra Heavy Steel: 38%
• Heavy Steel: 29%
• Medium Steel: 19%
• Light Steel: 19%
• Extra Light Steel: 21%
Increased demand for stainless steel plate has resulted in price increases for 304SS
(~17%) and 316SS (~16%).
Based on vendor data, pricing changes for stainless steel welded tubing is
significantly higher:
• 304W ~ 48%
• 316W ~ 95%
• 321W ~ 74%
Based on vendor data, pricing increases for stainless steel seamless tubing have
been observed:
• 304S ~ 22%
• 316S ~ 41%
• 321S ~ 19%
Titanium plate and tube pricing has increased app. 19%.
Increases in Nickel pricing has resulted in price increases for such materials as:
• Hastelloy ~ 22% plate, ~ 11% tube
• Inconel ~ 21% plate, ~ 11% tube

• Monel ~ 27% plate, ~ 13% tube
Increases in Copper and Aluminum pricing have resulted in price increases for the
following:
• Copper ~ 28% sheet, ~7% tube
• Aluminum ~ 34% sheet & tube
Icarus Evaluation Engine New

Features and Enhancements in
V7.3
• New Crude Oil Desalter model
• New Sediment Removal Filter model
• New Multiple Diameter, Trayed or Packed Tower model
• New Cryogenic Double-Walled, Full Containment Storage Tank model
• Fixed defect in ASME VIII Div2 and DIN calculations
• Fixed defect in certain steel plant bulk items with galvanized finish
• Fixed defect in field labor hours for field fabricated single diameter towers
• Fixed defect in double diameter tower with lined shell material
• Fixed defect in double diameter tower operating temperature specification
• Fixed defect in cartridge filter with stainless steel MOC
• Increased range and updated cost for gas turbine
• Fixed defect in nozzle rating for double diameter towers
• Structural grounding calculations have been modified
• Sand bedding costs associated with buried piping have been updated
• The 'Tank containment - dike and geomembrane' civil plant bulk model has been
revised
New Crude Oil Desalter model

A new cost equipment model has been created to estimate the cost and ancillary
components of a crude oil desalter. This new equipment model is located under
Components ‡ Process Equipment ‡ Vessels – pressure, storage ‡ Vessel –
horizontal tank ‡ Crude oil desalter.
The crude oil desalter consists of a horizontal tank with high voltage electrostatic
plates mounted inside and transformer/rectifier units mounted on the outside.
Based on vessel dimensions supplied by the user, estimates are calculated for the #
of internal plates, # of transformers, size of inlet/outlet piping manifolds, etc. The
values calculated by the system can be overridden on the input form if more exact
information is available. Costs generated for the transformers are included in the
equipment costs with weights reported separately.

A new graphical PID has been developed representing the piping and instrument
scope for the new model.
New Sediment Removal Filter model

This new equipment model is located under Components ‡ Process Equipment ‡
Separation Equipment ‡ Filter ‡ Sediment Removal Filter.
The new model expands on the existing cartridge filter model by allowing more
options for vessel specifications (e.g. size, materials of construction, DP, DT, etc.).
It is modeled after existing vertical vessels and requires users to supply a percent
internals allowance (vs. total vessel weight) to account for internals/filtering element
costs. As these types of filters are highly specialized, the new model provides the
flexibility of specifying different design possibilities and returns output similar to a
vertical vessel design data sheet for further fine tuning.
New Multiple Diameter, Trayed or Packed Tower

model
Towers, columns – trayed/packed ‡ Tower – multiple diameter ‡ Multiple diameter,
trayed or packed tower.
The new model may be used to specify a single, double, or triple diameter towers
containing trayed, packed, and/or trayed and packed sections (in each diameter
section users will be able to specify one trayed section and two packed sections). A
new sub-form (accessible from the multiple diameter tower form) has been created
for entering tower section details allowing easier input of section/tower
specifications. In addition, jackets and other design details may be defined via
section.
When the new model is used to specify a single or double diameter tower, the results
will be the same as the existing (single or double) models. Note: as discussed
below, defect corrections to the old models may cause different results than prior
versions. Certain differences may also arise due to different algorithms used in
calculating the number of man-holes and packing support plates in the old single
diameter tower models vs. the new model.
Different options are available for selecting the default external volumetric PID or
default external volumetric model:
• Program – programs automatically selects drawing based on input specs

• Single Tray – single diameter trayed tower drawing will be used
• Single Pack – single diameter packed tower drawing will be used

• Double – double diameter tower drawing will be used
• Triple – triple diameter tower drawing will be used
Note: You can also select alternate PID drawings or Volumetric models via current
menu options
scope for the new triple diameter tower model.
Note: This new tower model is now the default when Aspen Plus or HYSYS tower unit
operations containing three or more defined sections are mapped to APEA.
New Cryogenic Double-Walled, Full Containment

Storage Tank model
Vessels – pressure, storage ‡ Vessel – vertical tank ‡ Cryogenic double-walled, full
containment storage tank.
The new model is capable of modeling cryogenic fluid storage (including LNG) within
a double-walled tank.
The storage tank consists of an inner steel tank, outer pre-stressed concrete tank
wall, pre-stressed concrete roof ring beam, reinforced concrete spherical roof dome,
steel roof support structure and hanging rods, suspended aluminum inner tank
platform, reinforced concrete mat/raft foundation with or without piles, perlite
annular insulation, foam mat insulation, submerged pumps, electric hoist, steel
platforms, caged ladders, and a stair tower.
Results for civil and steel tank design components are included in the cost of the
tank and are not broken out individually via COA.
Increased range and updated cost for gas turbine

For gas turbine the maximum power output was increased from 370,000 HP to
500,000 HP (from 275,000 KW to 375,000 KW). In addition the cost for turbines with
power greater than 10,000 HP has been updated.
Structural grounding calculations have been modified

The algorithm for designing grounding systems of columns within structures has
been corrected to more accurately determine the grounding requirements of the
structure. The following differences may be noticed within the grounding system
results (results may be lower than prior versions):
1 Length of the grounding conductors
2 Number of brazed connections
3 Number of servit posts

Sand bedding costs associated with buried piping
have been updated
The sand bedding volume calculation has been updated. The previous model
assumed the sand bedding volume was equal to the excavation volume. The new
model uses the following equation:
Sand Volume = [(Pipe Diameter + 0.5ft)*(Pipe Diameter + 2.0ft) - Pipe Area] *
Trench Length / 27.0, CY
where 0.5ft = depth of sand below pipe, 2.0ft = 1.0ft on each side of the pipe
The sand bedding material cost has been updated to be consistent with the civil bulk
sand price used elsewhere in the system. Previously, sand bedding material cost
was set at approximately $2.7 per Cubic Yard. The current civil bulk price for sand
bedding material is app. $13 per Cubic Yard.
The backfill volume calculation has been updated. The previous model assumed the
backfill volume was approx. equal to the [excavation volume – pipe volume]. The
new model uses the following equation:
Backfill Volume = (Trench Depth - Pipe Diameter - 0.5ft)*(Pipe Diameter + 2.0ft)
* Trench Length / 27.0 * 1.2, CY
where 0.5ft = depth of sand below pipe, 2.0ft = 1.0ft on each side of the pipe,
1.2 = Backfill compaction factor
This update results in an increase in sand bedding material cost, but the overall cost
of sand bedding and backfill/compaction will be reduced due to lesser volumes being
required.
The 'Tank containment - dike and geomembrane' civil plant bulk model has been
revised
The contained depth input field default has been changed from 4 to 6 FT
A new field has been added, width at top of dike default = 6 FT
A new field has been added, width at bottom of dike default = 18 FT

model enhancements and defect corrections (including corrections made in V7.2.1
emergency patches) have affected overall percentage differences. Note: this may
include quantity or design differences as various models and methods have been
updated or fine-tuned based on client feedback and defect resolution (see
information provided in this document regarding defect corrections which may cause
pricing and/or installation changes and the V7.3 What’s Fixed section of Economic
Evaluation release notes for further information). Your results will differ based on
the overall mix of equipment, bulk items, and specified materials of construction
contained in your project.

Category Percent Change from V7.3.0 (2010 Basis) vs. V7.2.1 (2009 Basis)
US UK JP EU ME
Equipment -3.0% -1.3% -3.7% -3.3% -3.2%
Piping 4.0% -1.4% -4.0% 3.5% 10.5%
Civil 1.5% -0.9% 2.0% -2.0% -0.5%
Steel 1.3% 9.6% 0.0% -2.3% 4.5%
Instrumentation 7.8% -3.4% -2.2% 1.9% 5.3%
Electrical 2.6% 7.7% 5.9% -0.2% 6.1%
Insulation 0.9% 7.0% 3.6% 3.4% 3.3%
Paint 1.0% 1.6% -0.5% -0.8% 0.2%
The continued global economic downturn has resulted in a lowering of various prices
especially in Europe and Asia. In general, the following system pricing changes were
observed:
• A slight increase in US based Fabricated and Mechanical Equipment (5% & 3%
respectively)
• Based on fabricator data, Carbon Steel plate pricing has shown a significant
decrease > 40%.
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel seamless tube pricing has shown a slight
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel welded tube pricing has shown a slight
• US Rebar pricing is unchanged.
• Ready-Mix Type “B” Concrete Pricing has changed via the following:
° US Basis has increased app. 3%.
° UK Basis has decreased app. 1%.
° EU Basis has decreased app. 5%.
° JP Basis has increased app. 7%.
° ME Basis is unchanged.
• Pricing for various structural steel shapes and beams has increased app. 1% in
the US Basis.
• Increased demand for stainless steel plate has resulted in price increases for
304SS (~22%) and 316SS (~24%).
• Based on vendor data, pricing changes for stainless steel welded tubing is mixed:
° 304W ~ 10%
° 316W ~ -10%
° 321W ~ -2%
• Based on vendor data, pricing increases for stainless steel seamless tubing have
been observed:
° 304S ~ 19%
° 316S ~ 11%
° 321S ~ 32%
• Titanium plate and tube pricing has increased significantly, > 85%.
• Increases in Nickel pricing has resulted in price increases for such materials as:

• Significant increases in Copper and Aluminum pricing have resulted in price
increases for the following:
° Copper ~ 50% sheet, ~9% tube
° Aluminum ~ 32% sheet & tube

The following new features and enhancements are added in the release V7.2:
• Changes in the design methodology for some pipe fittings
• European pressure vessel design code EN 13345
• 2009 Cost Basis Update Pricing Changes
Design methodology for some pipe fittings has been

changed
• Pricing and manhours of sockolets, weldolets and threadolets have been updated
based on recent pricing.
• Based on customer feedback, a maximum diameter for weldolets has been set at
24" (600mm). Weldolets on pipe above 24” will generate the same costs as 24".
• Based on customer feedback, a maximum diameter for sockolets and threadolets
has been set at 2” (50mm). These ‘olets on pipe above 2" will generate the same
costs as 2".
• All the 'olets can now be estimated on pipe up to 120" (3000mm) and are always
field fabricated (all sizes) regardless of them being in the remote shop range
(default: 2.5" (65mm) - 48" (1200mm)).
• 'Olets will be fabricated in the remote shop only when there are other fittings
which are remotely fabricated.
European pressure vessel design code EN 13345 has

been added
The European Design code EN 13445 for pressure vessels is added to allow for
design of the following:
• Heat exchanger – Shell and tube, Reboilers
• Towers – double diameter, single diameter
• Agitated tanks
• Vessels – Horizontal tank, Vertical tanks
Gas compressors default driver types

• The driver type for Gas compressors, namely Centrifugal compressor-
horizontal, Centrifugal compressor-integral gear, and Reciprocating
compressor, have been changed from None to Motor.


model enhancements and defect corrections (including corrections made in V7.1
cumulative patches) have affected overall percentage differences. Note: this may
include quantity differences as various models and methods have been fine-tuned
based on client feedback and defect resolution (see release notes for Cumulative
Patches and the V7.2 What’s Fixed section of this document for further information).
Your results will differ based on the overall mix of equipment, bulk items, and
specified materials contained in your project.
Category Percent Change from V7.2.0 (2009 Basis) vs. V7.1.0 (2008 Basis)
US UK JP EU ME
Equipment -6.6% -6.5% -15.9% -5.7% -6.8%
Piping -2.6% 2.3% -11.5% 2.2% -1.5%
Civil 1.7% 4.5% -11.0% -0.6% 2.6%
Steel -3.5% 1.9% -21.9% -0.1% -5.9%
Instrumentation -10.2% 2.3% -8.3% -0.4% -7.0%
Electrical 2.0% -0.4% -12.5% 1.7% -3.0%
Insulation -9.4% -6.1% -19.7% -11.9% -10.1%
Paint 2.7% 8.9% -6.4% 8.6% 5.0%
The global economic downturn of 2008 - 2009 has resulted in a lowering of various
prices. In general, the following system pricing changes were observed:
• Reductions in US based Fabricated and Mechanical Equipment (-19% & -7%
respectively)
• Based on fabricator data, Carbon Steel plate pricing has shown an increase of
app. 14%.
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel seamless tube pricing has shown a
significant decrease of app. 33%.
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel welded tube pricing has shown a significant
• US Rebar pricing is unchanged.
• Ready-Mix Type “B” Concrete Pricing has changed via the following:
° UK Basis has increased app. 4%.
° EU Basis has decreased app. 5%.
° ME Basis has increased app. 13%.
• Pricing for structural steel shapes has decreased app. 4% in the US Basis.
• Decreased demand for stainless steel plate has resulted in price drops for 304SS
(-32%) and 316SS (-37%).
• Based on vendor data, significant pricing decreases for stainless steel welded
tubing has been observed:
° 304W ~ -39%
° 316W ~ -47%

° 321W ~ -38%
• Based on vendor data, significant pricing decreases for stainless steel seamless
tubing has been observed:
° 304S ~ -42%
° 316S ~ -45%
° 321S ~ -53%
• Titanium pricing has decreased significantly, app. 35%.
• Drops in Nickel pricing has resulted in price decreases for such materials as:
° Hastelloy ~ -30% plate, ~-15% tube
° Inconel ~-2- (-13)% plate, ~-6% tube
° Monel ~ -11% plate, ~-5% tube
• Significant Drops in Copper pricing has resulted in price decreases for the
following:
° Copper ~ -47% sheet, ~ -4% tube
• Adjustments to scheduling were made where increases in crew sizes were made
to activities which require many hours to provide more realistic activity durations.
Note: This may result in a decrease in the amount of hours estimated when
using the system Engineering Models for certain activities related to Construction
Management, Home Office Construction Services, and Field Office Construction
Supervision.
• Significant ME engineering wage rate increases were made as this country basis
continues to be refined.

• 2008 cost basis update pricing changes
• Mega Project support
• Update ASME 2008 materials properties
• Further Electrical Enhancements

table below summarizes an approximation of the changes from the 2006.5.0 version
of Aspen Icarus (i.e. 2007 pricing basis). These results were obtained by running a
general benchmark project containing a representative mix of equipment found in a
gas processing plant. In addition to pricing changes, model enhancements and defect
corrections have affected overall percentage differences. Your results may differ
based on the overall mix of equipment, bulk items, and specified materials contained
in your project.
Category Percent Change from V7.1 (2008 Basis) vs. 2006.5 (2007 Basis)
US UK JP EU ME1
Equipment 10.9% 11.2% 2.3% 12.2% 9.0%
Piping 7.4% 6.8% -1.4% 5.9% 3.8%
Civil 10.5% 13.6% 4.4% 8.7% 8.4%
Steel 7.8% 15.3% 10.4% 11.2% 11.0%
Instrumentation 5.5% 3.9% -1.5% 4.5% 4.6%
Electrical 7.9% 3.5% -1.4% 3.9% 5.0%
Insulation 7.5% 5.8% 1.1% 5.6% 6.1%
Paint 8.4% 9.3% -3.9% 3.2% 5.8%
For the ME basis only, the results shown in the table are changes from V7.1 vs.
2006.5 CP2
• Carbon Steel plate pricing has shown large increases of app. 35%.
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel seamless tube pricing has shown a large
• Based on vendor data, Carbon Steel welded tube pricing has shown a large
• US Rebar pricing has increased app. 67%.
• Ready-Mix Concrete Pricing has changed via the following:
° UK Basis has increased app. 23%.

° EU Basis has increased app. 6%.
° ME Basis has increased app. 10%.
• Pricing for structural steel shapes has increased app. 8% in the US Basis.
• Continued worldwide demand resulted in significant increases for stainless steel
plate (e.g. 304SS app. 30%, 316SS app. 43%).
• Based on vendor data, pricing for stainless steel welded tubing has decreased by
the following:
° 304W ~ -6%
° 316W ~ -7%
° 321W ~ -6%
° 2205W ~ -15%
• Based on vendor data, pricing for stainless steel seamless tubing has increased
by the following:
° 304S ~ 7%
° 316S ~ 6%
° 321S ~ 28%
• Titanium pricing has decreased significantly, app. 40%.
• Nickel prices have decreased significantly resulting in price decreases for such
materials as
° Hastelloy ~ -30% plate, ~-15% tube
° Inconel ~-35-40% plate, ~-30% tube
° Monel ~ -30% plate, ~-15% tube
• Updates to G&A, Profit, and Overhead has been made to the remote pipe shop
labor model resulting in increases from 14-18%.
• Significant ME construction labor wage rate decreases (>30%) were observed.
Mega Project Support

• Increased Pipe Diameters to 120 inch (from 72-120” only standard diameters are
permitted). Pipe diameters greater than 72" are only available for Plant Bulk Pipe
Items. These larger diameters cannot be specified in pipe item details or yard
pipe forms.
• Increased substation support to 50 substations and 34.5 KV secondary
transmission voltage
• Performance improvements in handling contractors and custom piping specs
Update ASME 2008 Materials Properties
Further Electrical Enhancements

• New electrical plant bulk item has been added - "HIGH MAST" for high mast
lighting systems
• Aluminum Pole selection option for area lighting

• Include pilot light cost in the pushbutton cost; take out separate pilot light line
item cost from reporting.
• Report NEMA starter size for low voltage motors
• Add "Red concrete" option for electrical conduit envelope

• Plant bulk instrumentation
• Power distribution
• New graphical drawing 75
• Volumetric P&ID changes
• Piping
• Default shell materials selection (Capital Cost Estimator and In-Plant Cost
Estimator Only)
Plant Bulk Instrumentation

CONDUIT item: a new CONDUIT item has been added in the Plant Bulk
Instrumentation menu. This is similar to the CONDUIT item in Plant Bulk Electrical.
Users can specify conduit length, diameter, and fittings for the item in the
Instrumentation Codes of Accounts.
Power Distribution
New options to delete civil foundation and grounding well & grid is added in the
Power Distribution forms for MAIN and UNIT substations. User can now delete
system developed substation civil foundations and grounding from the project
estimates.
New Graphical Drawing 75

A new graphical and non-graphical P&ID number 75 is created for TEWAC motors.
Volumetric P&ID changes

Updates to the following VPID drawings (internal, external, and non-graphical
volumetric models) have been made. As identified in the list, the following loops
have been changed from “Pneumatic Local Control” to “Electronic Control Center”:
• HT storage FULL 619H: Loop 6
• Jacketed HT 3phase separator with baffles 143J: Loop 8
• Jacketed HT 3phase separator with boot 142J: Loop 8
• Jacketed HT batch 5HJ: Loop 8
• Jacketed HT continuous FULL 604J: Loop 7
• Jacketed HT continuous STD 4J: Loop 6
• Jacketed HT knockout FULL 622HJ: Loop 7
• Jacketed HT knockout STD 22HJ: Loop 7
• Jacketed HT liquid separator 144J: Loop 6

• Jacketed HT liquid separator with boot 144J: Loop 6
• Jacketed HT pressure vessel with boot 141HJ: Loop 7
• Jacketed HT receiver 10HJ: Loop 10
• Jacketed HT storage FULL 619HJ: Loop 6 and Loop 12
• Jacketed HT storage STD 19HJ: Loop 6
• Jacketed reactor FULL 623: Loop 9
• Jacketed VT batch 5VJ: Loop 8
• Jacketed VT continuous FULL 606J: Loop 8
• Jacketed VT continuous STD 6J: Loop 8
• Jacketed VT knockout FULL 622VJ: Loop 7
• Jacketed VT knockout STD 22VJ: Loop 7
• Jacketed VT receiver 10VJ: Loop 10
• Jacketed VT storage FULL 619VJ: Loop 6 and Loop 12
• Jacketed VT storage STD 19VJ: Loop 6
• Motor TEWAC 75: Loop 1
• Non smokeless flare 69: Loop 5
• Open top jacketed reactor FULL 623O: Loop 9
• Plate and frame filter 30: Loop 1
• Smokeless flare 48: Loop 6
• Static mixer 88: Loop 2
• Static mixer with 316PS pipe material 88S: Loop 2
• Vessel heater bare pipe immersion coil 26: Loop 1
• VT storage FULL 619V: Loop 6
Piping
Usage of dissimilar materials for small/medium/large pipe for custom pipe
specifications is now permitted.
Default Shell Materials Selection (Capital Cost

Estimator and In-Plant Cost Estimator Only)
This new feature applies to towers, horizontal vessels, vertical pressure and storage
vessels and agitated tanks. In the ‘Project Basis View’, users will be able to specify a
default design temperature cutoff and shell material that should be used above and
below the cutoff in Design Basis Equipment Specs. These selections will be applied in
the design ONLY when the design temperature value is entered in the equipment
form (either by the user or as a result of sizing). If design temperature is not
specified for these components, this feature will not be active. The cutoff design
temperature and the materials selected by user will be applied in the equipment
design as follows:
• If the user has entered a shell material in the equipment form, the value entered
in the equipment form will be used.

• If the user has NOT entered a design temperature or shell material in the forms,
then default design temperature and shell material below cutoff will be used (e.g.
650 F and A285C for shell and tube heat exchangers).
• If the user has entered a design temperature but NOT entered shell material,
then the shell material below cutoff will be used if equip. design temperature <
cutoff design temperature. If equip. design temperature > cutoff design
temperature, then shell material above cutoff will be used.
• Furthermore, previously the default shell material for single and double diameter
towers was A515. This has been changed to A516 to represent current design
specifications. Since the stress properties and costs are similar for these two
materials, existing projects won’t be unduly impacted.

Icarus Reporter New Features and
Enhancements in V9
The following have been added to Aspen Icarus Reporter V9:

(CQ00562177) A total % field is added to sum the individual percentages. A note on
project definition is added.

Enhancements in V8.8.2
The following new features and enhancements are added in release V8.8.2:
New “Direct Cost Metrics by Report Group” Spreadsheet

Enhances Reporting Abilities
A new "Direct Cost Metrics by Report Group" Excel report has been added under:
Full Import - Other Reports – Project - Direct Cost Metrics - Direct Cost Metrics by
Report Group.
In this format, each report group’s results are opened in a separate worksheet. This
lets you create separate worksheets for areas of the estimate that differ in
complexity.

Enhancements in V8.8
• New Module Summary and Engineering Reports by Contractor
• New “Direct Cost Metrics” Excel Report
• Craft Productivity Added to the Reports Database (CQ00530604)
• Fixed Defect for Excel Contractor Reports with Contractor Names Containing “\”
or “/” Characters
Note: For further details, please refer to the “What’s New in Aspen Icarus Reporter
V8.8” help topic.
New Module Summary and Engineering Reports by Contractor

Ten new Excel reports were added to the ICARUS Reporter. The Module Summary by
Contractor report was added to the Direct Costs section and provides summarized
costs and shipping weights for modules. New Engineering by Contractor reports
have been added to the Indirect Costs section and include the following:
a. Basic Engineering
b. Detail Engineering
c. Home Office Construction Services
d. Field Office Construction Supervision
e. Construction Management
f. Plant Startup
g. Basic Engineering Drawings
h. Detail Engineering Drawings
i. Procurement

New “Direct Cost Metrics” Excel Report
In V8.8, a new Excel report, Direct Cost Metrics, was added. In the Aspen Icarus
Reporter GUI, this report can be found at the Full Import | Other Reports |
Project | Direct Cost Metrics tree view location:
To run this report, select the Direct Cost Metrics report; then, click the Run
Report button. The report contains some key metrics regarding direct material
costs, man-hours and labor costs for process equipment, piping, concrete, structural
steel, instrumentation, and electrical accounts.
Craft Productivity Added to the Reports Database

(CQ00530604)
Craft productivity with respect to system base was added to the reports database.
This information can be found in the CERATE relation (F – table) in the 8th field

(CEALLOC) for all craft rate records. The CERATE table contains craft rate and
equipment rental records.
Fixed Defect for Excel Contractor Reports with Contractor

Names Containing “\” or “/” Characters
In previous versions, if a contractor name in ACCE contained the forward slash “/”
and/or backward slash “\” character, the worksheet names in any Excel contractor
reports were incorrect. The “/” and “\” are invalid characters in Excel worksheet
names. In V8.8, if a contractor name in ACCE contains any of these characters, then
these characters are replaced with an underscore “_” when naming worksheet in
Excel reports.


There are no new features or enhancements listed for this release.


Aspen Economic Evaluation V8.6 includes the following software fix that further
CQ00527836 Reporter error on Russian and French operating systems

Aspen Icarus Reporter V8.4 includes new features in the following areas:
New "Item Summaries by Contractor" Excel Report

A new report, "Item Summaries by Contractor", is added. In the Aspen Icarus
Reporter GUI, this report can be found at 'Full Import | Capital Cost Reports | Direct
Costs | Item Summaries | By Contractor’ tree view location:
This report is applicable for ACCE users only. To run this report: Select ‘By
Contractor’ report; then click the Run Report button.

New "Installation Details Combined (By Contractor)" Excel
Report
A new report, "Installation Details Combined (By Contractor)", is added. In the
Aspen Icarus Reporter GUI, this report can be found at 'Full Import | Capital Cost
Reports | Direct Costs | Installation Details | Combined (By Contractor)’ tree view
location:

This report applies to ACCE only. To run this report: Select ‘Combined (By
Contractor)’ report; then click the Run Report button.

Excel Report Templates Upgraded from Excel 2003 (.xls) to
Excel 2007 (.xlsx) (CQ00461404)
In V8.4 all the Excel report templates (*.xls file) are upgraded to Excel 2007 (*.xlsx
file).
Old Excel 2003 files New Excel 2007 files

ProjectTemplates.xls ProjectTemplates.xlsx
CivilTemplates.xls CivilTemplates.xlsx
ElecTemplates.xls ElecTemplates.xlsx
EquipTemplates.xls EquipTemplates.xlsx
InstTemplates.xls InstTemplates.xlsx
InsulTemplates.xls InsulTemplates.xlsx
IPACost.xls IPACost.xlsm
PaintTemplates.xls PaintTemplates.xlsx
PipeTemplates.xls PipeTemplates.xlsx
SteelTemplates.xls SteelTemplates.xlsx
Custom reports templates (.xls file) created using Excel 2003 will still be supported
with V8.4 for backward compatibility.
Like all previous versions, ‘TemplName’ column of “Stored Reports” table contains
the name of the workbook that contains the custom report’s template. In V8.2 and
previous versions workbook name is specified without the file extension (.xls). In
V8.4, workbook name can be specified with or without file extension .xlsx or .xlsm.
Specifying Workbook Name without File Extension

If the workbook name is specified without extension then Reporter will look for the
file with the extension in the following order.
.xlsx
.xlsm (ignored if file with .xlsx extension exists)

.xls (ignored if file with .xlsx or .xlsm extension exists).
For example, if Templates directory contains UserTemplates.xlsx,
UserTemplates.xlsm and UserTemplates.xls then by default UserTemplates.xlsx will
be used.
Specifying Workbook Name with File Extension

If workbook name is specified with the file extension then Reporter will always use
this file extensions and ignore the order mentioned above. For example, if user
explicitly specifies UserTemplates.xls then Reporter will use this.
65K Row Limit Has Been Removed For Excel Reports

(CQ00461409)
Support for Microsoft Excel 2003 is discontinued and the maximum limit of 65,000
rows has been removed for Excel reports. New limit supported by Excel 2007 is
1,048,576 rows.
Two New Fields Are Added to the “Stored Reports” Table for
Excel Reports (CQ00502599)
Two new fields (PreRunQueries and PostRunQueries) for pre and post-processing
actions are added to the Stored Reports table. Sometimes a custom report requires
some pre-processing actions (set of queries) before running a particular report. For
example, executing a set of queries which updates or creates custom\temporary
tables prior to running a report. Similarly, some post processing actions (like deleting
data in custom tables, or deleting tables etc.) are required. Currently this can be
achieved using UOD queries but the drawback is users have to remember to run
these queries in correct orders each time they want to run the custom report. There
may be UOD queries that need to be executed only once while others need to be
executed each time a particular report is run.
New fields added to the “Stored Reports” table:
No Column Name Type of Description

. data
23 PreRunQueries Long Text Set of queries ([Query1][Query2]..[QueryN])
that need to be executed before running the
report. As an example, if Query1 and Query2
need to be run before running this report
then this field will have value
[Query1][Query2].
24 PostRunQueries Long Text Set of queries ([Query1][Query2]..[QueryN])
that need to be executed after running the
report. As an example, if Query3 need to be
run after running this report then this field
will have value [Query3].


There are no software fixes for Aspen Icarus Reporter for V8.4
What’s Fixed in Supporting Products

There are no software fixes listed for supporting products in this release.
Energy and Flare

Enhancements in V7.3.2
• New IPA Metrics Excel Report
• A new 'Line Description' column is added to 'Instrumentation Installation Details'
Excel report
• Tubing removed from key quantity reporting
New IPA Metrics Excel Report

A new IPA Metrics Excel report has been added. This report is derived from IPA
Details Cost report and has to be run simultaneously with the ‘IPA Detail Cost’
report.
In the Aspen Icarus Reporter GUI, this report can be found at 'Full Import_Other
Reports_Project_IPA Metrics’ tree view location as shown:
To run this report:

• Select ‘IPA Metrics Report’ along with ‘IPA Details Cost’ report; then click the Run
Report button.

A new ‘Line Description’ column is added to
‘Instrumentation Details’ Excel report
A new column “Line Description” is added to the “Instrumentation Details” Excel
report as shown:
Tubing removed from key quantity reporting

In prior versions, Tubing was incorrectly being considered as a key quantity. After
consultation with clients, this is changed in V7.3.2 and tubing is no longer included
as a key quantity.

Index
1 MIXER 2-10, 2-11

OPEN TOP 2-13
1 SPEED
Agitated thin film evaporator
Hoists (HO) xxvi
12-9
5 Agitators (AG) 1-5
5 SPEED ANCHOR 2-3
Hoists (HO) xxvi, xxx DIRECT 2-2
FIXED PROP 2-4
GEAR DRIVE 2-2
A
HIGH SHEAR 2-7
Above-grade piping MECH-SEAL 2-3
piping plant bulks 18-3, 18-5 PORT-PROP 2-4
Absorber towers 8-3 PULP STOCK 2-4
Absorption towers 8-3 SAN-FIXED 2-8
ABVGR-TANK SAN-PORT 2-9
civil plant bulks 19-2 side entry 2-4
AC/DC Transformer top entry 2-4
electrical plant bulks 22-29 Air Compressors (AC) 1-7
Accelleration CENTRIF-M 3-2
seismic data 19-16 CENTRIF-T 3-2
ACID BRICK packaged unit 3-2, 3-3
Packing, Linings (PAK, LIN) 6-8 RECIP-GAS 3-3
Activated aluminas RECIP-MOTR 3-3
packing 6-4 SINGLE 1-S 3-4
Activated carbon SINGLE 2 S 3-4
pacing materials 28-76 AIR COOLER
packing 6-4 Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-9
Adsorption towers 8-3 AIR DRYER
AERATOR Dryers (AD) 12-10
Water Treatment Systems (WTS) Air Dryers (AD) 1-17
lxxx AIR DRYER 12-10
Agitated falling film Air fan
Evaporators (E) 12-5 AIR COOLER (HE) 5-9
Agitated pan batch dryer ALMNA 28-76
Dryers (D) 12-12 Alumina
Agitated Tanks (AT) 1-5 packing materials 28-76
general nomenclature 2-21 Aluminum
MACH-PULP 2-17 non-ferrous plate materials
38 GlossaryIndex 38-1
ASME 28-9 B
DIN 28-48
BACKFILL
JIS 28-36
earthwork - site development
ANCHOR
25-8
Agitators (AG) 2-3
Baghouse
Anion exchangers
cloth bay xl
DEMINERAL lxxx
Ball
SOFTENING lxxx
Fisher control valve information
Anodes
21-23
electrical plant bulks 22-16
Ball mill
ANSI
Mills (M) 11-10
Centrifugal Pumps (CP) 7-8
BALL MILL
ANSI PLAST
Mills (M) 11-10
BAR
API 610
Screens (VS) lxix
BAROMETRIC
API 610-IL
Condensers (C) 9-2
Base indices
Area
country base
insulation/fireproofing 23-3
US 33-2
Area lighting
BASE-PREP
site development 25-14
AREA-LIGHT
Basic engineering
electrical plant bulks 22-12, 22-
disciplines and wage rates
13
JP 31-18, 31-20
ASPHALT
UK 31-16
site development 25-14
US 31-13, 31-22
Asphalt equipment
BASINS
construction equipment 32-50
drainage - site development 25-5
Asphaltic resin lining 28-73
Basins, catch
ATM SUSPEN
drainage - site development 25-5
Centrifuges (CT) xxxiv
Batch
Atmospheric
solid/liquid storage
Batch dryer
Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-32
Dryers (D) 12-11
Atmospheric tray batch dryer
Tray Dring Systems (TDS) 12-19
Dryers (D) 12-11
Batch tray dryer
ATM-SYSTEM
Tray Drying Systems (TDS) 12-
Tray Drying Systems (TDS) 12-
19
19
BATCH VAC
ATTRITION
Crystallizers (CRY) 12-2
Mills (M) 11-10
Batch vacuum
Attrition mill
Crystallizers (CRY) 12-2
Mills (M) 11-10
BATCH-AUTO
AUTOGENOUS
Mills (M) 11-10
BATCH-BOTM
Autogenous mill
Centrifuges (CT) xxxv
Mills (M) 11-10
BATCH-TOP
Automotive
Centrifuges (CT) xxxvi
Beams
Axial
steel plant bulks 20-21
Gas Compressors (GC) 3-5
BELGR-TANK
2 Index
civil plant bulks 19-2 BRUSH
BELT earthwork - site development
Feeders (FE) xxi 25-7
Belt feeder BS design code
Feeders (FE) xxi ferrous tube materials
Berl saddle high alloy steel 28-29
packing 6-4 low alloy steel 28-28
Berl saddles 28-76 Bubble cap trays 8-3
Bin activator Bucket elevator
Feeders (FE) xxi Conveyors (CO) xv
BIN-ACTVTR Buildings
Feeders (FE) xxi demolish 25-4
BLASTING mill, steel plant bulks 20-17
earthwork - site development BUMPER
25-8 railroads - site development 25-
BLENDER 20
Blenders (BL) 2-26 Bundle runs - pneumatic
Blenders (BL) 1-6 instrumentation plant bulks 21-5
BLENDER 2-26 Buried Depth 18-4
KETTLE 2-27 Buried pipe
RIBBON 2-34, 2-35 piping plant bulks 18-3, 18-16
ROTARY 2-26 BUS DUCT 22-27
ROTARYBOWL 2-27 Butterfly
BOILER Fisher control valve information
Steam Boilers (STB) lxxv 21-23
BORINGS Butyl rubber
earthwork - site development lined steel pipe 18-60
25-7 Butyl rubber lining 28-73
BOT-UNLOAD
Centrifuges (CT) xxxv C
BOX
Furnaces, Process Heaters (FU) CABLE DUCT 22-17
5-37 Cable tray
Boxes electrical plant bulks 22-9
steel plant bulks 20-21 instrumentation plant bulks 21-4
Boxes, junction Cable, data-highway
instrumentation plant bulks 21-5 instrumentation plant bulks 21-9
Bracing Caged ladders 20-20
steel plant bulks 20-21 steel plant bulks 20-5
Brackets CAISSON
steel plant bulks 20-21 piling - site development 25-18
Brass Calcium chloride
non-ferrous plate materials packing materials 28-76
JIS 28-36 Calcium silicate
non-ferrous tube materials insulation materials 23-4
DIN 28-54 CANNED
JIS 28-42 Centrifugal Pumps (CP) 7-12
BREAKER CANNED RTR
electrical plant bulks 22-28 Gear Pumps (GP) 7-19
Bridge crane Carbon
Cranes (CE) xix packing materials 28-76
BRIDGE-CRN Carbon steel
Cranes (CE) xix lining materials 28-73
packing materials 28-77 API 610-IL 7-5
Carpenter 20 CANNED 7-12
ASME non-ferrous FLUME PUMP 7-17
tube materials 28-17 IN LINE 7-14
BS non-ferrous MAG DRIVE 7-10
plate materials 28-24 SAN-PUMP 7-16
DIN non-ferrous Centrifuges (CT) 1-21
plate materials 28-49 ATM SYSPEN xxxiv
tube materials 28-54 BATCH-AUTO xxxiv
JIS non-ferrous BATCH-BOTM xxxv
plate materials 28-37 BATCH-TOP xxxvi
tube materials 28-42 BOT-UNLOAD xxxv
CARTRIDGE DISK xxxvi
Filters (F) xlvi INVERTING xxxix
Cartridge filter RECIP-CONV xxxvi
Filters (F) xlvi SCREEN-BWL xxxviii
Cascade rings 28-77 SCROLL-CON xxxvii
Cast steel SOLID BOWL xxxvii
casting materials 28-75 TOP UNLOAD xxxv
Castable refractories, linings 6-6 CENT-TURBO
Catalyst Fans, Blowers (FN) 3-11
bed reactor, packed 8-8, 8-15 Ceramic
Catch basin packing materials 28-76
drainage - site development 25-5 CERATE Relation 35-17
Cation exchangers Chain drivers
DEMINERAL lxxx variable speed motor reducer 4-4
Cement CHAIN-LINK
lined steel pipe 18-60 fencing - site development 25-11
CENT-BKT-L Chemical lead lining 28-73
Conveyors (CO) xiv, xvii CHEST-CYL
CENT-COMPR Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-36
Refrigeration Units (RU) lxxvii CHEST-MTL
CENTRF-PRE Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-37
Dust Collectors (C) xl CHEST-REC
CENTRIF Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-33
Fans, Blowers (FN) 3-12 Chests, tile
Gas Compressors (GC) 3-5 Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-34
CENTRIF-IG Chutes
Gas Compressors (GC) 3-7 steel plant bulks 20-21
CENTRIF-M Circuit breakers
Air Compressors (AC) 3-2 electrical plant bulks 22-28
CENTRIF-T Civil
Air Compressors (AC) 3-2 code of accounts 34-18
Centrifugal concrete foundations 19-3
Fans, Blowers (FN) 3-12 concrete tanks 19-2
filters structures 19-3
Centrifuges (CT) xxxiv Cladding material
Centrifugal precipitator ASME design code 28-11
Dust Collectors (DC) xl BS design code 28-25
Centrifugal Pumps (CP) 1-11 DIN design code 28-50
ANSI 7-8 JIS design code 28-38
ANSI PLAST 7-11, 7-17 Classified-suspension crystallizer
API 610 7-3 Crystallizers (CRY) 12-3
4 Index
Clear brush Thickeners (T) lxv
earthwork - site development CONC-PAVNG
25-7 site development 25-14
CLEAR-GRUB Concrete
earthwork - site development construction equipment 32-42
25-7 pipe, piping plant bulks 18-16
Clearing tanks, civil plant bulks 19-2
earthwork - site development CONCRETE
25-7 civil plant bulks 19-3
CLOSED-BLT Concrete drainage
Conveyors (CO) ix civil 19-4
CLOTH BAY Condensers (C) 1-13
Dust Collectors (DC) xl BAROMETRIC 9-2
Cloth bay baghouse CONDENSING
Dust Collectors (DC) xl Turbines (TUR) 4-8
CNTRCT Relation 35-21 CONDUIT
COAT WRAP electrical plant bulks 21-3, 22-4
piping plant bulks 18-32 CONE
Coatings Crushers (CR) 11-2
Packing, Linings (PAK, LIN) 6-9 Cone bottom
Code of accounts Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-30
contingencies 34-13, 35-50 CONE BTM
creating 34-8, 34-9 Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-30
equipment and setting 34-15 Cone roof tank (storage)
modifying 34-7 Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-24
output reports 34-10 Conical rotary vacuum dryer
summary reports 34-10 Rotary Dryers (RD) 12-17
Coke Coning 8-4
paking materials 28-76 Construction eqiupment
Columns introduction 32-33
packed 8-8, 8-15 Construction equipment
steel plant bulks 20-2, 20-21 asphalt equipment 32-50
tray towers 8-10, 8-17 automotive 32-34
washers xlv compaction 32-37
Commissioning compressor 32-42
disciplines and wage rates concrete 32-42
JP 31-19, 31-21 crane 32-39
UK 31-17 crane attachment 32-41
US 31-15, 31-23 drilling 32-37
expenses and indirects 31-24, earthmoving 32-35
31-25, 31-26, 31-27, 31-28 electric equipm/tool 32-48
COMPACT hoist 32-49, 32-50
earthwork - site development miscellaneous equipment 32-47
25-8 piping equipment 32-45
Compaction pneumatic port. tool 32-48
construction equipment 32-37 pump 32-48
COMPONENT Relation 35-22 site/office equipment 32-50
Compressor trailer 32-38
construction equipment 32-42 truck 32-34
COMPRGAS welding equipment 32-43, 32-44
Filters (F) lii Construction management
Concentrators disciplines and wage rates
THICKENER JP 31-21
US 31-14, 31-23 COUNT-ROT
CONTAINMNT Agitators (AG) 2-6
civil plant bulks 19-5 Country base
CONT-BKT-L base indices
Conveyors (CO) xv, xvii EU 33-4
Contingencies JP 33-4
code of accounts 34-13, 35-50 ME 33-5
Continuous spray drying system UK 33-3
Dryers (D) 12-12 US 33-2
Control centers Crane
electrical plant bulks 22-28 construction equipment 32-39
Control valve size Crane attachment
piping 18-5 construction equipment 32-41
Controllers, multifunction Cranes (CE) 1-19
instrumentation plant bulks 21-7 BRIDGE-CRN xix
Conveyor belt scale HOIST xix
Scales (S) xxvii hoist trolley xix
Conveyor transfer tower travelling bridge crane xix
steel plant bulks 20-20 CROSS BORE
Conveyors (CO) 1-19 Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-15
CENT-BKT-L xiv, xvii Cross gutter
CLOSED-BLT ix site development 25-14
CONT-BKT-L xv, xvii Crossflow trays 8-3
OPEN BELT viii bubble cap 8-3
PNEUMATIC xii sieve 8-3
ROLLER xiii valve 8-3
S BELTCONV xvi CROSS-GUTT
S VERTICAL xvi site development 25-14
S VIBRATORY xvii CROSSING
sanitary railroads - site development 25-
vertical xvi 20
vibratory xvii Crossing signal
SCREW xiii railroads - site development 25-
VIBRATING xiv 20
COOLING Crude Oil Desalter 10-10, 10-11
Cooling Towers (CTW) lxxiii Crushed limestone
Cooling Towers (CTW) 1-23 packing materials 28-76
COOLING lxxiii Crushed stone
COOLING WP lxxiii packing materials 28-76
factory assembled lxxiii Crushers (CR) 1-15
PACKAGED lxxiii CONE 11-2
COOLING WP GYRATORY 11-2
Cooling Towers (CTW) lxxiii JAW 11-3
Copper PULVERIZER 11-7
ASME non-ferrous REV-HAMR 11-6
tube materials 28-16 ring granulator 11-8
BS non-ferrous rotary breaker 11-7
tube materials 28-30 SAWTOOTH 11-5
DIN non-ferrous single roll 11-4
tube materials 28-54 size reduction 11-5
JIS non-ferrous S-ROLL-HVY 11-5
tube materials 28-42 S-ROLL-LT 11-4
Counter flow trays 8-3 S-ROLL-MED 11-5
6 Index
swing jaw 11-4 DEMOL
CRWSCH Relation 35-18 demolition - site development
CRYOGENIC 25-4
Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-27 DEMOLITION
Cryogenic storage tank demolition - site development
Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-27 25-4
Crystallizers (CRY) 1-16 DERRICK
BATCH VAC 12-2 Flares (FLR) lxxxiv
batch vacuum 12-2 DESIGN Relation 35-13
classified-suspension 12-3 Desorption towers 8-3
growth 12-3 Desulferization reactors
MECHANICAL 12-2 packed 8-8, 8-15
mechanical scraped-surface Detail engineering
crystallizer 12-3 disciplines and wage rates
OSLO 12-3 UK 31-16
scraped surface 12-3 US 31-13, 31-22
CSTCRL Relation 35-18, 35-19 DETAILS Relation 35-10
CURB DEWATERING
site development 25-14 drainage - site development 25-5
Curb and gutter Dewatering wells
site development 25-14 drainage - site development 25-6
CUSSPC Relation 35-20 DHT DESALTER
CUT-FILL Horizontal Tanks (VT) 10-10
earthwork - site development DIAPHRAGM
25-8 Piston, Other Positive
CYCLONE Displacement Pumps (P) 7-22
Dust Collectors (DC) xlii DIKE
CYLINDER earthwork - site development
Heating Units (HU) lxxvi 25-7
Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-13 DIKE-MEMBR
Cylindrical chests civil plant bulks 19-5, 19-6
Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-36 DIRECT
Rotary Dryers (RD) 12-17
D Direct contact heat exchanger
tower 8-21
Data-highway cable Direct steam heat module
instrumentation plant bulks 21-9 sanitary 5-21
DEEP-ANODE Discharge elevator
electrical plant bulks 22-16 Conveyors (CO) xiv
DEFLAKE-DK DISCNCT SW 22-28
Stock Treatment (ST) 11-13 DISK
Deflakers Centrifuges (CT) xxxvi
Stock Treatment (ST) Disk filter
concentric conical type 11-13 Filters (F) xlvii
plate type 11-13 DISPOSAL
DEMINERAL demolition - site development
Water Treatment Systems (WTS) 25-4
lxxx Distillation towers 8-2
Demineralizers Ditching
packed towers 8-8, 8-15 earthwork - site development
Demineralizing system 25-10
Water Treatment Systems (WTS) DOUBLE ATM
lxxx Drum Dryers (DD) 12-14
Double Diameter Towers (DDT) 1- ELC-L-VOLT xliv
12 MULT-CYCLO xliii
PACKED 8-8 VENTURI SC xliv
TRAYED 8-10 WASHERS xlv
Double-arm
Kneaders (K) 2-29 E
Mixers (MX) 2-31
Dowtherm unit Earth (dirt)
Heating Units (HU) lxxvi packing materials 28-76
Drain field Earthmoving
drainage - site development 25-5 construction equipment 32-35
Drainage EARTHWORK
civil 19-4 earthwork - site development
DRAINAGE 25-8
drainage - site development 25-6 Ebonite
DRAINS lined steel pipe 18-60
drainage - site development 25-5 Ejectors (E) 1-13
Drilling Ejectors (EJ)
construction equipment 32-37 SINGLE STG 9-3
DRUM TWO STAGE 9-3
Flakers (FL) 11-9 EL6 21-5
Drum Dryers (DD) 1-18 ELC-H-VOLT
DOUBLE ATM 12-14 Dust Collectors (DC) xliii
S-COOKCOOL 12-15 ELC-L-VOLT
SINGLE ATM 12-14 Dust Collectors (DC) xliv
single atmospheric 12-14 ELEC-TRAY
SINGLE VAC 12-15 electrical plant bulks 22-9
vacuum rotary 12-15 Electrical
Drum filter cable tray 22-9
Filters (F) xlix circuit breakers 22-28
Dryers (D) 1-17 code of accounts 34-20
agitated pan batch 12-12 construction equipment 32-48
atmospheric tray-type batch 12- galvanic anode 22-16
11 ground grid 22-12
continuous spray system 12-12 group of anodes in shallow
PAN 12-12 surface bed 22-16
SPRAY 12-12 motor control center 22-28
VAC-TRAY 12-11 potential measurement test
vacuum tray-type batch 12-11 station 22-16
DUCT RD rigid conduit 21-3, 22-4
piping plant bulks 18-16 solar panel 22-17
DUCT SQ tracing (existing equipment) 22-
piping plant bulks 18-17 10
Ductwork tracing (existing piping run) 22-
piping 18-16 10
DUPLEX transformer/rectifier 22-17
Piston, Other Positive uninterupted power supply 22-29
Displacement Pumps (P) 7-21 Electrical Generators (EG) 1-24
Dust Collectors (DC) 1-22 PORTABLE lxxviii
CENTRF-PRE xl TURBO-GEN lxxviii
CLOTH BAY xl Electrical Motors (MOT) 1-8
CYCLONE xlii ENCLOSED 4-3
ELC-H-VOLT xliii explosion proof 4-3
8 Index
EXP-PROOF 4-3 LONG TUBE 12-6
OPEN 4-2 long tube rising film 12-6
SYNCHRON 4-2 long tube vertical 12-7
Synchronous motors 4-3 standard horizontal tube 12-8
TEFC 4-3 STAND-HOR 12-8
TEWAC 4-3 STAND-VERT 12-7
VARY-SPEED 4-4 Excavation
Electronic signal wire earthwork - site development
instrumentation plant bulks 21-4 25-9
Elevated access platforms machine 25-10
steel plant bulks 20-18 manual 25-9
Elevators, Lifts (EL) 1-19 Exchange resin
FREIGHT xx demineralizer lxxx
PASSENGER xx packed towers 8-8, 8-15
Ellipsoidal towers 8-5 Packing (PAK) 6-8
Elliptical towers 8-5 EXPL-DEMOL
EMER LIGHT 22-17 demolition - site development
Emergency diesel generator 25-4
electrical plant bulks 22-29 Explosion-proof motors
Emergency eyewash and shower Electrical Motors (MOT) 4-3
units 18-38 EXP-PROOF
Emergency light Electrical Motors (MOT) 4-3
electrical plant bulks 22-17 Extraction towers 8-3
EM-PWR-SET EXTRUDER
electrical plant bulks 22-29 Mixers (MX) 2-30
ENCLOSED Eyewash
Electrical Motors (MOT) 4-3 WSHWR 18-38
Engineering management
disciplines and wage rates F
JP 31-21
UK 31-17 Fabric filters
US 31-14, 31-23 Dust Collectors (DC) xl
Epoxy resin lining 28-73 Fabricated plate items
EQPT-TRACE steel plant bulks 20-21
electrical plant bulks 22-10 FABR-PLATE
EQRENT Relation 35-19 steel plant bulks 20-21
Equipment and setting FALL-FILM
code of accounts 34-14, 34-15 Evaporators (E) 12-5
Equipment model library 27-4 Fans, Blowers (FN) 1-7
Equipment SUBTYPE 35-71 CENTRIF 3-12
EROSION CENT-TURBO 3-11
landscaping - site development general purpose blower 3-13
25-13 heavy duty, low noise blower 3-
Erosion control 11
landscaping - site development PROPELLER 3-13
25-13 ROT-BLOWER 3-13
EU country base VANEAXIAL 3-14
base indices 33-2 Feeders (FE) 1-20
Evaporators (E) 1-17 BELT xxi
agitated falling film 12-5 BIN-ACTVTR xxi
FALL-FILM 12-5 ROTARY xxi
FORCED CIR 12-5 SACK-DUMP xxiv
forced circulation 12-6 SAN-BELT xxv
SAN-SCREW xxiv FIREP-SSTL
VIBRATING xxii insulation plant bulks 23-2, 23-3
FENCE-WOOD FITSPC.DAT file 18-10
fencing - site development 25-11 Fitting specs file 18-10
FENCING FIXED PROP
fencing - site development 25-11 Agitators (AG) 2-4
Fiber optic cables Mixers (MX) 2-31
instrumentation plant bulks 21-9 Fixed tube
Field erected vessels Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-22
floating roof tanks 10-25 FIXED-T-S
gas holders 10-29 Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-22, 5-23
lifter roof tanks 10-24 Flakers (FL) 1-15
open top tanks 10-25 DRUM 11-9
storage tanks 10-25 Flares (FLR)
tray towers 8-10, 8-17 DERRICK lxxxiv
Field office diameter of flare tip lxxxiii
disciplines and wage rates emmisivity of flame lxxxiv
JP 31-18, 31-20 GUYED lxxxvi
UK 31-16 height of flare stack lxxxiii
US 31-13, 31-22 HORIZONTAL lxxxviii
Filter introduction lxxxiii
presses SELF-SUPP lxxxvii
PLATE+FRAM xlvii STORAGE xc
Screens (VS) lxix THRM-OX LC lxxxix
Filters vapor control xc
Sediment Removal 1-23 Flat roof tank (storage)
Filters (F) 1-22 Vertical Tank (VT) 10-26
CARTRIDGE xlvi FLO PANEL
COMPRGAS lii piping plant bulks 18-39
METAL TRAP liii FLOAT-HEAD
PLATE+FRAM xlvii Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-25,
RECL REEL liii 5-26
RECL-REEL liii Floating roof tank (storage)
ROTY-DISK xlvii Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-24
ROTY-DRUM xlix Flue gas scrubbing systems
SAN AIR liv packed towers 8-8, 8-15
SAN STEAM lvii Fluid heat tracing
SAN STRAIN lviii existing equipment 18-21
SAN-PIPE lv existing pipe runs 18-21
SAN-PRESS lvi Fluidized bed reactors
SAN-STRAIN lviii demineralizers (WTS) lxxx
SEWAGE l SPHERE 10-21
SPARKLER l SPHEROID 10-23
TUBULAR li WASHERS (DC) xlv
WHITEWATER lii FLUME PUMP
Fin fan coolers Centrifigal Pumps (CP) 7-17
AIR COOLER (HE) 5-9 Foam glass
Finned double-pipe heat exchanger insulation materials 23-4
5-15 FORCED CIR
Fireclay Evaporators (E) 12-5
lining materials 28-71 Forced circulation
Fireproofing Evaporators (E) 12-6
insulation plant bulks 23-2 Foundation subdrain
10 Index
drainage - site development 25-5 Agitators (AG) 2-2
Foundations Gear Pumps (GP) 1-11
civil plant bulks 19-3 CANNED RTR 7-19
Frame filters (F) xlvii GEAR 7-19
Free standing wall General electrical
fencing - site development 25-11 electrical plant bulks 22-10
Freight General service pumps 7-2
code of accounts 34-13, 35-49 Globe
FREIGHT Fisher control valve information
Elevators, Lifts (EL) xx 21-23
Freight elevator Grading, site development
Elevators, Lifts (EL) xx landscaping 25-13
Froude number roads - slabs - paving 25-14
Agitated Tanks (AT) 2-21 GRATE
Furnaces, Process Heaters (FU) 1- steel plant bulks 20-20
10 Grating
BOX 5-37 GRATE, steel plant bulks 20-20
BOX - continued. 5-37 Gravel
HEATER 5-38 packing materials 28-76
PYROLYSIS 5-38 GRND-GRID
PYROLYSIS - continued. 5-39 electrical plant bulks 22-12
REFORMER 5-39 Ground grid
VERTICAL 5-40 electrical plant bulks 22-12
Grout
G CONCRETE - civil plant bulks 19-
3
GALLERY Growth crystallizer
steel plant bulks 20-18 Crystallizers (CRY) 12-3
Galvanic anode Grubbing
electrical plant bulks 22-16 earthwork - site development
Gas 25-7
standard equations for piping Gunite
diameters 18-43 lining materials 28-72
GAS GUNITE
Turbines (TUR) 4-9 earthwork - site development
Gas absorbers 25-7
demineralizer lxxx Gunite slope protection
packed columns 8-8, 8-15 earthwork - site development
Gas Compressors (GC) 1-7 25-7
axial 3-5 Gunning mixes, linings 6-6
CENTIFG-IG 3-7 Gutter (and curb)
CENTRIF 3-5 site development 25-14
inline 3-5 GUYED
RECIP-GAS 3-10 Flares (FLR) lxxxiv, lxxxvi
RECIP-MOTR 3-9 GYRATORY
GAS HOLDER Crushers (CR) 11-2
Gas turbine 4-8
H
GATES
fencing - site development 25-12 Hand excavation
GEAR earthwork - site development
Gear Pumps (GP) 7-19 25-9
GEAR DRIVE HAND GT
Hoists (HO) xxvi Furnaces, Process Heaters (FU)
Hand hoists 5-38
Hoists (HO) xxvi HEATER-ELC
HAND PT Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-13
Hoists (HO) xxvi HEATER-STM
HAND-EXCV Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-13
earthwork - site development Heating Units (HU) 1-24
25-9 CYLINDER lxxvi
Hangers dowtherm unit lxxvi
piping plant bulks 18-3 Hemispherical towers 8-5
Hastelloy Hemispheriod
non-ferrous plate materials speheroid vertical tanks 10-23
ASME 28-9 High alloy steel
DIN 28-48 ferrous tube materials
JIS 28-36 BS 28-29
non-ferrous tube materials High density polyethylene pipe 18-
ASME 28-17 39
DIN 28-54 High density stock pump
HAULING Piston, Other Positive
earthwork - site development Displacement Pumps (P) 7-24
25-9 High energy level process interface
HDPE PIPE 18-39 units
Head design, towers/columns 8-6 instrumentation plant bulks 21-8
Heat Exchanger (HE) High pressure gas/liquid storage
MULTI-P+F 5-20 Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-21
Heat Exchangers (HE) 1-9 HIGH SHEAR
AIR COOLER 5-9, 5-19 Agitators (AG) 2-7
CORRUGATED 5-18, 5-19 HIGH SPEED
CROSS BORE 5-15 Mixers (MX) 2-34
FIXED-T-S - continued 5-22, 5- History module 21-6
23 HL-PIU
FLOAT-HEAD - continued 5- instrumentation plant bulks 21-8
25, 5-26 Hoist
HEATER-ELC 5-13 construction equipment 32-49,
HEATER-STM 5-13 32-50
HOT WATER 5-19 HOIST
JACKETED 5-14 Cranes (CE) xix
MULTI-P+F 5-20 Hoists (HO) xxvi
ONE SCREW 5-17 Hoist trolley
PLAT+FRAM 5-12 Cranes (CE) xix
PLATE FIN 5-11, 5-12 Hoists (HO) 1-20
PRE-ENGR 5-8 1 SPEED xxvi
PRE-ENGR - continued. 5-8 5 SPEED xxvi, xxx
SHELL+TUBE 5-16 HAND GT xxvi
SPIRAL PLT 5-17 HAND PT xxvi
SUC-HEATER 5-17 HOIST xxvi
TEMA-EXCH 5-2 Home office
TWO SCREW 5-16 disciplines and wage rates
U-TUBE 5-34 JP 31-18, 31-20
WASTE HEAT 5-18 UK 31-16
Heat tracing Honeywell TDC 2000/3000 process
piping plant bulks 18-21 control system 21-7
HEATER HORIZONTAL
12 Index
Flares (FLR) lxxxviii Honeywell TDC 2000/3000
Horizontal plate filters xlvii process control system 21-7
Horizontal Tanks (HT) 1-13 Honeywell TDC3000 21-6
DHT DESALTER 10-10 junction boxes 21-5
JACKETED 10-5 multifunction controllers 21-7
MULTI WALL 10-7 operator center 21-6
SAN-TANK 10-12 panel 21-4
Hortonspheriod pneumatic multi-tube bundle
spheroid vertical tanks 10-23 runs 21-5
HOT TAP signal wire 21-4
piping plant bulks 18-32 SUBTYPE 35-71, 35-76
HOT WATER thermocouple wire 21-5
Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-19 INST-TRAY
HUMMER instrumentation plant bulks 21-4
Screens (VS) lxviii INST-WIRE
Hydrogenation reactors instrumentation plant bulks 21-4
packed columns 8-8, 8-15 INSUL-AREA
Hydrotreaters insulation plant bulks 23-3
CYLINDER 10-13 Insulation
code of accounts 34-21
I existing piping 23-3
existing surface area 23-3
Immersion heaters fireproofing 23-2
HEATER-ELC (HE) 5-13 piping (existing) 23-3
IN LINE structural steel (existing) 23-2
Centrifugal Pumps (CP) 7-14 SUBTYPE 35-81
Incoloy Intalox saddles
tube materials packing materials 28-76
ASME 28-16 introduction 1-2
BS 28-30 INVERTING
DIN 28-54 Centrifuges (CT) xxxix
Inconel Ion exchangers
clad plate materials demineralizer lxxx
ASME 28-11 Iron
JIS 28-38 casting materials 28-74
tube materials Item symbols
ASME 28-16 process equipment 1-3
BS 28-30
DIN 28-54
J
JIS 28-42
INDIRECT JACKETED
Rotary Dryers (RD) 12-17 Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-14
INDIRECT Relation 35-23 Horizontal Tanks (HT) 10-5
Industrial gate Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-16
fencing - site development 25-12 Jacketed rotary vacuum dryer
Inline Rotary Dryers (RD) 12-17
Gas Compressors (GC) 3-5 Jackhammer
INST-PANEL earthwork - site development
instrumentation plant bulks 21-4 25-9
Instrumentation JAC-VACUUM
cable tray 21-4 Rotary Dryers (RD) 12-17
fiber optic cables 21-9 JAW
Crushers (CR) 11-3
J-HAMMER Lighting
earthwork - site development (area) electrical plant bulks 22-
25-9 12
JIS design code Limestone
ferrous plate materials packing materials 28-76
low alloy steel 28-33 Line siding crossing
JUNC-BOX railroads - site development 25-
instrumentation plant bulks 21-5 20
Junction boxes Lining materials
instrumentation plant bulks 21-5 fireclay 28-71
gunite 28-72
K Linings
acid brick 6-6, 6-8
KETTLE brick 6-6, 6-9
Blenders (BL) 2-27 castable refractories 6-6, 6-9
Reboilers (RB) 5-30 firebrick 6-9
Kettle reboiler fluorocarbon 6-6
Reboilers (RB) 5-30 glass 6-9, 28-73
Kneaders (K) 1-6 gunning mixes 6-6, 6-8
STATIONARY 2-29 introduction 6-7
TILTING 2-29 lead 6-7
Kynar Lead 6-7
lined steel pipe 18-60 organic 6-9
Kynar sheet lining 28-73 refractory brick 6-6
resin 6-7
L rubber 6-7
zinc 6-7
LADDER
Liquid
standard equations for pipe
Ladders 20-20
diameters 18-43
caged 20-5, 20-20
Live bottom
LANDSCAPE
landscaping - site development
LIVE BTM
25-13
Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-32, 10-33
LAUNDER RD
LL-PIU
piping plant bulks 18-32
instrumentation plant bulks 21-8
LAUNDER SQ
LNG Tank 10-40
piping plant bulks 18-32
LONG TUBE
Launders
Evaporators (E) 12-6
piping 18-32
Long tube rising film
LD STOCK
Screens (VS) lxviii
Long tube vertical
Lead
linings 6-7
Low alloy steel
Level
plate materials
sensor loop descriptions 21-14
JIS 28-33
Libraries
tube materials
equipment model 27-4
BS 28-28
unit cost 27-4
Low consistency stock pump
LIFT
Low energy level process interface
Lifter roof tank (storage)
units
instrumentation plant bulks 21-8
14 Index
Lump sum quotation steel plant bulks 20-17
site development Mills (M) 1-16
demolition 25-4 ATTRITION 11-10
drainage 25-6 attrition mill 11-10
earthwork 25-8 AUTOGENOUS 11-10
landscaping 25-13 autogenous mill 11-10
railroads 25-20 ball mill 11-10
BALL MILL 11-10
M MIKRO-PULV 11-11
rod charger 11-12
Machine excavation rod mill 11-11
earthwork - site development ROD MILL 11-11
25-10 ROD-CHARGR 11-12
MACH-PULP ROLLER 11-11
Agitated Tanks (AT) 2-17 roller mill 11-11
MAG DRIVE Mineral wool
Centrifugal Pumps (CP) 7-10 insulation materials 23-4
Manholes Miscellaneous equipment
drainage - site development 25-5 construciton equipment 32-47
towers 8-5 MISC-STEEL
Materials of construction steel plant bulks 20-21
towers 8-6 MIXER
MCC Agitated Tanks (AT) 2-10, 2-11
electrical plant bulks 22-28 Mixers (MX) 1-6
ME Country Base 31-12, 31-22 EXTRUDER 2-30
Mechanical FIXED PROP 2-31
seal agitators, MECH-SEAL (AG) HIGH SPEED 2-34
2-3 MULLER EXT 2-30
MECHANICAL PAN 2-30
Crystallizers (CRY) 12-2 PISTON HOM 2-36
Refigeration Units (RU) lxxvii PORT-PROP 2-31
Vacuum Pumps (VP) 9-7 SHEAR HOM 2-37
Mechanical booster 9-7 SIGMA 2-31
Mechanical oil-sealed vacuum SPIRAL RIB 2-32
pump 9-7 STATIC 2-32
mechanical scraped-surface TWO-ROLL 2-33
crystallizer Molecular sieve
Crystallizers (CRY) 12-3 packing materials 28-77
MECH-BOOST Monel
Vacuum Pumps (VP) 9-7 tube materials
MECH-SEAL ASME 28-16
Agitators (AG) 2-3 DIN 28-54
Mercalli Number JIS 28-42
seismic data 19-16 Monolithic 6-8
METAL TRAP Motion
Filters (F) liii axial, radial, vibration
Metalic chests sensor loop descriptions 21-17,
Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-37 21-18, 21-19, 21-20
MIKRO-PULV Motor control center
Mills (M) 11-11 electrical plant bulks 22-28
Mill building MULCH
steel plant bulks 20-17 landscaping - site development
MILL-BLDG 25-13
MULLER EXT Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-17
Mixers (MX) 2-30 OPEN
MULT-CYCLO Electrical Motors (MOT) 4-2
Dust Collectors (DC) xliii OPEN BELT
MULTI WALL Conveyors (CO) viii
Horizontal Tanks (HT) 10-7 Open excavations
Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-19 drainage - site development 25-5
Multifunction controllers Open structure
instrumentation plant bulks 21-7 steel plant bulks 20-2
MULTI-P+F OPEN TOP
Heat Exchanger (HE) 5-20 Agitated Tanks (AT) 2-13
Multiple Diameter Trayed or Packed Open top tank (storage)
8-26 Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-25
Operator center
N instrumentation plant bulks 21-6
OPN-STL-ST
Near-atmospheric liquid steel plant bulks 20-2
storage OSLO
Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-25 Crystallizers (CRY) 12-3
Neoprene rubber OTHER
lined steel pipe 18-60 Packing, Linings (PAK, LIN) 6-9
Neoprene sheet lining 28-73
NEWCOA Relation 35-16
P
Nickel
casting materials 28-74 PACKAGED
plate materials Cooling Towers (CTW) lxxiii
BS 28-23, 28-24 PACKED
JIS 28-37 Double Diameter Towers (DDT)
tube materials 8-8
ASME 28-16 Single Diameter Towers (TW) 8-
BS 28-30 15
DIN 28-54 Packing
JIS 28-42 activated aluminas 6-4
NON-COND activated carbon 6-4
Turbines (TUR) 4-8 berl saddle 6-4
Non-condensing turbine 4-8 PACKING
Non-reversible hammermill Packing, Linings (PAK, LIN) 6-8
Crushers (CR) 11-6 Packing, Linings (PAK, LIN) 1-10
Norman-type mixer ACID BRICK 6-8
Mixers (MX) 2-34 activated aluminas 6-4
Nozzles activated carbon 6-4
towers 8-5 Berl saddle 6-4
Number of walkways Intalox saddle 6-3
AIR COOLER 5-10 OTHER 6-9
PACKING 6-8
O Pall ring 6-3
Raschig rings 6-3
OIL C BRKR 22-27 ring type packing 6-2
OIL-WATER Saddle type 6-2
Separation Equipment (SE) lxiv Packings
ONE DECK tower internals 8-4
Screens (VS) lxvii Paint
ONE SCREW code of accounts 34-22
16 Index
grades 24-2 drainage - site development 25-5
Pall rings 28-76 DUCT RD 18-16
introduction 6-3 DUCT SQ 18-17
packing materials 8-4 ductwork 18-16
PAN fluid heat tracing 18-21
Dryers (D) 12-12 hot tap 18-32
Mixers (MX) 2-30 launders 18-32
Panel paint 24-2
instrumentation plant bulks 21-4 PIPE TRACE 18-21
solar, electrical plant bulks 22-17 Pipeline 35-82, 35-83
PANEL BRD 22-19 process ductwork 18-16
PASSENGER tracing existing piping run 22-10
Elevators, Lifts (EL) xx transfer lines 18-3
PAVING UTIL PIPE 18-14, 18-16
site development 25-16 utility headers 18-14
Permits well head 18-34
code of accounts 34-13, 35-50 yard pipe runs 18-3
PF-CORRECT Piston, Other Positive Displacement
Power factor connection Pumps (P) 1-12
capacitor 22-30 DIAPHRAGM 7-22
Piles, site development DUPLEX 7-21
piling 25-18 ROTARY 7-23
PILING SIMPLEX 7-21
piling - site development 25-19 SLURRY 7-23
Pipe TRIPLEX 7-22
supports, steel plant bulks 20- PKG-TRANSF
10, 20-11 electrical plant bulks 22-29
PIPE PLANTING
piling - site development 25-18 landscaping - site development
Pipe rack 25-13
steel plant bulks 20-5 PLAST TANK
pipe routing type 18-10 Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-28
Pipe runs PLAT+FRAM
piping plant bulks 18-3 Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-12
Pipe strainer, sanitary Plate
Filters (F) lviii and frame filters (F) xlvii
PIPE TRACE and frame heat exchanger 5-12
piping plant bulks 18-21 and frame heat exchanger,
PIPEDATA.SET file 18-10 sanitary 5-20
Pipeline reactors spiral heat exchanger 5-17
jackedted pipe heat exchanger steel plant bulks 20-21
(HE) 5-14 towers, tray towers 8-17
PIPE-SUPPT PLATE FIN
steel plant bulks 20-10, 20-11 Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-11, 5-12
PIPE-TRACE PLATE+FRAM
electrical plant bulks 22-10 Filters (F) xlvii
Piping PLATFORM
above-grade 18-3, 18-5 steel plant bulks 20-18
buried 18-3 Plunger pump, reciprocating
buried concrete 18-16 Piston, Other Positive
coat and wrap 18-32 Displacment Pumps (P) 7-23
construction equipment 32-45 PNEUMATIC
control valve size 18-5 Conveyors (CO) xii
Pneumatic portable tool Process interface units
construction equipment 32-48 high enery level 21-8
PNU-TUBING low enery level 21-8
instrumentation plant bulks 21-5 Procurement
POLE LINE 22-28 disciplines and wage rates
POLE-LINE JP 31-21
electrical plant bulks 17-6, 22- UK 31-17
29, 22-30 US 31-14, 31-23
Polypropylene PROJDATA Relations 35-15
lined steel pipe 18-60 PROPELLER
packing materials 28-76 Fans, Blowers (FN) 3-13
POND PULP STOCK
earthwork - site development Agitators (AG) 2-4
25-7 Separation Equipment (SE) lxii
Porcelain Pulse type units
packing materials 28-76, 28-77 Dust Collectors (DC) xl
PORTABLE PULVERIZER
Electrical Generators (EG) lxxviii Crushers (CR) 11-7
PORT-PROP Pumps
Agitators (AG) 2-4 casting materials 28-75
Mixers (MX) 2-31 construction equipment 32-48
Potential measurement test station oil-sealed 9-7
electrical plant bulks 22-16 water-sealed 9-7
POT-TEST PVC
electrcial plant bulks 22-16 packing materials 28-77
POURED PYROLYSIS
piling - site development 25-18 Furnaces, Process Heaters (FU)
Power factor connection capacitor 5-38, 5-39
22-30
Power function R
Agitated Tanks (AT) 2-21
Power number RAILROADS
Agitated Tanks (AT) 2-21 railroads - site development 25-
PRECAST 20
piling - site development 25-18 Raschig rings 28-77
Precast concrete piles introduction 6-3
piling - site development 25-18 RAYMOND
PRE-ENGR piling - site development 25-18
Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-8 RCON PIPE
Pressure piping plant bulks 18-16
drum Reactors
Horizontal Tanks (HT) 10-2 CYLINDER, Vertical Tanks (VT)
vessel 10-13
Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-13 jacketed horizontal vessel,
PRESSURE JACKETED (HT) 10-5
Screens (VS) lxix jacketed vertical vessel,
Process ductwork JACKETED (VT) 10-16
piping 18-16 OPEN TOP
piping plant bulks 18-16, 18-17 AgitatedTanks (AT) 2-13
Process equipment packed towers 8-8, 8-15
code of accounts 34-14 tray towers 8-10, 8-17
item symbols 1-3 Reboilers (RB) 1-10
symbols 1-3 KETTLE 5-30
18 Index
KETTLE - continued 5-30 packing materials 28-77
THERMOSIPH 5-32 Resistance temperature detector
U-TUBE 5-33 instrumentation plant bulks 21-8
Receivers Resurfacing
CYLINDER, Vertical Tanks (VT) site development 25-15
10-13 RETAIN
RECIP-CONV earthwork - site development
Centrifuges (CT) xxxvi 25-8
RECIP-GAS Retaining wall
Air Compressors (AC) 3-3 earthwork - site development
Gas Compressors (GC) 3-10 25-8
RECIP-MOTR REV-HAMR
Air Compressors (AC) 3-3 Crushers (CR) 11-6
Gas Compressors (GC) 3-9 Reynolds number
Reciprocating Agitated Tanks (AT) 2-21
Air Compressors (AC) 3-3 Ribbon blenders
Gas Compressors (GC) 3-9, 3-10 SPIRAL RIB
RECL REEL Mixers (MX) 2-32
Filters (F) liii Rietz single screw
RECL-REEL ONE SCREW (HE) 5-16
Filters (F) liii Ring granulator
Rectangular chests Crushers (CR) 11-8
Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-34 Rings
Rectifier Inert 6-2
electrical plant bulks 22-17 Intalox saddle 6-3
RECTIFIER introduction 6-2
electrical plant bulks 22-17 Pall, packing materials 6-3
Recuperative thermal oxidizer Raschig, packing materials 6-3
Flares (FLR) lxxxix Saddle type 6-2
REFINER RIP-ROCK
Stock Treatment (ST) 11-13 earthwork - site development
Refiners 25-9
Stock Treatment (ST) 11-13 Rock excavation
REFORMER earthwork - site development
Furnaces, Process Heaters (FU) 25-9
5-39 Rod charger
Refrigeration Units (RU) 1-24 Mills (M) 11-12
CENT-COMPR lxxvii Rod crushers
centrifugal compression lxxvii Crushers (CR) 11-12
MECHANICAL lxxvii Rod mill
mechanical compression lxxvii Mills (M) 11-11
Relations 35-9 ROD MILL
Relations 35-9 Mills (M) 11-11
Relief ROD-CHARGR
standard equations for pipe Mills (M) 11-12
diameter 18-44 ROLLER
REMARKS Relation 35-14 Conveyors (CO) xiii
REMOVAL Mills (M) 11-11
demolition - site development Roller mill
25-4 Mills (M) 11-11
REPGRP Relation 35-20 Roofing
Resins steel plant bulks 20-21
demineralizer lxxx ROTARY
Blenders (BL) 2-26 SAN STEAM
Feeders (FE) xxi Filters (F) lvii
piston, other positive SAN STRAIN
displacement pumps (P) 7-23 Filters (F) lviii
Piston, Other Positive Sand
Displacement Pumps (P) 7-23 packing materials 28-77
Rotary breaker SAN-FIXED
Crushers (CR) 11-7 Agitators (AG) 2-8
Rotary double-cone Sanitary bulk bag unloader
Blenders (BL) 2-26 Feeders (FE) xxiv
Rotary drum Sanitary centrifugal pump
Blenders (BL) 2-26 Centrifugal Pumps (CP) 7-16
Rotary drum cooker-cooler Sanitary corrugated double pipe
Drum Dryers (DD) 12-15 exchanger
Rotary Dryers (RD) 1-18 Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-18
Conical rotary vacuum 12-17 Sanitary counter-rotating agitator
DIRECT 12-17 Agitators (AG) 2-6
INDIRECT 12-17 Sanitary direct steam heat module
Jacketed rotary vacuum 12-17 Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-21
JAC-VACUUM 12-17 Sanitary dumper
VACUUM 12-17 Feeders (FE) xxiii
Rotary vane feeder Sanitary filter press
Feeders (FE) xxi Filters (F) lvi
ROTARYBOWL Sanitary fixed propeller/turbine
Blenders (BL) 2-27 mixer
ROT-BLOWER Agitators (AG) 2-8
Fans, Blowers (FN) 3-13 Sanitary flow diversion panel
ROTY-DISK piping plant bulks 18-39
Filters (F) xlvii Sanitary fluming pump
ROTY-DRUM Centrifigal Pumps (CP) 7-17
Filters (F) xlix Sanitary fluming reclaim reel
RTABLE Relation 35-24, 35-35 RECL-REEL liii
RTD 21-8 Sanitary highshear homogenizing
resistance temperature detector agitator
21-8 Agitators (AG) 2-7
Rubber Sanitary incline conveyor
linings 6-7, 6-9 Conveyors (CO) xvii
Packing, Linings (PAK, LIN) 6-9 Sanitary in-line metal trap
Runs of pipe Filters (F) liii
piping plant bulks 18-3 Sanitary kettle blender
Blenders (BL) 2-27
S Sanitary multi-zone plate+frame
exchanger
S INCLINE Heat Exchanger (HE) 5-20
Conveyors (CO) xvii Sanitary pipe filter
S VIBRATRY Filters (F)
Conveyors (CO) xvii SAN-PIPE lv
Saddle Sanitary pipe strainer
Berl 6-4, 8-4 Filters (F) lviii
Intalox 6-3, 8-4 Sanitary piston-type homogenizer
packing 6-2 Mixers (MX) 2-36
SAN AIR Sanitary portable propeller
Filters (F) liv Agitatators (AG) 2-9
20 Index
Sanitary process equipment Sanitary shear pump homogenizer
Agitators (AG) SHEAR HOM 2-37
COUNT-ROT 2-6 Sanitary vertical cylindrical vessel
HIGH SHEAR 2-7 Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-39
SAN-FIXED 2-8 Sanitary vibratory conveyor
SAN-PORT 2-9 Conveyors (CO) xvii
Blenders (BL) Sanitary, multi-shell, staggered
KETTLE 2-27 blender
MSHELSTAG 2-28 Blenders (BL) 2-28
ROTARYBOWL 2-27 SAN-PIPE
Centrifugal Pumps (CP) Filters (F) lv
FLUME PUMP 7-17 SAN-PRESS
SAN-PUMP 7-16 Filters (F) lvi
Conveyors (CO) SAN-PUMP
S INCLINE xvii Centrifugal Pumps (CP) 7-16
S VIBRATRY xvii SAN-SCREW
Drum Dryers (DD) Feeders (FE) xxiv
S-COOKCOOL 12-15 SAN-TANK
Feeders (FE) Horizontal Tanks (VT) 10-12
DUMPER xxiii Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-39
SACK-DUMP xxiv Saran
SAN-BELT xxv lined steel pipe 18-60
SAN-SCREW xxiv SAWTOOTH
Filters (F) Crushers (CR) 11-5
METAL TRAP liii SCAFFOLD
RECL-REEL liii civil plant bulks 19-4
SAN-PIPE lv Scaffolding
SAN-PRESS lvi civil labor 19-4
SAN-STRAIN lviii Scales (S) 1-21
Heat Exchangers (HE) S-COOKCOOL
CORRUGATED 5-18 Drum Dryers (DD) 12-15
HOT WATER 5-19 Scraped surface crystallizer
MULTI-P+F 5-20 Crystallizers (CRY) 12-3
STM-HE-MOD 5-21 SCRAPER LR
Horizontal Tanks (HT) piping plant bulks 18-33
SAN-TANK 10-12 Screen bowl
Mixers (MX) Centrifuges (CT) xxxviii
HIGH SPEED 2-34 SCREEN-BWL
PISTON HOM 2-36 Centrifuges (CT) xxxviii
RIBBON 2-34, 2-35 Screens (VS) 1-23
SHEAR HOM 2-37 BAR lxix
Piston, Other Positive HUMMER lxviii
Displacement Pumps (P) LD STOCK lxviii
AIR DIAPH 7-26 ONE DECK lxvii
ROTARYLOBE 7-25 PRESSURE lxix
Vertical Tanks (VT) SHAKER lxx
SAN-TANK 10-39 SIFTER-1 lxvii
Sanitary ribbon blender SCREW
Mixers (MX) 2-34, 2-35 Conveyors (CO) xiii
Sanitary rotary bowl blender Screw heater
Blenders (BL) 2-27 one screw thermascrew 5-16
Sanitary screw feeder two screw thermascrew 5-16
SAN-SCREW xxiv Scroll conveyor
Centrifuges (CT) xxxvii molecular, packing materials 28-
Scroll discharge centrifugal filter 77
Filters (F) l, lii Sieve trays 8-3
SCROLL-CON SIFTER-1
Centrifuges (CT) xxxvii Screens (VS) lxvii
SEALCOAT SIGMA
site development 25-15 Mixers (MX) 2-31
Sediment Removal 1-23 SIGNAL
SEEDING railroads - site development 25-
landscaping - site development 20
25-13 Signal wire
Seismic data 19-16 instrumentation plant bulks 21-4
SELF-SUPP Silencers
Flares (FLR) lxxxiv, lxxxvii CYLINDER, Vertical Tanks (VT)
Sensor loop descriptions 10-13, 10-39
pressure 21-10 Silica gel
Separation Equipment (SE) 1-23 packing materials 28-77
OIL-WATER lxiv SIMPLEX
PULP STOCK lxii Piston, Other Positive
Septic tank Displacement Pumps (P) 7-21
drainage - site development 25-5 SINGLE 1-S
SEPTIC-TNK Air Compressors (AC) 3-4
drainage - site development 25-5 SINGLE 2 S
SEWAGE Air Compressors (AC) 3-4
Filters (F) l SINGLE ATM
Sewage filter Drum Dryers (DD) 12-14
Filters (F) l Single Diameter Towers (TW) 1-12
SHAKER PACKED 8-15
Screens (VS) lxx TRAYED 8-17
Shaker type filters Single roll crushers
Dust Collectors (DC) xl Crushers (CR) 11-4
SHEAR HOM SINGLE STG
Mixers (MX) 2-37 Ejectors (EJ) 9-3
Shell and head design SINGLE VAC
towers 8-6 Drum Dryers (DD) 12-15
SHELL+TUBE Site/office equipment
Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-16 construction equipment 32-50
SHORING SITE-EXCVN
earthwork - site development earthwork - site development
25-9 25-10
SIDEWALKS Skirts
site development 25-15 towers 8-5
SIDING Slurry
railroads - site development 25- standard equations for pipe
20 diameters 18-43
steel plant bulks 20-21 SLURRY
Siding and roofing Piston, Other Positive
steel plant bulks 20-21 Displacement Pumps (P) 7-23
SIDING-HVY Snubbers
railroads - site development 25- CYLINDER, Vertical Tanks (VT)
20 10-13
Sieve SODDING
22 Index
landscaping - site development SRST 21-6
25-13 STABILIZE
Softeners earthwork - site development
demineralizers lxxx 25-8
packed towers 8-8, 8-15 STACK
water softening systems lxxx Stacks (STK) xci
SOFTENING Stacks (STK) 1-25
Water Treatment Systems (WTS) height calculation lxxxiii
lxxx STACK xci
Softening treatment system thickness lxxxiv
Water Treatment Systems (WTS) Stainless steel
lxxx casting materials 28-74
Soil clad plate materials
site development BS 28-25
stabilization 25-8 DIN 28-50
sterilization 25-13 packing materials 28-77
Solar panel STAIR
electrical plant bulks 22-17 steel plant bulks 20-20
SOLAR-PANL Stairs
electrical plant bulks 22-17 steel plant bulks 20-20
SOLID BOWL Standard horizontal tube
Centrifuges (CT) xxxvii evaporator
Solvent extraction towers 8-3 Evaporators (E) 12-8
SPARKLER STAND-HOR
Filters (F) l Evaporators (E) 12-8
Spary Standpipe
chambers, washers (DC) xlv SPHOS 18-38
SPHERE STAND-VERT
Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-21 Evaporators (E) 12-7
SPHEROID Start-up
Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-23 disciplines and wage rates
Spheroids JP 31-21
hemispheriod 10-23 US 31-15, 31-23
hortonspheriod 10-23 STATIC
SPHOS 18-38, 18-39 Mixers (MX) 2-32
SPIRAL PLT Station
Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-17 potential measurement test
SPIRAL RIB electrical plant bulks 22-16
Mixers (MX) 2-32 STATIONARY
Spiral ribbon mixer Kneaders (K) 2-29
SPIRAL RIB Steam
Mixers (MX) 2-32 plant, Water Treatment Systems
SPRAY (WTS) lxxx
Dryers (D) 12-12 standard equations for piping
Sprinkler system diameters 18-44
SPRNK 17-3, 18-35 Steam Boilers (STB) 1-24
S-ROLL-HVY BOILER lxxv
Crushers (CR) 11-5 field erected lxxv
S-ROLL-LT packaged boiler lxxv
Crushers (CR) 11-4 STM BOILER lxxv
S-ROLL-MED Steam turbine 4-8
Crushers (CR) 11-5 Steel
SRSC 21-6 boxes 20-21
casting materials 28-74 SUBDRAIN
chutes 20-21 drainage - site development 25-5
columns, beams, bracing 20-2, SUBPAVING
20-21 site development 25-15
elevated access platforms 20-18 SUBSTN STL 22-28
fabricated plate items 20-21 SUC-HEATER
fireproofing for existing stuctural Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-17
steel 23-2 Summary reports
gallery structure 20-19 code of accounts 34-10
grate 20-20 Sump pit
ladders 20-20 drainage - site development 25-5
mill building 20-17 SUMP-PIT
open structure 20-2 drainage - site development 25-5
pipe rack 20-5 SURF-ANODE
siding and roofing 20-21 electrical plant bulks 22-16
stairs 20-20 Swing jaw crusher
transfer tower 20-20 Crushers (CR) 11-4
STEEL-H Switch board 22-29
piling - site development 25-19 Symbol
STERILIZE process equipment 1-3
landscaping - site development SYNCHRON
25-13 Electrical Motors (MOT) 4-2
STM BOILER Synchronous motors 4-3
Steam Boilers (STB) lxxv
Stock pumps T
high density 7-24
low consistency 7-15 Tank containment
Stock Treatment (ST) 1-16 civil 19-5
DEFLAKE-DK 11-13 TAR-CHIP
REFINER 11-13 site development 25-15
Stone Taxes and permits
packing materials 28-76 code of accounts 34-13, 35-50
Stoneware TC 21-8
packing materials 28-77 TC16 21-6
STOPS TEFC (totally-enclosed fan-cooled)
railraods - site development 25- Electrical Motors (MOT) 4-3
20 Teflon
STORAGE lined steel pipe 18-60
Flares (FLR) xc Teflon sheet lining 28-73
Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-25 Telescoping gas holder
Stripping towers 8-3 Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-29
STRIP-SOIL Tellerettes H.D. 28-77
earthwork - site development TEMA-EXCH
25-10 Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-2
STRUC-EXC Temperature swing adsorbtion unit
earthwork - site development 8-23
25-10 Test borings
Structure earthwork - site development
open, steel plant bulks 20-2 25-7
Structured Cabling for Buildings Test station
22-25 electrical plant bulks 22-16
Structures TEWAC (totally enclosed water
civil plant bulks 19-3 cooled)
24 Index
Electrical Motors (MOT) 4-3 extraction 8-3
generated for API 610 pump 7-3 fractionator 8-2
THCPL-WIRE functions 8-5
instrumentation plant bulks 21-5 hemispherical 8-5
Thermascrew (Rietz) singel screw internals 8-3
(HE) 5-16 manholes 8-5
Thermocouple materials of construction 8-6
instrumentation plant bulks 21-8 nozzles 8-5
Thermocouple wire packings 8-4
instrumentation plant bulks 21-5 shell and head design 8-6
THERMOSIPH sieve trays 8-4
Reboilers (RB) 5-32 skirt 8-5
Thermosiphon reboilers solvent extraction 8-3
Reboilers (RB) 5-32 stripping 8-3
THICKENER torispherical 8-5
Thickeners (T) lxv trays 8-3
Thickeners (T) 1-23 TRACE CNTR 22-20
THICKENER lxv TRACE PANL 22-20
THIN FILM Tracing
Wiped Film Evaporators (WFE) existing equipment 22-10
12-9 existing piping run 22-10
THRM-OX LC piping plant bulks 18-21
Flares (FLR) lxxxix Track scale
Tile Chests Scales (S) xxviii
Vertical Tanks (VT) 10-34 Track yard siding
TILTING railroads - site development 25-
Kneaders (K) 2-29 20
Titanium Trailer
plate materials construction equipment 32-38
BS 28-24 Transfer lines
DIN 28-49 piping plant bulks 18-3
tube materials Transfer tower
ASME 28-17 steel plant bulks 20-20
DIN 28-55 TRANSFORM 22-27
JIS 28-42 Transformer/rectifier
TOP UNLOAD electrical plant bulks 22-17
Centrifuges (CT) xxxv Transmission line
TOPSOIL overhead - electrical plant bulks
landscaping - site development 17-6, 22-29, 22-30
25-13 Travelling bridge crane
Torispherical towers 8-5 Cranes (CE) xix
Towers Tray
absorption 8-3 cable, electrical plant bulks 22-9
adsorption 8-3 Tray Drying Systems (TDS) 1-18
applications 8-2 ATM-SYSTEM 12-19
appurtenances 8-5 batch tray 12-19
convey transfer, steel plant bulks TURBO 12-19
20-20 turbo drying system 12-19
description of 8-5 VAC-SYSTEM 12-20
desorption 8-3 VACUUM 12-19
distillation 8-2 TRAYED
ellipsoidal 8-5 Double Diameter Towers (DDT)
elliptical 8-5 8-10
Single Diameter Towers (TW) 8- U
17
UBC Zone
Trays
seismic data 19-16
tower internals 8-3
Underground cable duct 22-17
TRENCH
Unit cost library 27-4
civil plant bulks 19-4
UPS
TRENCH-EXC
earthwork - site development
UTIL PIPE
25-10
Piping plant bulks 18-14
Trenching
Utility headers
civil 19-4
piping 18-14, 18-50
TRIPLEX
Utility station drop length 18-15
Piston, Other Positive
U-TUBE
Displacment Pumps (P) 7-22
Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-34
TRNS-TOWER
Reboilers (RB) 5-33
Reboilers (RB) - continued. 5-33
Truck
Truck scale V
Scales (S) xxviii VAC-SYSTEM
Tube materials Tray Drying Systems (TDS) 12-
DIN 20
non-ferrous 28-54 VAC-TRAY
Tubular Dryers (D) 12-11
exchangers (HE) 5-22 VACUUM
TUBULAR Rotary Dryers (RD) 12-17
Filters (F) li Tray Drying Systems (TDS) 12-
Turbines (TUR) 1-8 19
CONDENSING 4-8 Vacuum Pumps (VP) 1-13
GAS 4-9 MECHANICAL 9-7
NON-COND 4-8 MECH-BOOST 9-7
non-condensing 4-8 WATER-SEAL 9-7
steam turbine 4-8 Vacuum tray batch dryer
TURBO Dryers (D) 12-11
Tray Drying Systems (TDS) 12- Valve trays 8-3
19 VANEAXIAL
Turbo drying system Fans, Blowers (FN) 3-14
Tray Drying Systems (TDS) 12- Vaneaxial fan
19 Fans, Blowers (FN) 3-14
TURBOEXPANDER 4-9 Vapor control flare
TURBO-GEN Flares (FLR) xc
Electrical Generators (EG) lxxviii VARY-SPEED
TURNOUT Electrical Motors (MOT) 4-4
railroads - site development 25- VENTURI SC
20 Dust Collectors (DC) xliv
TWO SCREW VERTICAL
Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-16 Furnaces, Process Heaters (FU)
TWO STAGE 5-40
Ejectors (EJ) 9-3 Vertical Tanks (VT) 1-14
TWO-ROLL CHEST-CYL 10-36
Mixers (MX) 2-33 CHEST-MTL 10-37
CHEST-REC 10-33
cone bottom 10-30
26 Index
CONE BTM 10-30 Feeders (FE) xxii
cone roof (storage) 10-24 Volumetric belt feeder
CRYOGENIC 10-27 Feeders (FE) xxi
CYLINDER 10-13
flat roof (storage) 10-26 W
floating roof (storage) 10-24
GAS HOLDER 10-29 Walkways, gallery 20-20
high pressure gas/liquid storage Wall, free standing
10-21 fencing - site development 25-11
JACKETED 10-16 WASHERS
lifter roof (storage) 10-24 Dust Collectors (DC) xlv
LIVE BTM 10-32, 10-33 WASTE HEAT
MULTI WALL 10-19 Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-18
near-atmospheric liquid Water heater
storage 10-25 Heat Exchangers (HE) 5-19
open top (storage) 10-25 Water supply well, cased
PLAST TANK 10-28 drainage - site development 25-6
pressure/vacuum service 10-13 Water Treatment Systems (WTS)
SAN-TANK 10-39 1-24
SPHERE 10-21 AERATOR lxxx
SPHEROID 10-23 DEMINERAL lxxx
STORAGE 10-25 SOFTENING lxxx
telescoping gas holder 10-29 WATER-SEAL
tile chests 10-34 Vacuum Pumps (VP) 9-7
WOOD TANK 10-29 Water-sealed vacuum pump 9-7
wooden (storage) 10-29 WATER-WELL
Vessel base drainage - site development 25-6
design code Weight belt
ASME 28-11 sanitary xxv
BS 28-25 Welding equipment
JIS 28-38 construction equipment 32-43,
Vessels 32-44
agitated open tanks WELL HEAD
Agitated Tanks (AT) 2-13 piping plant bulks 18-34, 18-35,
demineralizers (WTS) lxxx 18-37, 18-38, 18-39
pressure WELLPOINTS
Agitated Tanks (AT) 2-10 drainage - site development 25-6
sphere, Vertical Tanks (VT) 10- WELLS
21 drainage - site development 25-6
spheroid, Vertical Tanks (VT) 10- WFE-SYSTEM
23 Wiped Film Evaporators (WFE)
tray or packed towers 8-8, 8-10, 12-9
8-15, 8-17 WHITEWATER
vacuum Filters (F) lii
Agitated Tanks (AT) 2-10 Wiped Film Evaporators (WFE) 1-
Vessels Multiple Diameter Trayed 17
or Packed 8-26 agitated thin film evaporator 12-
VIBRATING 9
Conveyors (CO) xiv THIN FILM 12-9
Feeders (FE) xxii WFE-SYSTEM 12-9
Vibrating conveyor Wire mesh fencing
Conveyors (CO) xiv fencing - site development 25-12
Vibrating feeder WOOD
piling - site development 25-19
WOOD TANK
WSHWR 18-38, 18-39
Z
Zinc
coating - lining 28-73
linings 6-7
28 Index

AspenIcarusV10 1 Ref

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

AspenIcarusV10 1 Ref

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Aspen Icarus Reference Guide

Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE)

Aspen Technology, Inc.

Aspen Technology’s Icarus Office develops and provides knowledge-based

Aspen Icarus Reference Guide iii

iv Aspen Icarus Reference Guide

Aspen Icarus Reference Guide v

Support Centers Hours of Operation

North America 8:00 - 20:00 Eastern time

South America 9:00 - 17:00 Local time

Europe 8:30 - 18:00 Central Europe time

Asia and Pacific Region 9:00 - 17:30 Local time

vi Aspen Icarus Reference Guide

This chapter contains information on the following topics:

1 Introduction to Process Equipment 1-1

1-2 1 Introduction to Process Equipment

AC Air Compressor HE Heat Exchanger

AD Air Dryer HO Hoist

AG Agitator HT Horizontal Tank

AT Agitated Tanks HU Heating Unit

C Condenser LIN Lining

CO Conveyor MOT Motor/Motor Reducer

CP Centrifugal Pump MX Mixer

CRY Crystallizer PAK Packing

CTW Cooling Tower RB Reboiler

D Dryer RD Rotary Drum

DC Dust Collector RU Refrigeration Unit

DD Drum Dryer S Scale

DDT Double Diameter Tower SE Separation Equipment

E Evaporator ST Stock Treatment

EG Electric Generator STB Steam Boiler

EJ Ejector STK Stack

F Filter TDS Tray Drying System

FE Feeder TUR Turbine

FL Flaker TW Single Diameter Tower

FLR Flare VP Vacuum Pump

1 Introduction to Process Equipment 1-3

FU Furnace VT Vertical Tank

GC Gas Compressor WFE Wiped Film Evaporator

GP Gear Pump WTS Water Treatment System

1-4 1 Introduction to Process Equipment

FIXED PROP Fixed propeller gear motor type agitator

PORT PROP Portable propeller agitator

DIRECT Portable direct drive agitator

GEAR DRIVE Portable gear drive agitator

MECH SEAL Agitator, mechanical seal, variable diameter

ANCHOR Fixed mount, gear drive, anchor, stuffing box

PULP STOCK Pulp stock agitator

ANCHOR REV Sanitary reversing anchor agitator

COUNT ROT Sanitary counter-rotating agitator

HIGH SHEAR Sanitary highshear homogenizing agitator

SAN FIXED Sanitary fixed propeller/turbine mixer

SAN PORT Sanitary port. propeller/turbine mixer

Agitated Tanks (AT)

MIXER Agitated tank - enclosed

REACTOR Agitated tank - enclosed, jacketed

OPEN TOP Agitated tank - open top

FLOAT CELL Floatation machine

COND CELL Floatation conditioning cell

MACH PULP On machine pulper

OFF MACH Off machine pulper

1 Introduction to Process Equipment 1-5

BLENDER Rotary drum blender

ROTARY Rotary double-cone blender